JP6492360B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and an enclosed game machine.

  A game console equipped with a movable body capable of movement has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game console has room for improvement of the movable body.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by a movable body.

According to the invention
The first movable body,
The second movable body,
First detection means,
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position,
The first operation is an operation that does not include an operation of moving the first movable body away from the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation,
The third operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
At the start of the special symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as. "First timing") if it is different from the detection state to the detection state of the detection state of the first said first detecting means, the second after the according to one of the movable member the first operation is performed, said by the first movable member third operation is not performed, the second operation by the second movable member is performed,
A game stand characterized by the above is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body.

The external appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back side. The schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a block diagram of the game console. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a liquid crystal control part performs. (B) Flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of liquid crystal control unit. (C) Flow chart of liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt processing. (D) Flow chart of VDP image control processing. Explanatory drawing of the movable body provided in the front frame door. The disassembled perspective view of the permeation | transmission part unit 700, and the perspective view of the drive unit. The disassembled perspective view of a drive unit. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a drive unit. An explanatory view of the chance button. An explanatory view of the chance button. Explanatory drawing of a display body. Explanatory drawing of control data. The figure which shows the operation example of the permeation | transmission part unit. The figure which shows the operation example of the permeation | transmission part unit. The figure which shows the operation example of the permeation | transmission part unit. The figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. The figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. The figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 1st sub control part performs. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 1st sub control part performs. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 1st sub control part performs. The schematic front view of a game board of another example. The disassembled perspective view of a part of structure of the game board of FIG. The XX sectional view of FIG. Explanatory drawing of a clearance gap. The figure which shows the aspect at the time of transportation etc. Explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. Explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. Explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. Explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. Explanatory drawing of a light emission unit. Explanatory drawing of a movable body. Explanatory drawing of a shielding apparatus. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Explanatory drawing of the operation | movement order of a movable body. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 2nd sub control part performs. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 2nd sub control part performs. The flowchart of the example of processing which a 2nd sub control part performs. Explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. The schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit 500. (A) The flowchart which shows the flow of movable body control processing. (B) A flowchart showing the flow of movable body interrupt processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of the door side production movable body control processing which is executed with 2nd sub control section 500. The flowchart which shows the flow of the door side effect movable body control processing at the time of the power source switching which is performed by the 2nd sub control part 500. The figure which shows gradually a mode that the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponded to one Embodiment of this invention is opened. FIG. 74 is a view showing in stages the manner in which the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a view showing in stages the manner in which the front frame door 106 is opened in the second modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a view progressively showing a state in which the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a view showing a modified example of the power on operation described with reference to FIG. 76; In the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75, a diagram showing a state where power interruption / power recovery is instantaneously performed while the door side effect movable body is in operation. (A) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position. (B) Side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the operation completion position. (C) A side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. The figure which extracted and showed only lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in each state of (d)-(f) (a)-(c). (A) The external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball | storage tank when the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (B) An external appearance perspective view of a periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage plate in a state (during operation) in which the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completed position. (C) An external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. The figure which showed an example of the correspondence of the operation state of the chance button 700, the decision | availability of the detection result of pressing-down operation of the chance button 700, and the execution decision | availability of operation reception production. (A) The external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball | storage tank when the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (B) An external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage plate when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. (C) An external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage plate, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure). (D) The figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (E) The figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 700 is in an operation completion position. (F) The figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (A) The external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation | movement. (B) The external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after completion | finish of operation | movement. The front view which looked at the chance button 750 from the direction of 2nd operation part 758. FIG. (A) A side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) A side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the operation completed position. (C) A side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure). (D) A diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (E) The figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (F) The figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 stops between an initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state in which a front door 102 is opened. The circuit block diagram of the control part of the same slot machine. The flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (A) The flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit 500. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) The external appearance perspective view of a bet button 132 periphery in case the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (B) The external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 periphery in the state (in operation) which the bet button 132 has moved to the operation completion position from the initial position. (C) An external appearance perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position. (A) A diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. (B) A diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can not be used as a medal insertion button. (C) An external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) A diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (A) An external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (B) An external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) An external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). (D) A diagram showing an example of a normal effect. (E) A diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position. (G) A diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position (for example, when it is broken). The figure which showed an example of various effects. The external appearance perspective view which looked at a mode that each inner frame 104 and the front door 105 were open of the pachinko machine 100 which is one embodiment of the first invention from the front side (player side). FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 97; The figure which shows a mode that the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open. While the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102, the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104, and the power switch 178 is operated to turn on the power. Figure showing. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 in stages. The figure which shows an example in case the simultaneous power-on by island installation is performed step by step. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 in stages. The figure which shows an example in case an inner frame 104 is open | released during production operation in steps. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 in stages. The figure which shows the 1st modification of the example shown to FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 in steps. FIG. 105 is a view gradually showing a second modified example of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The second modified example shown in FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example in which a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body continuing the operation according to the effect data and the effect movable body whose operation is prohibited are switched. . The figure which shows gradually an example when a door is open | released in the state which has a production | presentation movable body in the position shifted from the initial position by external force. The figure which shows in an example the case where the inner frame 104 is open | released during presentation operation | movement in a movable body different from what was demonstrated so far as the door side presentation movable body 2241 in steps. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 in stages. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the modification of the example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 step by step. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112. It is a table that summarizes major errors other than door open errors. The figure which shows gradually an example when the 2nd error has generate | occur | produced during presentation operation. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 in stages. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 in stages. Fig. 117 shows the continuation of the example shown in Fig. 117 in stages. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 in stages. The figure which shows gradually the example which prohibits the operation | movement according to the rendering data of the door side presentation movable body 2241, even if error generation | occurrence | production timing is before operation start timing. The figure which shows the example at the time of power-off during confirmation operation | movement, and an electric power recovery instantly, in steps. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 step by step. The figure which shows the modification of board side presentation movable body 2242. FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration symbol, (c) The figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of a common figure. The flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st The flow of secondary control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. FIG. 17 is a schematic front view showing the state (No. 1) in which the effect movable body 224 has moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the gaming board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a schematic front view showing the state (No. 2) in which the effect movable body 224 has moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the gaming board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The appearance perspective view which looked at the movable thing unit of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. The appearance perspective view which looked at the movable thing unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. The disassembled perspective view of the movable-object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The appearance perspective view which looked at the movable thing unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. The front view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The external appearance perspective view which looked at the production | generation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. The rear view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The external appearance perspective view which looked at the production | generation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. The back view and fragmentary sectional view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the performance movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the performance movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the performance movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the performance movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 1) by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 2) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 3) by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 4) by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 5) by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the presentation example (the 6) by the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 17 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of embodiment from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 165 from the back side. The front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) and a figure showing an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) and (c) showing an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) showing an example of a stop display figure of a common figure . The flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit, (c) is a timer variable update interrupt of the first sub-control unit The flowchart of a process, (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, (c) is a timer interrupt of the second sub-control unit Processing flowchart. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the example of lottery data. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the example of lottery data, (d) and (e) is a figure which shows the example of a setting of opening-and-closing conditions. The figure which shows the example of lottery data. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the example of lottery data. The figure which shows the example of progress of a game. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rendering device, (b) is a rear view of the rendering device. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. (A)-(e) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a presentation apparatus. (A)-(d) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a presentation apparatus. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of a ball entering unit, (b) is a perspective view of a ball entering unit. (A) is a partial disassembled perspective view of a ball entering unit, (b) and (c) is an explanatory view of an opening and closing member. (A) is a front view of a ball entry unit, (b) and (c) is an AA line sectional view of Drawing 190 (a). (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the clearance gap in a closed state. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of a contact part. (A) is explanatory drawing of ball biting, (b) and (c) is explanatory drawing of a convex part. (A) is explanatory drawing of the attachment structure of a ball insertion unit, (b) is a rear view in the state which removed the ball insertion unit, (c) is explanatory drawing of a rib. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. (A) And (b) is a disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus, (c) is explanatory drawing of a flexible harness. (A)-(f) operation | movement explanatory drawing of a presentation apparatus. (A) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a presentation apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing of a flexible harness, (c) is explanatory drawing of a flexible harness and a board | substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing of a flexible harness and guide structure, (b)-(e) is a figure which shows the example of a shape of an entrance and an exit. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of the example of a guidance structure of a flexible harness. Explanatory drawing of the arrangement structure of a vibration sensor. (A) is a perspective view of a rail member, (b) is CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the delivery apparatus 152 and the ball | bowl passage unit 153, and a front view. (A) is a right view of the ball | bowl passage unit 153, (b) is the DD sectional view taken on the line of Fig.204 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball | bowl passage unit 153, (b) is the EE sectional view taken on the line of Fig.205 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball | bowl passage unit 153, (b) is the EE sectional view taken on the line of Fig.206 (a). (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the passage of a game ball. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing of the arrangement structure of a light emitting element. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. The disassembled perspective view of a presentation apparatus. (A) And (b) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable unit, (c) and (d) is a rear view of a presentation apparatus. (A)-(e) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine of the embodiment. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of an information display button unit. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram of another example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of another example. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of embodiment from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 217 from the back side. The front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) is a figure which showed an example of a decoration symbol, (c) the figure which showed an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. The flowchart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. The flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit, (c) is a timer variable update interrupt of the first sub-control unit The flowchart of a process, (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, (c) is a timer interrupt of the second sub-control unit Processing flowchart. The front view which shows the example of a game board. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary perspective view of the game board of FIG. The disassembled perspective view of a display apparatus. (A) is a front view of a rail member, (b) is a rear view thereof. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a rail member. (A) is a front view of a display unit, (b) is a rear view thereof. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a display unit. (A) is a front view of a fixing member, (b) is a rear view thereof. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a fixing member. (A) is a front view of a sheet, (b) is a rear view thereof. (A) is explanatory drawing of a sheet | seat, (b) is a front view of the sheet | seat of another example. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. The schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100, and (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2, (b) shows an example of the decoration symbol, (c) The figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing of the pachinko machine 100. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine 100. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. A flow of processing is shown, (c) shows a flow of first secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows the flow of 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. A flow of processing is shown, and (c) shows a flow of second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100. The external view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. The appearance figure which removed the character unit 820 from the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100, and was seen from the back side. The perspective view which looked at ball passage unit 700 used with pachinko machine 100 from the back side (back side). The perspective view which looked at ball passage unit 700 used with pachinko machine 100 from the back side (back side). The rear view which looked at ball passage unit 700 used with pachinko machine 100 from the back side (back side). FIG. 8 is an external view of the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 820 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a logo symbol 900 of the pachinko machine 100. The external appearance which looked at logo character 900 of pachinko machine 100 from the front side. The external appearance which looked at the logo role thing 900 of the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. The upper front decoration character 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 disassembled perspective view. The disassembled perspective view of the upper front ornament character 1000 and the upper back ornament character 1100 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of an upper front movable body 1002 of an upper front decoration character 1000 of the pachinko machine 100. The external appearance view which looked at the top front decoration character 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front side. The external appearance view which looked at the top front decoration character 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front side. The disassembled perspective view of the upper back decoration character 1100 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the upper rear movable body 1102 of the upper rear decoration character 1100 of the pachinko machine 100; The external appearance view which looked at the top back decoration character 1100 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front side. The disassembled perspective view of a part of upper right side character 1200 and lower right side character 1400 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. The disassembled perspective view of other parts of the lower right side character 1400 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. The external view which looked at the upper right side character 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front side, and the external appearance which looked at the upper right side character 1200 from the back side. The external view which looked at the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side character 1200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. The external view which looked at the lower right side role thing 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 from the right side. The external appearance perspective view which looked at the lower right side character 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The external appearance perspective view which looked at the lower right side character 1400 of the pachinko machine 100 from back. The figure which shows the modification of the induction | guidance | derivation part 1452 of the lower right side character 1400 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of a central lower character 1600 of the pachinko machine 100. The external view which looked at the center sub character 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 from the right side. The figure which shows the presentation example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 (the 1). The figure which shows the presentation example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 (the 2). The figure which shows the presentation example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 (the 3). FIG. 6 shows an effect example 2 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 10 shows an effect example 3 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 10 shows an effect example 4 of the pachinko machine 100. The figure which shows the example of presentation using the movable body of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of the slot machine 2000 as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 shows an information display button 2046 of the slot machine 2000.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described using the drawings. The present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles such as pachinko machines and slot machines. The pachinko machine may be an enclosed type pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere to circulate in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

  The following embodiments are roughly divided into six embodiments of the embodiments A to F, but the embodiments, the examples included in the embodiments, the modifications, etc. can be appropriately combined with each other is there. In addition, the code | symbol which shows each structure is uniformly used only in the embodiment A, B, C, D, E or F. Therefore, for example, in Embodiment B, the same code as in Embodiment A may be used as a code indicating another configuration.

Embodiment A
<Overall configuration>
First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a game stand lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit 142, a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit, and a button unit 190. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes therein a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 The balls are paid out to the player by the configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main control board case 158 for storing a main control board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-control board 160 that configures the first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing related to the second sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to rendering based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 1st sub control board case 162 which houses the 2nd sub control board 164 which is done, the liquid crystal control board case 682 which houses the liquid crystal control board 680 which forms the liquid crystal control unit 700 which controls liquid crystal A payout control board 170 which constitutes a payout control unit 600 which performs control processing and is provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk A payout control board case 172 for storing, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 constituting a launch control section 630 which performs control processing on the launch of gaming balls, and a power management section 660 for supplying power to various electric gaming machines. A power supply board housing a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 configured to turn on and off the power by operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. A case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided. The CR interface unit 186 includes, for example, a CR unit connection unit configured by a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector, and transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via this. There is.

  The pachinko machine 100 further includes a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the rear side. The relay substrate 196 is used for the electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when replacing the game board 200, the game board 200 is exchanged with the main body 104 and the hall computer connected via the relay substrate 196. Ru. However, since it is necessary to change the type of signal to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer depending on the model, the pachinko machine 100 starts the relay board 196 from the front (front side) side of the pachinko machine 100 when the gaming board 200 is removed. It may be configured to be able to grasp the connection status of.

  Further, a sound volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the sound volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided on the upper left of the first auxiliary control substrate case 162 in the drawing. The volume adjustment switch 192 is configured of, for example, a rotary switch.

  As described above, the main control board 156, the first sub control board 160, the second sub control board 164, and the liquid crystal control board 680 are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model. A launch substrate 174 and a power supply substrate 182 are provided on the outer frame 102 so as to be commonly used in a plurality of models.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a movable display device 288 are disposed substantially at the center, and around that, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special A symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The movable display device 288 is also a display device for performing various displays used for rendering, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device in this embodiment, but, like the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a dot matrix display device 7 Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The movable display device 288 includes a motor (not shown), and is configured to be vertically movable by the motor, and when lowered, covers at least a part of the front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the effect movable body 224, and the movable display device 288.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The movable display device 288 is used to display effects and is movable. Therefore, in the following description, as a display device, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as a first display device (main liquid crystal display device), and the movable display device 288 may be referred to as a second display device (sub liquid crystal display device). . In addition, there may be a case where it is referred to as a (presentation) movable body together with the shielding device 246 and the effect movable body 224 which imitates a human arm.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central portion of the game and various devices according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the first sub-control unit 400 to control, the second sub-control unit 500 mainly controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100, a liquid crystal control unit 700 And consists of.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, a counter circuit (random number value generation circuit) 318 (random number value generation circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received in the basic circuit 302. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 A predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214; A pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a common view hold lamp 216, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high accuracy lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 or a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game stand lamp 122 etc.) A circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 246, a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 for detecting depression of the chance button 136 and depression of the button unit 190, various sensors 430 and button detection And a sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402. The effect movable body 246 may include a movable body (movable body) provided on the front frame door 106 side, a movable portion of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, and the like.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246 or the like, and an effect movable body A sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a basic circuit 502 and a game board lamp drive circuit 530 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication. The effect movable body 224 may include a movable object (movable body) or the like provided on the game board 200.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Liquid crystal control unit>
Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data based on the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. The ROM 708 for controlling the whole of the liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 for storing data for image display, etc., and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710 are provided. The CPU 704 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

  The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714 B as a system clock, reads image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses a work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

<Block diagram of game console>
The connection relationship of each substrate (control substrate) etc. of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows each (control) substrate etc. constituting the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the payout control unit 600, the liquid crystal control unit 700 etc., a display device, a movable body and the like. Is a block diagram showing a connection relationship with

  The pachinko machine 100 is the game board 200 side, the main control board 156 the board surface board 200b, the first sub control board 160, the symbol display board 212, 214, 210, 328, the special figure 1 start port sensor 230, the special figure 2 start The mouth sensor 232 is connected. The valve surface relay substrate 200a is connected to the board substrate 200b. Various sensors 320 and respective solenoids 332 are connected to the board relay substrate 200a. Thus, it is detected by the ball detection sensor that the game ball has entered the general winning opening (winning opening) 226, the common view starting opening (gate) 228, the first special view starting opening 230 and the second starting opening 232. In this case, the switch signal is transmitted to the main control unit 300. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening / closing the second special view start opening (normal motor combination) 232 is transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. Also, solenoid signals for opening and closing the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (big winning opening) are transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. Further, from the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening), a count signal for counting the number of entering balls is transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Further, a liquid crystal control substrate 680 is connected to the first sub control substrate 160, and a decorative symbol display device (main liquid crystal display device) 208 and a movable display device (sub liquid crystal display device) 288 are connected to the liquid crystal control substrate 680. . Further, a second sub control substrate 164 is connected to the first sub control substrate 160, and a sub liquid crystal movable portion 2241 (a movable portion of the movable display device 288) and a movable object M on the panel side are connected to the second sub control substrate 164. (The effect movable body 244, the shielding device 246, and the like) and the board-side illumination board 200c on which the game board lamp 532 is mounted are connected.

  As a result, the first sub control substrate 160 performs control according to the command of the main control substrate 156, and the liquid crystal control substrate 680 and the second sub control substrate 164 perform control according to the command of the first sub control substrate 160. Specifically, the processing information (command signal) generated by the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the processing information or the processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 is the liquid crystal control unit. 700 and to the second sub control unit 500. For example, data for driving the effect movable body 224, data for illumination light emission of the effect movable body 224, data for driving the movable display device 288, etc. are transmitted from the first sub control board 160 to the second sub control board 164. Ru. Further, data or a clock signal for emitting light on the game board 200 side is transmitted from the drive circuit 516 of the second sub control unit 500 to the board side illumination board 724. Further, signals for display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, and the various state display unit 328 are transmitted from the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Further, control data of the first sub control substrate 160 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control substrate 680, and image data is transmitted to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an inner frame relay board 104b, an inner frame peripheral board 104c, and a panel frame relay board 104d on the main body 104 side, and relays the board on the game board 200 side and the board on the main body 104 side. Connecting.

  The inner frame relay board 104 b connects the main control board 156 and the payout control board 170. As a result, a command signal (for example, the number of payouts and information for communicating with the external terminal board 104 a) regarding, for example, the payout control is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits the main control unit 300. Error information etc. of the discharge system is sent to the In addition, the inner frame peripheral substrate 104c connects the first sub control substrate 160 and the power supply substrate 104e, and the panel frame relay substrate 104d includes the button 136 provided on the first sub control substrate 160 and the front frame door 106 for buttons The door-side lighting board 106b on which the various lamps 138 and 418, the door-side movable part 106a, the various lamps 418 are mounted, and the speaker 120 are connected via the door-side lighting board 106b. The button 136 may include a chance button or the like. The door-side movable part 106a may include a movable object (movable object) provided on the front frame door 106 side.

  As a result, data and clock signals for causing the various lamps 418 to emit light are transmitted from the drive circuit 420 of the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the door side illumination board 106 b. Further, audio data is transmitted from the sound source IC 416 to the speaker 120. Further, detection results of the button detection sensor 426 and the like by the operation of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190 are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The payout control substrate 170 is connected to the payout sensor 604, the payout motor 602, the glass frame switch 104g, the inner frame switch 104f, the game ball lending device connection substrate 104h, the power supply substrate 104e, and the launch control substrate 104j. The opening and closing of the front frame door 106 and the opening and closing of the inner frame (main body 104) are detected by the glass frame switch 104g and the inner frame switch 104f, and can be recognized by the main control board 156. The emission control substrate 104 j is connected to the glass frame relay substrate 104 k. The glass frame relay substrate 104k is connected to the handle relay substrate 106d, the full tank switch 106g, and the frequency display substrate 106h. A launch volume 106c, a launch stop switch 106f, and a touch sensor 106e are connected to the launch handle substrate 106d.

<Type of symbol>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 stop display of the pachinko machine 100. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display, and the white parts in the figure turn off The locations of the segments to be displayed are indicated, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 6 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.6 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 7. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 7 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 have a winning, the RAM 308 stores the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, whether or not there is a winning to the first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common view starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235 judge. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 6 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 6 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 6A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, 普If the ratio fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the second variable winning opening 235 (the first variable winning opening 234 in the case of Special Figure 1) detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of game balls in the second variable winning opening 235 A door member 235a (in the case of the special view 1, the door member 234a) in the solenoid (332 in the case of the special view 1) of the solenoid (332 in the special view 1) of the door member 235a (the special view 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234). Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) In the case of the door member 235a (Special Figure 1), the solenoid (332) for the opening and closing drive of the door member 235a of the second variable prize hole 235 (in the case of Special Figure 1, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). And a signal for holding the door member 234a) in the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232 and the first variable winning port 234 (or the second variable winning port 235), or via the display circuits 324, 326, 330 The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. Moreover, initialization of each movable body is also performed, and the setting can be made into a first state.

  In step S303, it is determined whether the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area is 33 (33 ms) or more, and this process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33, and the value of the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. When it becomes, it transfers to the process of step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable CNT. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed to 33, 33, 34 at each transition from the process of step S303 to the process of step S305.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the command from the main control unit 300, the command from the second sub control unit 500, and the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 have been received.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Further, the effect lottery process is performed based on the command from the main control unit 300, and the setting process (described later) of the liquid crystal command and the box data for setting the part data to the predetermined position is performed. If parts data exists in the position after receiving a return command (described later), setting processing of parts data to be transmitted to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, effect movable bodies 246, 224, etc. is performed.

  In step S311, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. For example, when a notification condition is satisfied, an instruction is output so that the notification (for example, effect) by the speaker 120 is executed. In addition, when there is an establishment of an abnormality notification condition related to detection of a fraudulent act or a failure, an instruction is output so that notification by the speaker 120 (for example, notification to notify occurrence of an abnormality) is executed. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. For example, when the light emission conditions of the various lamps 418 are satisfied, an instruction for the light emission is output.

In step S319, when there is a command to the movable body in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. The movable body may include a shielding device 246, a movable body (rotary body) in the chance button 136, and may include another movable body described later. ,
In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 or a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed. , And return to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable Store in storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. The value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed to 33, 33, and 34 each time the process proceeds from step S703 to step S707.

  In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable CNT.

  In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 122 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the movable object M on the board side (the movable portion 2441 of the movable display device 288, the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, etc.) It outputs to the drive circuit 516, and returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S901 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second auxiliary control unit main process shown in FIG. Add and store in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

  In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Processing of Liquid Crystal Control Unit 700>
Next, processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700. The figure (d) is a flowchart of VDP image processing.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S1001 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S1001, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 708, and the like are performed. In step S1003, it is determined whether the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed to 33, 33, 34 at each transition from the process of step S1003 to the process of step S1005.

  In step S1005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable CNT.

  In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 or not.

  In step S1009, VDP command transmission processing is performed. For example, when an instruction to display an image is issued from the first sub control unit 400, a command is transmitted to the VDP 710 in order to cause the VDP 710 to perform image control processing.

  In step S1011, return command transmission processing is performed. When the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 or the movable display device 288 to display the requested image, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400, and returns to step S1003.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the liquid crystal control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 708.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described using FIG. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once in 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S1201 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 708 described in step S1003 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. The original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

  In step S1203 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, image control processing of the VDP 710 that has received a command in the VDP command transmission processing of step S1009 in the liquid crystal control unit main processing will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S1301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 718 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the movable display device 288. Next, the CPU 704 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the CGROM 716), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 718), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 710 based on the position information table, and then the image from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 7186 Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 710 transfers image data from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 718 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 710 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

  In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 710 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1305; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S1305, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 718 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 710 in step S1301, the CPU 704 information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 718, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 718 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S1307, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 710 to start drawing an image. The VDP 710 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 704.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 710 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1311, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S1311, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 and counts how many images of a scene are generated, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Other Configuration Example of Movable Body>
Next, an example of a movable body applicable to the pachinko machine 100 will be described. First, an example of a movable body applicable to a door such as the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray will be described, and then, an example of a movable body applicable to the game board 200 will be described. Further, the movable body mounted on the movable body will be described. In the drawings used for the following description, components corresponding to the components of the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

<Example of movable body applicable to door body>
The game stand shown in FIG. 12 (a) is provided with a front frame door 106, a front frame door 106 'replacing the door 108 with a ball storage plate, and a door 108' with a ball storage plate. The front frame door 106 'is provided with a transmitting unit 700' as a movable body. The transmitting unit 700 ′ is also a configuration that replaces the transparent plate member 118 described above. The ball storage plate-attached door 108 ′ is provided with a chance button 700 and a display body 900 as a movable body. The chance button 700 is an alternative to the chance button 136 described above.

  FIG. 12A shows the case where the transmission unit 700 ', the chance button 700 and the display body 900 are in the initial state, and these movable bodies are operable from this initial state. In the case of the present embodiment, the state of the movable body is based on the position of all or part of the movable body, and the initial state means that the position of the movable body is the initial position. Therefore, the initial state may be called an initial position. The movement of the movable body includes the case where the position of the whole changes, or the case where the position of the part changes. It may be said that the posture of the movable body changes that the position of the movable body changes.

  FIG. 12B shows a state in which the transmission unit 700 'has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the transmitting unit 700 'is movable between the initial position of FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum movement position of FIG. 12 (b). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the transmission unit 700 'is a rotation around the lower part thereof, and the transmission unit 700' has the initial position of FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum movement position of FIG. 12 (b). Posture changes between The transparent unit 700 'is provided at a position where the player can contact, and functions as a button (part of a switch) which can be operated by the player in the state of FIG. 12 (b).

  FIG. 12C shows a state where the chance button 700 has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the chance button 700 is movable between the initial position of FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum movement position of FIG. 12 (c). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the chance button 700 is a movement in the vertical direction. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can contact, and in the present embodiment, it functions as a button (part of a switch) that can be operated by the player.

  FIG. 12D shows a state in which the display body 900 has moved to the maximum movement position. In the present embodiment, the display body 900 is movable between the initial position of FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum movement position of FIG. 12 (d). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the display body 900 is rotation. The display body 900 is provided at a position where the player can not make contact.

<Transparent unit 700 '>
The transmitting unit 700 ′ will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission unit 700 ′ and a perspective view of a drive unit 830 ′ of the transmission unit 700 ′. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the drive unit 830 '. FIG. 15 is an operation explanatory view of the drive unit 830 '.

  The transmitting unit 700 ′ includes a transmitting unit 702 ′, an LED substrate 706 ′, a base 708 ′, a protection plate 710 ′, a decorative member 712 ′, a following unit 714 ′, a link member 716 ′, and a drive. It has an axis 718 'and a fixing portion 720'.

  The transmitting portion 702 'is a glass plate, a transparent plate made of resin, or the like, which is disposed on the rear surface (the game board side) of the transmitting portion unit 700'. The decorative symbol display device 208 and the like of the game board 200 described above are visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion 702 '.

  The LED board 706 'has a plurality of LED groups 706A'-706D' that mainly emit in the direction of the center of the ring mounted on the inner periphery of the substantially annular board, and is fitted to the outer periphery of the transmitting portion 702 '. Be In the LED group 706A ', several LEDs are juxtaposed in the circumferential direction of the substrate at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the transmissive portion 702', and the LED group 706B 'is at a position corresponding to the right portion of the transmissive portion 702'. The LED group 706C 'is located at a position corresponding to the lower portion of the transmissive portion 702', and the LED group 706D 'is located at a position corresponding to the left portion of the transmissive portion 702'. It is set up.

  The protective plate 710 'is made of, for example, a glass plate or a transparent plate made of resin, and is disposed on the front surface of the base portion 702' to protect the LED substrate 706 'and the transmissive portion 702'. The decorative member 712 'is a substantially annular member disposed on the foremost side (player's side).

  The base portion 708 ′ is attached with the decorative member 712 ′, the protective plate 710 ′, the LED substrate 706 ′, and the transmitting portion 702 ′, and is supported so as to be integrally movable by the drive unit 830 ′. It is a member. At an upper end portion of the base portion 708 ', a guide shaft 708A' which engages with a guide hole (not shown here) of the drive unit 830 'is provided. In addition, a drive shaft insertion portion 708B 'is provided at the lower end portion of the base portion 708'. The drive shaft insertion portion 708B ′ is attached to the fixing portion 720 ′ via the fixing member 722 ′. The fixing portion 720 'is a member for fixing the transmitting portion unit 700' to the front frame door 106 ', and has insertion holes 720A' at both ends thereof. The drive shaft 718 'is inserted through the insertion hole 720A' of the fixed portion 720 'and the drive shaft insertion portion 708B' of the base portion 708 '. Thus, the base portion 708 'can move upward along the guide hole of the drive unit 730' in the front-rear direction, and as a whole, moves between the initial position and the maximum movement position centering on the drive shaft 718 ' It becomes possible to rotate.

  A follower 714 'is attached to the side of the base 708' by a link member 716 '. The link member 716 'movably secures the base member 708' relative to the following portion 714 '. More specifically, when the base portion 708 'starts to move from the initial position to the maximum movement position, the following portion 714' does not move, and only the base portion 708 'moves first, but the base portion 708' is predetermined When moved to the position (the front end of the following part 714 '), the link member 716' engages with the following part 714 ', and thereafter both the following part 714' and the base part 708 'move forward. It has become. The LED substrate 706 'also moves in the front-rear direction as the base portion 708' moves in the front-rear direction.

  The drive unit 830 'includes a first drive unit (stepping motor) 838', a second drive unit 852 ', and a first gear inside a housing made of a substantially hexagonal body 836' having a substantially semicircular shape and a lid 834 '. 840 ', second gear 842', third gear 860 ', driving force transmitting portion 864', driving force receiving portion 866 ', biasing member 868', driven portion 848 ', stopper 854' and the like are accommodated. , Is housed inside the front frame door 106 '.

  A circular first gear (drive gear) 840 'for transmitting the driving force of the first drive portion 838' is attached to the drive shaft of the first drive portion 838 '. The first gear 840 'meshes with the second gear 842'. The second gear 842 is a double spur gear, and an inner gear (not shown) provided on the back side meshes with the third gear 860 '. The third gear 860 'is also a double spur gear, and the inner gear meshes with a gear 864a' provided in the driving force transmitting portion 864 '. Thus, the driving force of the first driving portion 838 'is transmitted to the driving force receiving portion 866' via the first gear 840 ', the second gear 842', the third gear 860 'and the driving force transmitting portion 864'. . The driving force transmitting portion 864 'is engaged with one end of the arm-like driving force receiving portion 866' by the engagement shaft 846 ', and when the driving force transmitting portion 864' is rotated, the driving force transmitted portion 864 'is driven. The transmitting portion 866 'also pivots along its rotation. At the other end of the driving force receiving portion 866 ', a follower 848' is integrally provided. The driven portion 848 'has an insertion hole 848a' which is long in the arm direction in top view, and the guide shaft 708A 'of the transmission unit 700' is inserted through the insertion hole 848a '. Further, the biasing member 868 ′ has a spring housed therein, and biases the driving force receiving portion 866 ′ in the forward direction of the pachinko machine 100.

  The stopper 854 'is attached to the main body 836' so as to be movable in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, restricts the movement of the follower 848 'at a predetermined position (for example, the rightmost position in the movement direction) The movement enables movement of the follower 848 '. The stopper 854 'has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, and a rack 854a' is provided on a part of one side thereof. The second drive unit 852 'is, for example, a stepping motor for driving the stopper 854', and a circular drive gear 852a 'for transmitting the driving force of the second drive unit 852' is attached to a drive shaft (not shown) . The drive gear 852a 'meshes with the rack 854a' of the stopper 854 'and drives the stopper 854'. Further, on the bottom surface of the main body 836 ′, a guide hole 832 ′ in which the guide shaft 708 A ′ can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100 is provided.

  The driving of the transmission unit 700 'by the drive unit 830' will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a top view showing the state of the drive unit 830 'for moving the transmitting unit 700' from the initial position to the maximum movement position. FIG. 15 (a) shows the drive unit 830 'with the transmission unit 700' in the initial position, and FIG. 15 (b) shows the drive unit 830 'with the transmission unit 700' in the middle of movement. FIG. 15 (c) shows the drive unit 830 'in a state where the transmission unit 700' is at the maximum movement position. In FIG. 15, the upper direction of the figure is the rear surface (rear surface) side of the pachinko machine 100, and the lower direction of the diagram is the front side of the pachinko machine 100 '.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, when the transmitting unit 700 'is in the initial position, the driven unit 848' is located at the rear end (rear side of the pachinko machine 100) of the movement range in the front-rear direction. Further, at this position, the driven portion 848 'is urged in the forward direction of the pachinko machine 100 by the urging member 868' which abuts on the driving force receiving portion 866 '. On the other hand, the driven portion 848 'abuts against the stopper 854' which is urged by the urging member (spring) 854b 'and moved to the right end, and the movement in the forward direction is restricted. In this state, the guide shaft 708A 'engaged with the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848 'is at the rear end 832B' of the guide hole 832 '.

  The driving force receiving portion 866 'is provided with a detection piece (position detection piece) 848c' on its back side, and the main body 836 'is a first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a' for detecting this. A second position detection sensor (maximum movement position detection sensor) 858b 'is provided. These sensors function as sensors capable of detecting the transmission unit 700 ′, and the detection result is input to, for example, the first sub control unit 400. When the first position detection sensor 858a 'detects the detection piece 848c', the first sub-control unit 400 recognizes that the transmitting unit 700 'is at the initial position, and the second position detection sensor 858b' detects the detection piece By detecting 848c ', the first secondary control unit 400 recognizes that the transmitting unit 700' is at the maximum movement position.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the second drive portion 852 'is driven and the drive gear 852a' is rotated counterclockwise, the stopper 854 'is moved in the left direction, It separates from the follower 848 '(is non-contact). The follower 848 'whose restriction of movement by the stopper 854' has been released is pivoted counterclockwise around the engagement shaft 846 'with the drive force transmitter 864' by the biasing force of the biasing member 868 '. Thus, the guide shaft 708A 'which is inserted into the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848 'and engaged therewith moves in the direction of the front end 832F' along the guide hole 832 '. As a result, the base portion 708 'connected to the guide shaft 708A' starts to pivot (move) forward about the drive shaft 718 '. When the restriction of the movement by the stopper 854 'is released, the follower 848' moves forward by increasing the speed by the biasing force (repulsive force) of the biasing member 868 '. Further, in this state, the first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a 'can not detect the detection piece 848c'. ,
As shown in FIG. 15C, when the transmitting unit 700 'is at the maximum movement position, the follower 848' is located at the front end (the front side of the pachinko machine 100) of the movement range in the front-rear direction. Then, in this state, the guide shaft 708A 'which is inserted into the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848 'and engaged therewith is at the front end portion 832F' of the guide hole 832 '.

  Further, in this state, the second sub-position detection sensor 858b 'detects the detection piece 848c', whereby the first sub-control unit 400 'grasps that the transmitting unit 700' is at the maximum movement position.

  After the transmissive unit 700 'is moved to the maximum movement position, the player can push the transmissive unit 700' backward to return the transmissive unit 700 'to the initial position. The presence or absence of such a player's operation can be detected from the detection result of the first position detection sensor 858a ', and the transparent unit 700' can be functioned as a button that can be operated by the player.

  If the player presses a predetermined operation button or if a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation unit unit 700 'has moved to the maximum movement position regardless of the player's operation (the first sub control unit 400 has a predetermined period, etc. In the case where the detection piece 848c ′ is detected by the second position detection sensor 858b ′, etc.), the first drive portion 838 ′ is driven to rotate the driving force receiving portion 866 ′ clockwise. Then, the driven portion 848 'may be moved to the initial position shown in FIG. Along with the movement of the follower 848 ', the guide shaft 708A' moves toward the rear end 832B 'of the guide hole 832', thereby returning the transmitting unit 700 'to the initial position.

  When the follower 848 'returns to the initial position, the driving force receiver 866' abuts against the biasing member 868 'and pushes it. When the driven unit 848 'returns to the initial position, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the detection piece 848c' by the first position detection sensor 858a ', moves the stopper 854' to the right again, and follows the driven unit 848 '. Regulate the movement of The rightward movement of the stopper 854 'is achieved, for example, by releasing the driving force of the second driving portion 852' which has moved the stopper 854 'to the left against the urging force of the urging member 854b'. It may be moved rightward by the urging force of the member 854b ', or in addition to the urging force of the urging member 854b', the driving force for moving the stopper 854'rightward by the second drive portion 852 ' May be added.

<Chance button 700>
The chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16A is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 16B is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is moving from the initial position (during operation) c) is an external appearance perspective view when the chance button 700 is at the maximum movement position. FIG. 17 (a) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, (b) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the maximum movement position, and (c) is the chance at the maximum movement position. FIG. 17 is a side cross-sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the button 700. 17 (d) to 17 (f) are diagrams showing only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in the state of each of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 ′ with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 capable of moving up and down relative to the fixed portion 702. (704a, 704b), a spring 706 which is compressed between the movable part 704 and the door 108 ′ with a ball storage plate to urge the movable part 704 upward, and allows the movable part 704 to move up and down , And a detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the above-mentioned chance button lamp is disposed at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixing portion 702 is constituted by two rod-like fixed shafts 702a provided upright on the door 108 'with a ball storage plate, and a disk-like fixing plate 702b fixed to the tip of the two fixed shafts 702a. It is done. As shown in FIG. 17D, the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted through insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later, and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening at one side and a cylindrical upper case 704a, which is an operation surface 704a1 with which the other hand is in contact with the player's finger or hand, and the upper case 704a so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. It is comprised by the disk shaped lower case 704b fixed to case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 17 (d) to 17 (f), the lower case 704b has a central portion through which two insertion holes 704b1 to be inserted into the fixed shafts 702a and a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 to be described later. Insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 projecting toward the center direction of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as the base end, and detection projecting downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as the base end A piece 704 b 4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 is configured of a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A recessed groove 708b1 is formed in a straight line from one longitudinal direction to the other on a part of the outer edge of the rotation member 708b, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end of the recessed groove 708b1. An engagement recess 708b2 engageable with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  In the rotating member 708b, as shown in FIG. 17D, the movable recess 704 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 706 by the engagement recess 708b2 engaging with the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 17E, the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706 by releasing the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b as shown in FIG. It is possible to rotate between a permitted position that permits the power to move upward.

  The detection unit 710 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is configured to be capable of advancing and retracting between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. The detection result of the detection unit 710 is input to, for example, the first sub control unit 400.

  Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the first auxiliary control unit 400 does not press the movable unit 704 downward (the chance button 700 is pressed). As shown in FIG. 17C, when the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is not operated between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detecting part 710, and the movable part 704 is not moved downward. It is possible to determine whether it is pressed (the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is entering between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the detecting unit 710).

  The detecting unit 710A is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured to receive the reflected light from the side surface of the upper case 704a of the light of the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit. The detection unit 710A functions as a sensor capable of detecting the chance button 700, and the detection result of the detection unit 710A is input to, for example, the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 can determine whether the chance button 700 is at the initial position based on the detection result of the detection unit 710A. That is, when the chan button 700 is at the initial position, the detection unit 710A detects this, and when the chan button 700 is at the maximum movement position, the chance button 700 is not detected by the detection unit 710A except when the button is pressed. Whether or not the button is pressed can be determined by combining with the detection result of the detection unit 710 in the case of the maximum movement position.

  In the initial position shown in FIGS. 17A and 16A, the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permission position to the restricting position, and the upward movement of the movable portion 704 is restricted by the rotating member 708 so that the movable portion 704 is downward. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, whereby the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the maximum movement position shown in FIGS. 17B and 16C, the rotation member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction on the upward movement and the spring 706 is It is moved upward by the biasing force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, and movement in the upward direction is restricted again, and only downward movement is possible. Also in this maximum movement position, as shown in FIG. 17C, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 17C is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the maximum movement position shown in FIGS. 17B and 16C. In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed close to the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to restrict the rotation member 708b from the permission position to the restriction position The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG. However, a drive mechanism may be provided to return the chance button 700 to the initial position regardless of the press of the player. The drive mechanism can be constituted of, for example, a motor and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the upper case 704 a and the like, and is controlled by, for example, the first sub control unit 400. Hereinafter, such a drive mechanism may be called a chance button return mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 16 (b), that is, the chance button 700, from the initial position shown in FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 16 (a), FIG. In the state of moving to the maximum movement position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Are ignored (not to judge that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is valid).

  With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, such as when the player mistakenly presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700, but the pressing operation of the chance button 700 may be validated.

  If the chance button has been pressed before the operation of the chance button (if it has been pressed before receiving the detection), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored, or the chance button The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. Further, in these cases, the chance button can be rendered acceptable, or the chance button can not be rendered.

<Display 900>
The display body 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is an explanatory view of the display body 900, and FIG. 18B is a development view of an image formed on the circumferential surface of the display body 900.

  The display body 900 has a cylindrical shape, and is provided rotatably about its central axis 900a. The display body 900 is covered by a transparent cover 903 and accommodated in the ball storage tray-equipped door 108 ′, so that the player can not contact it.

  A drive unit 901 such as a stepping motor is disposed on one end surface side of the display body 900, and the display body 900 rotates around the central axis 900 a by the rotational force of the drive unit 901. Further, a detection piece 900 b is provided on one end face of the display body 900. A sensor 902 is disposed on one end face side of the display body 900. The sensor 902 is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and detects the rotational position of the display body 900 when the detection piece 900 b passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. In the case of the present embodiment, the position of the display body 900 when the detection piece 900 b is detected by the sensor 902 is set as the initial position. The sensor 902 functions as a sensor capable of detecting the display body 900, and the detection result is input to, for example, the first sub control unit 400. When the sensor 902 detects the detection piece 900 b, the first secondary control unit 400 can recognize that the display body 900 is at the initial position. The drive unit 901 is controlled by, for example, the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, four images IM1 to IM4 are formed on the surface of the display body 900 by printing, sealing, or the like. The image IM1 is an image without a star symbol, and the images IM2 to IM4 are images having different numbers of star symbols. By controlling the rotation amount of the display body 900 by the drive unit 901, any image can be displayed. Alternatively, it is also possible to rotate the display body 900 continuously.

  When the display body 900 is in the initial position, the image IM1 is displayed through the cover 903. When the display body 900 is at the maximum movement position, the image IM2 is displayed through the cover 903. The display body 900 is structurally capable of rotating in both directions, but when viewed in one direction of rotation indicated by the arrow, assuming that the display position of the image IM1 is a starting point, the display body 900 rotates with respect to the display position of the image IM2. Since the amount is maximized, the display position of the image IM2 is called the maximum movement position.

<Initial operation and return operation>
The transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display 900 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initial operation of operating the pachinko machine 100 according to a predetermined procedure is performed to check the operation. The initial motion may be, for example, a series of motions from the start of the motion away from the initial position to the return to the initial position, and in the motion away, it is possible to move to the maximum movement position.

  When a problem is detected in the operation during the game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes the continuation of the game in normal operation. In particular, since the transparent unit 700 'and the chance button 700 are exposed to the outside so that the player can touch, if dust or the like is caught in the gap around the unit, the device may malfunction. By performing the return operation, the operation may be able to be improved. Although the display body 900 has a relatively low possibility of being caught by dust or the like due to the fact that the display body 900 is not exposed to the outside, it may similarly malfunction. By performing the return operation, the operation may be able to be improved.

  The return operation may be, for example, an operation including an operation of returning to the initial position. Also, the return operation may be, for example, an operation similar to the initial operation, that is, a series of operations starting from an operation starting to move away from the initial position to returning to the initial position. It can be moved up to.

  The return operation can be performed at least on condition that it is detected that the state is not returned although it is attempted to return to the initial position.

  As timing to detect that it has not returned to the initial position, other than the elapsed time from the start of movement, start timing of fluctuation display of special symbol (in other words start timing of fluctuation display of decorative symbol) or fluctuation of special symbol The end timing of the display (in other words, the end timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol) can be mentioned. During the variable display of the special symbol, the effect is easy to be performed, so the return operation may not be noticeable (it may be considered as a part of the effect) by performing judgment on the start timing of the variable display and performing the return operation. is there. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to improve the operation in preparation for the next effect by performing determination and return operation at the end timing of the fluctuation display.

  Also, for example, there is a possibility of maintenance of a store clerk at the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and at the timing of door opening, there is a possibility of contact between the movable body and the store clerk. Therefore, it is preferable not to adopt such a timing as the timing for detecting that it has not returned to the initial position. The door mentioned here is, for example, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the like.

  Moreover, it is preferable not to employ during door opening or frame opening as a timing which detects that it has not returned to the initial position. Also in this case, there is a possibility that the movable body may be damaged in some way. Furthermore, for the same reason, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the return operation and the initial operation of the movable body are not performed during the door opening or the frame opening. The door mentioned here is, for example, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, and the like. Moreover, the frame said here is an outer frame 102 and an inner frame (main body 104), for example.

  Moreover, although the start timing of the fluctuation display of a normal symbol can also be adopted as a timing which detects that it has not returned to the initial position, it is also possible not to adopt. If not adopted, the return operation and the initial operation of the movable body are not performed when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started.

<Initial operation of transmission unit 700 ′, return operation>
An example of the initial operation and the return operation of the transmitting unit 700 ′ will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of control data for controlling the operation of the transmitting unit 700 ′. There are a plurality of types of operations of the transparent unit 700 ′, and they are managed by numbers. In the example of FIG. 19, some of them (No. 1 to No. 5) are shown, and the processing order, the target coordinates, and the movement time are defined. The processing order defines the order of each operation when performing a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations. The target coordinates define the position of the movement destination. The movement time defines a time limit for moving from the current position to the target coordinates.

  No. The operation 1 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are 0 and the movement time is 1000 msec. A target coordinate of 0 means an initial position. No. The operation 1 is positioned as a return operation for returning the transmitting unit 700 'to the initial position, and may be distinguished from a rendering operation such as a preliminary rendering. The return operation may be a series of operations such as moving the transmitting unit 700 'to the maximum movement position and returning it to the initial position.

  No. The second operation is a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations. The operation in the processing order 1 is such that the target coordinates are 100 and the moving time is 1000 msec. The target coordinate of 100 means the maximum movement position. The operation in the processing order 2 sets the target coordinates to 0 and sets the movement time to 1000 msec. No. The operation 2 is positioned as an initial operation for returning the transmitting unit 700 'to the maximum movement position and then returning to the initial position, and may be distinguished from a rendering operation such as a notice effect.

  No. The operation 3 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are 100 and the moving time is 1000 msec. No. The operation 3 is positioned as a rendering operation (for example, a preview rendering) for moving the transmitting unit 700 'to the maximum movement position.

  No. The operation 4 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are 0 and the moving time is 5000 msec. No. The operation of No. 4 is no. After the effect operation of 3, the player does not push back the transparent unit 700 ', and the transparent unit 700' is automatically returned to the initial position.

  No. The operation 5 is a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations, and is positioned as another rendering operation (for example, reciprocating movement, vibration, etc.).

  FIG. 20 is a view schematically showing an operation example of the transmission unit 700 '. In FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c), when the power is turned on, no. It shows the case where the initial operation of 2 is performed.

  FIG. 20 (a) shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first auxiliary control unit 400 drives the drive unit 830 'in response to the power-on, No. Execute operation 2 FIG. 20 (b) shows the stage at which the operation in process order 1 is performed, and the transmitting unit 700 'is moved to the maximum movement position. FIG. 20 (c) shows the stage at which the operation in order of processing 2 is performed, and the transmitting unit 700 'returns to the initial position. By performing such initial operation each time the power is turned on, there are cases where it is possible to confirm the operation of the transmissive unit 700 '. Note that even if the conditions for executing another operation are satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without being interrupted. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably.

  In (d) to (i) of FIG. The case where the return operation of 1 is performed is shown. FIG. 20 (d) shows a stage (stage of initial position) in which the transmission unit 700 'is not in operation. In FIG. 20 (e), no. It shows the case where the rendering operation of 3 is performed, and shows the case where the transmitting unit 700 'has moved to the maximum movement position. When the player performs an operation of returning the transmitting unit 700 'to the initial position with the effect operation as the advance effect, a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect or the like) can be performed. The predetermined effect can be performed, for example, using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 20 (f), no. The case where the operation at the time of non-operation of 4 was performed is shown. That is, no. It is assumed that after the effect operation of 3, the player does not operate the transparent unit 700 '.

  In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a 'does not detect that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position after the lapse of the moving time of 4, and movement of the transmitting unit 700 'is due to any failure. It is assumed that it is interrupted. For example, the motor may be out of step or a foreign object may bite.

  Corresponding to this, at the stage of FIG. Perform the return operation of 1. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on the condition that it is detected that the transmission unit 700 'is not returned although the transmission unit 700' has been returned to the initial position. In addition, conditions other than not detecting that it is in the initial position may be weighted.

  By this return operation, the movement of the transmitting unit 700 'resumes and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 20I, it is detected that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position by the first position detection sensor 858a '. . Thus, there are cases where the transmitting unit 700 'can be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

  21 (a) to 21 (j) show the case of No. It shows the case where the return operation of 1 was performed but no improvement was made. In this example, the number of return operations is limited. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times of satisfaction of the conditions for executing the return operation. Here, although the return operation is performed three times, if the transmitting unit 700 'does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the transmitting unit 700' is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the effect can not be produced by the transparent unit 700 ', but the game itself is continued.

  FIG. 21A shows a stage in which the transmission unit 700 'is not yet displayed. 21 (b) shows the result of No. It shows the case where the rendering operation of 3 is performed, and shows the case where the transmitting unit 700 'has moved to the maximum movement position. 21 (c) shows no. The case where the operation at the time of non-operation of 4 was performed is shown. That is, no. It is assumed that after the effect operation of 3, the player does not operate the transparent unit 700 '. Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the transmitting unit 700 'bites the foreign matter G and the operation is interrupted.

  In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a 'does not detect that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position after the movement time of 4 has elapsed. In FIG. 21 (e), the first recovery operation is performed correspondingly. In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a 'does not detect that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position after the movement time of 1 has elapsed. In FIG. 21 (g), the second recovery operation is performed correspondingly. In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a 'does not detect that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position after the movement time of 1 has elapsed. In FIG. 21 (i), the third recovery operation is performed correspondingly.

  In FIG. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a 'does not detect that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position after the movement time of 1 has elapsed. Since the transmission operation has been performed three times but the transmission unit 700 'has not returned to the initial position, the return is not given, the operation inhibition state of the transmission unit 700' is set, and the operation is prohibited.

  FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) illustrate the case where the operation inhibited state is released and the return operation is enabled when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation inhibited state of the transmissive unit 700 'is set. doing. The predetermined condition here is the opening of the front frame door 106 ', and for example, the opening is detected by the glass frame switch 104g described above.

  FIG. 22A shows the stage in which the operation prohibiting state of the transmitting unit 700 'is set. FIG. 22 (b) shows a state in which the store clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22C shows a state where a store clerk has opened the front frame door 106 '. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the transmitting unit 700 'is released. In addition, the number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  Corresponding to this, in FIG. Perform the return operation of 1. By this return operation, the transmitting unit 700 'returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22E, it is detected by the first position detection sensor 858a' that the transmitting unit 700 'is at the initial position. In this way, the transparent unit 700 'may be able to return to the normal operation state by the release of the operation inhibited state by the opening of the front frame door 106' and the return operation performed triggered by the release.

  FIGS. 22 (f) to 22 (j) illustrate a case where the operation inhibited state is released to enable the return operation on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected, for example, by the inner frame switch 104 f described above.

  FIG. 22F shows the stage in which the operation prohibiting state of the transmitting unit 700 'is set. FIG. 22 (g) shows a state in which the store clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22 (h) shows a state where a hall clerk has opened the main body 104. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the transmitting unit 700 'is released. In addition, the number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  Corresponding to this, in FIG. Perform the return operation of 1. By this return operation, the transmitting unit 700 'returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22 (j), it is detected that the transmitting unit 700' is at the initial position by the first position detection sensor 858a '. In this way, there are cases where it is possible to return the transmitting unit 700 'to a normal operating state by releasing the operation inhibited state by opening the main body 104 and returning operation performed with the release as a trigger. The number of times of the return operation may be reset according to requirements other than the opening of the door such as the front frame door 106 'and the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not in the operation prohibited state.

<Initial operation of the chance button 700, return operation>
The initial operation and return operation of the chance button 700 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmitting unit 700 ′, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. 19, the initial operation and return of the chance button 700 The action is performed. A brief description will be given below.

  FIG. 23 is a view schematically showing an operation example of the chance button 700. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 23A to 23C show the case where the initial operation of the chance button 700 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 23 (a) shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first auxiliary control unit 400 drives the drive unit 708 in response to the power-on, and moves the chance button 700 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 23 (b). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 drives the chance button return mechanism to return the chance button 700 to the initial position. By performing such initial operation each time the power is turned on, there are cases where the operation of the chance button 700 can be confirmed. Note that even if the conditions for executing another operation are satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without being interrupted. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably.

  FIGS. 23D to 23I show cases where the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 23 (d) shows the stage (the stage of the initial position) in which the chance button 700 has not been activated.

  FIG. 23E shows the case where the chance button 700 is moved to the maximum movement position as a rendering operation thereafter. FIG. 23 (f) shows the case where the operation for returning the chance button 700 to the initial position is performed as the operation at the time of no operation thereafter. That is, it is assumed that the player does not operate the chance button 700 after the rendering operation.

  FIG. 23 (g) assumes a case in which the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is at the initial position after the movement time set in the operation at the time of non-operation in FIG. 23 (f) has elapsed. It is assumed that the movement of the chance button 700 is interrupted due to some obstacle. For example, malfunction of the drive source or biting of foreign matter may be considered as the cause.

  In response to this, the recovery operation is performed in the stage of FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on the condition that it is detected that the chance button 700 is returned to the initial position but not returned. In addition, conditions other than not detecting that it is in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmission unit 700 '. Similar to the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the chance button 700 to the initial position. There is a limit to travel time.

  By this return operation, the movement of the chance button 700 resumes and returns to the initial position. In FIG. 23I, the detection unit 710A detects that the chance button 700 is at the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the chance button 700 can be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

  FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (j) show a case where the return operation of the chance button 700 has been performed but has not been improved. In this example, the number of return operations is limited. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times of satisfaction of the conditions for executing the return operation. Here, although the return operation is performed three times, when the chance button 700 does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the chance button 700 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the chance button 700 can not produce an effect, but the game itself is continued.

  Note that the limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transparent unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700. In the case of different numbers, either may be larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration requiring a return operation, and may be set smaller for a configuration not requiring a return operation.

  FIG. 24A shows the stage in which the chance button 700 has not been rendered. FIG. 24 (b) shows the case where the rendering operation is performed thereafter, and shows the case where the chance button 700 has moved to the maximum movement position. FIG. 24C shows the case where the operation at the non-operation time is performed thereafter. That is, it is assumed that the player does not operate the chance button 700 after the effect operation of FIG. 24 (b). Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the chance button 700 bites the foreign material G and the operation is interrupted.

  FIG. 24D assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is at the initial position after the movement time of the operation at the time of non-operation of FIG. 24C elapses. In FIG. 24 (e), the first recovery operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 24F assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is at the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 24 (g), the second recovery operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 24H assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is at the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 24I, the third recovery operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 24J assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is at the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Since the return operation has been performed three times but the chance button 700 has not returned to the initial position, the return is not given, the operation prohibited state of the chance button 700 is set, and the operation is prohibited.

  FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (e) illustrate a case where when the operation prohibited state of the chance button 700 is set, the operation prohibited state is released to enable the return operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. There is. The predetermined condition here is the opening of the front frame door 106 ', and for example, the opening is detected by the glass frame switch 104g described above.

  FIG. 25 (a) shows the stage in which the operation prohibited state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25 (b) shows a state in which the store clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25 (c) shows a state where the store clerk has opened the front frame door 106 '. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibited state of the chance button 700 is cancelled. In addition, the number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  Corresponding to this, in FIG. 25D, the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed. By this return operation, the chance button 700 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 25E, it is detected by the detection unit 710A that the chance button 700 is at the initial position. In this manner, the chance button 700 may be able to be returned to the normal operating state by the release of the operation inhibited state by the opening of the front frame door 106 'and the return operation which is triggered by the release.

  FIGS. 25 (f) to 25 (j) illustrate a case where the operation inhibited state is released to enable the return operation, on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected, for example, by the inner frame switch 104 f described above.

  FIG. 25F shows the stage in which the operation prohibiting state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25 (g) shows a state in which the store clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25H shows a state where a hall clerk has opened the main body 104. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibited state of the chance button 700 is cancelled. In addition, the number of return operations is also reset to zero.

  Corresponding to this, in FIG. 25I, the return operation of the chance button 700 is performed. By this return operation, the chance button 700 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 25 (j), it is detected by the detection unit 710A that the chance button 700 is at the initial position. There are cases where it is possible to return the chance button 700 to a normal operating state by the release of the operation inhibited state by opening the main body 104 and the return operation that is triggered by the release. The number of times of the return operation may be reset according to requirements other than the opening of the door such as the front frame door 106 'and the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not in the operation prohibited state.

<Initial operation of display 900, return operation>
The initial operation and return operation of the display body 900 can be performed in the same manner as in the case of the transmissive unit 700 ′ and the chance button 700. As an initial operation of the display body 900, the display body 900 starts to rotate, and after rotating at least one rotation, the rotation is stopped when it is first detected by the sensor 902, and the display body 900 is positioned at the initial position. Can be mentioned. As the return operation, the rotation of the display body 900 is started, and when the sensor 902 first detects the rotation, the rotation is stopped and the display body 900 is positioned at the initial position.

  When the return operation of the display body 900 reaches the limit number of times, the operation inhibited state of the display body 900 can be set. With regard to the display body 900, the operation inhibition state may not be released by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102, and the operation inhibition state may be maintained. Good. Since the display body 900 is disposed at a position not in contact with the player, the sense of incongruity given to the player may be relatively small even if the operation is prohibited. It is because it may not be easy for a hole clerk to remove obstacles such as biting. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation inhibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102.

<Example of motion control of movable body>
An operation control example of the transmitting unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display body 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, an example in which the first sub-control unit 400 executes drive control of the drive unit 830 ′ of the transmission unit 700 ′, the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, the chance button return mechanism, and the drive unit 901 of the display body 900 is described. It is assumed. FIG. 26A shows a processing example included in the movable body control processing of S319 in FIG.

  In S1401, a first movable body control process is performed. Here, the process related to the operation control of the transmitting unit 700 'is performed. In S1402, a second movable body control process is performed. Here, processing concerning operation control of the chance button 700 is performed. In S1403, a third movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to the operation control of the display body 900 is performed.

  Here, the control states of the transparent unit 700 ′, the chance button 700 and the display body 900 are individually set in order to control the operation. The control state includes at least the first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state in which execution of the initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which the operation prohibited state is set.

  FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the first movable body control process of S1401. In S1411, it is determined whether the fourth state is set in the transmitting unit 700 '. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1418, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1412. In S1412, it is determined whether the first state is set in the transmitting unit 700 '. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1413, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1414.

  In step S1413, settings related to execution of the initial operation (such as drive settings) and processing related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1414, it is determined whether the second state is set in the transmitting unit 700 '. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1415, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1416.

  In S1415, settings (such as drive settings) relating to the execution of the recovery operation and processing (such as position detection by a sensor) regarding monitoring whether the recovery operation is successful are performed. In S1416, it is determined whether the third state is set in the transmitting unit 700 '. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1417, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1418. In step S1417, command related processing (such as processing related to a command return value and a received command) is performed.

  In step S1418, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the process advances to step S1419. If it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is ended. In S1418 and S1419, the control state of the transmitting unit 700 'is updated. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. If it is detected that the transmitting unit 700 'is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. When the opening of a door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set, and the number of return operations is reset.

  FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing the second movable body control process of S1402. In S1421, it is determined whether the fourth state is set in the chance button 700 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1428, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1422. In S1422, it is determined whether the first state is set in the chance button 700 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1423, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1414.

  In S1423, the setting (such as drive setting) relating to the execution of the initial operation and the processing (such as position detection by a sensor) related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful are performed. In S1424, it is determined whether the second state is set in the chance button 700 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1425, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1426.

  In step S1425, settings relating to execution of the return operation (such as drive settings) and processing relating to monitoring whether the return operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1426, it is determined whether the third state is set in the chance button 700 or not. If it does correspond, the process advances to step S1427; otherwise, the process advances to step S1428. In step S1427, command related processing (such as processing related to a command return value and a received command) is performed.

  In step S1428, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1429. If the condition is not satisfied, the process of one unit ends. In S1428 and S1429, processing for updating the control state of the chance button 700 is performed. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. If it is detected that the chance button 700 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. When the opening of a door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set, and the number of return operations is reset.

  FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the third movable body control process of S1403. In S1431, it is determined whether the fourth state is set in the display body 900 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1438, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1432. In S1432, it is determined whether the first state is set in the display body 900 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1433, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1414.

  In S1433, the setting (such as drive setting) relating to the execution of the initial operation and the processing (such as position detection by a sensor) related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful are performed. In S1434, it is determined whether the second state is set in the display body 900 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1435, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1436.

  In step S1435, settings (such as drive settings) relating to the execution of the return operation and processing (such as position detection by a sensor) regarding monitoring whether the return operation is successful are performed. In S1436, it is determined whether the third state is set in the display body 900 or not. If it does correspond, the process proceeds to S1437. If it does not correspond, the process proceeds to S1438. In step S1437, command related processing (such as processing related to a command return value and a received command) is performed.

  In step S1438, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1439. If the condition is not satisfied, the process of one unit ends. In S1438 and S1439, the control state of the display body 900 is updated. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. If it is detected that the display body 900 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. On the other hand, unlike in the case of the transparent unit 700 'and the chance button 700, even if the opening of a door such as the front frame door 106' or the main body 104 is detected, the first state is set or the number of recovery operations is reset. It can not be done.

  Next, control of the transmission unit 700 ', the chance button 700, and a drive source (here, exemplified as a step motor) for driving the display body 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A and 28B show the interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 28A, in step S1441, a process of outputting a signal from the motor driver to the motor is performed. This drives the motor. In S1442, sensor detection processing is performed. Here, detection results of the transmission unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the sensors that detect the display body 900 are acquired. In S1443, another process is performed. Thus, the first drive interrupt process of one unit is completed.

  Referring to FIG. 28B, in S1444, motor control processing for the operation of transmission unit 700 'is performed, in S1445 motor control processing for the operation of chance button 700 is performed, and in S1446 the operation of display body 900 Perform motor control processing for Thus, the second drive interrupt process of one unit is completed.

  The motor control processes of S1444 to S1446 are similar processes, but as an example, the motor control process of S1444 will be described with reference to FIG.

  At S1451, it is determined whether it is the output timing of the pulse to the stepping motor. If it does correspond to S1452, if it does not correspond to S1456. In S1452, it is determined whether or not the moving direction of the transmitting unit 700 'is the direction of the origin. In S1453, one virtual position of the transmitting unit 700 'is subtracted, and in S1454, one virtual position of the transmitting unit 700' is added. In S1455, pulse and direction signals are output.

  In step S1456, it is determined whether the stepping motor has stopped. If it is determined that the pulse has been stopped, the process advances to step S1457 to stop the pulse output. In S1458, it is determined from the detection result of the sensor whether or not the transmitting unit 700 'is at the initial position. If it does, the process proceeds to S1459, where the virtual position is set to 0. If it does not, the process of one unit is ended.

<Example of movable body applicable to game board>
FIG. 29 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 'replacing the game board 200 described above. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the game board 200 ′, and FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. The game board 200 ′ omits the movable display device 288 of the game board 200, while adding the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the light emission effect unit 3 and the decoration unit 4; Is the same as The game board 200 ′ includes movable bodies 1 and 2, the above-described doors 246a and 246b, and a presentation movable body 224 as movable bodies. FIG.29 and FIG.31 has shown the state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the presentation movable body 224 are located in the initial position.

  In the case of this embodiment, the decoration unit 4 is a lamp unit configured by arranging two 7-segment displays side by side, and is fixedly arranged at the upper center of the decoration symbol display device 208. In the case of this embodiment, although decoration unit 4 was constituted by 7 segment displays, it is not restricted to this, may be electronic displays of other types, and displays (for example, printed matter, solid) other than electronic displays Object). For example, at least a part of the decoration unit may be transparent or translucent, and the light emitting element may be disposed at the rear position. In some cases, the decorative effect can be improved by lighting the decoration unit by the light emission of the light emitting element.

  The movable body 1 constitutes a display on which an image of a family crest is printed. The movable body 1 may have a three-dimensional shape inscribed instead of printing an image, or may be a display such as a 7-segment display or a liquid crystal display, a doll, etc. It may be

  The movable body 1 is provided so as to be capable of reciprocating in the vertical direction, and is located behind the decoration unit 4 at the initial position, and located on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the maximum movement position. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 1 is entirely located behind the decoration unit 4 at the initial position, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the player. You may be able to surprise you. In addition, as for the movable body 1, only the one part may be located behind the decoration unit 4 in the initial position, or the whole may be exposed.

  The movable body 2 is a display device capable of performing various displays used for effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device in the present embodiment, but, like the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The movable body 2 is provided to be capable of reciprocating in the vertical direction, and is located below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position, and is located above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the maximum movement position. . In the case of the present embodiment, at the initial position, the movable body 2 is located behind the gaming board 200a, a part of which forms the framework of the gaming board 200 ', and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. However, all of the movable body 2 may be located behind the gaming board 200a at the initial position, or the whole may be exposed.

  Although the doors 246a and 246b and the effect movable body 224 are as outlined above, the effect movable body 224 takes the position shown in FIG. 29 as the initial position, and the position shown in FIG. It is a movable body that is always exposed and there is no case that a part of it is hidden.

  The light emitting effect unit 3 includes a change panel 31 and light emitting units 32 and 33 capable of emitting light. The change panel 31 is a square and plate-like member, and is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The shape of the change panel 31 is not limited to a square, and may be a circle or the like. Moreover, members other than plate shape may be sufficient.

  The light emitting unit 32 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 32 a arranged in a line along the side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 32a is, for example, an LED. The light emitting unit 33 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 33 a arranged in a line along the lower side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 33a is, for example, an LED. The position of the light emitting unit is not limited to this, and any position around the change panel 31 can be selected. However, it may be disposed at a place other than the upper end of the change panel 31. Thereby, the space above the change panel 31 may be available for other applications.

  The change panel 31 is composed of a light guide member, and can change the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting units 32 and 33 at least to the front side (the direction of the player). A change in the direction of light can be made, for example, by forming a cut surface that reflects light or providing a reflective material. In addition, it is possible to cause the change panel 31 to display an image by arranging the light change direction. FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) show examples of effects by the light emission effect unit 3. FIG.

  FIG. 38A shows a state in which the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. In this case, when viewed from the player, the change panel 31 can see an image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind it.

  FIG. 38B shows a state in which the light emitting unit 32 is turned on and the light emitting unit 33 is turned off. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 32 is laterally incident from the left side of the change panel 31, the direction of the light is changed by approximately 90 degrees by reflection, and the light is emitted to the near side in the normal direction of the change panel 31. The arrangement of the light reflecting configuration makes the image of the character appear floating on the change panel 31. The image of the character also appears to be superimposed on the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind it. Such an effect can be performed, for example, as a notice effect such as a jackpot.

  FIG. 38C shows a state in which the light emitting unit 32 is turned off and the light emitting unit 33 is turned on. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 33 is incident upward from the lower side of the change panel 31, the direction of the light is changed by about 90 degrees by reflection, and the light is emitted to the near side in the normal direction of the change panel 31. Due to the arrangement of the light reflecting configuration, an image in which the characters “PUSH” are arranged appears in a floating state on the change panel 31 in a shape imitating an animal's footprint. The image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind it will also be seen overlapping. Such an effect can be performed, for example, as an effect that moves the transparent unit 700 'to the maximum movement position and urges the player to perform the operation.

  In the case of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the image does not float when the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. However, the player can recognize even when the light is turned off. It may be noticeable.

  At least one of the light emitting units 32 and 33 may be lit during at least a part of the operation period of the movable bodies 1 and 2 or the effect movable body 246. For example, it may be lit during a partial period or the entire period while the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position or from the maximum movement position to the initial position. Alternatively, it may be lit during a partial period or the entire period while the movable body 2 moves to the maximum movement position or from the maximum movement position to the initial position. Alternatively, it may be turned on during a partial period or the entire period while the effect movable body 246 moves to the maximum movement position or while returning from the maximum movement position to the initial position. The action of the movable body and the effect by the light of the effect light emitting unit 3 can be performed, and the player's interest can be enhanced in some cases.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the effect movable body 224, etc. is covered by the cover body 10. Also, on the back and upper side of the stage 244, a ball entry blocking member 11 is provided. The ball entry blocking member 11 is located closer to the player than the change panel 31, so that gaming balls that have not entered the ball entry port do not enter the cover body 10. In the present embodiment, a gap or the like may be provided between the ball entry blocking member 11 and the change panel 31, and another movable body may be provided, whereby the rendering operation is performed in front of the change panel 31. It is possible.

  In the lower part of the cover body 10, a ball for discharging the game ball which has entered the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the variable winning opening 234, the out opening 240, etc. An outlet 10a is formed.

  The arrangement relationship of each configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 1 is positioned closer to the player than the decorative symbol display device 208 in the depth direction (front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100. The change panel 31 is located closer to the player than the movable body 1. The decoration unit 4 is located closer to the player than the change panel 31. The movable body 1, the movable body 2, and the effect movable body 224 are configured to be movable in a space between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the change panel 31.

  The movable body 1 is configured such that at least a portion thereof may overlap at least a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 when viewed in the depth direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, in the initial position, a part of the movable body 1 overlaps a part (upper part) of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the initial position, the entire movable body 1 may overlap the decorative symbol display device 208. Conversely, the entire decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap the movable body 1 in the initial position.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position, the whole movable body 1 overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, but a part of the movable body 1 is the decorative symbol display device 208 And may overlap. Conversely, all of the decorative symbol display devices 208 may overlap with the movable body 1.

  At least a portion of the change panel 31 overlaps at least a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, substantially the entire display areas of the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other. Note that the whole of the change panel 31 may overlap with part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or all of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap with part of the change panel 31. May be Further, for example, the change panel 31 may overlap with a half or more area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decoration unit 4 is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the end of the change panel 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the decoration unit 4 overlaps the upper end portion of the change panel 31. Alternatively, both ends of the change panel 31 may be configured to overlap with the decoration unit 4. Since the end of the change panel 31 is covered by the decoration unit 4 from the front side, the appearance quality may be able to be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration unit 4, the change panel 31, the movable body 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged in order from the player in the narrow space when viewed in the depth direction. A gap G1 is formed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1, a gap G2 is formed between the movable body 1 and the change panel 31, and the space between the change panel 31 and the decoration unit 4 is Form a gap G3. The gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other through the space SP2 between the decoration unit 4 and the movable body 1. The gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other through the space SP1 between the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, all of the gaps G1 to G3 communicate with each other.

  Since the gap G3 is provided, maintenance of the movable body 1 may be possible from the gap G3 without disassembling the cover body 10 or the like. FIG. 32 (a) shows an example, and the fingertip of the worker passes through the gap G3 and reaches the movable body 1. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile etc., it may be possible to manually return it to the initial position. Further, in the example of FIG. 32B, the tip of the tool (driver in this case) is passed through the gap G3 to reach the movable body 1. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile, it may be possible to return to the initial position manually by using a tool.

  Since the gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other, the lower portion of the movable body 1 (the portion behind the upper portion of the change panel 31) may be accessible, and the maintenance range may be expanded. Furthermore, since the gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other, the back side portion of the movable body 1 may be accessible, and the maintenance range may be expanded. The gaps G <b> 1, G <b> 2 and G <b> 3 can be, for example, in the range of 0.8 mm to 20 mm. The width of each gap may be constant or partially different. For example, the gap may be wider at the periphery of the movable body 1 than at other parts. The gaps may be formed at various places such as the upper side, the lower side, and the like also in the portion where each gap is formed. In addition, the width and the portion may be different in each gap. For example, the widths of the gap G3 and the gap G2 may be different, and the gap G3 and the gap G1 may be formed in different portions in a front view.

  In addition, a gap that allows access to the movable body 1 may be provided in at least a part of the upper end portion, the lateral end portion, and the like of the cover body 10. The scope of maintenance may extend further.

  The gaps G1 to G3 communicate with each other. Therefore, at the time of transportation of the pachinko machine 100 or the like, a shock absorbing material such as an air cushion can be inserted into the gaps G1 to G3. FIG. 33 shows an example, in which the cushioning material CS is packed in the gaps G1 to G3. The buffer CS may suppress movement of the movable body 1 due to vibration or the like, and may prevent strong collision with other components even when moving. The packing and the extraction of the cushioning material CS may be performed from the gap G1 side in some cases, and the workability may be good.

  When the movable body 1 is in the initial position, at least a part of the gaps G1 to G3 are located at the same height H in the height direction of the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cushioning material CS may be relatively easy to pack and to extract. The gaps G1 to G3 do not have to be located at the same height H. The same height may be a combination of the gaps G1 and G2, or a combination of the gaps G2 and G3. A combination of G1 and gap G3 is also good.

<Drive mechanism of movable body>
An example of a drive mechanism for moving the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described. First, the drive mechanism of the movable body 1 will be described.

  34 and 35 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 5 of the movable body 1. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view when the movable body 1 is at the initial position, FIG. 34 (b) is a front view when the movable body 1 is at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 35 (a) is the initial state for the movable body 1 FIG. 35 (b) shows a cross-sectional view of the movable body 1 at the maximum movement position.

  The drive mechanism 5 includes a support 50, a motor 51, an arm member 52, a link member 53, and a sensor 54. The support 50 constitutes a framework of the drive mechanism 5 and includes three rows of guide grooves 50 a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 51 is a step motor supported by the support 50, and a pinion gear 51a is attached to its output shaft. The arm member 52 is rotatably supported by the support 50, and the gear 52b, to which the gear 52b is fixed coaxially with the rotation center, meshes with the pinion gear 51a, and the arm member 52 is rotated by the drive of the motor 51. Move. A long hole 52c is formed on the tip end side of the arm member 52, and a detection piece 52a is formed on the back side of the midway portion.

  The link member 53 is a member for supporting the movable body 1, and the movable body 1 is fixed to the link member 53 via a mounting layer 53 a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 53 is provided with three shaft portions through which the guide groove 50a is inserted, and the central shaft portion 53a of the link members 53 is formed longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and the long hole 52c of the arm member 52 is further formed. It is inserted. At the end of the shaft 53a, a stopper 53b for restricting removal from the long hole 52c is fixed by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 52 is rotated by the drive of the motor 51, the link member 53 is vertically moved by the guidance of the guide groove 50a, and as a result, the movable body 1 is vertically moved.

  The movable body 1 is detected by a sensor 54. The sensor 54 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 52a is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. Since the rotational position of the arm member 52 and the position of the movable body 1 correspond to each other, the position of the movable body 1 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 52 a with the sensor 54. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is at the initial position, a configuration in which the detection piece 52a is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and detected by the sensor 54 (the movable body 1 is at the initial position Is a detection state detected by the sensor 54).

  Next, the drive mechanism of the movable body 2 will be described. 36 and 37 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 6 of the movable body 2. 36 (a) is a front view when the movable body 2 is at the initial position, FIG. 36 (b) is a front view when the movable body 2 is at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 37 (a) is the initial state for the movable body 2. FIG. 37 (b) shows a cross-sectional view of the movable body 2 at the maximum movement position. The drive mechanism 6 has the same configuration as the drive mechanism 5.

  The drive mechanism 6 includes a support 60, a motor 61, an arm member 62, a link member 63, and a sensor 64. The support 60 constitutes the framework of the drive mechanism 6 and comprises three rows of guide grooves 60 a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 61 is a step motor supported by the support 60, and a pinion gear 61a is attached to the output shaft thereof. The arm member 62 is rotatably supported by the support body 60, and the gear 62b, to which the gear 62b is fixed coaxially with the rotation center, meshes with the pinion gear 61a, and the arm member 62 is rotated by the drive of the motor 61. Move. A long hole 62c is formed on the tip end side of the arm member 62, and a detection piece 62a is formed on the back side of the midway portion.

  The link member 63 is a member for supporting the movable body 2, and the movable body 2 is fixed to the link member 63 via a mounting layer 63 a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 63 is provided with three shaft portions through which the guide groove 60a is inserted, and the central shaft portion 63a is formed to be longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and the long hole 62c of the arm member 62 is further formed. It is inserted. At the end of the shaft portion 63a, a stopper 63b for restricting removal from the long hole 62c is fixed by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 62 is rotated by the drive of the motor 61, the link member 63 is vertically moved by the guidance of the guide groove 60a, and as a result, the movable body 2 is vertically moved.

  The movable body 2 is detected by a sensor 64. The sensor 64 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 62a is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The rotational position of the arm member 62 and the position of the movable body 2 correspond to each other, so that the position of the movable body 2 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 62 a with the sensor 64. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is in the initial position, a configuration in which the detection piece 62a is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and detected by the sensor 64 (the movable body 2 is in the initial position Is a detection state detected by the sensor 64).

  Next, the drive mechanism of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a) is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, FIG. 39 (b) is a left side view when the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, and FIG. 39 (c) is the effect movable body 224. 39 (d) is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is at the maximum movement position.

  As described above, the effect movable body 224 includes the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b that simulate the upper arm and the forearm of the human right arm. The cam CM1 is fixed at the position of the shoulder of the upper arm portion 224a, and the output shaft of a step motor 71 for rotating the upper arm portion 224 is connected to the cam CM1. Stoppers SP11 and SP12 are provided around the cam CM1 to restrict the rotation range of the upper arm portion 224a by restricting the rotation range of the cam CM1. The position where one end of the flange of cam CM11 abuts against stopper SP11 (FIG. 39A) is the initial position of the upper arm 224a alone, and the position where the other end of the flange of cam CM11 abuts stopper SP12 is the upper arm It is the maximum movement position (FIG. 39 (d)) of 224a alone. The cam CM1 is provided with a detection piece CM11.

  The upper arm portion 224 a is detected by the sensor 74. The sensor 74 is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM11 is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece CM11 by the sensor 74, the position of the upper arm portion 224a can be detected. In the case of this embodiment, when the upper arm portion 224a is in the initial position, the detection piece CM11 is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and detected by the sensor 74 (the upper arm portion 224a is in the initial position Is a detection state detected by the sensor 74).

  The upper arm portion 224a is made of a transparent material, and an illumination unit 73 composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs) is provided inside the upper arm portion 224a. Is possible.

  A step motor 72 is provided at the elbow position of the upper arm portion 224a. The cam CM2 is fixed at the position of the elbow of the forearm portion 224b, and the output shaft of the step motor 72 is connected to the cam CM2.

  Stoppers SP21 and SP22 are provided around the cam CM2 to restrict the rotation range of the forearm portion 224b by restricting the rotation range of the cam CM2. The position where one end of the flange of cam CM21 abuts against stopper SP21 (FIG. 39A) is the initial position of the forearm 224b alone, and the position where the other end of the flange of cam CM21 abuts stopper SP22 is the forearm It is the largest movement position (FIG.39 (c) (d)) of 224b single-piece | unit. The cam CM2 is provided with a detection piece CM21.

  The forearm portion 224 b is detected by the sensor 75. The sensor 75 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM21 is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the forearm portion 224 b can be detected by detecting the detection piece CM 21 with the sensor 75. In the case of this embodiment, when the forearm portion 224b is in the initial position, the detection piece CM21 is positioned between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and detected by the sensor 75 (the forearm portion 224b is in the initial position Is a detection state detected by the sensor 75).

  When viewed across the effect movable body 224, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are both in the initial position, and the maximum movement position is shown in FIG. 39 (d). As shown in FIG. 5, both the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b are in the maximum movement position. FIG. 39C shows the case where the effect movable body 224 is at the middle position, and the upper arm portion 224a is at the initial position and the front one portion 224b is at the maximum movement position. Thereafter, when the upper arm portion 224a is also moved to the maximum movement position, the state shown in FIG. 39 (d) is obtained. Whether the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position can be recognized from the detection results of the sensors 74 and 75.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the left door 246a and the right door 246b will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.40 (a) is a perspective view of the shielding apparatus 246, FIG.40 (b)-(d) is a front view of the shielding apparatus 246, and the position of the left door 246a and the right door 246b differs. FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are fully opened, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are respectively located at the initial positions. FIG. 40 (c) is fully closed. 40C and 40D are half open, the left door 246a is at the maximum movement position in FIG. 40C, and the right door 246b is at the maximum movement position in FIG. 40D.

  The shielding device 246 includes a drive mechanism 8 for moving the left door 246a and the right door 246b. The drive mechanism 8 comprises a support 81 which forms the framework of the shielding device 246. The support 81 includes rails for guiding the reciprocation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b in the left-right direction, and also includes an opening 81a for exposing the decorative symbol display device 208 behind.

  The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82a, a driven pulley 83a, and a belt 84a wound around them as a mechanism for moving the left door 246a. The drive pulley 82a is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84a travels. The left door 246a includes a connecting portion La, and is fixed to the belt 84a at the connecting portion La. The left door 246a moves as the belt 84a travels. The connection portion La integrally includes a detection piece detected by the sensor 85a.

  The sensor 85a is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece of the connection portion La is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the left door 246a can be detected by detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85a. In the case of this embodiment, the left door 246a is configured such that the position detected by the sensor 85a is the initial position.

  The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82b, a driven pulley 83b, and a belt 84b wound around them as a mechanism for moving the right door 246b. The driving pulley 82b is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84b travels. The right door 246b includes a connecting portion Lb, and is fixed to the belt 84b at the connecting portion Lb. The right door 246b moves as the belt 84b travels. The connection portion Lb integrally includes a detection piece detected by the sensor 85b.

  The sensor 85 b is an optical sensor including a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and a detection piece of the connection portion Lb is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the right door 246b can be detected by detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85b. In the case of the present embodiment, the right door 246b is configured such that the position detected by the sensor 85b is the initial position.

<Operation mode of movable body>
An example of operation modes of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 41 shows a state in which all of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 are located at the initial position, and these movable bodies are in an inactive state. FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is moved. FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is moved. FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is moved. FIG. 43 (b) shows a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are moved.

  Various effects are possible by the movement of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224, or by a combination of movements. The second sub-control unit 500 can perform operation control of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224.

<Initial operation and return operation>
The movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, similar to the transmissive unit 700 ′, the chance button 700, and the display 900 described above, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initial operation of operating these in a predetermined procedure is performed to perform the operation check. In addition, it is desirable to perform a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position when a problem is detected in the operation during the game or the like. In addition, when a trouble is detected in the operation during the game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes the continuation of the game in normal operation.

  Hereinafter, examples of the initial operation and the return operation will be described. Here, although the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may also be targeted. The movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are movable bodies arranged at positions where the player does not contact.

<Initial operation of movable body 1, return operation>
The initial operation and return operation of the movable body 1 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmitting unit 700 ′ and the like already described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. The initial operation and the return operation are performed. A brief description will be given below.

  FIG. 44 is a view schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 1. FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c) show the case where the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows the stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 51 in response to the power-on, and moves the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 44 (b). Thereafter, the second auxiliary control unit 500 returns the movable body 1 to the initial position as shown in FIG. Such an initial operation may be performed each time the power is turned on, whereby the operation of the movable body 1 may be confirmed. Note that even if the conditions for executing another operation are satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without being interrupted. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably.

  FIGS. 44 (d) to 44 (i) show cases where the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 44 (d) shows the stage at which the movable body 1 is not in operation (stage of the initial position).

  FIG. 44 (e) shows the case of moving the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as a rendering operation thereafter. FIG. 44 (f) shows the case where the moving operation for returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed.

  FIG. 44 (g) assumes that the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position after the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 44 (f) elapses, It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to an obstacle. For example, malfunction of the drive source or biting of foreign matter may be considered as the cause.

  In response to this, at the stage of FIG. 44 (h), the recovery operation is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed under at least a condition that it is detected that the movable body 1 is not returned although the return of the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed. In addition, conditions other than not detecting that it is in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmission unit 700 '. Similar to the operation 1, the operation is an operation of returning the movable body 1 to the initial position. There is a limit to travel time.

  By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 1 resumes and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 44 (i), the sensor 54 detects that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the movable body 1 can be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

  FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (j) show a case where the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed but is not improved. In this example, the number of return operations is limited. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times of satisfaction of the conditions for executing the return operation. Here, although the return operation is performed three times, when the movable body 1 does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the movable body 1 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the effect by the movable body 1 can not be produced, but the game itself is continued.

  Note that the limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmitting unit 700 ′ and the like and the movable body 1. In the case of different numbers, either may be larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration requiring a return operation, and may be set smaller for a configuration not requiring a return operation.

  FIG. 45 (a) shows the stage in which the movable body 1 has not yet been rendered. FIG. 45 (b) shows the case where the rendering operation is performed after that, and shows the case where the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 45 (c) shows the case where the movement operation to return to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed. Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 1 is interrupted.

  FIG. 45 (d) assumes that the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. 45 (c) has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (e), the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 45 (f) assumes the case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position after the lapse of the movement time of the first return operation. In FIG. 45 (g), the second recovery operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 45 (h) assumes that the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (i), the third recovery operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 45 (j) assumes that the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Since the movable body 1 did not return to the initial position after the return operation has been performed three times, the return is abandoned and the operation prohibited state of the movable body 1 is set to prohibit the operation.

  The movable body 1 may be maintained in the operation prohibited state without releasing the operation prohibited state by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Good. Since the movable body 1 is disposed at a position not in contact with the player, the sense of incongruity given to the player may be relatively small even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation inhibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102.

<Initial operation of movable body 2, return operation>
The initial operation and return operation of the movable body 2 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmitting unit 700 'etc. already described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. The initial operation and the return operation are performed. A brief description will be given below.

  FIG. 46 is a view schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 2. FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c) show cases where the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 46 (a) shows the stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 61 in response to the power-on, and moves the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 46 (b). At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, it may be possible for a store clerk or the like to confirm the display function. Thereafter, the second auxiliary control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. Such an initial operation may be performed each time the power is turned on, whereby the operation of the movable body 2 may be confirmed. Note that even if the conditions for executing another operation are satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without being interrupted. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably.

  FIGS. 46 (d) to 46 (i) show cases where the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 46 (d) shows the stage at which the movable body 2 is not in operation (stage of the initial position).

  FIG. 46E shows a case where the movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position as a rendering operation thereafter. FIG. 46 (f) shows the case where the moving operation for returning the movable body 2 to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed.

  FIG. 46 (g) assumes that the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is at the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 46 (f). It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 2 is interrupted due to an obstacle. For example, malfunction of the drive source or biting of foreign matter may be considered as the cause.

  In response to this, the recovery operation is performed in the stage of FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed under at least a condition that it is detected that the movable body 2 is not returned although the return of the movable body 2 to the initial position is performed. In addition, conditions other than not detecting that it is in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmission unit 700 '. Similar to the operation 1, the operation is an operation of returning the movable body 2 to the initial position. There is a limit to travel time. As shown in the figure, when the return operation is performed, a default image may be displayed. As a result, the hall clerk may be able to recognize that the return operation is being performed.

  By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 2 is resumed to return to the initial position, and in FIG. 46 (i), the sensor 64 detects that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. Thus, there are cases where the movable body 2 can be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

  FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (j) show the case where the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed but is not improved. In this example, the number of return operations is limited. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times of satisfaction of the conditions for executing the return operation. Here, although the return operation is performed three times, when the movable body 2 does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the movable body 2 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the effect by the movable body 2 can not be made, but the game itself is continued.

  Note that the limit number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmitting unit 700 ′, the movable body 1, and the like, and the movable body 2. In the case of different numbers, either may be larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration requiring a return operation, and may be set smaller for a configuration not requiring a return operation.

  FIG. 47 (a) shows a stage in which the movable body 2 has not been rendered. FIG. 47 (b) shows the case where the rendering operation is performed after that, and shows the case where the movable body 2 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 47 (c) shows the case where the movement operation to return to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed. Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 2 is interrupted.

  FIG. 47 (d) assumes that the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is at the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. 47 (c) has elapsed. In FIG. 47 (e), the first recovery operation is performed correspondingly. The default image is displayed during the recovery operation. FIG. 47 (f) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 2 is at the initial position after the lapse of the movement time of the first return operation. In FIG. 47 (g), the second recovery operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 47 (h) assumes that the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 47I, the third recovery operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 47 (j) assumes that the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is at the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Since the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position although the return operation has been performed three times, the return is abandoned and the operation prohibited state of the movable body 2 is set to prohibit the operation.

  The movable body 2 may be maintained in the operation prohibited state without releasing the operation prohibited state by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102, and the number of return operations may not be reset. Good. Since the movable body 2 is disposed at a position not in contact with the player, the sense of incongruity given to the player may be relatively small even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation inhibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102.

<Initial operation of effect movable body 224, return operation>
The initial operation and return operation of the effect movable body 224 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmitting unit 700 'and the like already described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. The initial operation and return operation of 224 are executed. A brief description will be given below.

  FIG. 48 is a view schematically showing an operation example of the effect movable body 224. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 48A to 48C show the case where the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed at the time of power on.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows the stage when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 in response to the power-on, and moves the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 48 (b). Thereafter, the second auxiliary control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. By performing such initial operation each time the power is turned on, there are cases in which the operation of the effect movable body 224 can be confirmed. Note that even if the conditions for executing another operation are satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without being interrupted. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably.

  FIG.48 (d)-(i) have shown the case where return operation | movement of the presentation movable body 224 is performed at the time of abnormality. FIG. 48 (d) shows a stage (stage of initial position) in which the effect movable body 224 is not operating.

  FIG. 48 (e) shows the case where the effect movable body 224 is moved to the maximum movement position as the effect operation thereafter. FIG. 48 (f) shows the case where the moving operation for returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed.

  In FIG. 48 (g), assuming that the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position after the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 48 (f) has elapsed. It is assumed that the movement of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted due to some obstacle. For example, malfunction of the drive source or biting of foreign matter may be considered as the cause.

  In response to this, the recovery operation is performed in the stage of FIG. That is, in this embodiment, although the effect movable body 224 is about to be returned to the initial position, the return operation is performed at least as a condition that it is detected that the effect movable body 224 is not returned. In addition, conditions other than not detecting that it is in the initial position may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmission unit 700 '. As in the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position. There is a limit to travel time.

  By this return operation, the movement of the effect movable body 224 resumes and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 48 (i), the sensors 74 and 75 detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position. In this way, there are cases where the effect movable body 224 can be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

  FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (j) show the case where the return operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed but is not improved. In this example, the number of return operations is limited. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times of satisfaction of the conditions for executing the return operation. Here, although the return operation is performed three times, when the effect movable body 224 does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the effect can not be produced by the effect movable body 224, but the game itself is continued.

  The limit number of return operations may be the same as or different from that of the transmitting unit 700 ', the movable bodies 1, 2 and so on and the effect movable body 224. In the case of different numbers, either may be larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration requiring a return operation, and may be set smaller for a configuration not requiring a return operation.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows the stage in which the effect movable body 224 has not been provided. FIG. 49 (b) shows the case where the rendering operation is performed thereafter, and shows the case where the presentation movable body 224 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 49 (c) shows the case where the movement operation to return to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed. Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the operation of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted.

  FIG. 49D assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 have not detected that the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. 49C elapses. In FIG. 49 (e), the first return operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 49 (f) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 have not detected that the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (g), the second recovery operation is performed correspondingly. FIG. 49H assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 have not detected that the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (i), the third recovery operation is performed correspondingly.

  FIG. 49 (j) assumes that the sensors 74 and 75 have not detected that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Since the return operation has been performed three times but the effect movable body 224 has not returned to the initial position, the return is not given, the operation movable state of the effect movable body 224 is set, and the operation is prohibited.

  With regard to the effect movable body 224, the operation inhibited state may not be released by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102, and the operation inhibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations is not reset. It is also good. Since the effect movable body 224 is disposed at a position not in contact with the player, the sense of incongruity given to the player may be relatively small even if the operation is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation inhibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door such as the front frame door 106 'or the main body 102.

  The effect movable body 224 is composed of two movable bodies (upper arm portion 224a and forearm portion 224b), is individually movable to the initial position, and can individually detect whether it is individually positioned at the initial position . Therefore, when one movable body does not return to the initial position, the return operation may be performed only for the movable body. For example, when the upper arm portion 224a returns to the initial position but the forearm portion 224b does not return to the initial position, only the forearm portion 224b may perform the return operation. The motion inhibition state may be set individually for the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b, but if either one does not return to the initial position, the entire effect movable body 224 may be in the motion inhibition state. If the whole is set to the operation prohibited state, it may be possible to avoid the situation where the effect movable body 224 repeatedly performs an unnatural operation.

<Related action>
Motions of the movable body can be associated among the plurality of movable bodies. An example will be described below.

<Order of initial operation>
The initial operation may be performed separately or sequentially. FIG. 50 shows an example thereof. Here, the case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are operated in order is exemplified, and the order is set as the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2 → the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows a stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 51 in response to the power-on, moves the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 50 (b), and then moves to FIG. 50 (c). As shown, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 61 to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 50 (d). At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, it may be possible for a store clerk or the like to confirm the display function. Thereafter, the second auxiliary control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 50 (f), and then as shown in FIG. 50 (g) The effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position.

  By performing such a series of initial operations each time the power is turned on, it may be possible to smoothly check the operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224. It should be noted that the initial operation is continued without interruption even if the conditions for executing other operations are satisfied between the start of the initial operation of the movable body 1 and the end of the initial operation of the effect movable body 224. You may do so. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably. In the example of FIG. 50, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted, but the initial operation may be performed for all the movable bodies in order. Alternatively, it may be divided into predetermined groups (for example, a group of movable bodies on the front frame door 106 'side and a group of movable bodies on the game board 200' side), and may be sequentially performed in the groups.

<Initial operation triggered by return operation>
When a part of movable bodies performs the return operation, an initial movement of the remaining part or all of the movable bodies may be performed. In the case where some movable bodies malfunction due to deterioration over time, other movable bodies may also malfunction. Therefore, when a part of the movable bodies performs the return operation, the operation confirmation can be performed by performing the initial operation on the other movable bodies.

  FIG. 51 shows an example thereof. Here, when the return operation is performed on the movable body 1, an example in which the initial operation is performed on the movable body 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described.

  FIG. 51 (a) shows a stage (stage of initial position) in which the movable body 1 is not in operation. FIG. 51 (b) shows the case of moving the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as a rendering operation thereafter. FIG. 51 (c) shows the case where the moving operation for returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed. 51 (d) assumes that the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is at the initial position after the movement time set in the movement operation of FIG. 51 (c) elapses, It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to an obstacle.

  In response to this, the recovery operation is performed in the stage of FIG. By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 1 resumes and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 51 (f), the sensor 54 detects that the movable body 1 is at the initial position.

  Next, an initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. Although not at power-on, since the movement of the movable body 1 is temporarily interrupted, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed just in case. The second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 61 to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position, as shown in FIG. 51 (g). At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, it may be possible for a store clerk or the like to confirm the display function. After that, the second sub control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 51 (h). Thus, the operation of the movable body 2 can be confirmed.

  Subsequently, an initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is also performed. The second sub control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 51 (i). After that, the second sub control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the operation check of the effect movable body 224 can be performed.

  Although the example in FIG. 51 is based on the condition that the return operation is performed for one movable body, the condition may be that the return operation is performed for a plurality of movable bodies. In some cases, it can be prevented that the initial operation is performed in unnecessary large numbers. FIG. 52 shows an example thereof. In the example of the figure, the example which performs initial operation of the effect movable body 224 on condition that return operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows the stage in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are not in operation (stage of the initial position). FIG. 52 (b) shows the case of moving the movable bodies 1 and 2 as the rendering operation thereafter. FIG. 52 (c) shows the case where the moving operation for returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect.

  FIG. 52 (d) assumes a case where it is not detected that the movable bodies 1 and 2 are at the initial position after each moving time set in the moving operation of FIG. 52 (c), It is assumed that the movement of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is interrupted due to an obstacle.

  A return operation is performed in response to this. Here, the return operation is performed in the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2, but may be simultaneous. First, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed, and it is detected that the movable body 1 has returned to the initial position in FIG. 52 (f). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed, and it is detected that the movable body 2 has returned to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (h).

  Subsequently, an initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed. The second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 52 (i). Thereafter, the second auxiliary control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (j). Thereby, the operation check of the effect movable body 224 can be performed.

  In the above description, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 have been described as an example, but as for the other movable bodies, when part of the movable bodies executes the return operation, the remaining part or all of the movable bodies You may do the initial action of the body. However, since the transparent unit 700 'and the chance button 700 are arranged at positions where the player can contact, the player may feel discomfort when the initial operation is automatically activated. The 'and' chance button 700 may perform the initial operation only when the power is turned on.

  Further, as the conditions for executing the initial operation by the return operation of the other movable body, for example, when the return operation of the other movable body has reached a predetermined number of times, return of the movable body Various conditions can be set, such as when the total number of operations reaches a predetermined number, or when the return operation of a plurality of movable bodies is performed within a predetermined time. It is.

<Summary of related operation>
As related operations, although the order of the initial operation and the initial operation triggered by the return operation have been described, FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the summary.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a timing chart of an example of the order of the initial operation, and shows an example in which each initial operation of the fourth movable body, the fifth movable body, and the sixth movable body is sequentially performed. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body is the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 53 (b) is a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation. The upper row shows the initial operation of the fifth movable body and the initial operation of the sixth movable body when the fourth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the rendering operation and returning operation, but performs the returning operation. Shows an example in which is performed sequentially. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body is the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is the effect movable body 224. In the middle stage, as another variation, the fifth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the rendering operation and returning operation, and performs the initial operation of the fourth movable body when performing the returning operation, the sixth An example in which the initial operation of the movable body is sequentially performed is shown. In the lower part, as another variation, the sixth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the rendering operation and returning operation, but performs the returning operation, the initial operation of the fourth movable body, the sixth An example in which the initial operation of the movable body is sequentially performed is shown.

  FIG. 53 (c) is also a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation, but is an example of performing the initial operation of another movable body triggered by the return operation of the two movable bodies. The fourth movable body does not return to the initial position when performing the rendering operation and returning operation, and does not return to the initial position when the fifth movable body performs the rendering operation and returning operation, the fourth movable body The return operation and the return operation of the fifth movable body are sequentially performed. Then, an example is shown in which the initial operation of the sixth movable body is performed. In the specific example described above, the fourth movable body is the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is the effect movable body 224.

<Example of motion control of movable body>
An operation control example of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the second sub control unit 500 executes drive control of the motor 51 of the movable body 1, the motor 61 of the movable body 2, and the motors 71 and 72 of the effect movable body 224. FIG. 54 (a) shows a processing example included in the movable body control processing of S713 of FIG. 10 (a).

In S1461, a fourth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to operation control of the movable body 1 is performed. In S1462, a fifth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing relating to operation control of the movable body 2 is performed. A sixth movable body control process is performed in S1463. Here, processing relating to the operation control of the effect movable body 224 is performed.

  Here, the control states of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are individually set, in the same manner as in the transmitting unit 700 ′ and the like. The control state includes at least the first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state in which execution of the initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which the operation prohibited state is set.

  FIG. 54 (b) is a flowchart showing the fourth movable body control process of S1461. In S1471, it is determined whether the fourth state is set to the movable body 1 or not. When it corresponds, it progresses to S1478, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to S1472. In S1472, it is determined whether the first state is set to the movable body 1 or not. If it does correspond, the process proceeds to S1473. If it does not correspond, the process proceeds to S1474.

  In step S1473, settings relating to the execution of the initial operation (such as drive settings) and processing relating to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1474, it is determined whether the second state is set to the movable body 1 or not. If it does correspond to S1475, if it does not correspond to S1476.

  In step S1475, settings relating to the execution of the return operation (such as drive settings) and processing relating to monitoring whether the return operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1476, it is determined whether the third state is set to the movable body 1 or not. If it does, the process proceeds to S1477. If it does not, the process proceeds to S1478. In step S1477, command related processing (such as processing related to a command return value and a received command) is performed.

  In step S1478, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1479. If the condition is not satisfied, the process of one unit ends. In S1478 and S1479, the control state of the movable body 1 is updated. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. When it is detected that the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. Further, in the case of performing the initial operation triggered by the return operation, the first state is set when the fifth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the fifth movable body control process of S1462. In S1481, it is determined whether the fourth state is set to the movable body 2 or not. If it does, the process proceeds to step S1488. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S1482. In S1482, it is determined whether the first state is set to the movable body 1 or not. If it does, the process proceeds to S1483, and if it does not, the process proceeds to S1484.

  In S1483, setting (such as drive setting) relating to the execution of the initial operation and processing (such as position detection by a sensor) related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful are performed. In S1484, it is determined whether or not the movable body 2 is in the second state. If it does correspond to S1485, if it does not correspond to S1486.

  In step S1485, settings relating to execution of the return operation (such as drive settings) and processing relating to monitoring whether the return operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1486, it is determined whether the third state is set to the movable body 2. If it does correspond to S1487, if it does not correspond to S1488. In S1487, command related processing (processing related to a command return value and a received command, etc.) is performed.

  In step S1488, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the process advances to step S1489. If it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is ended. In S1488 and S1489, the control state of the movable body 2 is updated. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. When it is detected that the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. Further, in the case of performing the initial operation triggered by the return operation, when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation, the first state is set.

  FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing the sixth movable body control process of S1463. In S1491, it is determined whether the fourth state is set in the effect movable body 224 or not. If it does correspond, the process advances to step S1498; otherwise, the process advances to step S1492. In S1492, it is determined whether the first state is set in the effect movable body 224 or not. If it does, the process proceeds to S1493, and if it does not, the process proceeds to S1494.

  In S1493, setting (such as drive setting) relating to the execution of the initial operation and processing (such as position detection by a sensor) related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful are performed. In S1494, it is determined whether the second state is set for the effect movable body 224 or not. If it does, the process proceeds to S1495. If it does not, the process proceeds to S1496.

  In step S1495, settings relating to the execution of the return operation (such as drive settings) and processing relating to monitoring whether the return operation is successful (such as position detection by a sensor) are performed. In S1496, it is determined whether the third state is set in the effect movable body 224 or not. If it does correspond, the process advances to step S1497; otherwise, the process advances to step S1498. In step S1497, command related processing (such as processing related to a command return value and a received command) is performed.

  In step S1498, it is determined whether a state change condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1499. If the condition is not satisfied, the process of one unit ends. In S1498 and S1499, a process of updating the control state of the effect movable body 224 is performed. For example, the third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the rendering operation, or the like. When it is detected that the effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position but not returned, the second state is set. If the number of return operations has reached the limit number, the fourth state is set. Further, in the case of performing the initial operation triggered by the return operation, when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation, the first state is set.

  Next, control of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the drive sources (step motors 51, 61, 71 and 72) for driving the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a) and 56 (b) show interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 56 (a), in S1501, a process of outputting a signal from the motor driver to the motor is performed. This drives the motor. In S1502, sensor detection processing is performed. Here, detection results of the sensors (54, 64, 74, 75) for detecting the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are acquired. In S1503, another process is performed. Thus, the first drive interrupt process of one unit is completed.

  56 (b), the motor control process for the operation of the movable body 1 is performed in S1504, the motor control process for the operation of the movable body 2 is performed in S1505, and in the operation of the effect movable body 224 in S1506. Perform motor control processing. Thus, the second drive interrupt process of one unit is completed. The control shown in FIG. 28C can be adopted as the motor control process of S1504 to S1506.

<Example of movable body mounted on movable body>
FIG. 57 shows an example of the movable body mounted on the movable body. In the example of the figure, the configuration in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R are applied to the shielding device 246 is illustrated. The shielding device 246 includes the drive mechanism 8 described above, a movable body 246a 'replacing the left door 246a, and a movable body 246b' replacing the right door 246b. The configuration of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ is substantially the same as the left doors 246a and 246b, but the shape, size, and the like are different. Although the drive mechanism 8 is configured as described above, here, the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are reciprocated in the left and right direction. The initial positions of the movable bodies 246a ′ and 246b ′ are the positions shown in FIG. The sensors 85a, 85b are here arranged to detect the movable bodies 246a ', 246b' in their initial position.

  The movable body 9L is provided on the movable body 246a ', and the movable body 9R is provided on the movable body 246b'. The movable body 9L is a plate-like member in which a pair of projections 9a having a blade tip shape protrudes from a circular portion, and is rotatably supported by the movable body 246a 'with the center of the circular portion as a rotation center. A detection piece 9b is formed at a position deviated from the rotation center in the circular portion.

  The movable body 9R is also the same as the movable member 9L, and is a plate-like member in which a pair of projections 9b in the shape of a blade tip protrudes from a circular portion, and can freely rotate on the movable body 246b 'with the center of the circular portion as the rotation center. It is supported. A detection piece 9b is formed at a position deviated from the rotation center in the circular portion. Movable bodies 9R and 9L may be members whose one part (for example, projections 9a and 9b) has permeability, and conversely, they may be members which do not have permeability.

  The movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are respectively provided with drive mechanisms for independently driving the movable bodies 9L and 9R. The drive mechanism includes a drive source 91 such as a step motor, a drive pulley 92, a driven pulley 93, and a belt 94 wound around these pulleys. The drive sources 91, 91 are supported by the corresponding movable bodies 246a ', 246b'. The drive pulley 92 is attached to the output shaft of the drive source 91 and is rotated by the drive source 91. The driven pulleys 92, 92 are attached to the central axes of rotation of the movable bodies 9L, 9R. When the drive source 91 is driven, the belt 94 travels, and the movable bodies 9L and 9R rotate. By switching the rotation direction of the drive source 91, the rotation directions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are also switched.

  The movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are provided with sensors 94 and 94, respectively. The sensor 94 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 9b is disposed so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. The position of the movable bodies 9L and 9R can be detected by detecting the detection piece 9b with the sensor 94. In the case of this embodiment, when the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R shown in FIG. 57 are at the initial position and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are at the initial position, the detection piece 9b is detected by the sensor 94. There is. It goes without saying that the positions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R detectable by the sensor 94 are not absolute positions but relative positions with respect to the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b'.

  Next, operation examples of the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' and the movable bodies 9L and 9R will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, when the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are in the initial position and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial position, substantially the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not covered by them It is in. When the movable bodies 9L and 9R are at the initial position, the overlapping range of the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' is the largest. In other words, the portions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R protruding from the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' in a front view are the smallest.

  As described above, the movable bodies 9L and 9R can operate to rotate them. However, when the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b are rotated, their postures change, and the range in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R overlap the movable bodies 246a' and 246b 'changes. In other words, the portions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R that protrude from the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' in a front view change.

  When the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are at the initial position, interference with the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8 may occur when the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R change. Therefore, control of effects by the movable bodies 9L and 9R is performed while restricting the maximum amount of change of the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the positions of the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b'. Although the interference between the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8 and the movable bodies 9L and 9R is taken into consideration here, the effects of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are taken into consideration in consideration of the interference with other components such as a harness. Control may be performed.

  Now, when the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' are at the initial position, the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the state of the initial position, and the effect of rotating the movable bodies 9L and 9R is not performed. When performing effects to rotate, an operation in which the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is the smallest range, and at least a part of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is positioned in at least one of the regions excluding the specific region (for example, side wall portion Operation in a region not interfering with 81b and 81c may be performed. Conversely, the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated such that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with the side wall portions 81b and 81c, as a kind of effect.

  When the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' move from the initial position, effects of the movable bodies 9L and 9R can be performed while restricting the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the movement amount. FIG. 58 (a) shows the movable body 246a 'moved from its initial position.

  In the example of the figure, the movable body 246a 'is moved to a position where the movable body 246a' slightly overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a front view. At this time, a part of the projection 9a of the movable body 9L overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player who is looking at the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state of drawing attention.

  FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture is changed by reciprocating the movable body 9L within a predetermined angle range. Reciprocating motion may be performed continuously as vibration motion. In the position where the movable body 9L is rotated most from the initial position, the overlapping range of the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' becomes smaller than the initial position. In other words, the portions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R protruding from the movable bodies 246a 'and 246b' in a front view become larger than the initial position.

  As described above, by performing the operation of the movable body 9L while restricting the amount of rotation, it may be possible to perform various effects while preventing damage to the movable body and the configuration around it.

  In FIG. 59 (a), the movable body 246a 'is moved to a position where the movable body 246a' entirely overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the movable body 9L is at the initial position, and substantially the whole of the movable body 9L overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player watching the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 draws attention.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture is changed by rotating the movable body 9L by 360 degrees. In this position, even if the movable body 9L is rotated 360 degrees, it does not interfere with the side wall portions 81b and 81c, and it is not necessary to regulate the change in posture of the movable body 9L.

  Even when the movable body 246a 'is positioned at the position of FIG. 59 (a), the operating range of the movable body 9L may be restricted in relation to the movable body 9R. FIG. 60 shows an example thereof. In the example of the figure, the position of the movable body 246a 'is at the same position as that of FIG. 59 (a). However, the movable body 246 b ′ is moved to a position where the movable body 246 b ′ entirely overlaps with the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, when the movable body 9L is rotated, interference with the movable body 9R may occur. Conversely, when the movable body 9R is rotated, interference with the movable body 9L may occur.

  Therefore, the effect of rotating the movable bodies 9L and 9R is not performed. When performing effects to rotate, the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is set to the smallest range, but the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated so that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with one another .

<Another example of related operation>
Another example of the related operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 164. Here, related operations of the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b will be mainly described.

<Order of initial operation>
The initial operation may be performed separately or sequentially. FIG. 155 shows an example. Here, the initial operation is performed in the order of the left door 246 a and the right door 246 b → the movable body 1 → the movable body 2.

  FIG. 154 (a) shows the stage where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. When the power is turned on, as the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, they are closed and opened as shown in FIGS. 154 (b) and (c).

  Subsequently, an initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 51 in response to power on, moves the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 154 (d), and then as shown in FIG. 154 (e) The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 61 to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 154 (f). At this time, by displaying a default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, it may be possible for a store clerk or the like to confirm the display function. After that, the second sub control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 154 (g).

  By performing such a series of initial operations each time the power is turned on, it may be possible to smoothly confirm the operations of the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b. The initial operation is not interrupted even if the conditions for executing other operations are satisfied between the start of the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b and the end of the initial operation of the movable body 2. May be continued. By giving priority to completion of the initial operation, there are cases where operation confirmation can be performed more reliably. In the example of FIG. 154, the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b are targeted, but the initial operation may be performed on all the movable bodies in order. Alternatively, it may be divided into predetermined groups (for example, a group of movable bodies on the front frame door 106 'side and a group of movable bodies on the game board 200' side), and may be sequentially performed in the groups.

<Initial operation triggered by not being at initial position>
When it is detected that a part of the movable bodies is not at the initial position at a predetermined timing, an initial operation of the remaining part or all of the movable bodies may be performed. In the case where some movable bodies malfunction due to deterioration over time, other movable bodies may also malfunction. Therefore, when it is detected that some of the movable bodies are not at the initial position at the initial position, it is possible to check the operation by performing the initial operation on the other movable bodies. In addition, about the movable body detected that it is not in the initial position, it is not necessary to perform the return operation, but it is preferable to perform the return operation. The return operation in this case may be an operation only for returning to the initial position, but may be the same operation as the initial operation.

<Example 1>
FIG. 155 shows an example. Here, the case where it is detected whether or not the movable body is in the initial position is illustrated at the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol (the start timing of the variation display of the decoration symbol).

  FIG. 155 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 155 (b) shows a case where control for moving the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 155 (c) is FIG. 155 (b) The case where control which returns the movable body 1 to an initial position from the state of is performed is shown. FIG. 155 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 has not returned to the initial position despite the control of FIG. 155 (c). At the stage of FIG. 155 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 155 (e) shows a state in which the next variation pattern of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 155 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 1 is at the initial position.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155 (f), the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed. The example of the figure illustrates the case where the movable body 1 returns to the initial position by the return operation. The return operation here may be control for returning the movable body 1 from the current position to the initial position in control, or may be the same control as the initial operation. Note that depending on the configuration of the drive mechanism of the movable body 1, even if the control is the same as the initial operation, it may appear as an operation that the movable body 1 returns from the current position to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  Since it was not detected that the movable body 1 was in the initial position at the stage of FIG. 155 (e), the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. In the present embodiment, following the return operation of the movable body 1, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 155 (g), the movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position, and as shown in FIG. 155 (h), the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position. As a result, as shown in FIG. 155 (i), both the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to their initial positions. Although the initial operation of the movable body 2 is the same as the initial movement at power on and the control movement range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode), the stationary time is shortened or another operation (for example, light emission of LED The operation may be completed in a shorter time by not performing the above.

  In the example of FIG. 155, the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b is not performed, but may be performed. Also, the return operation of the movable body 1 and the initial operation of the movable body 2 may be performed in parallel. In addition, after the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed first, the return operation of the movable body 1 may be performed.

  In addition, after the movement of a part of one movable body is performed, the movement of another movable body may be performed, and thereafter, the remaining movement of one movable body may be performed.

  For example, when the movable body 1 is not positioned at the initial position, the movable body 2 moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position, and the movable body 2 moves to the initial position May be

  Also, the operation order can adopt various orders. For example, when the movable body 1 is not positioned at the initial position, the movable body 1 moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position, and the movable body 2 moves to the initial position May be Also, for example, when the movable body 2 is not located at the initial position, the movable body 1 moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position, and the movable body 2 is at the initial position You may move.

<Example 2>
FIG. 156 shows another example. In the example of FIG. 155, the example in which the movable body 1 is stopped at the maximum movement position is illustrated at the stage of FIG. 155 (e), but in the example of FIG. 156, the movable body 1 is between the initial position and the maximum movement position. The example which stopped at the position in the middle of is illustrated.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows a case in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 156 (b) shows a case where control for moving the movable body 1 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 156 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is FIG. 156 (b) The case where the movable body 1 has stopped in the middle of moving to the maximum movement position from the state of is shown. At the stage of FIG. 156 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 156 (e) shows a state in which the next variation pattern of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 156 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 1 is at the initial position.

  Therefore, the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed as shown in FIG. 156 (f). The return operation here is exemplified in the case of the same control as the initial operation in control. In the example of the figure, the movable body 1 moves to the maximum movement position, and FIG. 156 (g) illustrates the case where the movable body 1 returns to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  Since it was not detected that the movable body 1 is at the initial position at the stage of FIG. 156 (e), the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. In the present embodiment, following the return operation of the movable body 1, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 156 (h), the movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position, and as shown in FIG. 156 (i), the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position. As a result, as shown in FIG. 156 (j), both the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to their initial positions. Although the initial operation of the movable body 2 is the same as the initial movement at power on and the control movement range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode), the stationary time is shortened or another operation (for example, light emission of LED The operation may be completed in a shorter time by not performing the above.

  In the example of FIG. 156, the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b is not performed, but may be performed. Also, the return operation of the movable body 1 and the initial operation of the movable body 2 may be performed in parallel. In addition, after the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed first, the return operation of the movable body 1 may be performed.

<Example 3>
FIG. 157 shows another example. The example of FIG. 157 is a processing example when it is not detected that the movable body 2 is at the initial position.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where control to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 157 (a), and FIG. 157 (c) is FIG. 157 (b) The case where control which returns the movable body 2 to an initial position from the state of is performed is shown. FIG. 157 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position despite the control of FIG. 157 (c). At the stage of FIG. 157 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 157 (e) shows a state in which the next variation pattern of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 157 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 2 is at the initial position.

  Therefore, the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed as shown in FIG. The example of the figure illustrates the case where the movable body 2 returns to the initial position by the return operation. The return operation here may be control only for returning the movable body 2 from the current position to the initial position in control, or may be the same control as the initial operation. Note that depending on the configuration of the drive mechanism of the movable body 2, even if the control is the same as the initial operation, it may appear as an operation that the movable body 2 returns from the current position to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  Since it was not detected that the movable body 2 was at the initial position at the stage of FIG. 157 (e), the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed. In the present embodiment, following the return operation of the movable body 2, the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed. The movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 157 (g), and the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position as shown in FIG. 157 (h). As a result, as shown in FIG. 157 (i), both the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to their initial positions. Although the initial operation of the movable body 1 is the same as the initial movement at power-on and the control movement range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode), the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED The operation may be completed in a shorter time than the initial operation by not performing the above.

  In the example of FIG. 157, the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b is not performed, but may be performed. Also, the return operation of the movable body 2 and the initial operation of the movable body 1 may be performed in parallel. In addition, after the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed first, the return operation of the movable body 2 may be performed.

<Example 4>
FIG. 158 shows another example. Although the example of FIG. 158 is a processing example when it is not detected that the movable body 2 is at the initial position as in the example of FIG. 157, the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed first.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 158 (b) shows a case where control to move the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 158 (a), and FIG. 158 (c) is FIG. The case where control which returns the movable body 2 to an initial position from the state of is performed is shown. FIG. 158 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position despite the control of FIG. 158 (c). At the stage of FIG. 158 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 158 (e) shows a state where the next variable pattern display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 158 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 2 is in the initial position.

  Therefore, the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed. As shown in FIG. 158 (f), the movable body 1 is moved to the maximum movement position, and as shown in FIG. 158 (g), the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position. Although the initial operation of the movable body 1 is the same as the initial movement at power-on and the control movement range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode), the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED The operation may be completed in a shorter time by not performing the above.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (h), return operation of the movable body 2 is performed. The example of the figure illustrates the case where the movable body 2 returns to the initial position by the return operation. The return operation here may be control only for returning the movable body 2 from the current position to the initial position in control, or may be the same control as the initial operation. Note that depending on the configuration of the drive mechanism of the movable body 2, even if the control is the same as the initial operation, it may appear as an operation that the movable body 2 returns from the current position to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 158 (i), both the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the initial position. In the example of FIG. 158, the initial operation of the left door 246a and the right door 246b is not performed, but may be performed.

<Example 5>
FIG. 159 shows another example. Although the example of FIG. 159 is a processing example when it is not detected that the movable body 2 is in the initial position as in the example of FIG. 158, the processing when it is detected that the left door 246a is not also in the initial position. It is an example.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. FIG. 159 (b) shows a case where control for moving the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 159 (a), and FIG. 159 (c) is FIG. 159 (b) The case where control which returns the movable body 2 to an initial position from the state of is performed is shown. FIG. 159 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position despite the control of FIG. 159 (c), and the left door 246a is located at the initial position. It shows no condition. The left door 246a should be located at the initial position, but is not at the initial position because it has stopped during the rendering operation, or has unexpectedly moved during the maintenance work of the store clerk. At the stage of FIG. 159 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 159 (e) shows a state in which the next variation pattern of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 159 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 2 and the left door 246a are in the initial position.

  In this example, first, the return operation of the left door 246a is performed first. Next, since it was not detected that the movable body 2 was at the initial position, the initial operation of the movable body 1 which is the related movable body is performed, and finally, the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed. The return operation of the left door 246a may be performed last, or each operation may be performed in parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (f), the return operation of the left door 246a is performed, and in the example of the figure, the left door 246a is returned to the initial position. The return operation here may be control for only returning the left door 246a from the current position to the initial position in control, or may be the same control as the initial operation. Note that depending on the configuration of the drive mechanism of the left door 246a, even if the control is the same as the initial operation, the left door 246a may appear to be an operation that only returns from the current position to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  Thereafter, as in the case of Example 4, the initial operation (FIGS. 159 (g) and (h)) of the movable body 1 and the return operation (FIG. 159 (i)) of the movable body 2 are performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 159 (i), the movable body 1, the movable body 2 and the left door 246a return to their initial positions.

<Example 6>
When the variation display time of the special symbol is short as in the case of the time saving state, the start timing of the next variation display may be reached before the initial operation or the return operation is completed. In this case, although the variable display may be made to wait, since the progress of the game is delayed, the initial operation or the return operation may be continued while the variable display is started. In this case, at the start timing of the variable display, it may not be detected whether or not it is at the initial position, or the detection result may be canceled so that the ongoing initial operation or return operation can be completed.

  FIG. 160 shows an example thereof. The example of FIG. 160 is an example of processing when it is not detected that the movable body 2 and the left door 246a are at the initial position, as in the example of FIG.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. 160 (b) shows a case where control for moving the movable body 2 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 160 (a), and FIG. 160 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 160 (b) The case where control which returns the movable body 2 to an initial position from the state of is performed is shown. FIG. 160 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position despite the control of FIG. 160 (c), and the left door 246a is located at the initial position. It shows no condition. The left door 246a should be located at the initial position, but is not at the initial position because it has stopped during the rendering operation, or has unexpectedly moved during the maintenance work of the store clerk. At the stage of FIG. 160 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol this time is finished.

  FIG. 160 (e) shows a state in which the next variable pattern of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, the detection results of the sensors 54, 64, 85a, 85b are referred to, and it is detected whether the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the left door 246a, and the right door 246b are at initial positions. In the example of FIG. 160 (e), it is not detected that the movable body 2 and the left door 246a are in the initial position.

  In this example, first, the return operation of the left door 246a is performed first. Next, since it was not detected that the movable body 2 was at the initial position, the initial operation of the movable body 1 which is the related movable body is performed, and finally, the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed. The return operation of the left door 246a may be performed last, or each operation may be performed in parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the return operation of the left door 246a is performed, and in the example of FIG. 160, the left door 246a is returned to the initial position. The return operation here may be control for only returning the left door 246a from the current position to the initial position in control, or may be the same control as the initial operation. Note that depending on the configuration of the drive mechanism of the left door 246a, even if the control is the same as the initial operation, the left door 246a may appear to be an operation that only returns from the current position to the initial position. When the same control as the initial operation is performed as the return operation, although the control movable range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) By not performing this operation, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  Thereafter, as in the case of Example 5, the initial operation (FIGS. 160 (g) and (h)) of the movable body 1 and the return operation (FIG. 160 (i)) of the movable body 2 are performed. Although the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped at the stage of FIG. 16 (h), the initial operation of the movable body 1 is continued, and the subsequent returning operation of the movable body 2 is also performed. The variation of the next special symbol may be started during the initial operation of the movable body 1 or during the return operation of the movable body 2. In addition, after completion | finish of the initial stage operation | movement of the movable body 1, the return operation of the movable body 2 may not be performed immediately, but may be performed after the fluctuation | variation start of the following special symbol.

  By the above, as shown in FIG. 160 (i), the movable body 1, the movable body 2, and the left door 246a are in the state of being returned to the initial position.

<Example 7>
The case of a structure in which movable bodies to be related operations are attached to each other will be described. FIG. 161 exemplifies the case where the movable body 2 is attached to the movable body 7, and both are targets of related operations.

  FIG. 161 (g) is an exploded front view of the movable body 2 and the movable body 7, and FIG. 161 (h) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in which the center in the width direction of the movable body 2 and the movable body 7 is a cutting plane. The movable body 2 is provided with a horizontally extending shaft 2a at the upper and lower center positions, and the shaft 2a is supported by the movable body 7 so that the movable body 2 can freely rotate around the shaft 2a. ing. The movable body 2 is rotated about the shaft 2a by a drive mechanism (not shown). The movable body 2 basically has the above-described configuration, but in the present example, the display device 2b of the electronic image has a laminated structure in which the display body 2c such as characters is disposed on the back surface. A plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs) 2d for illuminating the display body 2c are built in. The initial position of the movable body 2 is a position where the display device 2b faces the front (for example, the state shown in FIG. 161A), and a sensor (not shown) detects whether or not the display 2b is at the initial position. The maximum movement position of the movable body 2 is a position (for example, the state in FIG. 161D) in which the front and back are reversed by rotating 180 degrees about the axis 2a.

  The movable body 7 is a concave and plate-like member, and the movable body 2 is disposed in the recess. A character (a part of a character of Yoshimune) is formed on the surface of the movable body 7, and a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs) 2d for illuminating the surface are built in the inside thereof. The movable body 7 can be reciprocated up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown), and its initial position is a position lower than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the position of FIG. 161 (a)). It is detected whether or not the sensor is at the initial position. The maximum movement position of the movable body 7 is a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 161 (b)) which appears in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 161A to 161F show an example of the rendering operation by the movable body 2 and the movable body 7. FIG. 161 (a) shows the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the variation of the decorative symbol. The movable body 2 and the movable body 7 are both in the initial position. FIG. 161 (b) shows a case where control to move the movable body 7 to the maximum movement position is performed as a rendering operation from the state of FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (c) shows a state (rotation by about 90 degrees) in the middle of moving the movable body 2 from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and FIG. 161 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position (About 180 degrees rotation) is shown. In FIG. 161 (d), the characters "Yoshimune" are displayed by the movable body 2 and the movable body 7, and it may be possible to surprise the player. At this time, the light emitting elements 2c and 7a may emit light.

  FIG. 161 (e) shows a case where control for returning the movable body 2 to the initial position is performed, and FIG. 161 (f) shows a case where control for returning the movable body 7 to the initial position is performed.

  The above constitutes a series of rendering operations, but in this example, it is assumed that this rendering operation is an initial operation performed when the power is turned on. In the initial operation, although the control movement range of the movable body (in other words, the movement mode) is the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of the light emitting elements 2c and 7a) are performed. The operation may be completed in a shorter time by avoiding the above.

  FIG. 162 shows an example of the initial operation of the movable bodies 2 and 7 of FIG. 161 triggered by the absence of the initial position.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows the case where the movable body 7 is in the initial position, but the movable body 2 is not in the initial position and is in a position rotated about 90 degrees. The movable body 2 should be originally located at the initial position, but a part of the store clerk's body touches the movable body 2 by accident during the accidental collision with the game ball or the maintenance work of the clerk It is assumed that it has rotated.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, detection results of each sensor including a sensor that detects whether or not the movable bodies 2 and 7 are at the initial position are referred to, and the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the movable body 7, the left door 246a and the right door It is detected whether 246b is in the initial position. In the example of FIG. 162 (b), it is not detected that the movable body 2 is at the initial position.

  Therefore, the initial operation of the movable body 7 is performed. As shown in FIG. 162 (c), the movable body 7 is moved to the maximum movement position. After the movable body 7 is positioned at the maximum movement position, the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed as shown in FIG. 162 (d) before returning to the initial position. After performing the movement of a part of one movable body in this manner, the movement of another movable body may be performed, and then the remaining movement of one movable body may be performed.

  The example of the figure illustrates the case where the movable body 2 returns to the initial position by the return operation. Although the return operation of the movable body 2 is controlled so as to return from the current position to the initial position with priority given to short-term return to the initial position, the control may be the same control as the initial operation. In this case, although the initial movement upon power-on and the movable range (the movement manner in control) of the movable body in control are the same, the stationary time is shortened or other operations (for example, light emission of LED) are not performed. By doing this, the operation may be completed in a shorter time.

  After the return operation of the movable body 2, the initial operation of the movable body 7 is resumed, and the movable body 7 is returned to the initial position as shown in FIG. 162 (e). As a result, both the movable body 2 and the movable body 7 return to their initial positions. Although the initial operation of the movable body 1, the left door 246a and the right door 246b is not performed in the example of FIG. 166, it may be performed. Also, the return operation of the movable body 2 and the initial operation of the movable body 7 may be performed in parallel. In addition, after the initial operation of the movable body 7 is performed, the return operation of the movable body 2 may be performed. Conversely, after the return operation of the movable body 2 is performed, the initial operation of the movable body 7 may be started.

  FIG. 163 shows another example of the initial operation of the movable bodies 2 and 7 of FIG. 161 triggered by the absence of the initial position.

  FIG. 163 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 7 stops at the maximum movement position and does not return to the initial position. FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, detection results of each sensor including a sensor that detects whether or not the movable bodies 2 and 7 are at the initial position are referred to, and the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the movable body 7, the left door 246a and the right door It is detected whether 246b is in the initial position. In the example of FIG. 163 (b), it is not detected that the movable body 7 is at the initial position.

  Therefore, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 163 (c), the movable body 2 is moved to the maximum movement position, and as shown in FIG. 163 (d), the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (e), the movable body 7 is returned.

  FIG. 164 shows an example in which only the return operation is performed on the movable bodies 2 and 7 in FIG. 161 without performing the initial operation triggered by the absence of the initial position.

  FIG. 164 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 7 stops at the maximum movement position and does not return to the initial position. FIG. 164 (b) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. At this timing, detection results of each sensor including a sensor that detects whether or not the movable bodies 2 and 7 are at the initial position are referred to, and the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the movable body 7, the left door 246a and the right door It is detected whether 246b is in the initial position. In the example of FIG. 164 (b), it is not detected that the movable body 7 is at the initial position.

  In the example of FIG. 164, it is confirmed that the movable body 2 is at the initial position, so the initial operation is not performed, and only the return operation of the movable body 7 is performed as shown in FIG. 164 (c).

<Summary of the embodiment>
A1. The above game stand (for example 100)
Display means (for example, 208) which can be displayed;
An operable movable body (e.g. 1);
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (e.g. 32, 33);
Changing means (for example, 31) capable of changing the direction of light from the light emitting means at least to the player side;
A decorative body (for example 4),
A game console equipped with
The movable body is a movable body located closer to the player than the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
The changing means is a means located closer to the player than the movable body (for example, FIG. 31),
The decorative body is a decorative body located closer to the player than the change means (for example, FIG. 31),
At least a part of the movable body may overlap at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
The changing means is a means at least a part of which overlaps at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
A first gap (for example, G1) is formed between the display means and the movable body,
A second gap (for example, G2) is formed between the movable body and the change means, and
A third gap (for example, G3) is formed between the change means and the decorative body,
The third gap at least communicates with the second gap (eg, FIG. 31),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition to being able to vary the effects of the game console, there are cases where a store clerk can cope with the movable body at the time of failure of the movable body. Also, since the movable body can be accessed from the gap, and the movable body can be fixed by using a foam cushioning material or the like at the time of transportation of the game table, the small size of the foam cushioning material can be used, thereby reducing the cost during transportation. There are times when you can.

A2. The second gap at least communicates with the first gap (eg, FIG. 31),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the movable body can be fixed not to be in contact with the display means with a bubble buffer material or the like at the time of transportation of the game stand, and the movable body and the display means can be prevented from being damaged. is there.

A3. The decorative body is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the ends of the change means (for example, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the end of the change means is covered from the front, the appearance quality may be able to be improved.

A4. The decorative body is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the movable body located at an initial position (for example, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the player may be surprised when the movable body operates.

A5. The light emitting unit is a unit that may emit light during at least a part of the operation period of the movable body.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it is possible to perform effects by the operation of the movable body and the light of the change means, and it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

  The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The changing means may be means located at a position not overlapping at least a part of the movable body located at the initial position. It may be easier to access the movable body.

  The light emitting device further comprises a second light emitting means capable of emitting light, the decoration is at least partially transparent or translucent, and the second light emitting means is a means located at a position behind the decoration. It is also good. In some cases, the effect of the decorative body can be improved by the light emission of the second light emitting means.

  The changing means may be located at a position covering all of the movable body located at the initial position. The change means may overlap a half or more of the display area of the display means. There are cases where the rendering effect by the change means can be improved.

  The ball entry blocking member may be disposed closer to the player than the change means. Another movable body may be disposed between the changing means and the ball entry preventing member. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the entry of the game ball and reduce the failure of the movable body or the like.

  The change means may be a light emitting panel formed of a light guide member. The light emitting panel may be capable of emitting light by light from a lateral direction. The light emitting means may be disposed at a place other than the upper end of the light emitting panel. In some cases, the degree of freedom in selecting the arrangement of light sources is improved.

  The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the end of the change means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the lateral end of the changing means and the movable body in a predetermined position. The predetermined position may be an initial position of the movable body. A gap may be formed in accordance with the configuration of the game console to facilitate maintenance.

  The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the end of the change means and the decoration. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end of the change means and the decorative body. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the lateral end of the change means and the decoration. A gap may be formed in accordance with the configuration of the game console to facilitate maintenance.

  At the upper end portion of the game board, a gap capable of accessing the movable body may be formed. At the side end of the game board, a gap that can access the movable body may be formed. It may be easy to maintain.

  The width of the first gap may be constant or at least partially different. The width of the second gap may be constant or at least partially different. The width of the third gap may be constant or at least partially different. The width of at least a portion of the third gap may be larger, equal to, or smaller than the width of a portion of the second gap. The width of at least a portion of the third gap may be greater than, the same as, or smaller than the width of a portion of the first gap. The width of at least a portion of the second gap may be larger, equal to, or smaller than the width of a portion of the first gap. There are cases where it is possible to prevent unnecessary gaps while improving the maintainability.

  The movable body may have at least fastening means (for example, BL, a screw, a bolt, etc.). The width of at least a part of the first gap may be larger, equal to, or smaller than the total length of the fastening means. The width of at least a portion of the second gap may be larger, equal to, or smaller than the total length of the fastening means. In some cases, removal of the fastening means may be facilitated, or in some cases, the drop prevention performance may be improved.

  The decorative body may have at least fastening means (eg, BL, screws, bolts, etc.). The width of at least a portion of the second gap may be larger, equal to, or smaller than the total length of the fastening member. In some cases, removal of the fastening means may be facilitated, or in some cases, the drop prevention performance may be improved.

  At least a portion of the first gap and at least a portion of the second gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game console. At least a portion of the second gap and at least a portion of the third gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game console. Even if at least a portion of the first gap, at least a portion of the second gap, and at least a portion of the third gap are formed at the same height in the height direction of the game console Good. It may be easy to insert the buffer into the gap.

  The movable body may be movable between the change means and the display means. There are cases where the rendering effect by the movable body can be improved.

  When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a part of the movable body may overlap at least a part of the display means. When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a portion of the movable body may overlap at least a portion of the display means. The movable body may be a movable body which does not overlap the display means when the movable body is positioned at an initial position. The change means may be a means at least a part of which does not overlap at least a part of the display means. The decorative body may be a decorative body located at a position not overlapping the changing means. The decorative body may be a decorative body located at a position which always overlaps at least a part of the movable body located at an initial position.

B1. The game console (for example, 100) is
A first movable body (e.g., 246a ');
A second movable body (e.g. 9 L),
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body having the second movable body (for example, FIG. 57),
The first movable body is a movable body which is at least movable to a first position and a second position (for example, FIGS. 57 to 60).
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing at least a first operation (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59),
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation in at least a first case,
The second movable body is a movable body which does not execute the first operation at least in the second case,
The first case is a case where the first movable body is located at the second position (for example, FIG. 57).
The second case is the case where the first movable body is located at the first position (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. Moreover, while preventing the failure | damage of the said movable body, various presentation can be able to be performed.

B2. The first operation is an operation in which the attitude of the second movable body changes.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rendering effect may be improved.

B3. The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a first posture (for example, FIG. 57),
The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a second posture (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59),
The second posture is a posture in which a range in which the second movable body and the first movable body overlap is smaller than the first posture.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in addition to preventing damage to the movable body, various effects may be able to be executed.

B4. The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a first posture (for example, FIG. 57),
The second movable body is a movable body that can be changed to at least a second posture (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59),
The second posture is a posture in which a portion protruding from the first movable body is larger than the first posture.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in addition to preventing damage to the movable body, various effects may be able to be executed.

B5. The first movable body is a movable body capable of reciprocating (for example, FIG. 58 to FIG. 60).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in addition to preventing damage to the movable body, various effects may be able to be executed.

  The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The display device may further comprise display means (for example, 208), and the second position may be a position where the first movable body covers at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59). .

  The first movable body may be means movable to a third position (for example, FIG. 58). The third position may be any position between the first position and the second position (eg, FIG. 59). The second movable body may be means capable of executing the second operation in the third case (for example, FIG. 58). The third case may be a case where the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, FIG. 58).

  It may further comprise a third movable body (e.g. 9R), said third movable body being means movable to a fourth position (e.g. Fig. 57) and a fifth position (e.g. Fig. 60) .

  In the fourth case, the second movable body may be means that does not execute the first operation (for example, FIG. 60). The fourth case is a case where the first movable body is located at a second position, and the fourth case is a case where the third movable body is located at the fifth position This may be the case (for example, FIG. 60).

  The second movable body may be capable of a third operation when the first movable body is in the initial position. The third operation may be an operation in which at least a portion of the second movable body is located in at least one of the regions excluding the specific region.

  At least one of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation includes an operation including linear trajectory movement, an operation including curved trajectory movement, an oscillating operation, a reciprocating operation, a rotating operation, a lateral direction. It may be an operation including movement, an operation including vertical movement, an operation including depth movement, and / or an operation including pause.

  You may provide the 1st drive means to which said 1st movable body is moved. You may provide the 2nd drive means to operate said 2nd movable body. The first movable body may have the second drive means. The second drive means may include a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The movement of the second movable body may be determined by the position of the first movable body and the position of the third movable body.

  The second movable body may be a movable body capable of performing a second operation. The first movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the first operation. The second movable body may be a movable body that always executes the first operation in the first case.

C1. The game console (for example, 100) is
A plurality of movable bodies (e.g. 700, 700 ', 900);
With multiple doors (e.g. 106 ', 104),
A plurality of detection means (for example),
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (e.g. 700 '),
At least one of the plurality of doors is a first door (e.g. 106 '),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (eg 858 '),
The first movable body is a movable body provided at least in the first door body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player can at least touch the mobile body.
The first detection means is a means capable of detecting the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state,
The first state is an initial state of the first movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation of returning the first movable body to the first state (for example, return operation).
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation when at least a first condition is satisfied.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation when at least a second condition is satisfied.
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied by opening the first door,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the first detection means detecting that the first movable body has not returned to the first state (for example, FIG. 20). ,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. Moreover, there are cases where the first movable body can be returned to the initial position.

C2. The second condition is a condition in which the number of times of establishment is limited,
The first condition is a condition in which the number of times of establishment is unlimited.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position, and the first operation may be prevented from being repeated without limitation.

C3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 900),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (for example, 902),
The second movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player can not contact at least,
The second detection means is a means capable of detecting the second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body operable from a second state,
The second state is an initial state of the second movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is an operation of returning the second movable body to the second state (for example, return operation),
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when at least a third condition is satisfied.
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by the second detection unit that the second movable body is not in the second state.
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied up to the first number,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied up to a second number,
The second number is a number different from the first number.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position.

C4. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing an initial operation when the power is turned on,
The initial operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state (for example, FIG. 20).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform the operation check of the first movable body.

C5. The first movable body is a movable body which continues without interrupting the initial operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the initial operation.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the operation check of the first movable body can be performed more reliably.

  Also, the following configuration can be adopted.

  A second door (for example, 104) may be provided, and the first movable body may be capable of performing the first operation when at least a fourth condition is met, the fourth condition May be a condition that can be established by opening the second door (for example, FIG. 22). In some cases, the first movable body can be returned to the initial position.

  The second number may be smaller, larger, or the same as the first number.

  The second movable body may not execute the second operation when the first condition is met. The second movable body may be left as it is.

  If the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. When the first detection means detects that the first condition is satisfied and the first movable body is returned to the first state, the number of times the second condition is satisfied May be reset. When power is turned on or off, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. Thereafter, when the second condition is satisfied, the first operation can be performed.

  The initial state may be an initial position of the movable body. The first condition may be a condition that can be satisfied by opening the first door when the first movable body is at a position different from the initial position.

  The initial operation may not be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the first state may not be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the second state may not be performed as a notice. There are cases where it is possible to perform an operation that is distinguished from the rendering operation such as a notice.

  There may be a movable body (for example, 700, 700 ') having a limit on the number of times of establishment of the second condition and a movable body (for example, 900) having no limit on the number of times of establishment of the second condition. The movable body having a limit on the number of times of satisfaction of the second condition may be electric chew, an attacker, or a distribution device.

  The first movable body may be operable by the player. When the player operates the first movable body, a first effect (for example, a reach effect or the like) may be performed. The first detection means when the first door is opened and the first movable body performs the first operation and the first movable body returns to the first state If the second effect is detected, a second effect that is at least partially common to the first effect may be performed. The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include the door open sound in the sound of the first effect, or may be only the door open sound. The second effect may not be performed.

  The initial movement may include the movement of the movable body back to the initial position. The initial movement may include only the movement of the movable body back to the initial position. The initial movement may include the movement of the movable body away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation of moving the movable body to a maximum movement position.

  The first operation may be performed at the start of fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous movable body operation.

  A game console comprising a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, the plurality of movable bodies At least one of the doors is a first door, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and the first movable body is the first one. The first movable body is a movable body provided at least at a position where the player can touch, and the first detection means is the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state, and the first state is an initial state of the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation, and the first operation is the first operation. The first movable body is an operation for returning to the first state, and in the first case, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation, and the first movable body is the first movable body. In the second case, the movable body may be a game machine characterized by being a movable body capable of executing the first operation.

  A game console comprising a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, the plurality of movable bodies At least one of the doors is a first door, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and the first movable body is the first one. The first movable body is a movable body provided at least at a position where the player can touch, and the first detection means is the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state, and the first state is an initial state of the first movable body. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation, and the first operation is the first operation. One movable body is an operation of returning to the first state, and the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation when the first door is opened. And the first movable body detects the first motion when the first detection means detects that the first movable body is not in the state of returning to the first state. The gaming machine may be a movable movable body.

D1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, 1, 2, 224);
A plurality of detection means (e.g. 54, 64, 74, 75);
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 1),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 224),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 54),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (e.g. 74, 75),
The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state,
The second movable body is a movable body operable from a second state,
The first state is an initial state of the first movable body,
The second state is an initial state of the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing a first operation when at least a first condition is established,
The first operation is an operation of returning the first movable body to the first state (for example, return operation).
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the first detection unit detecting that the first movable body is not in the first state.
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation when power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when the first movable body performs the first operation (for example, FIG. 51).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where the plurality of movable bodies can be returned to the initial position.

D2. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of executing a fourth operation when at least a second condition is established.
The fourth operation is an operation of returning the second movable body to the second state (for example, return operation),
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the second detection unit detecting that the second movable body is not in the second state.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the third operation when the second movable body performs the fourth operation (for example, FIG. 53 (b)).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the plurality of movable bodies may be able to be returned to the initial position.

D3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body (for example, 2),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a third detection means (e.g. 64),
The third movable body is a movable body operable from the third state,
The third state is an initial state of the third movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body capable of performing a fifth operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The fifth operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the third state,
The third movable body is a movable body capable of executing the fifth operation when the first movable body executes the first operation (for example, FIG. 53 (b)).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the plurality of movable bodies may be able to be returned to the initial position.

D4. The third movable body is a movable body including display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rendering effect may be improved.

D5. The first movable body is a movable body that may be at least partially hidden (eg, FIG. 29),
The second movable body is a movable body which can not be at least partially hidden (for example, FIG. 29),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rendering effect may be improved.

  Also, the following configuration can be adopted.

  The initial state may be an initial position of the movable body. The second operation may be an initial operation. The third operation may be an initial operation. The fifth operation may be an initial operation. The first operation may be a return operation to the initial position. The fourth operation may be a return operation to the initial position.

  The second movable body may start the second movement when the first movable body starts the first movement, or the first movable body may perform the first movement. The second operation may be started after the start, or the second operation may be started after the first movable body completes the first operation.

  The first movable body may not perform the third operation even when the second movable body performs the fourth operation.

  The first movable body and the second movable body may have the same position in the depth direction of the game console (for example, FIG. 32) or may be different. If it is the same, the thickness of the game console may be made thinner. If different, the sense of perspective between the movable bodies may be emphasized, and the rendering effect may be improved.

  The third movable body may not perform the fifth operation when the first movable body performs the first operation. The third movable body may or may not perform the fifth operation when the second movable body performs the fourth operation. When the first movable body performs the first operation and the second movable body performs the fourth operation, the third movable body performs the fifth operation. It may or may not be performed. The third movable body may be capable of performing a sixth operation when at least a third condition is met, and the sixth operation is the third movable body May be an operation to return to the third state, and the third condition is that the third detection means is a state in which the third movable body has not returned to the third state. It may be a condition that can be established by being detected in

  The third operation may be an operation different from the first operation. The second operation may be different from the fourth operation.

  The first condition may be a condition in which the number of times of establishment is limited, or a condition in which the number of times of establishment is not limited. The second condition may be a condition in which the number of times of establishment is limited, or a condition in which the number of times of establishment is not limited. The third condition may be a condition in which the number of occurrences is limited, or may be a condition in which the number of occurrences is not limited.

  The first movable body may be operable by the player. When the player operates the first movable body, the first effect may be performed. When the first door is opened and the first movable body executes the first operation and the first movable body returns to the first state, the first detection means When it is detected, a second effect may be performed which is at least partially common to the first effect.

The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include the door open sound in the sound of the first effect, or may be only the door open sound.
The second effect may not be performed.
The initial operation may include an operation of returning the movable body to an initial position. The initial movement may include only the movement of the movable body back to the initial position. The initial movement may include the movement of the movable body away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation of moving the movable body to a maximum movement position.

  The detection means may be means for detecting that the movable body is at the initial position. When one movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is not detected by the detection unit, another movable body executes the initial operation after the one movable body performs the return operation. May be When two movable bodies among the plurality of movable bodies are not detected by the detection means, another movable body executes the initial movement after the two movable bodies execute the return operation. May be

  At least a part of the plurality of movable bodies among the plurality of movable bodies may or may not overlap at least a part of the operation range. At least two of the plurality of movable bodies may be capable of overlapping one with the other.

  The first movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the first operation when at least the first condition is met. Further, the first movable body may be a movable body that always executes the first operation when at least the first condition is met. The second movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the fourth operation when at least the second condition is met. The second movable body may be a movable body that always executes the fourth operation when at least the second condition is met. The first condition may be a condition in which the number of times of establishment is limited.

  A game console comprising a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and at least one of the plurality of detection means is a second The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state, and the second movable body is a movable body operable from a second state. The second state refers to the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body corresponds to the first state of the first movable body. In one case, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first movement, the first movable body being the first movable body The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation when the power is turned on, and the second operation is performed after the operation is started. It is a series of operations to return to the second state, and the second movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation in the second case. It may be a platform.

  A game console comprising a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, wherein at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and at least one of the plurality of detection means is a second The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state, and the second movable body is a movable body operable from a second state. The term “state” refers to the initial state of the first movable body, the second state refers to the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body When the first detection means detects that the first movable body has not returned to the first state, A movable body capable of performing one operation, the first operation being an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state, and the second movable body being a power source It is a movable body capable of performing a second operation when it is inserted, and the second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state, the second operation The movable body may be a gaming machine characterized in that the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when the first movable body performs the first operation.

  The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when the power is turned on, and the third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a fourth operation in the third case, and the second movable body is the second movable body. An operation to return to a second state, wherein the first movable body is a movable body capable of executing the third operation in the fourth case, It is also good.

  The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when the power is turned on, and the third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. The second movable body is detected by the second detection means that the second movable body is not in the second state. The fourth operation is an operation of returning the second movable body to the second state, and the first movable body is the second movable body. The game machine may be a movable body capable of executing the third operation when the movable body of the fourth embodiment performs the fourth operation.

D6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, 1, 2, 224);
A plurality of detection means (e.g. 54, 64, 74, 75);
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 1),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 224),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 54),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (e.g. 74, 75),
The first movable body is a movable body operable from a first state,
The second movable body is a movable body operable from a second state,
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is in a first position,
The second state is a state in which the second movable body is in a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body that executes a first operation when at least a first condition is met,
The first operation is an operation of returning the first movable body to the first state (for example, return operation).
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by the first detection means that the first movable body is not in the first state at the first timing. Yes,
The second movable body is a movable body that performs a second operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The second operation is a series of operations from starting to move away from the second position to returning to the second state,
The second movable body is a movable body that executes the second operation on condition that execution of the first operation of the first movable body by satisfaction of the first condition is performed (for example, FIG. 51). ),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where the plurality of movable bodies can be returned to the initial position. In addition, when an operation failure occurs in some of the movable bodies, it may be possible to check the operation of the other movable bodies.

D7. The first movable body is a movable body that executes a third operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The third operation is a series of operations from starting to move away from the first position to returning to the first state,
The second movable body is a movable body that executes a fourth operation when at least a second condition is met,
The fourth operation is an operation of returning the second movable body to the second state (for example, return operation),
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by the second detection unit that the second movable body does not return to the second state at the second timing. is there,
It is characterized by

D8. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body (for example, 2),
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a third detection means (e.g. 64),
The third movable body is a movable body operable from the third state,
The third state is a state in which the third movable body is in a third position,
The third position is an initial position of the third movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body that executes a fifth operation when power is turned on (for example, an initial operation),
The fifth operation is a series of operations from starting to move away from the third position to returning to the third state,
The third movable body is a movable body that executes the fifth operation when the first operation of the first movable body is performed due to the establishment of the first condition (for example, the third movable body). Figure 53 (b),
It is characterized by

D9. It has display means (for example, 212, 214, 110 to 112) for executing variable display of symbols,
The second movable body is movable to execute the second operation from the beginning even when the first operation of the first movable body is executed due to the establishment of the first condition. Body (eg, FIG. 51),
The first operation is an operation that can be performed at the start of the variable display of the symbol by the display means.
It is characterized by

E1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first movable body (e.g. 1);
A second movable body (e.g. 2);
A first detection means (e.g. 54);
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
At the start of the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”. For example, in FIG. 155 (e)), the detection state of the first detection means is different from the first detection state. In some cases, the second action by the second moveable body can be performed (eg, FIG. 155);
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body.

E2. The first timing is the timing different from the second timing, and the second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the timing of the door opening. ,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the second movable body does not perform the second operation when the door is opened, the game clerk removes the gaming ball having entered the area where the second movable body operates. There are cases where the second movable body can be removed without damage. The door referred to here may be, for example, a front frame door (e.g., 106) or a ball storage plate with a door (e.g., 108).

E3. When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed (for example, FIG. 154).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body when the power is turned on.

E4. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
In the first timing, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed. (Eg Figure 155),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the operation check of the first movable body can be performed at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol.

E5. The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position (for example, FIG. 155).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position.

E6. The first operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position (for example, FIG. 155).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position.

E7. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to realize a pachinko machine characterized by a movable body.

  Note that the game machine of E1 or the first movable body (for example 1), the second movable body (for example 2), and the first detection means (for example 54) are provided, and the first The movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position, and the second movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a second position, and the first position Is the initial position of the first movable body, the second position is the initial position of the second movable body, and the first detection means is the first position. The following configuration can also be adopted in the game stand which is a means to be in the first detection state when the movable body is located at the first position.

  For example, in the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the second movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the second movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  The second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even when the door (for example, 106 and 108) is opened.

  In addition, even if the frame (for example, 102 and 104) is opened, the second movable body may not be moved to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position).

  In addition, the second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even if the general drawing change is started.

  In addition, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions at the first timing, the second movable body performs an operation of returning the third movable body. The movable body may be configured to perform the second operation.

  In the first timing, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions, the second movable body performs an operation to return after the second movable body performs the returning operation. The three movable bodies may move back.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the second operation by the second movable body is always executed. May be

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body may be performed.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the first operation by the first movable body is always executed. May be

  In addition, the first timing is the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation display, the start of the display of the fourth symbol, the start of the movement display (or decrease display) of the hold icon, the start of the change display of the hold icon, the hold icon change icon The timing at which any one of display start of the fluctuation icon by moving to the display area, start of stage (background image) change, start of display of notice, and start of display of preview notice may be performed.

When the power is turned on, either the start of display of the image at power on or the start of display of the lamp pattern at power on may be performed.
Further, the first movable body and the second movable body may be in a positional relationship in which the first movable body and the second movable body overlap at the first timing or after the first timing.
E11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first movable body (e.g. 1);
A second movable body (e.g. 2);
A first detection means (e.g. 54);
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position,
The first operation is an operation that does not include an operation of moving the first movable body away from the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation,
The third operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
At the start of the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”. For example, in FIG. 155 (e)), the detection state of the first detection means is different from the first detection state. In one case, after the first operation by the first movable body is performed, the third operation by the first movable body is not performed, and the second operation by the second movable body is not performed. An operation is performed (eg, FIG. 155),
It is characterized by
E12. The first timing is the timing different from the second timing, and the second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the timing of the door opening. ,
It is characterized by
E13. When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed (for example, FIG. 154).
It is characterized by
E14. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

F1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first movable body (e.g. 1);
A second movable body (e.g. 2);
A first detection means (e.g. 54);
A second detection means (e.g. 64);
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The second detection unit is a unit that is in a second detection state when the second movable body is positioned at the second position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
In the first timing, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed ( For example, Fig. 155),
In the first timing, when the detection state of the second detection means is a detection state different from the second detection state, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed (Eg Fig. 157),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to confirm the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.
F2. The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
The second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the timing of the door opening,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the movable body does not operate when the door is opened, when the gaming staff removes the gaming ball having entered the area where the movable body operates, the movable body can be removed without being damaged. There is. The door referred to here may be, for example, a front frame door (e.g., 106) or a ball storage plate with a door (e.g., 108).

  F3. When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body when the power is turned on.

F4. When the detection state of the first detection means at the first timing is a detection state different from the first detection state, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body while returning the first movable body to the initial position.

F5. When the power is turned on, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the first movable body when the power is turned on.

F6. The first operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform the operation check of the first movable body.

F7. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to realize a pachinko machine characterized by a movable body.

  In addition, the game table of the F1 or the first movable body (for example 1), the second movable body (for example 2), the first detection means (for example 54), and the second detection means (for example) 64), wherein the first movable body is a movable body capable of being located at a first position, and the second movable body is at a second position. It is a movable body that can be positioned, and the first position is an initial position of the first movable body, and the second position is an initial position of the second movable body. The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position, and the second detection means is The following configuration can also be adopted in a game console which is a means to be in a second detection state when the second movable body is positioned at the second position.

  For example, in the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the second movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the second movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  The second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even when the door (for example, 106 and 108) is opened.

  In addition, even if the frame (for example, 102 and 104) is opened, the second movable body may not be moved to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position).

  In addition, the second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even if the general drawing change is started.

  In addition, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions at the first timing, the second movable body performs an operation of returning the third movable body. The movable body may be configured to perform the second operation.

  In the first timing, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions, the second movable body performs an operation to return after the second movable body performs the returning operation. The three movable bodies may move back.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the second operation by the second movable body is always executed. When the detection state of the second detection means is a detection state different from the second detection state at the first timing, the first operation by the first movable body is necessarily executed. It is also good.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body may be performed.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the first operation by the first movable body is always executed. May be

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the first operation by the first movable body may be performed without fail.

  In addition, the first timing is the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation display, the start of the display of the fourth symbol, the start of the movement display (or decrease display) of the hold icon, the start of the change display of the hold icon, the hold icon change icon The timing at which any one of display start of the fluctuation icon by moving to the display area, start of stage (background image) change, start of display of notice, and start of display of preview notice may be performed.

When the power is turned on, either the start of display of the image at power on or the start of display of the lamp pattern at power on may be performed.
Further, the first movable body and the second movable body may be in a positional relationship in which the first movable body and the second movable body overlap at the first timing or after the first timing.

G1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first movable body (e.g. 1);
A second movable body (e.g. 2);
A first detection means (e.g. 54);
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
When the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed (for example, Figure 155),
When the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed ( For example, Fig. 155),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to confirm the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.

G2. The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
The second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and is the door opening timing.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the movable body does not operate when the door is opened, when the gaming staff removes the gaming ball having entered the area where the movable body operates, the movable body can be removed without being damaged. There is. The door referred to here may be, for example, a front frame door (e.g., 106) or a ball storage plate with a door (e.g., 108).

G3. When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body is executable,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body when the power is turned on.

G4. When the power is turned on, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the first movable body when the power is turned on.

G5. The first operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform the operation check of the first movable body.

G6. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to realize a pachinko machine characterized by a movable body.

  Note that the game console of G1 or the first movable body (for example 1), the second movable body (for example 2), and the first detection means (for example 54) are provided, and the first The movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position, and the second movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a second position, and the first position Is the initial position of the first movable body, the second position is the initial position of the second movable body, and the first detection means is the first position. The following configuration can also be adopted in the game stand which is a means to be in the first detection state when the movable body is located at the first position.

  For example, in the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the second movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the second movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  The second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even when the door (for example, 106 and 108) is opened.

  In addition, even if the frame (for example, 102 and 104) is opened, the second movable body may not be moved to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position).

  In addition, the second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even if the general drawing change is started.

  In addition, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions at the first timing, the second movable body performs an operation of returning the third movable body. The movable body may be configured to perform the second operation.

  In the first timing, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 7) are not positioned at the initial positions, the second movable body performs an operation to return after the second movable body performs the returning operation. The three movable bodies may move back.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the first operation by the first movable body is always executed. When the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the second operation by the second movable body is necessarily executed. It is also good.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the first operation by the first movable body may be performed without fail.

  In addition, the first timing is the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation display, the start of the display of the fourth symbol, the start of the movement display (or decrease display) of the hold icon, the start of the change display of the hold icon, the hold icon change icon The timing at which any one of display start of the fluctuation icon by moving to the display area, start of stage (background image) change, start of display of notice, and start of display of preview notice may be performed.

When the power is turned on, either the start of display of the image at power on or the start of display of the lamp pattern at power on may be performed.
Further, the first movable body and the second movable body may be in a positional relationship in which the first movable body and the second movable body overlap at the first timing or after the first timing.

The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the H1.
A first movable body (e.g. 2);
A second movable body (e.g. 7);
First detection means,
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
In the first timing, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state, the second operation by the second movable body can be performed ( For example, Fig. 162),
One of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body attached to the other movable body (for example, FIG. 161).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body. Moreover, there are cases where the operation check of the second movable body can be performed.

H2. The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
The second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and is the door opening timing.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the second movable body does not operate when the door is opened, when the gaming clerk removes the gaming ball having entered the area where the second movable body operates, the second movable body is removed. Sometimes it can be removed without damage. The door referred to here may be, for example, a front frame door (e.g., 106) or a ball storage plate with a door (e.g., 108).

H3. When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body is executable,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the first movable body when the power is turned on.

H4. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
In the first timing, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state, the first operation by the first movable body can be performed. ,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.

H5. The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to check the operation of the second movable body while returning the first movable body to the initial position.

H6. The first operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform the operation check of the first movable body.

H7. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to realize a pachinko machine characterized by a movable body.

  In addition, the gaming table provided with the above-mentioned H1 gaming table or the first movable body (for example 2), the second movable body (for example 7), and the first detecting means, One movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a first position, and the second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position, wherein the first movable body is movable. The position is the initial position of the first movable body, the second position is the initial position of the second movable body, and the first detection means It is a means to be in a first detection state when one movable body is positioned at the first position, and one of the first movable body and the second movable body is the other, The following configuration can also be adopted in the game console which is a movable body attached to the movable body (for example, FIG. 161).

  For example, in the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the second movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the first movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  Further, at the first timing, when the second movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the first movable body moves from the initial position (for example, to the maximum movement position), and the first The movable body may move to the initial position, and the second movable body may move to the initial position.

  The second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even when the door (for example, 106 and 108) is opened.

  In addition, even if the frame (for example, 102 and 104) is opened, the second movable body may not be moved to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position).

  In addition, the second movable body may not move to a predetermined position (for example, the maximum movement position) even if the general drawing change is started.

  In the first timing, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 1) are not positioned at the initial positions, the second movable body performs an operation of returning the third movable body. The movable body may be configured to perform the second operation.

  In the first timing, when the first movable body and the third movable body (for example, 1) are not positioned at the initial positions, the second movable body performs an operation to return after the second movable body performs the returning operation. The three movable bodies may move back.

  In addition, when the detection state of the first detection means is a detection state different from the first detection state at the first timing, the second operation by the second movable body is always executed. May be

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is turned on, the first operation by the first movable body may be performed without fail.

  In addition, the first timing is the start of the decoration symbol fluctuation display, the start of the display of the fourth symbol, the start of the movement display (or decrease display) of the hold icon, the start of the change display of the hold icon, the hold icon change icon The timing at which any one of display start of the fluctuation icon by moving to the display area, start of stage (background image) change, start of display of notice, and start of display of preview notice may be performed.

When the power is turned on, either the start of display of the image at power on or the start of display of the lamp pattern at power on may be performed.
Further, the first movable body and the second movable body may be in a positional relationship in which the first movable body and the second movable body overlap at the first timing or after the first timing.

Embodiment B
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 has an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 63) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In addition, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and a door side effect movable not shown here are movable on the front side. The body is attached. The game area 124 (see FIG. 63) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the door opening sensor 609 (refer FIG. 63) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball firing handle 134 for launching to the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 63) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 700. It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to light. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full. The chance button 700 also corresponds to an example of the door-side effect movable body. The door side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

62 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 61 as viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the board-side rendering movable body 2242 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the left side of the game board 200 It is arranged. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special view start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and only one is disposed immediately below the first special view start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and only one is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning hole 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and the ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display device wins the special view display game with a large hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. ing. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board-side rendering movable body 2242.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 63 includes an upper arm 2242a and a forearm 2242b imitating the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 2242a at the position of the shoulder A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 2242b to the elbow position is provided. The board side effect movable body 2242 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is a predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500)), or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second A combination of the sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and various movable members 332 such as a blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 are controlled. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and a detection unit 710 for detecting a detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700; A sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and reading image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 and using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 43 which generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a effect movable body sensor 424. And a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal to the basic circuit 502. The effect movable body 224 referred to here means at least a door-side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and a board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. Furthermore, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive portion 708 of the chance button 700, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame A serial communication control circuit that performs lighting control by serial communication between a game stand lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game lamp 542 and a game board lamp drive circuit 530 and a game stand lamp drive circuit 540 And 520 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. Payout control unit 60
As for 0, a predetermined voltage may be supplied from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit (not shown in FIG. 64), and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, using FIG. 65 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 stop display of the pachinko machine 100. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. FIG. 65 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2.

  Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 65 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 65 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

"Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61, as described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 65 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decorative 1" to "decorative 10" as the decorative designs here. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 63 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 65 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 65 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 66 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. Here, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9 v). If it is less than, it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. It starts with a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (eg, main) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) when the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (eg, 32.8 ms). The controller restarts once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. Here, in consideration of false detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there is a winning if the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 64, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, presence of a previous detection signal, and presence of a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the passing of the common drawing starting opening 228 It is determined that there is. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal) is stored. Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. Although the counter for acquiring the random number value in Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value in Special Figure 2 are separately provided here, the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit 318 Acquires the value from the register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and acquires the value from the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When there is a winning on the second special view start opening 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter of the random number generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 Acquires a value from the value storage register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as a special figure 2 win random number value and acquires a value from a special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 65 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 65 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 65A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, If the probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the final display of any one symbol of the first out-of-pattern (special image J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect waiting period is indicated in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for a period displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is finished. Set the information. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, error command such as door open command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  Furthermore, when the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door open command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The same applies to the case where the door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without passing through the payout control unit 600. When the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, when the detection signal is transmitted, the main control unit 300 transmits a door opening command to the first sub control unit 400.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 66 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 700 has been pressed. Although the details will be described later, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected as a result of the determination, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, a chance If the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed. Here, while the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700, the second sub-control unit 500 performs drive control of the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700. The detection processing and drive control regarding the button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. In this case, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door open command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, in step S321, the door open command is set to be output to the second sub control unit.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing movable body control processing, the process returns to step S703. Although the details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command for the effect movable body 224 or a control command for the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub control unit 400 Perform corresponding processing.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Movable body control processing>
FIG. 70 (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub control unit main process, and FIG. 70 (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of the movable body interrupt process. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in (a) of the figure, the received command various process is performed based on the command received from the first sub control unit 400. As the received command various processing, for example, the effect movable body processing performed when the command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, the chance button movable body processing performed when the command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received, etc. It can be mentioned.

  Specifically, as described above, the effect movable body 224 at least includes the door-side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and the board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. In the description using FIG. 70, the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body 2242 are described without distinction. However, in the effect movable body processing, for example, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 is received And processing such as storing operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 included in the control command in the effect movable body drive storage area provided in the RAM 508 . A more detailed control process of the door-side effect movable body will be described later.

  In the chance button movable body processing, control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button drive storage area provided in the RAM 508, or the control information stored in the chance button drive storage area is new information Perform processing such as updating to or discarding old information.

  The second auxiliary control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5B in a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms), triggered by the above-described timer interrupt. In step S1101 of the movable body interrupt processing, it is determined whether control information (excitation, torque, rotational direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-mentioned chance button drive storage area. When the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. Thereby, the movable part 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (the details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not operation data (excitation, torque, rotational direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 is stored in the effect movable body drive storage area described above, and the corresponding operation data is stored. If it does, the operation data is output to the drive circuit 516. Thus, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, position information and the like of the effect movable body 224 are detected based on the detection signal, and stored in the RAM 508. When the sensor is not detected, an initial position return (origin return) process of the effect movable body 224 is performed. In addition, although the detection process of pressing-down operation of the chance button 700 by the detection part 710 is performed by the 1st sub control part 400 here, you may carry out by this step S1102.

  In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In this output information update processing, processing of updating operation data of the effect movable body 224 and control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the flow of the door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub control unit 500.

  The door-side effect movable body control process shown in FIG. 71 is executed in the reception command various process shown in FIG. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not the door open command has been received from the first sub control unit 400 (step S1201). If it is not received, the process proceeds to step S1205. Based on the position information of the door-side effect movable body stored in the RAM 508, it is determined whether the current position of the door-side effect movable body is the initial position (step S1202). If it is not the initial position, the above-described effect movable body drive storage area is rewritten with operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position (step S1203), and the door side effect movable body control process ends. On the other hand, if it is the initial position, standby instruction information representing standby is set in the storage area for effect movable body drive described above (step S1204), and the process ends. In this case, in the output information update process (step S1103) shown in FIG. 70 (b), the operation data is not updated, and in step S1101 in the next movable body interrupt process, the drive circuit relates to the door side effect movable body Operational data is not sent. Note that motion data may be transmitted to maintain the same position as the current position (here, the initial position).

  In step S1205 executed when the door open command is not received, the received operation data included in the control command for the effect movable body 224 is set in the above-described effect movable body drive storage area. End.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a flow of door-side effect movable body control processing at the time of power activation performed by the second sub control unit 500.

  When power is turned on, first, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power control unit 660 to the second auxiliary control unit 500. The second sub control unit 500 determines that the power is turned on when the voltage value from the power control unit 660 exceeds a certain value, and starts the door side effect movable body control process at the time of power on shown in FIG. . The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not the door open command has been received from the first sub control unit 400 (step S1301), and if it is not received, it is stored in the storage area for driving effect movable body described above. The operation data (for example, closing operation data) to be returned to the initial position is set (step S1302), and the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of power on ends. On the other hand, if it has been received, standby instruction information representing standby is set in the storage area for effect movable body drive described above (step S1303), and the process ends. If the execution of step S1101 in the above-mentioned movable body interrupt processing is delayed when the power is turned on, the operation data related to the door-side effect movable body is transmitted to the drive circuit 516 and then terminated. Good.

  The first sub-control unit 400 may execute the door-side effect movable body control process described above.

  Subsequently, characteristic points of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 73 is a view showing in stages the manner in which the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponding to an embodiment of the present invention is opened.

  At the upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73, there is provided a door side effect movable body 2241 that opens forward (to the player). The door-side effect movable body 2241 is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, and corresponds to an example of a first movable body. Further, on the game board 200, a board side effect movable body 2242 falling to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is a movable body provided at a position where the player can not make contact with the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106, and corresponds to an example of a second movable body. The door-side effect movable body 2241 and the panel-side effect movable body 2242 are drive-controlled by the second auxiliary control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516 as the effect movable body 224 as described above. The initial (origin) position of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is a closed position (a position stored in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. 6A, and the initial (origin) position of the panel-side effect movable body 2242 Is a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 73 (a), with the front frame door 106 closed, variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and during variation display of the decoration symbol, that is, during symbol variation display of the special figure. As the door-side effect movable body 2241 is opened as shown in FIG. 6B, the board-side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in FIG. 6 (c) while the effect movable body 224 is in operation as shown in FIG. 6 (b), as shown in FIG. The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the panel continues to operate, but the door-side effect movable body 2241 provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position.

  After the front frame door 106 is opened, it returns to the initial position. This does not mean that the rendering operation is returned to the initial position according to the rendering data, but that the initial position return control (step S1203 shown in FIG. 71) to be forcibly returned to the initial position is being performed. (same as below). Also, it will continue to operate. The term includes returning to the initial position according to the effect data. That is, this means that the rendering operation is continued and the initial position return control is not performed (the same applies hereinafter).

  The board-side effect movable body 2242, which has not returned to the initial position by opening the front frame door 106, returns to the initial position, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when abnormality arises in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the door side presentation movable body 2241 does not return to an initial position (following, the same). As conditions (equivalent to the second condition) under which the initial position returning operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed, there are other conditions as described below. For example, it may be made to return to the initial position by abnormality (the position is not detected, etc.) of the board side effect movable body 224 itself. In addition, control of returning the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed each time the symbol variation starts. In addition, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, in a definite change, a time reduction, etc.), control may be performed to return the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position. Moreover, when the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not detected at the initial position, it may be returned to the initial position every time the symbol change starts, and the board may be changed by a specific symbol change (for example, the change or the change in the hold). When performing an effect using the side effect movable body 2242, it may return to the initial position. That is, the reception of the effect command for driving the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be at least one condition. Furthermore, when a demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, control may be performed to return the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the gaming ball has not entered the first special view start opening 230 (second special view start opening 232), processing is performed to return the board side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position. May be

  According to the example shown in FIG. 73 described above, the first movable body (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) performs the first operation (initial position return operation). That is, when the door (in this case, the front frame door 106) is opened while the first movable body is moving, the first drive control means (here, the second sub control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516) Move one movable body to the initial position. This may prevent the first movable body from contacting an external device or a person. Further, the second movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242) continues the operation regardless of the operating condition of the first movable body. Generally, when the door (the front frame door 106) is opened, it is a disadvantageous situation for the player (for example, the ball is clogged in between the game nails 238 and the player can not play a game). By continuing the operation of the second movable body while the door is open, it may be possible to show an effect to the player and prevent the player from losing the game intention. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board (especially around the second movable body) while the door is open. In addition, also when the sensor which detects a 1st movable body is provided in addition to an initial position, an initial position return operation | movement is performed similarly regardless of which position a 1st movable body is except an initial position.

  FIG. 74 is a view gradually showing a state in which the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, in the description of the modified example, the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far will be described with the reference numerals used so far. Also, items that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  The first door side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided in the front view upper right portion of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, and the front view lower left portion of the front frame door 106 in the front view The second door-side effect movable body 2241b is provided to protrude. Further, on the game board 200, a board-side effect movable body 2242 falling to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208 as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. . The initial (origin) position of the first door side effect movable body 2241a is a closed position shown in FIG. 6A (the position where the front frame door 106 is stored), and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is The initial (origin) position is the retracted position (the position where the front frame door 106 is stored) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b protrudes forward, and the disc The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in FIG. 6 (c) while the effect movable body 224 is in operation as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the game board 200 is provided also in the first modification. The board-side effect movable body 2242 continues to operate, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is also in the initial position Return.

  A dedicated drive circuit may be provided for each of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242. Alternatively, the drive circuit may be provided separately for the door-side effect movable body and the panel-side effect movable body. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be paired (for example, those having the same shape).

  In addition, a third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body (here, the first door side effect movable body 2241a) may be provided. For example, the third movable body may have the same shape as the first movable body. For example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a may be provided on the upper left of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. You may provide the 3rd door side presentation movable body of the same shape as this. The first movable body and the third movable body are provided at positions where they may come in contact with external equipment or people when the door (in this case, the front frame door 106) is opened while the movable body is in operation. It may be The first movable body and the third movable body may be controlled by the same control means and operated simultaneously. In addition, when the door is opened while the first movable body and the third movable body are in operation, the first operation (initial position return operation) may be performed, or either one of them may be performed. Only the first operation (initial position return operation) may be performed, or both operations may be stopped. Also, the third movable body may be controlled by a control means (for example, different in drive circuit) different from the first movable body, or has a shape different from the first movable body. May be Furthermore, unlike the first movable body, the third movable body may be provided at a position that does not hit an external device or a person even when the door is opened. In this case, even if the door is opened when the third movable body is in operation, the initial position return operation is not performed, and for example, the operation may be continued or stopped at that point. May be

  FIG. 75 is a view showing in stages the manner in which the front frame door 106 is opened in the second modified example of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  A first door side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided in the upper right portion in the front view of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 75, and in the lower front portion of the front frame door 106 in the front view A second door-side effect movable body 2241 b that opens is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is a closed position (position stored in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. 6A, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b The initial (origin) position of is also a closed position (a position accommodated in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b opens forward, and The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in FIG. 6 (c) while the effect movable body 224 is in operation as shown in FIG. 6 (b), as shown in FIG. The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on continues to operate, but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opened to the front, which is relatively likely to contact the player, returns to the initial position. On the other hand, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opened upward, which is relatively unlikely to contact the player, stops its operation. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, but if it is turned to the upper side and opened, there is a possibility that the player may come into contact with the initial stage When it returns to the position, it becomes relatively low. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward through the horizontal attitude opened forward, and returns to the initial position through the horizontal attitude opened forward. For this reason, even in the case of the first door side effect movable body 2241a, when the front frame door 106 is opened in the horizontal posture opened forward, it returns to the initial position or, conversely, turns up to the upper side. Move.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 75 described above, depending on the position of the first movable body (door side effect movable body), either the initial position return operation is performed or the operation is stopped on the spot. A sensor for detecting the door-side effect movable body is provided at a position at which the operation is completed, and when the door-side effect movable body is detected by the sensor, there is a high possibility that the position at which the operation is completed contacts the player. Depending on whether or not the position is determined, it is determined whether to perform the initial position return operation or to stop it at that point. The same applies to the case where the sensor is provided near the initial position and the position where the operation is completed. Furthermore, the initial position return operation may be performed when it is determined that the door-side effect movable body is located in the back (a position farther from the initial position) than the sensor provided at the initial position.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed in a state where the door side effect movable body is stopped, even if the front frame door 106 is closed, the door side effect movable body is kept stopped and a predetermined timing (for example, The initial position return operation may be performed at the time of reception of the symbol change start command, when operating any movable body, etc.). Alternatively, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the initial position return operation may be performed.

  Also in this example, the second movable body (board-side effect movable body 2242) continues the operation regardless of the operating condition of the first movable body.

In the above description, “the first movable body (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241a or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at the position where the player can contact with the first movable body;
A second movable body (for example, a board-side effect movable body 2242) provided at a position where the player can not contact with the second movable body;
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a first position (for example, the front frame door 106), which is an initial position of the first movable body, when a first condition (for example, opening of the front frame door 106) is satisfied. Returned to the stored position),
The second movable body is returned to a second position, which is an initial position of the second movable body, when a second condition (for example, occurrence of abnormality in the decorative symbol display device 208) is satisfied.
The first condition is a condition different from the second condition.
A game stand characterized by It explained about.

  According to this game console, the maintainability can be improved. In addition, since the initial position return operation is performed according to the conditions, it may be possible to easily notice a failure of the effect movable body.

  When the door is opened during movement, the first drive control means may continue the operation of the first movable body. In addition, when the first movable body performs the initial position return operation, the second drive control means may cause the second movable body to perform the initial position return operation. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position return operation, the second drive control means may stop the operation of the second movable body. In addition, when the door is closed in a state where the first movable body is stopped, the first drive control means causes the first movable body to stop the first movable body. You may operate it. Furthermore, when it is determined that the first movable body is present at the back (position farther from the initial position) than the detection means provided at the initial position for detecting the first movable body, at least the detection means side (initial It may be retracted to the position side). In addition, a third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body may be provided. In this case, the third movable body may have a shape different from that of the first movable body, or may have the same shape (including a point-symmetrical shape and a line-symmetrical shape).

Also, “a door that can be opened and closed (for example, a front frame door 106)
Movable body control means (for example, second sub control unit 500 and drive circuit 516) for controlling the first movable body and the second movable body;
Have
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,
The door includes at least a door open detection unit (for example, a frame door open sensor 609) capable of detecting that the door is open;
The first condition includes at least a condition that is satisfied by detecting the opening of the door by the door opening detection unit,
The movable body control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to prevent the door side effect movable body 2241 from contacting an external device or a person. In addition, by continuing the operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 while the front frame door 106 is open, it may be possible to show an effect to the player and prevent the player's willingness to be cut away. Furthermore, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board (in particular, around the board-side effect movable body 2242) while the front frame door 106 is open.

  The movable body control means may have control means provided for each movable body.

Furthermore, “the movable body control means controls the first movable body to return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state in which the first movable body is movable ((1) For example, step S1203 shown in FIG. 71 is executed.
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  Also by this game stand, it may be possible to prevent the first movable body from contacting an external device or a person.

  FIG. 76 shows, in a step-by-step manner, how the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In the upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 76, there is provided an upwardly convex arc-shaped first door-side effect movable body 2241a that protrudes upward, and the lower part protrudes downward. The second door-side effect movable body 2241 b having a convex arc shape is provided on the rear side. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. Both the initial position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the initial position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are in the retracted position (position stored in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. is there. When the power is turned on with the first door side effect movable body 2241, the second door side effect movable body 2241b, and the panel side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 76 (a) also in the initial position. The pachinko machine 100 performs an initial position return operation (power on operation) when the power is turned on. That is, step S1302 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and first, the power on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed. As shown in the figure (b), the first door side effect movable body 2241a temporarily protrudes forward, and as shown in the figure (c), it returns to the initial position, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a It is determined that the current position is the initial position. The operating speed (first speed) of the door-side effect movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a, second door-side effect movable body 2241b) in the power-on operation is described using FIGS. 73 to 75. It may be faster or slower than the operation speed (second speed) in the initial position return operation of the door-side effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is opened. In the case of being fast, the power-on operation can be completed quickly, and when the front frame door 106 is opened, it is possible to prevent injury even if a person is in touch when returning to the initial position. Normally, the power-on operation is performed before opening the store and is often performed without a game player, but opening the front frame door 106 is often performed in front of the game customer due to a ball jam or the like. In consideration of this, the fast case is preferable. On the other hand, when the front frame door 106 is opened faster (when power is turned on later), the advantage is that the initial position return operation can be completed soon after contact with a person at the initial position return. There is. In this case, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the initial position return operation may be performed at the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body. The speed at the time of power on (first speed) may be the same as the speed at the time of opening the front frame door 106 (second speed) without making a difference between the two. For example, both may be set to the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body.

  Then, as shown to the figure (d), the 2nd door side presentation movable body 2241b once protrudes ahead. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in (e) in the power-on operation, step S1303 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and as shown in (d), the second door side effect is generated. The movable body 2241 b stops at that place.

  As shown in the figure (f), when the front frame door 106 is closed, it shifts to the power-on operation of the next effect movable body (here, the panel side effect movable body 2242), and the second door side stopped The effect movable body 2241b is in the state of standing still and returns to the initial position when a command to perform effect is sent.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed, the power on operation of the stopped effect movable body may be resumed.

  In addition, when the door (front frame door 106) is open, the first movable body (door side effect movable body 2241) operates for a predetermined time (or for a predetermined distance), and then the first movable body The initial position return operation of the movable body may be performed.

  Furthermore, in this example, the power-on operation of the panel-side effect movable body 2242 is performed after the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed first, but the power-on operation of the panel side effect movable body 2242 is first After that, the power on operation of the door side effect movable body may be performed.

  FIG. 77 shows a modification of the power on operation described with reference to FIG.

  The power-on operation (see FIGS. 77A to 77C) of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is completed, and the front surface of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is started immediately before the power-on operation is started. When the frame door 106 is opened, in the example shown in (d1) of the figure, the entire series of power on operations are temporarily interrupted. Therefore, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b is not started either. In addition, the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not started either. This makes it easy to check whether the effect movable body is normal when performing maintenance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in (d2) of the figure, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the power on operation of the door side effect movable body is skipped, and even if the front frame door 106 is opened, it does not contact external devices. The power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed first. Thereby, the time until the power on operation is completed can be made shorter than the example shown in (d1).

  As shown in FIG. 6E, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the continuation of the power-on operation is performed. That is, in the example shown in the figure (d1), the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed, and then the power-on operation of the panel-side effect movable body 2242 is performed. Further, in the example shown in (d2) of the figure, if the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is completed, the power-on operation of the second door side effect movable body 2241b is performed. In addition, if there are a plurality of board-side effect movable bodies and the power-on operation of all the panel-side effect movable bodies is not completed, the power-on operation of all the panel-side effect movable bodies is performed, and then the second The power on operation of the door side effect movable body 2241 b may be performed, or the power on operation of the second door side effect movable body 2241 b is performed first leaving the panel side effect movable body on which the power on operation is not performed. May be performed.

  FIG. 78 is a view showing a state where power interruption / power recovery is instantaneously performed while the door side effect movable body is operating in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75.

  In FIG. 78 (a), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and in FIG. 78 (b), the first door side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door side The effect movable body 2241 b opens forward. At this time, electric disconnection occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes completely dark, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a and the second door side effect movable body 2241b stop.

  The same figure (c1) shows an example at the time of instantaneous power recovery. Whether the first door side effect movable body 2241 a or the second door side effect movable body 2241 b is open or closed, that is, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed. The initial position return operation is performed, and it is determined that the current position of the first door side effect movable body 2241a is the initial position, and the current position of the second door side effect movable body 2241b is also the initial position. Determine.

  When the front frame door 106 is opened after the initial position return operation, the above-described power on operation is not performed, and the power on operation is performed after the front frame door 106 is closed. It is also good. On the contrary, the power on operation may not be performed even if the front frame door 106 is closed. Furthermore, in the same figure (c1), although the initial position return operation was performed regardless of the open / close state of the front frame door 106, when the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power recovery, the initial position return operation is performed. Instead, the initial position return operation may be performed after the front frame door 106 is closed.

  The same figure (c2) shows another example when power is restored instantly. In this example, both the first door side effect movable body 2241a and the second door side effect movable body 2241b perform an initial position returning operation when the front frame door 106 is opened. The initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the open / close state of the front frame door 106. For example, even if the front frame door 106 is opened before power return to the initial position return operation, the initial position return operation is performed, and the front frame door 106 remains closed. Also, the initial position return operation may be performed.

  The example described using FIG. 78 (c1) and FIG. 78 (c2) may be as follows. When the power recovery is performed, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the board-side effect movable body. Also, the initial position return operation may be performed only when the initial position is not present. Also, when power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (the second door-side effect movable body 2241b). Furthermore, the initial position return operation may be performed only when it is not at the initial position.

In the above description, “power supply means (for example, power control unit 660) for supplying power is provided.
The first movable body moves at a first speed to the first position (for example, power on operation) when the supply of power is started by the power supply means.
The first movable body moves at a second speed different from the first speed to the first position when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this game stand, when the first condition is established, the first movable body can be prevented from causing injury even if it contacts with a person, or it will soon be in contact with a person. The position return operation can be completed.

  The first speed (second speed) may be the first speed (second speed).

  The second movable body moves at a third speed to the second position when the supply of power is started by the power supply means, and the second movable body is the second movable body. It may move at a fourth speed different from the first speed to the second position when a condition is satisfied.

  The third velocity referred to here may be a velocity faster than the fourth velocity, a velocity slower than the fourth velocity, or the same velocity as the fourth velocity.

  Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be a velocity slower than the third velocity. Since the movement of the first movable body is relatively slow at the start of the power supply, the security of the player, the maintenance person, etc. can be secured, and the movement of the second movable body is relatively fast. The power on operation is performed in a short time.

  Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be faster than the third velocity. It is possible to prevent the contact to the outside, and to improve the maintainability such that the maintenance person can easily understand that the second movable body is not at the original position.

  Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be the same velocity as the third velocity.

  Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be slower than the fourth velocity. The security of the player, the maintenance person, etc. can be secured, and if there is something hidden by the operation of the second movable body, the second movable body returns to the initial position relatively quickly. Therefore, it may be possible to see what has been hidden earlier and to prevent lowering of the rendering effect.

  Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be faster than the fourth velocity. There is also an advantage that the outside contact can be prevented, and the player can easily notice an abnormality.

Also, the first velocity (second velocity) may be the same velocity as the fourth velocity.
In addition, “provide power supply means for supplying power,
A first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when the movable body control means starts supplying power by the power source means Execute S1302),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body to the second position when the supply of power is started by the power supply means, and a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) Department),
The movable body control means performs at least one of the first and second initial operation processes, and then performs the other initial operation process (for example, in FIG. 76). Example shown),
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.
In addition, “provide power supply means for supplying power,
A first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when the movable body control means starts supplying power by the power source means Execute S1302),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body to the second position when the supply of power is started by the power supply means, and a second initial operation process (for example, one of power-on operations) Department),
The movable body control means performs the second initial operation process during execution of the first initial operation process (for example, an example shown in FIG. 77 (d2)).
A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to shorten the period during which the player is difficult to play a game by performing the power-on operation of the second movable body during the power-on operation of the first movable body.

  Note that the movable body control means performs the second initial operation process while interrupting the first initial operation process and interrupting the first initial operation process. Good.

  In addition, although the relation with the opening of the front frame door 106 has been described so far, even when the main body 104 is opened, the door side effect movable body 2241 is similarly subjected to the initial position returning operation. However, if it takes longer to open the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 than if the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are opened together, it takes more time to open The timing to start the initial position return operation of the movable body (door side effect movable body 2241) is delayed, but conversely, the movable object that contacts the external device when it is inclined downward by the weight of the main body 104 The timing at which the initial position return operation is started may be accelerated, assuming a certain case.

  In addition, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed, when a load is applied from the outside during or after the operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 (for example, the load from the player), the door-side effect movable body 2241 The operation of may be stopped. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is also performed when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from a player) during the initial position return operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is opened. May be stopped.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the front frame door 106 is open or closed, when a load is applied from the outside during or after the operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 (for example, the load from the player), the door-side effect movable body 2241 Initial position return operation. In addition, when a load is applied from the outside during the initial position return operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open (for example, the load from the player), the initial state of the door-side effect movable body 2241 The position return operation may be continued.

  As a method of determining the load of the load from the outside, providing a detection means other than the initial position can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, in the case of a rotating gaming machine (slot machine), the first movable body is provided at a position where the player of the door can contact, and the position where the player inside the door can not contact (liquid crystal display device The second movable body is provided on the front side of the lamp, the inside of the lamp, the inside of the decoration panel, etc.).

<Chance button>
Next, the structure of the above-described chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700, and FIG. 79 (a) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. 79 (b) is at the operation completed position. FIG. 7C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. Also, FIGS. (D) to (f) are diagrams showing only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in the state of each of the same views (a) to (c). The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a first movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

  FIG. 80 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 80 (b) is a movement of the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completed position, in the operating state (in operation). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 (vertically movable relative to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 which is compressed between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage plate to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive for enabling the movable portion 704 to move up and down. It comprises the part 708 (708a, 708b) and the detection part 710 which can detect the position of the movable part 704. Although not shown, at the predetermined position of the chance button 700, the above-mentioned chance button lamp 138 is disposed.

  The fixing portion 702 is constituted by two rod-like fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage plate, and a disk-like fixing plate 702b fixed to the tip of the two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 79 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted through insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later, and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening at one side and a cylindrical upper case 704a, which is an operation surface 704a1 with which the other hand is in contact with the player's finger or hand, and the upper case 704a so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. It is comprised by the disk shaped lower case 704b fixed to case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 79 (d) to 79 (f), the lower case 704b has a central portion through which two insertion holes 704b1 which are inserted through the fixed shafts 702a and a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later. Insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 projecting toward the center direction of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as the base end, and detection projecting downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as the base end A piece 704 b 4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 is configured of a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A recessed groove 708b1 is formed in a straight line from one longitudinal direction to the other on a part of the outer edge of the rotation member 708b, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end of the recessed groove 708b1. An engagement recess 708b2 engageable with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  In the rotating member 708b, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the movable recess 704 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 706 by the engagement recess 708b2 engaging with the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 79 (e), the movable portion 704 is attached to the spring 706 by releasing the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. It is possible to rotate between a permitted position that permits the power to move upward.

  The detection unit 710 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is configured to be capable of advancing and retracting between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub control unit 400 does not press the movable unit 704 downward (the chance button 700 is pressed). As shown in FIG. 79C, when the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is not operated between the light projection part and the light reception part of the detection part 710, and the movable part 704 is below it. It is possible to determine whether it is pressed (the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is entering between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the detecting unit 710).

  In the initial position shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permission position to the restricting position, and the upward movement of the movable portion 704 is restricted by the rotating member 708. It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, whereby the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the operation completed position shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (c), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction of upward movement. It is moved upward by the biasing force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, and movement in the upward direction is restricted again, and only downward movement is possible. Also in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 79C, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 79 (c) is the state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completed position shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (c). In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed close to the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to restrict the rotation member 708b from the permission position to the restriction position The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 80 (b), that is, the chance button 700, is from the initial position shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a), as shown in FIGS. In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Are ignored (not to judge that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is valid).

  With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, such as when the player mistakenly presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 700 is configured to ignore the pressing operation of the chance button 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is activated. May be

  If the chance button has been pressed before the operation of the chance button (if it has been pressed before receiving the detection), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored, or the chance button The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. Further, in these cases, the chance button can be rendered acceptable, or the chance button can not be rendered.

<Operation reception effect production>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described using FIG. 81 and FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the operation state of the chance button 700, the acceptability of the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700, and the executeability of the operation reception effect.

  FIG. 82 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 82 (b) is a ball when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 6C is an external perspective view of the storage tray 108 with a door, and FIG. 7C is a view of the door 108 with a storage tray when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). It is an external appearance perspective view. Further, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 7E is the case when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 6F shows an example of the operation reception effect to be performed, and FIG. 6F shows an example of the operation reception effect to be performed when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). FIG.

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
When the first sub control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position shown in FIG. 82 (a) (before the operation shown in FIG. 81), the detection unit 710 detects the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b. It becomes a detectable state (a state where reception of detection results is possible). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, the chance button effect according to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect such as changing an image or characters displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of pressing times or pressing speed of the chance button 700, or pressing timing of the chance button 700 According to the above, effects such as changing images, characters, etc. can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these. That is, any effect may be used as long as at least one aspect (display (eg, animation, image, characters, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) changes in accordance with the pressing operation of the chance button 7000.

  Also, this partial aspect may be one or plural, for example, in the case of plural, a combination with the same category (display, sound, motion, color, etc.) (for example, LED 1 is The color may change from red to blue, LED2 may change from white to blue, etc.), and combinations with different categories (for example, display on liquid crystal (change from display A to display B), chance button It may be its own action (change from no action to rotational action) or the like.

  In addition, when the first auxiliary control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position (before operation), the first auxiliary control unit 400 turns on the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. By making the chance button 700 emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is suggested to the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is possible, and as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect that indicates to the player that pressing of the chance button 700 is possible using the symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and blue at the initial position The image display imitating the chance button 700 which has been illuminated and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

  In this manner, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player is surely in the initial position. A pressing operation can be performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, effects using various lamps 418, effects using the speaker 120, movable objects (for example, the shielding device 246, effects) An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be any effect that suggests the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is possible.

<Operation receptionist production / in operation>
The first sub control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 82 (a) to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 82 (b) (during operation shown in FIG. 81) Even when the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the part 710, the detection result is ignored (the detection result is not accepted). Therefore, the first sub control unit 400 also does not execute the above-mentioned chance button effect. In addition, after receiving the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once made effective), it is determined whether the chance button 700 is in operation or not. In this case, the chance button effect may not be performed.

  In addition, when the first auxiliary control unit 400 moves the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first auxiliary control unit 400 does not turn on the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect It is configured as follows. As described above, if the chance button 700 is not lighted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is invalid, and the disadvantage is caused by the erroneous operation. You will not suffer from

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the first sub control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 82 (b) (after completion of the operation shown in FIG. 81), the detection portion 710 detects the detection piece of the lower case 704 b. It becomes a state where it is possible to detect 704 b 4 (a state where reception of detection results is possible). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this operation completion position, the above-mentioned chance button effect is performed.

  Further, when the chance button 700 is stopped at the operation completion position (after the operation completion), the first sub control unit 400 turns on the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 82 (b). As shown, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red), it is suggested to the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is possible, as shown in FIG. 82 (e). An operation reception effect that indicates to the player that pressing of the chance button 700 is possible using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and the operation are completed The image display imitating the chance button 700 that emits red light at the position and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

  In this manner, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player is assured at the operation completion position. Can be pressed.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
As shown in FIG. 82C, even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710. State (the state where reception of detection results is possible). Here, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 can not rise to the operation completion position. The case where the biasing force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable portion 704 can not rise to the operation completion position can be mentioned as an example.

  In addition, even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation on the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 82 (f). An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 82E) to be performed after the completion of the operation) is performed to suggest to the player that it is possible.

  As described above, even when the chance button 700 can receive the operation of the chance button 700 even when the chance button 700 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the chance button 700 may occur even if the chance button 700 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and to prompt the player's operation. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color, but for example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position The light may be emitted (for example, green), or may be emitted in the same color (for example, blue or red) before or after the operation.

  Also, in this example, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 is made to emit light in a predetermined color. However, for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. The blinking pattern may be changed at each stop between positions. For example, the initial position repeatedly blinks in a first cycle (for example, 1 second), and the operation complete position repeats blinking in a second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle, and the initial position And the operation completion position is configured to repeat blinking in a third cycle (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first cycle.

  With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that the states are different from each other. In some cases, it is possible to perform a pressing operation suitable for the state of.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is an operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation) operable by the player. Section 758, bet button 132, and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation sections), rendering means capable of at least performing rendering (for example, first sub control section 400), moved means (for example, upper case 704a) , 754), and the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When control is performed, the second position (e.g., the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 82 (a), FIG. 83 (a), FIG. 93 (a)) , Figure 80 ( , (C), (b) and (c) in FIG. 93 (c), and the effect means performs the second control by performing the movement control. When the operation means moved to the position is operated, at least a special effect can be performed, and the effect means is the operation means that the operation means does not perform the movement control although the movement control is performed. Even in the case of not moving to the second position, it is possible to execute at least the special effect (for example, the effect when the button shown in FIG. 96 (c) is pressed) in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game stand characterized by being.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing effects, and moving means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754) Moving control means capable of moving at least the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500), and the operation means performs the movement control by the movement control means. If the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 82 (a), 83 (a) and 93 (a)), the second position (for example, FIG. c), FIG. 82 ( 83 (b), 93 (c), and the effect means is in the case where the special effect execution condition is satisfied (for example, the bet button 132 is at the initial stage). When at any position other than the position and the operation completion position, when an operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, at least a special effect (for example, an effect when the button is pressed as shown in FIG. 96C) is executed The special effect execution condition is satisfied when any one of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition among the plurality of conditions is the movement. It holds when the operation means moved to the second position by the control is operated, and the second one of the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is performed. Regardless, before Even if the operation unit is not moved to the second position, in which established in response to the manipulation means has been operated, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation means even if the operation means can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation means or the like. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to suggest the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, operation accepting means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations that can receive at least an operation by a player) A surface of a part (including a non-button surface) may be provided, and the operation means may be provided in the operation reception means.

  Further, the special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  In addition, even when the moved means is positioned at the first position, the effect means may be capable of at least executing the effect in response to the player operating the operation means. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit may be increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  The information processing apparatus further comprises informing means capable of at least informing informing the user to operate the operation means, the operation means being moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. Even if there is no case, the notification may be performed.

  Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game console provided with operation means (for example, chance button 700) operable by the player, and the player is used for the operation means. A touchable operation unit (for example, the upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation unit is moved from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to a second position (for example c) drive means (for example, drive unit 708) movable at least to the operation completion position), drive control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of drive control of the drive means, and the drive Rendering means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least performing rendering when the player operates the operation unit after the operation unit is moved to the second position by the unit; And the directing hand Is the case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after the drive means has been controlled to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position ( For example, even when stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c)), at least the effect can be executed in response to the player operating the operation means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), when there is a pressing operation on the chance button 700 at the timing when it stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button effect according to the pressing operation on the chance button 700 Is possible), it is a game stand characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation unit even when the operation unit can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation unit or the like. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to suggest the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the effect means is in the middle of control to move the operation part from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). Alternatively, even if the player operates the operation means, the effect may not be executed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  In addition, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least the effect may be executable in response to the operation of the operation means by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit may be increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  The information processing apparatus further comprises informing means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least informing informing the user to operate the operation means, the informing means said the operation unit at the second position. Even in the case where the user has not been moved, the notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to miss the opportunity to operate the operation means by notifying that the operation of the operation unit is possible even if the operation means is not moved to the position where the operation means originally moves. It can be prevented. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means capable of at least executing effects (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and notification means capable of at least executing notification (for example, chance button) A lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a, the base 754) A game console provided, the operation means being in a first position (eg, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means; 2 (a), FIG. 83 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to a second position (eg, FIG. 80 (c), FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), FIG. c) being moved to the operation completion position shown in c), the effect means is special when the operation means moved to the second position is operated by the movement control being performed. At least the effect (effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 96 (c)) can be performed, and the notification means is the second position when the operation means is in spite of the movement control being performed. Even if the player does not move to the position (for example, when stopping between the initial position and the operation completed position as shown in FIG. 82C), the player can operate the operation means. Can be notified at least (for example, the operation reception performance as shown in FIG. That it is possible to perform), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means capable of at least executing effects (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and notification means capable of at least executing notification (for example, chance button) A lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a, the base 754) A game console provided, the operation means being in a first position (eg, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means; 2 (a), FIG. 83 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to a second position (eg, FIG. 80 (c), FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), FIG. c) is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and the effect means is a special effect (effect when the button shown in FIG. 96 (c) is pressed) when the special effect execution condition is satisfied. The special effect execution condition is satisfied when any of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one of the plurality of conditions is: This holds true when the operation means moved to the second position is operated by performing the movement control, and the notification means performs the operation despite the movement control being performed. Means has not moved to the second position (eg, FIG. 82). Even in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in c)), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. f) an operation reception effect can be performed), and the game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means is moved to the second position by performing the movement control. (For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (e)) is executed, and the notification unit does not move the operation unit to the second position although the movement control is performed. Even in this case, at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) as the notification indicating that the operation means has moved to the second position is configured to be executed It is also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means as the notification means. The notification may be possible by at least one of the notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) which can be operated by the player and the operation means. Game console provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper Drive the movable portion at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to the second position (for example the operation completed position shown in FIG. 80 (c)) The operation unit is moved to the second position by the driving unit (for example, the driving unit 708), a driving control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of controlling the driving of the driving unit, and the driving unit. The And the effect means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least performing effects when the operation means is operated by the player, and the notification means includes the operation means operated by the drive means. After performing control to move from the first position to the second position, the operation unit is not moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 22C) Even in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position), at least notification that the player can operate the operation means can be made (for example, the operation acceptance as shown in FIG. 82 (f) It is possible to produce effects), and it is a game stand characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit can not move to the second position where it should be moved due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the notification means is in the middle of control to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). In addition, the user may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means among the plurality of notification means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation portion is not moved to the second position. May be

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not performing the effect of accepting the operation, thereby making it possible to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. There is a case. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation unit may not be received (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to

  With such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort by not accepting the detection of the operation, and may be able to refrain from operating the operation means or handle the operation means carefully. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 82E). Same as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even if at least the operation reception effect shown) is performed and the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

<Modification of chance button>
Next, a variation of the chance button will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation, and FIG. 83 (b) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 84 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of the second operation portion 758.

  The chance button 750 has a substantially triangular prism-shaped base 754 whose side view is an isosceles triangle, a first operation portion 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operation portion 758 provided on the orthogonal second surface, a first gear 754b fixed to the rotating shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear meshed with the first gear 754b It comprises gear 754c and drive source 754d which consists of a motor etc. which rotationally drives this 2nd gear 754c. The base 754 of the chance button 750 activates the drive source 754d to set the rotation axis 754a as an axis between the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the operation completed position shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor capable of detecting the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 or a sensor circuit. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 shows FIG. 83 (b). When it is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 5, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform the operation with the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a). Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  Further, the second operation unit 758 is provided with a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor capable of detecting a pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 or a sensor circuit. When the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 while the base 754 determines the detection result of FIG. When it is in the initial position shown in), the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform the operation by the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b). Even when the base 754 is in the initial position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) which can be operated by the player and the operation means. Game console provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper Drive the movable portion at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to the second position (for example the operation completed position shown in FIG. 80 (c)) The operation unit is moved to the second position by the driving unit (for example, the driving unit 708), a driving control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of controlling the driving of the driving unit, and the driving unit. The And the effect means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least performing effects when the operation means is operated by the player, and the notification means includes the operation means operated by the drive means. The case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after the control to move the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 82C) Even in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position), at least notification that the player can operate the operation means can be made (for example, the operation acceptance as shown in FIG. 82 (f) It is possible to produce effects), and it is a game stand characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit can not move to the second position where it should be moved due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the notification means is in the middle of control to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). In addition, the user may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means among the plurality of notification means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing notification to prompt an operation. It should be noted that a plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means of the plurality of notification means play the operation means It may at least notify that the person can operate.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation portion is not moved to the second position. May be

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not performing the effect of accepting the operation, thereby making it possible to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. There is a case. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation unit may not be received (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to

  With such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort by not accepting the detection of the operation, and may be able to refrain from operating the operation means or handle the operation means carefully. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 82E). Same as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even if at least the operation reception effect shown) is performed and the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

<Operation acceptance effect of chance button 750>
Next, an operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described using FIG. The same figure (a) is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position, and the figure (b) is a side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the operation completed position. Sectional drawing, the figure (c) is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure).

  Further, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 7E is the case when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 11F is a view showing an example of the operation reception effect to be performed, and FIG. 11F is an example of the operation reception effect to be performed when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure) FIG.

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
As described above, the pachinko machine according to the modification validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is configured to be invalidated.

  Further, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), using the decorative symbol display device 208 at a predetermined timing, the first operation portion of the chance button 750 An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the 756 can be pressed (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!”, the image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and the downward direction Image display of the arrow).

  In this manner, if the operation reception effect is performed at the timing at which the first operation unit 756 can be operated, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can reliably press the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

  Note that the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) instead of (or in addition to) such operation reception effects. It may be suggested to the player that there is. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, effects using various lamps 418, effects using the speaker 120, movable objects (for example, the shielding device 246, effect An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.

<Operation receptionist production / in operation>
When the pachinko machine according to the modification is moving the chance button 750 from the initial position shown in FIG. 85 (a) to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 85 (b) (during operation), the first operation unit Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are configured to be invalidated. In addition, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the pachinko machine according to the modification is stopping the chance button 750 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 85 (b), the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is validated while The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is configured to be invalidated. As described above, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completed position to the initial position by disabling the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completed position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. In addition, it may be possible to avoid the situation in which the player's hand is pinched, and it may be possible to improve the security.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, a second operation of the chance button 750 is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 85 (e). Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the pressing operation of the section 758 is possible (in this example, a character display different from the case of the first operation unit 756: “Press the super-chance button !!”, The image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed. As described above, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the mode of the operation reception effect corresponding to each operation unit is made different, it is possible to avoid a pressing error or the like of the operation unit, In some cases, it is possible to prevent the decline. Note that the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red) instead of (or in addition to) such operation reception effects. It may be suggested to the player that there is.

  The content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 85 (e). For example, the image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be performed, and the downward arrow It is not necessary to display an image. Further, when the operation unit is made to emit light, the brightness of the operation unit may be lower than the brightness of the other part (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the brightness of the other part You may With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more prominent than other portions, so it is easy for the player to easily recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced. is there.

  In addition, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) may be displayed as an operation reception effect, in which a period in which the operation reception is possible may be displayed. In this case, even if the operation reception remaining time of the operation means is displayed Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be simultaneously detected. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 may be detected. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that both pressing operations are possible (for example, the character display of “Press the chance button or the super-chance button !!”, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to perform the image display imitating the section 758 and the image display of the downward arrow). With such a configuration, variations of the operation by the player can be expanded, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that any one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “press the chance button !!”. Letter notation may be used. Further, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notification may be performed.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
The pachinko machine according to the modification is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the movement completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is caught by the main body etc. to move from the initial position to the movement completion position (or from the movement completion position The case where rotation to the initial position is not possible can be mentioned as an example.

  In addition, even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player can press the chance button 750 as shown in FIG. 85 (f) at a predetermined timing. An operation reception effect to suggest (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect performed after the completion of the operation (effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) is performed.

  As described above, even if the chance button 750 can be accepted even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the chance button 750 is possible even when the chance button 750 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and the player's operation is urged. it can.

  It should be noted that the mode of the operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) performed in the operation completed position and the operation reception effect (for example, performed when stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position) The mode of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (f) may be different. For example, while the operation reception effect performed when the operation completion position is performed uses a first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp), while it is between the initial position and the operation completion position A second type of notification means (for example, three types of a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and a speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when stopped.

  In addition, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and the like) in both the operation reception effect performed when the operation completion position is performed and the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. And the speaker), the aspect of some of the notification means may be made different. For example, in the operation reception effect performed in the operation completion position, the liquid crystal display device performs the first display (for example, character display and image display) and the operation performed in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position In the reception effect, the second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same mode of operation.

  With such a configuration, it can be clearly notified whether the chance button 750 is at the predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and an operation according to the state of the chance button 750 may be urged.

<Example of slot machine>
Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 86 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored inside the center of the main body 101, and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted other than the reel. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  At the back of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is disposed. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a pay line 114 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, upper horizontal pay line, lower horizontal pay line, right Five lines of the down pay line and the upper right pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the bet number.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 122 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-play which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Further, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button for changing the mode of the effect by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is insertion of the specified number of medals, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. is there. The stored sheet number indicator 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127 are seven segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 which have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificates is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout port 155 and a medal receptacle 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 160 is disposed on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the top of the rendering device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image provided on the back side of the shutters 163 (effect image The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (the player's side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  FIG. 87 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box which is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the side surface plate 260 on the left side, the side surface plate 260 on the right side, the lower surface plate 264 and the back surface plate 242 and is open at the front. A main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is disposed inside the main body 101 at a position not overlapping the air vent 249 provided at the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are disposed. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 in which the sub control board is stored is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply 252 is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front of the power supply 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside into the slot machine 100 from direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as a main control unit 300 and sub control units 400 and 500 described later and each device. Do. Furthermore, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 or the like of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) is provided. There is.

  The medal auxiliary storage 240 is disposed on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is disposed behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting the power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected thereto extends to the outside through the power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via the hinge device 276, and an effect control board for controlling the effect device 160 and the effect device 160 is provided above the symbol display window 113. The upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medal passes when the medal selector 170 causes an illegal medal or the like to fall to the medal receiver 161, etc. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main effect according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of winning combination, and stop of reels. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 generates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of driving pulses in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the dividing value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the dividing data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of interrupt is 256 × 47 × 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main control unit main processing described later).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from the various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, and medal insertion slot 141) at every interrupt time. Medal medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal medal payout sensor for medals dispensed from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

  When sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing, and stores it in the register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the passage of medals. Two start levers 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135 and detect start operations by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are provided on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are disposed on each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as insertion medals to the game Detect the operation. In addition, the bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132, and when the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as insertion medals to the game When the bet button 132 functions as a chance button, the pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

  The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a noncontact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are disposed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes It becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180 Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (prize line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insert lamp 129, game start available lamp 121, number of stored cards A drive circuit 328 is provided to drive the display 125, the game information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127).

  In addition, an information output circuit 334 (external concentrated terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first secondary control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 includes various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bed button lamp). (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) or the like is connected.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. In addition, a sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

  In addition, a drive circuit 425 is provided in the first auxiliary control unit 400, and a drive unit 427 for vertically driving the bet button 132 is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in <bet button 132> below.

  The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second secondary control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 performs various controls of the rendering device 160 including display control of the rendering image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured of a plurality of control units, for example, a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls drive devices for various effects. It is also good.

  The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initialization of the I / O 310, initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation allowance to the WDT 314 and initialization Set the value etc. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not the medal has been inserted, and the pay line display lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of the medal. In addition, since the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed when the player plays back in the previous game, insertion of the medals by the player becomes unnecessary. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 is operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a valid pay line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination of any winning combination (including the operating combination) is made, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received, and when any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which any of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111 Stop based on data. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, a winning determination is made. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a bell prize is won. In step S119, if any winning combination with a payout is won, medals of the number corresponding to the winning combination are paid out according to the number of pay lines.

  At step S121, a game state control process is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to the transition of each gaming state of normal gaming, BB gaming, RB gaming, and internal winning gaming is performed, and the gaming state is transitioned by the establishment of the start condition and the termination condition. One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of the sensor circuit 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is divided for each of the various sensors 318. It stores in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when the information with the detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparation for transmitting a bet button acceptance command to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S207, various game processing is performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (the various interrupt statuses are acquired based on the signals from the various sensors 318), and processing according to the status is performed (for example, the interrupt statuses of the acquired stop buttons 137 to 139) Stop button acceptance processing). In step S209, a timer update process is performed. The various timers are updated in each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the present embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 11 To 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a start lever reception command, a bet button reception command, an effect command associated with the effect lottery process, a rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, a stop button 137 Stop button acceptance command accompanying acceptance of the operation of 139, stop position information command accompanying stop processing of reels 110 to 112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, command indicating game state, etc.), bits 0 to 0 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In step S213, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal discharge abnormality is monitored, and an error is detected. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker on which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interruption end process are performed. In this timer interruption end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the respective original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S221, the power saving process such as initialization of the I / O port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption at the time of power return as return data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, a process of reading out effect data from the ROM 406 and the like, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the drive circuit 424 of the shutter 163 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, movable object control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, information output processing is performed to make settings to transmit a control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S309. For example, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 among the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 91 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 (c), a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 91 (a), and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S315, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S601 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S601, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S609, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command at step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, processing such as reading out effect data from the ROM 506, and performing processing of updating effect data when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S609. For example, when an instruction for image control is included in the effect data read out in step S609, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92C, the second subsidiary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second subsidiary control unit 500 will be described. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 92A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, a process of updating the effect random number is performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 92 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S905, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S 909, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S 911. Otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S911, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Bet button 132>
FIG. 93 (a) is an external perspective view of the area around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 93 (b) is a state where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation FIG. 7C is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG.

  The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 provided to the pachinko machine 100, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the drive unit 427 to obtain the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a). And the operation completed position shown in FIG. 93 (c).

<Bet button 132 / initial position>
In the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the upward movement is restricted by the rotating member (not shown) and can be moved only downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, the detection button (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, thereby pressing the bet button 132. Is detectable.

<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>
At the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and is moved upward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown) ), And the upward movement is restricted again, and only the downward movement is possible. Even in this operation completed position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, whereby the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation is detectable.

<Betting button 132 / during operation>
In the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), that is, while the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 93 (c), the bet button 132 To ignore the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor even if the detection button of the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the person and detected by the bet button 132 sensor (not to judge that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid) Configured.

  With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, for example, when the player mistakenly presses the bet button 132 while the bet button 132 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the depression operation of the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the depression operation of the bet button 132 is validated. May be

<When the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button>
FIG. 94 (a) is a view for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the notification lamp 123, the replay lamp 122, the game medal insertable lamp 124, the game start enable lamp 121, and the game medal insert lamp 129, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertable lamp 124 is on, and the number of lights on the game medal insert lamp 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals (3 in this example) necessary for one game. The state is a state in which the player can start the game by inserting a predetermined number of medals, and the medal can be electronically inserted by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, and the first sub control unit 400 lights a bet button lamp (not shown) and turns the bet button 132 into a predetermined color (for example, yellow). The light is illuminated to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the depression operation of the bet button 132 is valid. Also, when the player has inserted a prescribed number of medals, as shown in FIG. 6B, the game start enable lamp 121 is turned on, and it is informed that the game start operation is possible. Ru.

  In addition, the game medal insertable lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be stored electronically in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum stored number (for example, 50), and it is informed that the medal can not be inserted. . In addition, when a medal is inserted while the game medal insertable lamp 124 is turned off (when it is attempted to insert a medal exceeding the maximum storage number), the medal is forcibly discharged from the medal discharge port 155. Configured.

<When the bet button 132 can not be used>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can not be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), the game medal input enable lamp 124 and the game start enable lamp 121 are on, and the number of lights on the game medal input lamp 129 is the same as the specified number (3 in this example). The player is in a state in which the player can start playing the game, and pressing the start lever 135 can start rotating the reels 110 to 112 (starting the game).

  In addition, when the game start possible lamp 121 is lit, the medal is not inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed because the specified number of medals are inserted (the detection result of the medal input button is not accepted) , And the bet button 132 can not be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

  Even if the game start enable lamp is on, it is possible to use the bet button 132 as a chance button. For example, while the replaying lamp 122 is on, medals can not be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, an effect that urges the bet button 132 to be pressed as an effect between the game in which the replay role has won and the start of the next game (when the start lever 135 is depressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotation). May be performed. In this state, the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the reception of the depression operation of the bet button 132 is valid by lighting the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the bet button 132 to be depressed may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.

<When the bet button 132 is used as a chance button>
FIG. 94 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 95 (a) is when the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation 95 (b) is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 95 (c) is an initial position of the bet button 132. And the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure) is an appearance perspective view of the bet button 132.

  FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 95 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the normal effect, FIG. 95 (e) is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG. 95 (g) is between the initial position and the operation completion position of the bet button 132. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when it stops by (for example, when it fails).

<Operation reception effect / initial position>
When the first sub control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the initial position shown in FIG. 94 (c), it is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing to start accepting the detection result of the bet button). Suggesting to the player that pressing the bet button 132 is effective by lighting the bet button lamp and causing the bet button 132 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), and the second sub-control unit As shown in FIG. 6D, an operation reception effect 500 (in this example, the character of the lord) informing the player that the depression operation of the bet button 132 is possible using the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. Makes an image display holding the signboard on which the bet button 132 is illuminated in blue.

  In this example, the bet buttons 132 emit light in different colors in order to allow the player to easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as the medal insertion button or can be used as the chance button. Light may be emitted in color. In this example, although the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color, for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. In this case, when the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button The blinking pattern may be changed when the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, it blinks in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) repeatedly, and when used as a chance button, a second cycle (for example, 0. 0.) shorter than the first cycle. Configure to blink repeatedly in 5 seconds.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an operation error of the button or the like. is there. In addition, when the detection result of the bet button depression can be received, the bet button lamp may not be lighted, or the operation reception effect may not be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is urged. It is not necessary to perform the presentation.

<Operation receptionist production / in operation>
During the operation of the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 95 (a), that is, from the initial position where the bet button 132 is shown in FIG. 94 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 moves from the initial position shown in FIG. When moving to a position, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, in the effect image display device 157, normal effects as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 96 (a) are executed. Here, as the normal effects, in the case of a pachinko machine, effects such as variation are produced, reach effects, jackpot effects, etc. are mentioned, and in the case of a slot machine, effects produced during BB, effects during reel rotation, freezed An effect etc. are mentioned.

  The bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. In addition, the bet button lamp lights up in the first color (for example, red) when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, and the bet button lamp is in the second color (for example, white) when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid. You may turn it on. In addition, the bet button lamp is lighted at the first brightness when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, and the bet button lamp is lighted at the second brightness lower than the first brightness when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid. May be

<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 95 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 makes a bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 95 (b). By lighting up and making the bet button 132 emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red), it is suggested to the player that pressing operation of the bet button 132 is possible, as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position) And the downward arrow image display).

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
The first sub-control unit 400 has a state in which the detection unit can detect the pressing operation of the bet button 132 even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 95C is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable portion of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed portion and the movable portion can not rise to the operation completion position, the bet button One example is a case where the biasing force of the spring 132 is weakened and the movable part can not rise to the operation completion position.

  Also, even when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button as shown in FIG. 95 (f). Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIGS. 95 (g) and 96 (b). Then, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 95 (e)) performed after the completion of the operation is performed.

  As described above, even if the bet button 132 can be accepted even when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the bet button 132 is possible even when the bet button 132 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and to prompt the player's operation. it can.

  Further, FIG. 96 (c) is an example of the special effect displayed when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted. This effect is, of course, when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is displayed also when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position. In addition, even if the button is not pressed, it may be displayed after a certain period (for example, after the end of the period in which the button can be received), the effect after the button is pressed is not limited to the liquid crystal display, and the effect movable body To operate (the operation pattern may change), light emitting means such as an LED may light (the light emission pattern may change), and sounds such as BGM and sound effects may be heard from a sound output means such as a speaker. It is also good.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the effect means and the notification means according to the present invention A movable body, an operation means itself and the like can be applied. Therefore, the effect by the effect means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device, the light emission by the lamp, etc. For example, the sound by the speaker, the movement or vibration by the movable body, the light emission or blinking of the operation means itself May be. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and may be any operation means operable by the player.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the error state of the operation means is present. The number of notification means may be one, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means does not operate up to the position where it originally moves. Further, the number of notification means may be one, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Here, the “different notification mode” may be any of the case where the notification is not performed, the case where the notification is performed, and the case where the notification is not performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of informing means, and at least one or all of the plurality of informing means may perform notification to prompt an operation. Further, there may be a plurality of informing means, and different informing modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating up to the position where it originally moves. Here, the “different notification mode” may include a case where a predetermined notification means does not perform notification among the plurality of notification means, and may include a case where all of the plurality of notification means do not perform notification. Further, the operation means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever or the like.

  In addition, even if there is a plurality of effects as a result of accepting an operation in one informing means, even if at least one of the plurality of effects is not performed when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves Good. In addition, the effect of receiving the operation may be performed by the plurality of notification means, and at least one notification means among the plurality of notification means when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves You may choose not to perform the In addition, one effect may be obtained as a result of accepting an operation in one informing means. Moreover, the thing which does not perform the presentation of the result of having received operation may be contained in several alerting | reporting means.

  Further, although an example is shown in which the control unit performs detection of the operation unit and the effect based on the detection result, the same control unit may perform detection based on the operation unit and the effect based on the detection result. In addition, even in the case where the detection of the operation means and the effect based on the detection result are performed by different control units, the operation means is operated when the operation portion is positioned at the first position or the second position. The operation detection result is transmitted to the other control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result, and when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to receive the detection result.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is positioned at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit. While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is set to the first control unit. Or although it transmits to a 2nd control part, it may constitute so that the said 1st control part or the 2nd control part concerned may not receive a detection result. In addition, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is positioned at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is positioned at the second position. When the operating means is operated during operation or during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

  In addition, the transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during, or after the operation of the operation unit may be the first control unit. In addition, even when the operation is performed during the operation of the operation means, the operation detection result may be acceptable in another control unit. Moreover, when the operation means before operation is operated, the detection result of the operation is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during and after the operation, the second control unit The detection result of the operation may be transmitted to the first control unit. Also, before operation, during operation may be transmitted to the second control unit, and after operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  In addition, when the operation means does not operate to the second position to move originally, the notification means will play the second position that should originally move if the notification to suggest the second position to move originally is played. In some cases, it may be possible to notify the player, and not to disadvantage the player as compared to the case where the player moves to the second position to move originally. In addition, when the operation means does not operate up to the second position where it originally moves, if the notification means gives a notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, confusion of the player due to a mismatch between the operation state and the notification mode You may be able to prevent Further, in this case, the notification not suggesting the second position to move originally may notify the position of the operation means before the operation, and the notification not suggesting the second position to move originally will be the operation before the operation A position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, the first operation unit and the second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the detection result of the operation of the first operation unit Acceptable, before the operation of the operation means, the detection result of the operation of the second operation part is not accepted, and when the operation means is operated to the second position which originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation part The detection result may be configured to be accepted.

  Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If not accepted, notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, since the originally operable second operation unit can be operated, the same operation can be performed as in the case where the operation means is moved to the originally moved second position. It can sometimes prevent you from being penalized. In this case, notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation unit does not operate up to the second position to move originally, the operation detection result can be received when the first operation unit is operated. In this case, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit is operable, and may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate since it is sufficient to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable. The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  In addition, when the detection result of the second operation unit is not received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is received even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification unit may be configured to notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation of the operation unit may be suppressed, and failure of the operation means may be prevented. In this case, notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  In addition, when the operation means does not operate up to the second position to move originally, when the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted when the first operation unit is operated The notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable, while the notification means may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by differentiating the operation portion that can be operated when the operation means is not operating to the position where it should originally move. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable. The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  The operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. Further, the rendering means is special in response to the operation of the operation means being operated when the operation means is not moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. At least the effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the operation means moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, (1) detection means (for example, detection unit 710, detection piece 704b4, chance) provided in the operation means The pressing operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection unit of the button 750 and the detection unit of the bet button 132. (2) Provided on the operation means after the time required for the movement control has elapsed It may be that the pressing operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means (for example, the detection portion 710, the detection piece 704b4, the detection portion of the chance button 750, the detection portion of the bet button 132).

  Also, the time required for movement control may be the time taken to move from the first position to the second position, and drive means (for example, drive units 708 (708a, 708b) provided in the operation means may be used. ), The drive source 754d, the drive unit 427) may be operated to rotate the rotating member from the restricted position to the permitted position, and in the case where the movable unit is driven up and down, the movable unit May be the time to move to the movement completion position.

  In addition, even though the movement control is performed, the operation means does not move to the second position, and (1) the operation is performed by a physical factor such as a failure of the drive means or a press by the player. It may be the case where the means can not move, or (2) the case where constant driving by the driving means can not be performed even if the time required for the movement control has elapsed. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operation means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  In addition, movement control may be performed to detect that the operation means has moved to the second position. In this case, it can be understood that the operation means can not move to the second position by not being detected, so that effects may be performed according to the detection result, and variations of the effects may be able to be increased.

  In addition, it may be detected that movement control can not move the operation means to the second position. In this case, it can be known that movement of the operation means to the second position is completed by not being detected, so that effects may be performed according to the detection result, and variations of the effects may be able to be increased. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated even while the movement control is being performed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, and the first movement period is a period consisting of a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement Even when control is being performed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. In addition, the special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being performed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed even if the operation means is operated 0.5 seconds after the start (an example of the second period), A special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated for 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from 0.5 seconds after the start to the end. Of course, when movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of a movement control period), special effects may be performed if the operation means is operated in this one second.

  In addition, with regard to the operation means moved to the second position, the movement control may move the operation means to the first position when the operation reception period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed. In addition, with regard to the operation unit moved to the second position, when the operation reception period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed, the operation position may not be returned from the second position to the first position.

  In addition, regarding the operation means moved to the second position, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation reception period, and the operation moved to the second position With regard to the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation reception period. The operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by a physical factor during the operation reception period by the operation means moved to the second position.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the first operation means of the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operation of the plurality of operation means When the means does not move, and the notification means urges pressing of the first operation means (in the case of (A) below), although the movement control is performed, the first means When the operating means has not moved to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. In addition, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be Also, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. In addition, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the third operation means and the fourth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means The third operation means is in the second position despite the fact that the notification for urging the operation of the third operation means is performed (in the case of (B) below) and the movement control is performed If it has not moved, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, a pressing operation of the third operation means may be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, a pressing operation of the third operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means may not be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , And a notification prompting the operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is performed (in the case of (C) below), the pressing operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is detected. If the detection of the fifth operation means is faster than the sixth operation means (sixth detection> the same applies to the case of the fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operation means is not accepted. The detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection process of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  Further, in the case of (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be received at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operation means, the sixth (fifth) operation means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operation means If the detection is received, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. In addition, when almost simultaneous, one may be received with priority. For example, among the pressed operation means, the detection of the operation means for producing an effect advantageous to the player may be prioritized, or the predetermined operation means may be preferentially detected.

  In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may be detected. In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be left at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may be detected.

  In the cases of (B) and (C) above, movement control causes the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means to be in the second position after the operation acceptance period is over. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially simultaneous with the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one moving first, during operation or end of operation The other may be moved later.

  When the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation reception is completed, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) ) May be stopped at the second position as it is. In addition, when the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position after the operation reception period ends, the third (fifth) operation means and the fifth operation means are obtained by movement control. Only one of the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

  Further, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the fifth through the movement control The fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially simultaneous with the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one moving first, during operation or end of operation The other may be moved later.

  Further, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the fifth through the movement control Only one of the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

  The operation reception period indicates a period for receiving the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is received for 6 seconds after the start of the operation reception, but the detection result of the operation means is not received after 6 seconds.

  In addition, special effects can be performed when the operating means at the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by movement control are pressed It may be made to be. The third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, the scope of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to the other configuration.

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description.

(Supplementary Note 1)
A first movable body provided at a position where a player can make contact,
A second movable body provided at a position where the player can not make contact;
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is returned to a first position, which is an origin position of the first movable body, when a first condition is satisfied.
The second movable body is returned to a second position, which is an origin position of the second movable body, when a second condition is satisfied.
A game console characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are different.

(Supplementary Note 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The door that can be opened and closed,
Effect control means for controlling the effect of the game;
Equipped with
The effect control means is
First drive control means for controlling the first movable body;
Second drive control means for controlling the second movable body;
Have
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body,
The door includes a door open detection unit capable of detecting that the door is open;
The first condition is that opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection unit,
A game console characterized in that the second drive control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.

(Supplementary Note 3)
In the game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
A power supply means for supplying power;
The first movable body moves at a first speed to the first position when power supply is started by the power supply means,
A game console characterized in that the first movable body moves to a first position at a second speed different from the first speed when the first condition is satisfied.

(Supplementary Note 4)
In the game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The first movable object is returned to the first position by the first drive control unit when the first movable object is movable and the first condition is satisfied. A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
In the game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
When the supply of power is started by the power supply means, the second drive control means executes an initial operation process of moving the second movable body to a predetermined initial position,
An initial operation process of the second drive control means is performed during execution of an initial operation process of the first drive control means.

(Appendix A)
Operation means operable by the player;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
Movement control means capable of at least performing movement control for moving the moved means;
A game console equipped with
The operation means is moved from the first position to the second position when the movement control is performed by the movement control means.
When the operation means moved to the second position is operated by the movement control, the effect means can at least execute special effects.
Even when the operation means has not moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the effect means is at least at least in response to the operation of the operation means. It is possible to carry out special effects,
A game stand characterized by

  The operation means may be replaced with a movable body (for example, the first movable body) provided at a position where the player can contact.

(Appendix B)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
An operation receiving unit capable of receiving at least an operation by a player;
The operation means is provided to the operation reception means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix C)
In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The special effect is not performed even if the operation means is operated during execution of the movement control.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix D)
In the game console according to any of Appendices A to C,
Even when the moved means is positioned at the first position, the effect means can at least execute the effect according to the operation of the operation means by the player.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix E)
In the game console according to any of Appendices A to D,
A notification unit capable of at least notifying the user of the operation unit;
The notification means performs the notification even when the operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the examples, the modifications, the various examples, the supplementary notes, and the like described above, the configuration requirements may be changed to another embodiment, an example, and The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes.

  Subsequently, an embodiment of the first invention will be described. In the following description, points different from the contents described above will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted. Further, components having the same names as the names of the components described so far will be described with the reference numerals used so far.

  FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are opened as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 shown in FIG. 97 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. An inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 97 is a member which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and which is attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be able to open and close, and which serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft. The inner frame 104 corresponds to an example of the first door, and the inner frame 104 is provided so as to be rotatable at least with respect to the outer frame, and the game board is directed to the player side (front side) 200 is detachably mounted, and various control boards such as the main control unit 300 and sub control means (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500) are provided on the back side (rear side). There is. The inner frame 104 is provided with an inner frame opening switch 145 (see FIG. 98) that detects the opening of the inner frame 104 when the inner frame 104 is opened. In the present specification, the sensor may be referred to as a switch.

  The front door 105 is a door member attached to the front surface of the inner frame 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. That is, the front door 105 corresponds to an example of the second door, and is provided at least rotatably with respect to the inner frame 104. In the front door 105 shown in FIG. 97, a frame portion 1051 and a plate portion 1052 are provided. The frame portion 1051 is formed in a frame shape, and a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening on the inner side, and the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the payout are provided on the front side. The display LED 142 and a door side effect movable body (not shown) are attached here. The frame portion 1051 corresponds to the portion of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. The tray portion 1052 includes an upper tray 126, a lower tray 128, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball emission handle 134, and an operation panel 13P. The operation panel 13P is provided with various operation means such as the ball extraction button 130 and the chance button 136. A chance button lamp 138 is incorporated in the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 also corresponds to an example of the door-side effect movable body. The door side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. The plate portion 1052 corresponds to the portion of the door 108 with a ball storage plate shown in FIG.

  The inner frame 104 is provided with a front door opening switch 147 for detecting the opening of the front door 105 when the front door 105 is opened. The front door open switch 147 is an open detection means (sensor), and is off when the front door 105 is not in contact, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 turns the front door open switch 147 off. As a result, it detects that the front door 105 is open.

  As described above, the inner frame 104 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 104. Further, the front door 105 can be opened and closed together with the inner frame 104 with respect to the outer frame 102. That is, in a state in which the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104. Therefore, the combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state in which the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 can be viewed as one door.

  Alternatively, the frame portion 1051 and the plate portion 1052 may be separate door members, which can be independently rotated with respect to the inner frame 104. In this case, the inner frame 104 is provided with a door opening switch that detects the opening of each door member. Further, the frame portion 1051 may be an example of a second door or a door, and the plate portion 1052 may be an example of a second door or a door.

  FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 98, the left oblique back side is the player side (front side), and the right oblique front side is the back side (back side). In FIG. 98, the front door 105, the transparent plate unit 118U, the game board unit 200U, the inner frame 104, and the outer frame 102 are shown from the player side.

  The transparent plate unit 118U has a transparent plate member 118 and an attachment member 1181 attached around the transparent plate member 118.

  The game board unit 200U has a game board 200 and a control unit CU provided on the back side of the game board. The control unit CU includes a main substrate case, a first sub substrate case, a second sub substrate case, and the like.

  At the lower corner of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 98 opposite to the hinge portion 112, an inner frame open switch 145 is provided toward the rear side, ie, the outer frame 102. The inner frame open switch 145 is an open detection means and is in the off state when not in contact with the outer frame 102, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 turns the inner frame open switch 145 off. , Detects that the inner frame 104 is open. Further, a power supply substrate case 184, a payout substrate case 172, and a launch substrate case (not shown) are provided at the lower part on the back side of the inner frame 104. Further, a power switch 178, a segment display 1044, and an error display LED 1045 are provided at the lower part on the back side of the inner frame 104.

  FIG. 99 is a view showing the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 being opened.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing that the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also open with respect to the inner frame 104. FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (a), the inner frame open switch 145 is off and the front door open switch 147 is also off, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has the inner frame 104 open. It detects that there is, and detects that the front door 105 is also in the open state. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the open state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

  FIG. 99 (b) is a view showing the inner frame 104 being open with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 being closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (b), the inner frame open switch 145 is in the OFF state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the inner frame 104 is in the open state. On the other hand, the front door open switch 147 is in the on state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 105 is in the open state, that is, detects that the front door 105 is in the closed state.

  FIG. 99 (c) is a view showing the inner frame 104 closed with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 opened with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (c), the inner frame open switch 145 is in the on state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the inner frame 104 is in the open state, that is, the front door 105 is It detects that it is closed. On the other hand, the front door open switch 147 is in the OFF state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 105 is in the open state.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (b) and FIG. 99 (c) detects the open state of one of the door bodies (104 or 105).

  FIG. 99 (d) is a view showing the inner frame 104 closed to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 closed to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (d), the inner frame open switch 145 is on and the front door open switch 147 is also on, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has the inner frame 104 closed. It detects that there is, and detects that the front door 105 is also in the closed state. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the closed state of the two doors (104 and 105).

  In FIG. 100, when the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104, the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the steps in a step-by-step manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (a), both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are in the closed state, and the power switch 178 is in the off state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (b), the inner frame 104 is open relative to the outer frame 102. The front door 105 rotates with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

  In FIG. 100 (c), the power switch 178 is turned on by turning the back of the inner frame 104 in the open state. That is, the power on operation is performed. The power switch 178 is an operator that can not be operated unless the inner frame 104 is opened. When the main power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 starts an initial operation of the effect movable body 224. In this initial operation, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 confirms that the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, so even if the effect movable body 224 is actually located at the initial position, or vice versa Even if it is not located in the stage, the effect movable body 224 is moved from the initial position to the farthest position (maximum operating position). When the effect movable body 224 reaches the maximum operating position, an initial position return operation is performed to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position. A series of operations (confirmation operations) from the start of the initial operation to the return to the initial position correspond to an example of the second operation. That is, the combination of the initial operation and the initial position return operation corresponds to an example of the second operation, and hereinafter, this combined operation is referred to as a confirmation operation.

  Here, the effect movable body 224 can reciprocate between the initial position and the maximum operating position, but the effect movable body 224 is not limited to those reciprocable, and the initial position can be a departure point. It may be possible to operate via the maximum operating position (for example, one performing a circular motion).

  Further, when the inner frame 104 is open, an error related notification regarding a door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error related notification may not be performed for a predetermined time after the power switch 178 is operated or until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

  A sensor for detecting the effect movable body 224 is provided at each of the initial position and the maximum operating position, and the second auxiliary control that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position and has returned to the initial position The CPU 504 of the unit 500 can detect this. When it is not possible to detect that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or has returned to the initial position, an effect movable body error is notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. When the effect movable body error occurs, the effect movable body 224 itself may be broken, the sensor may be broken, or the wiring for transmitting the sensor detection signal may be broken.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a at the upper right shown in FIG. 100 (d) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position, and has completed the initial operation. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 100 (e) is returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position return operation has been completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b at the lower left shown in FIG. 100 (f) reaches the maximum operation position from the initial position, and completes the initial operation. Further, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 100 (g) is returned from the maximum operation position to the initial position. That is, the initial position return operation has been completed.

  Thus, the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is performed. When there is a door-side effect movable body 2241 in addition to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, the confirmation operation is performed for the other door-side effect movable bodies 2241. It will be. Also, the plurality of door-side effect movable bodies 2241 may perform the confirmation operation simultaneously. On the other hand, the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 whose operation ranges overlap with each other may shift the execution timing and perform the confirmation operation.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 step by step.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is finished, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

  The board side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (h) reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position, and completes the initial operation. Also, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (i) returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position, and completes the initial position return operation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (j), the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed and is in a closed state.

  When there is a board-side effect movable body 2242 in addition to the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101, the confirmation operation is also performed on the other board-side effect movable bodies 2242. Also, a plurality of board-side effect movable bodies 2242 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the panel-side effect movable bodies 2242 whose operation ranges overlap with each other may shift their execution timings to perform a confirmation operation.

  Furthermore, in this example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is performed earlier than the panel-side effect movable body 2242, but the confirmation operation may be performed in reverse or simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution timing may partially overlap.

  Furthermore, although the front door 105 is in the closed state here, the same is true even in the state in which the front door 105 is opened together with the inner frame 104. Furthermore, when the power on in FIG. 100 (c) is finished, the inner frame 104 is closed, and the same applies whether the front door 105 is open or the front door 105 is closed. It is.

  As described above, the confirmation operation (second operation) in the case where the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 is executed regardless of the open / close state of the door.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram sequentially showing an example of the case where simultaneous power-on by the island equipment is performed.

  In the island facility, power can be turned off all at once while the power switch 178 is on. If the power is turned off while the power switch 178 is on, the island facility can turn on the power without operating the power switch 178, that is, without opening the inner frame 104 (while keeping the closed state). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the state where both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are closed, if simultaneous powering on is performed by the island facility, the same way as when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. Then, the confirmation operation is performed.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a at the upper right shown in FIG. 102 (b) is pivoted from the initial position toward the maximum operating position, with the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 closed. Initial operation is continuing.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104. In the case where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 and the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102, the same applies as described below. When the inner frame 104 is opened, an error related notification regarding a door opening error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (c), after the first door side effect movable body 2241a continues the initial operation and the initial operation is completed, that is, after reaching the maximum operation position, even if the door is opened. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position, and completes the initial position return operation. Here, the operation by which the first door side effect movable body 2241a returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be the initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, but an error triggered by the door opening error occurrence It may be a dedicated operation in the generation state.

  Similarly, the second door side effect movable body 2241b at the lower left starts the checking operation even when the inner frame 104 is open and the front door 105 is also open, as shown in FIG. 102 (d). The door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position, and completes the initial operation.

  Here, the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. On the other hand, the inner frame 104 remains open relative to the outer frame 102. As described above, even when only the front door 105 is opened, an error related notification related to a door open error is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. However, the error related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

  The second door-side effect movable body 2241b continues the check operation, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 102 (e) returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position, and the initial position return operation is completed. doing.

  Thus, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the confirmation operation, the door side effect movable body 2241 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. continue. In addition, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the initial operation, the door side effect movable body 2241 performs the initial operation as in the case where the door (104, 105) is closed. Continue and start the initial position return operation after the completion of the initial operation. In addition, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the initial position return operation, the door side effect movable body 2241 is initial as in the case where the door (104, 105) is closed. Continue the position return operation.

  When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is finished, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

  Even when the front door 105 is also opened, the board-side effect movable body 2242 starts the confirmation operation, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 102 (f) reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position. And the initial operation has been completed.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 step by step.

  Even when the inner frame 104 is open, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 103 (g) returns from the maximum operation position to the initial position, and completes the initial position return operation.

  As described above, even when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are in the open state, the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door body (104, 105) is closed. Run. In addition, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the confirmation operation of the board side effect movable body 2242, the door side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105 as in the door side effect movable body 2241). The verification operation continues as if the) were closed. Furthermore, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 are opened during the initial operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the door-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105) as with the door-side effect movable body 2241. The initial operation is continued in the same manner as when the) is closed, and after completion of the initial operation, the initial position return operation is started. In addition, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position return operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the panel-side effect movable body 2242 is also a door (104 , 105) are continued, the initial position return operation continues.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 103 (h), the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed and in a closed state.

  Thus, the example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 is different from the example shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 at least in the open / close state of the inner frame 104, but even if the open / close state of the inner frame 104 is different. Initial operation + initial position return operation) is performed. Even if the open / close state of the front door 105 is different, the confirmation operation is performed in the same manner.

  Subsequently, the opening of the door during the rendering operation will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a view showing in stages an example of the case where the inner frame 104 is opened during the rendering operation.

  In each drawing ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 104, the entire pachinko machine 100 is shown on the left side, and the decoration symbol display device 208 and the board side effect movable body 2242 of the pachinko machine shown on the left are enlarged. (There are similar figures in the following figures).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (a), both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are in the closed state, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a, the second door side effect movable body 2241b, and the board side effect movable The bodies 2242 are all located at their initial positions. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (b), a big hit game is started, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side, an effect image of the first round is displayed. In addition, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a operates as movable body effect (first effect) during the big hit game period.

  The effect data of the movable body effect (first effect) during the big hit game period in this example is (1) opening the first door side effect movable body 2241a, and (2) the first door side effect movable body 2241a Is closed to open the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and (3) the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed to open the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and thereafter, the above (2) and the above It is data to repeat (3) until the big hit game is over.

  The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (b) is pivoted open to the upper side according to the effect data of (1).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (c), the jackpot game of the first round is continuing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown to the right is continuously displaying the effect image of the first round . Further, according to the effect data of (2), the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (c) is closed, returns to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b pivots forward. Is open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (d), the jackpot game of the second round is started, and the effect image of the second round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Also, according to the effect data of (3) above, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 104 (d) is closed, returns to the initial position, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a faces upward again. Is rotating.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened relative to the outer frame 102. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (d), a character display (a door open error) is issued as a notification regarding a door open error, and a sound (indication of an error occurrence notification) is issued from the speaker 120 as a notification regarding a door open error. Is open) is output. Although the front door 105 is rotated together with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104, even when the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104, It is the same as the explanation.

  When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns to the initial position ignoring the effect data. That is, the initial position return operation is performed. This initial position return operation is not the operation according to the effect data, for example, even in the case where the first door side effect movable body 2241a operates up to the maximum operation commission position according to the effect data (here, it is pivoted) If a door opening error occurs before reaching the maximum operation position, the operation toward the maximum operation commission position is canceled and the operation returns to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (e), a character display (a door open error) as a notification regarding a door open error is also made, and a sound of an error occurrence notification is also output from the speaker 120. In the error notification from the speaker 120, "the door is open" and "please close the door" are alternately output repeatedly.

  Subsequently, while the inner frame 104 is open, the hold series effect is started. This reserve series effect is an effect to notify (notice) that there is a hit in the special view start reserve during the big hit game, and a notice (notice) image is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 and is movable. Body rendition (second rendition) is also performed. The effect data of the movable body effect (second effect) here is (a) let the board side effect movable body 2242 fall to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) raise the panel side effect movable body 2242 Data to be

  A notice image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (f). In addition, although the character display which alert | reports a door open error is also made, this character display is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where a preliminary | backup image is non-display by a preliminary | backup image. Also, according to the effect data of (a), the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 104 (f) falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice image. Coupled with the preview image, the effect is enhanced. In this example, when the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the door side effect movable body 2241 cancels the effect operation and returns to the initial position, but the panel side effect movable body 2242 performs the effect operation according to the effect data Run. The board-side effect movable body 2242 may also return to the initial position by canceling the effect operation.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 step by step.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 opened as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the continuation of the notice image shown in FIG. 104 (f) is displayed The character appears and the word "Congratulations" is displayed. In addition, although the character display as alerting | reporting regarding a door opening error is also made, the character display relevant to an error is still difficult to visually recognize by the advance notice image compared with the time of a notice image being non-display. Further, the voice as the notification about the door opening error is continuously output from the speaker 120 as well. Furthermore, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 105 (g) is lifted to the initial position according to the effect data of (b).

  Here, the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (h), the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears, and instead, the character display of "pending continuous change confirmed" is made on the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, a character is displayed as a notification image. In addition, the contents of the error related notification output from the speaker 120 are changed, and a sound (voice of error cancellation notification) "the door is closed" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 105 (h). . A combination of the error cancellation notification and the error occurrence notification corresponds to an example of a notification (error related notification) regarding a door opening error. The audio output of the error cancellation notification from the speaker 120 continues for a first period (for example, 15 seconds). Thus, the speaker 120 corresponding to an example of the notification means relates to the door opening error even after the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is also closed (first state). The error related notification (corresponding to an example of the notification) is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 closed as shown in FIG. 105 (i), the big hit game of the third round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side is the effect image of the third round Is displayed. However, the rendering operation using the door-side rendering movable body 2241 is not resumed, and the first door-side rendering movable body 2241a and the second door-side rendering movable body 2241b remain closed (while being positioned at the initial position) ).

  Thereafter, the round digest of the big hit game is continued while the inner frame 104 is closed, but the rendering operation using the door side rendering movable body 2241 is not resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (j) , The effect image of the end effect of the big hit game is displayed, and it is informed that one more big hit game can be expected after this.

  As described above, in this example, the door is closed and the error is canceled, but until the big hit game is finished, more strictly, until the big hit game finish effect is finished, the effect of the door side effect movable body 2241 The operation does not start. In other words, the door-side effect movable body 2241 should perform the effect operation according to the effect data of (1) to (3) from the start of the big hit game to the end thereof. That is, the operation period of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is from the start of the big hit game to the end, and the effect operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not resumed until the operation period ends.

  FIG. 106 shows the first modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 step by step.

  The state shown in FIG. 106 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (g), and the storage symbol effect is the decoration symbol display device 208 and the board side effect movable body while the inner frame 104 is open. It is done by 2242.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (b), the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed and is in the same state as shown in FIG. 105 (h). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays so far The character display relating to the door opening error which has been performed disappears, and the speaker 120 ends the voice output of the error occurrence notification and the voice output of the error release notification is started.

  The state shown in FIG. 106 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (i), and although it has entered the third round, the audio output of the error cancellation notification is continued. That is, although the error is canceled, the error related notification is continued.

  Eventually, the error related notification ends. When this error related notification is finished, in this modification, the rendering operation using the door side rendering movable body 2241 is resumed. That is, although the error is canceled, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not resumed during the period when the error related notification is not finished. In the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 is closed and the error related notification is also finished as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the rendering operation using the door side rendering movable body 2241 is resumed and canceled in the middle. The first door side effect movable body 2241a is started to pivot upward according to the effect data of.

  In addition, instead of resuming from the part of the effect data canceled in the middle, it may return to the beginning of the effect data and may be resumed, and the resumption point is determined in advance, and it is always resumed from the rendition point resumption point May be Further, even if the error related notification is not finished, the rendering operation using the door side effect movable body 2241 may be resumed from the time the error is released.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (e), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed in accordance with the effect data of the above (2) and returns to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is forward It is pivoting open.

  FIG. 107 shows the second modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 step by step.

  In the following description, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

  The respective states shown in FIGS. 107 (a) to (c) are the same as the respective states shown in FIGS. 104 (b) to (d).

  When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the first door side effect movable body 2241a provided on the opposite side (open end side) to the hinge part 112 side (pivotal shaft side) is , Ignore the presentation data and return to the initial position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b provided on the hinge portion 112 side (turning shaft side) continues the operation according to the effect data, and here, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is forward It has been turned to start turning. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (e), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed in accordance with the effect data of (3), but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a remains stopped at the initial position. And do not operate.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b rotates forward according to the effect data of (2), but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a It is still stopped at the initial position and does not operate.

  In FIG. 108, with the second modification shown in FIG. 107, a door open error occurs, and the effect movable body continuing the operation according to the effect data and the effect movable body whose operation is prohibited are interchanged It is a figure which shows an example.

  Even if a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the first door side effect movable body 2241a on the open end side continues the operation according to the effect data, and here, the first door side The effect movable body 2241a keeps rotating to the maximum operating position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241a on the hinge portion 112 side (pivot shaft side), which has returned to the initial position according to the effect data of (3) above, is prohibited to operate thereafter. The same applies to the case where the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed in accordance with the effect data of (2), but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b remains stopped at the initial position. And do not operate.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (c), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a pivots upward according to the effect data of (3), but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b It is still stopped at the initial position and does not operate.

  Here, considering in conjunction with the example shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, when a door opening error occurs, at least one of the plurality of effect movable bodies (here, the door side effect movable body 2241) is movable. The body may be regulated (prohibited) at the initial position, and the remaining effect movable bodies may continue the effect operation according to the effect data.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a case where the door is opened in a state where the effect movable body is at a position shifted from the initial position by an external force.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (a) is not playing a game and is in a demonstration state, and a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100. The title of is displayed.

  In FIG. 109 (b), somebody touches the first door side effect movable body 2241a in the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 109 (c), lifts the first door side effect movable body 2241a upward. There is. Then, with the first door-side effect movable body 2241a being lifted upward, the inner frame 104 is opened by fraud.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, characters are displayed on the demonstration screen as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also reports an error occurrence notification as the notification regarding the door opening error. Audio is output. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 109 (d) is at a position deviated from the initial position.

  When the door opening error occurs, the effect movable body (in this case, the first door side effect movable body 2241a) is not the effect operation, but if it is not at the initial position, as shown in FIG. An operation of returning the movable body (first door side effect movable body 2241a) to the initial position is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (f), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is located at the initial position, and the inner frame 104 is also closed.

  If the effect movable body deviates from the initial position due to an external force during execution of the effect operation, the effect operation may be continued.

  FIG. 110: is a figure which shows in order an example in case the inner frame 104 is open | released during rendering operation as a movable body different from what was demonstrated so far as the door side presentation movable body 2241 in an example.

  In each drawing ((a) to (c)) of FIG. 110, the left end shows the entire pachinko machine 100, the middle shows the enlarged operation panel 13P of the pachinko machine shown at the left end, and the right end The decoration symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is shown enlarged (the same applies to FIGS. 111 to 114).

  In this example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is a chance button 136. A chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110 is an effect movable body that protrudes upward when the chance button effect is started. Although the chance button 136 protrudes to the maximum operating position, when pressed before reaching the maximum operating position, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position without reaching the maximum operating position.

  In FIG. 110 (a), the chance button effect is started. In the chance button effect referred to here, it is urged to press the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation reception period, a new effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a), a change display of the decorative symbol is in progress, and a screen prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed. An image of the chance button 136 is shown on this screen. The image of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110A is at the initial position, and the image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also an image of the chance button 136 at the initial position.

  When the chance button effect is started, the chance button 136 gradually protrudes upward from the initial position as time passes. The protrusion of the chance button 136 improves both the effect of prompting the operation and the effect of improving the interest.

  The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110 (b) protrudes upward from the initial position, reaches the maximum operating position, and is in the most protruded state. The image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (b) is also an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruded state.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened relative to the outer frame 102. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (c), characters are displayed as a notification about a door opening error, and a sound of an error notification is output from the speaker 120 as a notification about a door opening error. Even if the door opening error occurs, the chance button 136 which is one of the door side effect movable bodies 2241 does not return to the initial position, and remains in the most protruded state (with the maximum operating position). Since the projection direction of the chance button 136 is upward, it is difficult to lead to the danger to the player due to the door opening or the breakdown of the pachinko machine, so the state is urged to operate without returning to the initial position. ing.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 step by step.

  In FIG. 111 (d), the player tries to press the chance button 136 in the most protruded state with the inner frame 104 opened.

  In FIG. 111 (e), the chance button 136 is pressed while the inner frame 104 is open, and the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Here, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 may be returned to the initial position according to the effect data, or is returned to the initial position by a force (pressing force) pressed by the player. It may be. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (e), a new effect is started by pressing the chance button 136. That is, a character has appeared, and a notice about symbol variation display currently performed is given. The new notice may be a preview notice or the like for the symbol change display (pending) which is started later than the symbol change display currently performed.

  Here, the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (f), the character display for notifying a door opening error has disappeared. Further, the contents of the error-related notification outputted from the speaker 120 are changed, and the sound of the error cancellation notification "the door is closed" is outputted from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 111 (f). Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed into reach effect.

  FIG. 112 is a view showing the modification of the example shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 step by step.

  The state shown in FIG. 112 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 110 (c), the inner frame 104 is opened, and a notification regarding a door opening error is started by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. . The chance button 136 is in the most protruded state until immediately before the inner frame 104 is released. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruded state is displayed as a screen prompting to press the chance button 136.

  In this modification, when a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136 which is one of the door side effect movable bodies 2241 is returned to the initial position. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 112 (b) is returned to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208, even if the door opening error occurs, the chance button effect is continued, but in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (b), the image of the chance button 136 returned to the initial position is The image of the chance button 136 which is not displayed but is most projected remains displayed. As described above, since the projecting direction of the chance button 136 is upward, it should be difficult to be connected to the danger to the player by opening the door or to the breakdown of the pachinko machine, but in this modified example, , The chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. However, since the chance button effect is continued, the effect of prompting the operation by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The image display of the chance button 136 in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be an image display in which the chance button 136 is returned to the initial position in addition to the actual state of the chance button 136.

  Here, the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (c), the character display for notifying a door opening error disappears. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of an error cancellation notification. In this modification, even if the error is released, the chance button 136 remains returned to the initial position, and the action is not started by the release of the error, but the action is started by the release of the error. Here, it may return to the most projecting state).

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In this modification, the operation of the chance button 136 was not performed within the effective period.

  The pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 closed as shown in FIG. 113 (d) is the one immediately after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has passed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has the chance button 136 operated for an effective period. In spite of the fact that the player has not been operated, a notice is usually started as a new effect. That is, in the chance button effect in this modified example, in addition to the case where the operation is performed inward, even if the operation is not performed within the operation effective period, a new effect is forcibly forced at the timing of the operation effective period passing. Will be started. Note that regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the chance button 136, a new effect may be started at the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Alternatively, only when the chance button 136 is not operated, a new effect may be started at the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Furthermore, a new effect may be started at the earlier timing of the timing when the operation valid period passes and the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. In addition, based on the chance button 136 being operated, the effect execution lottery may be performed, and a new effect may be started only when the player is won. Alternatively, even if the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may not be started uniformly.

  Subsequently, errors other than the door opening error will be described.

  FIG. 114 is a table summarizing major errors other than door open errors.

  When an error occurs, an error occurs in the payout display LED 142 shown in FIG. 97 or in the segment display 1044 or the error display LED 1045 provided in the lower part of the back side of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. A message is displayed to notify that it has been done. Although the segment display 1044 and the error display LED 1045 can not be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104, the payout display LED 142 can be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104. “Display” shown in the table of FIG. 114 means 7-segment display displayed on the segment display unit 1044.

  When no error occurs, “0” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off.

  The lower plate full error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 97 is full, “1” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are turned off. In the state as it is, for example, an error notification is given from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. The lower bowl full error is operated by removing the ball by operating the ball discharging lever 132, and the error is released when the lower bowl full sensor is turned off.

  The number-of-payouts error is an error that occurs when the planned number of payments has not been executed, “2” is displayed on the segment display 1044, and both the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are on. Do. Since the number-of-payouts error is a disadvantageous error for the player, the player turns on the payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 that can be confirmed by the player. This payout number shortage error is released upon retry success.

  The payout number switch error painted in gray is an error when a connection abnormality of a switch (sensor) for detecting the payout number occurs, and the main board of the main control unit 300 is not related. When this error occurs, the dispensing operation is stopped, and "3" is displayed on the segment display unit 1044.

  Similarly, the fraudulent payout error painted in gray is an error in the case where the payout of the game ball is detected (the number-of-payouts switch is counted) in the state where the payout request is not generated. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped, and “4” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044.

  The overdelivery error, which is also painted in gray, is an error when it is detected that payouts equal to or greater than the number of winning balls or the number of lent balls have been made. That is, it is an error when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have been detected for the game balls actually paid out with respect to the number of payout requests. Even if this error occurs, the dispensing operation is stopped, and “5” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044.

  In any of these three types of payout errors, the error display LED 1045 is turned on, but the payout display LED 142 remains off. Although the error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 is not performed, it may be performed. To cancel each error, open the inner frame 104 and operate the error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, or similarly provided on the back side of the inner frame 104. It is necessary to perform the power on (the operation of the power switch 178) accompanied by the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62). That is, these three types of payout errors are errors that can not be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state in which these three types of payout system errors occur corresponds to an example of the second error state.

  Even in the state where an error occurs that can not be released unless the inner frame 104 is opened, the confirmation operation can be started. In addition, the rendering operation can also be started.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a magnet sensor and a vibration sensor, and the magnet sensor error when the magnet sensor detects a magnetic force and the vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor detects a vibration are also included in the inner frame 104. It is an error that can not be released if you do not release. That is, in order to cancel the magnet sensor error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and perform the power on (the operation of the power switch 178) accompanied by the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62). In order to clear the error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and restart the power supply by the power switch 178.

  The CR unit communication error is an error when communication abnormality is detected from the side of the pachinko machine 100 in transmitting and receiving a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit, and “6” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044. The main control communication error is an error when an operation confirmation signal is not returned to the main control unit 300 in transmission and reception of signals between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 or the like, and “7” in the segment display unit 1044. Is displayed. The CR unit non-connection error is an error when the connection with the card unit can not be confirmed on the side of the pachinko machine 100, and “8” is displayed on the segment display unit 1044. In any of these three types of communication errors, the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off. Although the error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 is not performed, it may be performed. The release of each error is as shown in the table.

  Among the errors described above, the game is not able to be continued, that is, the game is stopped due to the occurrence of the error (ball firing impossible and symbol fluctuation stop), and the game is resumed unless the error is canceled (ball firing and symbol fluctuation start An error that can not be made) is only a magnet sensor error, and a period in which the magnet sensor error is occurring (a period from an error occurrence to a cancellation) corresponds to an example of a second period. The door-side effect movable body 2241 returns to the initial position when the door body (104, 105) is opened in a state where a magnet sensor error has occurred while executing the effect operation according to the effect data. On the other hand, the period in which the number-of-payouts switch error, the irregular payout error, the excessive payout error, and the vibration sensor error occur is a period in which the game can be continued, and corresponds to an example of a first period.

  Here, the error will be supplemented although there is a point that overlaps with the above description.

  When the bottom board full tank sensor signal is ON once when the predetermined input port of the main board of the main control section 300 reads ON by timer interrupt (off オ ン ON), the bottom control full payout error from the main control section 300 It is output to the part 600.

  The payout device error is that the number of payouts (count number of payout number switches) is a payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor has finished driving for the number of payout requests (actually, after + brake period + non-excitation period has elapsed). When the number is smaller than the number, the occurrence of a dispensing device error is detected. When one piece of money is paid out (retry process), the error is released.

  The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the off state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected or when the on state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected by two interrupts, and the main control unit 300 The command can not be received from the board. However, if the number of withdrawal requests remains, it will be dispensed until that amount. When the on state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected and the off state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected for two interrupts, the error is released.

  The CR unit communication error is an error in the CR unit and the interface. This is an error that occurs when, for example, the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request occurs. After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error is canceled by BRDY signal and BRQ signal OFF.

  The CR unit disconnection error is also an error in the CR unit and the interface. This error occurs when the OFF state of the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is detected and continued for 16 ms when the CR unit non-connection error is released. Note that this is an error that has no effect on the suspension of lending (the payout of the winning balls). The error is canceled if the CR unit connection signal is detected ON and continued for 16 ms. After the error is canceled, the communication with the CR unit becomes invalid until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

  The CR unit connection signal and the CR unit READY signal may be CR unit lending request confirmation signals as signals transmitted in the order of CR unit → interface → disbursed substrate. The CR unit connection signal is a VL signal (+18 V power supply in the CR unit). The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal, and transmits that the CR unit is in the process of lending. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal and is a signal by which the CR unit transmits a lending request and a lending instruction of 25 basic units.

  As a signal transmitted in the order of the payout substrate → interface → CR unit, a CR gaming machine lending completion signal and a CR gaming machine READY signal can be mentioned. The CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an EXS signal, and is a signal for transmitting request acceptance and lending completion of 25 basic units to the CR unit. The CR gaming machine READY signal is a PRDY signal, and is a signal for transmitting to the CR unit that the payout operation is possible.

  When the power is turned on, the PRDY signal is turned ON, and when the lending operation (the player presses the lending operation button) is turned ON, the BRDY signal is turned ON. Next, when the BRQ signal is turned ON, it becomes a lending request. After confirming the lending request, the payout CPU turns the EXS signal ON to accept the lending. After that, the BRQ signal is turned off and a lending instruction is given. After performing the payout control of 25 pieces, the payout control means turns off the EXS signal to complete the lending. If the BRQ signal is turned on again while the BRDY signal is turned on, the lending operation is repeated, and if all have been completed, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  Subsequently, a case where an error (hereinafter, referred to as a second error) which can not be canceled without releasing the inner frame 104 during the rendering operation will be described.

  FIG. 115 shows, in stages, an example of the case where the second error has occurred during the rendering operation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (a), gaming balls are stored in the upper tray 126 to near full capacity. In the decoration symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115, a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 is shown. The payout display LED 142 shown in each of FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (f) remains off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the big hit game is started, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, and the variable winning opening 234 is entered to pay out the winning balls. Even the game balls are starting to accumulate. Further, the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 115 (b) is pivoted to the upper side and opened in accordance with the effect data.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (c), more balls collect in the lower plate 128, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a closes and returns to the initial position according to the effect data, and the second door-side effect The movable body 2241 b is pivoted forward and is open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (d), the big hit game of the second round is started, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and returns to the initial position. The effect movable body 2241a is rotating upward again.

  Eventually, the lower plate 128 becomes full, and a lower plate error (hereinafter referred to as a third error) occurs, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The prompt is displayed.

  Even if the third error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is not canceled either, and in FIG. 115 (e), the first door side according to the effect data The effect movable body 2241a is closed and returns to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is pivoted open again.

  Here, the ball discharging lever 132 is operated, the ball is pulled out of the lower plate 128, and the lower plate full error (third error) is cancelled. In FIG. 115 (f), the third round big hit game is started, the movable object effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 continues, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and the initial stage Returning to the position, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is pivoted upward and opened.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 step by step.

  Also in FIG. 116 (g), according to the effect data, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is pivoted open again.

  The line digestion of the jackpot game proceeds, and in FIG. 116 (h), the jackpot game of the eighth round is started, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and the first door side effect movable The body 2241a pivots upward and is open. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 116 (i), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward according to the effect data.

  Also in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 116, the payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105 is shown. The payout display LED 142 shown in FIG. 116 (g) to FIG. 116 (i) remains unlit.

  Here, a second error, a payout amount switch error, occurs. This payout amount switch error is an error that can not be released unless the inner frame 104 is opened. Even if the second error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is not canceled either, and in FIG. 116 (j), the second door side according to the effect data The effect movable body 2241 b is closed, and the first door side effect movable body 2241 a is rotating upward. Even if the second error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, and the error related notification is not performed even by the notification means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. Thus, depending on the type of error, the player may not be notified.

  Further, in FIG. 116 (k), according to the effect data, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward.

  Here, in order to operate the error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door open error (hereinafter referred to as a first error) occurs. Do. Even if the first error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (k) displays characters as a notification about the first error, The sound of the error occurrence notification is also output from the speaker 120 as the notification regarding the first error. Here, two types of errors such as the second error (disbursed number switch error) and the first error (door opening error) overlap, but the occurrence of the first error causes the state shown in FIG. 116 (l). As shown in, the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b ignores the effect data and returns to the initial position. In addition, the operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a which has been returned to the initial position is restricted, and remains at the initial position.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 step by step.

  In FIG. 117 (m), since the big hit game of the 10th round is started and the inner frame 104 is in the open state (first error state), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door. The operation of the side effect movable body 2241b is also regulated, and both of them are kept at the initial position.

  In FIG. 117 (n), a hand is turned to the back side of the inner frame 104 in the open state, and the error release switch 168 is operated. Then, the second error (disbursed number switch error) is canceled. On the other hand, since the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the first error (door open error) continues, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door side effect even in FIG. 117 (n). The movable body 2241 b is also restricted in operation, and both remain at the initial position.

  Then, the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed, and the first error is also released. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (o), the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound for error cancellation notification. In this example, when the first error is canceled and the error related notification is ended, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 117 step by step.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 118 (q), the jackpot game of the 15th round is started, and a considerable number of balls are stored in the lower plate 128. Also, the movable body effect according to the effect data is resumed, and in FIG. 118 (q), according to the effect data, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is forward. It is pivoted open again.
According to the effect data, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed and returns to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is pivoted forward and opened.

  Eventually, the lower plate 128 becomes full, and the lower plate full error (third error) occurs again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (r) has a character display prompting removal of the ball as an error related notification. Is being done. The third error that occurs here is not resolved until FIG. 119 (z), and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display a character display prompting the user to drop the ball. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (r), a effect image of the effect of the end of the big hit game is also displayed, and it is notified that transition to a positive change state is made after the end of the big hit game. Further, in the door side effect movable bodies 2241a and 2241b shown in FIG. 118 (r), the final movable body effect according to the effect data is also performed.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (s), the final screen of the end effect of the big hit game is displayed. Although one suspension icon h11 representing suspension of a special drawing is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the character display (error related notification) prompting the user to pull off the ball is hidden by the suspension icon h11 The character display prompting the player to drop the ball is less visible than before the hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (t), the variable display of the first decoration symbol after the big hit game is started, and in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In Figure (v), we are in the Super Reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (v), the screen display of the super reach effect is performed, but this screen display hides part of the character display (error related notification) prompting the user to remove the ball, The character display prompting for removal is more difficult to view than before the screen display is made. In addition, the whole of the error related notification may be hidden by another display.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 step by step.

  Even in FIG. 119 (w), the lower plate full error (third error) has not been eliminated, and an error related notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but here too, a screen of super reach effect It is hidden by the display, and part of it is difficult to see.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 119 (y), a big hit game is started. Even at this stage, the bottom plate error (third error) has not been eliminated. On the other hand, since the big hit game is started, it becomes the operation period of the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door side effect movable body 2241. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected by the influence of an error that occurs before the arrival of the operation period and is not resolved even at the start of the operation period. Here, the third error which is not affected by nature, but even if it is the first error (door opening error) which is originally affected, the error occurrence timing is earlier than the operation start timing. Not affected. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 119 (y) is pivoted open to the upper side according to the effect data.

  Here, although the third error occurs first, the presentation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected similarly when the second error occurs first.

  Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is finally operated, the ball is pulled out of the lower plate 128 and the lower plate full error (third error) is canceled, and from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (z), The error related notification disappears. Further, in FIG. 119 (z), according to the effect data, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is pivoted open to the front.

  FIG. 120 shows, in stages, an example of prohibiting the operation according to the effect data of the door-side effect movable body 2241 even when the error occurrence timing is before the operation start timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (a), variable display of decorative symbols is executed.

  Here, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door open error (first error) occurs. Even when the front door 105 is opened to the inner frame 104, it is the same as the following description. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is in the reach state, but its display screen is displayed with characters as a notification about the first error. As notification about an error, a voice of an error occurrence notification is output.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the same figure (d) In the pachinko machine 100 shown in, a big hit game is started. Even at this stage, the inner frame 104 is still open, and the door open error continues. On the other hand, by the start of the big hit game, it becomes the operation period of the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door side effect movable body 2241, but here, the first error that occurred first is not eliminated Therefore, the operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 according to the effect data is prohibited from the beginning. That is, the first sub control unit 400 receives an error occurrence command or an error cancellation command from the main control unit 300, or a command including details of error occurrence or error resolution, and the first sub control unit 400 Even if the big hit start command is received from the control unit 300, if the error cancellation command is not received in the state where the error occurrence command is received first, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the door side effect movable body 2241 The control according to the effect data is not started. As a result, the operation of both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 120 (d) is restricted, and both remain at the initial positions.

  Then, the inner frame 104 which has been opened up to now is closed, the first error is released, and the character display for notifying the door open error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (e). From 120, a voice of the error cancellation notification is output. In this example, when the first error is canceled and the error related notification is ended, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door effect movable body 2241 is resumed even before the end of the big hit game. When the operation is not performed at the beginning of the operation, the operation may not be performed until the big hit game is ended even if the error cancellation or the error related notification is ended.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in the case where the power is shut off during the check operation and power is instantaneously restored.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (a) is in a state in which the main power is not turned on, and thereafter simultaneous powering on is performed by the island facility.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (b), the confirmation operation is started, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a reaches the maximum operation position from the initial position, and the initial operation is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (b), characters are displayed to notify that processing such as initialization processing including a confirmation operation is being performed by turning on the power. This character display is displayed, for example, until step S115 shown in FIG. 66 or the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 67 is started.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (c), an initial value return operation is performed for the first door side effect movable body 2241a as a confirmation operation, and the maximum for the second door side effect movable body 2241b from the initial position. It is pivoting to the operating position.

  In FIG. 121 (d), a power failure (power failure) has occurred. The timing at which the disconnection occurred may be the timing before the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b reaches the maximum operating position by the initial operation, or may be the timing when the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b reaches the maximum operating position. The timing may be during the initial value return operation. As a result of the power interruption, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b which has been in the confirmation operation stops its operation and remains in the open state as shown in FIG. 121 (e).

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 step by step.

  In this example, after a power failure occurs, the power is restored instantly, that is, the power is turned on again without simultaneous turning on and off by the island facility, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (f) is displayed. In the same manner as the character display in FIG. 121 (b), the character display is performed to notify that processing such as initialization processing is in progress. This character display is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62), that is, regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b whose operation has been stopped by the previous electric disconnection remains in the open state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this example, since the backup of the first sub control unit 400 is not performed at the time of power failure, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine that has recovered power performs the confirmation operation just before the power failure. I can't figure out if it was. Therefore, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a power recovery command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the confirmation operation from the beginning.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (g), the confirmation operation is started again from the beginning, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position, and the initial operation is completed. The second door-side effect movable body 2241 b is still in the open state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (h), an initial value return operation is performed on the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as a confirmation operation, and the confirmation operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is completed. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (i), the confirmation operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. Here, regardless of the position at which the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b is stopped, it is temporarily moved to the maximum operating position by the initial operation, and then returned to the initial position by the initial position return operation. Therefore, although power recovery (power supply is turned on again), since the effect movable body is held in the power-off state, it may perform a motion different from the confirmation operation before power-off.

  When the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped at the maximum operating position, if the second door-side effect movable body 2241b can be confirmed by the sensor provided at the maximum operating position, the initial operation is omitted. , Only the initial position return operation may be performed. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 may instruct the execution of the initial operation, but in this case, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is moved by the sensor provided at the maximum operation position before it moves. The door-side effect movable body 2241b is detected, and the initial operation is not performed practically.

  When the first secondary control unit 400 performs backup at the time of power failure, after power recovery, the confirmation operation may be resumed from the middle of the confirmation operation interrupted by the power failure. In addition, when the door (104, 105) is opened immediately after power recovery, the execution of the confirmation operation may be restricted (prohibited). Moreover, when the door (104, 105) is opened during the confirmation operation, not only at the time of power recovery, the effect movable body may be returned to the initial value, or the operation may be stopped halfway .

  Furthermore, a power failure may occur during the rendering operation according to the rendering data, and the same may occur as described above even when a power failure occurs.

  FIG. 123 is a view showing a modified example of the board-side effect movable body 2242.

  Although the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 and the like and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 63 operate in a planar manner, the board-side effect movable body is in the front-rear direction (the player side and the back side Direction) may be performed.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a shielding device 246 consisting of a plurality of members (246a, 246b) operating in a planar manner, and a character accessory 247 capable of at least performing an operation in the front-rear direction. The character combination 247 is hidden behind the shielding device 246, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened to advance forward (to the player). The initial position of the character accessory 247 is behind the shielding device 246.

  FIG. 123 (1) shows the shielding device 246 in a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the character combination 247 is located at the initial position, and the character combination 247 is visible to the player. Absent.

  In FIG. 123 (2), each of the left door 246a and the right door 246b is fully rotated, and the character combination 247 advances from the back. The movement of the character accessory 247 is due to a stepping motor (not shown) and a rack and pinion mechanism 2471.

  In FIG. 123 (3), the character accessory 247 has advanced beyond the shielding member 246 to the front side of the shielding member 246. The position of the character combination 247 shown in FIG. 123 (3) corresponds to the maximum operating position of the character combination 247.

  In the movable body effect, an operation as shown in FIG. 123 (1) → FIG. 123 (2) → FIG. 123 (3) → FIG. 123 (2) → FIG. 123 (1) is possible. That is, the character combination 247 is capable of advancing and retracting, and also capable of reciprocating. Further, the shielding device 246 is also capable of reciprocating. Furthermore, the shielding device 246 (X- and Y-direction movable effect means) and the character combination 247 (Z-axis direction movable effect means) are also capable of vibration (fine reciprocation) along the way.

  Here, when only the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 or the front door 105 is opened, the operation may be continued until the movement of the shielding device 246, and the character accessory 247 is a collision or the like. Possibilities may regulate the operation. Further, the operation of each movable body (246, 247) is operable by a plurality of stepping controls (commands), and when a door opening error occurs, the movable body based on the control command currently being executed. It may be configured to continue up to the operation (rendering operation or confirmation operation) and regulate each response operation based on the next command operation. Also, when a door opening error occurs at a timing when only the shielding device 246 and / or the character combination 247 or the character combination 247 returns to the initial position by the rendering operation, the rendering in progress is performed as the operation to return to the initial position. The operation may be continued.

  In the contents described above, the items for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the items for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be interchanged. Furthermore, even if the items for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a are not applied to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b as items limited to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. Well, even if the item for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is not applied to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as an item limited to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b Good.

  Further, the items for the door-side effect movable body 2241 can be applied to the items for the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to an example of the third movable body). For example, when the front door 105 is opened, the rendering operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the checking operation may be continued. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Further, even if the front door 105 is opened, the presentation operation and the confirmation operation may be continued in the board-side effect movable body 2242. When the front door 105 is closed, the board-side effect movable body 2242 has a low risk of touching the player. Further, in the case of the shielding device 246 (X- and Y-direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 123, the risk of touching the player is low even if the front door 105 is opened. On the other hand, in the case of the character combination 247 (Z-axis direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 123, even with the board-side effect movable body 2242, the danger of touching the player if the front door 105 is open. May be restricted. Furthermore, regardless of the open / close state of the front door 105, the effect operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped by opening the inner frame 104, while the confirmation operation may be continued. Alternatively, on the contrary, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Furthermore, the rendering operation and the checking operation may be continued.

  Furthermore, a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body, etc. may be provided as the door side effect movable body 2241, and a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body, etc., as the board side effect movable body 2242. May be provided.

  Also, the operation of returning the effect movable body from the maximum operation position to the initial position may be the initial position return operation in the confirmation operation, but it is a dedicated operation of the error occurrence state triggered by the occurrence of an error. Good. Furthermore, the operation of returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be only the target movable body or may be all the other movable bodies.

  In addition, if the error is resolved while the operation to return to the initial position is performed on the condition that the error occurs, the rendering operation may be performed immediately, or the rendering operation may be started again after the operation is completed. Good. Further, the configuration may be such that the execution of the rendering operation is restricted until another condition (such as the termination of various gaming states or the start of another gaming state) is established.

  Further, the maximum movable position is a range in which the movable body is actually moved at the time of rendering of the movable body, an error notification, etc. For example, when there is a space of play provided outside the movable range of the movable body, the space Is also the maximum movable position.

  Furthermore, although the initial movement has been described as the movement to move to the maximum movable position, the initial movement may not necessarily be the maximum movable position. For example, a detection sensor of a movable body at a position different from the initial position and within the operating range It may be an operation to operate up to the position where the.

In the above explanation,
[A movable body (for example, the first door side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can at least contact with the movable body;
At least multiple doors that can be opened and closed,
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of doors is a first door (for example, the inner frame 104),
At least one of the plurality of doors is a second door (for example, the front door 105),
The movable body is provided at least on the second door body,
The movable body can return at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body is at a position different from the first position (for example, as shown in FIG. The first door side effect movable body 2241a) shown in 107 (e),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The movable body can perform at least the second operation when the second condition is established,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the first door,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least by opening the second door,
The second condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied when the power is turned on.
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,
The movable body can return to the first position after continuing the initial operation when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the initial operation in the second operation. (For example, the first door side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102 (c)),
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the operation of the movable body.

  In addition, in the case where the second door provided with the movable body is rotatably provided with respect to the first door, not only the opening of the second door but also the first door is opened. Even in this case, the second door is in the open state. Therefore, the possibility that the person (the player or the store clerk) who is in the opening destination is injured by the operation of the movable body is reduced, and the second door as a game stand contacts the other game stand etc. and the movable body is The possibility of failure may also be reduced.

  Here, the initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position which is the farthest from the first position. The second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating movement between the first position and the second position. The second door may be provided on the player side (front side) of the first door. Further, the second door may be provided with an opening / closing axis on the player side (front side) of the opening / closing axis of the first door. The second door may be provided on the player side (front side) of the gaming board, and the first door may hold the gaming board.

  In addition, the movable body can be contacted by a store clerk of a game arcade. Further, the movable body may be provided to both an object different from the door and the door (for example, provided so as to straddle two).

  In addition, when the movable body is returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body is at a position different from the first position, another position (for example, , And may return to the first position via another position (e.g., the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

  In addition, the movable body executes the second operation when the second condition is satisfied, and continues the other operation (for example, the rendering operation based on the rendering data) after the second operation. It may be

  Moreover, conditions, such as the first condition and the second condition, describe an example that holds, and may be conditions that hold with another operation or the like. For example, although the first condition is satisfied by opening the first door or the second door, the first condition may be satisfied by an operation unrelated to the door. The second condition is a condition that is satisfied by turning on the power, but the second condition is satisfied by another operation such as an operation of an error release switch, start of a predetermined gaming state, and recovery from a demonstration state. May be Furthermore, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied even when the door is opened (for example, when the door is opened, power is automatically turned on, etc.).

  Further, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in the present specification is performed. In the operation of the movable body in the claims and the embodiment of the present application, the contents described as "possible" may include cases in which the contents are not.

  Further, the “position where the player can at least contact” includes a position where the player naturally contacts, and a position where the player normally does not contact but sometimes contacts. "It is possible to return" includes that although it can usually return, it may not be possible in some cases (the same applies hereinafter). "Executable" includes what can usually be performed but may not be possible in some cases (the same applies hereinafter). The first condition is normally satisfied when the door is opened, but in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient) may not be satisfied. . The second condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but in some cases (for example, even when the power is turned on, it may not be satisfied).

Also,
“The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while performing the first operation (for example, FIG. 104 (e)),
The first operation is a rendering operation according to rendering data,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give priority to the safety of a person or a game stand over the rendering operation.

  Here, the movable body may be one that returns immediately to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. It is also possible to continue the part of the operation and then return to the first position.

  Note that, when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation, the movable body is further moved to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position. Alternatively, it may return to the first position via another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

Also,
"The movable body can return to the first position without continuing the first operation when the first condition is satisfied while the first operation is being performed. (For example, FIG. 104 (e)),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give priority to the safety of a person or a game stand over the rendering operation.

Also,
“The movable body at least tries to return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force ( For example, FIG. 109 (e)),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when the position of the movable body is shifted due to an external force or the like, it can be returned to the original position when the door is opened.

  The external force referred to here corresponds to a force received by contact of a player or the like, a force received from a tool such as a magnet, and the like.

  It should be noted that the movable body returns to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body is not at the first position due to an external force and is returned to another position ( For example, it may move further to the maximum operating position), or return to the first position via another position (e.g., the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

Also,
"The movable body is at least returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation according to rendering data,
Even when the movable body receives an external force during execution of the first operation and moves to a position different from the position according to the effect data, the movable body tries to continue the operation according to the effect data It is
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also,
"The movable body does not perform at least the first operation even when the operation instruction related to the first operation is received in the state in which the first condition is satisfied (for example, The first door side effect movable body 2241a) shown in FIG. 107 (f),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when door opening is established first, there are cases where safety can be prioritized over effect.

  The movable body does not perform the first operation even when the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation in a state in which the first condition is satisfied, and further, performs another operation. (For example, a rendering operation based on different new rendering data) may not be performed.

Also,
"The movable body may continue the first operation when the operation instruction related to the first operation is received in the state in which the first condition is satisfied."
Also,
“The movable body can perform at least the second operation when it receives an operation instruction related to the second operation in a state in which the first condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 100) (D) first door-side effect movable body 2241a),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second operation may be prioritized even if the door opening is established first. For example, since the store clerk may turn on the power while maintaining the game area at the time of opening the hall, for example, opening the door does not reduce the work efficiency on the hall side by giving priority to the second operation. . In addition, since power-on is intentionally performed, it may be preferable to give priority to the second operation. Furthermore, since the possibility that the player or the like is on the open side of the door is low before the opening of the store, security may also be secured.

  The movable body executes the second operation when an operation instruction related to the second operation is received in a state in which the first condition is satisfied, and after the second operation, Other operations (e.g., the first operation) may also be performed.

  Further, even if the movable body receives an operation instruction related to the first operation until the first condition is satisfied and the first position is returned, the first operation And the movable body may be capable of at least performing the first operation after returning to the first position.

  Furthermore, the movable body returns to the first position when it receives an operation instruction related to the second operation until the first condition is satisfied and the first position is returned. It may be possible to perform at least the second operation later, or return to the first position and at least not perform the second operation.

  In addition, when the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the second operation in a state in which the first condition is satisfied, priority is given to returning to the first position without performing the initial operation. It may be

Also,
"The second door is at least provided with a second movable body (for example, a second door-side effect movable body 2241b),
The second movable body is capable of at least continuing the third operation when the first condition is satisfied while the third operation is being performed (for example, FIG. 107E). The second door side effect movable body 2241b), shown in
The third operation is a rendering operation according to rendering data,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases in which only a predetermined movable body can perform a special operation.

  In addition to the second movable body, the second door may be provided with a lamp, a speaker, and the like. The second movable body continues the third operation when the first condition is satisfied while performing the third operation, and performs another operation (the third operation). For example, the rendering operation based on different new rendering data may be continued.

  Also, "continuable" can normally be continued, but in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied, etc.) may not be continued (hereinafter referred to as "it can be continued") the same).

Also,
"The second door is configured to be pivotable at least at one end as a pivot (for example, hinge 112),
The movable body (e.g., here, the relationship between the movable body and the second movable body is reversed, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b) is the second movable body (e.g., the first door-side effect movable) It is provided at a position closer to the rotation axis than the body 2241a) (FIG. 108)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the movable body close to the rotation axis may come in contact with the adjacent game stand (the open end side of the door, the CR unit between the stands, etc.) depending on the door opening angle. Therefore, by restricting the rendering operation while the door is open, failure may be prevented in advance.

  In addition to being rotatable, the second door may be configured to be removable with one end as a fulcrum.

  Further, the second movable body may be provided at a position closer to the rotation axis than the movable body (FIG. 107). By doing this, since the movable body on the open end side has a large movable amount due to the door opening and there is a high risk of contact with the player, etc., it may be possible to secure safety by returning to the initial position. .

  Also, "pivotable" means that although it can usually be pivoted, in some cases (e.g., when it is locked etc.) it may be impossible to pivot (see below) ,the same).

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 97),
The first door (for example, the inner frame 104) is at least rotatably provided with respect to the outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102),
The second door (for example, the front door 105) is provided rotatably at least with respect to the first door.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first door may be rotatably provided to the island facility or the second door. The second door may be rotatably provided to the outer frame.

Here, “a first detection means for detecting that the first door is opened,
Second detection means for detecting that the second door has been opened;
Equipped with
The first detection means may be a detection means different from the second detection means, or a detection means common to the second detection means.
A game stand characterized by ". That is, the detection may be performed by separate detection means, or the opening of any door may be detected by one detection means.

Also,
"Informing means (speaker 120),
The notification means is means capable of at least executing a notification (for example, an error related notification related to a door opening error) when the first door is opened,
The notification means is a means that can at least execute a notification (for example, an error related notification related to a door opening error) when the second door is opened,
The notification means can continue the notification (for example, error cancellation notification) at least for a first period (for example, 15 seconds) even after the first state is reached (for example, FIG. 105 (h)). ,
The first state is a state in which the first door is closed,
The first state is a state in which the second door is also closed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the notification means can at least continue the notification even after the first door is closed and the second door is also closed.

  According to this game stand, by giving priority to the fact that the door is open for the first period, it may be possible to surely notify even if the time for opening the door is short. We can expect to contribute.

  The notification means is in a state in which the second door is closed even when the first door is closed and the second door is still open. Even when the first door is in the open state, the notification can be continued.

  In summary, the "first door" corresponds to the inner frame 104 as an example, and the "second door" corresponds to the front door 105 as an example. The first door-side effect movable body 2241 a or the second door-side effect movable body 2241 b corresponds to “the movable body” as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to the rendering operation according to the rendering data as an example, and the “second operation” is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. The “first condition” corresponds to the first door opening or the second door opening as an example, and the “second condition” corresponds to the operation of the power switch 178 or simultaneous turning on of power by island facilities. It corresponds as an example. The second door-side effect movable body 2241 b or the first door-side effect movable body 2241 a corresponds to the “second movable body” as an example. The “third operation” corresponds to the rendering operation according to the rendering data of the second movable body as an example. The “first state” corresponds to the state in which the first door is closed and the second door is also closed, as an example.

Also, in the above explanation,
[A movable body (for example, a door side effect movable body 2241) provided at a position where the player can at least contact with the movable body;
At least a door that can be opened and closed (for example, a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104);
A game console equipped with
The movable body is provided at least on the door body,
At least one of the plurality of error states is a first error state (e.g., a state where a door open error has occurred),
At least one of the plurality of error states is a second error state (e.g., a state in which an error that can not be canceled unless the door is opened).
The movable body is at least at a first position when a first condition (for example, occurrence of a door opening error) is satisfied while performing a first operation (for example, an operation according to rendering data). It is possible to return,
The movable body is capable of at least continuing the first operation when a second condition (for example, occurrence of a payout amount switch error) is satisfied while performing the first operation. ,
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first error state occurs.
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second error state occurs.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the operation of the movable body. In addition, there are cases where the operation of the movable body can be selected according to the degree of importance of the error. Furthermore, in the case of returning to the initial position, it may be possible to contribute to the prevention of the failure of the movable body and the like.

  In addition, the movable body can be contacted by a store clerk of a game arcade. Further, the movable body may be provided to both an object different from the door and the door (for example, provided so as to straddle two).

  In addition to being openable and closable, the door may be removable.

  The movable body is further moved to another position (for example, the maximum operating position) after returning to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation. Alternatively, it may return to the first position via another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position. The movable body continues the first operation when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the first operation, and another operation (for example, the second operation) is performed after the first operation. The presentation operation based on different new presentation data may also be continued.

  In addition, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition (the same applies to the third condition and the fourth condition described later) describe an example that holds, and other conditions or other conditions may occur. It may be a condition established by the operation of

  Further, conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in the present specification is performed. In the operation of the movable body in the claims and the embodiment of the present application, the contents described as "possible" may include cases in which the contents are not.

  Further, the “position where the player can at least contact” includes a position where the player naturally contacts, and a position where the player normally does not contact but sometimes contacts. Also, "openable" means that it can be opened and closed normally, but in some cases (for example, when locked etc.) may not be opened and closed (the same applies hereinafter) . "It is possible to return" includes that although it can usually return, it may not be possible in some cases (the same applies hereinafter). “Continuous” means that it can normally be continued, but in some cases it may not be possible (for example, when an emergency stop condition is met) (below) ,the same).

  Here, the error state may be, for example, the state in which the door is open.

  "The movable body at least tries to return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body is not in the first position due to an external force." One (for example, FIG. 109 (e)), it may be a game console characterized by "."

  Further, the door may be the inner frame 104 alone or the front door 105 alone. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and a second position farthest from the first position. Here, the second position may be a maximum movement position of the movable body. The door may be provided on the player side (front side) of the gaming board, or may hold the gaming board.

Also,
"The movable body can perform at least a second operation (for example, a confirmation operation) when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied when the power is turned on.
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position,
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the initial operation in the second operation, the movable body (the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102C) is It is to return to the first position after continuing the initial operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the initial operation at the time of power-on can give priority to the operation of the movable body even when the first condition is satisfied by the first error state.

  The movable body executes the second operation when the third condition is satisfied, and another operation (for example, the third condition is satisfied) after the second operation. Other dedicated operations) may also be performed. Furthermore, the satisfaction condition of the third condition may include that the door is opened and the power switch is operated, or the door is closed (island facility without the door being opened. Power may be turned on at the same time).

  Also, “performable” includes what can normally be performed, but in some cases it may not be possible (hereinafter the same). The third condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but in some cases (for example, even when the power is turned on, it may not be satisfied). is there.

  Here, the second operation may be different from the operation performed before the power is turned off if the three conditions are satisfied after the power is turned off once. May be

  Further, the initial operation may be an operation of moving the movable body to a second position (for example, a maximum operating position) farthest from the first position.

Also,
"The first error state is a state in which the door is at least open,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The period in which the second error state is present (for example, the period in which a payout switch error occurs) may include a first period,
The first period is at least a period in which a game can be continued,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second error state (for example, a period in which a magnet sensor error occurs) may include the second period.
The second period is at least a period in which the game can not be continued,
The second error state is an error state that can be at least released when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth condition is a condition that can be satisfied (for example, operating the power switch 178 which can not be operated unless the door is opened) with at least one condition of opening the door. ,
The movable body can at least return to the first position when the fourth condition is satisfied in a state in which the second condition is satisfied while performing the first operation. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the movable body can be returned to the initial position with priority given to the safety of the game stand and the player.

  The fourth condition may be a condition that holds even when the door is opened (for example, when the door is opened, the power may be automatically turned on again, etc.).

  Also, "removable" includes that although it can be canceled under normal conditions, there may be cases where it can not be canceled (the same applies hereinafter).

  Furthermore, even if the door is opened, the fourth condition may not be satisfied depending on the case (for example, when the opening angle of the door is insufficient).

  Here, the second error state may be released by the operation of operation means (error release switch 168, ram clear switch 180) provided on the back side of the game console. That is, the fourth condition may be a condition which holds that the operation means is operated as at least one condition. In other words, an error release operation means operable at least by opening the door is provided, and the fourth condition is a condition which holds as the at least one condition operating the error release operation means. May be

Also,
“The movable body does not at least start the first operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 105 (f), etc.)
The movable body is capable of at least starting the first operation in the second error state (for example, a door side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 116 (i) or the like),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible not to restrict the effect of the movable body more than necessary by not starting the first operation only in the first error state.

  The movable body may not start an operation different from the first operation (for example, an operation moving according to the player's operation) in the first error state, and further, The second operation may be started in addition to the first operation in the second error state.

  Also, “can be started” usually should be started, but in some cases it may not be started (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) ( same as below).

Also,
“The movable body can start at least the second operation in the first error state (for example, the door side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 102),
The movable body is capable of at least initiating the second operation in the second error state.
The game stand which makes a special thing. "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the operation at the time of turning on the power may be given top priority in some cases.

  The movable body may be capable of starting an operation (for example, an operation moving according to the operation of the player) different from the second operation in the first error state, and further, In addition to the second operation in the second error state, the first operation may be started.

Also,
[The first operation is an operation according to the rendering data,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In summary of the above, the door-side effect movable body 2241 corresponds to the “movable body” as an example. The combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in the state in which the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 corresponds to the “door” as an example. A state in which the inner frame 104 is opened corresponds to the “first error state” as an example, and an error that can not be released unless the inner frame 104 is released has occurred in the “second error state”. The state corresponds as an example. The “first position” corresponds to the initial position of the movable body as an example. The “first operation” corresponds to the operation according to the rendering data as an example, and the “second operation” is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. As a result, the opening of the inner frame 104 corresponds to the “first condition” as an example, and the “second condition” corresponds to the occurrence of an error that can not be released unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The operation of the power switch 178 or the simultaneous turning on of power by the island facility corresponds to the third condition "as an example, and the opening of the inner frame 104 corresponds to the fourth condition" as an example.

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description.

(Appendix a)
It has a production means capable of at least performing a production,
The movable body is an operating means operable by at least a player.
The effect means can at least execute the effect when the operation means is operated,
The operation means is at least returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the operation means is at a position different from the first position,
The effect means does not execute at least the effect even when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, there is a case (unable to win) where symbols constituting a winning combination are not aligned unless an operation method relating to a stop order or the like matches a predetermined operation method. In this case, a period (assist time) may be provided to notify the operation method on the side of the sub control unit, regardless of the main control unit. The provision of this period is a privilege for the player, and the period may be extended by winning a predetermined combination, winning a lottery, or the like. This extension (the number of added games) is also a benefit for the player. According to the game stand of supplementary note 1, when the door is opened by the wrongdoing, the unfair game may be able to be prevented by restricting the effect relating to the provision of the benefit.

(Appendix b)
It has a production means capable of at least performing a production,
The movable body is an operating means operable by at least a player.
The effect means can at least execute the effect when the operation means is operated in the effective period,
The operation means is at least returned to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the operation means is at a position different from the first position,
The effect means can at least execute the effect after the effective period is over,
The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect after the effective period has ended (even in response to the timing at which the operation means is operated) even when the operation means is operated Is
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the examples, the modifications, the various examples, the supplementary notes, and the like described above, the configuration requirements may be changed to another embodiment, an example, and The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes.

Embodiment C
The entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 125 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 124 as viewed from the rear side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears the error by the operation of the game clerk A discharge substrate case 172 which accommodates a discharge substrate 170 having a C. 168. A discharge substrate which constitutes a discharge control section 630 which performs control processing on the discharge of the game ball 74 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 126 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. The outer rail 202 extends from the top to the right of the rendering device 206 so that the game ball can fly to the right playing area 124 of the gaming board 200 through the space between the top of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 holds the first lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 as a decoration member as a path through which the released game balls flow down, and the decoration member as a path through which the shot game balls flow down And a second down flow path on the right side. In the following, hitting the gaming ball on the first lower route may be referred to as "left hitting", and hitting the game ball on the second flowing route may be referred to as "right hitting".

  In the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, the effect movable body 224 is disposed at the upper portion thereof, the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display device 212 at the lower portion The second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, the second special symbol holding lamp 220, and the high probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later. In FIG. 126, the effect movable body 224 is at an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 224 can not be viewed from the player at the initial position. ing. The effect movable body 224 moves in a plane (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) substantially parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). It can be done. The configuration and drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within a display screen of, for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure change games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure change games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first common drawing start opening 227, a second common drawing start opening 229, and a special drawing start opening 230; A special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and a variable winning opening 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entering the general winning openings 226 (the general winning opening 226 is winning). When it is determined that the dispensing device 152 is driven, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "prize balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rental balls" There is) and.

  The first common drawing start port 227 and the second common drawing start port 229 are configured with devices called gates or through chuckers for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first blowout starting port 227 is disposed in the first-class lower route on the left side sandwiching the rendering device 206, and the second blowdown path on the right side sandwiching the rendering device 206 A figure starting port 229 is arranged. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass to the first flat figure starting port 227 by left hitting, and the game ball can pass to the second flat figure starting port 229 by right hitting. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed the first common drawing start opening 227 or the second common drawing start opening 229 does not discharge to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the first common drawing start opening 227 or the second common drawing start opening 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210. . In addition, in a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the power support state, during super reach effect execution, during a big hit game), when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first blowout start port 227 The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute a common figure decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the award balls to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 start opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the second common view start opening 229. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 has the feather component 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and the ball can not enter during closing of the feather component 232a, and it is elected for common drawing fluctuation game, common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Since the second common drawing starting port 229 and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 below it are within the second flow down path on the right side across the rendering device 206, the 1st lower path down to the left side across the rendering device 206 The game ball which has advanced to does not pass through the second regular drawing start opening 229 or enter the special view 2 start opening 232. In addition, since the first common drawing starting port 229 and the special drawing 1 starting port 230 are in the first class lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206, the second down flow path on the right side across the rendering device 206 The advanced gaming ball does not pass through the first drawing start opening 227 or enter the special drawing 1 start opening 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the special view 1 start opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. It is impossible to enter a ball during closing of the door member 234a, and the special drawing display is stopped showing a big hit symbol by winning the special drawing fluctuation game. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (Special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening and start opening, or first common view start opening 227, second common view start opening 229 Only reach the out port 240 by passing through.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the non-rollable area of the game ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center part of the stage 244 is to the special figure 1 start opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, such as a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common drawing display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222 Etc.), and control various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Output 100 game information (for example, gaming state).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator signal 414 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, the effect movable body 224, and the movable object 703 described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting current positions and initial positions of the effect movable body 224 and the movable object 703, and a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136; A predetermined detection sensor, for example, a sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. . To the basic circuit, a drive circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the special view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment stop using FIG. And explain the kind of common drawing. FIG. 128 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, and after this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" is started, the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 128 (a), ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 128 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" and "special figure B" are 15 round (15R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure C" and "special figure D" are 15R big hit symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the power support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). The power support state will be described in detail later, but the state transitioning to the power support state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the power-sap state is referred to as a map-low probability state. 15R special big hit design "special figure A" and "special figure B" are special figure high probability popular figure high probability state, 15 special round pattern "special figure C" and "special figure D" are special Figure low probability It is a state of high probability. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", "special drawing C", and "special drawing D" are symbols whose degrees of advantage relative to the player are relatively large.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design and is called sudden change. Suddenly, after the big hit game is over, it becomes a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state similarly to the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot design and is called a hidden probability change. Hidden probability changes become a special figure high probability spread map low probability state (latency definite change state) after the big hit game is over. Hidden probability does not shift to the power support state after the end of the big hit game.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol. After the small hit game is over, it becomes a special figure low probability common figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal gaming state). In the small hit game, the same number of times (two times in the case of the present embodiment) as the "special figure E" or the "special figure F" is released.

  In addition, “special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, which is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs lottery of whether or not it is a big hit in the determination of success or failure, and thereafter, based on the result of the determination of success or failure, "special figure A" after symbol variation display. It is configured to determine which one of the “special figure J” is to be displayed on the special view 1 or the special view 2 display device 212 or 214 in a stopped state. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped after the symbol variation display, thereby determining the number of rounds of big hit games and the profit status after the big hit games The presence or absence of the power supply condition is automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery separately from the determination of the stop symbol, for example. Further, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, for example, when the stop symbol is determined, but determines the profit status after the big hit game by lottery, the stop symbol, the number of rounds and the number of rounds The profit state may be appropriately associated and configured.

  FIG. 128 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And when notifying the 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, the symbol combination where the same decorative pattern is lined up three in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-decoration" 2-Display the decoration 2 etc.). In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot, a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged (for example, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3", "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", etc.) Show stop.

  In addition, 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure F" hidden probability change, when notifying a small hit of "special figure G" and "special figure H", stop "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" indicate. Moreover, when notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure E", "display 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure I" and "special figure J", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 128 (b).

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of big hit are uniquely decided, but it may be made incomprehensible to the player which combination of decorative symbols will be the big hit.

  FIG. 128 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. In the stop display mode of the common drawing of this embodiment, three kinds of “common drawing A,” which is a hit symbol 1, “common drawing B,” which is a hit symbol 2, and “common drawing C,” which is a detached symbol is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a hit is made in the common game changing game and the determination of the stop symbol are performed by drawing of software random numbers. For example, the opening patterns of the special figure 2 start opening 232 (electric chew) are different in the hit symbols 1 and 2. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the first common drawing start port 227 or the second common drawing start port 229, the common drawing display device 210 lights up all seven segments, Perform the "variable display of a common figure" which repeats lighting of one central segment. Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "general diagram B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 128 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  FIG. 128 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol for a normal symbol. There are three types of decorative symbols for ordinary symbols according to the present embodiment, “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3”. The figurine decoration 1 has, for example, a symbol aspect reminiscent of "o", the figurine decoration 2 has a symbol aspect reminiscent of "o", for example, and the figurine decoration 3 has "x" for example It has a symbol form to evoke. On condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first bit map starting port 227 other than a predetermined period (for example, in the power support state, during super reach effect execution, during the big hit game) In the decorative symbol display device 208, a regular drawing decorative symbol variation game in which the display is switched in the order of "general drawing decoration 1" → "general drawing decoration 2" → "general drawing decoration 3" ... is played with a predetermined probability.

  In the case of informing the hit of "Plow map A", "Plow map decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the notification of "Put map B", "Plow drawing decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, In the case of notifying of the release of "Ptoko C", "Puroko 3" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 129 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If the voltage is less than 9 V (in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determination random number value counter for generating a special figure determination random value used for a lottery for determining a stop symbol in special figure variation game Update the random number counter for Further, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a common drawing winning random number counter that generates a common drawing winning random value used for the success / failure determination of the common drawing fluctuation game is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special drawing determination random number value counter and a random number counter for generating its initial value, and a common drawing winning random number value counter and a random number counter for generating the initial value. In step S115, the initial values of the two initial value generation random number counters are updated. For example, assuming that the possible numerical range of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter Remember to At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). Periodically (in this embodiment, once in about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 127, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, previous detection signal present, and present detection signal present) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal) If there is a match with the information indicating that there is an entry) into the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, or It is determined that there has been a passage of the second common drawing start port 229. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, 227, 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the random number for initial value generation of the main control unit main process of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order to generate an initial value of a random number counter for generating a random number value for common drawing determination used in symbol determination lottery of common drawing The random number counter for generating the initial value of is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number for determining the common drawing is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number for common drawing determination provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In addition, in the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, a special drawing determination random number value counter for generating a special drawing determination random value, used in the main control unit 300, and a common drawing for generating a common drawing winning random value A winning random number counter and a random number determination counter for generating a random number for determining a general drawing are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value for special image determination is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special image determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 to generate the special image determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number value counter for special drawing determination. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number value counter for special image determination. Moreover, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the special figure determination random number value counter is in a circle, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random number value counter is acquired And set it to the special figure determination random number value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a random number value counter for special drawing determination that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random number value counter, and the special figure determination random number value counter At the same time, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the special drawing determination random number value counter has made one revolution next. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determination random number value counter has made one turn next, the initial value storage for determining that the common drawing win random number value counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random number value counter may be separately provided with a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 2 or the same counter May be used.

  Also, for example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 65535, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 65535, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for common generation prize random number generation, and the common generation prize random number value generation The initial value set at this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, while setting it in the random number counter.

  Also, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number for determining the common drawing is 0 to 99, the value obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number for common drawing determination provided in the RAM 308 is obtained Is added to 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number for common drawing determination which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value, a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the common drawing determination random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number for common drawing determination is to make one revolution next while setting it in the random number counter for random number value generation. Keep it.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value counter for generating the special drawing fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special drawing fluctuation game or the initial value thereof is updated. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is, for example, 20000 ms in the common drawing low probability state, and is 1000 ms in the common drawing high probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game by lottery using a predetermined table, and generates a random value value for common drawing fluctuation time determination for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation game. It is also possible to update the value of the random number value counter for determining the common drawing fluctuation time or its initial value.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 227, 229 have a winning, the RAM 308 stores the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether there is a prize in special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232, first common drawing starting port 227, second common drawing starting port 229 and variable winning opening 234 . Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When a special figure 1 start opening 230 has a prize, and the corresponding special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserve number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230 of the (hard random number circuit) 318 is provided in the RAM 308 The special figure determination random number value is acquired from the special figure determination random number value counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special figure 1 random number value storage area. The combination of the big hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as 'special figure 1 random number value set' or 'special figure 1 start information') is 1 is stored the same number as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases, the data of the set of special figure 1 random number values with the highest priority (first and most stored) is At the same time as erasing is performed, the retention order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 random number value set is processed to be raised by one. In addition, every time the number of the Special Figure 1 suspension increases, the data of the new Special Figure 1 random number value pair is in the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value pair with the lowest retention order (last). Will be written.

  When there is a prize in special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full (in this example, it will be full with reserve number 4), random number value generation circuit While obtaining the big hit judgment random number value which is generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232 of 318, the big hit special purpose provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure determination is acquired from the figure determination random number value counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Special figure 2 Random number value for big hit judgment and random number value for big hit special figure decision in the random number value memory area (Hereafter, it is abbreviated as “pair of special figure 2 random value value” or “special figure 2 start information”) Are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 pending number stored in the special figure 2 pending number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random number value pair of the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 random number values It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set is advanced by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of a new special drawing 2 random number value pair is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 random number value pair of the lowest holding order.

  If the first common drawing start port 227 or the second common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing win random number value counter is It is acquired as a figure winning random number value and stored in the corresponding common figure random number value storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the first common drawing hit flag is on, hit When the flag per second common drawing is on so that the display mode of symbol 1 (general drawing A) is on, the off flag is on so that the display mode is on hit 2 (general drawing B) The 7-segment LED that configures the display unit 210 is turned on / off to control the off-set symbol (general view C), and the off-set flag is turned off. The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is performed so as to be the display mode. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the above-mentioned lighting and extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that the common figure stop display is carried out to the setting field is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 confirms the display of any of the symbols 1 (common figure A), 2 (Fig. 128 common figure B), and the detached pattern (generally figure C). I do. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, either the first common drawing per flag or the second common drawing per flag is turned on based on the common drawing determination result. If the first and second common drawing hit flags are on, then the common drawing state update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the process, the general drawing operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) Outputs a signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state, and sets information indicating the open period in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening and closing of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off as described later. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. Whether the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above-mentioned common drawing random number storage area when Perform a hit determination (a pass / fail determination of a common drawing fluctuation game) to be determined. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the symbol is determined by random number lottery based on the random number for common drawing determination stored in the random number storage area. If the common drawing determination result is a hit 1 and the first common drawing flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and if the common drawing determination is a 2 and a second common drawing, the second common drawing provided in the RAM 308 Set the hit flag on. If the result of the hit determination is an out-of-profile, the out-of-plane out-of-plane outlier flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing high probability state is 1000 ms, and the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing low probability state is 20000 ms. When the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing is determined by lottery, the value of the random number value counter for common drawing fluctuation time determination which generates the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired as a random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination, Based on the random value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time, one of the plurality of fluctuation times for displaying the common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and the fluctuation display time is selected as the common drawing fluctuation display time As a result, it is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special view 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing of the special figure 2 change start, the special figure 2 value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 reserve number stored in the special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, it controls the blinking of the special view 2 holding lamp 220. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 in FIG. 126 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, the LEDs for the special view 2 hold number may be red in order from the smaller LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is lit and Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation If the flag is also on and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A or B, 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. 128 (a) is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is In the case of special feature C or special feature D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special feature probability flag is on, the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure F when the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G when the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure H when the second small hitting flag is on. , Special figure I when the first out flag is on When the second out flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so that the special view J becomes each aspect, and the special view 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A, special figure B), 15R big hit symbol (special figure C, special figure D), a sudden definite figure (special figure E) , Hidden probability variation symbol (special figure F), first small hit symbol (special figure G), second small hit symbol (special figure H), first off symbol (special figure I), and first off symbol (special symbol J) Confirm display of any one symbol. Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The special area 2 is set in the setting area, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), ie, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit is displayed. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) The door member 234a is held in an open state by a solenoid for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning hole 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the variable winning hole 234. A signal is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the time saving state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The control state by these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu open-rolling is put together, and it is called the electric support (starting opening prize support by electric tulip) state. In addition, including the control state which shortens the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game, it calls time saving state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is larger than 0, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. The notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 It is carried out prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port 230 in FIG. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 random number value group (starting information) is selected from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Acquire and decide whether to make a big hit or not using a judgment table (not shown), decide whether to make a small hit or not, and decide the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure 2 to the stop display After the change display of the special figure 2, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. After taking out the first set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random number value set in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random number values is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second start information storage means) provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area. The above-described determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the special figure related In the case of the symbol change stop command, it includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the lottery process, and includes the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc. is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds etc. There is. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag value, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag value, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are pending etc Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc pending Set the information indicating. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information). In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 following step S313, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317 following step S315, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 131 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, update processing of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the structure and operation of the effect movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 132 to 152. FIG. FIG. 132 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front as in FIG. In FIG. 132, the effect movable body 224 descends from an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display screen front plane in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows a stopped state inside.

  The effect movable body 224 has, for example, a shape resembling a sword, and with respect to the rectangular opening frame which defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the blade points upward and the point of the sword is on the right side. The handle of the sword is located at. Maintaining this positional relationship, the effect movable body 224 can move up and down in the rectangular opening frame. In the initial position, the effect movable body 224 moves to the inside of the opening frame from the upper side of the opening frame and becomes invisible. In the maximum descent position of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body 224 may be moved to the inner side of the opening frame from the lower side of the opening frame so as to be invisible.

  FIG. 133 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front, similarly to FIG. In FIG. 133, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 imitating a blade is rotated counterclockwise about a central portion of the base 701 by a predetermined angle. Is shown.

  Next, the structure of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 134 and FIG. In the following description, with the pachinko machine 100 installed on an island facility of a game arcade, the side closer to the player is referred to as "front" (forward, front, front end, etc.) and vice versa. , And the rear end, etc.), the upper side (upper, upper, upper end, etc.) of the player as viewed from the player, and vice versa (lower, lower, lower end, etc.) Seeing from the person, let the horizontal left side be "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and vice versa "right" (right side, right side, right end, etc.). FIG. 134 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 135 is an appearance perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a) show the case where the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, the right drive system base 713 and the left drive system base 712 having elongated metal plates are opposed in the left and right direction, and the upper end of the right drive system base 713 and the upper end of the left drive system base 712 are connection members of elongated metal plates. It is connected at 710, and the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 of an elongated metal plate to be assembled in a rectangular frame shape.

  A guide member 717 having a cylindrical metal rod elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the right drive system base 713. A motor mr is disposed at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is engaged with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is disposed at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt vr is bridged between the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is bridged in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 717 extends.

  A guided member 721 is attached slidably around a cylindrical metal rod of the guiding member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr to move the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr can be guided by the guiding member 717 to move up and down along the cylindrical member of the guiding member 717 . A movable body right end holding member (not shown) for holding the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

  A guide member 715 having a cylindrical metal rod elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the left drive system base 712. A motor ml is disposed at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is engaged with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is disposed at the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is bridged between the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt vl is stretched in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 715 extends.

  A guided member 719 is attached slidably around the cylindrical metal rod of the guiding member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt vl. By driving the motor ml to move the belt vl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl can be guided by the guiding member 715 to move up and down along the cylindrical member of the guiding member 715 . A movable body left end holding member (not shown) for holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

  At the right end of the effect movable body 224, a motor 723 for rotating the movable object 703 with the central portion of the base 701 as the center of rotation is fixed. 134 (b) and 135 (b) show a state in which the right drive system and the left drive system cooperate and synchronously move the effect movable body 224 downward from the initial position by a predetermined distance. There is. 134 (c) and 135 (c), the movable object 703 is rotationally moved in a state where the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the positions shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b). It shows the state.

  FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. Although illustration is omitted, the same configuration is provided in the right drive system of the movable object unit 700. A box-like region is provided in the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl and slidably holding the guiding member 715, and the box-like region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719 in the box-like region. A claw portion 725 which can be projected by a predetermined distance in the direction of movement is accommodated. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a hook shape. Further, an upper end portion of the tip end of the claw portion 725 is formed with an inclined surface which can come in contact with a pin 729 described later. A spring 723 in contact with the rear end of the claw portion 725 is disposed in the box-like region. By the action of the spring 723, the claw portion 725 is always biased in the projecting direction. The box-like region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed by the lid member 727.

  A movable body left end holding member 731 for holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably mounted on the lower side of the guided member 719 on the guide member 715. The movable body left end holding member 731 is formed with a hook portion 731 a whose tip end is engageable with the hook portion 725 of the guided member 719.

  With the movable body left end holding member 731 holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 positioned at the lowermost end of the guide member 715, when the motor ml is rotated in a predetermined direction to move the belt vl, guided When the member 719 is lowered, the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged. Thereby, the movable body left end holding member 731 can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction to move the belt vl and the guided member 719 is lifted after the engagement is completed, the movable body left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 is also lifted together. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 similarly, the effect movable body 224 located at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

  A pin 729 protrudes and is fixed at a position above the left drive system base 712 by a predetermined distance above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 and in contact with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the to-be-guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and brings the claw 725 into contact (collision) with the pin 729, the pin 729 moves the claw 725 by a predetermined amount in a direction to be pushed toward the box member. As a result, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 in the same manner, the effect movable body 224 located at the top can be freely dropped.

  In order to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a. Can be moved to the upper position, and the same operation can be performed in synchronization with the right drive system to move the effect movable body 224 to the initial position.

  FIG. 137 (a) is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 137 (b) to (d) show the circular part of FIG. 137 (a) in an enlarged manner. The engagement cancellation operation | movement of the nail | claw part 725 and the nail | claw part 731a by the pin 729 is demonstrated using FIG.137 (b)-(d). FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the movable body left end holding member 731 is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by the drive of the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged. In addition, the bottom of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 so that the claw portion 725 engages with the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 Are moved in the direction to eliminate

  In FIG. 137 (c), the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw portion 725 with the claw portion 731a. Indicates that the condition has been resolved.

  In FIG. 137 (d), the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable The left end holding member 731 is shown in the middle of free fall.

  FIG. 138 is a front view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state where the movable object 703 is in the initial position where it does not displace relative to the base 701. FIG. FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced counterclockwise about a central portion of the base portion 701 by a predetermined angle. For driving the movable object 703, a drive system including a motor 723 and pulleys and belts (not shown) is used. FIG. 138 (c) shows the movable object 703 rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle. The movable object 703 is provided with an LED substrate inside, and can perform effects by making the LED emit light.

  FIG. 139 is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is bridged between a gear gc for transmitting the rotation of a motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) rotatably fixed to the central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven to rotate the gear of the central portion 703 c, whereby the movable object 703 can be rotationally moved relative to the base 701.

  On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base 701, a photosensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are disposed opposite to each other via a space portion 740a is disposed. The photo sensor 740 includes a light emitting element and a light receiving element which are disposed to face each other with the space portion 740 a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 139) are directed to the space 740 a so that the light path from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is horizontal with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility etc. It is arranged. For example, a black resin with a predetermined width behind the light receiving element so that the light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 positioned behind the effect movable body 224 does not enter the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photosensor 740 The light impermeable member used is provided. In this example, a wall 740 b behind the light receiving element of a part of the housing of the photo sensor 740 is used as a light impermeable member.

  In the vicinity of the photo sensor 740, a shutter 750 having a light shielding piece 750c is attached which shields light from entering the space 740a of the photo sensor 740 and emitted from the light emitting element so as not to be received by the light receiving element. The shutter 750 is rotatably fixed at the rotation center 750 a. On the opposite side of the light shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a, a protruding piece abutting portion 750b capable of coming into contact with the protruding piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 is provided. The rotation center 750 a is internally provided with a spring mechanism (not shown), and the spring mechanism urges the shutter 750 so that the light shielding piece 750 c does not enter the space 740 a of the photosensor 740 unless an external force is applied. It is done. When the projecting piece 703s abuts against the projecting piece abutting portion 750b and presses, the light shielding piece 750c enters the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In the vicinity of the shutter 750, the lid member 701a is attached to the base portion 701 for protection.

  In this embodiment, the photosensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 750c, and the first auxiliary control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is at the initial position when the photosensor 740 detects the light shielding piece 750c. When the photosensor 740 does not detect the light shielding piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is at a position other than the initial position.

  FIG. 140 is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 141A is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIGS. 141 (b) to (d) show the circular part of FIG. 141 (a) in an enlarged manner. The operation of the projecting piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141 (b) to (d). FIGS. 140 (a) and 141 (b) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. In the initial position of the movable object 703, the projection piece 703s abuts against the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 to push up the projection contact portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photosensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 140 (b) and 141 (c) show a state where the movable object 703 has been rotated about the central portion 703 c from the initial position by a predetermined angle. When the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s is also rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. For this reason, the projecting piece 703 s separates from the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since no pressing force acts on the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b, the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b descends due to the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c ascends and withdraws from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photosensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 140 (c) and 141 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 rotates at a maximum angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c and comes into contact with the mechanical end and stops. Since the projection piece 703s is separated from the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force is applied to the projection contact portion 750b, the projection contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring to maintain the stopped state. At the same time, the light shielding piece 750c is also lifted and maintained in the state of being withdrawn from the space 740a of the photo sensor 740. The photo sensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750 c.

  FIG. 142 is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 142 (a) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 140 (a). Fig. 142 (b) shows a cross section taken along the line A-A in Fig. 142 (a), and Fig. 142 (c) shows a cross section in which a part of Fig. 142 (b) is enlarged. FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. In the initial position of the movable object 703, the projection piece 703s abuts against the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 to push up the projection contact portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photosensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 142 (d) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 140 (b). FIG. 142 (e) shows a cross section taken along the line B-B in FIG. 142 (d), and FIG. 142 (f) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 142 (e). FIGS. 142 (d) to 142 (f) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s is also rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. For this reason, the projecting piece 703 s separates from the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since no pressing force acts on the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b, the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b descends due to the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c ascends and withdraws from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photosensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 143 to 146 schematically show a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 to FIG. 146 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed horizontally from left to right. In FIG. 143 (a), the display movable area 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the display movable body 224. Shows a state in which light is emitted forward from. A photosensor 740 is disposed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224. The photosensor 740 has a pair of wall portions disposed opposite to each other with a space portion 740a formed to have a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the front wall of the pair of walls, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the rear wall 740b. In the wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is disposed, at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light impermeable member. Further, a movable object 703 is provided on the effect movable body 224 as a fourth means. In addition, since the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position and the movable object 703 is also at the initial position, the light shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects in the vertical direction to the space 740a to shield the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c. Therefore, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding the predetermined threshold intensity.

  The effect movable body 224 is an initial position (first position) not overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position overlapping with at least part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction The second position can be moved.

  In this example, although the example in which the effect movable body 224 can move the linear trajectory in the vertical direction is shown, the effect movable body 224 is not limited to the linear trajectory and moves the trajectory including the trajectory including the curve or the arc. It may be possible, and it may be movable in the lateral direction or in the oblique direction without being limited to the vertical direction. Further, the effect movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving. May be

  Further, the photo sensor 740 detects whether the movable object 703 is at the initial position based on whether the light receiving element 740 d receives the light from the light emitting element 740 c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light shielding piece 750c and can not be received by the light receiving element 740d, and when the movable object 703 moves, the light from the light emitting element 740c Since the light is not blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, the light receiving element 740d can receive light. When the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 moves, the light emitting element 740c Of the light may be blocked by the light shielding piece 750c so that the light receiving element 740d can not receive light.

  The light blocking piece 750 c of the shutter 750 changes the position in accordance with the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light shielding piece 750c may be integrally provided. In addition, the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the light shielding piece 750c may be lower than the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the effect movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

  The movable object 703 can move in a range including the third position (initial position) and the fourth position (moving position). In this example, the center portion 703c is rotationally moved about the rotation axis, and the degree of overlapping with the base portion 701 of the effect movable body 224 is smaller at the fourth position than at the third position. That is, the movable object 703 is more likely to protrude from the base 701. Further, the movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light even while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, The light emission mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

  In FIG. 143 (b), the effect movable body 224 moves downward from the initial position as shown by the arrow, and is positioned in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the effect movable body 224. Show the condition. Light is emitted forward from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as illustrated. The light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 illuminates the effect movable body 224 located in the front from the rear, but the rear wall 740b of the pair of walls of the photosensor 740 is at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b Functions as a light impermeable member. In this manner, a part of the members constituting the photo sensor 740 is positioned behind the light receiving element 740 d as a light impermeable member, thereby preventing the light receiving element 740 d from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can do.

  In FIG. 144, the movable object 703 rotates around the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 143 (b), and the effect of the movable object 224 is higher than the position (third position) shown in FIG. It shows a state where it has moved to the fourth position where the degree of overlap with the base 701 is small. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) to (d), the movable piece 703 contacts the projecting piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and presses the projecting piece abutting portion 750b. Since the protruding piece 703 s moves, the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c is raised and retreats from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. Thus, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. In the photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (a), the light receiving element 740d is disposed on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and the light emitting element 740c is disposed on the rear wall portion 740b. By doing this, when the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light emitting element 740c and the light shielding piece 750c are located behind the light receiving element 740b. In some cases, the light from the symbol display device 208 can be prevented from being received by the light receiving element 740b.

  The photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (b) has a pair of wall portions disposed opposite to each other with a space portion 740a formed to have a predetermined width in the vertical direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the upper wall portion 740b. In the wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is disposed, a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light impermeable member. The light shielding piece 750 c is configured to move in the horizontal longitudinal direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing this, since the wall 740b made of the light impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light receiving element 740d is located behind the light receiving element 740d, the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can be further received. In some cases, it may be difficult for 740d to receive light. In addition, since the direction of the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740 c are orthogonal to each other, it may be difficult to make the light receiving element 740 d receive the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 is there.

  FIG. 146 is a view schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modified example of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (c) has, for example, the same configuration as the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 143, and as a third means, a thin plate separate from the photosensor 740. It is characterized in that a light impermeable member 760 is provided. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is arranged to cover at least the rear of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side of the base 701. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (b) is arranged to cover at least the rear and the lower of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and the lower side of the base 701. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 146C is arranged to cover at least the rear and upper and lower sides of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and upper and lower sides of the base 701. By arranging such a light impermeable member 760 at least in the rear of the photo sensor 740, it may be possible to prevent the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740 d more reliably. The light impermeable member 760 is not limited to a thin plate, and may be, for example, a light shielding film coated at least on the rear of the photo sensor 740 on the rear surface of the base 701.

  Next, the rendering operation in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 147 shows effects and the like in the special view 1 fluctuation game. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order and in this order. In each of FIGS. 147 (a), (c) to (f) and (h), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. The device 212, the special view 2 display 214, the general view holding lamp 216, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, and the special view 2 holding lamp 220 are shown extracted. FIG. 147 (b) shows that the game ball passes through the first drawing start opening 227. FIG. 147 (g) shows a state in which the blade members 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 are opened to the left and right.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 hold number display area a3. , And the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the number-of-progress hold number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing are arranged. In addition, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reservation number display area 801. From the center to the right of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 hold number display area. A central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 which performs common drawing effect display or variable icon display.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. It shows the state in which the display is being performed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbol moves downward from above (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is halted, the special figure 2 indicatory device 214, for example the 1st off hand design “special figure I” is halted and displayed as a halted symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is being stopped is displayed. Further, the common drawing variation game is being stopped, and the common drawing display device 210 is stopped and displayed, for example, the removal symbol “common drawing C” as a stop symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed.

  In the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, three LEDs are turned on, and it is shown that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three reserve indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is three. Further, a number "3" indicating the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area a1. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for informing the prefetch result of the special figure 1, and for example, a character image of "爺" is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed.

  The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 shows that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is “0”. In the special symbol 2 pending number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 2 is zero. In addition, in the special figure 2 reserve number display area a 3, a number “0” indicating the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general drawing reserve lamp 216 indicates that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations in the common drawing is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed. In the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "0" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (b) shows that three game balls pass continuously through the first drawing start opening 227.

  In FIG. 147 (c), during the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 147 (a), three gaming balls pass through the first common drawing start port 227 as shown in FIG. 147 (b) and the first time Shows the state in which the 図 変 動 game has been started. The common drawing display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbols of the three common drawings shown in FIG. 128 (d) sequentially move from the top to the bottom (in the figure , Indicated by the downward arrow). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being executed is displayed. Two LEDs are turned on in the common drawing holding lamp 216, which indicates that the number of holdings in the common drawing is "2". Further, in the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a number "2" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  147 (d), the special drawing 1 fluctuation game shown in FIG. 147 (a), the common drawing fluctuation game shown in FIG. 147 (c) is ended, and the common drawing display device 210 as a stop symbol aspect, for example A state in which the out-of-design symbol "P" C is stopped is displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a common drawing decoration 3 (for example, an image representing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out during the common drawing stop period is stopped and displayed It is done. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (e) shows a state in which a second regular game variation game has been started during the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 147 (a). The common drawing display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbols of the common drawing are sequentially moved from the top to the bottom. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being executed is displayed. In the common view holding lamp 216, one LED is turned on, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the common view is “1”. Further, in the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "1" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  147 (f), the special drawing 1 variation game shown in FIG. 147 (a), the common drawing variation game shown in FIG. The hit symbol “P [Figure] B” is in the state of being stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the common drawing decoration 2 (for example, an image representing a double circle) indicating that the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is hit during the common drawing stop period is stopped It is displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed. In the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, around the special effect area 803, an effect image g1 at the time of winning the common drawing is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (f), when it is won in the common view fluctuating game, as shown in FIG. 147 (g), the electric chow open state in which the wing members 232a of the special view 2 start opening 232 are opened left and right.

  FIG. 147 (h) shows an example of the effect performed when the special view 2 start port 232 is in the open state shown in FIG. 147 (g). In the special effect area 803, a character image of "Tono" indicating that the electric chow is open is displayed, and in the balloon area indicating the speech of the ton, for example, a tutorial (game console explanation) image g2 of "during electric chop open!" Is displayed It is done. As described above, in the present example, the common drawing effect display corresponding to the common drawing fluctuation game as shown in FIG. 147 is performed.

  FIG. 148 shows effects and the like in the special view 1 change game. FIGS. 148 (a) to (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. In each of FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (h), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 126, the common view display device 210, the special view 1 display 212, and the special view 2 display Shown in 214 are the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 hold number display area a3. , And the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the number-of-progress hold number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing are arranged. In addition, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reservation number display area 801. From the center to the right of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 hold number display area. A central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 which performs common drawing effect display or variable icon display.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 5-decorative 3-decorative 4" indicating disengaging is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is halted, the special figure 2 indicatory device 214, for example the 1st off hand design “special figure I” is halted and displayed as a halted symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is being stopped is displayed. Further, the common drawing variation game is being stopped, and the common drawing display device 210 is stopped and displayed, for example, the removal symbol “common drawing C” as a stop symbol aspect. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed.

  In the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, three LEDs are turned on, and it is shown that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three reserve indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is three. Further, a number "3" indicating the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area a1. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 of the special figure 1 hold count display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetch result of the special view 1, and for example, a character image of "爺" is displayed.

  The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 shows that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is “0”. In the special symbol 2 pending number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 2 is zero. In addition, in the special figure 2 reserve number display area a 3, a number “0” indicating the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general drawing reserve lamp 216 indicates that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations in the common drawing is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed. In the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "0" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. It shows the state in which the display is being performed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbol moves downward from above (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since the suspension of the special figure 1 decreases by one with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, two LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is "2" It is shown. In addition, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two reserve indications h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is two. Further, a number "2" indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 number-of-retentions display area a1. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetching result of the special view 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon is displayed by the black circle image as if the digested hold had moved.

  FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which a default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the special view 1 change game.

  FIG. 148 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. ing.

  In FIG. 148 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decoration symbol. It shows a state in which the variable display is performed.

  FIG. 148 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7” indicating stoppage is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special view 1 while the special view 1 change game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since one reserve of special figure 1 decreases with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, one LED lights on special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the number of reserve of special figure 1 is "1". It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one reserve indication h1 is displayed and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is one. Further, in the special figure 1 pending number display area a1, a numeral "1" indicating the pending number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803, an image of a black circle is displayed as if the saved reserve has moved.

  FIG. 148 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variation game has progressed for a predetermined time. Further, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c show the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 149 shows effects and the like in the special view 1 fluctuation game. FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. The state shown in FIG. 149 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 148 (h).

  In FIG. 149 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decoration symbol. The normal reach state in which the variable display is performed is shown.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" indicating disengaging is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped.

  FIG. 149 (c) shows that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbols is performed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since the reserve of special figure 1 decreases one with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, all LEDs turn off in special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the number of reserve of special figure 1 is “0” It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 pending number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, a number "0" indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 number-of-retentions display area a1. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fluctuation icon is displayed by the image of "爺" as if the reserved hold had moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message of “press the button!” And an image imitating the chance button 136 are used to display a button press indication. In addition, a button reception period display image showing a period for receiving pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 or the button acceptance period elapses within the remaining time shown in the button acceptance period display image, as shown in FIG. 149 (d), the image simulating the day circle is the special figure 1 fluctuation game It is displayed as a notice image for giving notice of the result of. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 149 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol. The normal reach state is shown.

  FIG. 149 (f) shows a state in which the normal reach has evolved to the super reach. The left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In the present example, a super reach image in which a samurai is shouting "It's a game!" Is displayed.

In FIG. 149 (g), while the samurai wins the game, the word "win" is displayed, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. Show the situation.

  Fig. 149 (h) shows the big hit when the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, which is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area, moves to the center of the display area to show a big hit. 7 ”is shown enlarged and stopped. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped. As described above, in the present example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 is performed.

  FIG. 150 shows an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 150 (a) illustrates a time setting display screen displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150 (b) illustrates the effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150 (c) exemplifies a sound volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150 (d) illustrates the luminance setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 through the screens shown in FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (d).

  FIG. 150 (e) exemplifies a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The central large screen of the display area is used for the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image is displayed in which a warrior on a horse is moving on a mountain path. Around the display area, for example, a special big hit image of a number “7” indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, an acquired sphere number display image is displayed on the upper side portion of the display area (in this example, "80 spheres" is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, "1R" is displayed). In the lower right corner, a display image showing the number of times of big hit (the number of times of continuous play) is displayed (in this example, “the number of times of big hit: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 150 (f) exemplifies the power-on-prompt display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure variation game is performed at the time of the power support state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area. When in the power support state, the player should make a right hit to pass many gaming balls through the second flat view starting port 229 and make the special view 2 starting port 232 win many gaming balls. For this reason, with the variable display of the decorative symbol as the background display, the direction of launch by the arrow clockwise with the character string "I hit right!" And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Suggestions are shown. In the special effect area 803, a fluctuation icon is displayed by the image of the normal suspension of the special view 2, and further, one normal suspension display h4 is displayed in the special view 2 suspension display area.

  FIG. 150 (g) illustrates a demo display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string "Daito" is displayed. FIG. 150 (h) illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door open error screen and a counter full error screen are displayed.

  FIG. 151 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (j), as shown in FIG. 132, the effect movable body 224 is from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being lowered and being stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (a), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the common figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing is not hidden by the effect movable body 224. Special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is configured not to be hidden by the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 151 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the electric chow open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is made to be hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (c), the stop display of the decoration symbol in any of the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area The default display in the special effect area 803 is such that at least a portion is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (d) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (d), the stop display of the decorative symbol of the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area, special effect The default display in the area 803 is to at least partially hide the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (e), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button pressing suggestion display and the button acceptance period display image , And at least a part of the effect movable body 224 is hidden.

  FIG. 151 (f) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (f), the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are at least partially by the effect movable body 224. To be hidden.

  FIG. 151 (g) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the variation display of the decorative symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (h) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (h), at least a part of the hit display image and the big hit display image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the number-of-rounds display image are not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 151 (i) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (i), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c and the display screen during power support are hidden by the effect movable body 224. There is.

  FIG. 151 (j) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (j), at least a part of the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, and 208c and the error fill-in screen are concealed by the effect movable body 224. . On the other hand, the door open error screen is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 152 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (j), as shown in FIG. 133, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 imitating the blade is the base 701. It shows a state of being rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle with the central portion as the center of rotation.

  In FIG. 152 (a), when the image shown in FIG. 147 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the common figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is made to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the general drawing is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is configured so as not to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  In FIG. 152 (b), when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (b), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special display of special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area, special At least a part of the electric chew open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is made to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 152 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol in any of the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and the hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 and the special view 2 hold count display area The default display in the special effect area 803 is such that at least a portion is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 152 (d), when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (d), stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area, special effect The default display in the area 803 is to at least partially hide the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  In FIG. 152 (e), when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (e), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button pressing suggestion display and the button acceptance period display image At least a part of the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703 is hidden.

  FIG. 152 (f) shows a part of the display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (f), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or At least a part of the movable object 703 is concealed by the movable object 703.

  FIG. 152 (g) shows a part of the display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (g), at least a portion of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the variation display of the decoration symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  In FIG. 152 (h), when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (h), at least a part of the hit during display image and the big hit display image is hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  FIG. 152 (i) shows a part of the display area of the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (i), at least one of the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c and the display screen during power support is at least one by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 I try to hide the department.

  In FIG. 152 (j), when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (j), the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c and the error fill screen are at least partially by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. To be hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 by this embodiment is:
It is a game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) provided with a plurality of effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, effect movable body 224),
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The second rendering means is at least capable of performing a light emitting operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor (for example, photo sensor 740),
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means (for example, a light emitting element 740 c),
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving unit (for example, a light receiving element 740 d),
The photo sensor is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
At least a part of the first effect means is a light blocking means (for example, a wall portion 740b of the photo sensor 740),
The light shielding means is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
In the first state, the light shielding unit is located between the second effect unit and the light receiving unit (for example, behind the light receiving element 740d).
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position,
The first position is a position at which at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is emitted toward the first effect means (for example, a position in the front plane of the display screen). ,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the light shielding means is positioned between the photosensor of the first effect means capable of at least the moving operation and the second effect means as the display means. There is a possibility that stable presentation can be performed without erroneous detection by the light of the second presentation means, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(2) In the above pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a third effect means (for example, movable object 703),
The first rendering means at least includes the third rendering means,
The third effect means is movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third effect means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The photo sensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means can not receive light from the light emitting means,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
In the third state, the photo sensor is at least changeable to the other of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is not the second position.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the third effect means that moves by the movement operation of the first effect means can further execute the movement operation, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.
(3) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means is at least capable of performing display (for example, display of a decorative symbol, various effects, etc.),
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko game machine 100, by hiding the display, the player can be made to pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
(4) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means includes a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special drawing holding number display, a common drawing holding number display, a special drawing fourth symbol, a common drawing fourth symbol, And at least one of the plurality of displays is the first display,
The first rendering means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative symbol, a notice display, a prefetch notice display, etc.) from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the first display, the player can be made to pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
(5) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and at least a movable light shielding plate (for example, a light shielding piece 750c) is provided at a position between the light emitting means and the light receiving means. The first effect means has at least a second region in which the light reflectance is a second reflectance, and the first reflectance is a second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (it is difficult to reflect light).

  Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be different from the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be opposite to the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be orthogonal to the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be the same as the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward.

  In addition, at least a part of the photo sensor may be a light shielding unit. Also, the light shielding means may be provided in the first effect means separately from the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may at least cover the lower side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the upper side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the side of the photo sensor. In addition, the light shielding unit may cover at least the rear and one or more directions of the front, rear, left, right, upper and lower of the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may be located at least behind and below the photo sensor. That is, when the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a photosensor, the pachinko machine can not identify the path of the light reaching the light receiving portion of the photosensor because the gaming ball that reflects light always flows down the gaming area. However, there may be cases where false detection can be prevented by covering the light from the display device and the light from the rolling gaming ball behind and below the photosensor, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering in only two directions of front and rear, right and left, up and down), it may be possible to measure the weight of the first rendering means and reduce power consumption and cost when moving. . In addition, the light shielding unit may be a part of a member constituting the photo sensor. The light shielding means may be part of a member provided with the light emitting means. The light shielding means may be part of a member provided with the light receiving means.

  Also, at least one of the plurality of displays may be a second display. In addition, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Also, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding both at least a portion of the first display and at least a portion of the second display from the front.

  Further, the third effect means may be capable of executing the moving operation to a position covering at least a part of the second effect means from the front. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. In addition, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Also, the third effect means may be capable of hiding both at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

  The second effect means may be capable of simultaneously displaying the first display and the second display. Further, each of the plurality of displays may be a display indicating game information (hereinafter, referred to as “display indicating a plurality of game information”). In addition, a display or a plurality of game information indicating a plurality of game information is a decoration symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, a special view hold number display, a common view hold number display, a special view fourth pattern, a common view fourth Symbol, notice display, prefetch notice display, tutorial display, special view effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button pressing suggestion display, change display, pseudo change display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Off display, big hit medium effect display, big hit round number display, count number display for each round display, obtained ball number display, big hit consecutive house number display, positive change in effect display, time display effect, launch direction suggestion display, read ahead mode display , Regular effect display performed regularly (for example, every hour), demo screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting Shown, error display, may include at least one of. In addition, the first display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. In addition, the second display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, at least one of the plurality of effect means may be a fourth effect means.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 153, corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first rendering means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The second rendering means is at least capable of performing a light emitting operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor,
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means,
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means,
The photo sensor is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
At least a part of the first effect means is a light blocking means,
The light shielding means is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The light shielding means is located between the second effect means and the light receiving means in the first state.
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position,
The first position is a position where at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is emitted toward the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means,
The first rendering means at least includes the third rendering means,
The third effect means is movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third effect means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The photo sensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means can not receive light from the light emitting means,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
In the third state, the photo sensor is at least changeable to the other of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is not the second position.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The second rendering means is at least executable.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
The second effect means can execute at least one of a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first effect means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

  Further, the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(1) A game console provided with a plurality of effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means,
The first effect means is means capable of at least performing a moving operation,
The second effect means is an image display means,
The third effect means is means capable of at least performing a moving operation,
The first effect means is a means provided with at least a photo sensor,
The first effect means is means provided with at least the third effect means,
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light emitting unit,
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light receiving unit,
The photo sensor can detect a light shielding piece,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece which moves at least in accordance with the movement operation of the third effect means,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece positioned between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the first state,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece not positioned between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit when the third effect means is in the second state,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying an image toward the front side,
The first effect means is a means provided on the front side of the image display means,
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit provided on the front side of the light receiving unit,
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit facing the light receiving unit.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when light emitted from the image display means leaks to the photo sensor due to an error during assembly of parts or aged deterioration, the light receiving portion is directed to the front side, so the light is received by the light receiving portion In some cases, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of

(2) The first state is a state in which the light receiving unit can not receive light from the light emitting unit,
The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit.
It is characterized by

(3) The image display means is means capable of at least performing image display.
It is characterized by

(4) The image display means is a means capable of executing at least one of a plurality of image displays.
At least one of the plurality of image displays is a first image display,
The first effect means is a means capable of covering at least a part of the first image display from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by

(5) The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
It is characterized by

  Further, the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(1) A game console provided with a plurality of effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means,
The first effect means is means capable of at least performing a moving operation,
The second effect means is an image display means,
The image display means is means capable of at least performing a light emitting operation;
The third effect means is means capable of at least performing a moving operation,
The first effect means is a means provided with at least a photo sensor,
The first effect means is means provided with at least the third effect means,
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light emitting unit,
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light receiving unit,
The photo sensor can detect a light shielding piece,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece which moves at least in accordance with the movement operation of the third effect means,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece positioned between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the first state,
The light shielding piece is a light shielding piece not positioned between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit when the third effect means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which the light receiving unit can not receive light from the light emitting unit,
The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying an image forward.
The first effect means is a means provided in front of the image display means,
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit provided in front of the light receiving unit,
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit facing the light receiving unit,
At least a part of the first effect means is a light blocking means,
The light shielding means is at least movable means in accordance with the moving operation of the first effect means,
The light shielding unit is, in the first state, a unit positioned between the image display unit and the light receiving unit.

(2) The image display means is a means capable of executing at least one image display among a plurality of image displays,
At least one of the plurality of image displays is a first image display,
The first effect means is a means capable of covering at least a part of the first image display from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by

(3) The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
It is characterized by

Embodiment D
<Overall configuration>
The entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). In the pachinko machine 100, parts having transparency may be used, and in each drawing, parts behind the parts having transparency may be indicated by solid lines, and as a result, shape lines May appear to cross each other.

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. In FIG. 165, the game board 200 is not shown.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. Arrows d1 to d3 indicate directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed to the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (may be referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be called front or front, and the far side may be called back or back. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction), and may be referred to as a left hand in a front view and a right hand in a front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction of the pachinko machine 100 (which may be referred to as the vertical direction), and the higher one may be called upper and the lower one may be called lower.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A game board 200 described later is attached to the space portion 114. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided. Further, a vibration sensor SR2 is provided at the upper left portion of the main body 104, and when excessive vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, when it is struck hard), the vibration is detected. When detected by the vibration sensor SR2, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, stop of the game which makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR2 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. A space in the depth direction of the game area is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. A front frame door open sensor SR1 is provided on the main body 104, and the front frame door open sensor SR1 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 may be provided with a rendering device, and the rendering device and the vibration sensor SR2 may be adjacent to each other. The effect device of the front frame door 106 may be a button-type effect device for moving the transparent plate member 118, or the player may be able to operate this button-type effect device. In this case, when the detection result of the vibration sensor SR2 has an intensity exceeding the normal button operation, error processing (for example, notification with a sound or an image) may be performed.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. The lower plate 128 which stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126 (the majority of which is hidden behind the effect device 108a in FIG. 165) and stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player A ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls to the lower plate 128, and a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the game ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box) The ball emission handle 134 which launches the gaming ball guided to the launch device 110 to the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 by the operation of the player, and changes the rendering mode of the various rendering devices by the operation of the player. Effect button 136 for enabling the effect, the effect button lamp 138 for causing the effect button 136 to emit light, and a ball rental operation button (not for giving a ball rental instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade) (Shown), a return operation button (not shown) for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the card unit status, and effects The device 1 includes a setting button 108 b that receives setting operations such as music setting and game-specific mode setting. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The effect button 136 can also be raised and lowered by providing a drive mechanism inside, for example. When raised, the protrusion amount of the effect button 136 may increase to prompt the player to operate, and when lowered, the player may be made flush with the surroundings to make the operation difficult. There is a case. Further, the effect button 136 may be switchable between, for example, a state in which the button can be operated and a state in which the button can not be operated (hardened so that the button can not be pressed); It may be

  The ball storage tray door 108 also includes a turbo button 134 a adjacent to the firing handle 134. By operating the turbo button 134a while performing the firing operation on the firing handle 134, the firing intensity of the gaming ball can be increased. The player does not operate the turbo button 134a in the normal time (left hit), but operates the turbo button 134a at the right hit, so that the left hit and the right hit can be performed without changing the operation amount with respect to the launch handle 134 one by one. Can be switched.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134. The launcher (not shown) and the launch stick which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick. And (not shown).

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 165 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the ball passage unit 153 and reach the upper plate 126 or the like disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and a sub board case 162 are arranged. The sub substrate case 162 includes a first sub substrate 160 that constitutes a first sub control unit 400 that performs control processing regarding effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300, and processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing relating to the effect based on the above is housed.

  The payout substrate case 172 constitutes a payout control unit 600 which performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and accommodates the payout substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. The launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of gaming balls.

  A power supply substrate case is disposed on the front side (the back side as viewed in FIG. 2) of the payout substrate case 172. The power supply substrate case constitutes a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear signal as a main control unit A power supply substrate 182 equipped with an RWM clear switch outputting at 300 is accommodated.

  The CR interface unit 186 transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 167 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104 described with reference to FIG. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  The attachment structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104 can adopt various structures. For example, the front view left side portion 200 a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (the hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the front right side 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 and set while rotating the game board 200 with the rotation center as a center, and with such a structure, the workability can be improved. There is a case.

  The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-like main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, a resin, and the surface (front) of the main body 201 constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which the character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is printed. At the lower right of the main body 201, a vibration sensor SR3 is disposed. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, stop of the game which makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detecting sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 which is attachable to and detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, an area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the fired game ball.

  An area other than the game area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes can be called at least the game area 124 in a state where the launch strength of the game ball is maximized. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a rendering device or the like in the game area 124. The gaming area 124 is called a flowing area at the point where the gaming balls flow in during the game, and a non-playing area may be called a non-flowing area at the point that the gaming balls do not flow during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The game area 124 can also be called the entire area as a flow-down area, but the area where the game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a rendering device or the like may be called a non-flow-down area.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218, Are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, four) of special drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold until. In the case of this embodiment, since the second special symbol variation game does not perform holding storage, the second special symbol holding lamp is not provided, but when performing holding storage, it is adjacent to the second special symbol display device 214 A second special symbol hold lamp may be arranged.

  In addition, when it is possible to set a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur and a low probability state in which a big hit is not likely to occur as the gaming state, a high probability medium lamp may be provided. This lamp is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and changes the gaming state from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs to a high probability state The light may be turned on when switching to a low probability state from the high probability state.

  Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing start opening 228, a first special view starting opening 230, a second special view starting opening 232, and a variable The winning opening 234 is disposed.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning opening 226 (when winning at the general winning opening 226), the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of The ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the case of the present embodiment, in the arrangement of the first special view start opening 230, entering the game ball into the first special view start opening 230 is difficult when the right strike is performed.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the case of the present embodiment, when the left hitting is performed due to the arrangement of the common view starting opening 228 (by the game nail not shown), the game ball entering the common opening starting opening 228 has a difficult configuration . Therefore, it is not in principle to win the common swing game during the left hitting, and therefore it is not in principle that the blade member 232a opens and closes. On the other hand, when the player strikes the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the common view starting opening 228, the common swing game may be won and the wing members 232a may be opened and closed.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the lower right side of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226 and other winning openings to be described later are integrally formed in the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with an opening / closing mechanism SH1 and SH2 for opening and closing a ball passage, and a V area RV. A game ball having passed through the opening / closing mechanisms SH1 and SH2 can enter the V area RV.

  Furthermore, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails are provided, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening Also, after guiding the ball that has not won the prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out port 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are allowed to pass by the launch rod and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236 or the game nail, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening ( If you win a prize in the first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232), do not win any winning opening or starting port, or just pass the common view starting port 228 to the out port 240 To reach.

  Further, the rendering device 2 is disposed in the upper part of the game area 124 and the rendering device 3 in the lower part, and the rendering device 4 is disposed on the left side and the right side. Behind each of the rendering devices 4, a rendering device 5 to be described later is disposed. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also uses a counter circuit 318 (two in this circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes its value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and game ball entering into the V area RV , Various sensors 320 including front frame door open sensor SR1, inner frame open sensor, lower flat full sensor, vibration sensor SR2, vibration sensor SR3 and magnetic sensor (for example, disposed in the ball entry unit U1) A sensor circuit 322 for receiving the signal output by the circuit and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; The display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common pattern display device 210, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a first symbol display device 212 or a second special image display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device A drive circuit 326 for performing the display, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the various state display unit 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, etc.), a predetermined movable member, 2 Connect the drive circuit 334 to control various solenoids 332 that open and close SH1 and SH2 etc. equipped with the blade member 232a of the special view start port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 and the ball entry unit U1. ing.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the presentation button lamp 138), a presentation button 136, The sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the button detection sensor 426 such as the setting button 108b to the basic circuit 402, and the image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are used to use the work area of the VRAM 436. And a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, from the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the various rendering devices 224, a movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the movable body included in the various rendering devices 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424 Sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal of the above to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame for controlling the game board lamp 542 The lamp drive circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540. The various rendering devices 224 include, for example, rendering devices 1 to 5.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. The control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 based on the control signal indicating the amount and the firing intensity according to the operation of the turbo button 134a, and supplying balls from the upper tray 126 to the launcher 110 Control of ball feeding device 634 is performed.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 169 (a) to (d). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. FIG. 169 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do.

  These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2.

  Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display, and a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop view pattern of the special view 1 or 2 The display is called symbol fluctuation stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 169 (a), ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 169 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game of 15 rounds ends, it shifts to a time saving state. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. For example, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game become short. In addition, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 becomes long, and the pair of blade members 232a is easily opened. From such a thing, the thing of a short time state may be called a power supply state, and that it is not a short time state may be called a non-power-supply state.

  In “Special Figure A” in FIG. 169 (a), “(15R Sappo Big Hit)” is a special figure for winning the 15 round big hit game, and after the 15 round big hit game is over It means that the game state of is the power support state.

  "Special figure B" is a real 10 round (10R) jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game of 15 rounds ends, it shifts to the electric support state. Although the real 10 round is a big hit game of 15 rounds, it means that it is a big hit game of substantially 10 rounds by shortening the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 in the final 5 rounds. In "Special figure B" of Fig. 169 (a), what is described as "(10R sapo big hit)" is a special figure that is substantially winning a 10 round big hit game, and a substantial 10 round big hit game It means that the game state after power-up becomes the power support state.

  "Special figure C" is a real 0 round (0R) jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game of 15 rounds ends, it shifts to the electric support state. Although the real 0 round is a big hit game of 15 rounds, it means that it is a big hit game of 0 round substantially by shortening the opening time of the variable winning opening 234. In "special figure C" in FIG. 169 (a), what is described as "(sudden with support big hit)" is a special figure that is substantially winning a zero round big hit game, and a substantial zero round big hit game It means that the game state after power-up becomes the power support state.

  "Special figure D" is a real 10 round (10R) jackpot symbol and does not shift to the power support state after the end of the 15 round jackpot game. The real 10 rounds are as already stated. In “Special Figure D” in FIG. 169 (a), “(10R Big Hit)” indicates that it is a special figure that is winning a jackpot game of substantially 10 rounds without a power support condition. I mean.

  "Special figure E" is a lost design and is a special figure in which a big hit game is not started.

  "Special figure F" is a 15 round (15R) direct hit design, and shifts to a time saving state after the big hit game of 15 round ends. The player is given the same benefit as in the case of winning the “special figure A”.

  Although the game configuration does not have a big hit (special big hit) in which the probability of winning a big hit is high in this embodiment, it may be a game configuration having a special big hit. When the special jackpot is won, the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure fluctuation game becomes high (special figure high probability state).

  "Special figure G", "special figure H" and "special figure I" are small hitting symbols (15 RV symbols). Winning "special figure G", "special figure H" and "special figure I" makes it easier to enter the V area RV than when not winning, and when entering the V area RV (hereinafter referred to as V prize) In some cases), transition to the 15R jackpot game. If the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are won, after the end of the jackpot game of 15R, it shifts to the electric support state. In “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” in FIG. 169 (b), “(15R Support Small Hits)” indicates that the jackpot condition of the 15 rounds and the power support condition are provided on condition of the V prize. It means that it is a special feature to be elected to. If you win the "special figure I", after the end of the 15R jackpot game, do not shift to the power support state. In “Special figure I” in FIG. 169 (b), “(15R small hit)” is a special figure that wins 15 rounds of big hit games with no power support condition on condition of V prize. Is meant to be.

  In addition, the small hit design of the special figure 2 may have more types than the big hit design of the special figure 1. It is difficult to identify the type of jackpot when the V prize is won, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, symbols other than the symbols illustrated in FIGS. 169 (a) and (b) may be prepared.

  FIG. 169 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. In the case of this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponds to Special Figure 1, but may correspond to Special Figure 2.

  Under the condition that the first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special view start opening 230, that is, that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, each of the symbol display areas, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" "Variant display of decoration pattern" is performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" →.

  And, when notifying the big hit of the special figure A, the special figure B or the special figure D, a symbol combination in which three decorative symbols other than the decoration 3 and the decoration 7 are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, Stop display of decoration 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "etc.

  In addition, when notifying the big hit only of special figure A, the design combination where 3 decoration designs of decoration 3 or decoration 7 are lined (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") Stop display.

  Moreover, when alerting | reporting the big hit of only special figure C, the stop display of the combination (Here, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" and "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") of three types of decoration patterns is carried out.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 169 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 170 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal).

  Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off.

  That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (this processing does not detect an abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-described front frame door open sensor SR1, inner frame open sensor, lower flat full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 To monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and stores the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor.

  Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 168, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, previous detection signal present, and present detection signal present) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there has been passage of V, entry to the V region RV, and the like. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on the winning openings 226, 234, the starting openings 230, 232, 228, or the V winning. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated.

  For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it.

  In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03.

  When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  When there is a winning on the second special view starting port 232 and the variation display of the special view 2 is not performed, the value is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 (2) A value is obtained as a random number value from the random number counter for random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 169 (d) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 169 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is set in the solenoid (332) for opening / closing drive of the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting the common region in operation in the setting region While outputting, information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  In step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off.

  FIG. 175 (b) shows an example of lottery data of a common drawing, and in particular shows an example of a success / failure determination table of the common drawing. In the example of the figure, the range of the random numbers used for the determination of success or failure of the common drawing is 0 to 65535, and it is determined to be hit if the random number is 0 to 65534, and it is determined to be lost if the random number is 65535. That is, the probability of hitting is about 100%. This table is used in both the power support state and the non-power support state.

  FIG. 175 (c) shows an example of lottery data of a common drawing, and in particular, is a table for determining a symbol of the common drawing. If the hit result of the common drawing is hit, the stop common drawing will be common drawing A (100%), and if it is a loss, it will be common drawing B (100%).

  FIG. 175 (d) shows an example of information for setting the time for opening the blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 and the like when the drawing A is won. When the drawing A is won in the non-electric support state, the blade member 232a is opened, and it is closed when 0.03 seconds have elapsed or when the second special figure start port 232 wins six balls. When the general drawing A is won in the power-on state, the blade member 232a is opened, and it is closed when 5.8 seconds have elapsed or when the second special figure start port 232 wins six balls. Therefore, the power support state is advantageous to the player.

  Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows an example of a common drawing fluctuation time determination table. In the example of the figure, the range of the random numbers used for the judgment of the commonness of the map fluctuation time is 0 to 65535. In the case of a non-power-supply state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 25000 ms when the random number is 0 to 29999, and the fluctuation time is determined to be 30000 ms in the case of 30000 to 65535. In addition, the frequency of winning the map A in the non-power support state is low. In that sense it is "rare". This is due to the playability of the present embodiment. In addition, in the non-power support state, it is recommended to hit the left, but since it does not exist in the flow area of the gaming ball when the common drawing start port 228 performs the left hit, basically It is designed not to change the figure.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, entering the game ball into the first special view starting opening 230 is difficult when hitting the right, and when hitting left, Entry of the game ball into the figure starting opening 228 is a difficult configuration. During the left stroke, it is not in principle to be elected in the common drawing fluctuating game, and therefore it is not in principle that the blade member 232a is opened and closed. On the other hand, when the player strikes the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the common view starting opening 228, the common swing game may be won and the wing members 232a may be opened and closed.

  From the above, in the non-power-supporting state, in many cases, the left strike is advantageous to the player, and as a result, the frequency of winning the map A in the non-power-supporting state is low.

  In the case of a power supply state by winning the drawing A, when the random number is 0 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. That is, the fluctuation time is 100% and 15000 ms. The fluctuation time is 50% or 60% of the fluctuation time of the non-electric support state, and the fluctuation time is shortened.

  In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, special figure status update processing is performed for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 respectively. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 10R big hit flag, sudden big hit flag, common drawing probability fluctuation flag, small hit flag, lost flag etc. In response, special display 1 and special display 2 stop display is performed.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows an example of the success / failure determination table of the special view 1. FIG. In addition, as already demonstrated, in this embodiment, the game in which the winning probability of a special figure fluctuates is not assumed. In the example of the same figure, the range of the random number used for the hit judgment of the big hit of the special figure 1 is 0 to 65535, and it is decided as the big hit when the random number is 0 to 336 (big hit probability: 1 / 194.5), If the random number is 337 to 65535, it is determined as a loss.

  FIG. 174 (b) shows an example of the direct hit big hit success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. In addition, as already demonstrated, in this embodiment, the game in which the winning probability of a special figure fluctuates is not assumed. In the example of the same figure, the range of the random number used for the hit determination of the direct hit big hit of the special figure 2 is 0 to 65535, and it is decided as the big hit when the random number is 0 to 336 (big hit probability: 1 / 194.5) , If the random number is 337 to 65535, it is determined as a loss. The winning probability of the direct hit is the same as the jackpot probability of Toku 1.

  FIG. 174 (c) shows an example of the small hit success / failure determination table of the special view 2. The small hit success or failure judgment of the special figure 2 is performed when it is determined that the direct hit is a lost or not. In the example of the figure, the range of the random number used for the hit / not determination of the small hit of the special figure 2 is 0 to 65535, and when the random number is 0 to 65535, it is determined as the small hit. That is, in the case of this embodiment, 100% small hit is won.

  FIG. 174 (d) shows an example of the symbol determination table of the special view 1. If the hit result of the big hit is a big hit, the symbol of the special figure 1 is determined in any one of the special figures A to D. The range of random numbers used for symbol determination is 0 to 99, and when the random numbers are 0 to 3, the special figure A is determined. When the random numbers are 4 to 39, the special figure B is determined, the random numbers are 40 to 40 The special figure C is determined in the case of 49, and the special figure D is determined in the case of a random number of 50 to 99. When one of the special views A to D is selected, a big hit game is started, and the variable winning opening 234 (which may be called the attacker 1) is opened and closed. When the hit result of the big hit is a loss, it is determined as a special figure E.

  If you win the big hit in the non-power support state, it will shift to the power support state after the big hit end if you win the special figure A ~ C, so the probability of shifting to the power support state after the big hit from non-power support state is 50% Become.

  FIG. 175 (a) shows an example of the symbol determination table of the special view 2. FIG. If the hit result of the direct hit big win is winning, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined as the special figure F, and if the win result of the small hit is won, the special figure G to special figure I to special figure The symbol of 2 is determined.

  The range of random numbers used for symbol determination in small hits is 0 to 99, and it is determined to be special figure G if random numbers are 0 to 34, and is determined to be special figure G if random numbers are 35 to 69, random numbers Is determined as the special figure I in the case of 70-99.

  When the special figure F is won, a big hit game is started, and the variable winning opening 234 (attacker 1) is opened and closed. When the special view G to the special view I are won, a small hit game is started, and the opening / closing mechanism SH2 (which may be called the attacker 2) is opened. When the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is opened and closed, the opening / closing mechanism SH1 is always opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. This may result in a V prize.

  In addition, it will be about 70%, if it considers about the electric support continuity rate at the time of being elected to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  FIG. 175 (e) shows the open / close conditions of the variable winning opening 234 (adapter 1) and the open / close mechanism SH2 (adapter 2). In the case of winning a special figure A or a special figure F, in the big hit game, the variable winning opening 234 is closed when 25 seconds have passed or 9 balls are won in the variable winning opening 234, and this is repeated 15 rounds. When a special figure B or special figure D is won, in the big hit game, the variable winning opening 234 is closed when 25 seconds have passed or 9 balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 after opening, and this is repeated for 10 rounds. Further, after the opening, 0.3 seconds have passed or the game is closed when 6 balls are won in the variable winning opening 234, and this is repeated for 5 rounds. Since the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 is extremely short in the final five rounds, winning can not be expected.

  When winning the special view C, in the big hit game, the variable winning opening 234 is closed when 0.3 seconds have passed or 15 balls are won in the variable winning opening 234 after opening, and this is repeated for 15 rounds. Since the opening time of the variable winning opening 234 is extremely short in all rounds, winning can not be expected.

  When winning in the special figure G-I, in the power support state, the opening and closing mechanism SH2 is closed when 1.5 seconds elapse after opening or when 9 balls are won in the opening and closing mechanism SH2, and this is performed for one round. When the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is closed after being opened, the opening / closing mechanism SH1 is opened and closed as described above. If the special figure G-I is won, the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is closed in the non-electric support state if 0.3 seconds elapse after opening or 9 balls are won in the opening / closing mechanism SH2, and this is performed for one round. When the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is closed after being opened, the opening / closing mechanism SH1 is opened and closed as described above.

  In the non-electric support state, the opening time of the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is extremely short, and therefore the V winning can not be expected. On the other hand, in the power-on state, the opening time of the opening / closing mechanism SH2 is 1.5 seconds, although it is not long, but there is a chance of winning a V prize.

  FIG. 176 shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. In the example of the figure, the range of the random number used for the pass / fail determination of the special view 1 fluctuation time is 0 to 65535.

  In the case of a non-power-supply state by winning special image A, special image B or special image D, when the random number is 0 to 1000, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to a normal reach.

  When the random number is 1001 to 20000, the fluctuation time is determined to 45000 ms. At this time, the rendering mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to about per super reach A. Super reach A can be a reach with a high sense of expectation for a big hit than a normal reach.

  When the random number is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 65000 ms. At this time, the rendering mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set per super reach B. Super reach B per hit can be a reach with a high sense of expectation to the big hit than per normal reach.

  In the case of the power support state by winning the special view A, the special view B or the special view D, when the random number is 0 to 1000, the variation time is determined to be 1500 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is suddenly changed to V display, with no change display of the decorative symbol. Note that the frequency of winning in the special view A, the special view B or the special view D in the power support state is low, and in that sense it is "rare". This is also due to the playability of this embodiment. As described above, it is more advantageous to aim at the second special view start opening 232 by right-handing when power is on, so there is not much chance of winning in the first special view start opening 230. If any, the player dare to make an adverse left strike, or the case where the reserved memory of the special view 1 remains when shifting to the power support state. In addition, when the first special figure starting port 230 is newly awarded in the power support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 and a notification prompting a right-handed voice are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, during the period from the jackpot game to the power support state, that is, the period in which the right hit is recommended, a notification to prompt the player to hit the right is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. on the other hand. When transitioning from the power support state to the non-power support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 and a notification prompting a left strike with voice are executed only in a part of the transition period.

  If the special figure E is won and it is in the non-power support state and the number of pending storages is four, the variation time is determined to be 15000 ms when the random number is from 0 to 59999. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to the shortening loss (loss with a short fluctuation time).

  When the random number is 60000 to 63999, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to normal reach loss.

  When the random number is 64000 to 64999, the fluctuation time is determined to 45000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to Super Reach A loss.

  When the random number is 65000 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 65000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to Super Reach B loss.

  If the special figure E is won and it is in the non-power support state and the number of pending storages is 3, the variation time is determined to be 10000 ms when the random number is 0 to 49999. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to lost.

  When the random number is 5000 to 63999, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to normal reach loss.

  When the random number is 64000 to 64999, the fluctuation time is determined to 45000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to Super Reach A loss.

  When the random number is 65000 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 65000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to Super Reach B loss.

  When the special figure E is won and the power supply state is established, if the random number is 0 to 1000, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1500 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation of the decorative symbol. In addition, the frequency of winning the special drawing E in the power support state is low, and in that sense it is "rare". As described above, it is more advantageous to aim at the second special view start port 232 by right-handing when power is on, so that there is not much chance of winning in the first special view start port 230.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. In the example of the figure, the range of the random number used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation time is set to 0 to 65535.

  When the special figure F is elected and it is in the power support state, when the random number is 0 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to be 150000 ms. That is, 100%, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. In the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is absent and the display is suddenly V display. That is, in fact, SH2 and SH1 are jackpots that do not open, and the game ball does not win a prize in the V area RV, but it is configured to perform an effect of making it appear that a V prize has been made.

  When the special figure F is won and the power is not supplied, the variation time is determined to 45000 ms when the random number is 0 to 65535. That is, 100%, the fluctuation time is determined to 45000 ms. The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set to normal reach. In addition, the frequency of winning the special figure F in a non-electric support state is low, and in that sense it is "rare". As described above, it is more advantageous to aim at the first special figure starting port 230 by left-handing when not using the electric power supply, so there is not much chance for winning in the second special figure starting port 232. If there is, the player dares to hit the right and is elected to hit the popular map, and the second special figure start port 232 is opened and the prize is won.

  When the special figure G, the special figure H or the special figure I is elected and it is in the power support state, when the random number is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 15000 ms. At this time, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is such that there is no change display of the decorative symbol, and only notification of a small hit by sound.

  In the case of a non-power-supply state by winning in the special view G, the special view H or the special view I, when the random number is 0 to 1000, the variation time is determined to 60000 ms. When the random number is 1001 to 59999, the fluctuation time is determined to 80000 ms. When the random number is 60000 to 63999, the fluctuation time is determined to 100000 ms. When the random number is 64000 to 64999, the fluctuation time is determined to 120000 ms. When the random number is 65000 to 65535, the fluctuation time is determined to 140000 ms. In any case, the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 is such that there is no change display of the decorative symbol, and only notification of a small hit by sound.

  In the non-power-supporting state, the frequency of winning in the special drawing G, the special drawing H or the special drawing I is low, and in that sense it is "rare". This is also due to the playability of this embodiment. As described repeatedly, it is more advantageous to aim the first special figure starting port 230 by hitting left when not using the power.

In addition, since the success or failure result of the special figure 2 is almost a small hit, the following method is adopted as a method of reducing the occurrence of the V prize due to the right strike in the non-power support.
○ Increase the fluctuation time of the spread map during non-electric support. In some cases, time efficiency can be reduced and the desire to strike right can be diminished.
O Even if the general drawing is won, it is made difficult to win the second special figure starting port 232 by shortening the opening time of the second special figure starting port 232 to 0.03 seconds.
○ Since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is long and it is different, the player may be difficult to know the opening timing of the attacker 2.
○ The small hit open time of the attacker 2 is set short at the time of non-electric support.
○ Even if the attacker 2 wins, the opening / closing mechanism SH1 is present, and does not always win the V prize.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the special view state update process first performs a special view state update process (special view 2 state update process) for the special view 2 (step SB25). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the stop corresponding to on and off of the above flag The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so as to be in the display mode, and setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of special image F to special image I. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the 15R big hit flag, the spread map probability fluctuation flag is turned on. If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the small hit flag is turned on.

  When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member 234a a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect waiting period is indicated in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for a period displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is finished. Set the information.

  Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. At this time, when the short flag is set to ON, the power is in the support state.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  If the small hit flag is on, the open / close mechanisms SH1 and SH2 are opened. Thereafter, when the V prize winning is realized, the 15R big hit flag is turned on, and the above processing is performed.

  If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is deviated, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Among the processes performed in the special figure 1 state update process, the process when the 15R support jackpot is won is basically the same as the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process described above. The different parts will be briefly described below.

  When the 10R support jackpot is won, the 10R big hit flag and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag are set to ON, and the opening time of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is shortened in 11R to 15R by turning on the 10R big hit flag. When the support big hit is suddenly won, the big hit flag and the common figure probability fluctuation flag are set to on, and the big hit flag is suddenly turned on and the opening time of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is shortened in all rounds. When the 10R big hit is won, the 10R big hit flag is set to ON, and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is not set to ON. There is no case of winning a small hit for Special Figure 1.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB29), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step SB31).

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special pattern variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flag values, timer numbers selected in the special drawing related lottery process, etc. If it is the case, it includes various big hit flag and small hit flag value etc, if it is the case of the prize production command and the end production start command, it includes the value etc of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the big hit round number designated command In this case, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of various big hit flags and small hit flags stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the timer numbers selected in the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, The information which shows the number etc of the 1st special figure fluctuation game which is reserved is set.

  In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags and small hit flag values stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the first pending The information which shows the number of special figure fluctuation game and the like is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, and the first pending The information which shows the number of special figure fluctuation game and the like is set.

  In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of pending first special figure fluctuation games, etc. is set as command data. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of the first special figure fluctuation games held, etc. is set in the command data. Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  At step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set

  In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, and setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 170 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption upon power recovery is saved as return data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SC01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the effect button 136 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 into effect data according to the pressing of the effect button 136. In step SC13, when there is an instruction to VDP 434 among the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step SC19, when there is a command related to driving of the movable body included in the rendering devices 1 to 5 among the effect data read out in SC09, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. At step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  At step SE01 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described at step SC03 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 172 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step SC13 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
The processing of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SG01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step SG03, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. At step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in the SG07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SG11, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first secondary control unit 400 to the movable body included in the rendering devices 1 to 5, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. At step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Progress example of game>
An example of the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. In step S1, the game is started in the non-power support state. In the non-power-supporting state, it is assumed that the player performs a left strike. When winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the variation game (variation display) of the special figure 1 is started in step S2. Such games are repeated until the jackpot is won.

  When the jackpot is won, a jackpot game is performed in step S3. When a big hit occurs in the special view A to the special view C, after the big hit game is over, the power support state is started in step S4. When a big hit occurs in the special view D, after the end of the big hit game, it will be in the non-power support state.

  The power support state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the game is digested. In the power-on state, it is assumed that the player performs a right strike. When the ball passes through the common drawing start port 228, a fluctuation game (variable display) of the common drawing is started in S5. In the case where the common drawing variation game is a hit, the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 is opened and it becomes easy to win. When winning, the variation game (variation display) of the special figure 2 is started. When the special figure F is won, a big hit occurs, and the big hit game of S3 is started. If one of Special figure G to Special figure I is won, it will be a small hit and the process will advance to S7. At S7, the opening / closing mechanism SH2 (the attacker 2) is opened and closed. Subsequently, the open / close mechanism SH1 is opened and closed. As a result, in the case of winning a V, a big hit occurs, and a big hit game of S3 is started. When the ball does not win the V, if the ball passes the regular drawing starting opening 228, the floating game (variable display) of the common drawing is started at S5, and the game proceeds in the same flow. In the present embodiment, if right-handed in the power support state, it is configured so that a big hit by the V prize can be obtained almost certainly before the variation game of 100 times of the special figure ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure A to special figure C wins a big hit, it shifts to the power support state, so the big figure winning in the special figure 2 fluctuation game is expected. Since a big hit occurs when winning a special figure F in the special figure 2 variation game, it is expected that a plurality of big hits will occur in a short period of time. Even if the player does not win the special game F in the special game 2 floating game, the occurrence of a big hit due to the V winning is expected, so it is expected that a plurality of big hits will occur in a short period of time.

<Demonstration device 3>
The rendering device 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 179 to 181. Fig. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 3A provided in the rendering device 3, Fig. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism 3B included in the rendering device 3, Fig. 181 (a) is a front view of the rendering device 3, Fig. 181 (b) Is a rear view of the effect device 3.

  The rendering device 3 includes a movable body 3A and a drive device 3B, and is supported by the drive device 3B being attached to the main body 104. The driving device 3B is an elevating mechanism for moving the movable body 3A up and down. FIGS. 167 and 181 (b) show a state in which the movable body 3A is lowered, and FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 3A is raised.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 3A represents the peripheral portion of the face of the character of the lord. When the movable body 3A is lowered as shown in FIG. 167, although the upper part of the face of the movable body 3A can be visually recognized in front view, the lower side is difficult to visually recognize, but movable as shown in FIG. In the state in which the body 3A is lifted, the entire face of the movable body 3A that has been hidden can be viewed in a front view, and the rendering effect may be improved.

  The movable body 3A includes a support member 31 and a cover member 32. The support member 31 is a part that forms the framework of the movable body 3A, and supports various components. The cover member 32 is disposed so as to cover the front side of the support member 31 and constitutes a design of the peripheral portion of the face of the marion character.

  The movable body 3A is itself configured to include a movable portion. The movable body 3A is provided with a pair of eyebrow members 32a corresponding to the eyebrows of a character like a tent, a pair of eyeball members 32b corresponding to an eyeball, and a pair of eyelid members 32c corresponding to an eyelid. The pair of eyebrow members 32a is a movable member that is rotatably attached to the cover member 32 with the intercostal side as a rotation center and is rotated by a drive mechanism including the pair of motors M31. The pair of eyeball members 32b is a movable member which is pivotable to change the line of sight direction to the left, right, up and down by a drive mechanism including the motors M32 and M33. The pair of eyelid members 32c is a movable member that opens and closes the pair of eyeball members 32b by a drive mechanism including the pair of motors M34. Due to the movement of these movable members, the movable body 3A exposes various expressions, and in some cases, the rendering effect can be improved.

  The drive mechanism 3B is a mechanism which moves in parallel up and down while supporting the movable body 3A. The moving form of the movable body 3A may be rotation, lateral movement, or the like in addition to raising and lowering.

  The drive mechanism 3B includes a support member 33 and a support plate 34 fixed on the front side of the support member 33. Various components can be assembled with the support member 33 and the support plate 34 as a framework.

  The support member 33 is a U-shaped member integrally provided with the left side portion 33a, the right side portion 33b and the bottom portion 33c, and the bottom portion 33c is formed with openings 33d and 33e spaced apart in the left-right direction. There is. In the case of this embodiment, the periphery of the opening 33 e is a closed hole, and the opening 33 d is a notch. The support plate 34 is fixed to the support member 33 so as to close the front of the support member 33, and an opening 34a is formed in the lower portion thereof. In the case of this embodiment, the opening 34a is a notch.

  The opening 33d and the opening 34a constitute a ball removing hole H1, and the opening 33e constitutes a ball removing hole H2. Although the ball does not enter the rendering device 3 during the game, the ball may enter the rendering device 3 at the time of maintenance or at an accidental event. Since the rendering device 3 is a movable mechanism provided with the movable body 3A, malfunction may occur if a ball exists inside. By providing the ball removal holes H1 and H2, even if a ball enters into the rendering device 3, it may be possible to discharge it naturally out of the rendering device 3. In particular, since the ball removal holes H1 and H2 are formed spaced apart to the left and right, the ball may be more reliably discharged without being influenced by the position of the ball in the rendering device 3. The bottom 33c of the support member 33 is formed with an inclined portion 33f communicating with the ball removal hole H1. The inclined portion 33f is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the ball removal hole H1 and may improve the discharge performance of the ball. Although not shown, the bottom 33c of the support member 33 is formed with a similar inclined portion passing through the ball removal hole H2.

  The drive mechanism 3B is provided with a slide mechanism that allows the movable body 31A to slide up and down. The rail RL is fixed to the support member 33 and the support plate 34 via the metal fitting 35a inside the left side portion 33a of the support member 33, and the rail RR via the metal fitting 35b inside the right side portion 33b of the support member 33. Are fixed to the support member 33 and the support plate 34. The rails RL and RR are rail members extended in the vertical direction. The slider SL is fixed to the support member 31 of the movable body 3A via the metal fitting 31b. The slider SL engages with the rail RL and slides up and down by the guide of the rail RL. The slider SR is fixed to the support member 31 of the movable body 3A via the metal fitting 31c. The slider SR engages with the rail RR and slides up and down by the guidance of the rail RR.

  By these configurations, the movable body 31A is supported by the support member 33 so as to be slidable up and down. In the combination of the rail RL and the slider SL, the normal direction of the virtual slide surface points in the d2 direction, and in the combination of the rail RR and the slider SR, the normal direction of the virtual slide surface points in the d1 direction These are assembled. That is, the virtual slide planes are not parallel but in an orthogonal arrangement. With such a configuration, it may be possible to move the movable body 3A in the vertical direction (d3 direction) while enhancing the support rigidity in the d1 direction and d2 direction, and the pachinko machine 100 may be hit or shaken. Even in this case, the occurrence of a defect in the rendering device 3 may be prevented.

  The drive mechanism 3B raises and lowers the movable body 3A using the motor M35 as a drive source. The motor M35 is fixed to the back side of the support member 38, and the support member 38 is fixed to the support plate 34. Links 36 and 37 are rotatably supported by different supporting members 38. The link 36 has an opening 36a at one end into which the pivot shaft is inserted, and an engagement part 36b at the other end that engages with the engagement member 31a fixed to the lower part of the support member 31 of the movable body 3A There is. The engaging portion 36 b is a pin, and the engaging member 31 a has an elongated hole through which the pin is inserted. A long hole 36 c is formed in the middle of the link 36.

  The link 37 is a toothed arm member having an opening 37a into which the pivot shaft is inserted and having a series of teeth 37 on the outer periphery centering on the opening 37a. The teeth 37 mesh with a pinion gear M35a attached to the output shaft of the motor M35, and the driving force of the motor M35 is transmitted to the link 37. At the end of the link 37, an engaging portion 37c is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the engaging portion 37c is a pin inserted into the long hole 36c, and the engagement between them causes the link 36 to rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the link 37, and the link 36 is further rotated. The movable body 3A moves up and down in conjunction with the movement.

<Demonstration device 4>
The rendering device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side effect device 4. The right-side rendering device 4 has a symmetrical structure with the left-side rendering device 4 and will not be described.

  The rendering device 4 is a lighting device, and includes light guiding members 41 to 43, cover members 46a to 46c, a reflecting member 44, and an LED substrate 45. The light guide members 41 to 43 are plate-like members, and on the surface thereof, a minute pattern P for reflecting light is engraved. The light guide members 41 to 43 are stacked at a small distance in the depth direction, and cover members 46a to 46c are disposed on the front side, and a reflection member 44 is disposed on the rear side.

  The cover members 46 a to 46 c are arranged to cover a part of the left end of the laminate of the light guide members 41 to 43. The reflecting member 44 is a plate-like member that reflects light.

  The LED substrate 45 is disposed on the left side of the laminate of the light guide members 41 to 43, and mounts a plurality of LEDs corresponding to the light guide members 41 to 43 individually.

  The light of the LED for the light guide member 41 enters the light guide member 41 from the left side surface 41a of the light guide member 41, propagates while being repeatedly reflected in the light guide member 41, is reflected by the pattern P, and is emitted forward. . Therefore, when the LED for the light guide member 41 emits light, the pattern P of the light guide member 41 appears to emit light more strongly.

  Similarly, the light of the LED for the light guide member 42 enters the light guide member 43 from the left side surface 42a of the light guide member 42, propagates while being repeatedly reflected in the light guide member 42, is reflected by the pattern P, and is front side Emit to Therefore, when the LED for the light guide member 42 emits light, the pattern P of the light guide member 42 appears to emit light more strongly.

  Similarly, the light of the LED for the light guide member 43 enters the light guide member 43 from the left side surface 43a of the light guide member 43, propagates while being repeatedly reflected in the light guide member 43, is reflected by the pattern P, and is front side Emit to Therefore, when the LED for the light guide member 43 emits light, the pattern P of the light guide member 43 appears to emit light more strongly.

  The patterns P of the light guide members 41 to 43 are designed to be different from each other, and in the case of the present embodiment, the patterns have fireworks as a motif. When light from the LED is made incident on the light guide member in the order of the light guide member 43 → the light guide member 42 → the light guide member 41, fireworks appear to spread.

By disposing the LED substrate 45 on the side of the light guide members 41 to 43 in this manner, the presence of the LED substrate 45 may not be noticeable in a front view, and the light guide does not have a light source when viewed from the player. Since the members 41 to 43 appear to glow, there may be cases where unexpected effects can be performed. Moreover, the space of the periphery of the main body 104 may be able to be used effectively. Furthermore, by laminating the light guide members 41 to 43 in the depth direction, the light guide members to be illuminated are switched from one another in the same place by switching light guide members. Because the pattern appears to float up, it may be possible to make a more surprising rendition.

<Effect device 5>
The rendering device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The rendering devices 5 are respectively disposed behind the left and right rendering devices 4. FIG. 183 to FIG. 187 are explanatory diagrams of the rendering device 5 on the left side. The right-side rendering device 5 is symmetrical to the left-side rendering device 5 and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The rendering device 5 is a movable mechanism in which a plurality of movable bodies having wings as a motif are interlocked and developed, and an outline thereof will be described first. FIG. 186 (a) is a front view of the rendering device 5 before deployment. In this state, the rendering device 5 is located behind the rendering device 4 and the whole is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the whole in front view, and the right side portion is made visible to a visible diagonal. FIG. 186 (a) is a front view of the rendering device 5 before deployment. In this state, the rendering device 5 is located behind the rendering device 4 and the whole is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the whole in front view, and the right side portion is made visible to a visible diagonal. FIG. 187 (c) is a front view of the rendering device 5 after expansion. In this state, a movable body having a blade as a motif is generally visible.

  Details of the rendering device 5 will be described. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the effect device 5, mainly showing the structure of the movable unit 50. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 184 and 185 are exploded perspective views of the rendering device 5, mainly showing a drive mechanism for moving the movable unit 50. FIG. FIGS. 186 and 187 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the rendering device 5, and show the movable aspect of the movable unit 50 in order.

  The rendering device 5 includes a movable unit 50 and a support member 53, and the movable unit 50 is rotatably supported by the support member 53. The rendering device 5 is attached to the main body 104 by the support member 53.

  The movable unit 50 includes a plurality of movable bodies 52A to 52C and a support unit 51. The movable bodies 52A to 52C are arranged in the d1 direction such that the movable body 52A is at the forefront, the movable body 52C is at the rear, and the movable body 52B is at the middle.

  The movable bodies 52A to 52C are each a laminated body in which a decorative body 52a having a design of a blade, an LED substrate 52b, and a back plate 52c are laminated, and a wiring harness 52d is connected to the LED substrate 52b. There is. At least a part of the decorative body 52a is formed with a translucent portion, and the decorative body 52a emits light when the LED mounted on the LED substrate 52b emits light.

  In the movable bodies 52A to 52C, openings 52ah through which the shaft 56c is inserted are respectively formed, and are rotatable about the shaft 56c as a common rotation center axis. Engaging portions 52e are formed on the movable bodies 52B and 52C, respectively. The engaging portion 52e is formed on the top of the decorative body 52a adjacent to the opening 52ah and protrudes to the front side. The engaging portion 52e of the movable body 52B is provided to be engageable with the back of the movable body 52A, and is engaged with the back of the movable body 52A when the amount of rotation of the movable body 52A around the shaft 56c reaches a certain amount. The movable body 52B also pivots about the shaft 56c. The engaging portion 52e of the movable body 52C is provided to be engageable with the back of the movable body 52B, and is engaged with the back of the movable body 52B when the amount of rotation of the movable body 52B around the shaft 56c reaches a certain amount. The movable body 52C also pivots about the shaft 56c.

  The support unit 51 includes a stacked body in which the support member 51a, the LED substrate 51b, and the decorative body 51d are stacked. This laminate is located at the back of the plurality of movable bodies 52A to 52C. The decorative body 51d has a design of a blade, and at least a part of the decorative body 51d is formed with a translucent portion, and the decorative body 51d is configured to emit light by the light emission of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 51b. There is.

  The support unit 51 includes a side member 51c constituting a right side portion and an upper member 54 constituting an upper portion, which are fixed to the support member 51a. The side member 51c is located on the right side of the plurality of movable bodies 52A to 52C.

  Openings 51ah and 54a through which the shaft 56c is inserted are formed in the support member 51a and the upper member 54, and the support unit 51 rotatably supports the movable bodies 52A to 52C via the shaft 56c.

  The support unit 51 is rotatably supported by the support member 53 via the pivot support member 53a. That is, the movable unit 50 is supported by the pivot support member 53a so as to be rotatable around the rotation axis in the d1 direction, and the plurality of movable bodies 52A to 52C are supported by the support unit 51 by the shaft 56c. It is rotatably supported individually around the rotation axis.

  The movable unit 50 is entirely rotated by a drive mechanism including a motor M52. The motor M52 is attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the support member 51a, and transmits its driving force to the movable unit 50 via a gear mechanism.

  The movable body 52A is rotated by a drive mechanism including a motor M51. In the case of this embodiment, this drive mechanism is configured to rotate the movable body 52A by winding up a wire W such as a yarn or a wire. The motor M51 is attached to the front upper portion of the support member 51a, and the driving force of the motor M51 is transmitted to the pulley 55c provided on the back upper portion of the support member 51a via the gear mechanism. One end of the wire W is fixed to the pulley 55c, and the wire W can be rolled up by its rotation. The wire W is wound around a plurality of rollers and extends from the lower portion to the middle portion of the support member 51a, and the other end is fixed to a pulley 55a provided in the front middle portion of the support member 51a.

  A pinion gear is coaxially provided on the pulley 55a, and this pinion gear meshes with the gear 55b. The gear 55b meshes with a series of teeth provided at one end of the lever member 56a. A shaft 56c is inserted through one end of the lever member 56a, the lever member 56a is rotatable around the shaft 56c, and a series of tooth portions meshing with the gear 55b is formed concentric with the shaft 56c. One end of a pin 56b is fixed to the other end of the lever member 56a. The other end of the pin 56b is fixed to the back of the decoration 52a of the movable body 52A. With the above configuration, the lever member 56a is rotated by the winding and rewinding operations of the wire W by the drive of the motor M51, whereby the movable body 52A is rotated about the shaft 56c.

  The expansion operation of the rendering device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187. FIGS. 186 (a), (b) and (d) are front views, and FIGS. 186 (c) and (e) show the movable unit 50 in the state of FIGS. 186 (b) and (d), respectively. It is a rear view of. FIGS. 187 (a) and (c) are front views, and FIGS. 187 (b) and (d) are rear views of the movable unit 50 in the state of FIGS. 187 (a) and (c), respectively. In each of these drawings, the illustration of a part of the configuration may be omitted for the purpose of making the operation easy to understand.

  FIG. 186 (a) shows a state before deployment. By driving the motor M52 in this state, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), the entire movable unit 50 is rotated clockwise in the figure. At this time, as can be understood from FIG. 186 (c), the movable bodies 52A to 52C and the decorative body 51d overlap each other in the d1 direction.

  In the state of FIG. 186 (b), the motor M51 is driven to wind up the wire W. As a result, as shown in FIG. 186 (d), the movable body 52A starts to rotate clockwise in the figure around the shaft 56c. In the initial stage of rotation of the movable body 52A, as can be understood from FIG. 186 (e), the movable bodies 52B and 52C do not rotate.

  When the amount of rotation of the movable body 52A reaches a certain amount, the engaging portion 52e of the movable body 52B engages with the back of the movable body 52A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and 187 (b), the movable body 52B also starts to rotate clockwise in the same figure around the shaft 56c.

  Further, when the amount of rotation of the movable body 52A reaches a certain amount, the engaging portion 52e of the movable body 52C engages with the back of the movable body 52B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 187 (c) and (d), the movable body 52C is also turned clockwise in the same figure around the shaft 56c.

  In this manner, the movable bodies 52B and 52C rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the movable body 52A, whereby the developed state shown in FIG. 187 (c) is obtained.

  By performing the expansion operation of the rendering device 5, when viewed from the player, the blade hidden behind the rendering device 4 may be suddenly opened and seen, and the rendering effect may be enhanced.

<Ball entry unit U1>
The ball entry unit U1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 to 193. First, the outline of the ball entry unit U1 will be described with reference to FIG. 190 (a). The ball entry unit U1 is a unit into which the game balls having flowed down the game area 124 (flow area) can enter and is a unit integrally including a plurality of winning openings or winning areas. Specifically, the ball entry unit U1 is provided with a variable prize hole 234 (the attacker 1), a general prize hole 226, a prize hole (the attacker 2) configured with the opening / closing mechanism SH2, a V area RV, and a prize ball area RH. ing.

  The variable winning opening 234 is a rotating winning opening that is opened and closed by the rotation of the door member 234a. The opening and closing mechanism SH2 is a shutter type winning opening that is opened and closed by parallel movement of the opening and closing member 62, and opens and closes the passage RT1 of the gaming ball. The passage RT1 is a passage inclined downward in the d2 direction, and in the case of the present embodiment, the passage is high on the right side and low on the left side, and the gaming ball entering the passage RT1 rolls to the left by its own weight. When the opening and closing member 62 is open, the gaming ball can enter the passage RT1. When the opening and closing member 62 is closed, the gaming ball can not enter the passage RT1 and the upper side (upper surface) of the opening and closing member 62 is the bottom. The ball passes through the passage RT0 of the ball and flows down the entrance unit U1.

  The opening and closing mechanism SH1 is a shutter type mechanism that is opened and closed by parallel movement of the opening and closing member 63, and opens and closes the passage RT2 of the gaming ball. The passage RT2 is a passage in the d3 direction, and is a passage through which only the gaming balls having passed the passage RT1 can pass. The game ball entering the passage RT2 enters the V region RV by its own weight. As described above, when a game ball enters the V region RV, a V hit is made and a big hit occurs.

  When the opening and closing member 63 is open, the gaming ball can enter the passage RT2, and when closed, the gaming ball can not enter the passage RT2 and the upper side (upper surface) of the opening and closing member 63 is the bottom The ball passes through the passage of the ball, enters the passage RT3 of the gaming ball, and enters the winning ball area RH. The passage RT3 is also a passage through which only the gaming balls having passed the passage RT1 can pass. When the game ball enters the winning ball area RH, there is a winning ball but no V prize.

  Fig. 188 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball entry unit U1, and Fig. 188 (b) is a perspective view of the ball entry unit U1 (a view seen from the upper side through the decorative member 61). Fig. 189 (a) is a partial perspective view of the inside of the ball entry unit U1, and Figs. 189 (b) and 189 (c) are a plan view and a left side view of a tip end portion of the opening / closing member 63. 190 (b) and 190 (c) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 190 (a), and FIG. 190 (b) shows the case where the opening and closing members 62 and 63 are both open. ) Shows the case where the opening and closing members 62 and 63 are both closed. FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b) are comparative views of the clearance in the closed state of the opening and closing members 62, 63. FIG. FIGS. 192A and 192B are explanatory views of the contact portion 65. FIG. 193 (a) to (c) show the ball bite in the closed state of the opening and closing member 62 and its preventing structure.

  The ball entry unit U1 includes a support member 60 and a decoration member 61. The support member 60 forms a framework of the ball entry unit U1, and the components are assembled to the support member 60, and also constitute a side wall portion on the back side of the passages RT0 to RT3 and a bottom wall portion. The decoration member 61 is a member for closing the front side of the ball entry unit U1, and is made of, for example, a transparent member so that movement of a ball can be visually recognized. The decorative member 61 includes a decorative surface 61A forming the front and a back surface 61B forming the back. A picture or the like of the character of the pachinko machine 100 is applied to the decoration surface 61A to give a decorative effect. In the case of the present embodiment, the back surface 61B of the decorative member 61 constitutes a side wall portion on the front side of the passages RT0 to RT3. The back surface 61B includes a wall 61a constituting a side wall of the passage RT1 on the front side and a wall 61b constituting a side wall of the passage RT2 on the front side. Thus, the number of parts may be reduced by configuring the wall portions of the plurality of passages with the common decorative member 61. Further, the decorative member 61 is not only configured to exhibit the decorative effect but is also a member for forming the wall portion It can be used as

  The door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is pivoted by a drive mechanism including a drive source 234b. In the case of the present embodiment, the drive source 234 b is an electromagnetic solenoid and is disposed on the back side of the support member 60. The ball entry unit U1 is miniaturized by arranging it in the space on the back side.

  The opening and closing member 62 is a plate-like member capable of advancing and retreating in the d1 direction with respect to the wall portion 61a, and the driving is performed by a driving mechanism including a driving source (SOL2 in FIG. 194). In the case of this embodiment, the drive source is an electromagnetic solenoid, and is disposed on the back side of the support member 60. The ball entry unit U1 is miniaturized by arranging it in the space on the back side.

  The opening / closing member 62 is slightly high on the right side from the horizontal posture, and is in a posture for promoting rolling of the gaming ball from the right to the left. The opening and closing member 62 is a member for opening and closing a part of the opening of the bottom wall of the passage RT1 formed by the support member 60, and in the open state, the opening is opened to enable guiding the gaming ball to the passage RT1. In the closed state, the opening is closed to prevent the game ball from entering the passage RT1. In the closed state, the upper side (upper surface) of the opening / closing member 62 constitutes the bottom wall portion of the passage RT1. That is, the opening and closing member 62 also functions as a passage wall forming member.

  The opening and closing member 63 is a plate-like member capable of advancing and retreating in the d1 direction with respect to the wall portion 61b, and the driving is performed by a driving mechanism including a driving source SOL1. In the case of the present embodiment, the drive source SOL1 is an electromagnetic solenoid and is disposed on the back side of the support member 60. The ball entry unit U1 is miniaturized by arranging it in the space on the back side.

  The opening / closing member 63 is slightly higher on the right side than the horizontal posture, and is configured to promote rolling of the gaming ball from the right to the left. In the open state, the opening / closing member 63 can guide the gaming ball to the passage RT2, and in the closed state, close the passage RT2 to block the entry of the gaming ball to the passage RT2 and guide the gaming ball to the passage RT3 Do. That is, in the closed state, the open / close member 63 constitutes the bottom wall portion of the passage for guiding the gaming ball to the passage RT3 at the upper side (upper surface) thereof, and also functions as the passage wall forming member.

  A ball detection sensor 64A is disposed in the passage RT1. The ball detection sensor 64A is a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the passage RT1, and in the case of this embodiment, is a sensor having an opening through which the game ball can pass. The ball detection sensor 64A is located downstream of the opening and closing member 62 and upstream of the opening and closing member 63 in the flow direction of the gaming ball.

  When the opening and closing member 63 is in the closed state, the gaming ball detected by the ball detection sensor 64A passes above the opening and closing member 63 and is guided to the passage RT3. Here, since the internal space of the ball entry unit U1 is small, backflow of the game balls may occur, and it may be necessary to prevent this. In the present embodiment, the distance L1 from the end of the ball detection sensor 63A to the start of the open / close member 63 in the closed state in the flow direction of the gaming ball is a distance smaller than one gaming ball.

  For this reason, it may be possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting of the gaming ball between the start end of the opening / closing member 63 and the end of the ball detection sensor 64A, and the gaming ball flows back to the ball detection sensor 63A side by ball biting It may be possible to prevent the passage of one game ball from being detected twice. The distance L1 is preferably 3/4 or less, more preferably 1/2 or less of the diameter of the gaming ball. In recent years, the proportion occupied in the game area such as the decorative symbol display device and the movable body has been increasing, and it has become difficult to secure the space of the winning device. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance L1, but this is not the case when the installation space for the winning device is sufficiently secured.

  A ball detection sensor 64B is disposed in the passage RT2. The ball detection sensor 64B is a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the passage RT2, and in the case of the present embodiment, is a sensor having an opening through which the game ball can pass. When passage of the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor 64B, it is determined that there is a V prize.

  A ball detection sensor 64C is disposed in the passage RT3. The ball detection sensor 64C is a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the passage RT3, and in the case of this embodiment, is a sensor having an opening through which the game ball can pass. When passage of the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor 64C, the provision of the winning ball is determined. When the gaming ball is guided to the passage RT2 rather than being guided to the passage RT3, a more advantageous state is given to the player.

  Only the game ball which passed passage RT1 passes passage RT2 and RT3. Therefore, the number of gaming balls detected by the ball detection sensor 64B and the ball detection sensor 64C matches the number of gaming balls detected by the ball detection sensor 64A. If they do not match, there is a possibility of failure or cheating, so error processing can be performed. As described above, the ball detection sensors 64A to 64C may be used also as confirmation sensors for the number of passing balls. In the case of a configuration in which the number of passing balls is not confirmed, it is possible to omit the ball detection sensor 64A.

  Aspects of the open state and the closed state of the opening and closing members 62 and 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 190 (b) shows the open state of the opening and closing members 62 and 63. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, although control which the opening-and-closing member 63 opens after closing of the opening-and-closing member 62 is assumed, there may be a period when both open simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the opening and closing member 62 is in the open state, the opening and closing member 62 is separated from the wall portion 61a and positioned behind the front surface of the support member 60. The ball is open for passage. When the opening and closing member 63 is in the open state, the opening and closing member 62 is spaced apart from the wall portion 61b and positioned behind the front surface of the support member 60, and the passage RT2 is opened to allow passage of gaming balls.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (c), when the opening and closing member 62 is in the closed state, the leading end in the advancing direction of the opening and closing member 62 is in contact with the wall 61a, and the passage RT1 is closed with the game ball disabled. It is done. Since the V region RV and the winning ball region RH are reserved on the downstream side of the opening / closing member 62 in the flow direction of the ball, it is highly important to prevent the entry of unauthorized devices to the passage RT1. By bringing the end of the opening and closing member 62 into contact with the wall portion 61a, it may be possible to prevent the entry of unauthorized equipment or the like.

  When the opening and closing member 63 is in the closed state, although the opening and closing member 62 protrudes toward the wall 61b, the tip in the advancing direction is separated from the wall 61b, and a gap W1 is formed between them. ing. The clearance W1 is a clearance where the gaming balls do not pass through the passage RT2, and therefore the passage RT2 is closed so that the gaming balls can not pass.

  The opening and closing member 63 is disposed at an important part that determines the establishment of the V winning, and it is preferable to avoid the biting of the ball here as much as possible. By forming the gap W1 even in the closed state, it may be possible to prevent the ball from being caught by the gaming ball between the opening / closing member 63 and the wall portion 61b. That is, even when the game ball is positioned between the open / close member 63 and the wall portion 61b when the open / close member 63 shifts from the open state to the closed state, the degree of pinching becomes small and the game ball is Pressure can be reduced, and it may be possible to prevent clogging due to ball biting. The gap W1 is preferably 1/4 or more of the diameter of the gaming ball, may be 1/2 or more, and is preferably 3/4 or less.

  The gap W1 need not be a uniform gap in the flow direction of the ball, and the maximum gap may be a gap where the gaming ball does not pass through the passage RT2. Therefore, the tip end of the opening / closing member 63 and the wall 61b may be in partial contact with each other, and the gap may be partially absent. Further, the gap is not limited to the space between the tip of the opening and closing member 63 and the wall 61b, and may be formed around the opening and closing member 63 depending on the configuration of the passage.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190 (b), the opening / closing member 62 is in a closed state and does not form a gap, but a configuration in which a gap is formed can also be adopted. FIG. 191 (a) shows an example, and shows an aspect of each of the open / close member 62 and the open / close member 63 in the closed state. As for the open / close member 63, as in the example of FIG. 190 (c), a gap W1 is formed between the tip end portion and the wall portion 61b. Also in the opening and closing member 62, a gap W2 in which the gaming ball does not pass through the passage RT1 is formed between the tip end and the wall 61a. By forming the gap W2, it may be possible to prevent the bite of the opening and closing member 62 and the wall portion 61a from being bitten.

  In the example of FIG. 191 (a), the relationship between the gap W1 and the gap W2 is W1> W2. Since the opening and closing member 62 is on the outer side than the opening and closing member 63, an unauthorized person may easily access it. Therefore, by making the gap W2 relatively small, it may be possible to prevent ball biting while preventing cheating. Since the opening and closing member 63 is inside, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to access. Therefore, there are cases where ball biting can be prevented more reliably by making the gap W1 relatively large.

  The relationship between the gap W1 and the gap W2 can also be W1 <W2. FIG. 191 (b) shows an example thereof. This configuration example can be adopted, for example, in the case where the opening / closing member 63 is more easily accessed by an unauthorized person than the opening / closing member 62.

  The gap W2 does not have to be a uniform gap in the flow direction of the ball, and the maximum gap may be a gap where the gaming ball does not pass through the passage RT1. Therefore, the tip end of the opening / closing member 62 and the wall 61b may be partially in contact with each other and the gap may be partially eliminated. Further, the gap is not limited to between the tip of the opening and closing member 62 and the wall 61a, and may be formed around the opening and closing member 62 depending on the configuration of the passage.

  Next, another function of the opening and closing member 63 for preventing the ball catching will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 (b) and 189 (c). FIG. 189 (b) is a plan view of the tip end side of the opening / closing member 63, and FIG. 189 (c) is a view of the opening / closing member 63 viewed from the left side (a view seen from the downstream side in the flow direction of the game balls). .

  The shape of the distal end portion side of the opening / closing member 63 is substantially rectangular in a plan view, and has an upper surface 63a, a right side surface 63b, a left side surface 63c, and a front end surface 63d, and between the front end surface 63d and the left side 63c It has an inclined surface 63e. The right side surface 63b is the upstream side surface and the left side surface 63c is the downstream side surface in the flow direction of the gaming balls. The upper surface 63a forms a bottom wall of a passage that guides the gaming ball to the passage RT in the closed state.

  The end surface 63d has an inclination in which the thickness of the opening / closing member 63 becomes thinner toward the end in the opening / closing direction. In other words, the tip of the opening and closing member 63 is tapered. This may prevent the occurrence of ball bites by reducing the contact area when the ball contacts the gaming ball. Also, since the line end face 63d is an inclined surface with the front side up and the back side down in the d1 direction, the game ball can be guided downward (to the V region RV side) when it is likely to bite the ball. May be prevented.

  The inclined surface 63e is inclined so that the gap W1 spreads toward the downstream side in the flow direction of the gaming ball (this may be referred to as enlarged inclination), and the thickness is increased toward the end similarly to the tip end surface 63d. It has an inclination to make it thinner. By having the enlargement inclination, when it is likely to bite on the downstream side of the opening / closing member 63, the gaming ball can be guided to the downstream side (toward the winning ball area RH side) without causing the game ball to flow backward. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball bites.

  Next, the configuration of the contact portion 65 for preventing ball catching will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 (b) and 192 (a) and 192 (b). As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the contact portion 65 is disposed between the passage RT2 and the passage RT3. When the open / close member 63 changes from the open state to the closed state, the ball biting is prevented to The configuration is intended to be distributed to the passage RT2 or the passage RT3. 192 (a) and 192 (b) are the schematic diagrams which looked at the opening-and-closing member 63 and the contact part 65 from the front upper side.

  When the opening and closing member 63 changes from the open state to the closed state, that is, when the opening and closing member 63 approaches the wall portion 61 b, ball catching easily occurs. The contact portion 65 may be able to prevent the occurrence of ball bite in such a situation. As shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), the right side 65a and the left side 65b at the upper end of the contact portion 65 are inclined surfaces, and a mountain shape to which these are connected at the top 65c I am The top 65 c may be sharp or spherical for the purpose of reducing the contact area with the gaming ball. The right side surface 65a is on the upstream side and the left side surface 65b is on the downstream side in the flow direction of the gaming balls. The right side surface 65a is steeper than the left side surface 65b.

  The boundary 63f between the tip end surface 63d of the opening / closing member 63 and the inclined surface 63e is located at a position shifted in the left-right direction (flowing direction of the game ball) with respect to the top 65c. In the present embodiment, the boundary 63f is the top 65c. It is located upstream.

  FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the game ball is in contact with the inclined surface 63e when the opening / closing member 63 approaches the wall 61b. In this case, the gaming ball is sandwiched between the inclined surface 63e and the top 65c and becomes unstable by being pushed to the left (downstream side) by the inclined surface 63e, and guided by the left side 65b May be guided to

  FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the tip end surface 63d when the opening / closing member 63 approaches the wall portion 61b. In this case, the gaming ball is held in an unstable state between the end face 63d and the top 65c and pushed downward by the end face 63d, and guided to the lower right (that is, the passage RT2) by the guidance of the right side 65b. May be Since the right side surface 65b is steeply inclined, it may be possible to promote the game ball to fall downward without backflow.

  Thus, the contact portion 65 may be able to more reliably guide the gaming ball to the V area RV or the winning ball area RH while preventing the bite.

  Next, the configuration of the wall portion 61a for preventing the bite of the ball will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c). 193 (a) to 193 (c) are longitudinal cross-sectional views along the cutting line passing through the opening and closing member 62. FIG. FIG. 193 (a) schematically shows a state in which a bite occurs. When the gaming ball is pinched between the end of the opening and closing member 62 and the wall portion 61a as shown in FIG.

  In order to prevent this, as shown in FIG. 193 (b) and FIG. 193 (c), a convex portion 61 c is formed on the wall portion 61 a. The convex portion 62c protrudes from the wall portion 61a to the opening / closing member 62 side. The convex portion 61c is located above the tip of the opening and closing member 62, and the tip of the opening and closing member 62 is in a position where it can contact the gaming ball in a state of contacting the gaming ball.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the gaming ball is pinched between the end of the opening / closing member 62 and the wall 61a, the convex portion 61c contacts the gaming ball from above. As a result, the gaming ball receives a downward force and is likely to fall into the passage RT1, which may prevent the occurrence of the bite.

<Passage structure regarding ball entry unit U1>
The passage structure of the gaming ball related to the ball entry unit U1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ball entry unit U1 is provided with the variable winning opening 234 (attacker 1), the opening / closing mechanism SH2 (attacker 2), and the general winning opening 226, and the gaming balls won for these are returned to the gaming area 124. In order to be guided to the back side of the game board 200 and discharged to the game island side without the passage of the game ball, a passage of the game ball is required.

  FIG. 194 (a) is an explanatory view of a mounting structure of the ball entry unit U1. The ball entry unit U1 is detachably attachable from the front side of the game board 200. In the case of the present embodiment, the mounting structure of the ball entry unit U1 is such that the screws N are respectively inserted into the holes provided at a plurality of locations on the peripheral portion of the support member 60 and the screws N are screwed to the main body 201 of the game board 200 It is a structure to fix.

  FIG. 194 (b) is a rear view of the lower right portion of the game board 200 with the ball entry unit U1 removed. In the figure, the configuration related to the passage of the game ball is shaded for the purpose of making it easy to understand visually.

  The main body 201 is formed with an opening 205 which penetrates the main body 201, and the entrance unit U1 is attached to the main body 201 so as to close the opening, and when the entrance unit U1 is removed, the opening 205 It will be exposed. In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 205 is a single opening, but since the passage member 206 passes behind it, it looks as if it is divided up and down when viewed from the back from the side . In FIG. 194 (b), two reference numerals indicating the openings 205 are attached, but these are continuous single openings.

  A passage member 66 is provided on the back of the ball entry unit U1. The passage member 66 is a member that forms a passage RT4 through which the game ball entering the variable winning hole 234 can pass, and in the case of this embodiment, is a transparent member. The gaming ball entering the variable winning hole 234 passes through the passage RT4 and is discharged from the outlet 66a formed at the end of the passage member 66 to the outside of the passage RT4. The outlet 66a opens downward, and the gaming balls fall downward from the outlet 66a and are discharged.

  The passage RT4 may be provided on the main body 201 side of the game board 200. However, by providing the passage RT4 on the ball entry unit U1 side, it becomes detachable from the front side of the game board 200 together with the ball entry unit U1. For this reason, there is a case where maintenance or the like of the passage RT4 can be performed by removing the ball entry unit U1. Further, since there is no passage RT4 on the side of the main body 201, there are cases where the area on the rear side of the passage RT4 can be used effectively.

  A ball detection sensor 64D is disposed in a middle part of the passage RT4. The ball detection sensor 64D is a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the passage RT4, that is, detects the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234. When removing the ball entry unit U1, since there are cases where the game balls staying in the passage RT4 may spill, they enter the variable winning opening 234 because they are game balls that have been detected by the ball detection sensor 64D. In some cases, it is possible to detect the game ball without leak and prevent the player from being disadvantageous.

  An outlet RT2a of the passage RT2 and an outlet RT3a of the passage RT3 are disposed below the rear surface of the ball entry unit U1. The outlets RT2a and 3a open downward, and the gaming balls having passed through the V region RV and the winning sphere region RH fall downward from the outlet RT2a or the outlet 3a and are discharged.

  A magnetic sensor SR4 is disposed on the back upper right portion of the ball entry unit U1. When the magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor SR4, an error process (for example, notification by an image or a sound, a game stop which makes the continuation of the game impossible, etc.) can be performed. The magnetic sensor SR4 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a vibration sensor.

  The magnetic sensor SR4 is locked by the low head screw TN. The low head screw TN is screwed on the back surface of the support member 60 of the ball entry unit U1, and the magnetic sensor SR4 is locked so as to be sandwiched between the head periphery of the low head screw TN and the back surface of the support member 60. In the case of this embodiment, since the passage (RT11) of the game ball entering the general winning opening 226 is provided on the main body 201 side of the game board 300, the magnetic sensor SR4 is disposed utilizing the empty space. There is. Since the magnetic sensor SR4 is also detachable from the main body 201 together with the ball entry unit U1, maintenance and the like may be facilitated.

  A passage member 206 is disposed on the back of the main body 201. The passage member 206 is a member integrally forming the passages RT11 and RT12 of the game ball, and in the case of this embodiment, it is a transparent member. The passage member 206 is configured to be detachable from the rear side of the main body 201 by a screw, and maintenance of the passage member 206 may be possible from the rear side of the game board 200 in some cases.

  The passage RT11 is a passage for discharging the game ball entering the general winning opening 226. The passage RT12 is a passage for discharging the game balls discharged from the passage RT4.

  The passage member 206 is disposed across the opening 205. Therefore, when the ball entry unit U1 is removed, at least a part of the passage RT11 and the passage RT12 can be viewed from the front side of the gaming board 200. For this reason, a hall clerk may easily check the passage RT11 and the passage RT12. The passage RT11 and the passage RT12 may be configured such that when the ball entry unit U1 is removed, the whole of the passage RT11 and the passage RT12 may be visible or a part may be visible. In the present embodiment, the passage RT11 and the like can be viewed from the front by providing the opening 205. However, any configuration may be used as long as the passage RT11 and the like can be viewed from the front.

  The passage member 206 includes two inlets 206a and 206b, one outlet 206d, and a junction 206c at which the passage RT11 and the passage RT12 merge. Conceptually, the range of the passage RT11 may be from the inlet 206a to the outlet 206d, or from the inlet 206a to the junction 206c. Similarly, the range of the passage RT12 may be from the inlet 206b to the outlet 206d, or from the inlet 206b to the junction 206c. Conceptually, the passage RT11 and the passage RT12 may be separated from the junction 206c to the outlet 206d.

  When the ball entry unit U1 is attached, the inlet 206a is aligned with the general winning opening 226, and the gaming balls entering the general winning opening 226 are discharged from the inlet 206a through the passage RT11 and exited from the outlet 206d. A ball detection sensor 208 is disposed in the middle of the passage RT11. The ball detection sensor 208 is a sensor that detects a game ball passing through the passage RT11, that is, detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226.

  In the state where the ball entry unit U1 is attached, the entrance 206b is aligned with the exit 66a of the passage RT4, and the gaming ball entering the variable winning hole 234 passes through the passage RT4 and the passage RT3 in order, and The game ball that has entered the winning opening 226 can be merged.

  The alignment between the inlet 206 a and the general winning opening 226 and the alignment between the inlet 206 b and the outlet 66 a may be connected to each other, may be in contact with each other, or may be separated from each other. When separated, the separation distance may be less than the diameter of the gaming ball so that the gaming ball does not spill. In addition, these alignments may be a configuration in which the ball passages are continuously connected, and the shape of the passages may be linear at the alignment portion, or may be a configuration in which the meanders do not meander.

  Since the outlet 66a is located above the inlet 206b, the gaming balls having passed through the passage RT4 can join from the position above the passage RT11. Thereby, the game ball in the passage RT4 may easily join with the game ball in the passage RT11 through the passage RT12 by its own weight, and the game ball is less likely to stay in the passage RT4 when removing the ball entry unit U1. There is a case.

  In the present embodiment, since the game ball entering the variable winning opening 234 and the game ball entering the general winning opening 226 can join together, the number of ball passages unique to the winning opening etc. can be reduced. There is. In addition, in the ball passage before merging, one ball passage may not be increased in size as a whole since it is sufficient if the game ball entering the corresponding winning opening etc can pass.

  The game balls to be merged are not limited to the game balls entering the variable winning opening 234 and the game balls entering the general winning opening 226. For example, another ball passage may be joined to the ball passage in communication with the out port. There is a case where the ball detection sensor may not be provided in the ball passage communicating with the out port.

  A ball detection sensor 64D for determining winning in the variable winning opening 234 and a ball detecting sensor 208 for determining winning in the general winning opening 226 are both upstream in the flow direction of the game ball than the merging portion 206c. Since the game ball is located, detection of the game ball is performed before merging, and it may be possible to prevent the target of the winning being determined erroneously.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening 234 and the gaming ball entering the general winning opening 226 can be merged, and the outlet 66a is aligned with the merging portion 206c without providing the passage RT12. However, by providing the passage RT12, it may be possible to store gaming balls from the passage RT4 in the passage RT12. That is, when there is no passage RT12, the boundary between the passage RT4 and the passage RT11 becomes a joining portion, and when the ball entry unit U1 is removed, the gaming ball in the joining portion 206c is easily spilled, but the passage RT12 exists. As a result, since the merging portion 206c is formed on the side of the passage member 206 with a fixed capacity, the gaming ball may be less likely to spill.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the cross-sectional area of the passage is made larger than the other portions between the junction 206c and the outlet 206d. Since the gaming balls may be concentrated more than other portions between the merging portion 206c and the outlet 206d, the gaming balls may be able to pass smoothly by increasing the cross-sectional area of the passage. The cross sectional area of the passage can be increased, for example, by widening the passage. The width of the passage may be the width in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the passage. If there is a large difference in the number of gaming balls passing through the passage RT11 and the passage RT4 and the passage RT12, these cross-sectional areas may be different, and if there is no large difference in the number of gaming balls passing through, these disconnections The area may be the same.

  In the case of the present embodiment, a rib protruding from the inner wall is formed in the passage RT11. FIG. 194 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in FIG. 194 (b). In the example of the figure, the rib 206e protrudes inward from the inner wall of two surfaces among the inner walls of four surfaces. The ribs 206e can guide the passage of the game balls, stabilize the attitude of the game balls, and facilitate the passage of the game balls. In the present embodiment, the rib 206e is formed only in the section upstream of the passage RT11 in the flow direction of the gaming ball, but may be provided in all sections, and a rib is also provided in the passage RT4 or the passage RT12 It is also good.

  At the lower part of the main body 201 of the game board 200, ball receiving parts 207a and 207b are formed. The ball receiving portions 207 a and 207 b are concave portions provided with inclined surfaces for guiding the gaming balls to the rear side of the gaming board 200. The game balls discharged from the outlet RT2a of the passage RT2 and the outlet RT3a of the passage RT3 fall from the side of the ball receiving portion 207a and are discharged to the rear side of the game board 200. The game ball having passed through the V area RV and the winning ball area RH does not pass through the passage RT4 or the passage RT11 or the passage RT12. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game balls having passed through the V area RV and the prize ball area RH also join, but since the V prize is an important prize that a big hit is given to the player, it does not join another ball passage. The game ball is discharged independently. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to reduce problems associated with game play.

  In the ball receiving portion 207 a, the game ball discharged from the ball opening hole H 2 falls, and the game ball is discharged to the rear side of the game board 200. In the ball receiving portion 207 b, the game ball discharged from the ball removal hole H 1 falls, and the game ball is discharged to the rear side of the game board 200.

<Demonstration device 2>
The rendering device 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. The rendering device 2 is a movable mechanism in which the movable body is deformed, and the outline thereof will be described first. 197 (a) to (f) and FIG. 198 (a) are operation explanatory diagrams of the rendering device 2. FIG. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the rendering device 2 in the initial state. FIG. 198 (a) is a front view of the rendering device 2 after deformation, and the rendering device 5 is also illustrated. That is, the final form of the rendering device 2 constitutes an appearance combined with the rendering device 5. Note that FIG. 167 described above shows the case where the rendering device 2 is in the initial state.

  197 (a), the rendering device 2 includes the movable unit 2A and the mounting unit 2B to which the movable unit 2A is attached, and the rendering unit 2 is mounted on the main body 104 by the mounting member 25 of the mounting unit 2B. The movable unit 2A is supported by the mounting member 25. A unit different from the movable unit 2A may be further attached to the attachment member 25.

  The movable unit 2A includes a movable body 20. The movable body 20 is a variable effect body whose shape is deformed. In the state of FIG. 198 (a), the pair of decorative bodies 21a and the pair 21c of the movable body 20 are in a state of being seen by the player. The pair of decorative bodies 21a and the pair of decorative bodies 21c show the design of the family crest as a whole.

  The rendering device 2 can lower the movable body 20 as shown in FIG. 197 (b). The rendering device 2 is capable of translating (raising and lowering) the movable body 20 between the position shown in FIG. 197 (b) and the position in the initial state. When lowered to the position shown in FIG. 197 (b), the movable body 20 is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the player's attention may be drawn to the movable body 20, and a more effective rendition can be achieved by the effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation of the movable body 20. There is.

  The rendering device 2 can deform the movable body 20 as shown in FIG. 197 (c) to FIG. 198 (a). Steps (c) and (d) of FIG. 197 show a mode in which the pair of decorative bodies 21a is turned 180 degrees outward in the left-right direction, and the pair of decorative bodies 21a is turned upside down. The pair of decorative bodies 21c is located behind the pair of decorative bodies 21a.

  In the stage of FIGS. 197 (e) and (f), the lower part of the movable body 20 is pivoted about the vertical axis and the front and back is reversed, and the pair of decorative bodies 21a is located on the rear side and on the rear side. The pair of decorative body 21b and the decorative body 21C which were positioned are exposed on the front side, and further, in the upper part of the movable body 20, the decorative body 21D directed to the upper side is rotated forward by 90 degrees around the horizontal axis. The exposed mode is shown. Thus, the deformation of the movable body 20 is completed.

  At this time, by expanding the left and right rendering devices 5, it is possible to make the design of a rose appear as shown in FIG. 198 (a). As described above, the rendering device 2 can be transformed from the state in which the design of the family crest is revealed to the form in which the design of the brow is developed together with the rendering device 5.

  Details of the rendering device 2 will be described. 195, 196 and 196 (b) are exploded perspective views of the effect device 2. FIG. These figures have shown the disassembled perspective view of the presentation apparatus 2 in the arrangement | positioning relationship of an initial state.

  First, it demonstrates with reference to FIG. The movable body 20 includes an upper support member 20A and a lower support member 20B, which are connected via a shaft 20c in the d3 direction, and the support member 20B is rotated about the shaft 20c with respect to the support member 20A. It can rotate within a range of 180 degrees. By this rotation, front-back reversal by the rotation of the lower part shown in FIG. 197 (d) to FIG. 197 (f) is realized.

  The support member 20B has a configuration in which the front transparent member 20a and the rear transparent member 20b are stacked in the d1 direction, and the substrate 28c and the motor M21 are provided between the members 20a and 20b. Ru. The substrate 28c is a control substrate of the motor M21, and it is possible to mount an LED or the like and perform effects by the light emission. The ends of the flexible harnesses FH3 and FH4 are connected to the substrate 28c.

  The rotation units 21A and 21B rotate by the drive mechanism using the motor M21 as a drive source. The rotation units 21A and 21B are units in which the decorative body 21a, the decorative body 21c, and the decorative body 21b are stacked in the d1 direction, respectively, and are rotatably supported by the support member 20B. By the drive of the motor M21, the rotation units 21A and 21B rotate in the opposite direction to each other about the axis in the d1 direction. By this rotation, the up-down reversing operation and the like of the pair of decorative bodies 21a shown in FIG. 197 (c) to FIG. 197 (d) are realized.

  A decorative body 21C is fixed to the back of the member 20b. In the initial state, the decorative body 21C is directed to the rear, but the decorative body 21C appears on the front when the reverse operation by turning the lower part shown in FIG. 197 (d) to FIG. 197 (f) is performed. It is exposed as shown in FIG. 197 (f).

  A slide rail 22a is fixed to the support member 20A via a fitting 20d. The slide rail 22a is configured to be extensible and contractible in the d3 direction, and one rail member is fixed to the fitting 20d, and the other rail member engages with the rail member 22b to form a two-step slide rail. There is. The rail member 22b is fixed to the mounting member 25 via the fitting 22c. Therefore, the movable body 20 is movable in the d3 direction with respect to the mounting member 25 by the two-step slide rail configured by the slide rail 22a and the rail member 22b, whereby FIG. 197 (a) to FIG. The raising and lowering operation of the movable body 20 shown in b) is possible.

  A drive mechanism for moving the movable body 20 up and down will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196 (b). The movable body 20 is moved up and down by a drive mechanism using a motor M22 disposed on the back of the support member 25 as a drive source. A pivoting member 26a rotatably attached to the supporting member 25 via a shaft 26c in the d1 direction is provided on the back of the supporting member 25. The driving force of the motor M22 is a transmission mechanism of the back of the supporting member 25. The rotation member 26a is transmitted to the rotation member 26a. The rotating member 26a has a shaft 26b fixed at a position separated from the shaft 26c, and the shaft 26b passes through an arc-shaped elongated hole 25b formed in the supporting member 25 and protrudes to the front side of the supporting member 25.

  The movable unit 2A includes an arm member 24 connected to the shaft 26b, and an arm member 23 rotated by the arm member 24. The arm member 24 includes a connecting portion rotatably connected to the arm member 24 on one end 24 a side and a connecting portion rotatably connected to the mounting member 25 on the other end 24 b side. . The shaft 26b is connected to an intermediate portion 24c of one end 24a and the other end 24b, and the driving force starting from the motor M22 is transmitted to the arm member 24 via the rotating member 26a and the shaft 26b. The arm member 24 is pivoted around the other end 24b.

  The arm member 23 includes a main body 23a and a guide space forming member 23b. The guide space forming member 23B forms a guide portion 23f described later. A pair of roller members 26e is attached to the one end 23a side of the arm member 23 via a shaft 26d. The pair of roller members 26e form a roller that rolls in the long hole 25a formed in the attachment member 25 and extends in the d2 direction, and the one end 23a side of the arm member 23 can be rotated relative to the attachment member 25 And the center of rotation is displaceable in the d2 direction. The other end 23 b side of the arm member 23 is rotatably connected to the metal fitting 20 d via a shaft 29. A connecting portion on the one end 24 a side of the arm member 24 is rotatably connected to an intermediate portion 23 c of the one end 23 a and the other end 23 b.

  With the above configuration, the driving force of the motor M22 is transmitted to the arm member 23 through the arm member 24, and interlocked with the rotation of the arm member 24, the arm member 23 has the one end portion 23a as a rotation center The rotation center is moved while moving in the d2 direction, whereby the other end 23b is displaced only in the d3 direction, and the movable body 20 is moved up and down.

  The configuration of the upper portion of the movable body 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). A decorative member 21D is provided on the support member 20A so as to be rotatable about an axis in the d2 direction within a range of 90 degrees. In addition to the substrates 28A and 28B being mounted on the support member 20A, a drive mechanism using the motor M22 as a drive source is provided. The drive mechanism rotates the support member 20B around the shaft 20c with respect to the support member 20A, and rotates the decorative body 21D in conjunction with the rotation. The substrate 28B is a control substrate of the motor M22, but may be a substrate on which an LED or the like is mounted and effects are produced by the light emission. The substrate 28A is a substrate on which an LED or the like is mounted and effects are produced by the light emission. However, the substrate 28A may be a control substrate such as a motor. The substrate 28A and the substrate 28B are connected to the substrate 28c via the flexible harnesses FH3 and FH4 so that effects can be synchronized by transmitting or receiving signals between the substrates.

  Referring to FIG. 196 (b), mounting unit 2 B includes substrate 27. The substrate 27 is fixed to the back side of the mounting member 27. In the case of this embodiment, the substrate 27 is a relay substrate relaying between the second auxiliary control unit 500 and the substrates 28A and 28B, and also a control substrate of the motor M22.

  The substrate 27 and the substrate 28A are connected via the flexible harness FH1, and the substrate 27 and the substrate 28B are connected via the flexible harness FH2. The flexible harnesses FH1 to FH4 have, for example, the structure shown in FIG. 196 (c).

  The flexible harness FH omitted from the middle shown in FIG. 196 (c) is a strip-like flat cable having flexibility, and a plurality of wires WR extending in the length direction d11 (sometimes referred to as the longitudinal direction) have a width It is arranged parallel to the direction (sometimes referred to as the short direction) d12 and supported by the film-like base material, and the plurality of wirings WR are insulated. The plurality of wirings WR include, for example, a GND line, a power supply line, a signal line for control signals, a signal line for sensor signals, and the like.

  The arrangement of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (b), 198 (b) and (c). FIG. 198 (b) is a perspective view showing an arrangement of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2. FIG. 198 (c) is an explanatory view of a connection portion between the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 and the substrates 28A and 28B.

  The flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are drawn from the back surface side of the mounting member 25 to the front side of the substrate mounting member 25 through the through holes 25c provided in the mounting member 25 and the flexible harness FH1. The end FH1b is connected to the substrate 28A, and the end FH2b of the flexible harness FH2 is connected to the substrate 28B.

  The substrate 28A and the substrate 28B are arranged in an L shape as shown in FIG. 198 (c), the normal direction (thickness direction) of the substrate 28A is directed to the d1 direction, and the normal direction of the substrate 28B. The (thickness direction) points in the d3 direction.

  The end FH2b of the flexible harness FH2 is connected to the surface US side of the surfaces US and LS opposite to each other of the substrate 28B, and the end FH2b of the flexible harness FH2 passes the surface LS. Since the flexible harness FH2 is connected to the surface US, this surface may be a wiring pattern surface, and the surface LS may be a surface without a wiring pattern. Since the movable harness 20 is movable, the flexible harness FH1 and the substrate 28B may come in contact with each other to cause friction, and the wiring pattern may be uneven. When the wiring pattern and the flexible harness FH1 contact each other, they may be damaged. There is. Therefore, when the flexible harness FH1 passes through the surface LS side where there is no wiring pattern, the friction between the both may be reduced, and the flexible harness FH1 may be prevented from being damaged. Similarly, since the flexible harness FH1 does not pass through the surface US having the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be protected in some cases without the two being in contact with each other.

  Since the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are connected to the substrates 28A and 28B in the movable body 20, it is necessary that the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 do not become entangled in response to the movement of the movable body 20. In addition, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), the movable body 20 may be located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a configuration that attracts the attention of the player, and the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are not noticeable There are many cases where it is better.

  The flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are used as one flexible harness, and branched in the vicinity of the substrates 28A and 28B, or the substrate 27 and the substrate 28A are connected with one flexible harness, and the substrates 28A and 28B and another A configuration in which connection is made by a flexible harness can also be adopted. However, if the number of flexible harnesses is reduced, the number of wires WR increases, so the width may increase in the d12 direction and may be noticeable.

  So, in this embodiment, two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are used, and the width of each flexible harness in the d12 direction is narrowed (thinned). As a result, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may not be noticeable. In particular, since the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are overlapped in the thickness direction, they may not be conspicuous and may not be easily entangled with each other.

  In the case where the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are disposed in an overlapping manner, a mistake may occur in which the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are reversely connected to each other during the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 100. In particular, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 tend to require a long play to take account of the movement of the movable body 20, which may increase the possibility of connecting to either of the substrates 28A and 28B. It may be easy to occur.

  Therefore, the numbers of the wires WR of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be different from each other. Focusing on the number of wires WR may make it easier to distinguish the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2. Further, the width in the d12 direction may differ due to the difference in the number of the wires WR, and the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be easily distinguished depending on the width.

  When the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are positioned on the front side of the mounting member 25, except for the inside of the movable body 20, they are generally the section P1 and the section P2 of FIG. 198 (b). In the section P2, the movable unit 2A is provided with a guide portion to guide the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2. Although the site | part which provides a guide part may be any place, in the case of this embodiment, the arm 23 is provided with the guide part 23f. In the case of the present embodiment, the guide portion 23f is a cylindrical space formed between the main body 23a and the guide space forming member 23b. By guiding the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 by the guide portion 23f, it may be possible to prevent them from being entangled, and in some cases, they may be inconspicuous due to the presence of the arm member 23. Further, in some cases, it may be difficult to be noticeable by guiding the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 in the same portion (guide portion 23f), and even when the movable portion 20 is operated, the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may not be easily tangled. is there.

  The section P1 is a section from the through hole 25c to the arm member 23. The flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are introduced to the arm member 24 while being guided by a guide shaft 25d erected on the front side of the mounting member 25. It is preferable that the player can visually recognize in the section P1 (see, for example, FIGS. 197 (a) and (b)), and that the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are not noticeable in the section P1.

  In the case of this embodiment, in the part BD immediately after coming out of the through hole 25c, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are folded to switch the extending direction by 90 degrees, and the short direction d12 of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 is the d1 direction It is configured to be parallel. In this portion, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may come in contact with each other and may not be seen apart. Further, also in the guiding portion 23f (section P2), the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 guide them in such a manner that the short direction d12 of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 becomes parallel to the d1 direction. Therefore, the short direction d12 of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 is parallel to the d1 direction in the section P1 between the portion BD and the guide portion 23f. Also in this portion, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may come in contact with each other, and may not be separated.

  In most of the section P1 visible to the player, the gaze direction of the player may be parallel to the short direction d12, and the front and back of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be viewed from the player. It may be hardly visible, only the side edges may be visible, and it may be possible to make the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 inconspicuous. Although the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may not be noticeable in the section P2 due to the presence of the arm member 23, the short direction d12 of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 is also parallel to the d1 direction also in the section P2 Furthermore, in some cases, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 can be made inconspicuous.

  Even when the movable body 20 moves, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 move because the moving direction of the movable body 20 and the moving direction of the arm member 23 are in a direction (here orthogonal) intersecting the short direction d12 and d1 direction. Is displaced in the direction intersecting with the short direction d12 (here, d2 and d3 directions), the state in which the short direction d12 is parallel to the d1 direction is maintained, making the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 inconspicuous There is a possibility. Note that the range in which the short direction d12 of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 is parallel to the d1 direction is preferably the entire visible range of the player, but even if it is a partial range visible to the player, Inconspicuous effects may be obtained.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a view schematically showing an arrangement of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2. The guide portion 23f of the arm member 23 is an internal space extending in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 23, and is formed from the inlet 23d to the outlet 23e. The inlet 23d and the outlet 23e are names when the substrate 27 is regarded as the starting point of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2, and when the substrate 28A and the substrate 28B are regarded as the starting point, the inlet 23d is the outlet and the outlet 23e is the outlet. It can be called an entrance, and can be appropriately called according to the way of taking a standard.

  In the guide portion 23f, the flexible harness FH1 and the flexible harness FH2 can be at least partially in contact at a plurality of locations. For example, the inlet 23 d and the outlet 23 e can be held in contact with each other. As a result, the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are less likely to be separated, which may result in better cohesion.

  The flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are guided and supported by the guide portion 23f between the inlet 23d and the outlet 23e, and in the present embodiment, they are guided in the longitudinal direction of the arm member 23. Since the arm member 23 and the movable body 20 are displaced synchronously, by guiding the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 by the arm member 23, interference between the movable portion and the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be easily avoided.

  In the case of this embodiment, the cross-sectional shapes of the inlet 23d, the outlet 23e, and the guide 23f are such that the periphery is closed as shown in FIG. 199 (b), but if the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 can be guided For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (c) and FIG. 199 (d), it may be C-shaped or U-shaped in which a part is notched, and as shown in FIG. The flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be sandwiched between the bar-like members Bar, or may be hook-shaped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), the guide portion 23f is provided with a wall portion 23g that separates two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 from other portions of the arm member 23. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), a wall portion 23h may be provided to separate the flexible harness FH1 and the flexible FH2 separately.

  The guide portion 23f does not have to be a closed space as a whole, and as shown in FIG. 200 (c), the wall portion 23g may have an opening partially. Further, the guide portion 23f does not have to be a tunnel-like space through which the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are inserted, and as shown in FIG. 200 (d), a plurality of openings are arranged in the longitudinal direction and comb teeth or ladder shape The wall portions of the guide portion 23f may be formed on the guide portion 23f, and the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be passed through the plurality of openings in a zigzag manner. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 200 (d), the support force of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may be able to be improved, and the play length of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 may not be changed with time. . This may prevent the occurrence of entanglement of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2.

  Referring back to FIG. 199 (a), in the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2, the ends FH1a and FH2a are connected to the positions 27a and 27b on the substrate 27, respectively, and the length of the flexible harness FH1 from the position 27a to the entrance 23d The length is shorter than the length of the flexible harness FH2 from the position 27b to the entrance 23d. In other words, the position 27a is closer to the inlet 23d than the position 27b.

  On the other hand, in the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2, the ends FH1b and FH2b are respectively connected to the position 28Aa on the substrate 28A and the position 28Ba on the substrate 28B, and the length of the flexible harness FH1 from the position 28Aa to the outlet 23e Is longer than the length of the flexible harness FH2 from the position 28Ba to the outlet 23e. In other words, the position 28Aa is farther from the inlet 23d than the position 28Ba position 27b.

  Since the lengths of the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 can be adjusted to the same degree by the long and short relationship of this length, each play of the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 should be made equal according to the operation of the movable unit 2A. There are times when you can. If the play is the same, it may be possible to prevent mutual entanglement, and it may be easy to maintain the two flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 overlapping each other, and the appearance may be improved.

<Another Configuration Example Related to Flexible Harnesses>
In the above example, the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are connected to the substrates 28A and 28B provided in the movable body 20 and guided by the guide portion 23f, but the substrate and guide portions to which the flexible harnesses FH1 and FH2 are connected are shown in FIG. As schematically illustrated in FIG. 215 (a), the invention is widely applicable to game members, applicable to non-movable game members, and also applicable to movable game members such as the movable body 20. .

  Further, as schematically illustrated in FIG. 215 (b), at least one of the substrates to which the flexible harness is connected may be a substrate to which a display device is electrically connected. Examples of the display device include LEDs, lamps other than LEDs, liquid crystal displays, and the like, and a drive circuit of the display device may be mounted on the substrate.

  Further, as schematically illustrated in FIG. 215 (c), the effect devices may be electrically connected to the respective substrates to which the flexible harness is connected. As the rendering device, in addition to movable bodies using motors and solenoids, display devices such as LEDs, lamps other than LEDs, liquid crystal displays can be mentioned, and even if the drive circuit of the rendering device is mounted on the substrate Good.

<Arrangement structure of vibration sensor SR3>
The arrangement structure of the vibration sensor SR3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. FIG. 201 is an explanatory view of the arrangement structure of the vibration sensor SR3, and is a front view of the lower part of the game board 200. FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a perspective view of the rail member 209, and FIG. 202 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG.

  In the non-playing area of the lower right portion of the game board 200, an opening 201b is formed in the main body 201. In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 201b is a hole that penetrates the main body 201 in the thickness direction (direction d1), and is a through hole whose periphery is closed. However, the opening 201 b may be a through hole (in other words, a notch) in which the periphery of the hole is not closed. In the present embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the opening 201b is a square of a corner circle, but it may be another shape such as a circle, an ellipse or the like.

  The vibration sensor SR3 is provided in the opening 201b so as to be accommodated inside the opening 201b. The vibration sensor SR3 is supported by the mounting member TG1, and the mounting member TG1 is fixed to the back surface of the main body 201 by a screw. The connector CN1 of the harness is connected to the vibration sensor SR3, and a signal indicating the detection result of the vibration sensor SR3 can be transmitted to the control unit.

  The ball entry unit U1 described above is provided in the lower right portion of the game board 200, and the variable prize port 234, the general prize port 236, the V area RV, and the like are present, so an illicit person receives an impact. The risk of being granted is relatively high. By disposing the vibration sensor SR3 in this portion, an incorrect vibration may be detected, and in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the fraud, and in some cases, the certainty of detection may be improved.

  If the vibration sensor SR2 on the side of the main body 104 and the vibration sensor SR3 simultaneously detect vibration, any error processing (for example, error processing of the vibration sensor SR3) may be prioritized or both error processing (For example, error notification) may be performed simultaneously. The same applies to the case where the detection of the magnetic sensor SR4 and the detection of the vibration sensor SR2 or SR3 are simultaneously performed, but, for example, the game is stopped by the detection of the magnetic sensor SR4, and the error notification is generated by the detection of the vibration sensor SR2 or SR4. Good. Alternatively, for example, notification of an important error that can be released by the operation of the RAM clear switch or the error release switch may be given top priority.

  By disposing the vibration sensor SR3 in the lower right portion of the game board 200, it may be possible to reduce false detection of a non-illegal vibration. For example, as a factor of false detection, it is considered that vibration occurs when the gaming ball flows down, but since the vibration sensor SR3 is in the non-playing area and relatively away from the flowing position of the gaming ball, false detection May be reduced. In particular, with the out port 240 at the center of the game board 200, and the outlet for the winning ball located at the center of the back of the game board 200, false detection of the vibration sensor SR3 caused by the game ball can be reduced. There is a case. When the new board is installed, vibration occurs in the entire pachinko machine 100, but since the vibration sensor SR3 becomes operable after the game board 200 is connected to the main body 104, there may be no case where the vibration due to installation is erroneously detected. In addition, although it is possible to erroneously detect the vibration accompanying opening and closing of the front frame door 106, the erroneous detection is reduced by controlling the detection period of the vibration sensor SR3 (for example, detecting only before and after the V winning timing). It may be possible to

  The front side of the opening 201b is covered by a lid 209A. The lid 209A covers the entire opening 201b, but may cover a part. The vibration sensor SR3 is a sensor that detects vibration and is a sensor that performs detection related to error notification, and therefore may be attacked by an unauthorized person. Covering at least a part of the front side of the opening 201b with the lid 209A may prevent the vibration sensor SR3 from being removed from the front side, and may protect the vibration sensor SR3 from attack by an unauthorized person. Although it is conceivable to make the opening 201b a hole with a bottom, the opening 201b may be easier to process, and may be processed collectively when performing various holes on the main body 201. . The rear side of the opening 201b may also be covered with another lid. There are cases where it is possible to prevent an attack on the vibration sensor SR3 from the rear side.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the lid portion 209A is a plate-like portion integrally formed with the rail member 209. The number of parts can be reduced by using the rail member 209 also as a lid of the opening 201b. The rail member 209 is a member fixed to the main body 201 by a screw or the like, and may not be easily removed by an unauthorized person or the like. Therefore, the lid portion 209A may be prevented from being removed illegally. The rail member 209 includes a substrate accommodating portion 209c adjacent to the lid portion 209A. The board | substrate accommodation part 209c accommodates the board | substrate which mounted the normal symbol display apparatus 210, the 1st special symbol display apparatus 212, the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 214 grade | etc.,.

  Note that the lid portion 209A may be a separate member from the rail member 209 or may be separated from the game board 200. For example, a part of the transparent plate member 118 of the front frame door 106 may be used as the lid 209A, or a member functioning as the lid 209A may be attached to the front frame door 106.

  In the case of this embodiment, the cover 209A is transparent and the vibration sensor SR3 and the opening 201b are visible, but the cover 209A is opaque and the vibration sensor SR3 and the opening 201b are not visible. May be.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the lid 209A includes a display area 209b. In FIG. 201, the display area 209b is shaded so that the range of the display area 209b can be easily understood visually, but the display area 209b is a virtual area and is not necessarily shaded. Of course, the display area 209 b may be configured to be easily distinguishable visually, such as coloring a shaded portion. Also in the present embodiment, linear ribs 209a are formed on the periphery of part of the display area 209b so that the range can be understood to a certain extent. Even when the lid 209A is not present, the glass disposed in the front frame may have the same effect as the lid 209A.

  Various types of information are displayed in the display area 209b, and printing, attachment of a seal, or the like to the display area 209b can be selected as a display of information. The seal may be, for example, a certificate, and when the seal is attached, the rib 209a may be a hand and the seal may be easily attached. The content of the display may be a display on a model such as a spec, a name of the model, a QR code (registered trademark) on manufacture, a warning, a part of a game board attaching / detaching method, or the like.

  The display area 209 b covers the area in front of the opening 201 b. The vibration sensor SR3 may be difficult to see due to the display area 209b, and the position of the vibration sensor SR3 may not be noticed by an unauthorized person or the like. The display area 209b may cover the entire front of the opening 201b, but in the present embodiment, it is a part of the display area 209b so that the lower part of the opening 201b can be seen. Therefore, the connector CN1 or the like can be visually checked, and an inspector such as a store clerk may be able to perform a simple visual check.

  As a display related to the vibration sensor SR3, a display PR1 is displayed in the guidance area 201a of the game area 124. The display PR1 is displayed by characters on the decorative surface of the main body 201, and is a display indicating that the vibration sensors SR2 and SR3 and the magnetic sensor SR4 are provided (equipped with a fraud detecting sensor).

  With such a display PR1, it is possible to make it difficult to identify where the fraud detecting sensor is actually disposed while the player informs the fraudster of the presence of the fraud detecting sensor such as the vibration sensors SR2 and SR3 and the magnetic sensor SR4. There is a possibility. In the case of this embodiment, the vibration sensor SR2 is located on the upper left side of the pachinko machine 100, and the vibration sensor SR3 and the magnetic sensor SR4 are located on the lower right side. Since the display PR1 is located on the lower left side and is located at a distance from these sensors, it may be difficult to understand the actual sensor arrangement. Since the display PR1 is located at the opposite position, it may be difficult to understand the actual sensor arrangement.

  Although it is possible to display the display PR1 in the non-game area (for example, PR1 '), the player or the illegal person may surely see the game area 124, and the guidance area 201a is particularly easy to see There is. Also, in consideration of the manufacture of the game board 200, it may be advantageous to display the display PR1 in the guidance area 201a. In general, in the game board 200, a hole forming process and the like are sequentially performed on the main body 201 on which a celluloid sheet or the like constituting a decorative surface has been applied. The guide area 201a is a portion through which the game ball passes, and is not usually present when a hole forming process is performed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the risk of the display PR1 being erroneously erased in the drilling process may be low, and the display PR1 may be displayed more reliably.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the display PR2 is also displayed in the vicinity of the display PR1. The display PR2 is a character displayed on the decorative surface of the main body 201 in the guide area 201a of the game area 124, and is a display for calling attention to the player. Here, “Please do not stare at strong light and blink of light.” Is displayed, and it is displayed as urging the player's health. By allowing the display PR2 to be adjacent to the display PR1, the player may be able to confirm the display PR2.

<Another Configuration Example Related to the Opening>
In the above example, the opening 205 is covered by the rail member 209 (lid 209A), but instead, at least a part of the front of the opening 205 may be covered by another game member, and the opening 205 may be formed in the game area. FIG. 216 (a) is a schematic view thereof, and the figure on the left is a front view, and the figure on the right is a longitudinal sectional view of the game member A. FIG. The game member A, the opening 205, and the sensor SR3 are disposed in the game area.

  The game member A may be, for example, a display device or an effect movable body. More specifically, for example, an LED unit, a lamp unit other than an LED, a symbol display device unit, a power chow unit (which may have an LED), an attacker unit (which may have an LED) It may be an object unit, a gate decoration unit, a movable shutter, a movable character (entire character, part of character, etc.) or the like. The sensor SR may not be entirely located at the opening 205, and at least a portion may be located at the opening 205.

  Further, at least a part of the game members other than the sensor SR3 may be located in the opening 205. FIG. 216 (b) is a schematic view thereof, and the figure on the left is a front view, and the figure on the right is a longitudinal sectional view of the game member A. Although the gaming member A, the opening 205, and the gaming member B are disposed in the non-playing area, they may be disposed in the gaming area.

  In addition to the members illustrated with reference to FIG. 216 (a), the gaming member A may be a certificate stamp or a unit for sticking a sticker paper. The game member B may be a harness, a substrate or the like. In addition, the game member B is a sensor other than the sensor SR3, a sensor for detecting a game ball (a general-purpose gate sensor, a special figure 1 start port sensor, a special figure 2 start port sensor, an attacker sensor, a V area pass sensor, a general winning port A sensor etc.).

<Structure of Ball Passage Unit 153>
The configuration of the ball passage unit 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. As described above, the ball passage unit 153 forms a passage of game balls for supplying the game balls paid out from the payout device 152 to the upper tray 126 and the like. 203 (a) and (b) show a rear view and a front view of the dispensing device 152 and the ball passage unit 153. FIG. The ball passage unit 153 of the present embodiment is formed of a transparent member in order to make it easy to see the game ball passing through the inside, and the structure on the back side can be seen. FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b) show how the ball passage unit 153 looks when it is transparent. For this reason, the shape line which shows an internal structure is shown by the continuous line also including the structure of the back side. FIGS. 204 to 207 basically show the ball passage unit 153 in a view when it is not transparent.

  As shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b), the dispensing device 152 includes a dispensing motor 152b, a sprocket 152c, a gear train 152d, and a dispensing sensor 152d inside a cylindrical case extending vertically. The payout motor 152b, the sprocket 152c, and the payout sensor 152d are disposed on the back side of the payout device 152, and the gear train 152d is disposed on the front side. The driving force of the payout motor 152b is transmitted to the sprocket 152c via the gear train 152d to rotate the sprocket 152c.

  The gaming ball having passed through the tank rail 154 described above enters the passage 152 a and is temporarily retained in the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor 152b to rotate the sprocket 152c by a predetermined angle, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one to the ball passage unit 153.

  In the present embodiment, the dispensing motor 152 b employs a stepping motor. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the sprocket 152c is rotated via a plurality of gears from the gear directly connected to the payout motor 152b. In the present embodiment, the gear on the side of the payout motor 152 b rotates 7.5 degrees per step and makes one rotation in 48 steps. The sprocket 152c is provided with three recesses at equal intervals (one delivery is completed at a rotation of 120 degrees). Then, the gear on the sprocket 152c side rotates 3.33 degrees per step, and the payout of one gaming ball is completed in 36 steps. Further, it is preferable that the recess of the sprocket 152c be stopped at a predetermined position (initial position) in a period in which the game balls are not paid out. The predetermined position is a position where a payout operation is not performed due to the weight of the gaming ball in a state where the gaming ball in the concave portion of the sprocket 152c is stopped, and one of three concave portions. The concave portion in the 12 o'clock direction is stopped at a position where the central position of the concave portion is shifted in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the sprocket 152c by 2 steps (6.66 degrees) from 12 o'clock. In addition, the payout device 152 in the present embodiment interrupts the payout operation when the inner frame or the front frame is opened during the payout operation. Note that the dispensing device 152 in the present embodiment is not provided with an index sensor for confirming the initial position of the sprocket 152c. Therefore, when the performance of the motor, the size of the gear, or the like is changed, the sprocket 152c may not be present at an appropriate position at the end of the payout of the game ball. That is, when the design change of the payout device 152 is performed, control may be performed to correct the position of the sprocket 152c (for example, to correct the position by a predetermined number of steps).

  The payout sensor 152d is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket 152c, and when the game ball is passing, the game ball does not pass either high or low signal. When this is the case, the other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. Thereby, for example, the number of game balls paid out is counted.

  The payout device 152 is provided with a ball removal operation unit 152e, and when the ball removal operation unit 152e is operated, it is possible to perform the ball removal of the gaming ball retained on the upstream side of the sprocket 152c. That is, the dispensing device 152 has an outlet communicating with the dispensing sensor 152 d and an outlet for removing the ball at its lower end.

  The ball passage unit 153 is a hollow body extending vertically, and the upper end thereof is connected to the lower end of the dispensing device 152. The ball passage unit 153 is a unit integrally including a plurality of ball passages through which the game balls discharged from the payout device 152 can pass. By integrating a plurality of passages into one unit, it may be possible to reduce the number of parts, which may make assembly easier.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the ball passage unit 153 is provided with payout passages 7 and 8 and a ball extraction passage 9 as the ball passages of the gaming balls. The dispensing passage 8 is a passage branched from the middle of the dispensing passage 7. At the upper end of the ball passage unit 153, an inlet 7a of the payout passage 7 is formed. This outlet 7a faces the outlet of the outlet of the payout device 152 which communicates with the payout sensor 152d, and the gaming ball flows down from the outlet Enters. At the upper end of the ball passage unit 153, an inlet 9a of the ball removing passage 9 is also formed, and this inlet 9a faces the outlet for removing the balls among the outlets of the dispensing device 152 and flows down from the outlet The game ball enters.

  The payout passage 7 is a ball passage capable of discharging the game ball to the upper tray 126, and has an outlet 8b communicating with the upper tray 126. The payout passage 8 is a passage through which gaming balls can be discharged to the lower tray 128, and has an outlet 8b communicating with the lower tray 128. The outlet 9b of the ball removal passage 9, the outlet 7b and the outlet 8b are disposed side by side in the d2 direction. Since the outlet 7b is located in the middle, it may be difficult for the delivery passage 7 to be tampered with from the outside.

  The configuration of the ball passage unit 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 to 206 in addition to FIG. FIG. 204 (a) is a right side view of the ball passage unit 153, and FIG. 204 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D of FIG. 204 (a). FIG. 205 (a) is a rear view of the ball passage unit 153, and FIG. 205 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E of FIG. 205 (a). Fig. 206 (a) is a rear view of the ball passage unit 153, and Fig. 206 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E of Fig. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the delivery passage 7 has a branch part BR, and the delivery passage 8 extends downward with the branch part BR as an inlet 8a.

  The payout passage 7 includes an upstream ball passage 7A located on the upstream side of the branch portion BR in the flow direction of the gaming ball, and a downstream ball passage 7B located on the downstream side.

  The upstream ball passage 7A has an inlet 7a and includes a meandering portion 71. By including the meandering portion 71, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball paid out from the payout device 152 may be reduced, and it may be possible to prevent the gaming ball from going wild. In addition, there are cases in which the storage amount of gaming balls in the upstream ball passage 7A can be increased.

  The lower portion of the meandering portion 71 is an inclined portion 71a which is linearly inclined. The inclined portion 71a is inclined downward to the right so that the gaming ball is guided to the entrance 7c of the downstream ball passage 7B. The gaming ball decelerated by the meandering portion 71 is slightly accelerated by the inclined portion 71a, jumps over the separating portion BR and the entrance 8a and falls and enters the entrance 7c as shown by the arrow d31. In the separating part BR, the payout passage 7 is interrupted in the branching part BR, and by configuring the separating part BR so that the game balls jump over, it may be possible to prevent the game balls from being clogged.

  When the payout of the game balls is increased, the upper tray 126 is full, and the downstream ball passage 7B is also full of game balls. Then, the gaming ball which has jumped out the inclined portion 71a can not enter the entrance 7c, and enters the entrance 8a as shown by the arrow d32. Thus, the gaming balls begin to flow down to the payout path 8, and the gaming balls are discharged to the lower tray 128.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (b), the dispensing passage 8 includes an upstream meandering portion 81 and a downstream inclined passage 82. By providing the meandering portion 81, there are cases where the number of stored game balls in the payout passage 8 can be increased. The inclined passage 82 is a passage inclined downward from the rear of the outlet 8b toward the outlet 8b, and it may be possible to vigorously discharge the gaming balls to the lower tray 128 by this inclination.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the downstream ball passage 7 </ b> C of the dispensing passage 7 includes the inclined passage 74. The inclined passage 74 is a passage inclined downward from the rear of the outlet 7b toward the outlet 7b, and it may be possible to vigorously discharge the gaming balls to the upper tray 126 by this inclination.

  Here, in the case where a plurality of rendering devices are provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray, the capacity of the upper tray 126 may be reduced. If the capacity of the upper tray 126 is small, the upper tray 126 is likely to be filled up early, and the gaming balls are likely to flow down to the lower tray 128. The frequency with which the player performs the work of inserting the gaming ball from the lower plate 128 to the upper plate 126 may be increased, which may give the player a sense of confusion.

  As described above, the gaming ball flows down to the lower tray 128 from the branch part BR through the payout passage 8. The capacity of the upper tray 126 can be substantially increased by increasing the storage capacity of the game balls in the downstream ball passage 7C downstream of the branch part BR.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the branch part BR is located upstream of the inclined passage 74 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. That is, the inclined passage 74 can be used to store gaming balls for discharging the upper tray 126. The inclined passage 74 can store more game balls at a lower height than in the vertical passage. In the case of this embodiment, since the inclined passage 74 is inclined closer to horizontal than vertical, more game balls can be stored at a lower height.

  As the height from the inclined passage 74 to the lower limit BRL of the branch part BR (FIG. 204 (b)) is higher, the storage capacity of the gaming balls for discharging the upper tray 126 may be able to be increased. As schematically shown in (b), if the height h1 is at least one gaming ball, the inclined passage 74 may be used as a storage space for gaming balls for discharging the upper tray 126. If the height h1 is 0.5 game balls, there is a possibility that the branch BR may enter the payout passage 8 depending on the momentum of the falling game balls, for example, a prize ball other than a big hit is paid out The game ball may be induced to the lower plate 128 at a time.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the downstream ball passage 7C further includes a meandering portion 72. By providing the meandering portion 72, the number of game balls stored in the downstream ball passage 7C may be further increased. In addition, when the game balls are accumulated by the meandering portion 72, the pressure at which the game balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 may be able to be reduced as compared with the vertical path.

  In order to substantially increase the capacity of the upper tray 126, the payout passage 7 needs to increase the storage capacity of the game balls more than the payout passage 8. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of turns of the meandering portion 72 (here, 5) is greater than the number of turns of the meandering portion 81 (here, 3). By this, the meandering portion 72 may be able to increase the storage amount of gaming balls, and the meandering portion 81 functions as a meandering portion for appropriately killing the momentum while discharging the gaming balls to the lower plate 128 promptly. There are times when you can.

  Further, since both the meandering portion 72 and the meandering portion 81 are in the meandering form in the vertical and longitudinal directions and are additionally provided in the d2 direction, it may be possible to have a compact configuration. Moreover, while the meandering portion 72 is at the same position on the back side with the meandering portion 81, the front side includes the portion 72b where the meandering portion 72 projects forward, so the distance between the turns is the meandering portion 72 Long, therefore, the storage capacity of the game balls can be increased.

  When the meandering portion 72 is provided, the flow of the game balls may be deteriorated. In the case of the present embodiment, a vertical drop portion 73 is provided between the meandering portion 72 and the inclined passage 74 so that the gaming ball can drop vertically. Further, since the meandering portion 72 is in the form of meandering in the vertical direction, vertical falling is possible even though the gaming ball has a short distance even in the bending portion 72a at 180 degrees. In some cases, the flow of gaming balls can be improved by vertically dropping the gaming balls in the vertical drop portions 73 and 72a. The vertical drop portion 73 may also be used as a storage space for gaming balls.

  If the height h1 is too high, the gaming balls may be stored unnecessarily or space may be wasted. Therefore, the number of gaming balls that can be stored in the downstream-side ball passage 7C may be, for example, about the number of gaming balls (for example, 125) which can be lent out with one ball lending. Alternatively, it may be about 2/3 to half of the number of game balls that can be stored in the lower plate 128.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the dispensing passage 8 is disposed in line with the downstream ball passage 7C of the dispensing passage 7 in the d2 direction, and the meandering portion 72 meanders in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction. In some cases, it is possible to arrange the dispensing passage 7 and the dispensing passage 8 in a compact size, and when the storage of gaming balls is reduced, the direction of the meandering part 72 matches the directionality of the inclined passage 74. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the possibility. In addition, while the meandering portion 72 projects forward, the rear side does not project either the meandering portion 72 or the meandering portion 81, so the position on the rear side may be easily determined. It may be easier.

  The ball removal passage 9 passes through the left side of the portion 72b of the meandering portion 72 downward on the front side with respect to the upstream ball passage 7A, the bifurcated portion BR and the discharge passage 8, and the right end at the downstream end , And passes under the meandering portion 72 to reach the outlet 9b. This is to effectively utilize the empty space by making the ball extraction passage 9 run around the portion 72b of the meandering portion 72, and the ball passage unit 153 may be made compact.

<Demonstration device 1>
The rendering device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 208 to 212. First, the outline of the rendering device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165, 211 (a), (b), and 212. The rendering device 1 is a rendering device having a variable display function that mechanically switches the display, and is provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray. In addition, the attachment site of the rendering device 1 is not limited to the door 108 with a ball storage plate, but may be the game board 200 or the like.

  The appearance device 1 has a cylindrical shape as a whole in appearance, and the axial direction thereof is directed obliquely upward to the right.

  The rendering device 1 includes a decoration unit 10 forming the exterior thereof, the movable unit 12 is disposed inside the decoration unit 10, and the movable unit 11 is disposed inside the movable unit 12. The decoration unit 10 is provided with a window area 10b which makes the inside visible from the outside, and the player can view the inner movable unit 12 and the inner movable unit 11 through the window area 10b.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable unit 12 is an arc shutter mechanism in which the pair of shutters 12A and 12B opens and closes in an arc shape, and in the closed state shown in FIG. 211 (a) and the open state shown in FIG. Changes.

  In the case of the closed state shown in FIG. 211 (a), the movable unit 11 inside is difficult to visually recognize from the outside, and in the case of the open state shown in FIG. 211 (b), the movable unit 11 is visually recognized from the outside as shown in FIG. It becomes possible. The movable unit 12 is disposed such that the openings of the pair of shutters 12A and 12B in the open state are located behind the window region 10b, and in the open state shown in FIG. It becomes visible from the outside through the area 10b. Since the timing at which the variable display is performed can be limited by opening and closing the pair of shutters 12A and 12B, it may be possible to add to the game.

  The movable unit 11 is a variable display mechanism that includes a plurality of decorative bodies and performs a variable display to switch the decorative bodies visible to the player by mechanically switching the position of the decorative bodies. In the case of this embodiment, the movable unit 11 is configured to switch the position of the decorative body by turning.

  FIGS. 212 (a) and (b) show the rotation mode of the movable unit 11. FIG. FIG. 212 (a) shows a state where the decoration 11a of the decoration unit 11A is located in the display area. When the movable unit 12 is in the open state, the decorative body 11a shown in FIG. 212 (c) can be visually recognized from the outside through the window area 10b. FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which the movable unit 11 is rotated by a predetermined angle (here 90 degrees) from the state of FIG. 212 (a) and the decorative body 11a of the decorative unit 11B is positioned in the display area. There is. When the movable unit 12 is in the open state, the decorative body 11a shown in FIG. 212 (d) is visible from the outside through the window area 10b, but the appearance of the movable unit 11 and the movable unit 12 in that state is FIG. It becomes the appearance shown to (b).

  Thus, the display can be switched by rotating the movable unit 11 between the position of FIG. 212 (a) and the position of FIG. 212 (b). When switching the display, the movement of the movable unit 11 may be a rotational movement in one direction, but in the present embodiment, since the reciprocating movement is in two directions, the wiring to the movable unit 11 is less likely to be entangled than in the rotational movement It is advantageous in that it is difficult to twist.

  Details of the rendering device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 212. FIG. 208 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rendering device 1 and mainly shows the structure of the decoration unit 10. As shown in FIG.

  The decoration unit 10 is disposed to surround the outer periphery of the movable unit 12. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering device 1 is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 100, and is disposed at a position where the player can contact. In addition to decorating the rendering device 1, the decoration unit 10 may be able to protect the inside movable unit 11 and the movable unit 12 which are movable mechanisms from the outside.

  The decorative unit 10 has a semi-cylindrical outer shell 10a located on the front side, an outer shell 10c located on the upper side, a support member 10f located on the rear side and attached to the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and effects A disk-shaped lid member 10d disposed at the right end of the device 1 is provided to constitute a cylindrical hollow body as a whole.

  The outer shell portion 10a and the outer shell portion 10c are formed with a notch forming the window region 10b, and the window region 10b is defined by the outer shell portion 10a and the outer shell portion 10c. In the case of the present embodiment, the window region 10b is closed by the transparent member 10e, and the inside of the decoration unit 10 is substantially closed space, and the inside can be viewed through the transparent member 10e. The parts other than the transparent member 10e may be transparent, but the appearance may be inferior if the movable unit 11 and the mechanical parts of the movable unit 12 are visible, so the parts other than the transparent member 10e may be opaque or have low transparency. It consists of members. In some cases, the internal structure of the rendering device 1 can be made invisible.

  FIG. 210 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering device 1 and mainly shows the structures of the movable unit 11 and the movable unit 12.

  The movable unit 11 includes decoration units 11A and 11B and a support member 11C that supports them. The support member 11 c is a cylindrical member into which the shaft 13 is inserted, and is provided rotatably around the shaft 13.

  The decorative unit 11B is a laminate in which the decorative body 11a, the frame 11c, and the substrate 11b are stacked in this order in the radial direction of the shaft 13. The frame 11c is located between the decorative body 11a and the substrate 11b and supports them. The decorative body 11 a is located on the front side, and the surface constitutes a decorative surface for performing variable display around the axis 13. This decorative surface has an arc shape centered on the axis 13. When the decorative surface has an arc shape, more three-dimensional variable display may be possible. A character, a figure, a pattern, etc. can be given to the decoration surface, and in the case of this embodiment, the display shown in FIG. 211 (d) is made.

  A plurality of light emitting elements 11 d are disposed on the substrate 11 b. In the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting element 11 d is an LED. The substrate 11b is provided on the back side of the decorative body 11a toward the decorative body 11a, and illuminates the decorative body 11a from behind. The decorative body 11a is made of a light transmitting member, and the light emitting element 11d may be made to emit light so that the decorative body 11a may appear to be emitting light. When the entire decorative body 11 a is made to emit light substantially uniformly, the plurality of light emitting elements 11 d can be arranged on the substrate 11 b with a relatively uniform density (for example, in the form of a matrix) on a plane.

  The decoration unit 11A is a laminate in which the decoration 11a, the substrate 11b, and the frame 11c are stacked in this order in the radial direction of the shaft 13. The decorative body 11a is a laminate of a plurality of decorative members 11a1 to 11a4. The frame 11c supports the decorative body 11a, the substrate 11b, and the laminate. The decorative body 11 a is located on the front side, and the surface constitutes a decorative surface for performing variable display around the axis 13. This decorative surface has an arc shape centered on the axis 13. When the decorative surface has an arc shape, more three-dimensional variable display may be possible. A character, a figure, a pattern, etc. can be given to the decoration surface, and in the case of this embodiment, the display shown in FIG. 211 (c) is made. In the case of this embodiment, the decorative body 11a of the decorative unit 11A includes three seven-segment display units, and these seven-segment display units enable information display using numbers, symbols, and the like.

  A plurality of light emitting elements 11d are disposed on the substrate 11b (in FIG. 210, they are hidden by the substrate 11b and can not be seen). In the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting element 11 d is an LED. The substrate 11b is provided toward the back side decoration 11a of the decoration 11a, and illuminates the decoration 11a from behind. The plurality of decorative members 11a1 to 11a4 are made of light transmitting members, and it may be possible to make the decorative body 11a emit light by causing the light emitting element 11d to emit light.

  As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the decorative body 11a of the decorative unit 11A includes three 7-segment display portions, and at least the light emitting elements 11d corresponding to each segment can emit light so that each segment can emit light individually. It is arranged. Therefore, the number of light emitting elements of the decoration unit 11A is larger than the number of light emitting elements of the decoration unit 11B. A seven-segment display unit may be replaced by a dot pattern type information display in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and in this case, animation and the like can be displayed in addition to numbers and symbols. Depending on the configuration of the decorative body 11a, the number of light emitting elements 11d mounted on the substrate 11b may be one.

  The arrangement structure of the decoration unit 11A and the decoration unit 11B in the support member 11C will be described with reference to FIG. 210 and FIGS. 212 (a) and 212 (b). In the case of the present embodiment, the decoration unit 11A and the decoration unit 11 are disposed adjacent to each other. By arranging them adjacent to each other, variable display can be performed with a small amount of rotation. In addition, since the light emitting directions of the light emitting elements 11 d are different, it may be possible to prevent light from leaking to the nonconforming decorative body 11 a. For example, in the case where the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is made to emit light, it may be possible to prevent the decoration body 11a of the decoration unit 11B from shining and being conspicuous.

  In the case of this embodiment, the decoration unit 11A and the decoration unit 11B are arranged to intersect with each other, and in particular, the decoration bodies 11a and the substrate 11b intersect with each other at 90 degrees to form an L-shaped arrangement There is. Therefore, by rotating the support member 11C by 90 degrees around the axis 13, the decoration unit 11 located in the display area can be switched as shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and (b). The crossing angle is not limited to 90 degrees, and may be 60 degrees or 120 degrees. Alternatively, the angle may be in the range of 60 degrees to 120 degrees.

  Of the movable unit 11, a space where the decoration unit 11A and the decoration unit 11B are not disposed can be used as an arrangement space for a drive mechanism or the like. This arrangement space may be made invisible by the decoration unit 10 from the outside.

  Referring to FIG. 210, movable unit 12 includes a pair of shutters 12A and 12B. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable unit 12 is an arc shutter mechanism in which the pair of shutters 12A and 12B shifts to the open state and the closed state by rotating in the opposite direction to each other. Although the shutter may be configured to move in parallel without being rotated, there may be a case where the arrangement can be made smaller by using the rotated configuration. In addition, although one shutter may be provided, since the amount of movement at the time of opening and closing becomes large, a configuration in which a pair of shutters is provided is advantageous in this respect.

  Each of the shutters 12A and 12B is a laminated body in which a main body 12a, a light guide member 12b, and a decorative body 12d are laminated in the radial direction of the shaft 13 in these order. The main body 12 a is a member rotatably supported by the shaft 13, and a series of tooth portions 12 a to which the driving force is transmitted is formed in a circumferential direction of the shaft 13 at a part thereof.

  The decorative body 12 d is located at the outermost part, and its surface constitutes an arc-shaped decorative surface centered on the axis 13. The decorative body 12d has a transmitting portion (opening or transparent portion) through which light from the light guiding member 12b is transmitted.

  The substrate 12c is disposed on one side 12b 'of the light guide member 12b. A plurality of light emitting elements are disposed on the substrate 12 c in parallel with the axial direction of the shaft 13. One side of the light guide member 12b on which the substrate 12c is disposed is one side in the opening / closing direction of the shutter in this embodiment, but may be one side in the axial direction of the shaft 13.

  FIG. 208 (a) is an explanatory view of the arrangement of the substrate 12c. As shown in the figure, the light emitting element 12b '(for example, LED) mounted on the substrate 12c is disposed to face the end face of the side 12b', and the light is emitted by the light emitting element 12b '. The light can be incident on the light guide member 12b from ', and can be propagated in the light guide member 12b to cause the light guide member 12b to emit light. Although a configuration in which the light emitting element 12b 'is disposed on the back surface of the light guiding member 12b is also adoptable, the light emitting element 12b' is disposed on the side of the light guiding member 12b as in this embodiment. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the thickness of 12A and 12B. As a result, it is possible to make the outer shape of the movable unit 11 larger, and in some cases, it is possible to make the decorative body 11a larger and perform powerful rendering.

  By providing the light emitting element 12b ', for example, when the pair of shutters 12A and 12B is in the closed state, it is possible to make the light emitting element 12b' emit light and make the pair of shutters 12A and 12B glow. Such an effect may be performed when the pair of shutters 12A and 12B is in the open state. The drive control of the light emitting element 12b 'may be performed synchronously or asynchronously by the pair of shutters 12A and 12B.

  Next, the drive mechanism of the movable units 11 and 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 209, 211 (c) and (d). FIG. 209 shows an exploded perspective view of the rendering device 1, and in particular shows the drive mechanism of the movable units 11 and 12. FIGS. 211 (c) and (d) are views of the rendering device 1 as viewed from the back side, and in the state where the rendering device 1 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the drive mechanism portion which can not be seen from the outside is mainly shown.

  The movable unit 11 is rotated by a drive mechanism having a motor M11 as a drive source, and the movable unit 12 is rotated by a drive mechanism having a motor M12 as a drive source. The motors M11 and M12 are supported by a support frame composed of metal frames 14A to 14C. The shaft 13 is rotatably supported by the support frame via the bearings 15A and 15B, and the support member 11C through which the shaft 13 is inserted is rotatably supported. The main bodies 12a of the shutters 12A and 12B are externally fitted on the outer circumferences of the bearings 15A and 15B and rotatably supported.

  In the case where the bearings 15A and 15B are simply fitted into the supporting frame, it is preferable to take measures to prevent the falling off. As a fall prevention measure, for example, a harness for the motors M11 and M12 or various boards may be wound on the outside of the bearings 15A and 15B to use the harness as a retainer.

  A gear is fixed to the end of the support member 11C, and the driving force of the motor M11 is transmitted to the movable unit 11 through the gear train to rotate the support member 11C. By supporting both of the decoration units 11A and 11B with the support member 11C, variable display of the movable unit 11 becomes possible with one motor M11. Although this is advantageous in terms of cost and simplification of the structure, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decoration units 11A and 11B are individually provided with driving sources and individually moved.

  A gear 16A is attached to the output shaft of the motor M12, and the gear 16A meshes with the gear 16B. The gears 16A, 16B are rotatably supported by the support frame. The teeth 12a of one of the shutters 12A and 12B are engaged with one of the gears 16A and 16B, and the other teeth 12a of the shutters 12A and 12B are engaged with the other of the gears 16A and 16B. Since the gears 16A and 16B rotate in the opposite direction, when the motor M12 is driven, the shutters 12A and 12B can be rotated in the opposite direction, and one motor M12 opens and closes the pair of shutters 12A and 12B. Is possible.

  A light emission effect by the decoration units 11A and 11B will be described. Since the decoration units 11A and 11B include the light emitting elements 11d, light emission effects can be achieved by driving the light emitting elements 11d. The light emission effect can be performed, for example, by blinking, lighting, turning off, or the like of the light emitting element 11 d. In addition, for each of the decoration units 11A and 11B, it is also possible to produce light emission using all of the light emitting elements 11d on the substrate 11b, and possible to use light emitting effects using some of the light emitting elements 11d. It is also possible to produce light emission with the drive timing shifted.

  FIG. 212 (a) exemplifies the case where the decoration unit 11A is positioned in the display area and the light emission effect is performed. The light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is driven behind the decoration 11a, and at least a part of the decoration 11a emits light. The light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B is not driven, and the light emission effect by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B is not performed.

  FIG. 212 (b) exemplifies the case where the decoration unit 11B is positioned in the display area and the light emission effect is performed. The light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B is driven behind the decoration 11a, and at least a part of the decoration 11a emits light. The light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is not driven, and the light emission effect by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is not performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the light emitting element 11d is provided for each of the decorative bodies 11a, it is possible to perform appropriate light emission effects on the respective decorative bodies 11a, and it may be possible to perform various variable display. In particular, the arrangement of the light emitting element 11 d suitable for each decorative body 11 a becomes possible, and it may be easy to perform the light emission effect unique to each decorative body 11 a. The pair of shutters 12A and 12B may be opened not only after switching the decoration units 11A and 11B to be positioned in the display area, but also may be opened during movement so that the player can view the movable unit 11 during movement. Since the decorative body 11a moves on a circular arc, there are cases where the interest can be improved by a three-dimensional effect.

  Since the decoration unit 11A has a 7-segment display unit, it is possible to perform variable display of numbers, symbols, etc. by the 7-segment display unit separately from the variable display by the decoration 11a itself. It can also be made to function as notification of the game state such as.

  By the variable display of the decoration units 11A and 11B, it may be possible to give notice that the reliability such as the jackpot is different. For example, a display with the decoration unit 11B positioned in the display area as a notice with a relatively low reliability and a light emission effect are performed, and a display with the decoration unit 11B positioned in the display area with a notice with a relatively low reliability. A light emission effect may be performed. In the case of reach, the decoration unit 11B may be positioned in the display area, and variable display by the 7-segment display unit may be performed.

  In the example of FIGS. 212 (a) and (b), while the light emission effect by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is performed, the light emission effect by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B is not performed, and the light emission element 11d by the decoration unit 11B is While the light-emitting effect is not performed by the light-emitting elements 11d of the decoration unit 11A during the light-emitting effect, each light-emitting element 11d is dedicated to the corresponding decoration 11a, but is not supported by the light-emitting element 11d of one decoration unit It is also possible to use for light-emitting production of the decoration 11a of the other decoration unit. FIG. 212 (e) shows an example thereof.

  In the example of FIG. 212 (e), the decoration unit 11A is positioned in the display area, and the light emission effect is performed by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A and the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B. In this case, for example, the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A is a light emission effect of variable display by the 7-segment display unit, and the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B is a light emission effect for improving the overall luminance of the decoration 11a of the decoration unit 11A. Good.

  Contrary to the example of FIG. 212 (e), the decoration unit 11B may be positioned in the display area, and the light emission effect may be performed by the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11A and the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B. The light emitting element 11d of the unit 11A may be dedicated to the decoration unit 11A, and when the decoration unit 11B is positioned in the display area, the light emitting effect may be performed only with the light emitting element 11d of the decoration unit 11B. By differentiating the aspect of the light emission effect between the decoration unit 11A and the decoration unit 11B, it may be possible to give a special feeling to the light emission effect of the decoration unit 11A.

<Application to other game consoles>
The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as slot machines and enclosed game machines, in addition to pachinko machines. An example of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described below with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. FIG. 213 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 213 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 213) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  A chance button 1100 is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 1032. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player) to be described later, and is configured by a plurality of buttons.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 214 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 214 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 213, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a generic name of a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 1050, and more specifically, the determination (call) button 1046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 1050 Call up) An upper selection button 1046 U, a lower selection button 1046 D, a left selection button 1046 L, a right selection button 1046 R provided separately on the left side of the button 1046 O, and a cancel provided separately on the right of the decision (call) button 1046 O And a button 1046C.

<Summary of the embodiment>
A1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Movable means (e.g. 2A);
Mounting means (e.g. 2B) to which the movable means is at least attached;
A game console equipped with
The attachment means is a means comprising a first substrate (eg 27),
The movable means is a means provided with a second substrate (for example 28A),
The second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by at least a first flexible harness (for example, FH1),
The movable means is a means provided with guiding means (for example, 23f) for guiding the first flexible harness,
The guiding means is a means provided with an inlet (for example, 23 d) of the first flexible harness,
The guiding means is a means provided with an outlet (for example, 23e) of the first flexible harness,
The guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness between the inlet and the outlet.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the movable means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the first flexible harness from being entangled by the operation of the movable means. Also, in some cases, the first flexible harness can be prevented from being shown to the player more than necessary.

A2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first flexible harness is a harness provided with a plurality of wires (for example, WR),
The plurality of wires are wires arranged in the lateral direction (for example, d12) of the first flexible harness,
The guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness so that the short direction is the front-rear direction (for example, d1) of the game console.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the direction of the player's line of sight may be parallel to the first flexible harness, and the first flexible harness may not be noticeable.

A3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first flexible harness is configured such that the short direction is the front-rear direction of the game console in at least a part (e.g., P1) of a portion not guided by the guiding means.
The first flexible harness is at a position where at least a portion (for example, P1) is visible to the player by the movement of the movable means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the direction of the player's line of sight may be parallel to the first flexible harness, and the first flexible harness may not be noticeable.

A4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable means is a means provided with a third substrate (for example 28B),
The third substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by at least a second flexible harness (for example, FH2).
The guiding means is a means for also guiding the second flexible harness between the inlet and the outlet.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, by increasing the number of flexible harnesses, the number of wires of one flexible harness may be reduced. As a result, the flexible harness may be thin, and as a result, it is noticeable It may be difficult. Moreover, it may be hard to be conspicuous by guiding two flexible harnesses in the same part. In addition, even when the movable means performs a complicated operation, the two flexible harnesses may not be easily entangled.

A5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first substrate is a substrate to which the first flexible harness can be connected at a first position (for example, 27a),
The second substrate is a substrate to which the first flexible harness can be connected at a second position (for example, 28Aa),
The first substrate is a substrate to which the second flexible harness can be connected at a third position (for example, 27b),
The third substrate is a substrate to which the second flexible harness can be connected at a fourth position (for example, 28 Ba),
The length of the first flexible harness from the first position to the inlet is shorter than the length of the second flexible harness from the third position to the inlet,
The length of the first flexible harness from the second position to the outlet is longer than the length of the second flexible harness from the fourth position to the outlet.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, since the lengths of the two flexible harnesses can be adjusted to the same degree, there are cases in which each play of the two flexible harnesses can be equally held according to the operation of the movable means. Note that the inlet and outlet may be reversed depending on how the standard is taken.

A6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first flexible harness is a harness having a first number of wires,
The second flexible harness is a harness provided with a second number of wires,
The second number is a number different from the first number.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, erroneous connection of the two flexible harnesses may be prevented in some cases.

A7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third substrate is a substrate having a first surface and a second surface (for example, LS) opposite to the first surface (for example, US),
The second flexible harness is a harness connectable to the third substrate on the side of the first surface,
The first flexible harness is a harness passing through the side of the second surface,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the friction between the first flexible harness and the first surface of the third substrate may prevent damage to the first surface by the operation of the movable means.

  The first surface may be a surface on which a wiring pattern is formed. In some cases, it is possible to protect the wiring pattern and to prevent damage to the first flexible harness due to the wiring pattern. The second surface may be a surface on which a wiring pattern is formed.

A8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Equipped with effect display means (for example, 208) capable of executing effect display;
At least a part (for example, 20) of the movable means is movably positioned on the front side of the effect display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the flexible harness can be made inconspicuous in a portion that is likely to receive the attention of the player.

A9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

A10. The game console of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, 1000),
It is characterized by

  A11. The first flexible harness may be disposed to vertically overlap the second flexible harness. The first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be folded back halfway to reverse the upper and lower positions. The first substrate may be a relay substrate. The first flexible harness may include wiring for the LED. This LED may perform light emission effects. The second flexible harness may include wiring for the LED. This LED may perform light emission effects. The movable means is means including at least a first movable part (for example, 20) and a second movable part (for example, 23), and the second movable part is the first movable part and the attachment means. And may be provided with the guiding means. The second movable portion may rotate at least, and the first movable portion may not rotate. Apart from the guiding means, the mounting means may also comprise guiding means for guiding the harness. The guiding means may be means for guiding three or more flexible harnesses. The first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be harnesses connected to any one of the second substrate and the third substrate. Further, each end of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness on the first substrate side may be connected to a substrate different from the first substrate. The combination of substrates to be connected is arbitrary. The third substrate may be a control substrate. Not only a configuration in which only the first substrate or the second substrate is interposed between an electronic component such as an LED mounted on the first substrate or the second substrate to the third substrate, It may be configured to relay via one or more other substrates. The flexible harness may include the wiring of the LED and the wiring other than the LED, or only the wiring other than the LED. For example, the flexible harness may include a wire for transmitting a signal such as a control signal related to a movable operation, or transmit a signal such as a detection signal of a sensor related to position detection of the movable means or a sensor related to fraud Wiring may be included. The first substrate may be disposed on the rear side of the attachment means or on the front side in the front-rear direction of the game console. When arranged on the front side, the first substrate may be difficult to see by the movable means, another movable means, or a decoration means. The guiding means may be means for guiding the first harness so that the short direction is the left-right direction of the game stand. In this case, for example, it may be possible to make the player less noticeable by passing the first harness behind the movable means in the front-rear direction of the game console. The play (sag) of the harness may be formed only on the side between the outlet and the second substrate or the third substrate, or may be formed only on the first substrate side from the inlet. It may be formed by both or both. Either of these may be selected according to the strength of the guidance of the harness between the inlet and the outlet. The inlet and the outlet may be closed at the periphery or may be partially open notches. In the case of a notch, it may be a hook or the like. The movable means may be movable means on the frame side of the pachinko machine, or may be movable means on the game board side. The movable means may be movable means of a slot machine.

A21. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first substrate (e.g. 27);
A second substrate (e.g. 28A),
A third substrate (e.g. 28B),
Guiding means (e.g. 23f);
A game console equipped with
The second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a first flexible harness (for example, FH1),
The third substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a second flexible harness (for example, FH2),
The guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness.
The guiding means is means for guiding the second flexible harness as well.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness. Moreover, since two flexible harnesses are guided by one guide means, it may be possible to effectively utilize the space.

A22. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the second substrate changes, the first flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The second substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means. The second substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A23. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the third substrate changes, the second flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The third substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means, and the third substrate is attached to the movable means to which the second substrate is attached. The position may change depending on the user. The third substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A24. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The guiding means is a means capable of changing the position,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even if the position of the guiding means changes, the connection between the first substrate and the second substrate and the third substrate is performed by the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be possible to maintain the state. The guiding means may be changed in position by being provided at a part of the movable means, and the guiding means is a movable means to which the second substrate or the third substrate is attached. The position may be changed by being attached to The guide means may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A25. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). Is configured to
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may not be easily separated.

A26. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A27. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A28. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

A29. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a slot machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

  The first flexible harness may be bound by the second flexible harness and a binding band. The first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may constitute part of a bifurcated flexible harness.

  The second substrate may be a substrate electrically connected to the first effect means. In this case, the first effect means may be display means (liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, segment display device, one or more LEDs), movable means (motor, solenoid), sound output means Good. The second substrate may be a substrate mounted with a driver for driving the first effect means.

  The third substrate may be a substrate electrically connected to the second effect means. In this case, the second effect means may be display means (liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, segment display device, one or more LEDs), movable means (motor, solenoid), sound output means Good. The third substrate may be a substrate mounted with a driver for driving the second effect means.

  In addition, at least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). It may be configured not to.

  In addition, a second substrate is provided with a first substrate, a second substrate, and a guiding means, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness, and the second substrate is a second substrate. The flexible harness may be a substrate connected to the first substrate, the guiding means may be means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means may be means for guiding the second flexible harness.

In addition, the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the fourth substrate, and the guiding means are provided, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness. The fourth board is a board connected to the third board by the second flexible harness, the guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means is the second flexible harness May also be means for guiding.
In addition, at least a part of the first flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. In addition, at least a part of the second flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. When the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness respectively bend, the bending position may be the same or different between the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be

A31. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first substrate (e.g. 27);
A second substrate (e.g. 28A),
A third substrate (e.g. 28B),
Guiding means (e.g. 23f);
A game console equipped with
The second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a first flexible harness (for example, FH1),
The third substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a second flexible harness (for example, FH2),
The guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness.
The guiding means is a means for guiding the second flexible harness,
The second substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness. Moreover, since two flexible harnesses are guided by one guide means, it may be possible to effectively utilize the space.

A32. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the second substrate changes, the first flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The second substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means. The second substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A33. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the third substrate changes, the second flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The third substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means, and the third substrate is attached to the movable means to which the second substrate is attached. The position may change depending on the user. The third substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A34. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The guiding means is a means capable of changing the position,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even if the position of the guiding means changes, the connection between the first substrate and the second substrate and the third substrate is performed by the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be possible to maintain the state. The guiding means may be changed in position by being provided at a part of the movable means, and the guiding means is a movable means to which the second substrate or the third substrate is attached. The position may be changed by being attached to The guide means may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A35. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). Is configured to
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may not be easily separated.

A36. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A37. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A38. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

A39. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a slot machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

  The first flexible harness may be bound by the second flexible harness and a binding band. The first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may constitute part of a bifurcated flexible harness.

  The display means may be a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a segment display device, one or a plurality of LEDs, and the second substrate is a substrate on which a driver for driving the display means is mounted. May be

  In addition, at least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). It may be configured not to.

  In addition, a second substrate is provided with a first substrate, a second substrate, and a guiding means, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness, and the second substrate is a second substrate. The flexible harness may be a substrate connected to the first substrate, the guiding means may be means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means may be means for guiding the second flexible harness.

In addition, the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the fourth substrate, and the guiding means are provided, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness. The fourth board is a board connected to the third board by the second flexible harness, the guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means is the second flexible harness May also be means for guiding.
In addition, at least a part of the first flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. In addition, at least a part of the second flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. When the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness respectively bend, the bending position may be the same or different between the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be

A41. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first substrate (e.g. 27);
A second substrate (e.g. 28A),
A third substrate (e.g. 28B),
Guiding means (e.g. 23f);
A game console equipped with
The second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a first flexible harness (for example, FH1),
The third substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a second flexible harness (for example, FH2),
The guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness.
The guiding means is a means for guiding the second flexible harness,
The second substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the first effect means,
The third substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the second effect means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness. Moreover, since two flexible harnesses are guided by one guide means, it may be possible to effectively utilize the space.

A42. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first effect means is a first display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the space may be effectively utilized for the flexible harness related to the display means.

A43. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second effect means is a second display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the space may be effectively utilized for the flexible harness related to the display means.

A44. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the second substrate changes, the first flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The second substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means. The second substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A45. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third substrate is a substrate whose position can be changed,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even when the position of the third substrate changes, the second flexible harness may be able to maintain the connection with the first substrate. The third substrate may be changed in position by being attached to the movable means, and the third substrate is attached to the movable means to which the second substrate is attached. The position may change depending on the user. The third substrate may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A46. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The guiding means is a means capable of changing the position,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even if the position of the guiding means changes, the connection between the first substrate and the second substrate and the third substrate is performed by the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be possible to maintain the state. The guiding means may be changed in position by being provided at a part of the movable means, and the guiding means is a movable means to which the second substrate or the third substrate is attached. The position may be changed by being attached to The guide means may be a substrate whose position does not change.

A47. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). Is configured to
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may not be easily separated.

A48. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A49. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second portion is a portion guided by the guiding means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the combination of the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may be improved.

A50. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

A51. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a slot machine characterized by the configuration related to the flexible harness.

  The first flexible harness may be bound by the second flexible harness and the binding band. The first flexible harness and the second flexible harness may constitute part of a bifurcated flexible harness.

  The first effect means may be display means (liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, segment display device, one or more LEDs), movable means (motor, solenoid), sound output means . The second substrate may be a substrate mounted with a driver for driving the first effect means.

  The second effect means may be display means (liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, segment display device, one or more LEDs), movable means (motor, solenoid), sound output means . The third substrate may be a substrate mounted with a driver for driving the second effect means.

  In addition, at least a portion of the first flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") is in contact with at least a portion of the second flexible harness (hereinafter referred to as "second portion"). It may be configured not to.

  In addition, a second substrate is provided with a first substrate, a second substrate, and a guiding means, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness, and the second substrate is a second substrate. The flexible harness may be a substrate connected to the first substrate, the guiding means may be means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means may be means for guiding the second flexible harness.

In addition, the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the fourth substrate, and the guiding means are provided, and the second substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by the first flexible harness. The fourth board is a board connected to the third board by the second flexible harness, the guiding means is a means for guiding the first flexible harness, and the guiding means is the second flexible harness May also be means for guiding.
In addition, at least a part of the first flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. In addition, at least a part of the second flexible harness may be guided (for example, held) by the guiding unit so as to bend. When the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness respectively bend, the bending position may be the same or different between the first flexible harness and the second flexible harness. It may be

B1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game board (e.g. 200) having a flow area where the game ball can flow down;
A ball entering means (for example, U1) capable of entering a game ball which has flowed down the flow-down area;
A game console equipped with
The ball entering means is a means provided with a first opening / closing means (for example, 63),
The first opening and closing means is a means that is at least capable of opening and closing a first passage (for example, RT2) of the gaming ball,
In the first opening / closing means, a gap (hereinafter referred to as a "first gap") (for example, W1) when the first opening / closing means is in a closed state (a game ball passes the first passage) It is a means to become a gap that does not
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the ball entry means. When the first opening and closing means is in the closed state, a gap through which the game ball does not pass is formed, and the pressure on the game ball is reduced by the gap to reduce the ball of the gaming ball by the first opening and closing means. In some cases, biting can be prevented, and in some cases clogging of the ball due to biting in the ball can be prevented.

  In addition to opening and closing the first passage, the first opening / closing means may be capable of maintaining an open state, or may be capable of maintaining a closed state. The first opening and closing means may be of shutter type or pivot type. As the shutter type, for example, the opening and closing means may be moved in parallel, and as the rotation type, for example, the opening and closing means may be rotated.

  The gap may be partially formed. That is, when the first opening / closing means is in the closed state, the first passage may have a gap at least in part, and the remaining part may be closed. Even in this case, there are cases where the pressure on the gaming balls can be reduced by the gaps to prevent the bite.

B2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The ball entering means is a means provided with a second opening / closing means (for example, 62),
The second opening and closing means is a means that is at least capable of opening and closing a second passage (for example, RT1) of the gaming ball,
The first passage is a passage through which gaming balls having passed through the second passage can pass.
In the second opening / closing means, a gap (hereinafter referred to as a "second gap") (for example, W2) when the second opening / closing means is in a closed state, the game ball passes through the second passage It is a means to become a gap that does not
The first gap is a gap larger than the second gap (for example, W1> W2),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second opening / closing means is an opening / closing means for passing the game ball which has flowed down the flow-down area outside the first opening / closing means, and is easily accessible to an unauthorized person. There is a case. Therefore, there are cases where it is difficult to make a wrong prize because the gap is small. On the other hand, since the first opening / closing means is located inside the ball entering means compared to the second opening / closing means, it may be difficult for an unauthorized person to access, an environment in which space is limited and easy to bite. In some cases, it is possible to prevent ball bites by reducing the pressure due to the gap.

  When the second opening and closing means is in the closed state, the presence of the gap may prevent the bite by the second opening and closing means. The gap may be a partial gap.

  The second opening and closing means may be of shutter type or pivot type. As the shutter type, for example, the opening and closing means may be moved in parallel, and as the rotation type, for example, the opening and closing means may be rotated. Both the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means may be shutter-type, or both may be rotary-type, and one may be shutter-type and the other may be shutter-type.

  The second opening / closing means may be a means having no gap when the second opening / closing means is in a closed state. In some cases, it is possible to prevent fraudulent prizes more reliably.

  The second opening / closing means is an opening / closing member which moves back and forth with respect to the wall portion of the second passage, and in the closed state, the end of the opening / closing member is in contact with the wall portion. It is also good. There may be a configuration in which the entire end of the opening / closing member abuts on the wall without a gap overall, or a partial abutment causes a partial gap (a gap in a partial gap) A certain configuration).

B3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first opening and closing means is a shutter type opening and closing means,
The ball entering means is a means capable of guiding the gaming ball to a first area (for example, RV) when the first opening / closing means is in the open state,
The ball entering means is a means capable of guiding the gaming ball to a second area (for example, RH) different from the first area when the first opening / closing means is in the closed state,
A state (e.g., a big hit) that is more advantageous to the player when the gaming ball is induced to the first area is given to the player than when the gaming ball is induced to the second area,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, although the second opening and closing means is an important opening and closing means related to an advantageous state, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the ball bite.

B4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second passage is a passage that inclines downward in the left-right direction of the game console,
The ball entering means is a means provided with a first detecting means (for example, 64A) capable of detecting gaming balls passing through the second passage,
When the first opening and closing means is in the closed state, the gaming ball detected by the first detection means is guided to the second area through the upper side of the first opening and closing means. Yes,
A distance (for example, L1) from the end of the first detection means to the start end of the first opening / closing means in the flow direction of the game balls is a distance smaller than one game ball.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are many cases where the space inside the ball entering means is small in many cases, and by preventing the bite of the second opening / closing means, the gaming ball flows backward and the position of the first detection means May be prevented from reaching again. Moreover, according to this configuration, the upper side of the first opening and closing means may be able to function as the bottom of the ball passage, and the opening and closing means may be used as the passage forming means.

  In addition, a detection means (for example, 64B) capable of detecting the gaming ball guided to the first area and capable of giving an advantageous state to the player may be provided. Further, detection means (for example, 64C) capable of detecting the gaming ball induced to the second area may be provided.

B5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The ball entering means is a means provided with a first decoration means (for example, 61),
The first decoration means is a means that constitutes at least a part of the wall of the first passage (hereinafter, referred to as "first wall") (for example, 61b),
The first decoration means is a means that constitutes at least a part of the wall of the second passage (hereinafter, referred to as "second wall") (for example, 61a),
The first opening and closing means is a means capable of advancing and retreating with respect to the first wall portion,
The second opening and closing means is a means capable of advancing and retreating with respect to the second wall portion.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the wall portion of the first passage and the wall portion of the second passage can be constituted by a common member, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The first decoration means may be a front decoration member positioned behind the transparent plate member of the front frame door. Further, the first wall portion and the second wall portion may be respectively configured by separate members.

B6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first opening and closing means is a means having a first inclination (for example, 63 d) which becomes thinner toward the tip in the opening and closing direction of the thickness of the first opening and closing means,
The first opening and closing means is a means having a second inclination (for example, 63e) which is inclined so that the first gap widens toward the downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where ball biting can be prevented more reliably by the first inclination and the second inclination, and the game to the first area or the second area may be performed by the second inclination. In some cases, it is possible to guide the ball more reliably.

B7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
When the gaming ball is in contact with the end of the first opening and closing means in a state where the first opening and closing means is changed from the open state to the closed state, Means with contactable contacts (eg 65),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to more reliably guide the gaming ball to the first area or the second area by the contact portion. The contact portion may be disposed between the first passage and the third passage.

B8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second opening / closing means is a shutter-type opening / closing means that moves in and out of the wall of the second passage,
The wall portion of the second passage is a means having a convex portion (for example, 61c) formed at a position above the tip in the opening / closing direction of the second opening / closing means,
The convex portion is in a position where it can contact the gaming ball when the tip of the second opening / closing means is in contact with the gaming ball.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the bite by the second opening and closing means.

B9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  B10. The ball entering means may be provided with another winning means (for example, 234). The other winning means may be pivotable. The shape of the contact portion may be spherical at the end of the contact portion. The first area may be a winning area of a V-shaped machine which determines a probability change state when a game ball enters. The ball entering means is a second detecting means (for example, 64B) capable of detecting gaming balls entering the first area, and a third detecting means capable of detecting gaming balls entering the third area (E.g. 64C). In this case, the first detection means (for example, 64A) may not be provided, and the same effects as in the case where the first detection means is obtained can be obtained with only the second detection means and the third detection means. There are times when you can. In other words, the winning balls should be configured to be able to provide an advantageous gaming state when the gaming ball is detected in any of the detection means, and further, when the gaming ball is detected in the second detection means. Can. The above embodiment may be applied to a feather (two kinds of winning devices). The opening and closing means may be an opening and closing member, and the gap may be formed between the end of the opening and closing member and a wall, or may be formed at a portion other than the end of the opening and closing member It may be For example, it may be formed around the opening and closing member, or, for example, a gap may be provided in a direction orthogonal to the operating direction of the opening and closing member. The above embodiment may be applied to the use of a game ball in a presentation device of a slot machine.

C1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A gaming board (eg 200) with a gaming area (eg 124) and a non-playing area;
Detection means (e.g. SR3) capable of performing detection related to error notification;
A game console equipped with
The gaming area is an area including an area where gaming balls flow down,
The non-playing area is an area that does not include the area where the game ball flows down,
The gaming board is provided with a through hole (for example, 201b) in the non-playing area,
The detection means is a means provided in the through hole,
Lid means (for example, 209A) capable of covering at least a part of the front side of the through hole,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game console having features on the game board. Further, there are cases where the lid member can prevent the detection means from being removed from the front side. The lid means may be means attached to the game board, or may be means separated from the game board. The means separated from the game board may be, for example, a transparent plate member of a front frame door or a means attached to the front frame door.

C2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming board has a decorative surface on the surface,
In the gaming board, a character display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") (for example, PR1) is displayed on the decorative surface.
The first display is a display that at least suggests that the detection means is provided on the game console,
The first display is a display displayed in the game area (for example, 201a),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make it difficult to understand where the detection means is actually arranged while notifying the player or an unauthorized person of the presence of the detection means. The position of the first display is preferably a place where a player or an unauthorized person can be seen with certainty. The first display may be a display displayed in a guide area capable of guiding the launched gaming ball. The guide region may be a region including at least a region between the inner rail and the outer rail, or may be a region along the outer rail. The first display may be a display displayed by a member attached to the front frame. The first display may be a display displayed by the display means. The first display is configured to be displayed on the display means during demonstration of the display means, at timing when it is easy to get go (for example, a period before V winning), timing before and after including a prepaid card removal notification, etc. It may be. The game console may include a second detection unit (for example, SR2), and the first display may be a display that at least suggests that the second detection unit is provided.

C1 '. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The following alternative configurations are also possible. That is,
A gaming board (eg, 200) comprising a gaming area (eg, 124) and a non-playing area;
Detection means (e.g. SR3) capable of performing detection related to error notification;
A game console equipped with
The gaming board has a decorative surface on the surface,
The gaming board has a character display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") (for example, PR1 ') on the decoration surface,
The first display at least suggests that the detection means is provided on the game console,
The detection means is a means provided in the lower right portion of the game board,
The first display is a display displayed on the non-playing area other than the lower right portion of the gaming board.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make it difficult to understand where the detection means is actually arranged while notifying the player or an unauthorized person of the presence of the detection means.

C3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming board is a character display on the decorative surface, and a display different from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) (for example, PR2) is performed.
The second display is a display that calls attention to the player,
The second display is a display displayed in the vicinity of the first display.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to confirm the alerting by the second display together with the notification by the first display. The second display may be a display displayed next to the first display, or may be the same area as the first display (for example, the guidance area 201a). Further, the first display and the second display may be displayed on the passage path of the game ball, and there may be no nail between these displays. The second display may be performed by display means. Display means may perform at least one of the first display and the second display.

C4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The lid means is a means provided with a display area (for example, 209b) for displaying information;
The display area is an area covering at least a part of an area in front of the through hole.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there is a case in which an unauthorized person or the like can not notice the position of the detection means due to the blinding by the display area. The display area may be a surface that is at least partially partitioned by (or by a step from the periphery) a peripheral rib (for example, 209a). In some cases, it is easy to put a certificate or the like in the display area. The display area may be a display related to a model such as a specification, a name of the model, a QR code (registered trademark) related to manufacturing, a warning, a part of a game board attaching / detaching method, or the like. The through holes are located in the non-playing area, and may not draw attention from the player, so the display area may be displayed meaningless even if it is shown to the player. The lid means may be provided with information display means (for example, 210, 212, 214, 216, 218). The information display means may be provided on the surface (for example, the front) of the lid means. The surface may be a surface covering at least a part of a region in front of the through hole. The information display means may be a special drawing substrate (for example, 212, 214). The lid means may cover all or a part of the front side of the through hole. When covering a part, an inspector such as a hall clerk may be able to view a part of the detection means, and the part not covered by the lid means can be seen at a position where the front frame door is opened. It may be.

C5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming area is an area formed by rail means (for example, 209) provided in the non-playing area,
The lid means is the rail means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the rail means can be used also as means for covering the through hole.

C6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The game ball is provided with at least winning means (for example, 226, 234, SH2) that can be won,
The winning means is a means provided at least in the lower right portion of the gaming area,
The detection means is a means provided in the lower right portion of the non-playing area,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the detection can be made in the vicinity of the portion where fraud is likely to be performed, and in some cases the certainty of detection can be improved.

C7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming board is attached to a frame (for example, 104),
A detection means (for example, SR2) other than the detection means is attached to the frame,
The other detection means is a means capable of performing detection related to error notification.
It is characterized by

C8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The detection means is a means for detecting vibration.
It is characterized by

C9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The detection means is a means for detecting magnetism.
It is characterized by

C10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
When the detection is performed by the detection means, the game can not be continued,
It is characterized by

C11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  C12. The backside lid means may be provided on the back side of the through hole avoiding the wiring portion. The back cover means may be a back member on which a substrate or the like is disposed. The area in which the first detection means is provided may be an area that is difficult to be viewed from the front by the front frame during a game, and is an area that can be confirmed by a hall clerk when the front frame door is opened. It is also good. The discharge passage of the gaming ball may be a passage capable of guiding the gaming ball to the center.

C13. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A gaming board (eg 200) with a gaming area (eg 124) and a non-playing area;
Detection means (e.g. SR3) capable of performing detection related to error notification;
Rail means (eg 209);
A game console equipped with
The gaming area is an area including an area where gaming balls flow down,
The non-playing area is an area that does not include the area where the game ball flows down,
The rail means is a means provided on the game board,
The launched game ball can flow down along the inside of the rail means,
The gaming board is provided with a through hole (for example, 201b) in the non-playing area,
At least a part of the detection means is configured to be located in the through hole,
The rail means is a means capable of covering at least a part of the front side of the through hole.
It is characterized by

C21. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game board (eg 200),
Detection means (e.g. SR3);
A structure (for example, 209A, the game member A in FIG. 216),
A game console equipped with
The structure is a structure provided on the game board,
The gaming board is a gaming board provided with an opening (for example, 201b),
At least a part of the detection means is located in the opening,
The structure is a structure capable of covering at least a part of the front side of the opening.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game console having features on the game board. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the detection means from being removed illegally.

C22. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure including display means (for example, 209b),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the position of the detection means may not be noticed by an unauthorized person or the like by the display means.

C23. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is a means including an LED,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the structure may be able to be used as a rendering means.

C24. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure including movable means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the structure may be able to be used as a rendering means.

C25. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure capable of contacting a game ball (eg, FIG. 216 (a)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the structure may prevent the detection means from coming into contact with the game ball, and may reduce false detection of the detection means.

C26. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure incapable of contacting the game ball (eg, FIG. 216 (b)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection of the detection means can be reduced.

C27. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The game board is a game board having a game area and a non-game area,
The opening is an opening provided in the non-playing area (for example, FIG. 37, FIG. 216 (b)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection of the detection means can be reduced.

C28. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a through hole (for example, 201b),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to position the detection means at the opening.

C29. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a notch,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to position the detection means at the opening.

C30. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine having a feature on the game board.

  The structure may be, for example, a rail unit, a lamp unit, a symbol display unit, a certificate stamp, a certificate sticking unit, an electric chew unit (with an LED), an attacker unit (with an LED), a ball passage unit, and a center part. It may be a unit, a gate decoration unit or the like.

  The opening may be a through hole. The through hole may be a hole whose periphery is closed, or a hole whose periphery is not closed (for example, a notch). The shape of the opening may be rectangular, circular, rounded rectangular, elliptical, or any other shape. The inner wall of the opening may have a flat surface or a curved surface.

  The other part of the structure whose part is located in the opening may be located in front of the opening, and the other part may be located behind the opening. The whole may be located in the opening.

  The opening may be provided in the game area or may be provided in the non-play area.

C31. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game board (eg 200),
A first structure (for example, 209A, the game member A in FIG. 216 (b));
A second structure (e.g., SR3, gaming member B in FIG. 216 (b));
A game console equipped with
The first structure is a structure provided on the game board,
The gaming board is a gaming board provided with an opening (for example, 201b),
At least a portion of the second structure is located in the opening,
The first structure is a structure capable of covering at least a part of the front side of the opening.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game console having features on the game board. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the second structure from being removed illegally.

C32. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first structure is a rail unit (eg, 209A),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rail unit may be used as a means for covering the opening.

C33. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second structure is a detecting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the detection means from being removed illegally.

C34. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The detection means is a means capable of detection related to notification of an error.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the unauthorized removal of the detection means that is easily targeted by an unauthorized person.

C35. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second structure is a structure including a harness,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the harness from being removed improperly.

C36. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The detection means is a means capable of detecting a game ball,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the unauthorized removal of the detection means that is easily targeted by an unauthorized person.

C37. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The structure is a structure incapable of contacting the game ball (eg, FIG. 216 (b)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection of the detection means can be reduced.

C38. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The game board is a game board having a game area and a non-game area,
The opening is an opening provided in the non-playing area (for example, FIG. 37, FIG. 216 (b)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection of the detection means can be reduced.

C39. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a through hole (for example, 201b),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second structure may be easily positioned in the opening.

C40. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a notch,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second structure may be easily positioned in the opening.

C40. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine having a feature on the game board.

  The first structure includes, for example, a rail unit, a lamp unit, a symbol display unit, a certificate stamp, a certificate sticking unit, an electric chew unit (with an LED), an attacker unit (with an LED), a ball passage unit, It may be a center character unit, a gate decoration unit or the like.

  In addition, the second structure is a detection means (vibration sensor, magnetic sensor, magnetic field sensor, etc.) related to error notification, a game ball detection means for detecting a game ball (common view gate sensor, special view 1 starting opening sensor Special opening 2 start opening sensor, attacker sensor, V area passage sensor, general winning opening sensor, etc.), a harness, a substrate, etc. may be used.

  The opening may be a through hole. The through hole may be a hole whose periphery is closed, or a hole whose periphery is not closed (for example, a notch). The shape of the opening may be rectangular, circular, rounded rectangular, elliptical, or any other shape. The inner wall of the opening may have a flat surface or a curved surface.

  Another part of the first structure whose part is located in the opening may be located in front of the opening, and another part is located behind the opening. Or all may be located in the opening.

  The opening may be provided in the game area or may be provided in the non-play area.

D1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Multiple ball passages (eg RT4, RT11, RT12)
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a first ball passage (eg, RT4)
And
At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a second ball passage (eg, RT11)
And
The second ball passage is a ball passage different from the first ball passage,
The game ball having passed through the first ball passage can merge with the game ball passing through the second ball passage (for example, 206c),
The first ball passage is a ball passage that can be attached from the front side of the game board,
At least a part of the second ball passage is provided at a position where it can be viewed from the front side of the game board when the first ball passage is detached (for example, FIG. 194).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console having a feature in the ball passage. Moreover, the second ball passage may be confirmed by removing the first passage, and it may be easier for a store clerk to check the ball passage. In addition, there may be cases where the area behind the area to which the first ball passage is attached can be effectively used. Moreover, one ball passage may not be enlarged.

  The entire second ball passage may be provided at a position where it can be viewed from the front side of the game board when the first ball passage is removed.

D2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a third ball passage (e.g., RT 12),
The third ball passage is a ball passage different from the first ball passage,
The inlet (eg, 206b) of the third ball passage is configured to align with the outlet (eg, 66a) of the first ball passage,
The third ball passage is a ball passage integrally formed with the second ball passage (for example, 206),
After passing through the third ball passage, the gaming ball having passed through the first ball passage can merge with the gaming ball passing through the second ball passage (for example, 206c).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, when the third ball passage is not present, when the first ball passage is removed, the game balls in the confluence portion of the passage are likely to be spilled. Because the merging portion of the ball passage is on one side by the presence, the game ball may be difficult to spill.

  The third ball passage and the second ball passage may be joined together. The alignment between the inlet and the outlet may be connected to, connected to, or separated from each other. When separated, the separation distance may be less than the diameter of the gaming ball so that the gaming ball does not spill. The alignment between the inlet and the outlet may be a configuration in which the ball passages are continuously connected, and the shape of the passages may be linear at the alignment site, or may be a non-meandering configuration.

D3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second ball passage is a ball passage removable from the rear side of the game board,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, maintenance and the like of the second ball passage may be possible from the rear side of the gaming board.

D4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming ball having passed through the first ball passage can merge with the gaming ball passing through the second ball passage from a position above the second ball passage (for example, FIG. 194).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the front and back sides of the game board may be more easily removed from the front and rear sides with respect to attaching and detaching the ball passage, so the gaming ball having passed through the first ball passage detachable from the front side In the configuration in which the second ball passage merges from above, the gaming ball may not easily stay in the first ball passage when the first ball passage is removed.

D5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first ball passage is a ball passage provided in the ball entering means (for example, U1),
The ball entering means is a means provided with a first winning means (for example, 234),
The first ball passage is a ball passage through which a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a "first game ball") entering the first winning means can pass.
The second ball passage is a ball passage through which game balls (hereinafter referred to as "second game balls") entering the general winning opening (for example, 226) can pass.
The first ball passage is a ball passage provided with a first gaming ball detection means (for example, 64D),
The second ball passage is a ball passage provided with second game ball detection means (for example, 208),
The first gaming ball can be detected by the first gaming ball detection means before joining the second gaming ball,
The second gaming ball can be detected by the second gaming ball detection means before joining the first gaming ball.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent a situation where the gaming ball is not detected when attaching or detaching the first ball passage.

  The second ball passage may be a ball passage in communication with the out port, and in this case, the second game ball detection means may not be provided. The first game ball detection means may be arranged in the third ball passage.

D6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The ball entering means is a means provided with a second winning means (for example, SH2),
When the gaming ball having entered the second winning means has passed the first area (for example, RV), it is possible to give the player an advantageous gaming state.
If the gaming ball entering the second winning means does not pass the first area, the advantageous gaming state is not given to the player,
The game ball entering the second winning means is configured not to pass through the first ball passage,
The game ball entering the second winning means is configured not to pass through the second ball passage,
The game ball having entered the second winning means does not pass through the third ball passage,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the ball entry means comprises a plurality of prize means, and the second prize means is an important prize means as to whether or not the player is given an advantageous gaming state. In some cases, it is possible to reduce problems with regard to the gameability by discharging the game balls independently without merging them with another ball passage.

  The gaming ball having entered the second winning means may be merged with any one of the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage. The ball passage can be made compact. Moreover, the position to join can also be designed suitably. For example, it may be a position downstream of a junction where the third ball passage and the second ball passage merge, or may be the junction, or upstream from the junction It may be

D7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  D8. The second ball passage may be wider than the first ball passage. It becomes easy to join the game balls. Conversely, the second ball passage may be narrower or the same width as the first ball passage. The width may be a width in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the ball passage. The junction point of the third ball passage and the second ball passage may be configured to be wider than points other than the junction point. In at least a part of the section of the first ball passage, a rib may be formed projecting from the inner wall of the first ball passage. In at least a part of the section of the second ball passage, a rib may be formed which protrudes from the inner wall of the second ball passage. Each of the ribs may be provided in the entire section. Each of the ribs may be provided on the downstream side of the detection position of the gaming ball. The ribs may extend in the longitudinal direction of the ball passage. The first winning means may be a pivoting door, and the second winning means may be a projecting / retracting shutter, but the door or the shutter can be arbitrarily designed. However, when a plurality of winning means are provided vertically, if the upper winning means (for example, 234) is of the shutter type, it is difficult to be guided to the winning area of the lower winning means (for example, SH2). If it is the lower side is preferable.

E1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game console comprising movable means (e.g. 11) capable of performing variable display by a plurality of decorative bodies (e.g. 11a 11a 11b 11a),
The movable means comprises a first light emitting means (e.g. 11 d of 11 A),
The movable means comprises a second light emitting means (e.g. 11 b 11 d)
At least one of the plurality of decorative bodies is a first decorative body (e.g. 11a 11a),
At least one of the plurality of decorative bodies is a second decorative body (for example, 11a of 11B),
The second decorative body is a decorative body different from the first decorative body,
The first decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing a light emission effect by the first light emitting means,
The second decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing a light emission effect by the second light emitting means,
The second decorative body is a decorative body in which the light emission effect by the first light emitting means is not performed,
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means separate from the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the movable means. In addition, by providing a light emitting means for each decoration, it may be possible to perform a variety of variable display.

  The first decorative body is a decorative body constituting one or a plurality of seven-segment displays, and is a decorative body capable of performing variable display other than the variable display by the light emission effect. It is also good. There are cases where it is possible to make the production more colorful. For example, there are cases where it can be used for effects tailored to symbol variation display, blessing of a big hit (777 display or rainbow light emission), timer function display, and the like. The plurality of decorative bodies may be three or more decorative bodies. Arbitrary at least two decorations may correspond to the first and second decorations.

E2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The change from the first state to the second state by the movable means is a possible change when the movable means is moved in the first direction,
The change from the second state to the first state by the movable means is a possible change when the movable means is moved in the second direction,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction,
The first state (for example, FIG. 212 (a)) is a state in which the first decoration is located in the display area of the variable display,
The second state (for example, FIG. 212 (b)) is a state in which the second decoration is positioned in the display area of the variable display.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform a variety of variable display by the movement of the movable means.

E3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable means is a means capable of pivotal movement about an axis (for example, 13),
The first decorative body is a decorative body provided with a decorative surface (for example, 11a1 of 11A) for performing the variable display around the axis,
The second decorative body is a decorative body provided with a decorative surface (for example, 11B 11a) for performing the variable display around the axis.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in some cases, the attraction can be improved by the three-dimensional effect by the movable means. The movable means may be means for performing a parallel movement operation instead of a rotation operation, and the movable means may be means for performing a movement operation along a rail, and the movable aspect of the movable means Can be adopted as appropriate.

E4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided on a first substrate (for example 11b of 11A),
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided on a second substrate (for example 11b of 11B),
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
The first substrate is a substrate provided corresponding to the first decorative body,
The second substrate is a substrate provided corresponding to the second decoration.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, it may be possible to arrange the light emitting means according to the decoration for each substrate. The second light emitting means may be used for the light emission effect of the first decorative body. E5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second decorative body is a decorative body provided at a position adjacent to the first decorative body (for example, FIG. 210, FIG. 212 (a) (b)),
The first substrate is a substrate provided on the back side of the first decorative body,
The second substrate is a substrate provided on the back side of the second decorative body,
The first substrate is a substrate provided with the first light emitting means toward the first decorative body,
The second substrate is a substrate provided with the second light emitting means toward the second decorative body,
The first substrate and the second substrate are arranged such that the directions of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are different (for example, FIG. 210, FIG. 212 (a) (b)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in some cases, the attraction can be improved by the three-dimensional effect by the movable means. Also, there are cases where each decoration can be made larger. The first substrate and the second substrate may be arranged in the direction of 90 degrees (L-shaped), and arranged in directions other than the direction of 90 degrees (for example, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) May be The combination of the first substrate and the first decoration and the combination of the second substrate and the second decoration may be arranged in an orientation of 90 degrees (L-shape), 90 degrees It may be arranged in directions (for example, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) other than the direction of. The movable means may be a decorative body disposed on at least two surfaces (preferably each surface) of a triangular prism-shaped trihedron, and at least two surfaces (preferably three or more, particularly each surface) of a hexagonal prism-shaped hexahedron. The decorative body may be arranged in). The substrate may be disposed substantially parallel to the corresponding decoration.

E6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable means”) (for example, 12) different from the movable means is provided.
The second movable means is a movable means constituted by shutters (for example, 12A and 12B),
The second movable means is a movable means that allows the display area of the variable display to be visible when the shutter is in the open state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since it is possible to limit the timing of performing the variable display by opening and closing the shutter, there are cases where it is possible to make the game clearer.

  In addition, when the said shutter is a closed state, light emission production may be possible on the surface of this shutter. The shutter may be a single shutter, a pair of shutters, or three or more shutters.

E7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A decoration means (for example, 10) is provided on the outer periphery of the second movable means,
The decoration means is a means having an area (hereinafter referred to as "first area") (for example, 10b) visible from the outside,
The display area of the variable display is an area visible from the first area,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the presence of the decoration means may protect the second movable means while making the internal structure of the second movable means invisible.

  The decoration of the movable means may be two of the first decoration and the second decoration. An area other than the decorative body of the movable means may be an arrangement space for a drive mechanism or the like, and the arrangement space may be hidden by the decoration means. By performing the variable display of the movable means by the reciprocating motion of the movable means, there is a case where the twisting of the wiring connected to the substrate hardly occurs.

E8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable means is means movable by one drive means (for example, M11).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the structure may be simplified as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of driving means are provided.

E9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing a light emission effect by the second light emitting means (for example, FIG. 212 (e)),
The second decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing a light emission effect only by the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second light emitting means can be used for light emission effects of the first decorative body and the second decorative body.

  A third light emitting means may be provided. The third light emitting means may be, for example, one used for light emission other than the first decorative body and the second decorative body (for example, a frame lamp or a light emitting element of another rendering device), The third light emitting means may be used for the light emission effect of the first decorative body. There are cases where it is possible to give a special feeling to the light-emitting effect of the first decorative body.

E10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing the light emission effect only by the first light emitting means,
The second decorative body is a decorative body capable of performing a light emission effect only by the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, each light emitting means can be dedicated to each decorative body, and the structure may be simpler.

E11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is means including one or more LEDs.
It is characterized by

E12. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second light emitting means is means including one or more LEDs.
It is characterized by

E13. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The number of the first light emitting means is greater than the number of the second light emitting means,
To do things.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the effect of the light emission effect different between the first decorative body and the second decorative body.

E14. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  E15. The movable means provided with a plurality of decorative bodies may be movable means attached to a front frame door or a door with a ball storage plate, or may be movable means attached to a game board. When attached to the game board side, it is protected by a front frame door or the like, but when attached to a front frame door or a door with a ball storage tray, the decoration means may exhibit a protective function. The second movable means may be an arc shutter means. The first decorative body and the second decorative body positioned on the back side by entering light from the side of the arc shutter means (for example, from one end side in the shutter rotation axis direction or from one end side in the opening / closing direction) In some cases, the distance can be shortened, and in some cases, the decoration can be enlarged.

F1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Payout means (for example, 152) which can carry out the payout of the game ball
When,
A plurality of ball passages (for example, 7 to 9) through which game balls discharged from the payout means can pass;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a first ball passage (e.g. 7),
At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a second ball passage (eg, 8),
The second ball passage is a ball passage branched from the first ball passage at a branch portion (for example, BR),
The first ball passage is a ball passage capable of discharging gaming balls from the outlet (e.g. 7b) of the first ball passage to the upper tray (e.g. 126);
The second ball passage is a ball passage capable of discharging gaming balls from the outlet (e.g. 8b) of the second ball passage to the lower tray (e.g. 128),
The game balls stored between the outlet of the first ball passage and the branch part can be discharged to the upper tray,
The first ball passage is a ball passage having an inclined passage (for example, 74) inclined from the rear of the outlet of the first ball passage toward the outlet of the first ball passage,
The branch portion is located upstream of the inclined passage in the flow direction of the sphere,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console having a feature in the ball passage. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the storage amount of gaming balls guided to the upper tray side by the ball passage. Further, the inclined passage may be able to vigorously discharge the game balls onto the upper plate in some cases, and this portion may also be secured as a storage amount on the upper plate discharge side.

F2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first ball passage is a ball passage provided with a vertical drop portion (for example, 72a, 73) to which the game ball can drop vertically.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the flow of gaming balls may be made smooth.

F3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first ball passage is a ball passage including a serpentine portion (hereinafter, referred to as “first serpentine portion”) (for example, 72) located between the branch portion and the outlet of the first ball passage. is there,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the storage amount on the upper plate discharge side can be increased by the meandering portion. When the gaming balls are accumulated by the meandering portion, the pressure for discharging the gaming balls to the upper tray may be reduced in some cases. In addition, the said 1st ball | bowl path | pass can also employ | adopt the structure which does not have a meandering part.

F4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second ball passage is a ball passage arranged in parallel with the first ball passage in the left-right direction of the game console,
The first meandering portion meanders in the front-rear direction of the game console.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, when the storage of the game balls is reduced, since the direction of the first meandering section and the directionality of the inclined passage coincide with each other, the possibility of causing the ball clogging can be reduced. There is. A configuration in which the first meandering portion meanders in the left-right direction of the game stand can also be adopted.

F5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second ball passage is a ball passage including a meandering portion (hereinafter referred to as a "second meandering portion") (for example, 81) meandering in the front-rear direction of the gaming table,
The number of turns of the ball passage in the first meandering portion is a number larger than the number of turns of the ball passage in the second meandering portion,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first meandering portion may be able to increase the storage amount of gaming balls, and the second meandering portion appropriately accelerates while discharging the gaming balls promptly to the lower plate. It may be able to function as a serpentine to kill. The number of turns of the ball passage in the first meandering portion may be smaller than the number of turns of the ball passage in the second meandering portion. In some cases, it is possible to increase the number of stored game balls on the lower plate discharge side and to promote quick discharge while increasing the amount of stored game balls on the upper plate discharge side. Further, the number of turns of the ball passage in the first meandering portion may be the same as the number of turns of the ball passage in the second meandering portion.

F6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first meandering portion is a meandering portion including a portion (for example, 72b) which protrudes to the front side of the game console than the second meandering portion.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the first meandering portion may be able to increase the storage amount of gaming balls. Moreover, since it protrudes to the front side, the position on the rear side may be easily determined.

F7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first ball passage is a ball passage including an upstream ball passage located upstream in the flow direction of the ball than the branch portion,
The first ball passage is a ball passage including a downstream ball passage located downstream in the flow direction of the ball than the branch portion,
The upstream ball passage is a ball passage including a meander (for example, 71),
The game ball having passed through the upstream ball passage can jump over the entrance (for example, 8a) of the second ball passage at the branch portion and enter the downstream ball passage.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, when the direction of meandering is changed in a state in which the ball passage is continued, there is a possibility that the risk of the game ball being clogged may be high, and this may be prevented.

F8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  F9. At least one of the plurality of ball passages is a ball passage, and the ball passage is a passage including a portion passing the front side of the first ball passage in the back and forth direction of the game console. Good. The first ball passage may be easily visible from the back side. The ball removal passage may be a passage including a portion that passes by the side of the first meander and the front side of the second meander. The area between the portion where the first ball passage protrudes forward and the portion where the second ball passage protrudes forward can be effectively used, and in some cases, it can be made compact. It may have a ball passage unit (for example, 153) provided with the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the ball removal passage. The number of parts may be reduced. The outlets of the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the ball passage may be aligned in the left-right direction of the game console. In this case, the outlet of the ball removal passage, the outlet of the second ball passage, and the outlet of the first ball passage may be arranged in order from the outside in the left-right direction in the game console. The relationship between the outlet and the passage may be easy to understand, and since the first ball passage is located inside, it may be difficult to take out an illegal game ball from the outside. The first ball passage may be a passage through which gaming balls paid out from the payout means first pass.

Embodiment E
<Overall configuration>
The entire configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball firing handle 134 for launching to the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of various rendering devices by the operation of the player, and a chance button for emitting the chance button 136 Lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button 142 for instructing to return the player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 218 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 217 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 219 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning hole 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and the ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display device wins the special view display game with a large hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is.

  In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also uses a counter circuit 318 (two in this circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes its value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a bottom dishing sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a device, for example, the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of figure display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common view holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high certainty lamp Drive circuit 330 for display control of 222 etc.), various movable members 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view start port 232, the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. FIG. 221 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do.

  These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2.

  Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display, and a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop view pattern of the special view 1 or 2 The display is called symbol fluctuation stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 221 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 221 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 221 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 219 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 221 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 221 (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 222 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal).

  Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off.

  That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (this processing does not detect an abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor.

  Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 220, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated.

  For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it.

  In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 221 (c) and the dislocated symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 221 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  In step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 221 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag is also off special figure F, the first small hitting flag is on special figure G, the second small hitting flag is on special figure H, the first off flag is on In the case of the special pattern I, when the second out flag is on, perform the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED which constitutes the second special symbol display device 214 so as to become each aspect of the special figure I , And setting that indicates that the special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the final display of any one symbol of the first out-of-pattern (special image J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating.

  In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB29), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step SB31).

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  At step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, and setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 222 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption upon power recovery is saved as return data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SC01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data according to pressing of the chance button. In step SC13, when there is an instruction to VDP 434 among the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step SC19, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. At step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SE01 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step SC13 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
The processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SG01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step SG03, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. At step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in the SG07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SG11, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. At step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, an example of a display device applicable to the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The display device described below can be adopted in addition to or in place of a part of various display devices provided in the pachinko machine 100 described above.

  FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 1 replacing the game board 200. FIG. The game board 1 includes a plate-shaped main body member 2, rail formation members 3 to 5, and a display device 8. The game board 1 has a game area 124 'in place of the game area 124 on the front. The game area 124 'is divided by the rail forming members 3-5. Similar to the gaming area 124, various configurations shown in FIG. 219 are disposed in the gaming area 124 ', but are not shown here.

  The rail member 3 is a member provided with an arc-shaped inner side surface that forms an outer rail, and is fixed to the front surface of the main body member 2. The rail member 4 is a member that forms the inner rail, and is fixed to the front surface of the main body member 2.

  The rail member 5 is a member provided with an arc-shaped inner side surface which forms an outer rail together with the rail member 3, and is fixed to the front surface of the main body member 2. In the case of the present embodiment, the rail member 5 has a two-member configuration, and includes the main body member 6 and the lower side member 7 which is detachable from the main body member 6. The lower member 7 forms a part of the lower part of the outer rail. The lower part of the outer rail may have a high frequency of collision with the ball, and its wear may be easy to proceed. In the case of the present embodiment, since the lower member 7 is detachable from the main body member 6, the lower member 7 can be replaced periodically.

  The display device 8 is attached to the lower part of the main body member 6 of the rail member 5. The attachment position of the display device 8 in the same figure is an example, and attachment to other positions is also possible. Other positions include (for example, the game area 124 'and the upper portion of the game board 1 (the upper portion of the main body member 2, the rail member 3 and the like) and the like.

  The main body member 6 and the lower side member 7 of the rail member 5 and the display device 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 227 (a) and (b) are partial perspective views around the display device 8 of the game board 1, FIG. 227 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front side, and FIG. 227 (b) is seen from the back side It is a perspective view. FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the display device 8. FIG. 229 (a) is a front view of the rail member 5, and (b) is a rear view. FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b) are perspective views of the rail member 5, and FIG. 230 (a) is a perspective view from diagonally above the front, and FIG. 230 (b) is a perspective from diagonally below the front.

  The display device 8 is attached to a housing portion 61 formed in the lower part of the main body member 6. The housing portion 61 is formed as a recessed portion with a bottom from the left and right wall portions 61a, 61a, the upper and lower wall portions 61b, 61b, and the bottom portion (back portion) 61c. The upper wall portion 61 b has a shape (a shape rising right) along the rail shape of the lower member 7. In the display device 8, most of the display unit 81 (a portion other than the attachment portion 811 e) is accommodated in the accommodation portion 61. The front portion of the display device 8 may be accommodated in the accommodation portion 61.

  The bottom portion 61c is formed with a hole OP which is a through hole. The connector 812 b of the display device 8 is inserted into the hole OP. In the formation portion of the hole OP, a notch 2a is formed in the main body member 2 of the game board 1, and the main body member 2 is shaped so as not to overlap with the connector 812b. Thereby, it may be easy to electrically connect the control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) on the back of the main body member 2 and the display device 8 with a wire, and the control unit controls the display of the display device 8 There are cases where it can be done.

  The body member 6 also includes a locking portion 62 and a fastening portion 63. The locking portion 62 is provided in two places, and in this embodiment, has a pin shape projecting in the front direction. There are cases where positioning of the display device 8 can be simplified by locking the display device 8 to these locking portions 62. The fastening portion 63 is provided in two places, and in the present embodiment, it is a screw hole for attaching the display device 8 to the main body member 6 with the screw 828. The display device 8 is fixed to the main body member 6 by screwing the screw 828 to the fastening portion 63 and tightening it.

  The lower member 7 is a band-shaped member which is curved in an arc shape as a whole, and is provided with a mounting portion 71 at one end thereof. The main body member 6 includes a concave attachment portion 64 into which the attachment portion 71 is inserted. Screw holes 65 are formed in the mounting portion 64. The attachment portion 71 is formed with a through hole (not shown) through which the screw 72 is inserted, and the lower member 7 is inserted into the main body member 6 by inserting the screw 72 into the through hole and fastening the screw 72 to the screw hole 65. It is fixed.

  The restriction portion 824 of the display device 8 overlaps the front side of the other end 73 of the lower member 7 and prevents the other end 73 from moving to the front side. The lower member 7 is fixed to the main body member 6 by the fastening at the attaching portion 71 and the movement inhibition by the restricting portion 824 at the other end 73. Since the lower side member 7 is fixed at one fastening site, its attachment and detachment may be easy. In addition, since attachment and detachment of the lower side member 7 require attachment and detachment of the display device 8, there are cases where it is possible to prompt the exchangeer to inspect the display device 8.

  Next, the configuration of the display device 8 will be described. The display device 8 includes a display unit 81, an attachment member 82, and a sheet 83.

  First, the display unit 81 will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a front view of the display unit 81, and FIG. 231 (b) is a rear view thereof. Figs. 232 (a) and 232 (b) are perspective views of the display unit 81, Fig. 232 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front side, and Fig. 232 (b) is a perspective view seen from the back side.

  The display unit 81 includes a case member 811 and a circuit board 812. The case member 811 includes a front wall portion 811a, a pair of wall portions 811b and 811b forming left and right side walls, and a pair of wall portions 811c and 811c forming upper and lower side walls, and a box whose back is open It has a mold. The upper wall portion 811 c has a shape (upper right shape) along the rail shape of the lower member 7.

  Mounting pieces 811 d and 811 d protruding in the left-right direction are integrally formed on the wall portions 811 b and 811 b, respectively. A hole 811e which is a through hole is formed in the attachment piece 811d. The locking portion 62 of the main body member 6 may be inserted into the hole 811e, which may make it possible to position the display unit 81.

  The circuit board 812 is mounted in the case member 811 from the back side of the case member 811. A plurality of light emitting elements 812 a are mounted on the front surface (not shown) of the circuit board 812. The light emitting element 812a is an LED in the present embodiment.

  The through holes for individually exposing the light emitting elements 812a are formed in the wall portion 811a of the case member 811 in the same number (here, 32) as the light emitting elements 812a, and the light emitting elements 812a are exposed from the respective through holes. A connector 812 b is mounted on the back of the circuit board 812. The connector 812 b includes a terminal electrically connected to each light emitting element 812 a. By connecting the control unit and the connector 812b with a harness, the control unit can control light emission of each light emitting element 812a.

  Next, the mounting member 82 will be described. The mounting member 82 is a member for fixing the display unit 81 and the sheet 83 to the main body member 6. The mounting member 82 is a frame-like member provided with an opening 821 that exposes the wall 811 a of the display unit 81 entirely. FIG. 233 (a) is a front view of the mounting member 82, and FIG. 233 (b) is a rear view thereof. FIGS. 234 (a) and (b) are perspective views of the mounting member 82, FIG. 234 (a) is a perspective view from the front left side, and FIG. 234 (b) is a perspective view from the front right side.

  The upper portion of the mounting member 82 has a shape (a shape rising right) along the rail shape of the lower member 7. The mounting member 82 is provided with two holes 822 which are through holes through which the screws 828 are inserted. Also, two holes 823 are provided in which the locking portions 62 of the main body member 6 are inserted. One of the two holes 823 is a through hole, and the other (hole 823 on the back surface of the positioning portion 827) is a hole with a bottom. The mounting member 82 also includes a laterally projecting regulating portion 824.

  As understood from FIG. 228, in the attachment of the display unit 81 and the attachment member 82, first, the holes 811e and 811e of the display unit 81 and the holes of the attachment member 82 are formed in the locking portions 62 and 62 of the main body member 6. The parts 823 and 823 are inserted in order. Next, the screws 828, 828 are inserted through the holes 822, 822 and the screws 828, 828 are screwed into the fastening portion 63 and tightened. Thereby, the display unit 81 and the mounting member 82 are fixed to the main body member 6. The restricting portion 824 overlaps the front side of the other end portion 73 of the lower member 7, and restricts the movement to the front side.

  Referring back to FIGS. 233 and 234, the mounting member 82 includes two ribs 825 extending in the vertical direction on the front side. At the lower portion of the rib 825, a total of three locking portions 826 are provided. In the case of this embodiment, the locking portion 826 is a slit-like rectangular hole. The locking portion 826 locks the seat 83 as described later. A positioning portion 827 is formed in the middle of one of the ribs 825. The positioning unit 827 positions the seat 83 as described later.

  Next, the sheet 83 will be described. The sheet 83 is disposed closer to the player (front side) than the display unit 81 so as to cover the wall portion 811a, and is detachably attached to the attachment member 82 so as to close the opening 821. FIG. 235 (a) is a front view of the sheet 83, and (b) is a rear view of the sheet 83. FIG. The sheet 83 is made of, for example, paper, a resin film, or the like. The seat 83 is provided with locking portions 831 in three places. The locking portion 381 is formed as a protruding piece that protrudes laterally, and is inserted into the locking portion 826 of the mounting member 82. Thus, the sheet 83 is attached to the attachment member 82 and fixed to the main body member 6 via the attachment member 82.

  Two of the three locking portions 831 are formed at one end of the seat 83 in the left-right direction, and the remaining one is formed at the other end of the seat 83 in the left-right direction. The three locking portions 826 of the mounting member 82 are formed corresponding to the arrangement of the locking portions 831. When mounting the sheet 83 to the mounting member 82, for example, the two locking portions 831 formed at one end in the left-right direction of the sheet 83 are inserted into the corresponding locking portions 831, and the width of the sheet 83 is short in the left-right direction The remaining one locking portion 831 is inserted into the locking portion 831 while being bent in the following manner. The sheet 83 returns to a flat original shape. By utilizing the bending of the sheet 83, the attachment and detachment may be facilitated, and the locking portion 831 may not be easily detached from the locking portion 831 carelessly.

  By varying the number of the locking portions 831 at the left and right ends, the seat 83 may be reliably installed without unnecessarily increasing the number of the locking portions 831. By setting the number of the locking portions 831 at one end to a plurality, when this is first inserted into the locking portion 826, positional deviation when attaching the sheet 83 may be difficult to occur. The lengths of the locking portions 831 may be different. For example, the locking portions 831 at one end of the left and right ends may be elongated and the locking portions 831 at the other end may be shortened. If the long locking portion 831 is inserted into the locking portion 826 first, the short locking portion 831 which is later inserted into the locking portion 826 may be easily inserted, and may be prevented from falling off. .

  The seat 83 also includes a positioning unit 832. The positioning portion 832 has a shape in which the side edge of the sheet 83 is recessed in an arc shape. The positioning portion 827 of the mounting member 82 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the sheet 83 is positioned with respect to the mounting member 82 when the positioning portion 832 abuts on the circumferential surface of the positioning portion 827. Since the mounting member 82 and the display unit 81 are positioned by the locking portion 62 of the main body member 6, the sheet 83 is positioned with respect to the display unit 81 via the mounting member 82.

  The front of the sheet 83 has a plurality of colored portions C1 to C3. The colored portions C1 to C3 are opaque except for the transmissive portion TP, but may be partially transparent or translucent. The colored portion C3 is, for example, white. The colored portions C1 and C2 have a color different from white, and have different colors. The back surface of the sheet 83 is monochrome (for example, white). In the case of this embodiment, the sheet 83 is attached to the display unit 81 via the attachment member 82. However, an adhesive layer is provided on the back of the sheet 83 to form a seal, and the sheet 83 is attached to the wall 811a of the display unit 81. It may be

  The transmissive part TP is a transparent or translucent part. The transmitting portion TP may be a hole perforated in the sheet 83. The transmissive portions TP are provided in the same number (here, 32) corresponding to the light emitting elements 812a so as to partition the plurality of light emitting elements 812a, and are positioned in front of the corresponding light emitting elements 812a to turn on or off Is visible from the player side.

  The display device 8 can display various information by turning on and off the light emitting element 812a. FIG. 236 (a) is an explanatory diagram of information to be displayed. The light emitting elements 812a located behind the transmissive portions TP are grouped into display portions R1 to R10 shown in the figure for display control. The information displayed by each display unit may be, for example, as follows.

  The display unit R1 includes eight light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the first special symbol display device 212 described above) that displays a symbol indicating Special Figure 1. The display unit R2 includes eight light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the second special symbol display device 214 described above) that displays a symbol indicating Special Figure 2.

  The display unit R3 includes two light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the first special symbol holding lamp 218 described above) for displaying the number of holdings of the special view 1. The display unit R4 includes two light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the second special symbol holding lamp 220 described above) for displaying the number of holdings of the special view 2.

  The display unit R5 includes two light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the above-described normal symbol display device 210) that displays a symbol indicating a common drawing. The display unit R6 is configured of two light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit (corresponding to the above-described normal symbol holding lamp 216) that displays a symbol indicating the number of reserved general drawings.

  The display unit R7 includes four light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit that performs effects. The display unit R8 is configured of one light emitting element 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit that displays whether it is advantageous for the player to hit the right. The display unit R9 includes one light emitting element 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit that displays whether or not it is a positive change.

  The display unit R10 includes two light emitting elements 812a, and can function as, for example, a display unit that displays the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  With reference to FIGS. 235 (a) and 236 (a), the sheet 83 includes a display related to specific information in the information displayed by the display unit 81, and the information related to other information It does not include the display regarding. For example, for the display unit R10, the number of rounds of 2R (2 rounds) or 16R (16 rounds) is displayed in the display INF. On the other hand, the display units R1 to R9 have no display related to the information.

  Therefore, the player may be able to easily understand the content of the information with the display INF. In the case of information without the display INF, it may be possible to give the player the pleasure of inferring the content of the information. For information without display INF, it is also possible to change the display position midway or change the type of information to another information. For example, from the state in which the display unit R1 functions as a display unit for displaying the symbol of Special Figure 1 and the display unit R2 functions as a display unit for displaying the symbol of Special Figure 2, the display unit R1 can be As a display unit for displaying a symbol, the display unit R2 may be functioned as a display unit for displaying the symbol of Special Figure 1. In addition, the display unit R1 may be changed to a state in which the display unit R1 functions as a display unit that displays information related to an effect from a state in which the display unit R1 functions as a display unit that displays a symbol of the special drawing 1.

  The sheet 83 may also include a display unrelated to the information displayed by the display unit 81. In some cases, a plurality of types of information can be notified by the sheet 83. In FIG. 235 (a), displays I1 to I3 are included as irrelevant displays. The display I1 is a maker name of the pachinko machine 100, and the display I2 is a model name of the pachinko machine 100. The display 13 is a two-dimensional code, and indicates, for example, a model number of the pachinko machine 100 or the like.

  The display unit (display units R1 to R9 in FIG. 236A) having no display related to information such as the display INF may be provided with a display for dividing the display unit for each information. This may be a clue for the player to infer the type of information, and in some cases, it may be possible to give the player the pleasure of inferring the content of the information.

  FIG. 236 (b) shows an example thereof. In the example of the figure, the periphery of eight light emitting elements 812a which constitute display part R1 is enclosed and divided by line L1. Further, the inside of the line L1 is different in color from the outside. In addition, the periphery of eight light emitting elements 812a constituting the display portion R2 is surrounded by a line L2 and is partitioned, and the inside of the line L2 is made to have a color different from that of the outside. Thus, the inside of at least some of the compartments may be different in color or pattern from the outside.

  The periphery of the two light emitting elements 812a constituting the display unit R3 is divided by a line L3. The inside of the line L3 is not made different in color from the outside. The periphery of the two light emitting elements 812a constituting the display unit R4 is divided by a line L4. The inside of the line L4 is not made different in color from the outside. The periphery of the two light emitting elements 812a constituting the display unit R5 is divided by a line L5. The inside of the line L5 is not made different in color from the outside. The periphery of the two light emitting elements 812a constituting the display unit R6 is divided by a line L6. The inside of the line L6 is not made different in color from the outside. Thus, the inside of at least some of the compartments may have the same color or pattern as the outside.

  The display units R7 to R9 have no display for dividing them. As described above, the section display may not be provided for at least a part of the display units.

  In addition to the pachinko machine 100, the present invention is also applicable to various types of gaming machines such as slot machines. The pachinko machine may be an enclosed type pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere to circulate in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

<Summary of the embodiment>
1. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
A plurality of light emitting means (e.g. 812a);
Display means (e.g. 8) comprising the plurality of light emitting means;
A sheet (eg, 813) for partitioning the plurality of light emitting means;
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means having the sheet,
The display means is a means capable of displaying first information (for example, the number of rounds),
The display means is a means capable of displaying second information (for example, special figure 1),
The sheet is a sheet including a display (e.g., an INF) regarding the first information;
The sheet is a sheet that does not include a display related to the second information,
The sheet is a sheet disposed closer to the player than the plurality of light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display means. Also, the player may be able to identify the first information. Also, in some cases, the display can be recycled by replacing the sheet.

2. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
At least one or more of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, R10),
The first light emitting means is a means capable of displaying the first information.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the player may be able to identify the first information.

3. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
The sheet is a sheet including a display (for example, INF) on the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the player may be able to identify the first light emitting means.

4. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
At least one or more of the plurality of light emitting means is a second light emitting means,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of displaying the second information.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the player may be able to infer the second information.

5. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
The sheet is a sheet including a display (for example) unrelated to the plurality of light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to notify multiple types of information on the sheet.

  The first information may be, for example, information indicating the number of rounds. The second information may be information indicating any one of special figure 1, special figure 2, special figure 1 reserve, special figure 2 reserve, popular figure, regular figure reserve, right-handed indication, positive variation display Good. The second light emitting means may be composed of a plurality of light emitting means.

  The sheet may include an indication (for example, L1-L6) for partitioning the second light emitting means. The player may easily estimate the second information. The irrelevant indication may comprise a two-dimensional code (e.g. I3). In some cases, it is possible to confirm the alignment between the game console and the seat.

  The display means may be fixed to the rail forming means (e.g. 5). In some cases, the arrangement space of the display means can be secured using the rail formation means. The display means may comprise a connector (eg 812a). Wiring may be convenient. The rail forming means may have a hole (for example, an OP) through which the connector of the display means can be inserted. In some cases, the degree of freedom of the position through the wiring may be increased. The plate-like member (for example, 2) of the game board (for example, 1) may be shaped so as not to overlap with the connector of the display means (for example, FIG. 227 (b)). In some cases, the degree of freedom of the position through the wiring may be increased.

  The display means may comprise attachment means (eg 82) attached to the rail forming means. It may be easy to do installation work. The attachment means may be fixed to the rail forming means by fastening means (e.g. 72, 65). There are cases where it can be fixed securely.

  The attachment means may fix at least a part of another member (for example, 7) different from the display means from the front. In some cases, the attachment procedure of other members can be simplified. The other member (e.g., 7) may be a member which can not be removed unless the attachment means is removed. Inspection of the display means may be facilitated. At least a part of the display means may be accommodated in the recess of the rail forming means. In some cases, the side surface or the back surface of the display means can be made inconspicuous, and the display means can be supported more stably.

  The sheet may have a plurality of locking portions (for example, 831). The seat may be able to be attached more reliably and may be replaceable. The seat may have the locking portions at both ends in the left-right direction. The sheets may be sheets different in the number of the locking portions at the left end and the right end. In the sheet, one of the left end and the right end may be longer than the other, and the number of the locking portions may be larger than the other. These may improve the ease of attachment of the sheet and the drop prevention performance.

  The sheet may have a shape including at least a shape along at least a part of the rail forming means. The seat may be able to conform to the shape of the rail forming means and may be unnecessarily obscured.

  In the sheet, a portion (for example, TP) covering the plurality of light emitting means may be transparent or translucent. In some cases, it is easy to visually observe the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting means. The sheet may be opaque at portions (eg, C1-C3) that do not cover the plurality of light emitting means. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the back of the sheet from being viewed unnecessarily. The sheet may be transparent or translucent at least a part of the portion not covering the plurality of light emitting means. In some cases, the back of the sheet can be shown to the required extent.

  The seat may be locked to the attachment means. The sheet may be replaceable. The sheet may be fixed to the rail forming means via the attachment means. The sheet may be replaceable. The sheet may be a seal. In some cases, the sheet can be disposed with a simple configuration.

11. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
A game board (for example 1),
A first structure (e.g. 811a, 832b);
A second structure (e.g. 812b);
A game console equipped with
The first structure is a structure provided on the game board,
The gaming board is a gaming board provided with an opening (for example, 2a),
At least a portion of the second structure is located in the opening,
The first structure is a structure capable of covering at least a part of the front side of the opening.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game console having features on the game board. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the second structure from being removed illegally.

12. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
The first structure is a rail unit (e.g. 5-7, 811a, 832b),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rail unit may be used as a means for covering the opening.

13. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
The second structure is a structure including a harness (eg, connected to 812b),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the harness from being removed improperly.

14. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
The gaming board is a gaming board having a gaming area and a non-playing area,
The opening is an opening provided in the non-playing area,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the second structure from being removed illegally in the non-playing area.

15. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a through hole.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second structure may be easily positioned in the opening.

16. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The opening is a notch,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the second structure may be easily positioned in the opening.

17. The game console of the above embodiment (for example, 100),
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a pachinko machine having a feature on the game board.

Embodiment F
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine or an enclosed game machine) according to the embodiment F of the present invention will be described. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 237. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105 and configured in a frame shape It is a door member which made the inside the opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "balls") in a portion below the opening 116 and which guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player And a ball firing handle 134 for launching the gaming ball guided to the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200, and a chance button for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 239) by the operation of the player. 136, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137 capable of performing various settings by operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), a card unit installed in a game shop Ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to the CR unit, return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, and displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit And a ball rental display unit (not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 239) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 238 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 237 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 240). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing, and the control processing related to rendering based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 housing the second sub-board 164 constituting the second sub-control part 500, and the payout control part 600 performing control processing related to the payout of gaming balls, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game clerk A payout substrate case 172 for housing the payout substrate 170 having the error release switch 168, and a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the gaming ball And a power switch 178 for configuring the power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines and operating the game clerk to operate the power when the power is turned on. A power supply substrate case 184 housing the power supply substrate 182 including the RWM clear switch 180 for outputting the RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit And are arranged.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 239 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 includes a logo character 900, an upper front decoration character 1000, an upper rear decoration character 1100 (not shown in FIG. 239), an upper right side character 1200, an upper left side character 1300, and a lower right side character. It performs by operating the lower left side character 1500 and the central lower character 1600 (hereinafter, these characters may be collectively referred to as "various characters"), and effects are produced. Details will be described later. Do.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, the ease of entering the regular symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc. And the game ball which falls on the left path differs.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, the normal symbol starting opening 228, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with regard to the first special symbol start port 230, the ball of the game ball falling on the left path is relatively easy to enter due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails (not shown) and the warp device 242 etc. Yes, it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball falling on the right path. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure change games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure change games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and a second out port 241 are provided. Details of the second out port 241 will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 One is arranged on the route. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 has the feather component 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and the ball can not enter during closing of the feather component 232a, and it is elected for common drawing fluctuation game, common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right flowing path of the gaming board 200. The variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. It is impossible to enter a ball during closing of the door member 234a, and the special drawing display is stopped showing a big hit symbol by winning the special drawing fluctuation game. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members (not shown) called windmills, and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are disposed. In the lowermost part, after guiding the ball that did not enter the winning opening, the starting opening or the second out port 241 to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, the out port 240 for discharging to the gaming island side It is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member, the game nail, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and the starting opening (specially Figure 1 Start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or enter the second out opening 241, or without winning any opening or start opening, second out It does not enter the ball 241, or reaches the out port 240 only by passing through the general drawing start port 228.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the rendering device 206, and various prizes are arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is set up. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and various kinds of prizes. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230. In addition, about various role goods, it mentions later.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222, etc.), and various solenoids for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the circuit 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). , Various movable body sensors 430 which detect the current position of various movable bodies 550 (the various movable bodies 550 will be described later) included in various kinds of prizes, and a chance button sensor 426 which detects pressing of the chance button 136 An operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the operation unit 137, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402, and storage in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404 Read out the processed image data etc. and generate a display image using the work area of VRAM 436 It is connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the display device 208, a.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of various movable bodies 550, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp 542 A game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game console, and a serial communication control circuit 520 performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540; Connected. In the present embodiment, the second sub-control unit 500 is configured to control the operation of the various movable bodies 550, but the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to control the operation of the various movable bodies 550. Alternatively, a movable body control unit may be provided separately from the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, and the movable body control unit may control the operation of the various movable bodies 550. In the present embodiment, the various movable body sensors 430 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs position detection of the various movable bodies 550. However, the various movable body sensors 430 are connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 executes position detection of the various movable bodies 550. The various movable body sensors 430 may be connected to a predetermined sensor circuit provided in the above-described movable body control unit, and the movable body control unit may perform position detection of the various movable bodies 550. It may be

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed by two-way communication, the various sensors 320 detect the opening of the front frame door 106. The detection result of step 107 may be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without being transmitted to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 241 (a) to 241 (c). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 241 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1 and the special view 2. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 241 (a), ten types of special views of "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the special view 1 and special view 2 symbol change stop display. In FIG. 241 (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit symbol is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game end, and "special figure B" which is 15R big hit symbol is special drawing after the big hit game end It is a symbol that becomes a low probability general drawing high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols whose degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden time, it is a symbol which becomes special figure low probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a symbol which becomes a special figure high probability common figure low probability state after the end of the big hit game. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden and is a figure which will be a special figure low probability common figure low probability state after the end of the big hit game.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and after the small hit game ends, the gaming state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. “Special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, and after the small hit game ends, maintains the gaming state before the small hit game is executed. In addition, “special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small. The “special figure J” is a second out-of-order symbol, and is a symbol whose advantage relative to the player is relatively small.

  FIG. 241 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And when notifying 15R special big hit of "special figure A" and 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1- Stop display of decoration 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "etc. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7 -Display the decoration 7 "etc.) stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" latent probability change (hidden probability change), the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" suddenly called normal, or the small for "special figure G" or "special figure H" When notifying a hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" and 2R big hit called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", stop display of "decoration 1-decor 3-decor 5" . On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure I" and "special figure J", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 241 (b).

  FIG. 241 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the above-described gate sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 241 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of three random number counters for generating a common drawing win random number, a special figure 1 random value, and a special figure 2 random value, respectively. Update the random number counter for generation. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a special figure 1 random number value counter and its initial value generation random number counter, a special figure 2 random number value counter and its initial value generation random number counter, and a common figure winning random number value counter and its initial value A random number counter for generation is provided. In step S115, the initial values of the three initial value generation random number counters are updated. For example, assuming that the possible numerical range of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original initial value generation random number counter Remember to At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random value counter for initial value generation. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. In addition, after this basic random number initial value updating process ends, the setting of interrupt permission is performed. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the passing of the common drawing starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  Further, in step S205, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by two-way communication, the front frame door open sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The presence or absence of the door open detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from is monitored and stored in the door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the general control winning random value and the special drawing to be used in the main control unit 300 are performed. 1. Update the three random number counters for generating 1 random number value and special figure 2 random number value respectively. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a common drawing win random number value counter for generating a common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and the obtained value is 1 Is added and stored in the original common drawing win random number value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original drawing random number value counter. Further, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the common drawing win random number value counter is determined to make one revolution, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the common drawing win random number value counter is obtained Then, set it in the popular drawing random number value counter.

  For example, the value obtained from the common drawing win random number value counter which fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in the predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 When the value is equal to the set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the common drawing win random number value counter, and is set in the common drawing win random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the general drawing win random number value counter has made one revolution next. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area, the RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the special figure 1 random number value counter and the special figure 2 random number value counter has made one turn. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and a counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used, and in this case, The same initial value generation random number counter and initial value storage area may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, to determine the symbol variation time in the special figure 1 variation game, update the value of the value of the special figure 1 variation time determination random value counter or its initial value, and change the symbol variation in the special figure 2 variation game In order to determine the time, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value counter or its initial value is updated. Moreover, the value of the random number value counter for common drawing fluctuation time determination or its initial value is updated in order to determine the symbol fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation game.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start opening 228 and variable winning combination opening 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 The random number value is acquired from the random number value counter for special figure 1 fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A special figure 1 winning random number value, a special figure 1 random number value, and a special figure 1 random number value set for random time value determination in the special figure 1 random number value storage area (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 start information") It is stored for the same number as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the 1 pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, the special order 1 start information data with the highest retention order (first) is deleted every time the special figure 1 number of reservations decreases, and the remaining special figure 1 start It is processed so that the hold order of the data of information is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 1 reservations increases, data of new special drawing 1 start information is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 1 start information with the lowest holding order (last).

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for special figure 2 fluctuation time determination is acquired from the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the special figure 2 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A special figure 2 winning random number in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, a special figure 2 random number value and a special figure 2 random number value for random time value determination (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 start information") The number is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 number of reservations stored in the 2 number of reservations storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of reserved special figures 2 decreases, the data of special figure 2 start information with the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 start information data It is processed so that the pending order is advanced by one. In addition, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of new special drawing 2 start information is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 start information with the lowest holding order.

  When the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a common drawing win random value from the random number counter for common drawing winning random number generation. And store it in the corresponding standard random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common-diagram A shown in FIG. 241 (c) and the dislocated symbol (a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 241 (c)). Display. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. Whether the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above-mentioned common drawing random number storage area when Make a hit decision to make a decision. When it is determined that the winning will be made, the flag for the common drawing provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and when it is not won, the common flag for the drawing is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the above-mentioned random number value counter for determining the common drawing fluctuation time is acquired as a random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination, and based on the acquired random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination Among the plurality of fluctuation times, one time is selected for fluctuating a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210, and the fluctuation display time is a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. Remember to In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, a special drawing prefetch process is performed. In the special drawing prefetching process, when the number of special drawing reservations stored in the special drawing reservation number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the stop symbol etc. of the special drawing fluctuation game is special drawing related lottery It is determined in advance prior to the success or failure judgment in the process.

  For example, in the special view pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether the current control state is in the power support state (a state in which any one of the generalization probability change, generalization variation and shortness, and electric Chu open spread is set, details will be described later). If it is determined that power saving is in progress, it is determined whether there is a prize to special figure 2 start opening 232, and if it is determined that there is a prize to special figure 2 start opening 232, the special figure 2 start information that has won is The special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 random number value, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are pre-read. Then, prior to the determination of success or failure in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), using the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the specially selected special figure 2 winning random number value read ahead, and the table for success / failure determination (not shown) Prior determination is made as to whether or not the relevant determination will be a big hit. Next, using the prefetched special view 2 random number value and the special view 2 symbol determination table (not shown), it is determined in advance the symbol (stop symbol) to be displayed after the special view 2 change game. Then, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is beforehand decided using the stop design which is decided beforehand, the special figure 2 fluctuation time decision random number value and the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time decision table (not shown). Next, the prior determination results (appropriate determination result, stop symbol, fluctuation time) obtained by prior determination are stored in a special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 stores the stop pattern and the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game determined beforehand in advance as the special drawing 2 pre-reading result in the first vacant area of the special drawing 2 pre-reading result storage unit It has become. In the present embodiment, the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special view 2 prefetch results.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit as the special figure 2 pre-reading number is provided. The main control unit 300 writes information of the new special view 2 prefetch result in the next order of the information of the special view 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special view 2 prefetch is increased. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed for the increase of the hold, but the special view pre-reading process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In the special view prefetch process, for example, when determining that the main control unit 300 is not in the power assist state, the special view prefetch process similar to the special view 2 start information is executed for the special view 1 start information. Although the special view prefetching process is executed by referring to the pass / fail determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of the pass / fail determination, a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process. The special view prefetching process may be executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217).

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and A flag such as a probability fluctuation flag is prepared. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 to 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. 241 (a) is on, the special drawing probability variation flag is off, and the common drawing probability variation flag is on. In the case that the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, If the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on, the special drawing D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is on, if the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the special drawing E, 2R large flag is on. , Special map probability fluctuation flag is F, the special figure F when the regular drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, the first off The special segment 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control of the special figure 2 display so that the special figure I when the flag is on and the special figure J when the second outlier flag is on To set that the special view 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view J symbols.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid for driving the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds both in the case of the special view 1 and the special view 2 in the present embodiment), and the special view 2 status update started at the end timing In processing, it is provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image notifying the player of ending the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of variation games being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as the start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game (for example, special figure 2 variation game) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure variation game (for example, special figure 1 variation game) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 etc. Make a decision on whether or not to make a small hit, and make a decision on whether to make a drop. Next, the main control unit 300 determines a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variation display of the special figure 2 using the special figure 2 symbol determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306 and stores it in the ROM 306 The special figure 2 variation display time determination table (not shown) is used to determine the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the start of symbol variation start (rotation start) command of special drawing, the command data, various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, values such as special figure probability fluctuation flag, Special drawing related In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the change time of the special figure change game selected in the lottery process, in the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various missing flags, special figure probability change In the case of a prize effect start command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the flag, etc. The value of the special figure probability variation flag etc. is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag , Information to indicate the number of big hit rounds, etc. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. Contains information indicating In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission processing, various big hit flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special drawing 1 related lottery processing And information indicating a variation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, various small hit flags, various outlier flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 242 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 244 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. First, in step S301 in FIG. 244 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136. In addition, in the chance button control process, when pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 I do.

  In step S313 following step S311, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 following step S313, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the setting to output this control command is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 244B is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 244C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S303, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S319), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 244 (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S313) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise transfer end division Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 245A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S701 in FIG. 245 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S709 following step S707, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711 following step S709, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first secondary control unit 400 to the various movable bodies 550, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S703.

  FIG. 245B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 245C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S901 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S703, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more. In step S 903 following step S 901, processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  Next, the gaming board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail using FIGS. 246 to 248. FIG. In the description using FIGS. 246 to 248 and FIGS. 249 to 280 described later, the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility in the vertical direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) or in the horizontal direction. Point vertically or horizontally. Similarly, the horizontal direction indicates the horizontal direction toward the gaming board 200 in the horizontal direction. In the horizontal direction, the front-back direction is a direction orthogonal to the game board 200 (substrate surface of the transparent game board 810) and a direction from the game board 200 toward the transparent plate member 118 is a front direction, and the reverse is a back direction. Call.

  In FIG. 246 to FIG. 274, the double arrows with the notation of “upper” and “lower” indicate the vertical direction, “upper” indicates vertically upward, and “down” indicates vertically downward. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 274, a double arrow with “left” and “right” indicated in the left-right direction indicates “left” indicates the left direction and “right” indicates the right direction. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 274, the double arrows with “front” and “rear” are shown in the front-rear direction, “front” shows the front direction, and “rear” shows the rear direction.

  FIG. 246 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 246 shows the game board 200 viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The game board 200 has a three-layer structure composed of a rail decoration member 800, a transparent game board 810, and a character unit 820.

  The rail decoration member 800 has an outer rail member 802, an outer frame member 804, a center decoration member 806, and a game board decoration member 808. The outer rail member 802 is integrally molded of, for example, a resin material, and has a left side base 802a and an upper side base 802b. The left side base portion 802 a has an arc shape in which the inner end side going upward from the bottom is centered around the center of the game board 200. The upper base portion 802b is formed extending rightward from the upper end of the left base portion 802a, and has an arc shape whose inner end side extending from left to right is centered around the center of the game board 200. The outer rail member 802 is molded so that the inner side edge of the left side base 802a and the inner side edge of the upper side base 802b are continuous. Outer rails 202 are disposed at inner side edges of the left side base 802a and the upper side base 802b. The outer rail 202 of the outer rail member 802 defines the outer end of the play area 124.

  The outer frame member 804 is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a curved shape in which an inner side extending from the right to the lower right matches a curve of the lower right side of the game area 124. The game area 124 is surrounded by the outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804.

  The center decoration member 806 is molded of, for example, a transparent resin material. The center decoration member 806 has an annular shape with a predetermined contour, and the entire surface in the annular shape is open. Further, the center decoration member 806 has a warping device 242 and a front stage 244 shown in FIG. 239, and is decorated with a concavo-convex pattern. The center decoration member 806 may be provided with a wall on the rear side of the front stage 244 so that the gaming ball entering the front stage 244 does not fall to the rear side.

  The game board decorative member 808 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an arc shape whose outer edge is centered around the center of the game board 200. An inner rail 204 is disposed at the outer end of the game board decoration member 808. In addition, on the front side of the inner side of the inner rail 204 of the game board decoration member 808, a general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 239, a special view 1 start opening 230, and a special view 2 start opening 232 (feather members 232a not shown) , A variable winning opening 234, an out port 240, and a second out port 241. Further, on the front side of the game board decoration member 808, a decorative pattern is formed by unevenness.

  The transparent game board 810 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a thin plate flat shape. The outer rail member 802 and the outer frame member 804 are fixed to the front surface of the transparent game board 810 by screws, and are arranged to surround the game area 124. A plurality of game nails (not shown) and hitting direction changing members (not shown) are arranged on the front side of the transparent game board 810. In addition, the transparent game board 810 has an opening 810 a that is opened at the center in accordance with the outline shape of the center decoration member 806. The center decoration member 806 is fitted into the opening 810 a and fixed to the transparent game board 810 with a screw. In addition, the transparent game board 810 has an opening 810b opened in a predetermined shape on the lower right of the opening 810a, and has openings 810c and 810d opened in a predetermined shape on the lower left of the opening 810a. There is. The openings 810 c and 810 d are formed in this order from the left of the transparent game board 810. The special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the out port 240 correspond to the opening 810b, and the second out port 241 and one below the second out port 241. The game board decorative member 808 is fixed to the transparent game board 810 with a screw so that the general winning opening 226 corresponds to the opening 810 c and the two general winning openings 226 correspond to the opening 810 d. Also, a ball passage unit (not shown) is disposed on the back side (back side) of the openings 810b, 810c, 810d of the transparent game board 810, and the general winning opening 226, the special view 1 starting opening 230, the special illustration 2 starting opening A game ball entered into the variable winning opening 234, the out-port 240, or the second out-port 241 is discharged to the island facility.

  The accessory unit 820 has a unit body 822 molded of a transparent resin material. The unit main body 822 has a substantially rectangular shape on the front side, and has an opening 822 a which is opened in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction substantially at the center. The unit main body 822 is configured such that the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 can be viewed from the player side via the opening 822a. Also, in the unit body 822 of the character unit 820, a logo character 900, an upper front decoration character 1000, an upper rear decoration character 1100 (not shown in FIG. 246), an upper right side character 1200, an upper left side character An object 1300, a lower right side character 1400, a lower left side character 1500, and a central lower character 1600 are attached. These various items will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 252 to 274.

  An upper right end 822b, a lower right end 822c, a lower left end 822d, and an upper left end 822e are provided at four corners on the front side of the unit body 822, respectively. The upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e are formed on the same imaginary plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The transparent game board 810 is screwed to the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit body 822. Also, various prizes are attached to the rear side of a virtual plane including the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e. This prevents the transparent game board 810 from coming in contact with the various features.

  FIG. 247 is an external view of the game board 200 as viewed from the rear side. The center decoration member 806, the upper front decoration character 1000, the upper rear decoration character 1100, the upper right side character 1200, the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side character 1400 through the opening 822a of the unit body 822 , The lower left side character 1500, and a part of the rear side of the central lower character 1600, respectively.

  FIG. 248 is an external view of the game board 200 as seen from the game board 200 shown in FIG. In FIG. 248, the ball passage unit 700 connected to the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226 is shown.

  Next, the ball | bowl passage unit 700 used with the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. 249 thru | or FIG. The ball passage unit 700 is a rear side (rear side) of the transparent game board 810 shown in FIG. 246 so as to form a ball passage through which game balls entered into the general winning opening 226 and the second out port 241 can pass. Provided in

  FIG. 249 is a perspective view of a ball passage unit 700 used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the upper right to the lower left. In FIG. 249, the vertical direction of the sheet represents the vertical direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the sheet represents the lateral direction, and the direction extending from the upper left to the lower right of the sheet represents the longitudinal direction. FIG. 250 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 700 as viewed from the upper left rear to the lower right. In FIG. 250, the vertical direction of the paper surface represents the vertical vertical direction, the direction extending from the upper right to the lower left of the paper surface represents the longitudinal direction, and the direction extending from the lower right to the upper left of the paper surface represents the lateral direction. The thick broken lines shown in FIG. 249 and FIG. 250 show an example of the trajectory of the gaming ball rolling down in the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. FIG. 251 is a rear view of the ball passage unit 700 as viewed from the rear to the front. In FIG. 251, the vertical direction of the paper surface represents the vertical vertical direction, and the horizontal direction of the paper surface represents the left and right direction toward the front of the transparent game board 810. Further, a solid line with an arrow in the drawing shows an example of a trajectory of the gaming ball rolling down in the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700. Further, the coordinates shown by double arrows in FIGS. 249 to 251 are the ball passages when the pachinko machine 100 to which the ball passage mechanism including the ball passage unit 700 is attached is installed in an island facility or the like of a game arcade. It shows the installation state of the unit 700. In FIG. 249 to FIG. 251, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the ball passage unit 700, the ball passage unit 700 is shown transparently.

  In the game board decoration member 808 disposed on the front side (surface side) of the transparent game board 810 to which the ball passage unit 700 is attached on the rear side, an out port 240 provided at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204 as shown in FIG. Besides, a second out port 241 is provided. The second out port 241 is provided on the upper left side of the top of the three general winning openings 226 near the upper general winning opening 226. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since the second out port 241 is at a higher position than the general winning port 226, it may be possible to discharge the out ball using the back side of the game area 124. is there. The ball passage unit 700 is used to discharge the game balls entering the second out port 241 and the three general winning ports 226 to the game island side on the rear side (back side) of the transparent game board 810.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, a front wall W1 is disposed on the front side of the ball passage unit 700. The front wall W1 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane (a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction) including the left-right direction and the up-down direction. The ball passage unit 700 is attached to the back side of the transparent game board 810 with the front wall of the front wall W1 facing the back side of the transparent game board 810 as shown in FIG. The front wall W1 is provided with, for example, three circular openings 701A, 701B, 701C which are opened to a size that allows the game balls to pass, corresponding to the arrangement positions of the three general winning openings 226. The opening 701B is located at the lower right of the opening 701A. The opening 701C is located near the lower right of the opening 701B. In addition, for example, a circular opening 702A is disposed above the opening 701A of the front wall W1 so as to allow the game ball to pass therethrough, corresponding to the position of the second out port 241. In the ball passage unit 700, the transparent game board is arranged such that the opening 701A and the opening 702A are arranged in the opening 810c of the transparent game board 810 and the openings 701B and 701C are arranged in the opening 810d of the transparent game board 810. Screwed to the back of 810.

  In the ball passage unit 700 of this example, four openings 701A to 701C and 702A are provided corresponding to the three general winning openings 226 and one second out opening 241, but the number of openings is Can be changed according to the number of winning openings and the number of second outs. The opening shape of the openings 701A to 701C and 702A is not limited to a circular shape, and may be a triangle, a quadrangle, or a polygonal shape of quadrilateral or more.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, a rear wall W2 is disposed in parallel with the front wall W1 after the front wall W1. The rear wall W2 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left and right direction and the up and down direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2 has a length longer than the diameter of at least one gaming ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 to 251, the outline shapes of the outer shapes (outer circumferences) of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 viewed in the front-rear direction are substantially the same and overlap in general view. Side walls (for example, upper side walls 701 au, 701 bu, etc.) connecting the front wall W 1 and the rear wall W 2 substantially perpendicularly to the front wall W 1 and the rear wall W 2 in the outer contours of the front wall W 1 and the rear wall W 2 Is provided. The side walls are arranged to substantially follow the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and surround the outer contours of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 except for the ball discharge port 703E for gaming ball discharge.

  In the internal space formed by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and the side wall surrounding the outer wall of the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the internal space is further divided into three spaces. Side walls (for example, lower side wall 701ad, left side wall 701al, etc.) are provided to connect between W1 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. The three spaces function as a first ball passage 701, a part of the second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703, respectively, through which the gaming balls flow down.

  The first ball passage 701 is used to guide the gaming ball having passed through the openings 701A, 701B, 701C of the front wall W1 from the front to the back to the third ball passage 703. The second ball passage 702 is used to guide the gaming ball having passed through the opening 702A of the front wall W1 from the front to the back to the third ball passage 703. The third ball passage 703 is used to combine the gaming ball having passed the first ball passage 701 and the gaming ball having passed the second ball passage 702 and cause the ball to flow down and guide it to the ball outlet 703E.

  As shown in FIG. 251, the first ball passage 701 has six side walls (right side wall 701ar, upper side wall 701au, oblique side wall 701bu, right side wall 701br) surrounding the front wall W1 and a part of the outline of the rear wall W2. , Lower side wall 701bd, left side wall 701cl), and five side walls (left side wall 701al, lower side wall 701ad, left side wall 701bl, lower side wall 701bd ', right side wall 701cr) defining the inner space.

  The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al extend downward in parallel with each other from the opening 701A. The right side wall 701ar and the left side wall 701al are connected at the top of the opening 701A. The width in the left-right direction of the left side wall surface of the right side wall 701ar and the right side wall surface of the left side wall 701al below the opening 701A is at least longer than the diameter of one gaming ball.

  The lower end of the right side wall 701ar is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 701au. The upper side wall 701 au inclines gently downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the upper left end of the oblique side wall 701 bu. On the other hand, the lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 701ad of the side walls branched into two. The lower side wall 701ad is inclined downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701bl. The width between the lower side wall surface of the upper side wall 701au and the upper side wall surface of the lower side wall 701ad is at least longer than the diameter of one gaming ball.

  The game ball entered from the opening 701A flows downward downward and further obliquely downward to the lower right by the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the right wall 701ar, the left wall 701al, and the upper wall 701au and the lower wall 701ad. The passage 701a is configured.

  The oblique side wall 701bu is inclined downward to the right at an inclination angle of about 45 °, and the lower right end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701br. The right side wall 701br extends downward and then turns gently to the left, and the left end is connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd. The lower side wall 701bd is sloped gently to the left and the left end is connected to the right end of the lower side wall 701bd '. The lower side wall 701bd 'is gently inclined downward to the left, and the left end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 701cr. On the other hand, the left side wall 701bl is steeply inclined to the left, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 701cl.

  A space defined by the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the oblique side wall 701bu, the right side wall 701br, the lower side wall 701bd, the lower side wall 701bd ', and the left side wall 701bl is a ball passage 701b. The plane parallel to the front wall W1 of the ball passage 701b has an area in which the gaming ball can roll sufficiently. The opening 701B is disposed on the front wall W1 near the center of the oblique side wall 701bu of the ball passage 701b. The opening 701C is disposed on the front wall W1 near the center of the right side wall 701br of the ball passage 701b. Therefore, the game balls from the openings 701B and 701C directly enter the ball passage 701b, and the game balls from the opening 701A pass through the ball passage 701a and reach the ball passage 701b.

  The right side wall 701 cr extends downward and its lower end is located at the boundary with the third ball passage 703. The left side wall 701cl extends downward, and the lower end thereof is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 731al at the boundary with the third ball passage 703. The width in the left-right direction of the left side wall surface of the right side wall 701cr and the right side wall surface of the left side wall 701cl has a length longer than the diameter of at least one gaming ball. Further, in the rear wall W2 in the vicinity of the lower end of the right side wall 701cr, an opening portion X701 which is a rectangular shape large enough to allow the ball detection sensor S to penetrate is disposed in the front-rear direction. The lower end side of the opening X 701 is located at the boundary with the third ball passage 703. For this reason, as shown by the broken line rectangular shape in FIG. 249, the lower end side of the right wall 701cr and the lower end side of the opening X701 at the boundary with the third ball passage 703, the rear wall surface of the front wall W1, and An opening Y 713 opened in the vertical direction is formed with the right side wall surface of the left side wall 731 al.

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, and the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl form a ball passage 701c through which the game ball can flow downward. As shown in FIGS. 249 and 251, an opening Y 713 connected to the third ball passage 703 is provided at the lower end of the ball passage 701c. The opening Y 713 is a boundary between the first ball passage 701 and the third ball passage 703. Thus, the first ball passage 701 has the ball passages 701a to 701c.

  A sphere detection sensor S is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the right side wall 701cr and the left side wall 701cl near the upper side of the opening Y713. The ball detection sensor S is inserted in the front-rear direction through the opening X701 of the rear wall W2, and the tip of the ball detection sensor S is disposed in abutment against the rear wall surface of the front wall W1. The ball passage opening (detection opening) of the ball detection sensor S is located above the opening Y 713 and provided in the ball passage 701c of the first ball passage 701, and the gaming ball reaches the third ball passage 703 The game ball can be detected before the game. A ball passage port (detection port) of the ball detection sensor S is opened in a substantially circular shape having an inner diameter through which the game ball can pass. When the distance from the ball passage opening of the ball detection sensor S to the tip is long, the front wall W1 of the position where the tip abuts is opened to provide an opening, and the tip of the ball detection sensor S The opening may be penetrated.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming balls entered into the plurality of general winning openings 226 all have the same number of winning balls and pass through the first ball passage 701, so the first ball passage In some cases, it is possible to discharge the game balls together by providing only one ball detection sensor S at 701. Moreover, since the number of arranged ball detection sensors S can be reduced, there are cases where cost reduction can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, a rear wall W3 is disposed behind the rear wall W2 in parallel with the rear wall W2. The rear wall W3 has a flat plate shape parallel to a plane including the left and right direction and the up and down direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3 has a length longer than the diameter of at least one gaming ball.

  As shown in FIG. 251, in the back wall W2, a game ball is connected by connecting a space formed between the front wall W1 and the back wall W2 and a space formed between the back wall W2 and the back wall W3. Two, for example, rectangular openings X702b and X702d, which are opened to a size that allows passage, are disposed. The opening X 702 b is located below the opening 702 A. The opening X 702 d is located on the right side of the ball detection sensor S.

  The outer (outer periphery) contour of the rear wall W3 seen in the front-rear direction has a shape that is bent downward and then extends downward after being gently inclined downward to the right in the whole view, as shown in FIG. The outer contour portion of the rear wall W3 includes three side walls (upper side walls 702bu and 702cu, lower side wall 702cd) which connect the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 substantially perpendicularly to the rear wall W3 and the rear wall W2 and , A rear lower wall 702 dbd connecting the rear wall W 3 and the rear wall W 2 in an arc shape, and six side walls connecting the rear wall W 3 and the front wall W 1 substantially perpendicularly to the rear wall W 3 and the front wall W 1 (The lower left side wall 702bldf, 702bldb, the right side wall 702drf, 702drb, the left side wall 702dlf, 702dlb) is provided. The wall thickness of the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, and the rear wall W3 may be the same or different.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 to 251, the second ball passage 702 includes a ball passage 702a, a ball passage 702b, a ball passage 702c, and a ball passage 702d.

  The ball passage 702a includes a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right side wall 702ar and a left side wall 702al. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar extend parallel to one another downward from the opening 702A and then extend parallel to one another downward. The left side wall 702al and the right side wall 702ar are connected at the top of the opening 702A.

  The left side wall 702al extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the lower left side wall 702bldf. The right side wall 702ar extends to the vicinity of the opening X702b of the rear wall W2, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702br. The width in the lateral direction of the right side wall of the left side wall 702al and the left side wall of the right side wall 702ar below the opening 702A is at least longer than the diameter of one gaming ball.

  The ball passage 702 a is located at the same position as the first ball passage 701 in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball passage 702a is in the space created between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 similarly to the first ball passage 701.

  The ball passage 702a is the same as the left wall 701al of the ball passage 701a in the section to the bifurcation point where the right wall 702ar extends downward and branches to two hands, and the first ball The left side wall 701 al and the side wall of the ball passage 701 a of the passage 701 are shared.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a part of the ball passage 701a of the first ball passage 701 and a part of the ball passage 702a of the second ball passage 702 are adjacent to each other and share the partition wall. Since the wall of the ball passage having a large thickness in the left-right direction is shared, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved in some cases. In addition, that side walls share means that the partition wall of the part which the ball | bowl path | pass adjoins is shared.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702a is connected to the ball passage 702b. The ball passage 702b changes the course of the gaming ball having flowed downward in the ball passage 702a to the rear, and sends the gaming ball through the opening X702b disposed in the back wall W2 to the subsequent ball passage 702c. Provided for In other words, the ball passage 702b connects the ball passage 702a provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2 and the ball passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. In the front-back direction.

  The ball passage 702b includes a front wall W1, a rear wall W3, a right side wall 702br, a lower left side wall 702bldf and 702bldb, and an upper side wall 702bu.

  The front end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the front wall W1. The rear end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the rear wall W3. The rear end of the lower left sidewall 702bldf and the front end of the lower left sidewall 702bldb are connected, and the lower left sidewall 702bldf and the lower left sidewall 702bldb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 251, the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb are curved in a convex arc shape toward the lower left while securing an area through which the game ball can pass from the upper left end to the lower right end It is formed. The radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The width in the front-rear direction of the lower left side wall 702bldf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2. The width in the front-rear direction of the lower left side wall 702bldb is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3. The shape of the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower left side wall 702bldb seen in the front-rear direction does not have to be a circular arc, for example, a shape in which a wall surface extending downward from the upper left end intersects a wall surface extending leftward from the lower right end It is also good. The angle between the wall surfaces at this time may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that.

  The upper left end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 702al. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702br. On the other hand, the upper left end of the lower left sidewall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the upper sidewall 702bu. The lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldb is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 702cd. The upper side wall 702bu is gently inclined downward to the right, and the right end is connected to the left end of the upper side wall 702cu.

  The lower left side walls 702bldf and 702bldb of the ball passage 702b are disposed substantially perpendicular to the rear wall W3 and the front wall W1, so the inside of the passage is not inclined in the front-rear direction. Further, the connection between the lower left sidewall 702 bldb and the rear wall W 3 is perpendicular when viewed in the vertical direction. As a result, direction change projections Z1 and Z2 are provided in the ball passage 702b so that the smooth flow of the gaming ball is not impeded. As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the direction-changing projection Z1 extends downward from the portion of the front wall W1 located substantially at the center of the opening X702b when looking at the opening X702b from the rear to the front and is lower left It has a plate shape connected to the corner of the side wall 702bldf. Further, the direction-changing projection Z1 has a slope from the front to the back with an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the left-right direction. The game ball having flowed down the ball passage 702a rolls down the slope of the direction changing protrusion Z1 by the direction changing protrusion Z1, changes the rolling direction to the rear, and passes through the opening X702b. Note that the upper side wall 702bu may be disposed somewhat higher in the upper side in order to sufficiently secure a passage of the gaming ball in the ball passage 702b. In the case where the lower left side walls 702bldf and 702bldb have an inclined surface which inclines downward from the front to the rear to the extent that the gaming ball having passed the ball passage 701a can roll downward in the ball passage 701b, The direction changing protrusion Z1 may not be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, when looking at the opening X702b, the direction-changing projection Z2 extends leftward from the portion of the rear wall W3 located slightly below the center of the opening X702b and is lower left It has a plate shape connected to the side surface portion of the side wall 702bldf. In addition, the direction-changing projection Z2 has a slope from the left front to the right rear at an inclination angle of about 45 ° when viewed in the vertical direction. The game ball having passed through the opening X 702 b rolls the slope of the direction changing protrusion Z 2 by the direction changing protrusion Z 2, changes the rolling direction to the right, and passes the ball passage 702 b. When the lower left side wall 702 bldb has an inclined surface which inclines downward from left to right to the extent that it can roll down in the ball passage 701 b to the right, the direction changing projection Z 2 may not be provided. Good.

  In the ball passage 702b shown in FIG. 251, a double circle in which the inner circle is filled black indicates that the gaming ball advances from the front to the rear. In FIG. 251, the direction changing projections Z1 and Z2 are not shown.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702b is connected to the ball passage 702c. The ball passage 702c is provided to change the course downward after guiding the gaming ball having passed the ball passage 702b in the lower right direction. The ball passage 702c is configured of a back wall W2 and a back wall W3, and an upper side wall 702cu and a lower side wall 702cd.

  The upper side wall 702cu is inclined downward to the right and then bent downward and extends at the lower end thereof to the upper end of the right side wall 702drb. The lower side wall 702 cd is inclined to the lower right and then bent downward and extends at the lower end thereof to the upper end of the left side wall 702 dlb. The width of the inner facing surface of the upper side wall 702cu and the lower side wall 702cd is at least longer than the diameter of one gaming ball.

  As shown in FIG. 251, the ball passage section of the ball passage 702c of the second ball passage 702, which is defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd 'of the first ball passage 701, It is a portion overlapping with one ball passage 701. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, since a part of the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent game board 810, a game stand having a feature in the ball passage is provided. Can be provided. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to distinguish between the game ball entered into the general winning opening 226 and the game ball entered into the second out port 241 and to pass through different ball passages. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving of the ball passage unit 700 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction may be achieved in some cases.

  In addition, the portion is in the space formed between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3 on the rear side of the first ball passage 701. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the rear side of the first ball passage 701. Thereby, since the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not disturbed by the second ball passage 702, the gaming balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are promptly discharged (the ball detection sensor S is detected ) Can be.

  Also, at the site, the front wall of the second ball passage 702 is identical to the back wall of the first ball passage 701. That is, at the part concerned, the back wall W2 is shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the back wall W2 having a large thickness in the front-rear direction is shared, space saving in the front-rear direction can be achieved in addition to space saving in the left-right direction and the top-bottom direction of the ball passage unit 700. There are times when you can. The front wall W4 may be separately provided in the second ball passage 702 so that the back wall W2 is not shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. By so doing, molding of the components of the ball passage unit 700 may be facilitated. In addition, there are cases where cost reduction can be achieved by facilitating the manufacture of the ball passage unit 700.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the safe ball passes through the first ball passage 701 and the out ball passes through the second ball passage 702, so the safe ball and the out ball are separated and discharged. Can. In addition, since the safe sphere moves only in the space created between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, it discharges more quickly than the out sphere that also moves in the space created between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. There is a possibility.

  The lower end of the ball passage 702c is connected to the ball passage 702d. The ball passage 702d changes the course of the gaming ball having flowed downward from the ball passage 702c forward, and passes the gaming ball through the opening X702d disposed on the back wall W2 to follow the third ball passage 703. Provided for delivery to In other words, the ball passage 702d includes a ball passage 702c provided between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3 and a third ball passage 703 provided between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2. It is provided in the front and back direction to connect.

  The ball passage 702d includes a front wall W1, a rear lower wall 702dbd, right side walls 702drf and 702drb, and left side walls 702dlf and 702dlb.

  As shown in FIG. 249, the rear lower wall 702dbd is bent in the shape of a convex rear arc from the rear upper end to the front lower end while ensuring a width through which the game ball can pass. It is formed. The radius of the arc is longer than the length of one game ball. The rear upper end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the rear wall W3. The front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd is connected to the lower end of the opening X702d of the rear wall W2. The shape of the lower rear wall 702dbd viewed in the left-right direction does not have to be a circular arc, and may be, for example, a shape in which a wall surface extending downward from the rear upper end intersects a wall surface extending rearward from the front lower end. The angle between the wall surfaces at this time may be a right angle or an obtuse angle wider than that. Further, on the inner wall surface of the rear lower wall 702dbd, a direction changing projection may be provided to turn the flow-down direction of the gaming ball forward.

  As shown by a broken rhombus shape in FIG. 249, an opening that is vertically opened by the front lower end of the rear lower wall 702dbd, the lower end of the right side wall 702drf, and the lower end of the left side wall 702dlf and the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1. Y723 is formed. The game ball having passed the ball passage 702 d falls at the opening Y 723 and reaches the third ball passage 703. The opening Y 723 is a boundary between the second ball passage 702 and the third ball passage 703.

  The front end of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end portion of the left side wall 702dlf is connected to the right side wall surface of the right side wall 701cr. The upper end of the left side wall 702dlb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cd. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the left side wall 702dlb are connected to the left side of the rear lower wall 702dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd. The rear end of the left side wall 702dlf and the front end of the left side wall 702dlb are connected, and the left side wall 702dlf and the left side wall 702dlb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 702dlf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  The front end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the front wall W1. The upper end of the right side wall 702drf is connected to the lower side wall surface of the lower side walls 701bd and 701bd '. The upper end of the right side wall 702drb is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 702cu. The rear upper end to the front lower end of the right side wall 702drb are connected to the right side of the rear lower wall 702dbd following the arc shape of the rear lower wall 702dbd. The rear end of the right side wall 702drf and the front end of the right side wall 702drb are connected, and the right side wall 702drf and the right side wall 702drb are included in one plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the right side wall 702drf is longer than the width in the front-rear direction of the rear side wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front side wall surface of the rear wall W2.

  In the ball passage 702d shown in FIG. 251, a circle with an X inside indicates that the gaming ball travels from the rear to the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 249 to 251, the third ball passage 703 has five side walls (upper side wall 703 au, right side wall 703 br, left side wall 731 al, and the like) surrounding the front wall W1 and a part of the outline of the rear wall W2. Lower side wall 703ad, left side wall 703bl).

  The upper end of the left side wall 731al is connected to the lower end of the left side wall 701cl. The left side wall 731al extends downward and then turns to the right and inclines gently to the right, and the right end is connected to the left end of the lower side wall 703ad.

  The ball passage 713 through which the gaming ball having passed through the first ball passage 701 and the opening Y 713 further flows downwards at the front wall W1, the rear wall W2 and the left wall 731al, and the second ball passage 702 A ball passage 723 is formed, through which the gaming ball having passed through the opening Y 723 further flows downward. The width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 713 and the ball passage 723 has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of two gaming balls.

  The right end of the ball passage 713 is connected to the ball passage 723. The game ball having flowed down the ball passage 713 through the first ball passage 701 provided with the ball detection sensor S and the game ball having flowed down the ball passage 723 through the second ball passage 702 are ball passages. It merges near the merging position J 712 in 723 and passes through the following ball passage 703 a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the safe ball and the out ball can be separated and discharged. Also, by combining the safe ball that has passed through the out ball and the ball detection sensor S in the third ball passage 703, the third ball passage 703 for the safe ball and the third ball passage 703 for the out ball are separated. There is no need to As a result, space saving of the third ball passage 703 may be achieved.

  The left end of the upper side wall 703 au is connected to the lower end of the right side wall 702 drf. The upper side wall 703 au inclines gently downward to the right and then extends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 703 br. The lower side wall 703 ad is sloped gently downward to the right and then extends downward, and the lower end is connected to the upper end of the left side wall 703 bl.

  The right end of the ball passage 723 is connected to the ball passage 703a. The ball passage 703a is composed of a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and an upper side wall 703au and a lower side wall 703ad. The width in the vertical direction of the ball passage 703a has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of two gaming balls.

  The upper end of the right side wall 703 br is connected to the lower end of the upper side wall 703 au. The right side wall 703 br extends downward. The upper end of the left side wall 703bl is connected to the lower end of the lower side wall 703ad. The left side wall 703bl extends downward. The ball outlet 703E is configured by the lower end of the front wall W1 and the lower end of the rear wall W2, and the lower end of the right side wall 703br and the lower end of the left side wall 703bl. The width of the ball passage 703b in the left-right direction has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of two gaming balls.

  The lower end of the ball passage 703a is connected to the ball passage 703b. The ball passage 703b is composed of a front wall W1 and a rear wall W2, and a right wall 703br and a left wall 703bl. The game ball having passed through the ball passage 703b is guided to the ball discharge port 703E. The lower end of the ball passage 703a may be used as the ball outlet 703E without providing the ball passage 703b.

  In each of the first to third ball passages 701 to 703, the cross section opening (hereinafter referred to as "passage cross section") cut in a plane orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the gaming ball (closed enclosed by the inner wall surface The size (opening area) of the region may be different depending on the position of the cross section of each of the first to third ball passages 701 to 703. In FIG. 249, a cross-sectional opening 701O indicated by a broken line rectangle indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the cross section of the first ball passage 701 at the lower end position of the ball passage 701a. Similarly, the cross-sectional opening 702O indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the passage cross section substantially at the center of the ball passage 702c of the second ball passage 702. Similarly, the cross-sectional opening 703O indicates the size of the cross-sectional opening in the passage cross section substantially at the center of the ball passage 703a of the third ball passage 703. The size of the cross-sectional opening 701 O of the first ball passage 701 is substantially the same as the size of the cross-sectional opening 702 O of the second ball passage 702. On the other hand, the size of the cross-sectional opening 703O of the third ball passage 703 is larger than the size of the cross-sectional opening 701O of the first ball passage 701. Further, the size of the cross-sectional opening 703O of the third ball passage 703 is larger than the size of the cross-sectional opening 702O of the second ball passage 702.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the cross-sectional openings of the ball passage 703a and the ball passage 703b of the third ball passage 703 after the gaming balls having passed through the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 merge. The opening area of the 703O is larger than, for example, the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 701O of the ball passage 701a before the merging or the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 702O of the ball passage 702c. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 (in particular, the ball passage near the joining position J 712) after the joining.

  The front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, the left wall 701ad and the left wall 701bl, and the right lower end of the lower left wall 702bldf and the upper end of the left wall 701cl from the bifurcation point branched from the second hand The area surrounded by the lower side wall (not shown) to be connected is a hollow area. This hollow area can be variously modified. For example, the lower end that connects the lower right end of the lower left side wall 702bldf and the lower end of the left side wall 701bl may not be provided and may be an open end. Alternatively, the cavity may be filled with a resin material to fill the cavity. Also, the front wall W1 of the hollow area may be opened. Further, a part of the back wall W2 of the hollow area other than the area shared as the front wall of the ball passage 702c may be opened.

  Further, the left side wall 701 ad and the left side wall 701 bl may not be provided. By doing this, instead of the configuration of the ball passage 701a and the ball passage 701b, it is possible to create one wide-area ball passage connected to the ball passage 701c. The wide-area ball passage consists of front and rear walls W1 and W2, right side wall 701ar, side wall 701au, oblique side wall 701bu, right side wall 701br, lower side wall 701bd, lower side wall 701bd ', left side wall 701al, right side wall 702br, and lower left side wall 702bldf The space is defined by a lower side wall (not shown) connecting the lower right end and the upper end of the left side wall 701cl. The lower end of the left side wall 701al is connected to the upper end of the right side wall 702br.

  The width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the front wall W1 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W2 may have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of two gaming balls. Further, the width in the front-rear direction of the rear wall surface of the rear wall W2 and the front wall surface of the rear wall W3 may also have a length equal to or greater than the sum of the diameters of two gaming balls. Further, since the front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3 and the respective side walls are formed of a transparent resin material, the store clerk etc. of the game store is in a state of dirt inside the ball passage at the time of maintenance of the ball passage unit It is easy to grasp the The front wall W1, the rear wall W2, the rear wall W3, and each side wall may be formed of an opaque resin material. Further, linear grooves or linear protrusions may be formed on the inner wall in the ball passage along the direction in which the gaming ball flows down. By doing this, the friction between the inner wall of the ball passage and the gaming ball may be reduced, and the gaming ball may be rolled smoothly and rapidly. Also, a step may be provided on the slope of the ball passage or a slit may be provided on the wall of the ball passage. By doing this, it may be possible to adjust the flow-down speed of the game ball.

  Next, the movement of the gaming ball passing through the ball passage of the ball passage unit 700 will be described. The gaming ball guided to the opening 701A flows downward through the ball passage 701a and further obliquely downward to the lower right. Then, it moves downward to the right through the ball passage 701b and further flows downward to the left. Then, it falls downward through the ball passage 701c and passes through the ball detection sensor S. Then, it passes through the opening Y 713 and further downward through the ball passage 713. Then, it passes through the merging position J 712 and flows downward to the right through the ball passage 703 a. Then, it flows downward through the ball passage 703 b and is discharged from the ball outlet E. The operation of the gaming ball guided to the openings 701B and 701C is the same as in the case of the opening 701A, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  The gaming ball guided to the opening 702A flows downward through the ball passage 702a. Subsequently, the rolling direction is changed to the rear by the direction changing projection Z1 provided in the ball passage 702b through the ball passage 702b, and passes through the opening X702b. Subsequently, the rolling direction is changed to the right by the direction changing projection Z2. Then, it moves downward to the right through the ball passage 702c and further downward. Then, it moves forward and downward through the ball passage 702d and passes through the opening X 702d. Then, it passes through the opening Y 723 and flows further downward through the ball passage 723. Then, it passes through the merging position J 712 and flows downward to the right through the ball passage 703 a. Then, it flows downward through the ball passage 703 b and is discharged from the ball outlet E.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment F described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 249 to 251.

(A1)
A plurality of passages (for example, a first ball passage 701, a second ball passage 702, and a third ball passage 703) through which game balls discharged from the game area (eg, game area 124) can pass at least The game console,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as “second passage” (for example, second ball passage 702)) is different from the second passage of the plurality of passages. At least one (hereinafter, referred to as “first passage” (for example, first ball passage 701)) and at least a part in the front-rear direction (for example, left side wall 701bl of the first ball passage 701 in the ball passage 702c) And the ball passage section defined by the lower side wall 701bd '
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the first ball passage 701 and a part of the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent game board 810, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the ball passage. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to distinguish between the game ball entered into the general winning opening 226 and the game ball entered into the second out port 241 and to pass through different ball passages. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved in some cases.

(A2)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (A1),
A portion of at least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as a "third passage" (for example, a third ball passage 703)) is a game ball having passed through the first passage and the second It is a passage (for example, ball passage 703a, ball passage 703b) after the game ball which passed the second passage merges, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the safe ball and the out ball can be separated and discharged.

It is the gaming machine described in the above (A2),
The first passage is a passage provided with at least gaming ball detection means (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
The first passage and the second passage are passages where game balls merge at a first position (for example, a joining position J 712),
The first position is a position that is at least downstream (for example, below the opening Y713) than a position (for example, near the upper portion of the opening Y713) where the gaming ball detection means is provided. Play table.

(A3)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (A2),
The first passage is a passage provided with at least gaming ball detection means (for example, a ball detection sensor S),
A prize ball giving means (for example, a payout device 152) capable of giving at least a prize ball (for example, a ball to be paid out to a player based on winning) in relation to the detection of the game ball in the game ball detection means; Equipped
The first passage is a passage through which gaming balls having entered the first area (for example, the general winning opening 226) can pass.
The second passage is a passage through which gaming balls having entered the second area (for example, the second out port 241) can pass,
The gaming ball having entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the gaming ball detection means,
The game ball entering the first area is guided to the third passage after being detected by the game ball detection means.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, the safe ball that has passed through the out ball and the ball detection sensor S is merged in the third ball passage 703, thereby the third ball passage 703 for safe ball and the third ball for out ball It is not necessary to provide the ball passage 703 separately. As a result, space saving of the third ball passage 703 may be achieved. In addition, since the safe sphere moves only in the space created between the front wall W1 and the rear wall W2, it discharges more quickly than the out sphere that also moves in the space created between the rear wall W2 and the rear wall W3. May be

(A4)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (A3),
The first area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided above the first area (for example, above the general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, since the second out port 241 is at a higher position than the general winning port 226, it may be possible to discharge the out ball using the back side of the game area 124.

(A5)
The game console according to (A3) or (A4) above,
The first passage is a passage through which game balls having entered a plurality of areas (for example, three general winning openings 226) can pass.
At least one of the plurality of areas is the first area (for example, a general winning opening 226 for guiding the game ball to the opening 701A),
At least one of the plurality of areas is a third area (for example, a general winning opening 226 for guiding the gaming ball to the opening 701B, and a general winning opening 226 for guiding the gaming ball to the opening 701C)
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is a means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of at least detecting a game ball entering the first area,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of at least detecting a game ball entering the third area,
The prize ball giving means is a means capable of giving the same number (for example, 10) of prize balls when the game ball enters the first area and when the game ball enters the third area. is there,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, all the game balls entered into the plurality of general winning openings 226 have the same number of balls and pass through the first ball passage 701, so There may be a case where the gaming balls can be discharged collectively by providing only two ball detection sensors S. Moreover, since the number of arranged ball detection sensors S can be reduced, there are cases where cost reduction can be achieved.

(A6)
The game console according to any one of (A2) to (A5) above,
The size of the cross-sectional opening (for example, the cross-sectional opening 701O) of the first passage is a first size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening (eg, cross-sectional opening 702O) of the second passage is a second size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the third passage (for example, the cross-sectional opening 703O) is a third size,
The third magnitude is greater than the first magnitude,
The third magnitude is greater than the second magnitude,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, the ball passage 703a of the third ball passage 703 and the opening of the cross-sectional opening 703O of the ball passage 703b after the gaming balls having passed through the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702 merge. The area is larger than, for example, the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 701O of the ball passage 701a before merging or the opening area of the cross-sectional opening 702O of the ball passage 702c. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged in the third ball passage 703 (in particular, the ball passage near the joining position J 712) after the joining.

It is the gaming machine described in the above (A6),
The first size is a size of the cross-sectional opening of an area through which only game balls that have entered one of the uppermost stream of the plurality of areas can pass.
A game stand characterized by

(A7)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A6) above,
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of portions (for example, a ball passage 702a, a ball passage 702b, a ball passage 702c, and a ball passage 702d).
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as “first portion” (for example, the ball passage 702a)) has a position in the front-rear direction at the same position as the first passage (for example, the front) In the space created between wall W1 and back wall W2),
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as “second portion” (for example, the ball passage 702c)) is at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction (for example, the rear wall W2 In the space created between the and the back wall W3),
The second passage is at least a part of the first portion (for example, the ball passage section to the bifurcation point where the right side wall 702ar of the ball passage 702a extends downward and branches to two hands) The passage and the side walls are shared (for example, the portion of the right side wall 702ar of the section is the same as the left side wall 701al of the ball passage 701a and the side walls are shared),
The second passage is at least a part of the second portion (for example, a ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c). The rear wall of the first passage (for example, the rear wall W2 behind the front wall W1) and the front wall of the second passage (for example the rear wall W2 before the rear wall W3) are shared
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, a part of the ball passage 701a of the first ball passage 701 and a part of the ball passage 702a of the second ball passage 702 are adjacent to each other, and the partition wall is shared. Since the wall of the ball passage having a large thickness in the left-right direction is shared, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved in some cases. In addition, that side walls share means that the partition wall of the part which the ball | bowl path | pass adjoins is shared.

  Further, according to the above-mentioned game console, since the first ball passage 701 and a part of the second ball passage 702 overlap in the front-rear direction on the back side of the transparent game board 810, the game passage characterized by the ball passage is provided. it can. Furthermore, since a plurality of ball passages are provided in the front-rear direction, space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700 may be achieved in some cases.

  The ball passage section of the ball passage 702c of the second ball passage 702, which is defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower wall 701bd 'of the first ball passage 701, is the first ball passage 701 seen in the front-rear direction. It is the part which overlaps with. At the site, the front wall of the second ball passage 702 is identical to the back wall of the first ball passage 701. That is, at the part concerned, the back wall W2 is shared by the first ball passage 701 and the second ball passage 702. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, since the back wall W2 having a thickness in the front-rear direction is shared, space saving in the front-rear direction can be achieved in addition to space saving in the left-right direction of the ball passage unit 700. There is.

(A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7) above,
In the second passage, at least a portion (for example, a ball passage section defined by the left side wall 701bl and the lower side wall 701bd ′ of the first ball passage 701 of the ball passage 702c) is located behind the first passage. It is a passage overlapping on the side,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console, a part of the second ball passage 702 overlaps the back side of the first ball passage 701. Thereby, since the layout (arrangement) of the first ball passage 701 is not disturbed by the second ball passage 702, the gaming balls passing through the first ball passage 701 are promptly discharged (the ball detection sensor S is detected ) Can be.

(A9)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A8) above,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, three or more passages may overlap in the front-rear direction.

  The first passage and the second passage may both be safe ball passages or both may be out ball passages.

  The passage of at least one of the first passage and the second passage may be a passage mounted on something like a winning device or an entry area without a winning ball.

  The first passage may be configured to overlap on the rear side of the second passage, or both of the passages may be alternately overlapped on the front and the rear.

  As long as the first passage and the second passage are both safe ball passages and the number of winning balls when winning is the same, the game ball detection means may be provided in the third passage.

  The size of the opening area (cross-sectional opening) of the first passage and the second passage in the passage cross-section may be larger than the opening area of the third passage in the passage cross-section. By doing this, it may be possible to align and guide the gaming balls in the third passage after quickly discharging the gaming balls to the third passage.

  Another game ball detection means may be provided in the third passage. For example, it may be configured to count the total of gaming balls that have passed through all the passages as a count switch (used for grapes in the game area or effect switching by counting).

  The second out port may be lower than the general winning port.

  The passage (rear side) overlapping behind may be a safe ball passage.

  The passage through which at least the game ball discharged from the game area can pass includes the passage of a portion which is discharged from the game machine itself and supplied again to the ball tank of the game machine like island facilities as well as the game machine. It may be That is, by making the ball passage unit of the present invention applicable to the game island itself including the game stand, it may be possible to improve the space efficiency of the passage of the game ball.

  In the case of overlapping in the front-rear direction, the case may be included in which the first passage and the second passage overlap in the front-rear direction and the passages cross each other in three dimensions.

  The configuration described as "at least ... possible" in the above embodiment can also be interpreted by replacing the portion with "... only possible". For example, the game ball detection means described as "at least the game balls entering the first pay area can be detected" is replaced with the game ball detection means "only the game balls enter the first pay area can be detected". Can also be interpreted.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration described as "... possible" is interpreted by replacing the portion with "including the configuration which may or may not always be performed". You can also For example, the configuration described as "at least the gaming balls entering the first winning area can be detected" may not detect the gaming balls entering the first winning area, or It can be replaced with “means including the configuration to be always detected”.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix a1)
A gaming board provided with a plurality of passages through which game balls discharged from a game area can at least pass,
At least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, referred to as “second passage”) is at least one other than the second passage of the plurality of passages (hereinafter, “first”). A passage that at least partially overlaps with the passage))
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
A portion of at least one of the plurality of passages (hereinafter referred to as "third passage") is a combination of the game ball having passed the first passage and the game ball having passed the second passage. The passage after
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2,
The first passage is a passage provided with at least game ball detection means,
The game ball detection means is provided with a prize ball giving means capable of at least giving a prize ball in association with the detection of the game ball.
The first passage is a passage through which gaming balls having entered the first area can pass,
The second passage is a passage through which gaming balls having entered the second area can pass,
The gaming ball having entered the second area is guided to the third passage without being detected by the gaming ball detection means,
The game ball entering the first area is guided to the third passage after being detected by the game ball detection means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3,
The first area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided in the game area,
The second area is an area provided above the first area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to the a3 or a4.
The first passage is a passage through which gaming balls having entered a plurality of areas can pass,
At least one of the plurality of regions is the first region,
At least one of the plurality of regions is a third region,
The second region is a region not included in the plurality of regions,
The game ball detection means is a means provided only in the first passage,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of at least detecting a game ball entering the first area,
The game ball detection means is a means capable of at least detecting a game ball entering the third area,
The award ball providing means is a means capable of providing the same number of award balls when the game ball enters the first area and when the game ball enters the third area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a2 to a5, wherein
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the first passage is a first size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the second passage is a second size,
The size of the cross-sectional opening of the third passage is a third size,
The third magnitude is greater than the first magnitude,
The third magnitude is greater than the second magnitude,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a6, wherein
The second passage is a passage constituted by a plurality of parts,
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as “first portion”) is a portion whose position in the front-rear direction is the same as the first passage,
At least one of the plurality of portions (hereinafter, referred to as “second portion”) is a portion at a position overlapping the first passage in the front-rear direction,
The second passage is shared by the first passage and the side wall in at least a part of the first portion,
The second passage shares the back wall of the first passage and the front wall of the second passage in at least a part of the second portion.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a7, wherein
The second passage is a passage at least a portion of which overlaps the back side of the first passage.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Next, various items used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 252 is an external view of the accessory unit 820 as viewed from the front side (front side). In FIG. 252, the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit body 822 are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 252, various types of goods are arranged around the opening 822a of the unit body 822. A logo symbol 900 is disposed above the opening 822a. In addition, the logo accessory 900 has a logo movable body 902 which can move in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 252, the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is above the upper side of the rectangular image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is installed on the back side of the unit main body 822. When the logo accessory 900 is located at the initial position, at least a part may overlap with the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction, or the whole of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image display area may not overlap in the front-rear direction. When the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the initial position, at least a portion is positioned higher than the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the logo movable body 902 is movable upward and downward from the initial position. The logo movable body 902 moves away from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when moving upward from the initial position. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 moves downward from the initial position, at least a portion overlaps the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  An upper front decoration character 1000 is disposed behind the logo character 900, and an upper rear decoration character 1100 (not shown in FIG. 252, see FIG. 253) is arranged behind the upper front decoration character 1000. . In addition, the upper front decoration character 1000 has an upper front movable body 1002 movable in the vertical direction, and the upper rear decoration character 1100 can move in the vertical direction, an upper rear movable body 1102 (see FIGS. 262 and 264). have. In the state shown in FIG. 252, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial positions. In this state, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is hidden by the logo feature 900 and the upper front ornament character 1000 It can not be seen from the side. In the present embodiment, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward after the logo movable body 902 moves upward. After the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, it becomes visible from the front side.

  In addition, the arrangement order of the logo feature 900, the upper front decoration feature 1000, and the upper rear decoration feature 1100 is from the front, the upper front ornament feature 1000, the upper rear decoration feature 1100, and the logo feature 900. The upper back decoration character 1100, the logo character 900, and the upper front decoration character 1000 may be ordered, or the logo character 900, the upper back decoration character 1100, the upper front It may be in the order of the decoration character 1000, or may be in the order of the top front decoration character 1000, the logo character 900, and the top rear decoration 1100, or the top rear decoration character 1100, the top front decoration character The order may be 1000, and the logo feature 900.

  An upper right side character 1200 is disposed on the right side of the logo character 900, and an upper left side character 1300 is disposed on the left side of the logo character 900. In FIG. 252, the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side character 1200 moves to the lower left, and the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side character 1300 is positioned at the initial position. . The positions in the vertical direction of the initial positions of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper left side movable body 1301 are the same.

  In addition, the lower right side character 1400 is disposed at the lower right portion of the opening 822a, and the lower left side character 1500 is disposed at the lower left of the opening 822a. In addition, a central lower character 1600 is disposed at a central lower portion of the opening 822a and between the lower right side character 1400 and the lower left side character 1500.

  A decoration member 830 is disposed at the right end of the unit body 822. The decorative member 830 is molded of a resin material and has a shape that imitates the head of a beast, and is molded of, for example, a resin material. Further, at the left end of the unit main body 822, a decorative member 832 molded of a resin material is disposed.

  FIG. 253 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 820 shown in FIG. FIG. 253 shows the accessory unit 820 viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 253, as in FIG. 252, the upper right end 822b, the lower right end 822c, the lower left end 822d, and the upper left end 822e of the unit body 822 are omitted.

  The upper front decoration character 1000 and the upper rear decoration character 1100 are attached to a common upper character base portion 850. The upper product base portion 850 is fixed to the upper portion of the unit body 822 with a screw. In addition, a logo symbol 900 is disposed in front of the upper front decoration character 1000, and a feature base 966 of the logo symbol 900 is fixed to the unit body with a screw.

  The base 1254 of the upper right side character 1200 is screwed to the front base 1456 and the middle base 1460 of the lower right side character 1400. The middle base portion 1460 is fixed to the right end of the unit body 822 with a screw. Thereby, the upper right side character 1200 and the lower right side character 1400 are attached to the unit body 822.

  Similarly, the base 1354 of the upper left side character 1300 is screwed to the front base 1556 and the middle base 1560 of the lower left side character 1500. The middle base portion 1560 is fixed to the left end of the unit body 822 with a screw. Thus, the upper left side character 1300 and the lower left side character 1500 are attached to the unit body 822.

  Also, the base portion 1662 of the central lower character 1600 is fixed to the central lower portion of the unit main body 822 with a screw.

  A decoration member 830 is fixed to the right end of the unit body 822 with a screw. Further, a decoration member 832 is fixed to the left end of the unit body 822 with a screw.

  Logo character 900, upper front decoration character 1000, upper rear decoration character 1100, upper right side character 1200, upper left side character 1300, lower right side character 1400, lower left side character 1500, and middle lower part The prizes 1600 each include a movable body, and perform various effects using each movable body. As the effects using each movable body, effects such as special figure fluctuation game production and common game fluctuation game production, or big hit game production and demonstration effects etc. may be mentioned. More specifically, a notice effect for the special figure fluctuation game in progress (the notice effect concerned), a notice effect for the special figure fluctuation game being held (prefetch notice effect), a reach effect, a special figure 1 small hit effect, a special 2 includes a small hit effect, a regular drawing win effect, an advance notice effect, a 2R big hit game effect, a 15R special big hit game effect, and an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation of the setting operation unit 137. Hereinafter, various prizes will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 254 to 274.

  Next, the logo feature 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 254 to 256. First, the configuration of the logo symbol 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is an exploded perspective view of the logo symbol 900. FIG. FIG. 254 shows the logo symbol 900 viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. As shown in FIG. 254, the logo accessory 900 is roughly divided into a logo movable body 902, a base 904, and a drive unit 906.

  The logo movable body 902 has a character decoration portion 902a and a rotating link mechanism 902b. The character decoration portion 902 a is disposed at the front of the logo feature 900. The character decoration portion 902a has a first character portion 910, a second character portion 912, a third character portion 914, a fourth character portion 916, a fifth character portion 918, a sixth character portion 920, and a seventh character portion 922. ing. The first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 are arranged in this order from the left.

  The configuration of the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 will be described by taking the first character portion 910 as an example. The first character portion 910 includes a dial 910a, a decorative plate 910b, an LED substrate 910c, and a rear cover 910d. The dial 910a, the decoration plate 910b, the LED substrate 910c, and the rear cover 910d are arranged in this order from the front.

  The dial 910a is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a concavo-convex shape (in this example, a letter shape representing a letter “C”, see FIG. 255) representing a predetermined letter on the front side. A decoration plate 910b is disposed on the back side of the dial plate 910a. The decorative plate 910b is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and the front side is provided with a decorative pattern of irregularities. The decorative pattern of the decorative plate 910b is visible from the front side through the dial 910a, and decorates the dial 910a. An LED substrate 910c is disposed on the rear side of the decorative plate 910b. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted on the LED substrate 910c, and the logo movable body 902 enables the first character portion 910 to emit light using the plurality of LEDs. The LEDs of the LED substrate 910c are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 240, and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530. A rear cover 910d is disposed on the rear side of the LED substrate 910c. The rear cover 910d is molded of, for example, a resin material, and the dial 910a, the decoration plate 910b, and the LED substrate 910c are fixed to the rear cover 910d by screws.

  Similarly to the first character portion 910, the second character portion 912 to the seventh character portion 922 have a dial, a decorative plate, an LED substrate, and a rear cover. In this example, a concavo-convex shape representing the letter “R” is formed on the dial plate of the second character portion 912, and a concavo-convex shape representing a lightning symbol is formed on the dial plate of the third character portion 914, The concave and convex shape representing the character "Y" is formed on the dial plate of the fourth character portion 916, and the concave and convex shape representing the character "Shi" is formed on the dial plate of the fifth character portion 918. The concavo-convex shape representing the letter "Mu" is formed on the dial plate of the character portion 920, and the concavo-convex shape representing the letter "ne" is formed on the dial plate of the seventh character portion 922 (see FIG. 255). .

  As described above, the character decoration portion 902a of the logo movable body 902 has a character shape representing "CR (lightening symbol)" which is the model name of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  In addition, the character decoration portion 902 a includes cylindrical metal guide rods 924, 926, 928, 930, and 932 extending in the vertical direction. The guide rods 924 to 932 are disposed parallel to one another.

  A guided portion 912d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and the rear cover of the second character portion 912 is slidably attached such that the guided portion 912d1 surrounds the guiding rod 924. It is done. An upper end fixing portion 910d1 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 924 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover 910d of the first character portion 910, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 924 at the lower end of the rear cover 910d 910d2 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 910d1, and the lower end of the guide rod 924 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 910d2. Thereby, the first character portion 910 and the second character portion 912 are connected via the guide rod 924. Further, the upper end fixing portion 910d1 functions as a mechanical end of the second character portion 912. The function of the mechanical end will be described later.

  Similarly, a guided portion 914d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and in the rear cover of the third character portion 914, the guided portion 914d1 slides around the guide rod 926 Is mounted possible. An upper end fixing portion 912d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 926 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the second character portion 912, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 926 to the lower end of the rear cover 912d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 912d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 926 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 912d3. Thereby, the second character portion 912 and the third character portion 914 are connected via the guide rod 926. Further, the upper end fixing portion 912 d 2 functions as a mechanical end of the third character portion 914.

  Similarly, a guided portion 916d1 is provided at the left end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, and in the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, the guided portion 916d1 slides around the guide rod 928 Is mounted possible. An upper end fixing portion 914d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 928 is provided at the upper right end of the rear cover of the third character portion 914, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 928 to the lower end of the rear cover 914d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 914d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 928 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 914d3. Thus, the third character portion 914 and the fourth character portion 916 are connected via the guide rod 928. Further, the upper end fixing portion 914d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916.

  Further, at the right end of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916, an oval-shaped guide hole 916d2 extending in the vertical direction (parallel to the guide rods 924 to 932) is provided. In addition, on the rear side of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918, a cylindrical guided portion 918d1 is provided. The rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 is attached to the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 so that the guided portion 918 d 1 can move in the guide hole portion 916 d 2. For example, a screw with a washer is used for this attachment. The washer portion of the washer screw is larger than the width of the guide hole 916d2, and prevents the guided portion from being separated from the guide hole 916d2.

  Further, a guided portion 918d2 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918, and the rear cover of the fifth character portion 918 is slidable so that the guided portion 918d2 surrounds the guide rod 930. Is attached to An upper end fixing portion 920d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 930 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 930 to the lower end of the rear cover 920d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 920d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 930 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 920d3. Thereby, the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 are connected via the guide rod 930. Further, the upper end fixing portion 920d2 functions as a mechanical end of the fifth character portion 918.

  Similarly, a guided portion 920d1 is provided at the right end of the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, and in the rear cover of the sixth character portion 920, the guided portion 920d1 slides around the guide rod 932 Is mounted possible. An upper end fixing portion 922d2 for fixing the upper end of the guide rod 932 is provided at the upper left end of the rear cover of the seventh character portion 922, and a lower end fixing portion for fixing the lower end of the guide rod 932 to the lower end of the rear cover 922d3 is provided. The upper end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 922d2, and the lower end of the guide rod 932 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 922d3. Thus, the sixth character portion 920 and the seventh character portion 922 are connected via the guide rod 932. The lower end fixing portion 922 d 3 functions as a mechanical end of the sixth character portion 920.

  As described above, in the character decoration portion 902a, adjacent character portions are connected. When moving the logo movable body 902, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by the guide rods 924 to 932 and the guide hole portion 916d2 so that they can move parallel to each other in the vertical direction. There is.

  Next, the rotary link mechanism 902b disposed behind the character decoration portion 902a will be described. The rotational movement by the motor 970, which will be described later, is transmitted as a linear movement to the character decoration portion 902a via the rotational link mechanism 902b. The rotary link mechanism 902 b has a left crank 940, a right crank 942, and a link member 944.

  The left crank 940 has a left crank base 940a and a left crank cover 940b. The left crank base 940a is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length about half that of the character decorative portion 902a in the left-right direction. Further, the right side edge of the left crank base 940a is formed in an arc shape that is convex rightward, and a gear 940a1 is formed on the right side edge. A left crank cover 940b is fixed to the rear of the left crank base 940a with a screw, and a second character 912 and a third character 914 are provided between the left crank base 940a and the left crank cover 940b. A wire (not shown) connected to the LED substrate can be accommodated.

  The left crank 940 is formed with three oval-shaped guide holes (for example, guide holes 940 a 2, see FIG. 256). On the rear side of the rear cover of each of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916, a cylindrical guided portion is provided. The rear covers of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, and the fourth character portion 916 are attached to the left crank 940 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion. For example, a screw with a washer is used for this attachment. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole to prevent the guided portion from being separated from the guide hole.

  The right crank 942 has a right crank base 942 a and a right crank cover 942 b. The right crank base 942a is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a length about half that of the character decorative portion 902a in the left-right direction. Further, the left side edge of the right crank base 942a is formed in a circular arc shape convex to the left, and a gear 942a1 is formed on the left side edge. In addition, the right crank cover 942b is fixed by screws on the rear side of the right crank base 942a, and the fourth character portion 916 to the sixth character portion 920 are provided between the right crank base 942a and the right crank cover 942b. A wire (not shown) connected to the LED substrate can be accommodated.

  Three right oval guide holes are formed in the right crank 942. On the rear side of the rear cover of each of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920, a cylindrical guided portion is provided. The rear covers of the fourth character portion 916, the fifth character portion 918, and the sixth character portion 920 are attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion. For example, a screw with a washer is used for this attachment. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole to prevent the guided portion from being separated from the guide hole.

  Further, the gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are engaged with each other at their central portions. Further, the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 are formed of, for example, a resin material, and are connected by an elongated link member 944 which is long in the left-right direction. A circular fixed hole is formed at the left end of the link member 944, and the link member 944 is screwed to the left crank base 940a via the fixed hole. Further, the link member 944 is formed with an oval-shaped guide hole which extends in the left-right direction from the right end toward the left. On the rear side of the right crank 942, a cylindrical guided portion is provided. The link member 944 is attached to the right crank 942 so that the guided portion can move in the guide hole. For example, a screw with a washer is used for this attachment. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole to prevent the guided portion from being separated from the guide hole. The link member 944 couples the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 so that the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a1 of the right crank 942 do not shift or get out of mesh with each other. Thus, the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 can perform stable interlocking operations.

  Next, the base 904 of the logo symbol 900 will be described. The base 904 is disposed on the rear side of the rotary link mechanism 902 b, and includes a central decorative member 960, a left decorative member 962, a right decorative member 964 and an item base 966.

  The central decorative member 960 is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a convex curve shape as a whole as a whole, and is given a predetermined pattern of unevenness. The left decorative member 962 and the right decorative member 964 are molded of, for example, a resin material, and have shapes that are symmetrical to each other. The accessory base portion 966 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and a predetermined pattern of irregularities is applied to the surface. The central decoration member 960, the left decoration member 962, and the right decoration member 964 are screwed to the front side of the accessory base portion 966. Also, the accessory base portion 966 is screwed to the unit main body 822 shown in FIGS. Moreover, the edge of the center lower end of the accessory base portion 966 is formed in a semicircular shape that is recessed upward. When various kinds of prizes are attached to the unit main body 822, an upper front decoration piece 1000 to be described later is disposed below the center lower end of the prize base portion 966.

  In addition, the first character portion 910 is fixed to the left side of the character base portion 966 with a screw, and the seventh character portion 922 is fixed to the right side of the character base portion 966 with a screw. Therefore, the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 do not move even when the logo movable body 902 moves.

  Next, the drive unit 906 for driving the logo movable body 902 will be described. The driver 906 is disposed behind the accessory base 966 of the base 904. The drive unit 906 includes a motor 970, a base member 972, a spur gear 974, a sector gear 976, a left base 980, a right base 982, and a photo sensor 984.

  The motor 970 is a drive source for performing the moving operation of the logo movable body 902. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 970. The rotation axis of the motor 970 extends in the front-rear direction, and the base member 972 is formed with a through hole through which the rotation axis of the motor 970 passes. The motor 970 is screwed to the rear side of the base member 972 so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. Further, a spur gear 974 accommodated on the front side of the base member 972 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970.

  A sector gear 976 is disposed below the spur gear 974 and accommodated in the base member 972. The sector gear 976 is used to transmit the power of the motor 970 to the rotating link mechanism 902 b via the spur gear 974. The sector gear 976 has a gear portion 976a and an attachment portion 976b which are integrally formed. The gear portion 976 a is meshed with the spur gear 974. The mounting portion 976 b is disposed below the gear portion 976 a and is screwed to the left end of the left crank base 940 a of the left crank 940. In addition, a circular through hole is formed substantially at the center of the mounting portion 976b. Similarly, circular through holes are formed at the left end of the left crank base 940a and at the lower left of the accessory base portion 966. A cylindrical metal rod 990 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through holes of the mounting portion 976b, the left crank base 940a, and the accessory base portion 966. The metal rod 990 has its front end fixed to the rear cover 910 d of the first character 910 and its rear end fixed to the base member 972 of the drive unit 906. The left crank 940 and the sector gear 976 are integrally rotatable about the metal rod 990 as a rotation center. Thus, in conjunction with the rotational movement of the sector gear 976, the left crank 940 can rotate about a metal rod 990 as a rotation center by a predetermined angle within a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

  In addition, a circular through hole is formed at the right end of the right crank base 942 a of the right crank 942. A cylindrical metal rod 992 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through hole. The metal rod 992 has its front end fixed to the rear cover of the seventh character 922 and its rear end fixed to the lower right of the accessory base 966 of the base 904. Further, as described above, since the gear 940a1 of the left crank base 940a and the gear 942a1 of the right crank base 942a are engaged, the right crank 942 rotates the metal rod 992 in conjunction with the rotation operation of the left crank 940. As a center, it can be rotated by a predetermined angle in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

  In addition, a torsion coil spring 994 is disposed between the right crank 942 and the item base 966. A metal rod 992 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 994. One end of the torsion coil spring 994 is fixed to the right crank cover 942 b of the right crank 942, and the other end is fixed to the prize base portion 966. A force is applied to the torsion coil spring 994 in a direction in which the right crank 942 winds up when the right crank 942 rotates left, and the torsion coil spring 994 rotates clockwise to the right crank 942 when the right crank 942 rotates right. A torque is applied to assist the right crank 942 to rotate to the right.

  A left base 980 is fixed to the left rear surface of the accessory base 966 with a screw, and a right base 982 is fixed to the right rear surface of the accessory base 966 with a screw. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the left substrate 980 and the right substrate 982, and the base 904 can emit light using the LEDs. These LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 240 and are driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  Further, the motor 970 and the respective LED boards of the first character portion 910 to the third character portion 914 are connected to the left substrate 980 by wiring (not shown). The motor 970 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 through the left substrate 980, and the LED boards of the first character portion 910 to the third character portion 914 drive the game board lamp shown in FIG. It is connected to the circuit 530. Further, the LED substrates of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the right substrate 982 by wiring (not shown). The LED boards of the fourth character portion 916 to the seventh character portion 922 are connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. 240 via the right substrate 982. Thereby, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the movement operation of the logo movable body 902 of the logo accessory 900 and the light emission operation of the LED (light emitting means). In addition, the wiring between the logo accessory 900 and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be integrated.

  In addition, a photosensor 984 is fixed to the base member 972 by a screw. The photosensor 984 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 240 via the left substrate 980. The photosensor 984 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit which are disposed to face in the vertical direction with the space interposed therebetween. Further, on the rear side of the gear portion 976a of the sector gear 976, for example, a light shielding piece (not shown) formed of a black resin material is provided. When the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the movable top position, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photosensor 984. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 984 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece of the sector gear 976, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the logo movable body 902 is the uppermost position when the light sensor 984 detects the light shielding piece. If the photosensor 984 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the logo movable body 902 is positioned at a position other than the top.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, the operation of the logo movable body 902 of the logo accessory 900 will be described. FIG. 255 is an external view of the logo symbol 900 viewed from the front, and FIG. 256 is an external view of the logo symbol 900 viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 255 (a) and FIG. 256 (a) show the state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 255 (a), when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position, the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 of the character decoration portion 902a are arranged substantially in a straight line in the left-right direction. Also, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), when the logo movable body 902 is at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the left crank 940, the right crank 942, and the link member 944 of the rotary link mechanism 902b is oriented in the left and right direction. It has become. Further, the gear 940a1 of the left crank 940 and the gear 942a2 of the right crank 942 mesh with each other at the center.

  FIGS. 255 (b) and 256 (b) show a state in which the logo movable body 902 is moved upward from the initial position and positioned at the uppermost position in the movement range. The logo movable body 902 can be driven by the motor 970 of the drive unit 906 to perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  When moving the logo movable body 902 upward, the second auxiliary control unit 500 drives the motor 970 so that the rotation axis of the motor 970 rotates clockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. Turn counterclockwise). Thus, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates clockwise, and the sector gear 976 meshed with the spur gear 974 rotates counterclockwise. In addition, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates counterclockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942 a2 meshed with the gear 940 a 1 of the left crank 940 rotates clockwise. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (b), the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 is an oval shaped guide hole of the link member 944 by the amount of displacement of the right crank 942 in the left direction. Is moved to the left (to the right in FIG. 256). The link member 944 also moves upward in accordance with the operation of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the moving operation of the second character unit 912 to the sixth character unit 920 of the character decorative unit 902a at the time of the moving operation of the logo movable body 902 upward will be described by taking the fourth character unit 916 as an example. As shown in FIG. 256, in the fourth character portion 916, an oval-shaped guide hole in which a guided portion 916d4 provided on the rear side of the rear cover of the fourth character portion 916 is provided in the left crank base 940a. The portion 940a2 is attached to the left crank base 940a so as to be movable.

  An imaginary straight line passing through the long axis of the oval guide hole 940a2 passes through the rotation center of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the major axes of the two oval guide holes provided in the left crank 940 passes through the center of rotation of the left crank 940. Similarly, an imaginary straight line passing through the major axes of the two oval guide holes provided in the right crank 942 passes through the center of rotation of the right crank 942.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (a), when the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 940a2 is directed to the upper left (upper right in FIG. 256). ing. During execution of the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIG. 256 toward the page), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centered on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. The movement locus is drawn in an arc shape and moved upward to the left (in FIG. 256, upward to the right in the drawing). At this time, the guided portion 916d4 is moved upward by being guided by the guide hole 940a2. Also, the fourth character 916 is guided by the vertically extending guide rods 928 shown in FIG. 254 to move upward. Further, as described above, the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the guide rod 928 of the third character portion 914 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character portion 916. When the guided portion 916d1 of the fourth character portion 916 sliding on the guide rod 928 contacts the upper end fixing portion 914d2 of the third character portion 914, the fourth character portion 916 stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (b), the fourth character 916 stops before the guided portion 916d4 contacts the right end of the guide hole 940a2 (the left end toward the paper surface in FIG. 256).

  Thus, the rotational movement of the motor 970 is transmitted to the fourth character 916 as a linear movement in the vertical direction through the guide hole 940 a 2 provided in the left crank 940. The operating principle of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 is similar to that of the fourth character portion 916. The rotational motion of the motor 970 is transmitted as a linear motion to the second character 912 and the third character 914 via the left crank 940 and is linear to the fifth character 918 and the sixth character 920 via the right crank 942. It is transmitted as exercise. As a result, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 linearly move upward. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (b), the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by the guide rods 924 to 932 arranged in parallel to one another, and thus move upward parallel to one another. In addition, since the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 are fixed to the character base portion 966 as described above, they do not move.

  As described above, when the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902, move upward parallel to one another.

  When the left crank 940 performs the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the left crank 940 performs a rotating operation, and the amount of operation is larger in a portion farther from the portion near the rotation center. In this example, the first character portion 910 to the fourth character portion 916 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the left crank 940. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the amount of movement when moving the logo movable body 902 upward is larger in the order of the second character 912, the third character 914, and the fourth character 916. It has become.

  Similarly, the right crank 942 performs a rotation operation when the logo movable body 902 is moved upward, and the movement amount is larger in a portion farther from the portion near the rotation center. In the present example, the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918 are attached from the side closer to the rotation center of the right crank 942. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the amount of movement when moving the logo movable body 902 upward is larger in the order of the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918.

  In addition, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 at the time of the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 are approximately equal, and the third character portion 914 and the fourth character portion 914 arranged next to the fourth character portion 916 The amount of movement of the five character portion 918 is approximately equal, and the amount of movement of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 is approximately equal. Further, the amount of movement of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest in the logo movable body 902.

  Next, an operation of moving the logo movable body 902 from the initial position to the lowermost position in the movement range will be described. FIG.255 (c) and FIG.256 (c) have shown the state in which the logo movable body 902 is located in the lowest position. The logo movable body 902 can be driven by the motor 970 of the drive unit 906 to perform an operation of moving from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  When the logo movable body 902 is driven to execute the downward moving operation, the second sub control unit 500 drives the motor 970 to rotate the rotation axis of the motor 970 toward the paper surface of FIG. Rotate clockwise (clockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. 256). As a result, the spur gear 974 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 970 rotates counterclockwise, and the sector gear 976 meshed with the spur gear 974 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise toward the paper surface of FIG. 256). . Further, the left crank 940 fixed to the sector gear 976 rotates clockwise, and the right crank 942 including the gear 942 a2 meshed with the gear 940 a 1 of the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (c), the guided portion provided on the rear side of the right crank 942 is an oval-shaped guide hole of the link member 944 by the amount of displacement of the right crank 942 in the left direction. Is moved to the right (to the left in FIG. 256). The link member 944 also moves downward in accordance with the operation of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942.

  Next, the movement operation of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 of the character decoration portion 902a at the time of the downward movement operation of the logo movable body 902 will be described by taking the fourth character portion 916 as an example. During the downward moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the left crank 940 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 256 toward the paper surface), and the guide hole 940a2 is a circle centered on the rotation axis of the left crank 940. The movement locus is drawn in an arc shape and moved downward to the left (in FIG. 256, downward to the right in the drawing). At this time, the guided portion 916d4 is moved downward by being guided by the guide hole 940a2. Also, the fourth character 916 is guided by the vertically extending guide rods 928 shown in FIG. 254 to move downward.

  At the time of the downward moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the guide hole 940a2 functions as a mechanical end of the fourth character 916. The fourth character portion 916 is configured to stop when the guided portion 916d4 of the fourth character portion 916 contacts the right end portion (the left end portion facing the sheet in FIG. 256) of the guide hole portion 940a2.

  As described above, when the logo movable body 902 is at the initial position, the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 940a2 is directed to the upper left (in FIG. 256, the upper right toward the paper surface). Therefore, when the downward movement of the logo movable body 902 in which the left crank 940 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 256) is executed, the left crank 940 rotates counterclockwise (in FIG. 256, toward the paper). The moving distance of the guided portion 916d4 is smaller than when the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 rotating clockwise) is performed. Therefore, at the time of the downward moving operation of the logo movable body 902, the rotation angle of the left crank 940 becomes smaller than at the time of the upward moving operation, and the movement amount of the fourth character portion 916 also becomes smaller.

  The operating principle of the second character portion 912, the third character portion 914, the fifth character portion 918 and the sixth character portion 920 is similar to that of the fourth character portion 916. As shown in FIG. 256 (c), the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 are guided by the guide rods 924 to 932 arranged in parallel to one another, and move downward parallel to one another. In addition, since the first character portion 910 and the seventh character portion 922 are fixed to the character base portion 966 as described above, they do not move.

  In addition, since the left crank 940 executes the rotation operation when the logo movable body 902 is moved downward, the second character 912, the third character 914, and the fourth character 914, as shown in FIG. The amount of movement increases in the order of the character portion 916.

  Similarly, since the right crank 942 executes the rotation operation when the logo movable body 902 is moved downward, the sixth character portion 920 and the fifth character portion 918 are in the order as shown in FIG. 255 (c). The amount of movement increases.

  In addition, the absolute values of the rotation angles of the left crank 940 and the right crank 942 at the time of the downward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 are almost equal, and the third character portion 914 and the fourth character portion 914 arranged next to the fourth character portion 916 The amount of movement of the five character portion 918 is approximately equal, and the amount of movement of the second character portion 912 and the sixth character portion 920 is approximately equal. Further, the amount of movement of the fourth character portion 916 is the largest in the logo movable body 902.

  Thus, when the downward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 is performed, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of portions of the logo movable body 902, move downward in parallel with one another.

  The initial position of the logo movable body 902 is a position located after the operation of the logo movable body 902 is confirmed when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, the logo movable body 902 moves to the lowermost position shown in FIG. 255 (c), and then moves to the uppermost position shown in FIG. 255 (b), and then, FIG. Move to the initial position shown in (a) and stop. The upper front ornament character 1000, the upper rear ornament character 1100, the upper right side character 1200, the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side character 1400, the lower left side character 1500, and the central lower character 1600 The operation confirmation is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on also for the movable bodies provided in the above, and these movable bodies stop at the initial position after the operation confirmation.

  In the present embodiment, the moving amount of the logo movable body 902 from the initial position to the uppermost position is larger than the moving amount from the initial position to the lowermost position. More specifically, the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920, which are a plurality of movable portions of the logo movable body 902, are at the uppermost position from the initial position than the amount of movement from the initial position to the lowermost position. The amount of movement before moving to is larger. It should be noted that the movement amount from the initial position to the uppermost position is more than the movement amount from the initial position to the lowermost position in comparison with the same movable portion of the plurality of movable portions of the logo movable body 902 It only needs to be larger. In addition, all of the second character portion 912 to the sixth character portion 920 which are a plurality of parts of the logo movable body 902 may be movable in parallel to each other, or the second character portion 912 which is a plurality of movable portions. Some of the sixth character portion 920 may be movable in parallel with each other.

  The uppermost position of the logo movable body 902 is a position away from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lowermost position of the logo movable body 902 is a position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the logo movable body 902 has a movement amount to the top away from the decorative symbol display device 208 larger than the movement amount to the lowermost side approaching the decorative symbol display device 208. The amount of movement of logo moving body 902 in the direction away from decorative symbol display device 208 may be smaller than the amount of movement in the direction of approaching decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, the logo movable body 902 may have a sub display smaller than the decorative symbol display 208. The sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. Further, the sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400 or may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  The logo movable body 902 may be capable of rotating the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 or may be capable of rotating after the upward movement operation, or may be moved upward after the rotation operation. It may be moved, may be rotatable after the downward moving operation, or may be moved downward after the rotational operation is performed.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be movable below the lower end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the downward movement operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the initial position, the logo movable bodies 902 overlap in the front-rear direction of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The logo movable body 902 may not overlap in the front-rear direction of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when located at the initial position. The entire logo movable body 902 may be located above the upper end of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position.

  Also, the logo movable body 902 may be an integral movable body having a plurality of movable parts. For example, the movable portion including the sub display device and another movable portion movable in the vicinity of the sub display device may be integrally formed as a movable body.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 according to the present embodiment has a character shape representing a title logo including at least a part of the model name of the game stand and the like. Further, the logo movable body 902 is a character other than the title logo, for example, a characteristic character related to the feature of the game stand or the title or motif of the game stand (if the game stand has a latent change in gaming state If it is a game stand that has an historical play as a motif, such as “Hakuto” or “Kai”, “War or“ Fight ”etc. can be mentioned. The number of characters may be one, or two or more.

  In addition, the logo movable body 902 may emit light of a single color, or may emit light of a plurality of colors. Also, the logo movable body 902 may not be provided with the light emitting means. Alternatively, at least one of the first character portion 910 to the seventh character portion 922 may emit light.

  Also, the logo movable body 902 may be configured so as not to perform multi-step operation, and can only move movement.

  Further, the logo movable body 902 may be at least capable of performing the movement operation in the front-rear direction. In this case, the logo movable body 902 may include a front-rear drive unit 1004 described later. Further, the logo movable body 902 may be movable in the front-rear direction when positioned at the initial position, may be movable in the front-rear direction when positioned at the uppermost position, or the lowermost position And may be movable in the front-rear direction when being positioned at

  Further, in the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 970, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servomotor can be used.

  Moreover, although the motor was used for the drive source of the logo movable body 902 in this Embodiment, it is not restricted to this. For example, various actuators such as a solenoid may be used as a drive source of the logo movable body 902.

  Next, the upper front decoration character 1000 will be described using FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. First, the configuration of the upper front ornament 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 259 and with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. FIGS. 257 and 258 are exploded perspective views of the upper front decoration character 1000. FIG. FIG. 257 and FIG. 258 show a state in which the upper front ornament character 1000 is viewed from the front upper right from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 258, a part of the upper rear decoration character 1100 described later is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 257 and 258, the upper front decoration character 1000 can be roughly divided into an upper front movable body 1002, an anteroposterior drive portion 1004, an upper and lower drive portion 1006, and an upper front movable body base portion 1008. There is.

  First, the upper front movable body 1002 will be described using FIG. 257 with reference to FIG. The upper front movable body 1002 has a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b. The lens movable body 1002 a has a front side decoration portion 1010, an outer side decoration portion 1012, an inner side decoration portion 1014, a lower side decoration portion 1016, and a lens 1018, and is disposed at the front of the upper front ornament 1000. The lens movable body 1002a is movable forward from the base portion 1002b.

  The front decoration part 1010 has ten movable parts 1010a to 1010j. The movable parts 1010a to 1010j are, for example, separately molded of a transparent resin material, have the same size and shape, and are arranged in an annular shape. In addition, the front side of the movable parts 1010a to 1010j is decorated with irregularities.

  The outer decorative portion 1012 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a circular shallow bottom shape, is disposed so that the bottom surface faces the front, and the surface is decorated with irregularities. In addition, the outer decorative portion 1012 has a circular opening 1012 a at the center of the bottom surface. In addition, the outer decorative portion 1012 is configured to be able to house an inner decorative portion 1014 described later.

  The inner decorative portion 1014 has a base 1014a, a rotating disc 1014b, and a slotted disc 1014c. The base 1014a, the rotary disc 1014b, and the slotted disc 1014c are made of, for example, a resin material, have a thin-plate annular shape, and have approximately the same inner diameter and outer diameter. The base 1014a, the rotary disc 1014b, and the elongated holed disc 1014c are disposed overlapping in this order from the rear side so that the centers of the openings coincide with each other. In addition, a circular opening 1014d is disposed so as to be surrounded by the base 1014a, the rotary disc 1014b, and the elongated holed disc 1014c.

  The base 1014 a, the rotary disc 1014 b, and the slotted disc 1014 c are accommodated in the outer decorative portion 1012. The base 1014a and the slotted disk 1014c are screwed to the outer decorative portion 1012, and the outer decorative portion 1012 is screwed to the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044, which will be described later. For this reason, the base 1014a and the slotted disc 1014c can not be rotated. The rotating disc 1014b is held between the base 1014a and the long hole disc 1014c and is not fixed by a screw or the like, and can be rotated within a predetermined angle range around the center of the opening 1014d. There is. Further, the contact area between the rotary disk 1014 b and the base 1014 a and the slotted disk 1014 c is relatively reduced, and the frictional force between the base 1014 a and the slotted disk 1014 c is reduced.

  A gear portion 1014b1 is provided on the right rear surface of the rotary disk 1014b. The gear portion 1014b1 is formed such that the teeth having the same shape and inscribed at the same pitch are circumferentially aligned and directed rearward. Further, a notch (not shown) is provided on the outer periphery of the base 1014a in accordance with the operation range of the gear portion 1014b1. Thereby, the gear portion 1014b1 and the base portion 1014a are prevented from coming in contact with each other to prevent the rotational operation of the rotary disc 1014b from being hindered, and the gear portion 1014b1 can mesh with the spur gear 1024 arranged rearward. .

  The rotary disk 1014 b has a guide hole 1014 b 2 (not shown in FIG. 257, see FIG. 259). The guide hole 1014b2 has an oval shape extending obliquely from the upper left to the lower right with respect to a virtual circumference passing between the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotary disk 1014b. Further, the rotary disk 1014 b has nine guide holes (not shown) similar to the guide holes 1014 b 2. These guide holes are arranged at equal intervals.

  The slotted disk 1014c has a slot-shaped long hole 1014c1 extending in the radial direction of the outer circumferential circle of the slotted disk 1014c. The long holed disc 1014c has nine long hole portions similar to the long hole portion 1014c1. These long holes are arranged at equal intervals.

  The lower end portion of the guide hole portion of the rotary disc 1014b and the long hole portion of the long hole disc 1014c are disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. For example, the lower end portion of the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotary disc 1014b and the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long hole disc 1014c are disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  The inner decorative portion 1014 further includes a movable portion support portion 1014e. The movable portion support portion 1014 e has a thin plate shape as a whole, and is disposed such that the plate surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the movable portion support portion 1014e is, for example, integrally formed of a resin material integrally, and has a mounting portion 1014e1 projecting cylindrically from the front side and a circle from the rear side to the rear side. And a guided portion 1014e2 protruding in a columnar shape. Further, the inner decorative portion 1014 has nine movable portion support portions similar to the movable portion support portion 1014 e.

  The mounting portion 1014e1 protrudes forward from the opening 1012a of the outer decorative portion 1012, and is fixed to the lower end of the rear surface of the movable portion 1010a disposed in front of the outer decorative portion 1012 with a screw. Similarly, the movable portions 1014 b to 1014 j are fixed to the nine movable portion supporting portions other than the movable portion supporting portion 1014 e by screws one by one.

  The movable portion support portion 1014e is mounted such that the guided portion 1014e2 can move in the guide hole portion 1014b2 of the rotary disk 1014b and in the long hole portion 1014c1 of the long hole disc 1014c. For example, a screw with a washer is used for this attachment. The washer portion of the screw with washer is larger than the width of the guide hole 1014 b 2 and the long hole 10 14 c 1 to prevent the guided portion 10 14 e 2 from being separated from the guide hole 10 14 b 2 and the long hole 10 14 c 1. Similarly, the nine movable portion support portions other than the movable portion support portion 1014e are washers such that the guided portion can move in the guide hole portion of the rotary disc 1014b and in the long hole portion of the elongated disc 1014c. It is attached by the attachment screw. The rotating disk 1014 b, the elongated holed disk 1014 c, and the movable portion support portion 1014 e are used to operate the movable portion 1010 a to the movable portion 1010 j.

  In addition, the lower decoration 1016 is fixed to the lower end of the outer decoration 1012 with a screw. The lower decorative portion 1016 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material and is decorated with irregularities.

  In addition, a lens 1018 is fixed to the rear side of the base 1014 a of the inner decorative portion 1014 with a screw. The lens 1018 has a substantially circular shape, and the center of the lens 1018 and the centers of the openings 1012 a and 1014 d overlap in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, a convex lens is used as the lens 1018, but a concave lens may be used.

  Moreover, the LED board (not shown) in which several LED was mounted is arrange | positioned at the back side of base 1014a. The LED substrate has an annular shape similar to that of the base 1014a, and the central opening is disposed so as to overlap the opening 1014d. The lens movable body 1002a can emit light using the plurality of LEDs. The plurality of LEDs are included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 240 and driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  A base portion 1002b is disposed behind the lens movable body 1002a. The base portion 1002b is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has an upper base portion 1002b1, a lower base portion 1002b2, a right side base portion 1002b3, a left side base portion 1002b4, and an opening 1002b5. The upper base 1002b1 is disposed on the top of the base 1002b, and the lower base 1002b2 is disposed on the bottom of the base 1002b. The upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2 are disposed in the same plane in which the front surfaces are orthogonal to the front-rear direction.

  The right side base 1002 b 3 and the left side base 1002 b 4 are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction across the upper side base 1002 b 1 and the lower side base 1002 b 2. The right side base 1002 b 3 is disposed extending rearward from the right rear end of the upper side base 1002 b 1 and the lower side base 1002 b 2. Further, the left side base 1002 b 4 is disposed to extend rearward from the left rear end of the upper side base 1002 b 1 and the lower side base 1002 b 2.

  The lower end of the upper base 1002 b 1 is formed to conform to the upper contour of the lens 1018, and the upper end of the lower base 1002 b 2 is formed to conform to the lower contour of the lens 1018. As surrounded by the upper base 1002b1 and the lower base 1002b2, an opening 1002b5 having a contour the same as that of the lens 1018 is disposed. The lens movable body 1002a is disposed in front of the base portion 1002b such that the lens 1018 and the opening portion 1002b5 overlap in the front-rear direction. The openings 1012b and 1014d, the lens 1018, and the opening 1002b5 form a visual recognition area in which the rear of the lens movable body 1002a can be visually recognized, and the lens 1018 is disposed in the visual recognition area. Thus, the rear of the upper front movable body 1002 is visible from the front side through the openings 1012 b and 1014 d, the lens 1018, and the opening 1002 b 5.

  The lower end of the lower base 1002 b 2 is shaped to fit the upper surface of the lower decorative portion 1016. When the lens movable body 1002a is attached to the base portion 1002b, the lower decorative portion 1016 is positioned below the lower base portion 1002b2, and the base portion 1002b prevents the longitudinal movement of the lens movable body 1002a. It is not supposed to.

  Next, the front and rear drive unit 1004 will be described. The front-rear drive unit 1004 is used to move the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. The front-rear drive unit 1004 includes a drive source unit 1004a, a right side drive unit 1004b, a left side drive unit 1004c, and a movable unit drive unit 1004d.

  The drive source unit 1004 a includes a motor 1020, a mounting member 1022, a spur gear 1024, a shaft 1026, and spur gears 1028, 1030, and 1032. The motor 1020 is a drive source for executing the movement operation of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1020. The motor 1020 has a rotational axis extending in the left-right direction.

  The mounting member 1022 is molded of, for example, a resin material, and is used to attach the motor 1020 to the right side surface of the right side base 1002 b 3 of the base portion 1002 b. The mounting member 1022 is formed with a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1020 passes. The motor 1020 is screwed to the right side surface of the mounting member 1022 so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. The mounting member 1022 is screwed to the right side surface of the right side base 1002 b 3.

  Further, a spur gear 1024 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1020. The spur gear 1024 is disposed to the left of the motor 1020 and between the mounting member 1022 and the right side base portion 1002b3. In addition, a cylindrical shaft 1026 made of metal extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the upper base portion 1002b1 of the base portion 1002b. The shaft 1026 has substantially the same length as the length of the upper base 1002 b 1 in the left-right direction, and a spur gear 1028 is fixed at the right end. The spur gear 1028 is engaged with a fixed spur gear 1024 of the rotation shaft of the motor 1020. Further, a spur gear 1032 is fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026.

  Further, a spur gear 1032 is rotatably attached to the left side surface of the left side base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b. The spur gear 1032 is engaged with a spur gear 1030 fixed to the left end of the shaft 1026. The spur gear 1032 is disposed so as to have the same position as the spur gear 1024 in the vertical direction.

  The spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, and 1032 are arranged such that the rotation axis is in the left-right direction. The spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. The spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 have the same pitch circle diameter, the same shape, and the same number of teeth. The spur gears 1024 and 1032 have a pitch circle diameter larger than that of the spur gears 1028 and 1030, and the number of teeth is also large. The gear ratio of spur gear 1024 and spur gear 1028 and the gear ratio of spur gear 1030 and spur gear 1032 are equal to each other and less than one.

  Therefore, the rotational motion of the motor 1020 is transmitted to the spur gear 1028 via the spur gear 1024 with the rotational speed being increased at a predetermined ratio. Further, since the spur gear 1028 and the spur gear 1030 are fixed to the shaft 1026, they rotate at the same rotational speed in the same direction. Further, the rotational movement of the spur gear 1030 is reduced in rotational speed by a predetermined ratio and transmitted to the spur gear 1032. Thus, the rotational speed of the spur gear 1032 becomes the same as the rotational speed of the spur gear 1024. Further, the rotational directions of the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 are the same. The drive source unit 1004a can transmit the rotational movement of the motor 1020 to the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 in the same rotational direction and at the same rotational speed.

  Next, the right side drive unit 1004 b and the left side drive unit 1004 c will be described. The right side drive unit 1004 b and the left side drive unit 1004 c are used to convert the rotational movement of the motor 1020 into linear movement and transmit it to the lens movable body 1002 a.

  The right side drive unit 1004 b includes a right side guide rod 1034, a right side guide rod fixing member 1036, and a right side moving member 1038. The right guide rod 1034 is made of metal and has a cylindrical shape, and is disposed extending in the front-rear direction. The front end of the right guide rod 1034 is fixed to the right front of the right base 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the right rear of the right base 1002b3 by the right guide rod fixing member 1036.

  The right moving member 1038 is disposed to the right of the right base 1002 b 3 and below the spur gear 1024. The right side moving member 1038 is molded of a resin material and has a thin plate rectangular shape as a whole, and the longitudinal direction is parallel to the front and rear direction, and the plate surface is disposed to be orthogonal to the left and right direction. On the upper end side of the right side moving member 1038, a rack portion 1038a in which teeth of the same shape are cut at the same pitch and aligned in the front-rear direction is provided. The rack portion 1038 a is engaged with the spur gear 1024. Further, a guided portion 1038 b having a cylindrical through hole is provided on the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038. The right moving member 1038 is slidably attached such that the guided portion 1038 b surrounds the right guide rod 1034. The right moving member 1038 receives the rotational movement of the spur gear 1024 at the rack portion 1038 a and converts it into linear movement, and is guided by the right guide rod 1034 so as to be capable of linear movement in the front-rear direction.

  Further, on the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038, a front side groove 1038c and a rear side groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided. The front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d extend in parallel with the same length. The functions of the front groove 1038c and the rear groove 1038d will be described later.

  The left drive unit 1004 c has a left guide rod 1040, a left guide rod fixing member 1042, and a left moving member 1044. The left guide rod 1040 is made of metal and has a cylindrical shape, and is disposed extending in the front-rear direction. The left guide rod 1040 is disposed parallel to the right guide rod 1034 at the same position as the right guide rod 1034 in the vertical direction. The front end of the left guide rod 1040 is fixed to the left front of the left base 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b, and the rear end is fixed to the left rear of the left base 1002b4 by the left guide rod fixing member 1042.

  The left moving member 1044 is disposed on the left side of the left base 1002 b 4 and below the spur gear 1032. The left moving member 1044 is formed of a resin material and has a thin rectangular shape as a whole, and the longitudinal direction is parallel to the front-rear direction, and the plate surface is disposed to be orthogonal to the left-right direction. The left moving member 1044 has the same position in the vertical direction as the right moving member 1038 and the same position in the front-rear direction, and is disposed parallel to the right moving member 1038. On the upper end side of the left moving member 1044, a rack portion 1044a in which teeth of the same shape are incised at the same pitch and aligned in the front-rear direction is provided. The rack portion 1044 a is meshed with the spur gear 1032. Further, a guided portion (not shown) similar to the guided portion 1038 b is provided on the left side surface of the left moving member 1044. The left moving member 1044 is slidably attached such that the guided portion surrounds the left guiding rod 1040. The left moving member 1044 receives the rotational movement of the spur gear 1032 by the rack portion 1044a and converts it into linear movement, and is guided by the left guide rod 1040 to be linearly movable in the front-rear direction.

  The right side moving member 1038 and the left side moving member 1044 have the same size. The racks 1038a and the racks 1044a have the same shape, and the tooth pitch and the number of teeth are equal. Further, when the motor 1020 is driven, the spur gear 1024 and the spur gear 1032 rotate in the same direction at the same rotational speed. The rack portion 1038a is engaged with the spur gear 1024, and the rack portion 1044a is engaged with the spur gear 1032. Therefore, when the motor 1020 is driven, the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 have the same speed and the same speed. It moves linearly in parallel with each other in the front-rear direction.

  The right rear surface of the base 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front end side of the right moving member 1038 with a screw. Similarly, the left rear surface of the base 1014a of the inner decorative portion 1014 of the lens movable body 1002a is fixed to the front end side of the left moving member 1044 with a screw. For this reason, the lens movable body 1002a linearly moves in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the linear movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  When the lens movable body 1002a moves forward from the base portion 1002b, the front end of the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 comes in contact with the front end of the right side base 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. Similarly, when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward from the base portion 1002b, the front end of the guided portion of the left moving member 1044 comes in contact with the front end of the left base 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b. There is. Thus, the guided portion 1038b of the right moving member 1038 and the guided portion (not shown) of the left moving member 1044 function as a mechanical end of the lens movable body 1002a.

  Next, the movable portion drive portion 1004 d will be described. The movable portion drive portion 1004 d is used to drive the movable portions 1010 a to 1010 j of the front decorative portion 1010 when the lens movable body 1002 a moves in the front-rear direction.

  The movable portion drive portion 1004 d has a rack-guided member 1050, a guided shaft 1052, a slide bearing 1054, a spur gear 1056, a mounting member 1058, and a guiding member 1058 with a guiding groove.

  The rack-attached guided member 1050 is integrally molded of a resin material, and has a mounting portion 1050 a and a rack portion 1050 b. The mounting portion 1050a has a thin plate flat shape, and is disposed such that the plate surface is orthogonal to the left-right direction. Further, a front side groove 1038c and a rear side groove 1038d extending in the vertical direction are provided on the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038, and two protrusions (not shown) are provided on the left side surface of the mounting portion 1050a. The racked guided member 1050 is attached to the right moving member 1038 such that one protrusion can slide in the front groove 1038c and the other guided portion can slide in the rear groove 1038d. Thus, the rack-mounted guided member 1050 is vertically movable along the front groove 1038 c and the rear groove 1038 d of the right moving member 1038.

  Further, a rack portion 1050b is disposed at the front end of the mounting portion 1050a. In the rack portion 1050b, the same shape teeth are incised at the same pitch, and the tips point forward.

  On the right side surface of the mounting portion 1050a, the left end of a guided metal shaft 1052 made of columnar metal and extending in the left-right direction is fixed. A cylindrical slide bearing 1054 made of resin is attached to the right end of the guided shaft 1052.

  Further, on the right side surface of the right side moving member 1038, a spur gear 1056 is attached rotatably in a plane parallel to the front-rear direction. The spur gear 1056 is disposed in front of the rack portion 1050 b such that the rotation axis is directed in the left-right direction, and is engaged with the rack of the rack portion 1050 b.

  A mounting member 1058 is disposed on the right side of the rack-guided member 1050 and the spur gear 1056. The mounting member 1058 is integrally molded, for example, by providing a light shielding piece 1058a of a black resin material. The mounting member 1058 is fixed to the right moving member 1038 by a screw passing through a circular opening at the center of the spur gear 1056.

  The spur gear 1056 meshes with the gear portion 1014 b 1 of the inner decorative portion 1014. Thus, when the spur gear 1056 rotates, the rotary disc 1014 b of the inner decorative portion 1014 is interlocked to rotate.

  Further, a decoration member with a guide groove 1060 molded of, for example, a transparent resin material is fixed by a screw below the right side surface of the right side base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. A guide groove 1060a (not shown in FIG. 257, see FIG. 259) is provided on the surface (left side) opposite to the right side base portion 1002b3 of the guide grooved decorative member 1060. The guide groove 1060 a is formed extending from the lower rear to the upper front. A slide bearing 1054 is disposed slidably in the guide groove 1060a. The sliding bearing 1054 is fixed to one end of the guided shaft 1052, the guided member with rack 1050 is fixed to the other end of the guided shaft 1052, and the guide groove 1060a is the moving direction of the guided member with rack 1050. It is possible to be able to guide.

  When the right moving member 1038 moves forward from the initial position, the racked guided member 1050 is guided by the guiding groove 1060 a and moves upward along the front groove 1038 c and the rear groove 1038 d. As a result, the spur gear 1056 engaged with the rack of the rack portion 1050b of the guided member with rack 10 rotates, and the rotating disc 1014b of the inner decorative portion 1014 provided with the gear portion 1014b1 engaged with the spur gear 1056 Will rotate. The movable portions 1010a to 1010j are adapted to operate in conjunction with the rotation operation of the rotary disk 1014b. The principle of operation will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a photo sensor 1062 is fixed to the mounting member 1022 by a screw. The photo sensor 1062 is used to detect the position of the lens movable body 1002 a. The photosensor 1062 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1062 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit which are disposed to face each other in the vertical direction across the space.

  In addition, a light shielding piece 1058a formed of, for example, a black resin material is provided on the mounting member 1058 fixed to the right moving member 1038 that operates integrally with the lens movable body 1002a. The mounting member 1058 may be integrally molded of a black resin material as a whole. When the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the rearmost position starting from the base portion 1002b, the light blocking piece 1058a enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the photosensor 1062. In the present embodiment, the photosensor 1062 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 1058a that moves integrally with the lens movable body 1002a, and the first auxiliary control unit 400 detects the lens when the photosensor 1062 detects the light shielding piece 1058a. If it is determined that the movable body 1002a is positioned at the rearmost position, and the photo sensor 1062 does not detect the light shielding piece, it is determined that the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at a position other than the rearmost position.

  Further, a substrate 1064 is fixed to the left side surface of the left side base 1002 b 4 of the base portion 1002 b with a screw. The motor 1020, the LED substrate (not shown) provided in the inner decorative portion 1014, and the photosensor 1062 are connected to the substrate 1064 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1020 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 via the substrate 1064, the LED substrate is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. 240 via the substrate 1064, and the photo sensor 1062 is via the substrate 1064 It is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. Thereby, the wiring which connects the top front decoration character 1000 and the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be summarized.

  An upper front movable body 1002 having a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b is attached to the upper front movable body base portion 1008. The upper front movable body base portion 1008 is integrally formed of metal and has a left side base 1008 a and an upper side base 1008 b. The left side base 1008 a extends in the vertical direction, and is disposed to the left of the base portion 1002 b. The upper base 1008 b is disposed extending rightward from the upper end of the left base 1008 a. The upper base 1008 b is disposed above the base portion 1002 b.

  Further, a cylindrical metal guide rod 1066 extending in the vertical direction is attached to the left side base 1008 a. An upper end fixing portion 1008a1 is provided at the upper end of the left side base 1008a, and a lower end fixing portion 1008a2 is provided at the lower end of the left side base 1008a. The upper end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the upper end fixing portion 1008a1, and the lower end of the guide rod 1066 is fixed to the lower end fixing portion 1008a2. The lower end fixing portion 1008 a 2 functions as a mechanical end of the upper front movable body 1002.

  Further, on the left side surface of the left side base portion 1002b4 of the base portion 1002b, for example, a guided member-containing decorative member 1068 molded of a transparent resin material is fixed by a screw. A guided portion 1068 a is provided on the top of the guided member-attached decorative member 1068, and the guided portion 1068 a is slidably attached to the guide rod 1066. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by a vertical drive unit 1006 described later, guided by a guide rod 1066, and is movable in the vertical direction.

  The upper front movable body base portion 1008 to which the upper front movable body 1002 is attached is screwed to the upper workpiece base portion 850 as shown in FIG. The upper character base portion 850 is used to attach the upper front decoration character 1000 and the upper rear decoration character 1100 described later to the unit body 822. The upper item base portion 850 is integrally molded of, for example, a resin material, and has a right side base 850a, a center base 850b, and a left side base 850c. Specifically, the left base 1008a of the upper front movable body base 1008 is screwed to the right end of the left base 850c of the upper product base 850, and the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable base 1008 is an upper The upper end left side of the right side base 850 a of the accessory base portion 850 is fixed by a screw.

  Next, the vertical drive unit 1006 will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. The vertical drive unit 1006 is used to move the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. The vertical drive unit 1006 includes a motor 1070, a spur gear 1072, a power transmission unit 1074, an outer rail 1078, an upper photosensor 1084 and a lower photosensor 1086 as shown in FIG. A rack mounting member 1076, an inner rail 1080, and tension coil springs 1082r and 10821 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 258, the motor 1070, the spur gear 1072, the power transmission unit 1074, the outer rail 1078, the upper photosensor 1084, and the lower photosensor 1086 are attached to the right side base 850a of the upper workpiece base 850.

  The motor 1070 is a drive source for executing the movement operation of the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1070. The motor 1070 has a rotational axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotational axis of the motor 1070 is disposed behind the motor 1070. The spur gear 1072 is rotatably attached to the right side base 850a.

  The power transmission unit 1074 is used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1070 into linear motion and transmit the linear motion to the upper front movable body 1002. The power transmission unit 1074 includes a rack 1074a, a guided member 1074b, a rack cover 1074c, and spur gears 1074d1 to 1074d3. The rack 1074a is molded of a resin material, has an elongated shape, and has bendable flexibility. In the rack 1074a, an iron core wire (not shown) extending in the longitudinal direction is embedded, and necessary strength is obtained. In the present embodiment, the rack 1074a is bent and used so as to draw an upwardly convex arc-like curve. The same shape teeth are cut at the same pitch on the inside of the rack 1074a bent to be upwardly convex, and the rack 1074a is engaged with the spur gear 1072.

  At the lower right end of the rack 1074a, for example, a member to be guided 1074b, which is formed of a resin material and has a rack of the same shape and pitch as the rack 1074a, is attached. The guided member 1074b and the rack 1074a are engaged with each other, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b operate integrally.

  The rack cover 1074c is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a shape in which the characters "Shi" are inverted vertically and horizontally when viewed from the front. A guide groove (not shown) extending along the shape of the rack cover 1074c is provided on the rear side (middle side) of the rack cover 1074c, and the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b are accommodated in the guide groove. There is. The guided member 1074 b is movably disposed while being guided by the guiding groove. The rack 1074a is movable along the shape of the rack cover 1074c in conjunction with the guided member 1074b. The rack cover 1074c is fixed to the right side base 850a with a screw, and covers the rack 1074a and the guided member 1074b so as not to separate from the right side base 850a.

  The spur gears 1074 d 1, 1074 d 2 and 1074 d 3 are rotatably attached to the right side base 850 a and covered with the rack cover 1074 c. The spur gears 1074 d 1, 1074 d 2 and 1074 d 3 are disposed along the guide grooves in the rack cover 1074 c and meshed with the rack 1074 a. The spur gears 1074 d 1, 1074 d 2, 1074 d 3 are used to allow the rack 1074 a to move smoothly along the guide grooves. A roller may be used to allow the rack 1074a to move smoothly along the guide groove in the rack cover 1074c.

  The left lower end of the rack 1074a is exposed from the rack cover 1074c, and is fixed to the right side surface of the right side base 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b by the rack attachment member 1076 shown in FIG. Thus, the power transmission unit 1074 converts the rotational motion of the motor 1070 transmitted via the spur gear 1072 into a linear motion by the rack 1074a and transmits the linear motion to the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, a metallic outer rail 1078 extending in the vertical direction is fixed by screws to the left end of the right side base 850a. Further, as shown in FIG. 257, a metal inner rail 1080 extending in the vertical direction is fixed by screws to the rear surface of the right side base portion 1002b3 of the base portion 1002b. The inner rail 1080 is attached to the inside of the outer rail 1078 so as to be movable along the outer rail 1078. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are disposed on the rail contact surfaces of the outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 so that friction between the rails can be reduced and the inner rail 1080 can slide smoothly. The outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080 are used to guide the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction. Further, the upper end and the lower end of the outer rail 1078 function as a mechanical end of the upper front movable body 1002.

  In this manner, the upper front movable body 1002 is converted into linear motion by the rotational movement of the motor 1070 through the spur gear 1072 and the rack 1074a and transmitted, and is guided to the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078 and the inner rail 1080. Vertical movement is possible.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257, the upper end of the tension coil spring 1082r is fixed to the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable body base 1008 so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction, and the lower end is the right base 1002b3 of the base 1002b. Fixed on the back side of the Similarly, the upper end of the tension coil spring 1082l is fixed to the upper base 1008b of the upper front movable body base 1008 and the lower end is fixed to the rear side of the left base 1002b4 of the base 1002b so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction. Ru.

  The tension coil springs 1082 r and 1082 l have natural lengths when the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the uppermost position (initial position), and natural when the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned lower than the initial position. It will be in the extended state from the length. The tension coil springs 1082 r and 1082 l utilize the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1070 for the upper front movable body 1002 to return to the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, an upper photo sensor 1084 and a lower photo sensor 1086 are fixed to the right side of the outer rail 1078 with screws on the right side base 850a. The upper photo sensor 1084 is disposed at substantially the same position in the vertical direction as the upper end of the outer rail 1078, and the lower photo sensor 1086 is disposed at substantially the same position in the vertical direction as the lower end of the outer rail 1078. . The upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 are used to detect the position of the upper front movable body 1002. The upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 have a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion which are disposed to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space portion. Further, as shown in FIG. 257, the attachment member 1022 fixed to the base portion 1002b of the upper front movable body 1002 is provided with a light shielding piece (not shown) formed of a light impermeable member. When the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the uppermost position (initial position), the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the upper photo sensor 1084 and the upper front movable body 1002 is at the lowermost position. When it is positioned, the light shielding piece enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the lower photosensor 1086. In the present embodiment, the position of the upper front movable body 1002 is detected by the upper photosensor 1084 and the lower photosensor 1086. When the upper photo sensor 1084 detects the light blocking piece provided on the attachment member 102, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, and the lower photo sensor 1086 When the light blocking piece is detected, it is determined that the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position.

  In addition, a substrate 1088 is fixed to the right side base 850a with a screw. The motor 1070, the upper photosensor 1084, and the lower photosensor 1086 are connected to the substrate 1088 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1070 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 through the substrate 1088, and the upper photo sensor 1084 and the lower photo sensor 1086 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 240 through the substrate 1088. The wiring connecting the substrate 1088 and the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 is accommodated in a wiring cover 850 a 1 fixed by a screw to the rear side of the right end of the right side base 850 a. Thereby, the wiring which connects the top front decoration character 1000 and the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 can be summarized.

  Next, operations of the lens movable body 1002a and the movable parts 1010a to 1010j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 259, the upper front movable body 1002 is disassembled into a lens movable body 1002a and a base portion 1002b, and the lens movable body 1002a is further decomposed into an outer decorative portion 1012 and an inner decorative portion 1014. Further, in FIG. 259, the movable portion 1010a and the movable portion support portion 1014e are illustrated by being removed from the inner decorative portion 1014. In FIG. 259, the operation principle of the movable portions 1010a to 1010j will be described by taking the movable portion 1010a and the movable portion support portion 1014e as an example.

  FIG. 259 (a) shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the rear of the movement range. The lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the rear in the initial state. The lens movable body 1002a is driven by the front-rear drive unit 1004 so as to be movable forward from the rearmost position. In addition, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j can be moved in conjunction with the moving operation of the lens movable body 1002a. When the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the rearmost position, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j are positioned at the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), when the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the rearmost position, the front portion of the rack portion 1038a of the right moving member 1038 meshes with the spur gear 1024. Similarly, the front portion of the rack portion 1044 a of the left moving member 1044 meshes with the spur gear 1032. Further, the rack-attached guided member 1050 is located at the lowermost end, and the upper portion of the rack portion 1050 b meshes with the spur gear 1056. The lower end portions of the guide hole 1014b2 of the rotary disk 1014b and the long hole 1014c1 of the long disk 1014c overlap in the front-rear direction. When the movable portion 1010a is positioned at the initial position, the guided portion 1014e2 of the movable portion support portion 1014e is at the lower end of the guide hole 1014b2 of the rotary disc 1014b and the lower end of the long hole 1014c1 of the elongated disc 1014c. It is supposed to come in contact.

  FIG. 259 (b) shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a has moved to the foremost position in the movement range. In the lens movable body 1002a, the rotational movement of the motor 1020 is converted into linear movement and transmitted, and linear movement in the front-rear direction is possible.

  Specifically, the motor 1020 is driven to rotate the rotating shaft of the motor 1020 and the spur gear 1024 fixed to the rotating shaft clockwise as viewed from right to left. As a result, the right moving member 1038 provided with the rack portion 1038 a meshed with the spur gear 1024 is guided by the right guide rod 1034 to move forward. Further, the spur gear 1028 meshed with the spur gear 1024, the shaft 1026 and the spur gear 1030 rotate counterclockwise. A spur gear 1032 is engaged with the spur gear 1030, and a rack portion 1044 a of the left moving member 1044 is engaged with the spur gear 1032. For this reason, the left moving member 1044 is guided by the left guide rod 1040 to move forward.

  The right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move forward in parallel with each other at the same speed. A lens movable body 1002a is fixed to front end portions of the right side moving member 1038 and the left side moving member 1044. For this reason, the lens movable body 1002a can move forward in conjunction with the forward movement of the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044.

  Further, in accordance with the forward movement of the right moving member 1038, the racked guided member 1050 attached to the right moving member 1038 ascends while moving forward. Specifically, the slide bearing 1054 attached to the rack-attached guided member 1050 via the guided shaft 1052 is guided by the guiding groove 1060 a of the guiding grooved decorative member 1060 to move. Since the decoration member 1060 with a guide groove is fixed to the base portion 1002b, it does not move in conjunction with the movement operation of the lens movable body 1002a in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide groove 1060 a extends obliquely from the lower rear to the upper front. For this reason, the slide bearing 1054 is guided by the guide groove 1060 a and moves upward. Along with this movement, the racked guided member 1050 is moved upward along the front side groove 1038c and the rear side groove 1038d provided in the right side moving member 1038 and extending in the front-rear direction. As the rack-mounted guided member 1050 moves upward, the spur gear 1056 meshed with the rack portion 1050b of the rack-mounted guided member 1050 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the right to the left. Thus, the rotary disc 1014b provided with the gear portion 1014b1 meshed with the spur gear 1056 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front.

  The movable portions 1010 a to 1010 j are configured to linearly move toward the outer periphery of the inner decorative portion 1014 in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotary disk 1014 b. Next, the operation principle of the movable parts 1010a to 1010j will be described by taking the movable part 1010a as an example. The movable portion 1010a is fixed to the movable portion support portion 1014e as described above.

  The guide hole 1014b2 of the rotary unit 1010b is moved clockwise by the clockwise rotation of the rotary disk 1014b. The guided portion 1014e2 is guided by a guide hole 1014b2 extending in a direction obliquely crossing the upper left to the lower right with respect to a virtual circle passing between the inner edge and the outer edge of the rotary disk 1014b. Move from lower right to upper left. At this time, the movable portion support portion 1014e is provided along the elongated hole portion 1014c1 which is fixed to the outer decorative portion 1012 and is fixed to the elongated holed disc 1014c and does not rotate and extends in the radial direction of the outer periphery of the elongated hole disc 1014c. It moves from the inner circumferential side to the outer circumferential side of the inner decorative portion 1014. Thus, the movable portion 1010a fixed to the movable portion support 1014e moves from the inner peripheral side to the outer peripheral side of the inner decorative portion 1014. Thus, in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotary disk 1014b, the movable portion support 1014e linearly moves toward the outer periphery.

  Similarly, the movable portions 1010b to 1010j move from the inner circumferential side to the outer circumferential side of the inner decorative portion 1014 in conjunction with the clockwise rotation of the rotary disk 1014b. Thus, in conjunction with the forward movement of the lens movable body 1002a, the front decoration portion 1010 can perform an opening operation such as opening the umbrella. The operation principle of the front decorative portion 1010 is the same as the operation principle of the movable body 1425 shown in FIG. 266 and described later.

  Also, as a matter of course, the lens movable body 1002a can be moved backward from the position shown in FIG. 259 (b) to the position shown in FIG. 259 (a). In this case, the motor 1020 and the spur gears 1024, 1028, 1030, 1032 rotate in the reverse direction to the case where the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, and the right moving member 1038 and the left moving member 1044 move backward. In addition, the rack-attached guided member 1050 moves downward, and the spur gear 1056 and the rotary disc 1014 b rotate in the reverse direction to the case where the lens movable body 1002 a moves forward. As a result, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j return to the initial position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the movement operation of the upper front movable body 1002 in the vertical direction will be described. FIG. 260 is an external view of the front upper decoration character 1000 as viewed from the front side. The upper front movable body 1002 is driven by the vertical drive unit 1006 to be able to move in the vertical direction. In addition, as described above, the lens movable body 1002a is included in the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 260 (a) shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 is the position at the top of the movement range of the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper front movable body 1002 moves downward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side. As a result, the spur gear 1072 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1070 rotates counterclockwise, the lower end on the right side of the rack 1074a meshed with the spur gear 1072 rises, and the lower end on the left lowers. At this time, the rack 1074a includes a portion that is linearly guided and moved and a portion that is guided and moved in an arc shape. Since the lower left end of the rack 1074a is fixed to the upper front movable body 1002, the upper front movable body 1002 is guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080 in conjunction with the operation of the rack 1074a. Moving.

  FIG. 260 (c) shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The lower end fixing portion 1008 a 2 for fixing the guide rod 1066 functions as a mechanical end, and the upper front movable body 1002 is stopped.

  Also, naturally, the upper front movable body 1002 is movable upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 260 (c) to the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. 260 (a). When the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the rotation shaft and the spur gear of the motor 1070 rotate clockwise when viewed from the front side, the lower end on the right side of the rack 1074a descends, and the lower end on the left side ascends. In conjunction with this, the upper front movable body 1002 is guided by the guide rod 1066, the outer rail 1078, and the inner rail 1080 to move upward. In addition, when the upper front movable body 1002 moves upward, the upper end of the outer rail 1078 functions as a mechanical end.

  Next, operations of the upper front movable body 1002 and the lens movable body 1002a will be described using FIG. FIG. 261 is an external view of the front upper decoration character 1000 as viewed from the front side.

  In the lens movable body 1002a, in order to avoid contact with the above-described logo movable body 902, the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the top and the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position in the front-rear direction It is supposed to move. FIG. 261 shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a has moved forward, similar to the state shown in FIG. 259 (b). As the lens movable body 1002a moves forward, as described above, the movable portions 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative portion 1010 move in the outer peripheral direction of the lens movable body 1002a, and the front decorative portion 1010 is opened. As a result, it is possible to show the player as if the lens movable body 1002a has become large.

  Further, in the present embodiment, stepping motors are used as the motors 1020 and 1070, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servomotor can be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source of the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as a solenoid may be used as a drive source of the lens movable body 1002a and the upper front movable body 1002.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a convex lens (biconvex lens) is used as the lens 1018, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various lenses such as a plano-convex lens, a positive meniscus lens, a concave lens (bi-concave lens), a plano-concave lens, and a negative meniscus lens can be used.

  Also, instead of the lens 1018, a transparent resin plate (for example, an acrylic plate) or a glass plate may be disposed.

  Also, in place of the tension coil springs 1082r and 10821, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a plate spring, or rubber may be used.

  The upper front movable body 1002 may also include a sub display smaller than the decorative symbol display 208. The sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. Further, the sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400 or may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 260, the positional relationship between the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 will be described. When the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 255 (a), the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is taken as the first area, and located at the uppermost position shown in FIG. The area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is taken as the third area. When the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. 260 (a), the area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is taken as the second area, and the lower front position shown in FIG. 260 (c). In this case, the area occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 is taken as a fourth area. Further, the area occupied by the lens movable body 1002a is also included in the fourth area when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward and the upper front movable body 1002 moves forward. The fourth area is an area including at least a part of the first area. Thus, the upper front movable body 1002 is movable to the area when the logo movable body 902 is at the initial position. As a result, the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 are associated with each other to enable various operations.

  Also, when the logo movable body 902 is located at the initial position and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the upper front movable body 1002 is located behind the logo movable body 902, and the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable It overlaps with the body 1002 in the front-rear direction.

  The fourth region occupied by the upper front movable body 1002 when the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position overlaps the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  Also, assuming that the area occupied by the logo movable body 902 is the fifth area when the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 255 (c), at least a part of the fifth area is It includes an area in front of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth region also includes at least a part of the fourth region.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a sub display device smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device may be fixed to the game board 200. The sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. Further, the sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400 or may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  The sub display device may be disposed behind the third area occupied by the logo movable body 902. In other words, the third area is an area including at least a part of the area in front of the display area of the sub display device. As a result, since the sub display device is present at the upward moving destination of the logo movable body 902, the upward moving movement of the logo movable body 902 may be naturally noticed.

  In addition, logo movable body 902 may be disposed behind upper front movable body 1002. In this case, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable rearward.

  Further, the upper front movable body 1002 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, the upper rear decorative object 1100 will be described using FIGS. 258 and 262 to 264. FIG. First, the configuration of the upper rear decorative object 1100 will be described using FIGS. 262 and 258. FIG. 262 and 258 are exploded perspective views of the upper rear decoration character 1100. FIG. FIG. 262 and FIG. 258 show a state where the upper rear decoration character 1100 is seen from the front upper right from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 258, a part of the above-mentioned upper front decoration character 1000 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 262 and 258, the upper rear decoration character 1100 is roughly divided into an upper rear movable body 1102 and a vertical drive unit 1104.

  First, the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described using FIG. 262 while referring to FIG. FIG. 263 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The upper rear movable body 1102 has a front cover 1102a, a rotary movable portion 1102b, a base portion 1102c, and a rotary drive portion 1102d.

  The front cover 1102 a is disposed at the front of the upper rear decoration part 1100. The front cover is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, has a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and has a circular opening 1102a1 at the center.

  At the rear of the front cover 1102a, a rotatable portion 1102b is disposed. The rotation movable portion 1102 b includes a rotation member with gear 1110, a first gear member 1114, a second gear member 1116, a rotation decoration support member 1118, metal rods 1120, 1128, 1132, spur gears 1122, 1130, 1134, a rotation decoration portion 1124. , A frame member 1126, a light shielding piece 1136, and a lens member 1138.

  First, the function of the rotatable portion 1102b will be briefly described. The rotary movable unit 1102 b is used to rotate the rotary decoration unit 1124 to produce a game. The geared rotation member 1110 is rotatably accommodated in the front cover 1102a. A gear portion 1110 b is provided on the outer periphery of the geared rotation member 1110. In addition, a spur gear 1142 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 fixed to the base portion 1102c is meshed with the gear portion 1110b. Therefore, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise, the spur gear 1142 rotates clockwise, and the gear rotation member 1110 rotates counterclockwise.

  In addition, a first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are fixed to the rear inside of the geared rotation member 1110. A metal rod 1120 is attached to the first gear member 1114, and a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120. When the first gear member 1114 is rotated together with the geared rotation member 1110, the spur gear 1122 is rotationally moved along the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c. The spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102 c 2 mesh with each other, and the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating and moving. Further, since one end of the metal rod 1120 is fixed to the spur gear 1122, the metal rod 1120 rotates with the rotation of the spur gear 1122.

  A rotating decoration support member 1118 is disposed in a substantially hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 263) surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116. Since the other end of the metal bar 1120 is fixed to the rotating decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration supporting member 1118 rotates with the rotation of the metal bar 1120.

  Further, metal rods 1128 and 1132 are attached to the rotating decoration support member 1118. The spur gears 1130 and 1134 are fixed to one end of the metal rods 1128 and 1132, and the rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end. With the rotation of the rotating decoration support member 1118, the spur gear 1130 is rotationally moved along the first gear portion 1114e, and the spur gear 1134 is rotationally moved along the second gear portion 1116e. The spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear portion 1114 e, and the spur gear 1134 meshes with the second gear portion 1116 e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 rotates while rotating and moving about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 as a rotation axis, and the spur gear 1134 rotates while rotating and moving about the metal rod 1132 as a rotation axis. Along with this, the metal rods 1128 and 1132 rotate, and as the metal rods 1128 and 1132 rotate, the rotary decoration portion 1124 rotates.

  The rotating decoration portion 1124 can perform complicated rotational movement in a three-dimensional space by driving the motor 1140.

  First, the rotating decoration portion 1124 is the center of rotation (between the metal rods 1128 and 1132) between the support ends of the rotation axis of the rotating decoration support member 1118 (which coincides with the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120). Hereinafter, when "the rotation center of the rotation decoration portion 1124" is referred to, it can rotate around an axis (hereinafter, referred to as "longitudinal axis") passing through the rotation center and parallel to the front-rear direction. When the motor 1140 is driven, the geared rotation member 1110 is rotated about the longitudinal axis with the center of the opening 1110a as the rotation center (coincident with the rotation center of the rotary decorative portion 1124 when viewed in the front and rear direction). The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 fixed to the member 1110 also rotate around the longitudinal axis. As a result, the rotating decoration portion 1124 accommodated inside the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 rotates around the longitudinal axis.

  Second, the rotary decorative portion 1124 can rotate around an axis parallel to the left and right direction passing through the rotation center of the rotary decorative portion 1124 (hereinafter referred to as “left and right axis”). The rotation axis of the metal rod 1120 is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Therefore, after the geared rotation member 1110 is rotated about the longitudinal axis to adjust the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120 to be parallel to the left-right direction, the geared rotational member 1110 is restrained so as not to rotate about the longitudinal axis When the motor 1140 is driven, the base portion 1102c to which the motor 1140 is attached rotates around the longitudinal axis, and the gear portion 1102c2 of the base portion 1102c rotates around the longitudinal axis. The rotation of the spur gear 1122 engaged with the gear portion 1102c2 causes the metal rod 1120 to rotate about the left and right axis, and the rotation decoration support member 1118 connected to the metal rod 1120 rotates about the left and right axis. Thereby, the rotation decoration part 1124 can rotate around the left and right axis.

  Third, the rotary decorative portion 1124 can rotate around an axis parallel to the vertical direction (hereinafter, referred to as “vertical axis”) passing through the rotation center of the rotary decorative portion 1124. The extending direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120. That is, the rotation axis of the rotation decoration support member 1118 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the metal rod 1120. Therefore, while rotating the rotary decorative portion 1124 around the left and right axis as described above, the base portion 1102c is rotated around the left and right axis at a predetermined rotational speed, and the extension direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132 is the vertical direction. If it adjusts so that it may become parallel to, the rotation decoration part 1124 can be rotated about a vertical axis.

  As described above, in the three-dimensional orthogonal coordinate system in which the rotation decoration unit 1124 uses the rotation center of the rotation decoration unit 1124 as an origin, the rotation decoration unit 1124 can simultaneously perform rotation operation around the axes of three orthogonal coordinate axes.

  The geared rotation member 1110 is disposed inside the front cover 1102a. The geared rotation member 1110 has a circular shallow mold shape, is disposed so that the bottom surface faces the front, and a substantially circular opening 1110 a is opened at the center of the bottom surface. The opening 1110a is smaller than the opening 1102a1 of the front cover 1102a, and is disposed so as to overlap the opening 1102a1 in the front-rear direction.

  A recess (not shown) that can accommodate the geared rotation member 1110 is provided inward of the front cover 1102a, and the geared rotation member 1110 is disposed in the recess. The geared rotation member 1110 is attached to the front cover 1102a so as to be rotatable about a virtual straight line passing through the center of the opening 1110a in the front-rear direction.

  Four rollers 1112a to 1112d are used for attachment of the geared rotation member 1110 to the front cover 1102a. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are formed of, for example, a resin material and have a circular shape, and are rotatably attached to four corners on the rear side of the front cover 1102a with washers. The rotation axes of the rollers 1112 a to 1112 d are parallel to the rotation axis of the geared rotation member 1110. The rollers 1112a to 1112d are in contact with the rear edge of the geared rotation member 1110 to prevent the geared rotation member 1110 from being detached from the front cover 1102a.

  On the outer surface of the geared rotation member 1110, there is provided a gear portion 1110b in which teeth of the same shape are cut at the same pitch and arranged circumferentially. The teeth of the gear portion 1110 b are parallel to the rotation axis of the geared rotation member 1110.

  Further, a first gear member 1114 and a second gear member 1116 are disposed inward of the geared rotation member 1110.

  The first gear member 1114 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a fixing portion 1114a, positioning portions 1114b and 1114c, a side surface portion 1114d, and a first gear portion 1114e. The fixing portion 1114 a is disposed on the front side of the first gear member 1114. The positioning portions 1114 b and 1114 c are disposed on the rear side of the fixing portion 1114 a. The side surface portion 1114 d extends rearward from the fixing portion 1114 a, and has a curved surface shape convex to the right in FIG. Further, a circular through hole (not shown) is provided in the side surface portion 1114 d, and a first gear portion 1114 e in which teeth having the same shape are incised at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through hole is a side surface portion 1114 d Placed on the inner edge of The first gear portion 1114 e is formed such that the tooth tips face in the opposite direction to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114 d. The center of the pitch circle of the first gear portion 1114e is the center of the through hole. Further, the central angle of the arc-shaped first gear portion 1114 e is about 210 degrees.

  The second gear member 1116 is integrally formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and includes a fixing portion 1116a, positioning portions 1116b and 1116c, a side portion 1116d, and a second gear portion 1116e. The fixing portion 1116 a is disposed on the front side of the second gear member 1116. The positioning portions 1116 b and 1116 c are disposed on the rear side of the fixing portion 1116 a. The side surface portion 1116 d extends rearward from the fixing portion 1116 a, and has a curved surface shape convex to the left in FIG. In addition, a circular through hole (not shown) is provided in the side surface portion 1116 d, and a second gear portion 1116 e in which teeth having the same shape are incised at the same pitch in an arc shape centering on the through hole is a side surface portion 1116 d Placed at the inner end of the The second gear portion 1116e is formed such that the tooth tips face in the opposite direction to the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116d. The center of the pitch circle of the second gear portion 1116e is the center of the through hole. The central angle of the second gear portion 1116e is about 210 degrees. The second gear portion 1116e has the same number of teeth as the first gear portion 1114e, and the pitch circle radius is longer than that of the first gear portion 1114e.

  In addition, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are such that the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1114 d and the convex direction of the curved surface of the side surface portion 1116 d face in the opposite direction. The tips of the teeth are arranged to face each other so that the tips of the second gear portion 1116e face each other. The positioning portion 1114 b of the first gear member 1114 is disposed to face the positioning portion 1116 b of the second gear member 1116, and the positioning portion 1114 c of the first gear member 1114 is disposed to face the positioning portion 1116 c of the second gear member 1116. Be done. The tip portions of the positioning portion 1114 b of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116 b of the second gear member 1116 are in contact with each other and fixed to each other by screws. Similarly, tip portions of the positioning portion 1114c of the first gear member 1114 and the positioning portion 1116c of the second gear member 1116 are in contact with each other and fixed to each other by screws.

  Thereby, the relative position of the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 is determined. Further, a substantially hemispherical internal space 1115 (see FIG. 263) is formed so as to be surrounded by the side surface 1114 d of the first gear member 1114 and the side surface 1114 d of the second gear member 1116. The inner space 1115 has an open front surface, and the contour of the open end of the inner space 1115 is defined by the shapes of the fixed portion 1114 a and the inner end of the fixed portion 1116 a, and the opening 1110 a of the gear rotating member 1110 It will be the same as the shape.

  The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 attached to each other are disposed in the same plane in which the front surface of the fixed portion 1114a and the front surface of the fixed portion 1116a of the second gear member 1116 are orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The fixed portion 1114 a and the fixed portion 1116 a are screwed to the geared rotation member 1110 so that the opening end of the internal space 1115 and the opening 1110 a of the geared rotation member 1110 coincide with each other. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 rotate integrally with the geared rotation member 1110. The first gear portion 1114 e and the second gear portion 1116 e are arranged such that the teeth are lined rearward from the opening end of the internal space 1115. The first gear portion 1114 e and the second gear portion 1116 e are arranged in a concentric arc shape with a predetermined gap, and the central angle of the arc is about 210 degrees.

  A rotating decoration support member 1118 is disposed in an internal space 1115 between the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116. The rotary decoration support member 1118 has a pair of base portions 1118a and a cover portion 1118b which are molded of a transparent resin material and have an annular shape. The cover 1118 b is fixed to the front side of the base 1118 a by a screw.

  The base portion 1118a is provided with a cylindrical attachment portion 1118a1 extending outward from the outer side edge. The mounting portion 1118a1 is fitted in the above-mentioned circular through hole provided on the side surface portion 1116d of the second gear member 1116. An imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 1118a1 passes through the center of the annular base 1118a.

  Further, the metal rod 1120 penetrates the above-mentioned circular through hole provided in the side surface 1114 d of the first gear member 1114, and one end of the metal rod 1120 is exposed to the outside of the internal space 1115 from the side surface 1114 d doing. A spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 exposed from the internal space 1115. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1122 is an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120.

  In addition, the other end of the metal rod 1120 is disposed in the internal space 1115 and fixed to the base 1118 a of the rotating decoration support member 1118. The metal rod 1120 is fixed on the opposite side of the mounting portion 1118a1, and the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 passes through the center of the annular base 1118a and coincides with the virtual straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the mounting portion 1118a1. . The rotary decorative support member 1118 is supported by the mounting portion 1118a1 and the metal rod 1120, interlocked with the rotation of the spur gear 1122, and rotatable about an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120.

  Further, on the inner side of the rotation decoration support member 1118, for example, a rotation decoration portion 1124 molded in a hemispherical shape by a transparent resin material is disposed. The rotating decoration portion 1124 has a curved front portion and a flat rear portion. A predetermined decoration is provided on the front and back of the rotating decoration portion 1124. In addition, a frame member 1126 which is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material and has an annular shape substantially the same diameter as that of the rotary decorative portion 1124 is fixed to a rear end portion of the rotary decorative portion 1124 with a screw.

  Two through holes (not shown) are provided in the base 1118 a of the rotary decorative support member 1118. A metal rod 1128 is disposed in one circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. An imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 is orthogonal to an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120. One end of the metal rod 1128 is exposed to the outside of the rotary decorative support member 1118, and the spur gear 1130 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1130 is an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128. Further, the other end of the metal rod 1128 is disposed inward of the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed. The length of the line segment from the spur gear 1130 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 to the center of the rotary decorative portion 1124 is approximately equal to the pitch circle radius of the first gear portion 1114 e. Therefore, the spur gear 1130 can mesh with the first gear portion 1114 e of the first gear member 1114. In other words, the first gear portion 1114 e is formed along the movement trajectory of the spur gear 1130.

  A metal rod 1132 is disposed in the other circular through hole (not shown) of the base 1118a. A longitudinally extending imaginary straight line of the metal rod 1132 coincides with a longitudinally extending imaginary straight line of the metal rod 1128, and is orthogonal to a longitudinally extending imaginary straight line of the metal rod 1120. One end of the metal rod 1132 is exposed to the outside of the rotary decorative support member 1118, and the spur gear 1134 is fixed. The rotation axis of the spur gear 1134 is an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132. Further, the other end of the metal rod 1132 is disposed inward of the rotation decoration support member 1118, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is fixed. The length of the line segment from the spur gear 1134 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 to the center of the rotary decorative portion 1124 is approximately equal to the pitch circle radius of the second gear portion 1116 e. For this reason, the spur gear 1134 can mesh with the second gear portion 1116 e of the second gear member 1116. In other words, the second gear portion 1116 e is formed along the movement trajectory of the spur gear 1134.

  The rotating decoration portion 1124 is supported by the metal rods 1128 and 1132 so as to be rotatable about an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132. The spur gear 1130 and the spur gear 1134 have the same pitch radius, the same shape, and the same number of teeth.

  Further, on the rear side of the first gear member 1114, for example, a light shielding piece 1136 molded of a black resin material is fixed by a screw. The light blocking piece 1136 can be detected by an upper photo sensor 1144 and a lower photo sensor 1146 described later.

  In addition, the lens member 1138 is disposed at the rear of the rotary movable portion 1102b. The lens member 1138 has a circular convex lens disposed at its center, and is screwed to the rear side of the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116.

  A base portion 1102c is disposed behind the rotary movable portion 1102b. The rotatable portion 1102b is attached to the front cover 1102a, and the front cover 1102a is screwed to the base portion 1102c. Thus, the rotatable movable portion 1102 b is accommodated in the space surrounded by the front cover 1102 a and the base portion 1102 c.

  The base portion 1102c is formed of, for example, a resin material, and has a contour that matches the front cover 1102a. A circular opening 1102 c 1 is provided at the center of the base 1102 c. The first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are accommodated in the opening 1102 c 1.

  Further, on the front surface of the base portion 1102c, there is provided a gear portion 1102c2 in which teeth inscribed in the same shape and having the same pitch are circumferentially aligned and the tip of the teeth is directed forward. The gear portion 1102c2 and the opening portion 1102c1 are arranged concentrically. The pitch circle radius of the gear portion 1102c2 is equal to the length of an imaginary line segment extending from the center of the rotary decorative portion 1124 to the spur gear 1122 extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120. The spur gear 1122 and the gear portion 1102c2 Are engaged.

  In addition, a light shielding piece 1102c3 formed of a light impermeable material such as a black resin material, for example, is provided at the upper left end of the base portion 1102c. The light blocking piece 1102 c 3 can be detected by an upper photo sensor 1176 and a lower photo sensor 1178 described later. The entire base portion 1102c may be integrally formed of a black resin material or the like.

  Next, the rotation drive unit 1102d will be described. The rotary drive unit 1102 d is used to rotationally drive the rotary decorative unit 1124 of the rotary movable unit 1102 b. The rotation drive unit 1102 d includes a motor 1140, a spur gear 1142, an upper photo sensor 1144, and a lower photo sensor 1146.

  The motor 1140 is a drive source for performing rotational drive of the rotating decoration portion 1124. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1140. The rotation shaft of the motor 1140 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 passes is formed in the base portion 1102c. The motor 1140 is screwed to the rear side of the base portion 1102c such that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. Further, a spur gear 1142 disposed between the front cover 1102 a and the base portion 1102 c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140. The spur gear 1142 is meshed with the gear portion 1110 b of the gear rotating member 1110.

  When the motor 1140 is driven to rotate the spur gear 1142, the geared rotary member 1110 having the gear portion 1110b meshed with the spur gear 1142 is rotated and the first gear member fixed to the geared rotary member 1110 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate. When the first gear member 1114 rotates, the spur gear 1122 fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 rotationally moves along the gear portion 1102 c 2 of the base portion 1102 c. Since the spur gear 1122 meshes with the gear portion 1102c2, the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotating and moving along the gear portion 1102c2. Thereby, the metal rod 1120 to which one end of the spur gear 1122 is fixed is rotated, and the rotation decoration support member 1118 to which the other end of the metal rod 1120 is fixed is rotated. Thereby, the spur gear 1130 rotationally moves along the first gear portion 1114 e, and the spur gear 1134 rotationally moves along the second gear portion 1116 e. When the spur gear 1130 is exposed from the open end of the internal space 1115 and does not mesh with the first gear portion 1114 e, the spur gear 1134 meshes with the second gear portion 1116 e. When the spur gear 1134 is exposed from the open end of the internal space 1115 and does not mesh with the second gear portion 1116e, the spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 as the rotation axis while rotationally moving along the first gear portion 1114 e. Similarly, the spur gear 1134 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 as a rotation axis while rotationally moving along the second gear portion 1116e. The rotation of the spur gear 1130 causes the metal rod 1128 to rotate, and the rotation of the spur gear 1134 causes the metal rod 1132 to rotate. A rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1128 and the metal rod 1132, and the rotating decoration portion 1124 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the metal rod 1128 and the metal rod 1132.

  In addition, an upper photo sensor 1144 is fixed to a rear upper portion of the base portion 1102c with a screw, and a lower photo sensor 1146 is fixed to a rear lower portion of the base portion 1102c with a screw. The upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 are used to detect whether the rotation decoration part 1124 has the front side (curved side) facing forward or the rear face side (planar side) faces forward. . The upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 have a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion which are disposed to face each other in the front-rear direction with the space portion interposed therebetween. The light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 are disposed exposed in the opening 1102 c 1.

  When the rotating decoration part 1124 is stopped with the front side facing forward, the light shielding piece 1136 enters between the light receiving part and the light emitting part of the upper photo sensor 1144 and the rotating decoration part 1124 makes the rear surface side back. When facing, the light blocking piece 1136 enters between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the lower photo sensor 1146. In the present embodiment, the orientation of the rotating decoration portion 1124 is detected by the upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146. When the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the rotating decoration portion 1124 faces the front side forward when the upper photo sensor 1144 detects the light blocking piece 1136, and the lower photo sensor 1146 detects the light blocking piece 1136 It is determined that the rotation decoration part 1124 has the rear surface side facing forward.

  In addition, a substrate 1148 is fixed to the rear side of the base portion 1102c with a screw. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the substrate 1148, and the plurality of LEDs are arranged to overlap the central portion of the opening 1102c1 in the front-rear direction. The upper rear movable body 1102 is configured such that the rotatable movable portion 1102b, in particular, the rotatable decorative portion 1124 can emit light using the plurality of LEDs. The LED of the substrate 1148 is included in the game board lamp 532 shown in FIG. 240, and is driven by the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  Further, a motor 1140, an upper photo sensor 1144 and a lower photo sensor 1146 are connected to the substrate 1148 by wiring (not shown). In addition, the substrate 1148 is connected to a substrate 852 which will be described later with reference to FIG. 258 by a flexible substrate 1150, and the substrate 852 is connected to a substrate 1180 which will be described later with reference to FIG. The motor 1140 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 via the substrates 1148, 852 and 1180, and the LED of the substrate 1148 is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 shown in FIG. 240 via the substrates 852 and 1180. The upper photo sensor 1144 and the lower photo sensor 1146 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 240 via the substrates 1148, 852, 1180. As a result, the wiring connecting the upper rear decoration part 1100 and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be integrated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 and 258, the vertical drive unit 1104 will be described. The vertical drive unit 1104 is used to move the upper rear movable body 1102 up and down. The vertical drive unit 1104 includes a motor 1152, a spur gear 1154, an outer rail 1170, a tension coil spring 1174, an upper photo sensor 1176, and a lower photo sensor 1178 as shown in FIG. It has a crank mechanism 1155.

  First, the drive source of the vertical drive unit 1104 will be described with reference to FIG. The vertical drive unit 1104 includes a motor 1152 as a drive source for executing the moving operation of the upper rear movable body 1102. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the motor 1152. The rotation shaft of the motor 1152 extends in the front-rear direction, and a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 passes is formed in the left base portion 850c of the upper product base portion 850. The motor 1152 is screwed on the front side of the left base so that the rotation shaft passes through the through hole. Further, a spur gear 1154 disposed on the rear side of the left side base portion 850c is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1152.

  Next, referring to FIG. 262, the crank mechanism 1155 will be described. The crank mechanism 1155 is used to convert the rotational motion of the motor 1152 transmitted via the spur gear 1154 into linear motion and transmit it to the upper rear movable body 1102. As shown in FIG. 262, the crank mechanism 1155 has a spur gear 1156, a crank 1158, a metal rod 1160, a slide bearing 1162, and a torsion coil spring 1168. Note that, in FIG. 262, the upper character article base portion 850 is simplified and illustrated in comparison with FIG.

  The spur gear 1156 is rotatably attached to the right of the spur gear 1154 on the rear side of the left side base portion 850 c and is meshed with the spur gear 1154. A crank 1158 is disposed behind the spur gear 1156. The crank 1158 is made of, for example, a resin material, and a circular through hole is provided at the left end. A cylindrical metal rod 1160 extending in the front-rear direction is disposed in the through hole, the front end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the left base 850c, and the rear end of the metal rod 1160 is fixed to the wiring fixing portion 854 shown in Be done. The wire fixing portion 854 is used to fix a wire (not shown) for connecting a substrate 852 and a substrate 1180 to be described later so that the wire does not get caught in the spur gear 1154 or the crank mechanism 1155.

  The crank 1158 is rotatable within a predetermined angle range in a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction with the metal rod 1160 as a rotation axis. In the crank 1158, an oval guide hole 1158a and an oval long hole 1158b are provided in this order from the left.

  The rear end of the spur gear 1156 is provided with a cylindrical guided shaft (not shown) that protrudes rearward, and the guided shaft can move within the guide hole 1158a of the crank 1158. ing. The rotational motion of the motor 1152 is transmitted to the crank 1158 via the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156 so as to be rotatable. In addition, a slide bearing 1162 is fitted to the guided shaft, and is attached by a screw from the rear side. The slide bearing 1162 is used so that the guided shaft of the spur gear 1156 can move smoothly in the guide hole 1158a. The slide bearing 1162 is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape whose bottom diameter is shorter than the width of the guide hole 1158a, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. The diameter of the flange of the slide bearing 1162 is larger than the width of the guide hole 1158a, so that the slide bearing 1162 does not fit into the guide hole 1158a.

  Further, at the left end of the central base portion 850b of the upper character article base portion 850, an oblong shaped left side guide hole portion 850b1 extending in the vertical direction is provided. At the upper left end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102, a cylindrical left guided shaft portion 1102c4 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided. The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base portion 850b so that the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 can move in the left guiding hole portion 850b1. Further, the rear end portion of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is exposed to the rear of the left guiding hole portion 850b1 and reaches the inside of the long hole portion 1158b of the crank 1158 so as to be movable in the long hole portion 1158b.

  In addition, the left side sliding bearing portion 1164 is fitted in the left side guided shaft portion 1102c4. The left slide bearing portion 1164 has a front slide bearing 1164a and a rear slide bearing 1164b. The front slide bearing 1164a is used to smooth the movement of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 in the left guiding hole portion 850b1. The front slide bearing 1164a is fitted to the front of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. The front slide bearing 1164a is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape whose bottom diameter is shorter than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, and a circular flange is provided at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the left guide hole 850b1, and the front slide bearing 1164a is not fitted into the left guide hole 850b1.

  The rear slide bearing 1164b is used to smooth the movement of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 in the long hole portion 1158b of the crank 1158. The rear slide bearing 1164a is fitted to the rear of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4. The rear slide bearing 1164b is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape with a bottom diameter smaller than the width of the long hole portion 1158b, like the front slide bearing 1164a, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end ing. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the elongated hole 1158b, and the rear slide bearing 1164b is not fitted into the elongated hole 1158b. The left side sliding bearing portion 1164 is attached to the left guided shaft portion 1102 c 4 with a washer-equipped screw from the rear side sliding bearing 1164 b side.

  A right guide hole 850 b 2 extending in the front-rear direction is provided at the right end of the central base 850 b of the upper character article base 850. The right guide hole 850 b 2 is formed to have the same length in parallel with the left guide hole 850 b 1.

  At the upper right end of the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102, a cylindrical right guided shaft portion 1102c5 extending rearward from the rear surface is provided. The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is attached to the central base portion 850b so that the right guided shaft portion 1102c5 can move in the right guide hole 850b2.

  Further, the right side sliding bearing portion 1166 is fitted in the right side guided shaft portion 1102c5. The right side sliding bearing portion 1166 is used to smooth the movement in the right side guiding hole portion 850b2 of the right side guided shaft portion 1102c5. The right side slide bearing portion 1166 has a front slide bearing 1166 a and a rear slide bearing 1166 b. The front slide bearing 1166a is disposed on the front side of the right guide hole 850b2, and the rear slide bearing 1166b is disposed on the rear side in the right guide hole 850b2.

  The front slide bearing 1166a is fitted to the front of the right guided shaft portion 1102c5. The front slide bearing 1166a is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape with a bottom diameter smaller than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and a circular flange is provided at the front end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and the front slide bearing 1166a is not fitted into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rear slide bearing 1166 b is fitted to the rear of the right guided shaft 1102 c 5. The rear slide bearing 1166 b is formed of, for example, a resin material and has a cylindrical shape with a diameter of the bottom shorter than the width of the right guide hole 850 b 2, and a circular flange is provided at the rear end. The diameter of the flange is larger than the width of the right guide hole 850b2, and the front slide bearing 1166a is not fitted into the right guide hole 850b2.

  The rotational movement of the motor 1152 is transmitted to the crank mechanism 1155 via a spur gear 1154. The spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 is engaged with the spur gear 1154 and rotates in conjunction with the spur gear 1154. The rotational motion of the spur gear 1156 is transmitted to the crank 1158 via a cylindrical guided shaft that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the spur gear 1156. Further, the rotational movement of the crank 1158 is transmitted to the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 of the base portion 1102c via the long hole portion 1158b. The left guided shaft portion 1102c4 is guided by the left guiding hole portion 850b1 and linearly moves in the vertical direction. At this time, the distance between the rotation center of the crank 1158 and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 changes, but the long hole portion 1158b becomes a relief hole of the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 and the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 becomes the crank 1158. It moves in the long hole 1158 b by the change in the distance from the rotation center. Thus, the left guided shaft portion 1102c4 can be moved in the vertical direction.

  The base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is vertically movable while the right guided shaft portion 1102c5 is guided by the right guide hole portion 850b2. The upper rear movable body 1102 is guided by the left guide hole 850 b 1 and the right guide hole 850 b 2 so that stable vertical movement is possible.

  Further, a torsion coil spring 1168 is disposed on the rear side of the crank 1158. A metal rod 1160 passes through the coil center of the torsion coil spring 1168. One end of the torsion coil spring 1168 is fixed to the rear surface of the left side base 850c, and the other end is fixed to the rear surface of the crank 1158. The crank 1158 rotates to the right when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, and rotates to the left when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward. A force is applied to the torsion coil spring 1168 in the direction in which the crank 1158 rolls in from the initial position in the direction of winding the spring. The torsion coil spring 1168 rotates counterclockwise to the crank 1158 when the crank 1158 rotates left. A torque is applied to assist the power of the motor 1152 for moving the upper rear movable body 1102 upward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, a metallic outer rail 1170 extending in the vertical direction is fixed by screws to the right of the left guide hole 850b1 of the central base 850b. The outer rail 1170 extends parallel to the left guide hole 850b1 and the right guide hole 850b2. Further, as shown in FIG. 262, a metal inner rail 1172 extending in the vertical direction is fixed by screws on the rear surface of the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. The inner rail 1172 is attached to the inside of the outer rail 1170 so as to be movable along the outer rail 1170. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are disposed on the rail contacting surfaces of the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 so that friction between the rails can be reduced and the inner rail 1172 can slide smoothly. The outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 are used to more stably guide the upper rear movable body 1102 in the vertical direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, the upper end of the tension coil spring 1174 is fixed above the central base 850b so that it can expand and contract in the vertical direction, and the lower end is behind the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102. It is fixed. The tension coil spring 1174 has a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the uppermost position (initial position), and a natural length when the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned below the initial position. It will be in the stretched state. The tension coil spring 1174 uses the restoring force to assist the power of the motor 1152 for the upper rear movable body 1102 to return to the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, the upper photo sensor 1176 and the lower photo sensor 1178 are fixed to the left side base 850 c with screws. The upper photo sensor 1176 and the lower photo sensor 1178 are used to detect the position of the upper rear movable body 1102. The upper photo sensor 1176 and the lower photo sensor 1178 are included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG.

  The upper photo sensor 1176 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit which are disposed to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space. Further, as shown in FIG. 262, the base portion 1102c of the upper rear movable body 1102 is provided with a light shielding piece 1102c3 formed of a light impermeable member. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the uppermost position (initial position), the light blocking piece 1102 c 3 enters between the upper photo sensor 1176 light receiving portion and the light emitting portion.

  Similarly, the lower photosensor 1178 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit which are disposed to face each other in the front-rear direction across the space. Further, as shown in FIG. 262, the crank 1158 of the crank mechanism 1155 is provided with a light shielding piece 1158c formed of a light impermeable member. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the lowermost position, the light shielding piece 1158c enters between the lower photo sensor 1178 light receiving portion and the light emitting portion.

  In the present embodiment, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is detected by the upper photo sensor 1176 and the lower photo sensor 1178. When the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the initial position when the upper photo sensor 1176 detects the light blocking piece 1102 c 3, and the lower photo sensor 1178 detects the light blocking piece 1 158 c 3 Determines that the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the lowermost position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258, a substrate 1180 is fixed to the left base 850c with a screw. The motor 1152, the upper photo sensor 1176, and the lower photo sensor 1178 are connected to the substrate 1180 by wiring (not shown). The motor 1152 is connected to the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 through the substrate 1180, and the upper photo sensor 1176 and the lower photo sensor 1178 are connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. 240 through the substrate 1180. As a result, the wiring connecting the upper rear decoration part 1100 and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be integrated.

  Next, the operation of the rotary movable portion 1102b of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described using FIG. FIG. 263 shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. In FIG. 263, the front cover 1102 a is removed from the base portion 1102 c, and the geared rotation member 1110 is removed from the front cover 1102 a, the first gear member 1114, and the second gear member 1116. In addition, the rotation decoration support member 1118, the rotation decoration portion 1124, the frame member 1126, the metal rod 1128, and the spur gear 1130 are not shown.

  As described above, the motor 1140 is used to drive the rotary movable unit 1102 b. When the motor 1140 is driven and the rotation shaft of the motor rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, for example, the spur gear 1142 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1140 rotates clockwise and is engaged with the spur gear 1142 The geared rotation member 1110 including the gear portion 1110 b rotates counterclockwise. Since the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 are fixed to the geared rotation member 1110, the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 also rotate counterclockwise. Further, a spur gear 1122 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1120 disposed in the through hole of the side face portion 1114 d of the first gear member 1114, and the spur gear 1122 is a base portion 1102 c as the first gear member 1114 rotates The rotational movement along the gear portion 1102c2 of The spur gear 1122 is meshed with the gear portion 1102c2, and the spur gear 1122 rotates about the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 while rotationally moving along the gear portion 1102c2. In addition, a rotating decoration support member 1118 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1120. The rotation decoration support member 1118 rotates with the rotation decoration portion 1124 about an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120.

  At the time of driving the motor 1140, at least one of the spur gear 1130 or the spur gear 1134 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e or the second gear portion 1116e. For example, when the spur gear 1130 is exposed from the internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116 toward the openings 1102a1 and 1110a, the spur gear 1134 is the second gear Engage with the part 1116e. FIG. 263 shows a state in which the spur gear 1134 meshes with the second gear portion 1116e.

  The spur gear 1134 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1132 and is rotationally moved along the second gear portion 1116 e as the rotary decorative support member 1118 rotates. The spur gear 1134 is engaged with the second gear portion 1116e, and the spur gear 1134 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132 as a rotation axis while rotationally moving along the second gear portion 1116e. Further, a rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1132. The rotating decoration part 1124 rotates around an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1132.

  When the spur gear 1134 is exposed to the openings 1102a1 and 1110a through the opening end from an internal space 1115 formed by being surrounded by the first gear member 1114 and the second gear member 1116, the spur gear 1130 meshes with the first gear portion 1114e. The spur gear 1130 is fixed to one end of the metal rod 1128, and rotationally moves along the first gear portion 1114e with the rotation of the rotary decorative support member 1118. The spur gear 1130 is engaged with the first gear portion 1114e, and the spur gear 1130 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128 as a rotation axis while rotationally moving along the first gear portion 1114e. In addition, a rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the other end of the metal rod 1128. The rotating decoration portion 1124 rotates around an imaginary straight line passing through the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1128.

  A predetermined decoration is provided on the front side and the rear side of the rotating decoration portion 1124. The rotary movable unit 1102b rotates the rotary decoration unit 1124 to show the player the front side or the rear side of the rotary decoration unit 1124 to produce a game. Since the rotation decoration part 1124 is attached to the rotation decoration support member 1118, it rotates with the rotation of the rotation decoration support member 1118. The rotating decoration portion 1124 rotates with an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 1120 as a rotation axis as the rotating decoration support member 1118 rotates.

  In addition, the rotating decoration portion 1124 is fixed to the metal rods 1128 and 1132. The metal rods 1128 and 1132 are rotated by the rotation of the spur gears 1130 and 1134, and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is also rotated about an imaginary straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the metal rods 1128 and 1132.

  Thus, the rotary decorative portion 1124 is given three rotational motions by different rotation axes by the drive of the motor 1140. There are cases where the rotary movable unit 1102b can make the player pay attention to the rotary decoration unit 1124 by three rotational movements.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right side base 1002 b 3 and the left side base 1002 b 4 of the base portion 1002 b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the rearmost position, when the rotary movable portion 1102b rotates, the spur gear 1130 or the spur gear 1134 exposed forward from the opening 1102a1 is movable to the upper front It comes in contact with the lens 1018 of the body 1002. For this reason, the rotation movable portion 1102b is rotatable when the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the frontmost position.

  Next, the operation of the upper rear movable body 1102 will be described using FIG. FIG. 264 is an external view of the upper rear decorative object 1100 as viewed from the front side. The upper rear movable body 1102 is driven by the vertical drive unit 1104 to be able to move in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 264 (a) shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position (upper position). The initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the upper rear movable body 1102.

  FIG. 264 (b) shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position. When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves downward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side. Accordingly, the spur gear 1154 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 rotates counterclockwise, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 meshed with the spur gear 1154 rotates clockwise. The crank 1158 rotates clockwise in synchronization with the rotation of the spur gear 1156. The rotational motion of the motor 1152 is converted to linear motion via the crank 1158 and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102. The upper rear movable body 1102 is guided by the left guide hole 850 b 1, the right guide hole 850 b 2, the outer rail 1170 and the inner rail 1172 and linearly moves downward.

  FIG. 264 (c) shows a state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved to the lowermost position. The left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, and the outer rail 1170 function as a mechanical end, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is stopped.

  Also, as a matter of course, the upper rear movable body 1102 can be moved upward from the lowermost position shown in FIG. 264 (c) toward the uppermost position (initial position) shown in FIG. 264 (a). When the upper rear movable body 1102 moves upward, the rotation shaft of the motor 1152 and the spur gear 1154 rotate clockwise as viewed from the front side, and the spur gear 1156 of the crank mechanism 1155 rotates counterclockwise, The crank 1158 rotates counterclockwise in synchronization with the rotation of the gear 1156. The rotational motion of the motor 1152 is converted to linear motion via the crank 1158 and transmitted to the upper rear movable body 1102, and the upper rear movable body 1102 is provided with the left guide hole 850 b 1, the right guide hole 850 b 2, and the outer rail 1170. And guided by the inner rail 1172 to linearly move upward. The left guide hole 850b1, the right guide hole 850b2, and the outer rail 1170 function as a mechanical end, and the upper rear movable body 1102 stops at the initial position.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 is disposed between the right side base 1002 b 3 and the left side base 1002 b 4 of the base portion 1002 b of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the upper rear movable body 1102 moves alone, the upper rear movable body 1102 contacts the lower decorative portion 1016 of the upper front movable body 1002. In order to avoid this, the upper rear movable body 1102 is movable downward with the upper front movable body 1002, and also moves downward when the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned lower than the initial position. It is possible. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be disposed at a position where it does not contact the upper front movable body 1002. The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable to the lowermost position when the upper front movable body 1002 is at the initial position. The upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be capable of independent operation.

  The moving range in the vertical direction of the upper rear movable body 1102 is the same as the moving range in the vertical direction of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. When the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 264 (a) and the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 260 (a) The rear movable body 1102 is positioned, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction. Also, when the upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 264 (c) and the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position shown in FIG. 260 (c), the upper front movable An upper rear movable body 1102 is positioned behind the body 1002, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction.

  When the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 overlap in the front-rear direction, the rotary decorative portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is visually recognized through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. A convex lens is used for the lens 1018, and the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotation decoration portion 1124 is closer than the focal length of the lens 1018. Therefore, the player can observe the erect virtual image of the rotation decoration portion 1124 via the lens 1018 It is.

  In addition, the lens movable body 1002a is movable in the front-rear direction. The movable lens body 1002a moves in the front-rear direction, so that the size of the erect virtual image of the rotary decorative portion 1124 observed by the player can be made different.

  The upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable in the front-rear direction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, stepping motors are used as the motors 1140 and 1152, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servomotor can be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a motor is used as a drive source of the rotary movable portion 1102 b and the upper rear movable body 1102, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various actuators such as a solenoid may be used as drive sources of the rotary movable portion 1102 b and the upper rear movable body 1102.

  Further, instead of the tension coil spring 1174, an elastic member such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber may be used.

  In addition, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be provided with a sub display smaller than the decorative symbol display 208. The sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. Further, the sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400 or may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  Also, a logo movable body 902 may be disposed behind the upper rear movable body 1102. In this case, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable rearward.

  In addition, the upper rear movable body 1102 may be movable upward from the initial position.

  Next, the upper right side character 1200, the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side character 1400, and the lower left side character 1500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The upper right side role 1200, the upper left side role 1300, the lower right side role 1400 and the lower left side role 1500 are special character variation game effects, popular pattern fluctuation game effects, or jackpot game effects or It is used for demonstration effects etc. For example, reach production, special figure 1 small hit production, special figure 2 small hit production, popular figure winning production, look ahead notice production, 2R big hit gaming production, 15R special big hit gaming production, and operation of chance button 136 and setting operation part It is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation of 137. In addition, the upper left side character 1300 is symmetrical to the upper right side character 1200. Therefore, the description of the upper left side character 1300 can be described by replacing “right” with “left” in the description of the upper right side character 1200. The lower left side character 1500 also has a symmetrical structure with the lower right side character 1400. For this reason, in the explanation of the lower right side character 1400, the lower left side character 1500 can be explained by replacing “right” with “left”. Accordingly, the description of the upper left side character 1300 and the lower left side character 1500 will be omitted below.

  The movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "upper right side movable body" or "movable body") 1201 of the upper right side character 1200 of the present embodiment is in the upper right direction in a plane parallel to the game board 200. From left to right (hereinafter, may be referred to simply as "moving operation") is possible. In addition, a portion of the upper right side movable body 1201 (movable decorative portion 1203) is interlocked with the movement of the upper right side movable body 1201 from the upper right direction to the lower left direction, in a plane parallel to the board of the game board 200 It is also possible to rotate (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "rotational operation").

  The movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “lower right-side movable body” or “movable body”) 1401 of the lower right-side prize 1400 of the present embodiment is capable of vertical movement. In addition, the movable body 1403 included in the lower right side movable body 1401 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “movable body front”) interlocks with the movement of the movable body 1401 in the up and down direction to move the posture of the movable body 1403. It is also possible to change. In addition, a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the movable body middle portion") 1425 included in the lower right side movable body 1401 has an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 (the outer decorative portion 1425a (the decorative portion 1425a1 1425a6) can move in a radial form and rotate (performs the rotation of the outer decoration 1425a (the decoration 1425a1 to 1425a6) and the rotation of the inner decoration 1425b and the middle decoration 1425c). It is.

  Also, the upper right side character 1200 may operate in conjunction with the movement of another movable body, or may operate independently independently of the movement of the other movable body. Also, the lower right side character 1400 may operate in conjunction with the movement of another movable body, or may operate independently independently of the movement of the other movable body.

  FIGS. 265 and 266 show an example of the movable body 1201 and the movable body 1401 of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, wherein the upper right side part 1200 including the movable body 1201 and the lower right side including the movable body 1401. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the accessory 1400. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 265 is an exploded perspective view of a front portion of the upper right side character 1200 and the lower right side character 1400, and FIG. 266 is an exploded perspective view of a rear portion of the lower right side character 1400. Also, FIGS. 265 and 266 show the state in which the upper right side character 1200 and the lower right side character 1400 are viewed from the front upper right and the rear lower left.

  The structure of the upper right side character 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper right side character 1200 mainly has an upper right side movable body 1201 and an upper right side movable body support 1250 for moving the upper right side movable body 1201. The upper right side movable body 1201 mainly includes a movable decorative portion 1203 capable of performing a rotational operation, a decorative portion 1205, a power transmission mechanism 1211 for executing a rotational operation of the movable decorative portion 1203, and a movable decorative portion 1203 And a connecting portion 1215 for connecting the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support portion 1250.

  The decoration (or “movable body”) 1203 a of the movable decorative portion (or “movable body”) 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be rotated. . A substantially cylindrical shaft fixing portion for fixing the shaft 1211d is provided at a substantially central end of the rear wall surface of the decoration 1203a. For this reason, the shaft 1211 d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion, and the rotation operation of the decoration 1203 a is executed by the rotation of the shaft 1211 d. In addition, a through hole for penetrating the shaft fixing portion of the ornament 1203a is provided at a substantially central end of the ornament (or may be referred to as "movable body") 1203b of the movable decorative portion 1203. Also, the ornament 1203 b is screwed to the back wall of the ornament 1203 a. For this reason, the ornament 1203b becomes integral with the ornament 1203a, so that the rotation operation of the ornament 1203b can be performed. In addition, the decoration 1203a and the decoration 1203b are formed of a transparent resin material.

  The decoration portion 1205 of the upper right side movable body 1201 is used as a decoration of the upper right side movable body 1201. The decorative portion 1205 has a transparent resin ornament 1205a, a transparent resin ornament 1205b, and a transparent resin ornament 1205c. The ornament 1205 b is provided with a through hole through which the shaft fixing portion of the ornament 1203 a can rotate. In addition, the ornament 1205 a, the ornament 1205 b, and the ornament 1205 c are screwed and fixed to the front wall surface of the movable rear cover portion 1209 through the LED substrate 1207.

  The LED substrate 1207 is fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 by screwing. In addition, on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1207, an LED (not shown) or a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED is mounted. Further, the LED substrate 1207 is formed so as not to interfere with the shaft 1211 d.

  The movable body rear cover portion 1209 is used to support the movable decorative portion 1203 and the decorative portion 1205. It is also used to store the LED substrate 1207. It is also used to support the power transmission mechanism 1211 and the posture holding portion 1213. It is also used to execute the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 (details will be described later). Further, the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is provided with a through hole for making the shaft 1211 d rotatable. In addition, the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is provided with a substantially plate-shaped initial position detection portion for detecting the initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the photo sensor 1252.

  The power transmission mechanism 1211 is used to execute the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. The power transmission mechanism 1211 mainly includes a spur gear 1211a, a guide rod-equipped spur gear 1211b, a stopper-function-equipped spur gear 1211c, and a shaft 1211d. The spur gear 1211a is used to transmit the rotation of the guide rod spur gear 1211b to the stopper function portion spur gear 1211c. The spur gear 1211a and the guide rod spur gear 1211b are disposed adjacent to each other on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a and the teeth of the guide rod spur gear 1211b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear with a stopper function portion 1211c is installed adjacent to the spur gear 1211a on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1211a and the teeth of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c mesh with each other. . Further, the rear end of the shaft 1211d is fixed to the central portion of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c. The shaft 1211 d is fixed to the shaft fixing portion of the decoration 1203 a of the movable decoration portion 1203 through the through holes provided in the movable body rear cover portion 1209 and the decoration 1205 b.

  The guide rod spur gear 1211 b is used to transmit the rotation of the holed spur gear 1256 c to the spur gear 1211 a. The guide rod spur gear 1211 b mainly includes a guide rod 1211 b 1 and a spur gear 1211 b 2. The spur gear 1211 b 2 has a substantially fan-like shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 12 11 b 2 are formed on a substantially sector-shaped arc. The guide rod 1211 b 1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. Further, in the guide rod 1211b1, the guide rod 1211b1 and the spur gear 1211b2 are integrally formed near the end of the substantially sectoral arc of the rear surface of the spur gear 1211b2 such that one end face of the substantially cylindrical shape faces back. There is. The connecting portion 1215 e is fixed to one end face of the guide rod 1211 b 1 so as to be slidable (or rollable). Therefore, the rotation of the holed spur gear 1256c is transmitted to the guide rod spur gear 1211b (the details will be described later).

  The stopper-function-portion-equipped spur gear 1211 c is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1211 a to the shaft 1211 d. Further, the spur gear with a stopper function portion 1211 c mainly includes a stopper function portion 1211 c 1 and a spur gear 1211 c 2. The spur gear 1211c2 has a substantially semicircular shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1211c2 are formed on a substantially semicircular arc. Further, the stopper function part 1211c1 has a substantially triangular plate shape, and one vertex portion of the substantially triangular plate shape has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape obtained by cutting an end face of a cylinder vertically to a half). Further, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is integrally formed on the chord portion (outer periphery without teeth) of the spur gear 1211c2. Therefore, the substantially semi-cylindrical portion of the stopper function portion 1211c1 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the spur gear 1211c2. Further, since the radius of the spur gear 1211 c 2 is smaller than the radius of the spur gear 1 256 b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260, the spur gear 1211 c 2 rotates at a higher speed than the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. It is not limited to this. For example, by making the radius of the spur gear 1211c2 larger than the radius of the spur gear 1256b, the spur gear 1211c2 can be rotated at a lower speed than the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260.

  The posture holding portion 1213 mainly includes a first holding portion 1213a, a second holding portion 1213b, and a helical spring 1213c. The first holding portion 1213a and the second holding portion 1213b have shapes which are symmetrical to each other. The first holding portion 1213a is mainly used to hold (or maintain) the posture (or posture) before the rotational operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed. In addition, the second holding unit 1213 b is mainly used to hold (or maintain) the posture after the rotational operation of the movable decorative unit 1203 is performed. The first holding portion 1213a and the second holding portion 1213b are symmetrical with respect to each other, and have a substantially arc shape. The lower end portion of the first holding portion 1213a is a movable body rear cover so that the first holding portion 1213a can rotate in a plane parallel to the game board 200 with the lower end portion in the substantially arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a as a fulcrum It is attached to the rear wall of section 1209. Similarly, the lower end portion of the second holding portion 1213 b is attached to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. Further, at the upper end portion of the first holding portion 1213a, a spring locking portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed. Similarly, at an upper end portion of the second holding portion 1213b, a spring locking portion for connecting the helical spring 1213c is formed. Further, one end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to the spring engaging portion of the first holding portion 1213a, and the other end of the helical spring 1213c is connected to the spring engaging portion of the second holding portion 1213b. Further, in the present embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a plurality of helical springs may be provided. Also, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1213c, or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. Moreover, the detail of the posture holding part 1213 is mentioned later.

  The connection portion 1215 includes the upper right side movable body 1201 and the upper right side movable body support portion 1250, the guide holes of the base 1254 (the guide holes 1254a and the guide holes 1254b), and the guide holes of the flat spur gear 1256c. Hole force application hole 1256c1 and relief hole force application hole 1256c2) are used for connection. The connection part 1215 has five of connection parts 1215a-1215e, and each is the same shape. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are formed integrally with the substantially cylindrical roller portion and the substantially annular disc roller outer portion. The roller exterior is formed at one end of the roller portion. Further, the diameter of the outer circumferential circle outside the roller is longer than the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller portion, and further longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole of the base 1254 or the guide hole of the perforated spur gear 1256c. Further, the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion of the base portion 1254 or the guide hole portion of the holed spur gear 1256c. Further, the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are slidable (or rollable) in the above-described guide holes corresponding to each of the predetermined positions and guides of the rear wall surface of the movable rear cover portion 1209. It is attached to the guide rod 1211 b 1 of the spur gear with rod 1211 b. Further, the roller outsides of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are located on the rear outside of the above-mentioned guide holes corresponding to the respective ones, and the roller portions of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are located inside the corresponding guide holes. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e are designed so as not to easily come out of the corresponding guide holes. The connecting portions 1215a to 1215e can slide (or roll) in the regions of the guide holes corresponding to the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. Further, details of the connecting portion 1215 will be described later.

  Next, the upper right side movable body support unit 1250 will be described. The upper right side movable body support portion 1250 mainly includes a base portion 1254 supporting the upper right side movable body 1201, a power transmission mechanism 1256 for operating the upper right side movable body 1201, and an upper right side movable body 1201. The motor 1260 serves as a drive source for operating the motor.

  The photosensor 1252 is used to detect the initial position of the upper right side movable body 1201. The photosensor 1252 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1252 is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light receiving unit receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. In addition, the photo sensor 1252 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing in the front-rear direction, and has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from above. Further, the photo sensor 1252 is configured such that the base portion 1254 is positioned such that the initial position detection portion of the rear movable cover portion 1209 is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion when the upper right side movable body 1201 is positioned at the initial position. It is screwed to the upper end of the front wall of the

  The base portion 1254 has a substantially plate shape. Further, the base portion 1254 is screwed and fixed to the upper end portion of the front base portion 1456 of the lower right movable body support portion 1450 and the upper end portion of the middle base portion 1460. In addition, the front base portion 1456 and the middle base portion 1460 are fixed to the unit body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screwing. That is, the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  Further, the base portion 1254 is a member related to the movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201. The base portion 1254 is a guide hole 1254a in which the connecting portion 1215a can slide (or can roll), and a guide hole in which the connecting portion 1215b and the connecting portion 1215c can be slid (or can roll). It has 1254b. Details of the guide hole 1254a and the guide hole 1254b will be described later.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 is used as a power source for performing the movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260. . The power transmission mechanism 1256 mainly includes a spur gear 1256a, a spur gear 1256b, and a holed spur gear 1256c. The spur gear 1256a is integrally formed by bonding two spur gears of the same shape to each other. The spur gear 1256a is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256b to the holed spur gear 1256c. The spur gear 1256 a and the spur gear 1256 b are installed on the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear on the rear side of the spur gear 1256 a and the teeth of the spur gear 1256 b mesh with each other. The spur gear 1256a and the spur gear 1256c are installed on the rear wall of the base portion 1254 so that the teeth of the spur gear on the front side of the spur gear 1256a and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 of the hole spur gear 1256c mesh with each other.

  The spur gear 1256 b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 to the spur gear 1256 a, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1260.

  The holed spur gear 1256c is used to convert the rotation of the spur gear 1256a into substantially linear motion and transmit it to the connecting portion 1251d. The holed spur gear 1256 c is used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1256 a to the connecting portion 1251 e. The rotation operation of the spur gear 1256a is converted into a substantially linear motion and transmitted to the connecting portion 1251d, so that the moving operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be performed. Further, the rotation of the spur gear 1256a is transmitted to the connecting portion 1251e, so that the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 can be performed (details will be described later). The holed spur gear 1256c mainly includes a relief hole force application hole 1256c1, a relief hole force application hole 1256c2, and a spur gear 1256c3. The spur gear 1256c3 has a substantially sector shape, and the teeth of the spur gear 1256c3 are formed on a substantially sector-shaped arc. The details of the relief hole force application hole 1256c1 and the relief hole force application hole 1256c2 will be described later.

  The motor 1260 is a drive source for executing the movement operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201. The motor 1260 is screwed to the motor mounting portion 1258 such that a spur gear 1256 b fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is positioned in front of the motor 1260. The motor attachment portion 1258 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 passes. In addition, the motor attachment portion 1258 is attached to the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. Although a stepping motor is used as the motor 1260 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto. Motor 1260 is connected to drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240, and is controlled by second sub control unit 500.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 265 and 266, the structure of the lower right side character 1400 will be described. The lower right side character 1400 mainly has a lower right side movable body 1401 and a lower right side movable body support portion 1450 for operating the lower right side movable body 1401.

  First, the configuration of part of the lower right-side movable body support 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The guiding portion 1452 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. The guiding portion 1452 has a guiding portion 1452a and a guiding portion 1452b. The guiding portion 1452a has a groove extending linearly in the vertical direction so that the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 266 can roll (or slide). Moreover, the shape of the said groove | channel has square-C shape (shape which the left side opens), when it sees from upper direction. Further, the guiding portion 1452 b has a linearly extending groove inclined at a predetermined angle in the upper front direction so that the above-mentioned roller 1407 f can roll (or slide). Moreover, the groove shape of the said groove has a U-shape (shape which the left side opens), when it sees from upper direction. Further, the guide groove of the guide portion 1452a and the guide groove of the guide portion 1452b are connected. Further, the guiding portion 1452 is screwed to the front wall surface of the front base portion 1456.

  The LED substrate 1454 is screwed to the front wall of the front base 1456. Further, on the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1454, an LED (not shown) or a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED is mounted.

  The front base portion 1456 is used to support the guiding portion 1452 and the LED substrate 1454. The front base portion 1456 is also used to house the power transmission mechanism 1458, and a housing portion capable of housing the power transmission mechanism 1458 is provided on the rear side of the front base portion 1456. In addition, the front base portion 1456 is fixed to the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 by screwing. In addition, the middle base portion 1460 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screwing. That is, the guiding portion 1452 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820.

  The power transmission mechanism 1458 moves the lower right side movable body 1401 shown in FIG. 266 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 shown in FIG. 266, and the movable body (movable front portion) 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401. It is used to carry out the action of posture change. The power transmission mechanism 1458 mainly includes a belt 1458a, a spur gear 1458b, a spur gear with pulley 1458c, a pulley 1458d, a shaft 1458e, and a shaft support portion 1458f.

  The belt 1458a is used to execute the vertical movement of the lower right side movable body 1401. The belt 1458a is a resin belt and has flexibility. The belt 1458a has its upper end hooked on the pulley 1458c1 of the pulley and spur gear 1458c and its lower end hooked on the pulley 1458d. Therefore, the belt 1458a rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pulley and spur gear 1458c. In addition, a belt fixing portion 1413b of a movable body support portion 1413 shown in FIG. 266 is fixed at a predetermined position of the belt 1458a.

  The spur gear 1458 b is used to transmit the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 to the pulley spur gear 1458 c. The spur gear 1458 b is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1462. Further, the spur gear 1458 b and the pulley spur gear 1458 c are provided adjacent to each other on the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1458 b and the teeth of the spur gear 1458 c 2 of the pulley spur gear 1458 c mesh with each other.

  The pulley and spur gear 1458c and the pulley 1458d are used to transmit the rotation of the spur gear 1458b to the belt 1458a. The pulley and spur gear 1458c is integrally molded with the pulley 1458c1 and the spur gear 1458c2 positioned in the front and rear direction. The pulley spur gear 1458 c and the pulley 1458 d are provided on the front wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The shaft 1458 e is used to rotatably support the pulley and spur gear 1458 c. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to the upper portion of the front wall of the middle base portion 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is mounted at the center of the pulley spur gear 1458c so that the pulley spur gear 1458c can rotate. The shaft 1458 e is used to rotatably support the pulley 1458 d. The rear end of the shaft 1458e is fixed to the lower portion of the front wall of the middle base portion 1460, and the front end of the shaft 1458e is provided at the center of the pulley 1458d so that the pulley 1458d can rotate.

  The middle base portion 1460 is used to support and store the power transmission mechanism 1458. The middle base portion 1460 is also used to support and store the guide rails 1464 and the guide rods 1466 shown in FIG.

  Next, the structure of the lower right side character 1400 will be described using FIG. The lower right side movable body 1401 mainly changes the posture of the movable body (the movable body front portion) 1403, the movable body (the movable body rear portion) 1405, the movable body (the movable body middle portion) 1425, and the movable body 1403. Position change mechanism 1407, a movable body 1403 and a motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion for supporting the movable body 1405 and the movable body 1425, and a motor for performing an operation of opening a part of the movable body 1425 and an operation of rotating A movable body support 1413 and a power transmission mechanism 1419 are provided.

  The movable body 1403 is a movable body capable of performing an operation of changing the posture in addition to the movement operation in the vertical direction (details will be described later). The movable body 1403 has a substantially arc shaped front decoration portion 1403a and a substantially arc shaped rear decoration portion 1403b, and the front decoration portion 1403a and the front decoration portion 1403b are fixed by screwing. The front decoration portion 1403a and the front decoration portion 1403b are formed of a transparent resin. Further, an LED substrate (not shown) is provided inside the movable body 1403. Although the drive circuit for lighting LED and LED is mounted in the both surfaces of LED board, it is not restricted to this. For example, although it may be made to overlap two back sides of a single-sided mounting LED board, it is not restricted to these. For this reason, before the posture change of the movable body 1403 (the posture at the initial position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate is visible through the front decoration portion 1403a. After the change in posture (the posture at the target position of the movable body 1403), the light of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the LED substrate can be viewed through the rear decoration portion 1403b. Further, the right end portion of the movable body 1403 formed on the arc has a shaft fixing portion 1403 c for fixing the shaft 1407 a and the shaft 1407 b of the posture changing mechanism 1407.

  The movable body 1405 is a movable body capable of performing the movement operation in the vertical direction (the details will be described later). Also, the movable body 1405 has a substantially arc shape. In addition, the movable body 1405 is formed of a transparent resin. In addition, inside the movable body 1405, an LED substrate (not shown) is provided. A drive circuit for lighting the LEDs and the LEDs is mounted on the mounting surface of the LED substrate. Further, the movable body 1405 is a movable body located behind the movable body 1403. In addition, before the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405 because a portion of the movable body 1403 overlaps with a portion of the movable body 1405. On the other hand, after the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, since the movable body 1403 does not overlap with a part of the movable body 1405, the player can view the entire movable body 1405.

  The posture change mechanism 1407 is used to change the posture of the movable body 1403. The posture changing mechanism 1407 mainly includes a shaft 1407a, a shaft 1407b, a shaft support portion 1407c, a pinion 1407d, a rack with guide rods 1407e, and a roller 1407f.

  The shaft 1407 a and the shaft 1407 b are used to form a rotational shaft of the movable body 1403. The right end of the shaft 1407 a is fixed to the left end of the shaft fixing portion 1403 c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the left end portion of the shaft 1407a is provided in a shaft through hole provided in the shaft support portion 1407c so that the shaft 1407a can be rotated. Further, the left end portion of the shaft 1407 b is fixed to the right end portion of the shaft fixing portion 1403 c of the movable body 1403. On the other hand, the right end portion of the shaft 1407b is fixed to the central portion of the pinion 1407d through an axial through hole provided in the shaft support portion 1407c.

  The shaft support portion 1407c is used to support the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. The shaft support portion 1407c supports the movable body 1403 via the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. Further, the installation direction of the shaft support portion 1407c determines the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 formed by the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b. In the present embodiment, the axis support 1407 c is movable body support 1413 so that the direction of the rotation axis of the movable body 1403 is inclined at a predetermined angle from upper right to lower left in a plane parallel to the game board 200. The screw is fixed to the front wall of the case, but not limited thereto.

  The pinion 1407 d is used to convert the movement in the front-rear direction of the guide rod attached rack 1407 e into a rotational movement to rotate the shaft 1407 b (details will be described later). The pinion 1407 d is fixed to a shaft 1407 b, the shaft 1407 b is rotatably mounted on a shaft support 1407 c, and the shaft support 1407 c is fixed to a movable body support 1413. That is, the pinion 1407 d is rotatably fixed to the movable body support 1413. Further, in this embodiment, the number of teeth of the rack and the number of teeth of the pinion are determined so that the pinion rotates about half when the rack with guide rods 1407 e moves from the initial position to the target position. It is not limited. For example, by providing a hole that can be rotated 360 ° without interference of the movable body 1403 in the movable body rear cover portion 1209 or the like, when the rack with guide rods 1407 e moves from the initial position to the target position It may be configured to rotate, or may be configured to rotate the pinion for about one or more rotations. When the rack with guide rods 1407e moves from the initial position to the target position, when the pinion makes one rotation, the posture at the initial position of the movable body 1403 and the posture at the target position of the movable body 1403 are the same. Become.

  The guide rod attached rack 1407 e is used to convert the vertical movement caused by the rotation of the belt 1458 a shown in FIG. 265 to rotate the pinion 1407 d (details will be described later). The guide rod attached rack 1407 e has a guide rod 1407 e 1 and a rack 1407 e 2. The guide rod 1407e1 has a substantially cylindrical shape. Further, the guide rod 1407e1 is provided on the front end surface (end surface without teeth) of the rack 1407e2 such that the guide rod 1407e1 and the rack 1407e2 are integrated. In addition, the rack 1407e with a guide rod is provided so as to be slidable on the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 so that the teeth of the rack 1407e2 and the teeth of the pinion 1407d mesh with each other. Further, a guide portion (not shown) is provided on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 (the wall surface in contact with the rack guide portion 1409a of the motor cover portion with a guide portion 1409). In addition, it is possible to provide a roller portion that can roll on the sliding surface of the guide rod attached rack 1407e. Further, in the present embodiment, the pinion 1407 d is fixed to the shaft 1407 b inclined at the above-described predetermined angle. For this reason, the tooth tips of the rack 1407e2 have a substantially trapezoidal side surface so that the tooth tips of the rack 1407e2 are parallel to the tooth tips of the pinion 1407d inclined at the above-mentioned predetermined angle. I can not.

  The roller 1407 f is used to guide the rack 1407 e with a guide rod to the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. The roller 1407f is attached to the end face of the guide rod 1407e1 of the rack 1407e with a guide rod so as to be rollable (or slidable). In addition, a rack with a guide rod 1407e is provided on the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 so that the roller 1407f can roll (or slide) on the guide portion 1452a and the guide portion 1452b of the guide portion 1452 .

  The guide-equipped motor cover unit 1409 is used to guide the movement of the guide-rod-equipped rack 1407 e provided on the rack guide unit 1413 a of the movable body support unit 1413. Further, the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion is used as a cover portion of the motor 1411 fixed to the movable body support portion 1413. Further, the motor cover unit with a guide unit 1409 includes a rack guide unit 1409a and a motor cover unit 1409b. Further, the motor cover portion with a guide portion 1409 supports the movable body so that the rack with a guide rod 1407e can slide in the longitudinal direction by the rack guide portion 1413a of the movable body support portion 1413 and does not move in the vertical direction It is attached to the front wall of the part 1413. The rack guide portion 1409a has a substantially plate shape, and a single groove extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the surface in contact with the guide rod rack 1407e. Further, a guide (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2 can slide in the upper groove provided in the rack guide 1409a. Further, the width in the vertical direction of the upper groove is such that a slight clearance (clearance) is added to the width of the upper and lower sides of the guide portion (not shown) formed on the wall surface of the rack 1407e2. For this reason, the movement of the rack 1407 e with the guide rod in the vertical direction is restricted by the rack guide portion 1409 a. In addition, by sandwiching the rack 1407e with a guide rod by the rack guide 1409a and the rack guide 1413a provided in the movable body support 1413, the movement of the rack 1407e with a guide bar in the left-right direction is restricted.

  The motor 1411 is a drive source for executing an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle part (or the movable body) 1425 and an operation of rotating the part 1425 (details will be described later). The motor 1411 is screwed and fixed to the front wall surface of the movable body support portion 1413 such that the rotation shaft of the motor (the side on which the spur gear 1419c is attached) faces rearward. In addition, the movable body support portion 1413 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 passes. Further, the motor 1411 is connected to a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 and controlled by the second sub control unit 500. In the present embodiment, although a stepping motor is used as the motor 1411, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The movable body support portion 1413 is used to support and operate the movable body 1401 (the movable body front portion 1403, the movable body rear portion 1405, and the movable body middle portion 1425). The movable body support 1413 has a substantially plate shape. The movable body support 1413 mainly includes a rack guide 1413a, a belt fixing portion 1413b, an inner rail attachment portion 1413c, and a guide rod slide 1413d.

  The rack guide portion 1413a has a substantially plate shape. Also, on the left wall surface of the rack guide portion 1413a (the surface that the rack 1407e2 contacts), two protrusions are provided in parallel in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the joining surfaces of the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide portion 1413a become smaller, and the frictional force between the rack 1407e2 and the rack guide portion 1413a is reduced. In addition, a bearing, a steel ball, a roller, or the like may be provided on the wall surface of the rack guide portion 1413a so that the rack 1407e2 can move smoothly.

  The belt fixing portion 1413 b is used to fix the movable body support portion 1413 to the belt 1458 a shown in FIG. The belt fixing portion 1413 b is configured to sandwich a belt portion at a predetermined position of the belt 1458 a with two substantially plate-shaped plates.

  The inner rail attachment portion 1413c is an attachment portion of the inner rail 1464b of the guide rail 1464, and is provided between the belt fixing portion 1413b and the guide rod slide portion 1413d.

  The guide rod slide 1413 d is used to allow the movable body support 1413 to move along the guide rod 1466. The guide rod slide portion 1413d has a substantially cylindrical shape whose front is open. Further, the inner diameter of the guide rod sliding portion 1413 d is a length obtained by adding a slight margin (clearance) to the outer diameter of the guide rod 1466. The movable body support portion 1413 is also provided with a through hole for transmitting the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415 and a through hole for passing the shaft 1419 f of the power transmission mechanism 1419.

  The LED substrate 1415 is fixed to the rear wall of the movable body support 1413 by screwing. On the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1415, an LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted. The LED substrate cover portion 1417 is used to store the LED substrate 1415, and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the LED substrate 1415 by screwing.

  The power transmission mechanism 1419 is a mechanism used to execute an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and a rotation operation by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1411. The power transmission mechanism 1419 mainly includes a spur gear 1419a, a spur gear 1419b, a spur gear 1419c, a helical spring 1419d, a spring pressing portion 1419e, and a shaft 1419f. The spur gear 1419 a is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1411. Further, the spur gear 1419 b is installed adjacent to the spur gear 1419 a on the rear wall surface of the LED substrate cover portion 1417 so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419 a and the teeth of the spur gear 1419 b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear 1419 c is installed on the rear wall surface of the LED substrate cover portion 1417 adjacent to the spur gear 1419 b so that the teeth of the spur gear 1419 b and the teeth of the spur gear 1419 c mesh with each other. The center of the spur gear 1419c is provided with a hole for allowing the shaft 1419f to pass therethrough, and the shaft 1419f is passed so as to be rotatable. Further, the front end of the shaft 1419f is fixed to the central portion of the inner decorative portion 1425b. In the center of the front wall of the spur gear 1419c, a substantially square groove is formed to rotate the holed rear disc 1425f. Further, a helical spring 1419 d is provided on the rear side of the spur gear 1419 c. Further, a spring pressing portion 1419e is provided on the rear side of the helical spring 1419d. Therefore, the substantially square groove provided at the central portion of the spur gear 1419c is pressed against the central portion of the holed rear disc 1425f by the elastic force of the helical spring 1419d. For this reason, the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is efficiently transmitted to the holed rear disc 1425f. Further, in this embodiment, the position of the rotation axis of the motor 1411 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) and the position of the shaft 1419f (position coordinates on a plane parallel to the game board 200) are different. The power transmission mechanism 1419 is used. Thereby, the installation space of the motor 1411 can be arbitrarily provided. In addition, in consideration of the center of gravity of the movable body 1401, an installation space of the motor 1411 can be arbitrarily provided. Further, by changing the ratio of the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c, the rotation speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 can be converted to a predetermined rotation speed to rotate the shaft 1419f. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c is larger than the number of teeth of the spur gear 1419c. Therefore, the power transmission mechanism 1419 is used as a reduction mechanism. Also, the torque of the motor 1411 is amplified and transmitted to the shaft 1419 f. Further, the power transmission mechanism cover portion 1421 is used to store the power transmission mechanism 1419, and is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body support portion 1413 by screwing.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 can execute an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body middle portion 1425, in addition to the movement operation in the vertical direction. The middle movable body 1425 has a substantially truncated cone shape. The middle movable body 1425 is disposed at a predetermined position on the front wall surface of the movable body support 1413 so that an operation of opening a part of the middle movable body 1425 and an operation of rotating the middle movable body 1425 can be performed. Ru. Further, an outer decoration 1425a is provided outside the front surface of the movable body central portion 1425, a middle decoration 1425c is provided inside the outer decoration 1425a, and an inner decoration 1425b is provided inside the middle decoration 1425c. Have. These decorative parts are formed of a transparent resin in order to transmit the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  The outer decorative portion 1425a is divided into six decorative portions of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6. Each of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 moves radially about the shaft 1419f (hereinafter, may simply be expressed as "radial movement") and rotates about the shaft 1419f (hereinafter simply referred to as " It may be expressed as "rotational motion". In addition, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 each have the same shape and a substantially arc shape. In addition, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are fixed to the front surfaces of the support portions 1425d1 to 14256e6 of the support portion with guide rods 1425d by screwing. In addition, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged such that when the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 are arranged, the inner side is formed in a ring shape opening in a circle.

  The inner decorative portion 1425b rotates about the shaft 1419f. In addition, the inner decoration portion 1425b has a substantially disc shape. A not-shown shaft fixing portion for fixing the front end surface of the shaft 1419 f is provided at the center of the circle on the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425 b. Near the circumference of the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425b, two substantially cylindrical screwing portions for screwing to the front surface of the holed front disk 1425e are provided, with the center of the circle as a diagonal. In addition, the inner decoration portion 1425c has a substantially disc shape. A through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the circle of the inner decorative portion 1425c. Further, in the center of the circle on the front surface of the inner decorative portion 1425c, a circular recess is provided in accordance with the size of the inner decorative portion 1425b for fitting the inner decorative portion 1425b. Further, in the recessed portion, two through holes for passing a substantially cylindrical screwing portion provided on the rear surface of the inner decorative portion 1425b are provided. That is, the middle decoration portion 1425c rotates integrally with the inner decoration portion 1425b by being integrated with the inner decoration portion 1425b.

  The guide rod attached support portion 1425d is used to execute the above-described radial movement and rotational movement of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a. The guide rod attached support portion 1425 d is divided into six pieces (support portions 1425 d 1 to 1425 d 6), and is disposed in front of the holed front disc 1425 e. Each of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 has the same shape, and has a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the long side on the outer side is an arc shape. In addition, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged such that the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged in a ring shape having a hexagonal opening at the inner side, and the inner decorative portion 1425b and the middle are opened The decorative portion 1425c is rotatable. In addition, a substantially cylindrical guide rod (partially shown) is provided on the rear surface of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6. In addition, although the support portion 1425d with a guide rod is formed of a non-transparent resin, it may be formed of a transparent resin.

  The perforated front disc 1425e is used for the rotational operation of the inner decoration 1425b and the middle decoration 1425c. The holed front disc 1425e is disposed to the rear of the support portion with guide rod 1425d. Further, the perforated front disc 1425e has a substantially disc shape. A through hole through which the shaft 1419f can rotate is provided at the center of the holed front disk 1425e. Further, in the holed front disc 1425e, six long holes having a predetermined length are provided at intervals of 60 ° in the radial direction from the vicinity of the center of the circle. In these six long holes, guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 corresponding to each of the six long holes are movably arranged. In addition, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 move in a radial shape along the long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 have almost the force acting on the holed front disc 1425e. It is supposed not to. Further, the front surface of the holed front disk 1425e and the two screwing portions of the inner decorative portion 1425b are fixed by screwing. Therefore, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 stop at the ends (upper and lower ends) of these six long holes, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 rotationally move, The force of rotation acts on the holed front disc 1425e, and the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c fixed to the holed front disc 1425e are rotated. In addition, although the holed front disk 1425e is formed of a transparent resin material in order to transmit the light of the LED mounted on the LED substrate 1415, the present invention is not limited to this.

  The perforated rear side disc 1425f is used to perform radial movement and rotational movement of the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 and rotational movement of the inner decorative portion 1425b and the inner decorative portion 1425c. The holed rear side disc 1425 f has a substantially disc shape. In addition, the holed rear side disk 1425 f is disposed at the rear of the holed front side disk 1425 e, and is arranged to be rotatable at a predetermined position on the front surface of the movable body support portion 1413. Further, a through hole for passing the shaft 1419f is provided at the center of the holed rear side disk 1425f. Further, a substantially square (not shown) fixing portion for fixing to the spur gear 1419 c is formed at the center of the rear surface of the holed rear side disk 1425 f. Therefore, the force due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419c is transmitted to the holed rear side disk 1425f. Further, in the holed rear side circular plate 1425 f, substantially arc-shaped elongated holes of a predetermined length are formed in a spiral at a 60 ° interval around the center of the circle. In these six long holes, the guide rods of the corresponding support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are arranged slidably (or rollable). Further, in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided by the corresponding long holes by the rotation of the holed rear side disk 1425f. In this case, the above-described radial movement can be performed. Further, in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 stop at the end portions of the long holes corresponding to the respective ones by rotation of the holed rear side disk 1425f. In this case, the above-described rotational movement can be performed. That is, by performing the above-described radial movement in the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6, the above-described radial movement is also performed on the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a. Therefore, the opening operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed. Further, by rotating the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 as described above, the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 of the outer decorative portion 1425a execute the above-described rotational movement. Further, in accordance with the rotational movement, the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c is performed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is performed. Moreover, in order to permeate | transmit the light of LED mounted in LED board 1415, although the holed back side disc 1425f is formed with transparent resin, it is not restricted to this.

  In the present embodiment, when the guide rods provided on the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are guided and moved to the long holes corresponding to the respective ones provided on the rear disc with holes 1425f, the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d1 Each guide rod provided in 1425d6 has a configuration in which almost no force acts on the holed front disc 1425e. For this reason, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, an operation of opening a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 first (operation of moving the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 in a radial shape) is Clockwise rotation operation (rotational movement of the outer decoration 1425a, inner decoration 1425b and middle decoration 1425c) after the operation of opening the middle 1425 of the movable body is completed. Rotation operation is performed, but is not limited thereto. For example, when the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are moved while being guided by the long holes respectively corresponding to the holes provided on the rear side circular plate 1425f, the guide rods of the support portions 1425d1 to 1425d6 are A configuration in which a large force is exerted on the holed front disc 1425e (for example, six long holes having a predetermined length are provided at intervals of 60 ° in spiral linear form from the center of the circle toward the outer periphery) Configuration). In this case, the opening operation and the rotation operation of the middle movable body portion 1425 are simultaneously performed. It is to be noted that, after the operation of partially opening the movable body middle portion 1425 is completed (or in the middle thereof), a part of the movable body middle portion 1425 is closed by rotating the rotary shaft of the motor 1411 clockwise afterward. The action becomes executable. Further, by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 clockwise afterward, the movable body middle portion 1425 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In addition, by controlling the number of rotations of the rotation shaft of the motor 1411, it is possible to execute only the operation of opening a part of the middle movable body 1425.

  Next, the remaining configuration of the lower right-side movable body support 1450 will be described with reference to FIG. The motor 1462 is a drive source for executing the movement operation of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movement operation of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401. The motor 1462 is screwed to the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so that a pulley and spur gear 1458c (see FIG. 266) fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor is positioned in front of the motor. The middle base portion 1460 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1462 passes. In the present embodiment, although a stepping motor is used as the motor 1462, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto. Further, the motor 1462 is connected to a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 and controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  The guide rail 1464 is used to guide the direction of movement of the movable body 1401. The guide rail 1464 has an outer rail 1464 a and an inner rail 1464 b. The inner rail 1464 b is fixed to the inner rail attachment portion 1413 c of the movable body support 1413 by screwing in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1401 can move in the vertical direction. Also, the outer rail 1464a is fixed by screwing in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1401 can move in the vertical direction at the center of the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are disposed on the rail contacting surfaces of the inner and outer rails 1464b and 1464a so that friction between the rails can be reduced and the rails can slide smoothly. Further, the configuration of the guide rail 1464 enables the movable body support portion 1413 to move in the installation direction of the outer rail 1464 a fixed to the middle base portion 1460, that is, in the vertical direction. Further, at the lower end portion of the outer rail 1464a, a rail stopping portion (not shown) for stopping the inner rail 1464b is provided.

  The guide rod 1466 is used so that the movable body 1401 can be moved in parallel along the guide rod 1466 as a whole. It is also used to reduce the moment of force due to the movement of the movable body 1401. The guide rod 1466 is composed of an iron rod. Also, the guide rod 1466 is fixed to the rear wall surface of the middle base portion 1460 so as to be parallel to the installation direction of the guide rail 1464 in the vertical direction.

  The helical spring 1468 is used to support the upward movement of the movable body 1401. In the present embodiment, a compression spring is used as the helical spring 1468. The helical spring 1468 is provided on the guide rod 1466 so as to wind around the guide rod 1466. Further, the spring pressing portion 1470 is slidable by the guide rod 1466, and is mounted on the guide rod 1466 so as to press the helical spring 1468 from above the helical spring 1468. Further, the guide rod slide portion 1413 d of the movable body support portion 1413 is provided on the guide rod 1466 above the spring pressing portion 1470. With this configuration, when the movable body 1401 is positioned downward, the helical spring 1468 is elastically deformed and compressed. For this reason, the moving operation from the initial position (lower end) of the movable body 1401 upward may be performed smoothly.

  The photosensor 1472 is used to detect the initial position of the movable body 1401. The photosensor 1472 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1472 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light receiving unit receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. Further, the photo sensor 1472 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing in the front-rear direction, and has a U-shape (a shape in which the left side is open) when viewed from the right side. In addition, when the movable body 1401 is positioned at the initial position, the lower end portion of the movable body support portion 1413 is fixed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion by screwing to the front wall surface of the rear base portion 1474 .

  Next, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 of the upper right side character 1200 of the present embodiment and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 will be described using FIGS. 267 and 268. FIG.

  FIG. 267 (a) is a schematic front view of the upper right side character 1200 in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position as viewed from the front. FIG. 267 (a ') is a schematic rear view of the upper right side character 1200 shown in FIG. 267 (a) as viewed from the rear. FIG. 267 (b) is a schematic front view of the upper right side character 1200 in a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 267 (b) shows a state immediately before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is performed. FIG. 267 (b ') is a schematic rear view of the upper right side character 1200 shown in FIG. 267 (b) as viewed from the rear. FIG. 267 (c) is a schematic front view of the upper right side character 1200 in a state after the movable decoration 1203 has been rotated after the movable body 1201 has reached the target position. FIG. 267 (c ') is a schematic rear view of the upper right side character 1200 shown in FIG. 267 (c) as viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 267 (a) shows a state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position. In addition, the rotating operation of the movable body 1203 is not being performed. The movable body 1201 can perform an operation of moving from an initial position to a target position and an operation of moving from the target position to the initial position. In the movable range of the movable body 1201, the position of the upper end is set as the initial position of the movable body 1201, and the position of the lower end is set as the target position of the movable body 1201.

  Subsequently, the movement operation from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the initial position will be described using FIG. 267 (a ′). In the base portion 1254, two through holes inclined substantially straight from upper left to lower right as viewed from the rear are provided in parallel at predetermined intervals. The hole on the right side as viewed from the rear is the guide hole 1254a, and the hole on the left side as viewed from the rear is the guide hole 1254b. In the guide hole portion 1254a, the connecting portion 1215a fixed to the rear wall surface of the rear movable body cover portion 1209 of the rear cover portion of the movable body 1201 is disposed so as to be able to roll (or slide) . In the guide hole portion 1254b, the connecting portion 1215b and the connecting portion 1215c fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 are disposed in a rollable (or slidable) manner. Further, since the base portion 1254 is fixed to the unit main body 822 of the accessory unit 820 by screwing, the guide hole 1254a and the guide hole 1254b are fixed and do not move. For this reason, the movable body 1201 is guided by the guide hole 1254a and the guide hole 1254b and can be moved in parallel.

  The power transmission mechanism 1256 (1256a to 1256c) has a mechanism for transmitting the rotational force of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 to the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. The rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 rotates the spur gear 1256b, and the rotation of the spur gear 1256b rotates the spur gear 1256a, and the rotation of the spur gear 1256a causes the holed spur gear 1256c to rotate. The holed spur gear 1256c mainly includes a relief hole force application hole 1256c1, a relief hole force application hole 1256c2, and a spur gear 1256c3. When the movable body 1201 is at the initial position, the relief hole force acting hole portion 1256c1 has a long hole of a hiragana-like shape as viewed from the rear, and has an approximately 45 ° anti-clockwise It is rotating around. An elongated hole in the lower portion of the "" shape (hereinafter may be referred to as a force acting hole) extends in the rotational axis direction of the spur gear 1256c3 and a elongated hole in the upper portion of the "" Hereinafter, the relief hole may be referred to as a relief hole) extends in the clockwise circumferential direction as viewed from the rear of the spur gear 1256c3. In addition, the relief hole force application hole 1256c2 has a long hole of a hiragana shape as seen from the rear and rotates about 180 ° when the movable body 1201 is at the initial position. . The long hole having the “H” shape is formed to follow the movement trajectory of the connecting portion 1215 e. In addition, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the holed spur gear 1256 c rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. In this case, the relief hole force application hole 1256c1 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear about the rotation axis of the spur gear 1256c3. In addition, even if the movable flat gear 1256c moves due to the rotation of the holed flat spur gear 1256c, the holed flat spur gear 1256c has a shape such that the holed flat spur gear 1256c is always concealed in the movable body 1201, so it is difficult for the player to visually recognize It is.

  A connecting portion 1215 d fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 is disposed rollable (or slidable) in the relief hole force application hole portion 1256 c 1. In the state where the movable body 1201 is positioned at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d contacts the upper or lower wall surface of the force acting hole of the relief hole force acting hole portion 1256c1 (note that the connecting portion 1215d is the relief hole acting force portion It does not touch the left and right walls of 1256c1). Therefore, by rotating the holed spur gear 1256c counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the upper wall surface of the force acting hole of the relief hole force applying hole 1256c1 (the movable body 1201 is positioned at the initial position) in the connecting portion 1215d. In a wall surface above the connecting portion 1215d, a force due to a counterclockwise rotation as viewed from behind acts in a tangential direction of a movement locus of the contact surface of the connecting portion 1215d and the relief hole force application hole 1256c1. The connecting portion 1215 d is fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209 which is the same as the connecting portions 1215 a to 1215 c. For this reason, when the said force acts on the connection part 1215d, connection part 1215a-1215d will move.

  In the state where the movable body 1201 is positioned at the initial position, the relief hole force application hole 1256c1 is positioned substantially horizontally left as viewed from the rear of the rotation shaft of the spur gear 1256c3 of the apertured spur gear 1256c. For this reason, when the spur gear 1256c3 rotates about 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the rear when the movable body 1201 is at the initial position, the connecting portion 1215d can move downward. . When the spur gear 1256c3 rotates about 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the rear when the movable body 1201 is at the initial position, the force acting hole of the relief hole force acting hole 1256c1 causes the connecting portion The 1215 d can move to the right as viewed later. That is, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the target position, the connecting portion 1215d can be moved in the substantially lower right direction as viewed from the rear by the holed spur gear 1256c.

  In addition, the relief hole force application hole 1256c2 is a connecting portion in which the force due to the rotation of the holed spur gear 1256c is disposed in the relief hole force application hole 1256c2 when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to the position just before the target position. The above-mentioned "he-shaped" long hole is formed so as not to be transmitted to 1215e. The connecting portion 1215 e is fixed to a guide rod spur gear 1211 b fixed to the rear wall surface of the base portion 1254. For this reason, when the movable body 1201 moves from the initial position to a position just before the target position, the connecting portion 1215e moves with the movement of the connecting portions 1215a to 1215d.

  FIG. 267 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1201 has moved to the target position. The lower end position is set as the target position of the movable body 1201 within the movable range of the movable body 1201. Further, FIG. 267 (b) shows a state immediately before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 is performed.

  Next, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 will be described using FIG. 267 (b '). In the state where the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, the connecting portion 1215 c is stopped by hitting the lower end wall surface of the guide hole portion 1254 b of the base portion 1254. Similarly, the connecting portion 1215 a (not shown) is stopped at the lower end (not shown) of the guide hole 1254 a of the base portion 1254. Therefore, the movable body 1201 can not move even if the rotation shaft of the motor 1260 rotates counterclockwise as viewed later.

  In addition, when the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, the “く” shape of the relief force application hole 1256c1 is provided so that the force due to the counterclockwise rotation seen from the rear of the holed spur gear 1256c is not transmitted to the connecting portion 1215d. The upper half long hole (relief hole) portion of the shape of is provided. For this reason, from the state where the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, the guide rod spur gear 1211b can further rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. In addition, when the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, the “H” shape of the relief hole force application hole 1256 c 2 is transmitted so that the force by the counterclockwise rotation seen from the rear of the holed spur gear 1256 c is transmitted to the connecting portion 1215 e. A wall surface at one end of the shape (a wall surface in contact with the connecting portion 1215e) is provided. For this reason, when the movable body 1201 is positioned at the target position, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, a rotational force acts on the connecting portion 1215 e as viewed counterclockwise. It will be done. Further, the connecting portion 1215 e is fixed to a guide rod flat spur gear 1211 b rotatable on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. Therefore, by rotating the motor 1260 counterclockwise from the state where the movable body 1201 is located at the target position, the flat gear 1211b with a guide rod rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. Become. Further, when the spur gear 1211b with a guide rod rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the spur gear 1211a rotates clockwise as viewed from the rear, and the spur gear with a stopper function portion 1211c as viewed from the rear, counterclockwise. It will rotate. In addition, a shaft 1211 d (see FIG. 265) is fixed to the rotation shaft of the spur gear with a stopper function portion 1211 c (see FIG. 265), and the movable decorative portion 1203 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front by rotation of the shaft 1211 d.

  FIG. 267 (c) shows a state after the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed after the movable body 1201 reaches the target position. The movable decorative portion 1203 is rotated approximately 180 degrees clockwise as viewed from the front from the state of FIG. 267 (b).

  In FIG. 267 (c '), when the motor 1260 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle when viewed from the rear in FIG. 267 (b'), the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is approximately 180 ° when viewed from the rear. It shows a state of rotating counterclockwise. Further, the connecting portion 1215d fixed to the movable body rear cover portion 1209 hits the end wall surface of the long hole portion of the upper half portion of the "square" shape of the relief force application hole 1256c1 of the apertured spur gear 1256c. It has stopped. For this reason, the holed spur gear 1256c can not rotate counterclockwise as viewed from this state. For this reason, even if the motor 1260 continues to be driven to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, since the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c can not rotate, the movable decorative portion 1203 maintains its posture after the rotation operation is performed. Be done.

  Further, the rotational speed of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c of the power transmission mechanism 1211 of the present embodiment is increased relative to the rotational speed of the spur gear 1256a fixed to the rotational shaft of the motor 1260. Further, the torque of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211 decreases in inverse proportion to the acceleration of the rotational speed. For this reason, the decoration part 1203 is fixed to the shaft 1211 d so as to be rotatable with a relatively small torque. On the other hand, since the rotational speed of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is increased, the movable decorative portion 1203 is movable even with a slight rotation of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211 and a shaking (backlash) due to meshing between gears. May rotate or shake, making it difficult to maintain the posture. For this reason, a posture holding portion 1213 for holding the posture of the movable decorative portion 1203 is provided. The posture holding unit 1213 is used to maintain the posture before execution of the rotation operation before the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 is performed, and after the rotation operation of the decoration unit 1203 is performed, the posture holding unit 1213 is It is used to maintain the post-execution posture.

  Next, the posture holding portion 1213 shown in FIGS. 265 and 267 will be described using FIG. FIG. 268 shows a state in which the posture holding portion 1213 is installed on the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. In addition, in the state before the rotation operation of the decorative portion 1203 is performed, the state in which the posture before the rotation operation is performed is held.

  The first holding portion 1213a and the second holding portion 1213b are formed in line symmetry with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211a and the rotation axis of the spur gear 1211c2, and have a substantially arc shape. In addition, the fulcrum 1213a1 of one end of the substantially arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a is a fulcrum of rotation in the plane parallel to the rear wall surface of the rear movable body cover 1209. It is rotatably screwed to the back wall. Similarly, the movable body rear cover is set so that the fulcrum 1213b1 at one end of the substantially arc shape of the second holding portion 1213b is the fulcrum of rotation in a plane parallel to the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1209. It is rotatably screwed to the rear wall surface of the part 1209. Further, one positioning wall (not shown) is provided at the bottom right of the spring locking portion 1213a2 and one at the top left of the spring locking portion 1213b2. In addition, a force acts on the spring locking portion 1213a2 at the other end of the first holding portion 1213a in the contraction direction of the helical spring 1213c. Similarly, a spring engagement portion 1213b2 at the other end of the second holding portion 1213b exerts a force in the contraction direction of the helical spring 1213c. Therefore, the other end of the first holding portion 1213a and the other end of the second holding portion 1213b are pressed against the respective positioning walls by a predetermined elastic force of the helical spring 1213c. 1213a and the 2nd holding | maintenance part 1213b are kept stationary, without rotating.

  Further, inside the substantially arc shape of the first holding portion 1213a, there is provided a holding portion 1213a3 for preventing the stopper function portion 1211c1 of the flat gear with stopper function portion 1211c from moving easily. The holding portion 1213a3 has a substantially semicircular arc-shaped depression fitted to the substantially semi-cylindrical outer surface of the stopper function portion 1211c1. In addition, before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is positioned at the holding portion 1213a3. For this reason, rotation of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is suppressed by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c. Therefore, the posture before the execution of the rotation operation is maintained before the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed.

  Similarly, after execution of the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203, the stopper function portion 1211c1 is positioned at the inner holding portion 1213b3 of the substantially arc shape of the second holding portion 1213b. For this reason, the movement of the stopper function portion 1211c1 is restricted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1213c, and the rotation of the spur gear with stopper function portion 1211c is suppressed. For this reason, after the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 is performed, the posture after the rotation operation is maintained.

  Further, although the upper right side character 1200 according to the present embodiment uses the lower end position of the movement range of the upper right side movable body 1201 as the target position, the present invention is not limited thereto. The target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be arbitrarily set by arbitrarily setting the rotation angle of the rotation shaft of the motor 1260, or the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201. The presence or absence of execution may be determined. For example, the target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set corresponding to the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, or it is made correspond to the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, etc. The target position of the upper right side movable body 1201 may be set. In addition, the presence or absence of the execution of the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 may be determined according to the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, or the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, etc. Then, the presence or absence of the execution of the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 may be determined. Further, the operation of the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side character 1200 may be controlled to be symmetrical with the operation of the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side character 1300, or the upper left Control may be performed so as not to be symmetrical with the movement of the upper left side movable body 1301 of the side character 1300.

  Further, according to the upper right side character 1200 according to the present embodiment, the movement operation of the movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 of the movable body 1201 can be continuously performed by one drive source. is there. Further, according to the upper right side character 1200 according to the present embodiment, the rotation of the movable decorative portion 1203 may be accelerated by the gear used for the rotation operation of the movable decorative portion 1203. Therefore, since the rotational speed of the rotating operation of the movable decorative portion 1203 can be increased relative to the moving operation speed of the movable body 1201, the player is given unexpectedness by performing these operations in series. There is a possibility. In addition, the upper right side character 1200 in the present embodiment has a posture holding portion that holds the posture of the movable decorative portion 1203. For this reason, even in the case of a movable body that is accelerated by the gear ratio, there are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation control of the movable body while holding the posture of the movable body with certainty.

  Further, the movable body 1201 in the present embodiment can operate from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a plane parallel to the game board 200, but is not limited thereto. For example, by setting the installation direction of the upper right side movable body support portion 1250 of the upper right side character 1200 to the various directions, the movable body 1201 can execute movement operations in various directions. . In addition, the installation direction of the upper right side movable body support portion 1250 can be arbitrarily changed by using the upper right side movable body support portion 1250 with another driving means (for example, a motor, a gear, etc.).

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1401 of the lower right side character article 1400 of this embodiment will be described using FIGS. 269 and 270. FIG.

  FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (c) are schematic views of the right side surface of the lower right side character 1400 in which the movable body 1401 represents the state of movement from the initial position to the target position in stages. FIG. 269 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. FIG. 269 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1401 has moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. FIG. 269 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1403 has moved upward from the position of FIG. 269 (b) and reached the target position. In addition, the movable body 1401 of the present embodiment includes a movable body (movable body front portion) 1403, a movable body (movable body rear portion) 1405, and a movable body (movable body middle portion) 1425. In addition, the movable body 1401 moves in the vertical direction by driving a motor 1462 shown in FIG.

  In the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 269 (a), the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 is located near the lower end of the guiding portion 1452a of the guiding portion 1452. In addition, the movable body 1403 is in a posture in which the arc having a substantially arc shape is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 269 (b) is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452a of the guiding portion 1452. Further, since the guiding portion 1452a is not inclined in the front-rear direction, the rack with guide rod 1407e does not move in the front-rear direction in the section of the guiding portion 1452a. For this reason, the pinion 1407d fixed to the shaft 1407b (see FIG. 266) serving as the rotation axis for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 does not rotate. For this reason, the movable body 1403 is maintained in a posture in which the arc having a substantially arc shape is convex downward.

  The movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 269 (c) is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture change mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452b of the guiding portion 1452. Further, since the guide portion 1452 b is inclined forward and upward at a predetermined angle, the rack with guide rod 1407 e moves in the forward direction in the section of the guide portion 1452 b. For this reason, the pinion 1407 d rotates in a clockwise direction at a predetermined angle as viewed from the right in proportion to the amount of forward movement of the guide rod attached rack 1407 e. Therefore, the movable body 1403 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle as viewed from the right, with the shaft 1407 b (see FIG. 266) as a rotation axis. That is, in the state in which the movable body 1403 is guided in the section of the guiding portion 1452b, the moving operation in the vertical direction and the rotational operation in which the posture gradually changes are simultaneously executed. Further, since the guiding portion 1452a and the guiding portion 1452b are connected, the operation of the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding portion 1452a and the movable body 1403 in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding portion 1452b The operation of will be performed continuously. In addition, the rotational speed and the rotational angle of the movable body 1403 can be changed by changing the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452 b. For example, the smaller the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b, the slower the rotational speed of the movable body 1403 and the smaller the rotational angle. Conversely, the larger the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b, the faster the rotational speed of the movable body 1403. , Rotation angle will be larger. For this reason, when the guiding portion 1452a is provided relatively long to increase the inclination angle of the guiding portion 1452b, the posture of the movable body 1403 rapidly changes immediately before the target position. The rotational speed and the rotational angle of the movable body 1403 can also be changed by changing the number of teeth of the pinion 1407 d. For example, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is increased, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is reduced and the rotation angle is also reduced. In addition, when the number of teeth of the pinion 1407d is reduced, the rotation speed of the movable body 1403 is increased, and the rotation angle is also increased.

  Also, the movement of the movable body 1401 from the target position (FIG. 269 (c)) to the initial position (FIG. 269 (a)) is in the opposite direction to the upward movement of the movable body 1401 (in this embodiment, Is executed by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 shown in FIG. The setting of the initial position of the movable body 1401 is performed using a photo sensor 1472 shown in FIG. Further, the initial position of the movable body 1401 according to the present embodiment is set as the initial position near the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move, and as the target position near the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move. . For example, the vicinity of the upper end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move may be set as the initial position, and the vicinity of the lower end of the area where the movable body 1401 can move may be set as the target position.

  Further, the guiding portion 1452 used in the present embodiment has a guiding portion 1452a having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction and a guiding portion having a linearly extending groove inclined at a predetermined angle in the upper front direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the guiding portion 1452 is constituted only by the guiding portion 1452 b having a groove extending linearly at an angle to the front upper direction at a predetermined angle, the movable body 1403 moves in the vertical direction and the posture. An action to change is performed. Further, the guiding unit 1452 may be configured to include another guiding unit in addition to the guiding unit 1452a and the guiding unit 1452b, and may be further configured to add a plurality of guiding units.

  FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (d) are perspective views of the lower right side character 1400 seen from the front upper right to the rear lower left, showing the state of movement of the movable body 1401 from the initial position to the target position in stages. .

  FIG. 270 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is located at the initial position. In this case, the posture (posture) of the movable body 1403 is a state in which the front decorative portion 1403a constituting one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is facing forward, and the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is formed. The decorative portion 1403 b is in a state of facing rearward. For this reason, the front decoration portion 1403a is in a visible state, and the rear decoration portion 1403b, which is the other outer surface of the movable body 1403, is in a state in which it is difficult to view. Further, since at least a part of the movable body 1403 shields at least a part of the front of the movable body 1405, it is difficult to visually recognize the entire movable body 1405 from the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 239 and 246 are located in front of the movable body 1401. For this reason, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, when the movable body 1403 is in the initial position, the movable body 1403 does not interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 (for example, the portion of the front stage 244) and the transparent game board 810. It is maintained. Further, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the movable body 1401 can be visually recognized through the transparent game board in the present embodiment, but the movable body 1401 may be in a state in which visual recognition is difficult.

  FIG. 270 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is entirely moved in parallel upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is performed by the rotation of the belt 1458a that is hung on the pulley and spur gear 1458c and the pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 270 (b) is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452a of the guiding portion 1452. In this case, since the movable body 1403 is in a state before the posture changes, the posture in which the movable body 1403 is positioned at the initial position is maintained. Further, in the present embodiment, in the section provided with the guiding portion 1452a, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIG. 239 and FIG. 246 are located in front of the movable body 1401. For this reason, when the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, the movable body 1403 interferes with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810. Therefore, in a state where the movable body 1403 is guided to the guiding portion 1452a, the movable body 1403 is maintained in a posture not to interfere with at least a part of the rail decoration member 800 or the transparent game board 810.

  FIG. 270 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1401 is entirely moved in parallel upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 270 (b). The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is performed by the rotation of the belt 1458a that is hung on the pulley and spur gear 1458c and the pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 270 (c) is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is positioned at the middle of the upper end and the lower end of the guiding portion 1452b of the guiding portion 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the right, with the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a which constitutes one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state of facing upward, and the rear decoration part 1403b which constitutes the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state of facing downward It is. In addition, the change in the posture of the movable body 1403 gradually increases the visible area of the movable body 1405. In addition, at least a part of the movable body 1403 shields at least a part of the front of the movable body 1425 due to a change in the posture of the movable body 1403, and at least a part of the movable body 1425 is difficult to view. Further, in this embodiment, in the section provided with the guiding portion 1452b, the rail decoration member 800 and the transparent game board 810 shown in FIGS. 239 and 246 are not located in front of the movable body 1401. Therefore, even if the posture of the movable body 1403 changes, at least a part of the movable body 1403 and the rail decoration member 800 or the transparent game board 810 does not interfere with each other.

  FIG. 270 (d) shows a state where the movable body 1401 has moved upward by a predetermined distance from the position of the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 270 (c) and has reached the target position. The upward movement of the movable body 1401 is performed by the rotation of the belt 1458a that is hung on the pulley and spur gear 1458c and the pulley 1458d. Further, the movable body 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 270 (d) is in a state where the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 is located near the upper end of the guiding portion 1452b of the guiding portion 1452. In this case, the movable body 1403 rotates about 180 ° clockwise as viewed from the right, with the shaft 1407a and the shaft 1407b of the posture change mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. For this reason, the front decoration part 1403a which constitutes one outer surface of the movable body 1403 is in a state facing rearward, and the rear decoration part 1403b which constitutes the other outer surface of the movable body 1403 faces in front It is. Therefore, a portion where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body 1403 before the change in posture of the movable body 1403 due to the change in the posture of the movable body 1403 is visible after the change in posture of the movable body 1403. In addition, when the movable body 1403 changes in posture, at least a part of the movable body 1403 does not shield the front of the movable body 1405 or the movable body 1425.

  FIG. 270 (d) shows a state in which an operation of opening a part of the movable body 1425 and an operation of rotating the movable body 1425 are being performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 is started from the state where the movable body 1401 has reached the target position, but is not limited thereto. For example, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started from the state where the movable body 1401 is positioned at the initial position, or in the state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guide portion 1452a The operation may be started, or the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started at the start of the action of the change in posture of the movable body 1403. In addition, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be started in the middle of the operation of the posture change of the movable body 1403 (the state where the movable body 1403 is guided by the guide portion 1452b). Also, the above-described operation of the movable body 1425 may be executed irrespective of the movement operation of the movable body 1401, but the invention is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 271 shows a state in which the movable body 1401 of the lower right side character article 1400 is viewed from the rear lower left to the rear upper right. However, the power transmission mechanism cover portion 1421 is omitted to facilitate the description.

  The movable body middle portion 1425 is located between the movable body front portion 1403 and the movable body rear portion 1405 at position coordinates in the front-rear direction. Further, a motor 1411 serving as a driving source for performing the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is attached to the motor cover portion 1409 with a guide portion. In addition, when the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the spur gear 1419a attached to the rear wall surface of the LED substrate cover portion 1417 is also aligned with the rotation shaft of the motor 1411 Rotate around. Further, due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419a, the spur gear 1419b rotates clockwise as viewed from the rear. In addition, due to the rotation of the spur gear 1419b, the spur gear 1419c is decelerated to a predetermined rotational speed, rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, and the above-described operation of the middle movable body 1425 is executed. Become. As described above, the movable body middle portion 1425 of this embodiment is different from the power source (motor 1462) used for the movement operation of the movable body 1401 and the movement operation of the movable body front portion 1403 changing posture. 1411) is used, but it is not limited thereto. For example, a structure may be adopted in which the spur gear 1419a is rotated by vertical movement of the movable body 1401 by providing a stationary dental plaque fixed at a predetermined position. In this case, the above-described operation of the movable body middle portion 1425 is executed by the power source (motor 1462) used for the movement operation of the movable body 1401 and the operation of changing the posture of the movable body front portion 1403.

  Next, using FIGS. 272 (a) to 272 (f), a guiding portion 1452 for changing the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side character 1400 of this embodiment (see FIGS. 265, 269, etc.). A modified example of will be described.

  FIGS. 272 (a) to 272 (f) are schematic views of the shape of the guiding portion 1452 as viewed from the right side. Further, the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIGS. 272 (a) to 272 (f) has a groove similar to the groove shown in FIG.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (a) is a guiding portion having a groove extending rectilinearly in the vertical up-down direction in the guiding portion a1 having a groove extending rectilinearly at a predetermined angle in the upper front direction. a2 is connected. Therefore, when the roller 1407f of the posture changing mechanism 1407 shown in FIG. 266 moves the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272A upward, the movable body 1403 changes its posture simultaneously with the start of movement from the initial position. Motion is started, and a further upward movement is performed in the posture in which the posture change has ended.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (b) is a guiding portion b2 having a groove extending rectilinearly at a predetermined angle forward and upward to the guiding portion b1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. In addition, a guiding portion b3 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction is connected to the guiding portion b2. Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion b1 upward, the movable body 1403 is moved upward with the posture at the initial position. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves the guiding portion b2 upward, the movable body 1403 simultaneously performs the operation of changing the posture and the upward movement. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion b3 upward, the movable body 1403 is moved upward with the posture change completion.

  In the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (c), a guiding portion c2 having a substantially arc-shaped groove which is sharply curved in the upper front direction is connected to a guiding portion c1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. . For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves the guiding portion c2 upward, the moving distance in the upper direction of the movable body 1403 is relatively small. Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves the guiding portion c1 and the guiding portion c2, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes rapidly immediately before reaching the target position.

  The guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (d) has a guiding portion d1 having a groove extending linearly at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 °) with reference to the vertical direction in the front upper direction. A guide portion d2 having a groove extending linearly at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °) with respect to the vertically upward and downward direction in the upper front direction above the predetermined angle of d1 is connected. Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion d1 upward, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes relatively slowly and moves upward. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion d2 upward, the posture of the movable body 1403 changes relatively quickly and moves upward.

  In the guide portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e), a guide portion e1 having a groove extending in a straight line at a predetermined angle in the front upper direction is linearly inclined at a predetermined angle in the rear upper direction. A guiding part e2 having an extended groove is connected. For this reason, when the roller 1407f moves the guide portion e1 upward, the movable body 1403 simultaneously performs the operation of changing the posture and the upward movement. In addition, when the roller 1407f moves the guiding portion e2 upward, the movable body 1403 moves upward simultaneously with the execution of the posture change operation in which the posture after the posture change returns to the initial position. It will be done. Further, the guiding portion e1 may be further connected to the upper portion of the guiding portion e2 of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e).

  A guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (f) has a guiding portion f2 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction and a guiding portion f3 having a groove extending rectilinearly at a predetermined angle in the upper front direction. Are connected in parallel to a guiding portion f1 having a groove extending linearly in the vertical vertical direction. The guiding portion f3 is located in front of the guiding portion f2. Further, a wall f4 is provided that is rotatable around a point where the front wall surface of the guiding portion f2 and the rear wall surface of the guiding portion f3 collide with each other. For this reason, by rotating the wall f4 clockwise as viewed from the right and holding it at a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as the front wall of the guiding portion f2, and counterclockwise as viewed from the right By rotating and holding at a predetermined position, the wall f4 functions as the rear wall of the guiding portion f3. Therefore, when the wall f4 functions as the front wall surface of the guiding portion f2, the roller 1407f moves from the guiding portion f1 to the guiding portion f2 (hereinafter, referred to as path 1). On the other hand, when the wall f4 functions as the rear wall of the guiding portion f3, the roller 1407f moves from the guiding portion f1 to the guiding portion f3 (hereinafter referred to as path 2). Therefore, when the roller 1407f moves on the path 1, the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 is not executed, and when the roller 1407f moves on the path 2, the operation of changing the posture of the movable body 1403 is performed It will be. Therefore, by controlling the rotation of the wall f4, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the change in posture of the movable body 1403.

  Further, the lower right side character 1400 of the present embodiment includes each of the induction portions (induction portions a1 to f3) of the induction portion 1452 shown in FIGS. Can be combined in any way, including For example, the lower part of the guiding part 1452b shown in FIG. 265 can be connected to the upper part of the guiding part 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e). In addition, the lower portion of the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e) can be connected to the upper portion of the guiding portion 1452a shown in FIG. In these cases, the movable body 1403 is guided by the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e), whereby the movable body 140 changes from the posture at the initial position and returns to the posture at the initial position.

  Moreover, although the movable body 1401 in the present embodiment can operate in the vertical direction, it is not limited to this. For example, by setting the installation direction of the lower right side movable body support portion 1450 of the lower right side character article 1400 in various directions, for example, the movable body 1401 can perform movement operations in various directions. .

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment F described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 272.

(B1)
A game console (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with a movable body (for example, a movable body 1403) capable of at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations includes an operation (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) in which the movable body operates in a first posture (for example, a posture at the initial position of the movable body 1403) (See, for example, FIGS. 270 (a) and (b)),
At least one of the plurality of operations includes at least an operation in which the movable body changes from the first position to a second position (for example, the position of the movable body 1403 at a target position) (hereinafter referred to as Called “second operation” (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (c) and (d)),
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the movable body (for example, an operation related to coupling of the guiding portion 1452a and the guiding portion 1452b) (see, for example, FIG. 269).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the posture of the movable body may change in the middle of the operation of the movable body. Further, in some cases, the posture of the movable body can be changed during the execution of a series of movements of the movable body, and a game console characterized by the movement of the movable body can be provided.

(B2)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (B1),
And a plurality of induction units (for example, induction units 1452a and 1452b) capable of at least guiding the movement of the movable body,
The movable body executes the first operation in a state where it is guided by at least one of the plurality of induction parts (hereinafter referred to as "first induction part (for example, induction part 1452a)"). Possible movable bodies (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (a) and (b)),
The movable body executes the second operation in a state where it is guided by at least one of the plurality of induction parts (hereinafter, referred to as "second induction part (for example, induction part 1452b)") Possible movable bodies (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (c) and (d)),
The movable body is a movable body that can change from the first position to the second position in relation to being guided by the second guiding unit (for example, as shown in FIG. d) see), and a game console characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to change the posture of the movable body in relation to the operation of the guiding portion and the movable body.

(B3)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (B2),
The first guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a first direction (for example, the vertical direction) (see, for example, FIG. 269).
The second guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a second direction (for example, a rotation direction around the vertical and horizontal directions) (see, for example, FIG. 269).
The movable body is a movable body which is at least guided in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding portion (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (a) and (b)). ,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least guided in the second direction while changing from the first position to the second position by the second guiding unit (for example, FIG. 270 (c)). ~ (D)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since there is a relation between the movement in the guiding direction by the guiding part and the posture of the movable body, the movement of the movable body may be able to have a width.

(B4)
The game console according to (B2) or (B3) above,
A peripheral member (for example, a transparent game board 810) located around the movable body (for example, see FIG. 239, FIG. 246);
The first guiding unit moves the movable body from a first position (for example, a coordinate position in the vertical direction near the lower end of the guiding unit 1452a) to a second position (for example, the vertical direction near the upper end of the guiding unit 1452a) (A) (See, for example, FIGS. 270 (a) and (b))
It is difficult for the movable body to take the second posture in at least a partial section between the first position and the second position (hereinafter, referred to as “first section”) ( For example, see FIGS. 270 (a) and (b)),
The first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body takes the second position (see, for example, FIGS. 239 and 246).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to realize various movements of the movable body while utilizing the empty space.

(B5)
It is a game stand according to the above (B4),
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visible to the player at the first position (for example, visible through the transparent game board 810) (see, for example, FIGS. 239 and 246).
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visible to the player at the second position (see, for example, FIGS. 239 and 246).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the operation in the first position may be able to be surely shown to the player.

(B6)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
One driving means (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 266) capable of at least performing the first operation and the second operation is provided.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where various operations of the movable body can be realized by one drive means.

(B7)
A game console comprising a movable body including a plurality of movable parts, wherein
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part (for example, the movable body front part 1403),
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part (for example, movable part middle part 1425),
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least performing a first operation,
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least performing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable unit (for example, an operation related to coupling of the guiding portion 1452a and the guiding portion 1452b) (see, for example, FIG. 269). ),
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion operates in a first posture (for example, a posture at an initial position) (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (a) and (b)). ),
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion changes from the first position to the second position (for example, the position at the target position) (for example, FIG. 270 (c ), (D)),
The second movable portion performs a third operation (for example, an operation of opening a part of the movable portion 1425 (operation of moving the outer decorative portion 1425a (the decorative portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 in a radial shape)) and rotation (external movement At least a movable portion that can perform at least the rotation operation of the decoration portion 1425a (the decoration operation of the decoration portions 1425a1 to 1425a6 and the rotation operation of the inner decoration portion 1425b and the middle decoration portion 1425c) (see, eg, FIG. 270 (d))
The third operation is an operation that can be at least initiated during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be at least initiated during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the second movable part can be operated at any time while the first movable part makes various movements, and the movement of the whole movable body may be various.

(B8)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (B7),
The first movable portion is operable by a first drive source (for example, a motor 1462 shown in FIG. 266),
The second movable portion is operable by a second drive source (for example, a motor 1411 shown in FIG. 266).
A game stand characterized by

(B9)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B8) above,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(B10)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B9) above,
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

(B11)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B10) above,
The second posture is a posture formed by rotating at least a part of the movable body from the first posture (see, for example, FIGS. 270 (c) and (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(B12)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B11) above,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation of returning the movable body to the first position after changing from the first position to the first position (for example, in the guiding portion 1452 shown in FIG. 272 (e)). Operation when the lower portion of the induction portion 1452b shown in FIG. 265 is connected to the upper portion)
A game stand characterized by

(B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B12) above,
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation of returning the movable body to the first position after changing from the first position to the first position (for example, as shown in the upper portion of the guiding portion 1452a shown in FIG. 265). Operation when the lower part of the induction part 1452 shown in 272 (e) is connected),
A game stand characterized by

(B14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B13) above,
The second operation may be performed after the first operation (eg, see FIG. 269),
A game stand characterized by

(B15)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B14) above,
The first operation may be performed after the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 272 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  The first posture and the second posture of the movable body may not necessarily be one posture. For example, the first position may include a third position. In addition, the posture of the movable body in the section of the first guiding portion and the posture of the movable body in the section of the second guiding portion are different, and the posture of the movable body in the section between the first posture and the third posture etc. The posture other than the second posture may be taken.

  Also, the movable body may take a first position in at least a part of the second guiding part, or may take a second position in at least a part of the first guiding part .

  Further, although the movable body is configured to change the posture while moving in the present embodiment, the movable body may be configured to change from the first posture to the second posture at once at a predetermined point.

  In addition, the movable body may be configured to change from the first posture to return to the first posture (a configuration in which the posture rotates 360 degrees to return to the original posture).

  The movable body may be configured not to interfere with the peripheral member in a section between the first position and the second position. There are cases where it is possible to give a surprise to the player by suddenly changing to the second position while showing a simple movement operation in the section of the first guiding section.

  In addition, as long as the relationship between the guiding portion and the posture of the movable body is maintained, a plurality of driving means for operating the movable body may be used.

  Also, the movable body may not return to the original posture when returning from the guiding portion. For example, different from the initial position when the first guiding part and the second guiding part are in line with a symmetrical structure and further the second guiding part and the first guiding part are in the same position as the initial position. It may be configured to move to a position (move from the lower part of the liquid crystal to the upper part of the liquid crystal, and return to the lower part of the liquid crystal from the upper part of the liquid crystal when another operating condition is satisfied).

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix b1)
A game console provided with a movable body capable of at least a plurality of operations,
At least one of the plurality of operations is an operation including at least an operation in which the movable body operates in a first posture (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation”).
At least one of the plurality of actions is an action (hereinafter, referred to as “second action”) at least including an action in which the movable body changes from the first position to the second position.
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the movable body,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
A plurality of induction units capable of at least guiding the movement of the movable body;
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation in a state of being guided by at least one of the plurality of induction portions (hereinafter referred to as "first induction portion"),
The movable body is a movable body capable of executing the second operation in a state of being guided by at least one of the plurality of induction portions (hereinafter referred to as "second induction portion"),
The movable body is a movable body capable of changing from the first position to the second position in relation to being induced by the second guiding unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b3)
It is a game console described in Appendix b2,
The first guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a first direction,
The second guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body in a second direction,
The movable body is a movable body which is guided in the first direction while maintaining the first posture by the first guiding portion,
The movable body is a movable body which is guided in the second direction while changing from the first posture to the second posture by the second guiding unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b4)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note b2 or b3,
A peripheral member positioned around the movable body,
The first guiding portion is a guiding portion capable of guiding the movable body from a first position to a second position,
It is difficult for the movable body to take the second posture in at least a partial section between the first position and the second position (hereinafter referred to as "first section"),
The first section is a section that interferes with the peripheral member when the movable body takes the second position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b5)
It is a game console described in Appendix b4,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visible to the player at the first position,
The movable body is a movable body that is at least visible to the player at the second position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
One drive means capable of at least performing the first operation and the second operation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b7)
A game console comprising a movable body including a plurality of movable parts, wherein
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a first movable part,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts is a second movable part,
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least performing a first operation,
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least performing a second operation,
The first operation and the second operation are a series of operations of the first movable portion,
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion operates in a first position,
The second operation is an operation including at least an operation in which the first movable portion changes from the first position to the second position,
The second movable portion is a movable portion capable of at least performing a third operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be at least initiated during execution of the first operation,
The third operation is an operation that can be at least initiated during execution of the second operation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Subsequently, the central lower part 1600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 and 274.

  The central lower character 1600 is used for special game variation game production, common game variation game production, or a big hit game production or demonstration production. For example, reach production, special figure 1 small hit production, special figure 2 small hit production, popular figure winning production, look ahead notice production, 2R big hit gaming production, 15R special big hit gaming production, and operation of chance button 136 and setting operation part It is used for various other effects such as effects related to the operation of 137. Further, the movable lower part of the central lower part product 1600 according to the present embodiment (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “central lower movable part” or “movable part”) 1601 can be operated in the vertical direction, and the central lower part can be moved. A part of the body 1601 can also be rotated in a plane parallel to the board of the gaming board 200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotational operation”). In addition, the central lower movable body 1601 may operate in conjunction with the operation of another movable body, or may operate independently independently of the operation of the other movable body.

  FIG. 273 is an example of the movable body 1601 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the central lower part 1600 including the movable body 1601. FIG. 273 shows a state in which the central lower character 1600 is viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left.

  The central lower part product 1600 mainly has a central lower movable body 1601 and a movable body support portion 1650 for moving the central lower movable body 1601. The central lower movable body 1601 mainly has a front portion 1601 a and a rear portion 1601 b related to the vertical movement of the movable body 1601. The front portion 1601a has a decorative portion 1601a1 and a circular display portion 1601a2.

  First, the decorative portion 1601a1 of the front portion 1601a of the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. The movable front side decorative portion 1603 a is a decorative portion on the front side of the central lower movable body 1601. In addition, an opening is formed in the movable-body front-side decorative portion 1603a so that the circular film 1605 can be visually recognized from the player. Further, the movable front side decorative portion 1603a is screwed and fixed to the front wall surface of the movable rear cover portion 1603b at the rear portion 1601b. In addition, the movable upper side decoration portion 1603 d is a decoration portion on the upper side of the central lower movable body 1601. The movable upper side decoration portion 1603 d is screwed and fixed to the upper rear wall surface of the movable rear cover portion 1603 b.

  Next, the circular display portion 1601a2 will be described. The circular film 1605 is used as a film-like circular display unit that performs a rotation operation. A circular film 1605 is affixed to the front surface of the circular object 1607. The circular object 1607 is a transparent resin disk, and has a fixing hole for fixing one end of the shaft 1615 d at the center of the circle. Therefore, the circular object 1607 and the shaft 1615 d are fixed, and the circular object 1607 is rotated by the rotation of the shaft 1615 d. Further, in the present embodiment, the circular object 1607 is controlled to rotate after reaching the target position described later, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the circular lower member 1607 may be controlled to rotate from a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at an initial position described later, or the central lower movable body 1601 may be controlled between an initial position and a target position. The circular object 1607 may be controlled to rotate from the position position. Alternatively, control may be performed to stop the rotation of the circular object 1607 after the central lower movable body 1601 reaches the target position.

  A circular object cover 1609 is used to accommodate the circular object 1607 to which the circular film 1605 is attached. In addition, the circular object cover portion 1609 is screwed and fixed to the rear wall surface of the movable front side decorative portion 1603a. Further, a through hole through which the shaft 1615 d passes in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the circular object cover 1609. The movable front side decorative portion 1603a, the circular film 1605, the circular object 1607, and the circular object cover portion 1609 have high light transmittance in order to transmit light of an LED (not shown) mounted on the LED substrate 1611. It is comprised by the member.

  The LED substrate 1611 is screwed and fixed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609, the rear wall surface of the movable front side decorative portion 1603a, and the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609. On the mounting surface of the LED substrate 1611, an LED (not shown) and a drive circuit (not shown) for lighting the LED are mounted. Further, the LED substrate 1611 has a through hole for passing the shaft 1615 d and an opening for securing a space for housing the motor 1613 in the front portion 1601 a.

  The motor 1613 is a drive source for executing the rotation operation of the circular object 1607. The motor 1613 is screwed and fixed to the lower front wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609 such that the rotation shaft of the motor (the side on which the spur gear 1615a is attached) faces the rear. The circular object cover portion 1609 has a through hole through which the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 passes. In addition, the motor 1613 is connected to a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240, and is controlled by the second auxiliary control unit 500. In the present embodiment, although a stepping motor is used as the motor 1613, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The power transmission mechanism 1615 is a mechanism used to rotate the circular object 1607 by the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613. The power transmission mechanism 1615 mainly has spur gear 1615a, spur gear 1615b, spur gear disc 1615c, and shaft 1615d. doing. The spur gear 1615 a is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1613. Further, the spur gear 1615 b is installed adjacent to the spur gear 1615 a so that the teeth of the spur gear 1615 a and the teeth of the spur gear 1615 b mesh with each other. Further, the spur gear 1615b is installed adjacent to the spur gear disc 1615c so that the teeth of the spur gear 1615b and the teeth of the spur gear 1615c1 (not shown) of the spur gear disc 1615c mesh with each other. A shaft 1615 d is fixed to a central portion of the spur-gear disc 1615 c. Further, in the spur gear-equipped disc 1615c, a disc 1615c2 in which a notch portion 1615c3 is formed in a part of the outer periphery and a spur gear 1615c1 (not shown) are integrated.

  In this embodiment, the position of the rotation axis of motor 1613 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to gaming board 200) and the position of the rotation axis of circular object 1607 (position coordinates on a plane parallel to gaming board 200) are made different. For this purpose, a power transmission mechanism 1615 is used. Thereby, the installation space of the motor 1613 can be provided arbitrarily. Further, in consideration of the center of gravity of the central lower movable body 1601, it is also possible to provide an installation space for the motor 1613 arbitrarily. Further, by changing the ratio of the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a to the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1, the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 can be converted to a predetermined rotational speed to rotate the circular object 1607. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615a and the number of teeth of the spur gear 1615c1 are the same. Therefore, the rotational speed of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotational speed of the circular object 1607 are approximately the same. Further, since there is a spur gear 1615b between the spur gear 1615a and the spur gear-equipped disc 1615c, the rotational direction of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 and the rotational direction of the circular object 1607 are the same. The power transmission mechanism 1615 is also used to transmit the torque of the rotation shaft of the motor 1613 to the circular object 1607.

  The photosensor 1617 is used to detect the initial position of the circular object 1607. The photosensor 1617 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photo sensor 1617 is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light receiving unit receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. In addition, the photo sensor 1617 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion facing in the front-rear direction, and has a U-shape (a shape in which the lower side is open) when viewed from the right side. Further, the photo sensor 1617 is screwed to the rear wall surface of the circular object cover portion 1609 so that the outer peripheral portion of the spur gear 1615 c 1 of the spur gear-equipped disc 1615 c is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the cutaway portion 1615c3 of the disk 1615c2 of the spur geared disk 1615c is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the photosensor 1617, the light emitted from the light emitting portion is the disk with the spur gear The light is not blocked by the disk 1615c2 of 1615c. Therefore, the position is set as an initial position of the circular film 1605.

  Next, the rear portion 1601 b of the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. The movable body rear cover portion 1603 b is a member related to the vertical movement of the central lower movable body 1601. The movable body rear side cover portion 1603 b moves in the vertical direction, whereby the front portion 1601 a screwed to the movable body rear side cover portion 1603 b moves in the vertical direction. Further, the inner rail 1660a of the guide rail 1660 of the movable body support portion 1650 is screwed and fixed in the vertical direction to the central portion of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b.

  The lower movable body 1603 c is a member related to the vertical movement of the central lower movable body 1601. The movable body lower portion 1603c has a substantially rectangular guide hole 1603c1 (not shown). The guide hole portion 1603c1 penetrates in the left-right direction, and the through hole is formed to be elongated in the front-rear direction. The length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a slight margin (clearance) to the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion 1658a of the connecting portion 1658. The length of the long side is a length obtained by adding a slight margin to the linear length from the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connection portion 1658 through the center of the connection portion 1658 . Further, the front and rear ends of the guide hole portion 1603c1 have a semicircular arc shape in accordance with the circumferential portion of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658. The front end portion of the guide hole portion 1603 c 1 may function as a restricting portion (or restricting portion) which restricts (or restrains) the central lower movable body 1601 to the initial position, and the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 May function as a mechanical end (details will be described later). The lower movable body portion 1603c is a front wall surface of the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b so that the horizontal position coordinate of the guide hole portion 1603c1 and the horizontal position coordinate of the central portion of the central lower movable body 1601 are the same. It is fixed by screwing to the lower part. Moreover, although the relatively high rigidity member (for example, resin-made, metal-made, and ceramic-made members) is used as a wall of the control part of a present Example, it is not restricted to this. For example, a cushioning member (eg, soft resin, rubber, cotton, cloth, polystyrene foam, foam cushioning material) that may soften the contact with the mechanical end may also function as the restriction portion.

  In the lower movable body portion 1603c, a spring engaging portion 1603c2 for engaging one end of the lower side of the helical spring 1664 is formed at the upper end of the rear end portion of the guide hole portion 1603c1. Further, in the present embodiment, only one spring locking portion is formed in the movable body lower portion 1603c, but a plurality of spring locking portions may be formed. In the lower movable body portion 1603 c, a plate-like light shielding portion 1603 c 3 used to detect the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is formed.

  Next, a movable body support unit 1650 for moving the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. The motor 1652 is a drive source for moving the central lower movable body 1601 in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, a stepping motor is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various motors such as a DC brush motor, a DC brushless motor, an AC motor, an ultrasonic motor, and a servo motor can be used, but are not limited thereto.

  The motor 1652 is screwed to the motor mounting portion 1654 such that the side to which the crank 1656 of the rotation shaft of the motor is fixed is turned to the right. In addition, the motor attachment portion 1654 is fixed to the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 by screwing. The base portion 1662 is screwed to the unit body 822 of the accessory unit 820. That is, the motor 1652 is fixed to the unit body 822 of the accessory unit 820. Further, the motor 1652 is connected to a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 240 and controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  The crank 1656 is used as a link mechanism that connects the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the lower movable body 1603 c. One end of the crank 1656 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 and the other end of the crank 1656 is fixed to the connecting portion 1658 so that the connecting portion 1658 can roll. Further, although the crank 1656 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 in this embodiment, the crank 1656 is fixed to a rotation shaft (shaft) different from the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 using a plurality of spur gears or the like. It may be As a result, there are cases where the crank 1656 can be rotated by converting the rotation speed or torque of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 into a predetermined rotation speed or torque.

  The connection portion 1658 is used to connect the other end of the crank 1656 to the lower movable body portion 1603 c via the guide hole portion 1603 c 1. The connection portion 1658 is integrally formed with a substantially cylindrical roller portion 1658a and a substantially annular disc outer roller portion 1658b. The roller outer portion 1658b is formed at one end of the roller portion 1658a. Further, the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller outer portion 1658b is longer than the diameter of the outer circumferential circle of the roller portion 1658a, and is further longer than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1. Further, the diameter of the outer peripheral circle of the roller portion 1658a is shorter than the length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1. Therefore, by attaching the connecting portion 1658 to the crank 1656 such that the roller outer portion 1658b is located on the right outside of the guide hole portion 1603c1 and the roller portion 1658a is located in the guide hole portion 1603c1, the connecting portion 1658 is a guide hole portion. It is designed not to be easily removed from the 1603c1. The connecting portion 1658 can be rolled (or moved) in the region of the guide hole portion 1603c1 by rotation of the crank 1656 (the details will be described later).

  The guide rail 1660 is used to guide the direction of movement of the central lower movable body 1601. The guide rail 1660 has an inner rail 1660a, a middle rail 1660b, and an outer rail 1660c. The inner rail 1660a is fixed by screwing in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can be moved in the vertical direction at the center of the rear wall surface of the movable body rear cover portion 1603b. Further, the outer rail 1660c is fixed by screwing in the vertical direction so that the movable body 1601 can move in the vertical direction at the upper center of the front wall surface of the base portion 1662. The middle rail 1660 b is provided inside the outer rail 1660 c so as to be movable along the rails of the outer rail 1660 c. An inner rail 1660a is provided inside the middle rail 1660b so as to be movable along the rails of the middle rail 1660b. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are disposed on the rail contacting surfaces of the inner rail 1660a and the middle rail 1660b so that friction between the rails can be reduced and the rails can slide smoothly. A plurality of steel balls (not shown) are also arranged on the rail contact surfaces of the middle rail 1660b and the outer rail 1660c so that friction between the rails can be reduced and the rails can slide smoothly. With the configuration of the guide rail 1660, the movable body rear cover portion 1603b can operate in the installation direction of the outer rail 1630c fixed to the base portion 1662, that is, in the vertical direction. Further, at the lower end portion of the outer rail 1660c, a rail stop portion 1660c1 for stopping the middle rail 1660b and the inner rail 1660a is provided. In addition, the outer rail 1660c may be provided in a direction other than the vertical direction. For example, it may be from the rear lower direction to the front upper direction, and may be from the front lower direction to the rear upper direction. In addition, the outer rail 1660c combines a vertical rail, a rear bottom downward rail, a front upper rail, a front bottom downward rail, a rear top rail, a front upward rail, a rear top curved rail, etc. It may be a configuration. In this case, the movable body 1601 can move not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

  The base portion 1662 is used as a support portion for moving the movable body 1601 in the vertical direction. The base portion 1662 has a substantially plate shape, and a spring locking portion 1662a for locking the upper end of the helical spring 1664 is provided at the upper portion of the rear wall surface. One end (upper side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking portion 1662a, and the other end (lower side) of the helical spring 1664 is connected to the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c. Further, the installation direction of the helical spring 1664 and the installation direction of the guide rail 1630 are the same direction (vertical direction), and the horizontal position coordinates of the installation position of the helical spring 1664 and the horizontal direction of the installation position of the guide rail 1660 The spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 and the spring locking portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c are formed so that the position coordinates are the same. By this structure, the movable direction of the central lower movable body 1601 and the expansion and contraction direction of the helical spring 1664 become the same. Further, since the position coordinates of the installation position of the helical spring 1664 in the left-right direction and the position coordinate of the installation position of the guide rail 1660 in the left-right direction are the same, a moment of force in the left-right direction is generated in the central lower movable body 1601 In some cases, the central lower movable body 1601 can be moved efficiently. Further, although only one spring locking portion is formed in the base portion 1662 in this embodiment, a plurality of spring locking portions may be formed.

  In the present embodiment, a tension spring is used for the helical spring 1664. When the movable body 1601 is positioned at the lower end (initial position), the helical spring 1664 elastically deforms and expands, and when the movable body 1601 is positioned at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 expands. It is not restricted to this from being shrunk to be in a state where it is not elastically deformed (details will be described later). For example, even when the movable body 1601 is positioned at the upper end (target position), the helical spring 1664 may be elastically deformed and expanded, or the helical spring 1664 may be elastically deformed and contracted. It may be Further, in the present embodiment, only one helical spring is provided, but a plurality of helical springs may be provided. Also, a leaf spring may be used instead of the helical spring 1664 or a flexible member such as rubber may be used. Also, instead of the helical spring 1664, a linear reciprocating solenoid or other linear actuator may be used.

  The photosensor 1666 is used to detect that the movable body 1601 is located near the initial position (details of the initial position of the movable body 1601 will be described later). The photosensor 1666 is included in various movable body sensors 430 shown in FIG. 240, and is connected to the sensor circuit 428 shown in FIG. The photosensor 1666 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light receiving unit receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. In addition, the photo sensor 1666 has a U-shape (shape in which the left side is open) when the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion face in the front-rear direction and viewed from above. Further, the photo sensor 1666 is screwed and fixed to the lower portion of the front wall surface of the base portion 1662 so that the light shielding portion 1603 c 3 of the movable body lower portion 1603 c is located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion.

  The flexible substrate 1668 is used to electrically connect the LED substrate 1611 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530. One end of the flexible substrate 1668 is connected to the LED substrate 1611, and the other end of the flexible substrate 1668 is connected to the game board lamp drive circuit 530 through the base portion 1662.

  Next, the operation of the central lower movable body 1601 of the central lower character 1600 will be described using FIG. FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (d) are right side views of the central lower part 1600 in which the central lower movable body 1601 represents the movement from the initial position to the target position in stages. FIG. 274 (a) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. FIG. 274 (b) shows a state immediately after the central lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position. FIG. 274 (c) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved upward from the position of FIG. 274 (b). FIG. 274 (d) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved further upward from the position of FIG. 274 (c) and reached the target position. In addition, in the description of FIG. 274, the center of the connection portion 1658 is in the direction directly below the rotation axis of the motor 1652 (positional coordinates of the center of the connection portion 1658 in the front-rear direction and position coordinates of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 in the front-rear direction Defines the rotation angle of the crank 1656 as 0 °. Also, the direction in which the crank 1656 rotates in the order of upward, backward, and downward is represented as clockwise (or clockwise), and the opposite direction is represented as counterclockwise (or counterclockwise). Also, the clockwise rotation angle of the crank 1656 is represented by a negative number, and the counterclockwise rotation angle is represented by a positive number. For example, a rotation angle in which the crank 1656 rotates 10 ° clockwise from 0 ° is represented as −10 °, and an angle rotated counterclockwise from 0 °, for example, 10 ° is represented as + 10 °.

  First, matters common to the operation of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (d) will be described. A part of the torque of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is transmitted to the central lower movable body 1601 by the crank 1656 and the connecting portion 1658 through the guide hole portion 1603c1 of the movable lower portion 1603c. That is, a force is applied to the connecting portion 1658 by driving (rotation) of the motor 1652, and a driving (rotation) force of the motor 1652 is applied to the central lower movable body 1601 by the connecting portion 1658. Further, the connecting point of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 and the crank 1656 is the point of force, and the contact point of the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole 1603c1 is the action point of the force. When the connecting portion 1658 is not located at the front and rear ends of the guide hole portion 1603c1, the contact portion between the connecting portion 1658 and the guide hole portion 1603c1 is the upper or lower portion of the connecting portion 1658. Force does not work. When the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise from 0 ° to + 180 °, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the front and rear end portions of the guide hole portion 1603c1 (details will be described later). For this reason, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 rotates counterclockwise between 0 ° and + 180 °, a vertically upward force by the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652 acts on the movable body 1601, and conversely When the crank 1656 rotates clockwise from + 180 ° to 0 °, a vertically downward force acts on the movable body 1601 by the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652. Further, the vertically upward force acting on the lower central movable body 1601 by the drive of the motor 1652 is proportional to the vertically upward component of the tangent in the locus of movement of the contact portion (upper portion) of the connecting portion 1658 serving as the force application point. . That is, assuming that the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, the vertically upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 by the drive of the motor 1652 is proportional to sin (x °). For example, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the tangent line in the locus of movement of the contact portion (upper part) is parallel to the front and back direction, so the vertically upward component is 0 (= sin (0 °)) is there. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, a vertically upward force by the drive of the motor 1652 does not act on the central lower movable body 1601. In addition, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, the vertically upward component of the tangent of the movement locus of the contact portion (upper part) serving as the point of application of the force of the connecting portion 1658 is +1 (= sin (+90) of the maximum value. °)). Therefore, assuming that the torque of the motor 1652 is constant, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 90 °, a vertically upward force by the drive of the motor 1652 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 at maximum.

  The motor 1652 is fixed to the unit body 822 of the accessory unit 820. Therefore, the center of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 functions as a fixed and non-moving fulcrum. On the other hand, connection portion 1658 is displaced in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction with the center of the rotation shaft of motor 1652 as a fulcrum by the rotation of crank 1656 fixed to the rotation shaft of motor 1652. The central lower movable body 1601 is movable in the vertical direction in which the guide rail 1660 is installed, and the central lower movable body 1601 is connected to the connecting portion 1658 via the guide hole portion 1603c1. From this, the central lower movable body 1601 is displaced in the up and down direction by the displacement of the connecting portion 1658 in the up and down direction.

  The spring locking portion 1662a of the base portion 1662 functions as a fulcrum (one in which the tip of the spring does not move) of the helical spring 1664, and the spring latching portion 1603c2 of the movable body lower portion 1603c is an action point Function as the movement of the tip of the spring). Since the spring locking portion 1603c2 is displaced by the vertical displacement of the connecting portion 1658, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the helical spring 1664 is in a state of being maximally expanded. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, the helical spring 1664 is configured to be a natural length. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is 0 °, the vertically upward force of the helical spring 1664 acts on the central lower movable body 1601 at the maximum, and when the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is + 180 °, The vertically upward force by the helical spring 1664 does not act on the central lower movable body 1601.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. 274 (a) will be described. FIG. 274 (a) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position. When the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the connecting portion 1658 is a half of a front end portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “regulating portion” or “restraining portion”) 1603c4 of the guide hole portion 1603c1. It has stopped by hitting a circular arc-shaped wall surface. Further, the crank 1656 in this case is adjusting the mounting positions of the motor 1652 and the lower movable body 1603 c so that the crank 1656 rotates and stops at a predetermined angle clockwise from 0 °.

  In the state where the central lower movable body 1601 is located at the initial position, the motor 1652 is not driven. Therefore, the force of the motor 1652 is not applied to the connecting portion 1658. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is in a state of being elastically deformed and expanded, a vertically upward force is applied to the movable body 1601 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664. In addition, when the moment of force is ignored, a force (f1) obtained by subtracting the weight of the central lower movable body 1601 from the vertically upward force by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 acts on the connecting portion 1658. In this embodiment, when the central lower movable body 1601 is in the initial position, the spring coefficient and central lower portion of the helical spring 1664 are larger than the weight of the central lower movable body 1601. Although the initial position of the movable body 1601 is set, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, since the connecting portion 1658 is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 via the crank 1656, the locus of movement of the connecting portion 1658 draws an arc having the center of the rotation axis of the motor 1652 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the upward force f1 can be resolved into a tangential force (f2) of the movement trajectory of the connecting portion 1658 and a force (f3) in the central direction of a circular arc of the movement trajectory of the connecting portion 1658. Assuming that the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is x °, f2 is represented by f2 = f1 × sin (x °).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is a negative angle, the connecting portion 1658 applies the force of f2 to the restricting portion 1603c4. On the other hand, the lower movable body portion 1603c including the restricting portion 1603c4 is fixed to the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b, and the movable body rear side cover portion 1603b is mounted on the base portion 1662 via the guide rail 1660. With this configuration, the restricting portion 1603c4 can not move in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the connecting portion 1658 is pressed against the restricting portion 1603 c 4 by the force of f 2, and the connecting portion 1658 is maintained in the stopped state by hitting the restricting portion 160 3 c 4. When the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is a negative angle, the direction of the force of f2 is opposite to the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 when the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 rotates counterclockwise. . As described above, even when the motor 1652 is not driven, the central lower movable body 1601 can be effectively suppressed to the initial position by the helical spring 1664 in some cases. In addition, it may be possible to maintain the state in which the connecting portion 1658 is in contact with the restricting portion 1603c4 and stopped by excitation of the motor 1652. In addition, even when the motor 1652 is not excited, the central lower movable body 1601 can be effectively suppressed to the initial position by the helical spring 1664 in some cases. For this reason, the rotation angle of the crank 1656 at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be 0 ° or may be a positive angle.

  In addition, a method of setting the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 will be described. In the present embodiment, the state in which the connecting portion 1658 is in contact with the restricting portion 1603 c 4 and is stopped is set as the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. The setting of the initial position is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 clockwise until the connecting portion 1658 stops at the restricting portion 1603c4. In this case, the light shielding portion 1603c3 of the lower movable body portion 1603c and the photo sensor 1666 (see FIG. 273) detect that the central lower movable body 1601 is positioned near the initial position, and then the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is The initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is set by rotating it clockwise by a predetermined angle. The length of the short side of the guide hole portion 1603c1 is a length obtained by adding a slight allowance (clearance) to the diameter of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658, and is located at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. In the state, the rail stopping portion 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a stops by hitting the rail stopping portion 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c. In this case, the central lower movable body 1601 is not located below the initial position. Further, the rail stopping portion 1660c1 may be provided so that the inner rail 1660a does not hit the rail stopping portion 1660c1 of the outer rail 1660c in a state where the central lower movable body 1601 is positioned at the initial position. In this case, the central lower movable body 1601 may be positioned below the initial position.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. 274 (b) will be described. It shows a state immediately after the central lower movable body 1601 starts moving from the initial position. The angle of rotation of the crank 1656 is approximately 0 ° but represents a slightly positive angle. Therefore, the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 and the direction of the force acting on the connecting portion 1658 by the drive (rotation) of the motor 1652 coincide with each other.

Further, since the rotation angle of the crank 1656 is almost 0 °, the upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 by the drive of the motor 1652 is small. On the other hand, since the helical spring 1664 is elastically deformed and extended, the upward force acting on the central lower movable body 1601 by the helical spring 1664 is increased. For this reason, the upward movement of the central lower movable body 1601 is promoted by the elastic force of the helical spring 1664, and the movement operation may be smoothly performed at the initial movement of the central lower movable body 1601. Further, even when the torque by the drive of the motor 1652 is small, the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 may allow the movable body 1601 to move upward. Next, the central lower movable body shown in FIG. 274 (c) The state of 1601 will be described. FIG. 274 (c) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 274 (b) and the crank 1656 has rotated approximately +90 degrees. The length of the long side of the guide hole 1603c1 has a slight margin in the length of the straight line from the center of the rotation shaft of the motor 1652 through the center of the connecting portion 1658 to the circumferential end of the roller portion of the connecting portion 1658 Because of the added length, the connecting portion 1658 does not contact the rear end portion 1603c5 of the guide hole portion 1603c1. Thus, the crank 1656 can rotate at least 180 °. Further, the elastic force of the helical spring 1664 is reduced by the amount by which the spring engaging portion 1603c2 of the lower movable body portion 1603c has moved upward. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 is rotated by about + 90 °, the upward force by the drive of the motor 1652 acts largely on the central lower movable body 1601.

  Next, the state of the central lower movable body 1601 shown in FIG. 274 (d) will be described. FIG. 274 (d) shows a state where the central lower movable body 1601 has moved upward and reached the target position from the state of FIG. 274 (c). The connecting portion 1658 is stopped by hitting the restricting portion 1603 c 4 of the lower movable body 1603 c. The angle of the crank 1656 in this case is an angle obtained by adding + 180 ° to the crank angle at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601. Further, since the restricting portion 1603c4 functions as a mechanical end of the connecting portion 1658, even when the motor 1652 continues to be driven, the connecting portion 1658 hits the restricting portion 1603c4 and stops. On the other hand, since the crank 1656 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the motor, the force of the central lower movable body 1601 in the backward direction of the connecting portion 1658 due to the gravity hardly acts. Therefore, there are cases where the central lower movable body 1601 can be held at the target position by excitation of the motor 1652. Also, when the center lower movable body 1601 can be held at the target position by the friction of the rotating shaft of the motor 1652 or the elastic force by the helical spring 1664 even if the motor 1652 is de-energized and the motor 1652 is not excited There is.

  When the central lower movable body 1601 moves from the target position (FIG. 274 (d)) to the initial position (FIG. 274 (a)), the rotation axis of the motor 1652 is rotated clockwise. The method of setting the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 is as described above.

  The central lower movable body 1601 is movable upward when the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are at initial positions. This is because the operating ranges of the central lower movable body 1601 and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 do not overlap, but are for preparation when the motors 1070, 1152, and 1652 are out of step. The second sub-control unit 500, based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, shown in FIG. 258, with the upper photo sensor 1084 in the on state and the upper front movable body 1002 located at the initial position, After confirming that the photo sensor 1176 is on and the upper rear movable body 1102 is in the initial position, the motor 1652 is driven to move the central lower driving body 1601 upward. When the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are positioned at the lowermost position, or the middle lower movable body 1601 moves from the initial position upward while moving to the lowermost position. Good (see FIG. 277 (h)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, control for continuing to drive the motor 1652 is executed to move the central lower movable body 1601 from the initial position to the target position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the central lower movable body 1601 is driven at the start of movement from the initial position and the crank 1656 rotates from 0 ° to a predetermined angle counterclockwise, the supply of power to the motor 1652 is stopped, and the spring of the helical spring 1664 Control may be performed to move the central lower movable body 1601 to a target position only by force. Further, when it is detected by a photosensor or the like that the central lower movable body 1601 has reached the vicinity of the target position, supply of power to the motor 1652 is started, and the central lower movable body 1601 is Control to stop at the target position may be executed, or control to not start supply of power to the motor 1652 may be executed even if the central lower movable body 1601 reaches near the target position.

  Further, in this embodiment, the position of the central lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated + 180 ° counterclockwise from the state where the crank 1656 is located at the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 Although it is considered as a target position of 1601, it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the central lower movable body 1601 in a state where the crank 1656 is rotated by + 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set as the target position. The target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set arbitrarily by arbitrarily setting the rotation angle of the crank 1656. For example, the target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set corresponding to the reliability of the big hit in the reach production, or it is made correspond to the player's advantage in various big hit games, small hit games, etc. The target position of the central lower movable body 1601 may be set.

  Further, the movable body 1601 in the present embodiment can execute the movement operation in the vertical direction, but is not limited thereto. For example, the movable body 1601 can execute movement operations in various directions by installing the installation direction of the movable body support portion 1650 of the central lower character 1600 in various directions.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment F described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 274 again.

(C1)
A movable body (for example, movable body 1601),
A first member related to the movement of the movable body (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 273);
Game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) equipped with
The movable body is a movable body which is at least movable from a first position to a second position (for example, a target position (see FIG. 274 (d))) (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (a) to (d)). ),
The first position is an initial position of the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 274 (a)).
The first member can at least restrict the movement of the movable body located at the first position (for example, a connecting portion 1658 at an end of a crank 1656 attached to a rotation shaft of the motor 1652 is a motor) A member that can be positioned obliquely forward and downward with respect to the rotation axis and can not move against the restricting portion 1603c4 of the guide hole 1603c1) (see, for example, FIG. 274A);
The first member is a member of the movable member when the movable member starts moving from the first position (for example, when the crank 1656 rotates backward by 0 ° or more with respect to the vertically downward direction). A member capable of promoting the movement (for example, promoting the upward movement of the movable body 1601) (see, for example, FIGS. 273 and 274);
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above game stand, the first member regulates the movement of the movable body when the movable body is at the initial position, and promotes the movement of the movable body after the movable body starts moving, so the movable body is There are cases where you can jump out vigorously. In addition, the first member maintains the initial position of the movable body in a state where the movable body is positioned at the initial position, and assists the operation of the movable body after the movable body starts to operate, so the operation of the movable body May be done smoothly.

(C2)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (C1),
Drive means (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 273) capable of driving the movable body;
And a second member (for example, a crank 1656 or a connecting portion 1658 shown in FIG. 273) for linking the driving means and the movable body.
In the movable body, when the movable body is positioned at the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the second member is moved in a first direction (for example, right) by the driving unit. A movable body that can start moving when a force is applied in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the side (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (a) to (d));
In the first state, the movable body does not start moving when the second member receives a force in a second direction (e.g., a clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the right). (See, for example, FIG. 274 (a)),
The first member is a member that acts so that a force is applied to the second member in the second direction in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 274 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the operation of the movable body can be effectively suppressed while the driving means is not driven.

(C3)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (C2),
The movable body is a movable body provided with a regulating portion (for example, a regulating portion 1603c4 of a guide hole 1603c1 shown in FIG. 274) for regulating the movement of the second member,
The restricting portion restricts the movement of the second member in the second direction in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 274 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

(C4)
It is the gaming machine described in the above (C3),
When the movable body is located at the first position, the force of the first member is applied to the second member in the second direction, and the second member acts on the restricting portion. The contact restricts the movement of the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 274 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, even if a force is applied to the second member in the second direction, the operation of the movable body may be surely restricted by the configuration of the restriction part.

(C5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (C2) to (C4) above,
The driving means is a motor (for example, a motor 1652 shown in FIG. 273),
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotation direction (for example, a counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from the right),
The second direction is the other rotation direction (for example, the clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the right) (see, for example, FIG. 274).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the movement of the second member is restricted by the excitation of the motor while the movement is restricted by the restricting part when the force is applied in the second direction by the first member. Therefore, there are cases where the movable body can be reliably kept at the initial position.

(C6)
The game console according to any one of the above (C2) to (C5), wherein
The movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The movable body is a movable body (e.g., a scotch yoke mechanism) whose height changes when the connecting portion (e.g., the connecting portion 1658 shown in FIG. 273) of the second member with the movable body is displaced in the vertical direction. The movable body 1601) whose height is displaced by (see, for example, FIG. 274),
The first member is an elastic member (for example, a helical spring 1664 shown in FIG. 273),
The movable body is a movable body in which the movement in the vertical direction may be promoted by the elastic force of the first member (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(C7)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C6) above,
The first member is at least elastically deformed when the movable body is positioned at the first position (for example, a state in which a helical spring 1664 is extended and deformed from a natural length). (See, for example, FIG. 274 (a)),
The movable body is a movable body in which the movement may be promoted by a force by which the first member elastically deformed is returned (see, for example, FIGS. 274 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(C8)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
The direction in which the first member returns from the elastically deformed state is the same as the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position (see, for example, FIG. 274).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the force of the first member may be able to be utilized to the maximum in the movement direction of the movable body. In addition, depending on the elastic force of the first member, the first member may contribute to the movement of the movable body more than the driving means.

(C9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (C1) to (C8),
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(C10)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (C1) to (C8),
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  In the present embodiment, the movement direction of the movable body is the vertical direction, and the first direction and the second direction are different in the rotation direction, but may be the same direction. For example, a plurality of second members are configured to convert the rotational motion of the motor into linear motion (for example, mesh the first gear formed on the circumference with the linear gear formed on the long side of a rectangle or the like) And the operation direction of the drive means may be matched with the operation direction of the movable body.

  Further, as the drive means, one other than the motor can be adopted. For example, it may be a linear reciprocating solenoid or the like.

  The movable body may be configured to move downward at the first position (initial position) at the top, or to move forward at the rear at the first position (initial position). It is also possible that the first position (initial position) is the front and moves backward, and the first position (initial) is the right and moves left. Alternatively, the first position (initial position) may be at the left, and may be moved to the right.

  In addition, the first member may be other than the elastic member. For example, a linear reciprocating solenoid or linear actuator may be used.

  Further, the first position (initial position) of the movable body may not always be a fixed position.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix c1)
Movable body,
A first member associated with the movement of the movable body;
A game console equipped with
The movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from a first position to a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the movable body,
The first member is a member capable of at least restricting the movement of the movable body located at the first position,
The first member is a member capable of promoting the movement of the movable body when the movable body starts to move from the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,
Drive means capable of driving the movable body;
And a second member connecting the driving means and the movable body.
The movable member applies a force in a first direction by the driving means in a state where the movable body is positioned at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). Is a movable body that can start moving,
The movable body is a movable body that does not start to move when the second member is subjected to a force in a second direction in the first state.
The first member is a member that acts so that a force is applied to the second member in the second direction in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c3)
The game console described in Appendix c2,
The movable body is a movable body provided with a restricting portion that restricts the movement of the second member,
The restricting portion restricts movement of the second member in the second direction in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c4)
It is a game console as described in appendix c2 or c3,
The drive means is a motor,
The second member is a member to which a force is applied by rotation of the motor,
The first direction is one rotation direction,
The second direction is the other direction of rotation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c5)
The game console according to any one of appendices c2 to c4, wherein
The movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The movable body is a movable body whose height changes when the interlocking portion with the movable body in the second member is displaced in the vertical direction,
The first member is an elastic member,
The movable body is a movable body in which the movement in the vertical direction may be promoted by the elastic force of the first member.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
The first member is at least elastically deformed when the movable body is positioned at the first position,
The movable body is a movable body in which movement may be promoted by a force by which the elastically deformable first member returns.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Next, production example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 275 to 277. FIG. FIGS. 275 (a) to 277 (l) sequentially show the effect example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 in this order. First, among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 275 to 280, the configurations commonly used will be described with reference to FIG. 275 (a). In FIG. 275 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, the special view 2 reserve lamp 220, and the logo feature 900. Logo movable body 902, upper front movable body 1002 of upper front decoration character 1000, upper right side movable body 1201 of upper right side character 1200, upper left side movable body 1301 of upper left side character 1300, lower right side The lower right side movable body 1401 of the character article 1400, the lower left side movable body 1501 of the lower left side character 1500, and the central lower movable body 1601 of the central lower character 1600 are schematically shown.

  The special figure 1 display 212, the special figure 2 display 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown on the lower right of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, and the special figure 2 display 214 is a special figure 1 is shown to the right of the display 212. The special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is shown above the special view 1 display 212 and the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown above the special view 2 display 214. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. Further, since the retention of the special view 1 and the special view 2 in the present embodiment can be stored up to a maximum of four, four LEDs of the special view retention lamp 218 and the special view 2 retention lamp 220 are provided.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 275 (a), the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, the upper right side movable body 1201, the upper left side movable body 1301, the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501 , And the central lower movable body 1601 are located at the initial position. When the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 are located at the initial position, they are hidden by the center decoration member 806 and the game board decoration member 808, and these movable bodies It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the whole of. In FIG. 275 to FIG. 277, the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 which are difficult for the player to visually recognize when originally located at the initial position for the sake of description. Is illustrated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c are assigned to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 for performing variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined effect is performed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower left corner, as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is a fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 and the right side is a fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation, when the result of the variation game of the special figure 1 immediately before is out, the image representing "x" as the special figure 1 fourth pattern is the fourth figure for special figure 1 It is displayed in the display area t1. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation, if the result of the fluctuation game of the special figure 1 immediately before is hit, the image representing "A" as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is for the special figure 1 The four symbol display area t1 is displayed. While the special figure 2 variation game is not in operation, if the result of the variation game of the special figure 2 immediately before is a loss, the image representing "x" as the special figure 2 fourth pattern is the fourth figure for special figure 2 It is displayed in the display area t2. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is non-operation, when the result of the fluctuation game of the special figure 2 just before is hitting, the picture which displays “A” as special figure 2 fourth symbol is for special figure 2 The four symbol display areas t2 are displayed. Moreover, during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the image showing "-" is displayed on the fourth symbol display area t1 as the fourth symbol, and during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, "-" as the fourth symbol Is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2.

  A horizontally-long special view 1 reserved icon display area A is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 reserve icons a1, a2, etc. according to the number of reserve in the special figure 1 are displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In this example, a white circular reserved icon is displayed as the least reliable display mode (see special figure 1 reserved icon a1 in FIG. 275 (a)), and a display mode with a relatively high reliability is the character's length. A hold icon representing a face is displayed (see the special view 1 hold icon a3 in FIG. 275 (c)). In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area A. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from right to left in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower.

  In addition, a special figure 2 reserve icon display area may be provided in which a number of special figure 2 reserve icons corresponding to the reserve number of the special figure 2 are displayed. In that case, for example, a vertically long special-character 2 holding icon display area is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 reserve icon display area is not provided when there is no reserve of the special figure 2, and is provided only when the reserve of the special figure 2 is accumulated, but may be always provided. In addition, the special figure 2 reserve icon display area may be disposed to the right of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, or may be disposed above the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A. In addition, since the game ball can be easily entered into the special view 2 start-up port 232 during the positive transformation support, the player can easily visually recognize the special view 2 hold icon displayed in the special view 2 hold icon display area. Alternatively, the display position of the special view 1 suspension icon display area A and the display position of the special view 2 suspension icon display area may be interchanged.

  Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white in the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed (see FIG. 275 (b)). The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214. Moreover, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 275 (b)).

  FIG. 275 (a) shows a state in which the floating game of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is inoperative. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the special view 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special view I" is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x" is displayed as the fourth symbol. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game immediately before was disapproval There is.

  Special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 reports that there are two holdings of special drawing 1. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, it is notified that the special figure 2 is not held. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area A of the decorative symbol display device 208, two special figure 1 pending icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  The logo movable body 902 emits light in white. The logo movable body 902 emits white light at normal times without any notice.

  FIG. 275 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. The start order of the special figure 1 variation game is, in this example, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variation display, and further the fourth symbol display area for special figure 1 The fourth symbol of t1 starts the variable display, and then the special animation 1 icon reduction icon reduction icon is executed, and then the decorative symbol variable display is started. Note that the order of the start points of these operations may be reversed.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 275 (b), the main control unit 300 uses a yes / no determination table (not shown) in the special figure 1 related lottery process (see step S231, FIG. 243). Judgment is made and it is determined that the result of the special figure fluctuation game is lost. Then, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), "special figure I" is selected. Then, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 variation display time determination table (not shown), a variation time is determined. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits the symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 243).

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 receives a symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 244), and performs the special figure 1 change game Decide not to carry out the preview effect of.

  In the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon, the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 with the first place in the retention order is erased, and the remaining special figure 1 reserve icon a2 moves to the right. In addition, the special figure 1 pending icon a1 with the first pending order may be displayed as a change icon. The fluctuation icon is displayed as a notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game being executed.

  FIG. 275 (c) shows a state in which the number of reservations of the special figure 1 has increased to two, with only one gaming ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and it is displayed that the number of holdings of the special view 1 has increased from 1 to 2. Further, the main control unit 300 pre-reads start information related to the suspension of the special figure 1 that has been increased, and determines beforehand the stop symbol etc. of the special figure 1 fluctuation game prior to the determination of success or failure in the special figure related lottery process. A figure prefetch process (step S224, see FIG. 243) is executed, and a prefetch result information command including the result of the prior determination is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in a command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 243). In this example, the result of the prior determination is the big hit of "special figure A".

  The first sub control unit 400 receives the prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 244), and suspends the increased special view 1 The display mode of the special icon 1 holding icon to be shown is determined to be the mode representing the face of the character's head. As a result, in the special view 1 suspension icon display area A, a special view 1 suspension icon a3 representing the face of the number-length character of the character is newly displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 gives advance notice of the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 change game with the second place in the special order 1 reserve icon a3 with a relatively high reliability.

  FIG. 275 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 275 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 275 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208b. Thereby, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Thus, the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol (first symbol), the right symbol (second symbol), and the middle symbol (third symbol).

  FIG. 275 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3", which shows the exfoliation as a combination of the decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which is ended is a loss.

  FIG. 275 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 275 (h), the main control unit 300 uses the on / off determination table (not shown) in the special view 1 related lottery process (see step S231, see FIG. 243) And, it decides that the result of the special figure fluctuation game concerned is lost. Then, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), "special figure I" is selected. Then, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 variation display time determination table (not shown), a variation time is determined. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits the symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 243).

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 receives a symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 244), and holds the special drawing 1 hold order Decides to execute the advance notice announcement effect using the logo movable body 902 for the second place special figure 1 floating game. In addition, it may be determined that the pre-reading advance notice is executed in advance at the start of suspension of the special-figure 1 change game subject to pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reduction animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon is executed, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 with the first place of retention order is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 reserve icon a3 Moves to the right.

  FIG. 275 (i) shows a state in which a pre-reading advance notice using the logo movable body 902 is started during the special view 1 change game. The logo movable body 902 performs up-and-down vibration which repeatedly moves up and down minutely, and gives advance notice. FIG. 275 (i) shows the logo movable body 902 lowered from the initial position. In addition, the light emission aspect of the logo movable body 902 changes from white to blue. In this example, the logo movable body 902 emits white light normally when no advance notice or the like is performed, and changes the light emission color to blue or the like when the advance notice is performed. Also, this pre-reading advance notice may be a Gase notice (false advance notice) in which the special-pattern change game subject to pre-reading advance notice is released.

  FIG. 275 (j) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 vibrates up and down. In FIG. 275 (j), the logo movable body 902 rises from the position shown in FIG. 275 (i) and returns to the vicinity of the initial position.

  FIG. 275 (k) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 is lowered again. The vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 ends with this lowering. In addition, the logo movable body 902 continues emitting blue light even after the vibration is stopped, and executes the advance notice.

  FIG. 275 (l) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. As described above, since the photo sensor 984 shown in FIG. 254 detects the light shielding piece (not shown) of the sector gear 976 when the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the first sub control unit 400 detects the logo It can be determined that the movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position. The logo movable body 902 is lowered from the uppermost position by a predetermined number of steps to return to the initial position. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 moves to the uppermost position, the rotary decoration portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 becomes visible. As described above, even when the upper rear movable body 1102 is not in operation, the rotary decoration portion 1124 may be seen by the player.

  FIG. 276 (a) continuing from FIG. 275 (l) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 276 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 276 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208b. Thereby, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 276 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" indicating the exfoliation as a combination of the decorative designs is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which is ended is a loss.

  FIG. 276 (f) shows the state in which the next special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 276 (f), the main control unit 300 determines the success or failure using the determination table (not shown) in the special view 1 related lottery process (see step S231, FIG. 243). And, it decides that the result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes the big hit. Next, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 symbol determination table (not shown), "special figure A" is selected. Then, as a result of performing a lottery process with reference to a special figure 1 variation display time determination table (not shown), a variation time is determined. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits the symbol variation start command including the information of the lottery result to the first sub control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233, see FIG. 243).

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 receives a symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, performs a predetermined effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309, see FIG. 244), and changes the special figure during execution As a notice of the game, it is decided to execute a step-up notice, a notice using a character image of a bancho, and a super reach effect.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the decrease animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon is executed, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a3 is erased.

  FIG. 276 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 has started up and down vibration. FIG. 276 (g) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is lowered from the initial position. In addition, the logo movable body 902 changes its luminescent color from blue to red with the start of vibration. In FIG. 275 (i), the logo movable body 902 starts the first vibration, and in FIG. 276 (g), the logo movable body 902 starts the second vibration. The logo movable body 902 changes the luminescent color at each start of vibration to increase the expectation of the advance notice object. In addition, the logo movable body 902 changes the light emission color for each special figure variation game and executes continuous notice. The change of the light emission color also functions as the expectation of continuous notice becoming high. In addition, when the logo movable body 902 is lowered, a part of the upper rear movable body 1102 (for example, the rotating decoration portion 1124) may be visible to the player.

  FIG. 276 (h) shows a state in which the upper left side movable body 1301 has moved in the lower right direction from the initial position and stopped. In this example, the first step of the step-up notice is executed by moving the upper left-side movable body 1301 obliquely downward to the right from the initial position. Further, the vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and in FIG. 276 (h), the logo movable body 902 is raised and returns to the vicinity of the initial position. Further, symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in a reduced size at the lower left corner of the image display area.

  FIG. 276 (i) shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 has moved in the lower left diagonal direction from the initial position and stopped. By moving the upper right side movable body 1201 obliquely downward to the left from the initial position, the second step of the step-up notice is performed. In addition, vertical vibration of the logo movable body 902 is continuing, and the logo movable body 902 is moved downward from the initial position. In addition, "decoration 3" is displayed temporarily in a swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the enlarged animation display area 208d in the center of the display area displays an animation in which the character's master has broken the clothes and a character string of "chance", and a notice of the change is executed.

  FIG. 276 (j) shows a state in which the rotation operation of the movable body front portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 and the rotation operation of the movable body front portion 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 are performed. By the counterclockwise rotational movement of the movable body front portion 1203 and the clockwise rotational movement of the movable body front portion 1303, the third step of the step-up notice is performed.

  In addition, the vertical movement of the logo movable body 902 ends, and the logo movable body 902 is moved to the uppermost position. After moving to the uppermost position, the logo movable body 902 is driven by a predetermined number of steps and returns to the initial position. In addition, "decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in a swinging state in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect display area 208d is replaced with an animation in which the character's leader has broken the clothes and the character string of "chance" is deleted. The character string "reach" is displayed, and the start effect of the reach is executed.

  FIG. 276 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swing fluctuation state in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged at the center of the display area. At the start of the reach effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area, and it is notified that the decorative symbols are aligned in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c.

  Also, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position. Also, the movable front portion 1203 of the upper right side movable body 1201 rotates clockwise, and the movable front portion 1303 of the upper left side movable body 1301 rotates counterclockwise, and the movable front portion 1203 and the movable front portion 1303 has returned to its initial position. In addition, a part of the “decoration 3” of the symbol display areas 208 a and 208 c is hidden by a part of the upper right side movable body 1201 and a part of the upper left side movable body 1301.

  FIG. 276 (l) shows a state in which the upper right side movable body 1201 moves obliquely upward to the right and returns to the initial position, and the upper left side movable body 1301 moves obliquely upward to the left and returns to the initial position. ing. At the start of the reach effect, all of the movable bodies once return to their initial positions.

  In FIG. 277 (a) continuing from FIG. 276 (l), the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows a state of being located forward. In addition, the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 rotate from the posture at the initial position with the left and right directions as rotation axes, and the posture changes. In addition, animation of the effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the development effect to super reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 277 (b) shows a state in which the lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 move downward and return to the initial position. Further, the posture of the movable body 1403 of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the movable body 1503 of the lower left side movable body 1501 is returned to the original position. Further, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced in size at the lower left corner of the image display area, and the super reach effect is started. Further, animation of the effect is continuously displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 277 (c) shows a state in which the super reach effect has been started. The effect display area 208d is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display area, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right, Is displayed. In the super reach effect of this example, an animation of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character break is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 277 (d) shows a state in which the super reach effect is continuing. In the effect display area 208d, the character string of “punch reach” is deleted, and instead, the character string of “striking!” Is displayed, which suggests that cutting is started.

  FIG. 277 (e) shows a state in which the super reach effect is continuing. In the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed above the character string of "one blow!". The image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In addition, during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, an image (for example, a meter image, a number indicating the number of remaining seconds, or the like) representing the remaining time of the operation effective period may be displayed.

  FIG. 277 (f) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 while the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. On the right side of FIG. 277 (f), the chance button 136 and the player's hand operating it are schematically illustrated. By operating the chance button 136, an animation of cutting is started.

  FIG. 277 (g) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position. The movement operation to the top of the logo movable body 902 is an operation for causing the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 disposed behind the logo movable body 902 to appear in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. Therefore, the upward moving operation of the logo movable body 902 can also be a sign that the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward. As the logo movable body 902 moves to the top, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may move downward, and it may be expected that the effect will further develop.

  FIG. 277 (h) shows a state in which the moving operation of a movable body other than the logo movable body 902 has been executed. The lower right side movable body 1401, the lower left side movable body 1501, and the central lower movable body 1601 move upward from the initial position and stop in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The posture of the lower right side movable body 1401 and the lower left side movable body 1501 is changed. Further, the upper right side movable body 1201 is moved obliquely downward to the left from the initial position and stopped, and the movable body front portion 1203 is stopped by performing a rotation operation. Similarly, the upper left side movable body 1301 is moved obliquely downward from the initial position and stopped, and the movable body front portion 1303 performs a rotational operation and stops. Further, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move downward and stop at the lowermost position. In addition, after the upper front movable body 1002 is moved to the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is moved forward. In addition, the rotating decoration portion 1124 in rotation is enlarged and visually recognized through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002.

  In the effect display area 208d, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character are erased, and the animation of the effect is displayed on almost the entire surface.

  FIG. 277 (i) shows a state in which an effect (premium effect) for notifying of a big hit decision of the special view 1 fluctuation game is executed during the super reach effect. The operation of opening and rotating the decorative portion of the movable body 1425 of the lower right side movable body 1401 is performed, and the operation of opening and rotating the decorative portion of the movable body 1525 of the lower left side movable body 1501 is performed. In addition, the rotation operation of the circular film 1605 of the central lower movable body 1601 is performed. In addition, the rotation operation of the rotation decoration portion 1124 of the upper rear movable body 1102 is performed. Further, seven color effects (rainbow effects) are displayed on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 277 (j) shows a state in which an animation notifying of the result of cutting is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, the animation of the seven-color effect is deleted, and the image of the main character winning a sharp cut on the right and the image of an enemy character cut on the left and fallen are displayed, and "win" in the center The text is displayed. In addition, "decoration 3" is displayed below the "win" character string, and it is suggested that "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the super reach effect is ended.

  With the end of the super reach effect, each movable body returns to the initial position. After the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 is moved to the rear, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move upward and return to the initial position, and then the logo movable body 902 goes downward. Move to return to the initial position. The moving order of the other movable bodies to the initial position may be simultaneous or may be set in an arbitrary order.

  In FIG. 277 (k), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" temporarily stops in a fluctuating movement as a combination of decorative symbols. It shows the displayed state. Also, the logo movable body 902 moves downward and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 277 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure A of the 15R special big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol "A" indicating that the special image 1 variation game is a big hit is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display region t1 for special image 1, and the symbol display regions 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" indicating that it is a special big hit as a combination of the decorative designs is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended is a special big hit (probable variation big hit).

  Next, production example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In FIG. 278, and FIGS. 279 and 280 described later, the special view 1 display device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the upper right side character 1200, The illustration of the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side character 1400, the lower left side character 1500, and the central lower character 1600 is omitted.

  FIG. 278 (a) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are positioned at the initial position. In the upper front movable body 1002, when the lens movable body 1002a moves forward after moving to the lowermost position, the logo movable body 902 moves to the top in order to avoid contact between the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902. Then, the lens movable body 1002a is moved forward. However, when the lens movable body 1002a does not move forward, the lens movable body 1002a and the logo movable body 902 do not contact each other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 278 (b), the logo movable body 902 is at the initial position. The upper front movable body 1002 may move downward while being positioned at the upper position. The upper rear movable body 1102 may move together with the upper front movable body 1002 or may not move downward.

  In addition, the upper right side movable body 1201 of the upper right side character 1200, the upper left side movable body 1301 of the upper left side character 1300, the lower right side movable body 1401 of the lower right side character 1400, the lower left side character 1500 The lower left movable body 1501 and the central lower movable body 1601 of the central lower part 1600 do not come into contact with other movable bodies, and can move at any timing.

  FIG. 278 (c) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position. FIG. 278 (d) continuing from FIG. 278 (c) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 has moved to the uppermost position. FIG. 278 (e) continuing from FIG. 278 (d) shows a state in which the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. Thus, only the upper front movable body 1002 of the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be moved downward. Thereby, the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be shown to the player through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002.

  Even when the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the frontmost position, the distance between the lens 1018 and the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shorter than the focal length of the lens 1018. Therefore, various displays (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a cut-in image, a character image, a conversation image, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, a common figure decorative symbol) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 through the lens 1018 , Effect image, tutorial display to explain the effect, tutorial display to explain the operation, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification notification for preventing prepaid cards from being forgotten) In this case, the player may be made to observe the erect virtual image of the display magnified at the predetermined magnification to make the display more noticeable.

  Next, production example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 279 (a) shows a state where the logo movable body 902 is located at the uppermost position, and the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the lowermost position. The erect virtual image of the rotary decorative portion 1124 is visually recognized through the lens 1018.

  FIG. 279 (b) continuing from FIG. 279 (a) shows a state in which the lens movable body 1002a of the upper front movable body 1002 has moved to the foremost position. As the distance between the lens 1018 and the rotating decorative portion 1124 approaches the focal length of the lens 1018 due to the forward movement of the lens movable body 1002a, FIG. 279 (b) is further enlarged in comparison with FIG. 279 (a). The erect virtual image of the rotating decorative portion 1124 can be observed. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to make the rotating decoration part 1124 be shown enlarged and to make the rotating operation of the rotating decoration part 1124 noticeable.

  In FIG. 279 (c), the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 are positioned at the initial position, and the "decoration 3" in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c is temporarily stopped with a fluctuation. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed at a relatively low speed is shown. "Decoration 3" is aligned in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and reach effect (normal reach effect) is executed. In FIG. 279 (c), "decoration 2" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In FIG. 279 (d) continuing from FIG. 279 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued at a relatively slow speed in the middle symbol display region 208b, and “decoration 3” is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. Show the situation.

  In FIG. 279 (e) continuing from FIG. 279 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued at a relatively slow speed in the middle symbol display region 208b, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. Show the situation.

  In this example, the decorative symbol is not shown to the player via the lens 1018. For example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a release, the upper front movable body 1002 does not move from the initial position, and the decorative symbol may not be enlarged by the lens 1018 to be shown to the player.

  In FIG. 279 (f), the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the foremost position, and the upper rear movable The body 1102 is shown in the initial position. A portion of the upper rear movable body 1102 (the rotating decoration portion 1124) is visually recognized. In addition, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing variation state in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed at a relatively slow speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. ) Is being performed. As shown in FIG. 279 (f), an enlarged erect virtual image of “decoration 2” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is observed through the lens 1018.

  FIG. 279 (g) continuing from FIG. 279 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the swing fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208b. An enlarged erect virtual image of “decor 3” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b is observed through the lens 1018. Thereby, for example, at the time of a big hit, it may be possible to show an enlarged middle symbol that is aligned at the end of reach production, and to increase the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 279 (h) continuing from FIG. 279 (g) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902 and the upper front movable body 1002 have returned to their initial positions. In the return order of each movable body to the initial position, the upper front movable body 1002 is moved upward to return to the initial position after the lens movable body 1002a is moved backward, and then the logo movable body 902 is moved downward. Move to return to the initial position.

  As described above, there may be cases where it is possible to sharpen the game effect by not using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach production at the time of disconnection, and using the upper front movable body 1002 in the reach production at the big hit.

  Next, production example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG.

  In FIG. 280 (a), the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the foremost position, and the upper rear movable The body 1102 is shown in the initial position. In addition, special figure fluctuation game is under execution, fluctuation display of decoration design is executed in the design indication territory 208a-208c, fluctuation display of decoration design is recognized visually through lens 1018. In addition, the gaming state at the present time is in a definite change (during a steady transformation support), and a character string of "during a definite change" is displayed below the effect display area 208d. In addition, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and effects at the time of probability change are executed.

  As described above, in the definite variation state, the variation design of the decoration symbol may be emphasized by making the decoration symbol visually recognized through the lens 1018. The gaming state in which the decorative symbol is visually recognized through the lens 1018 may be a latent state (a special figure high probability figure low probability state) or a short time state (a special figure low probability figure high probability state).

  In FIG. 280 (b), the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the foremost position, and the upper rear movable The body 1102 is shown in the initial position. In addition, the special figure variation game is not in execution (in symbol stop indication), in the symbol indication territory 208a-208c “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” is halted indication, the decorative design which is in the halt indication is the lens It is visible through 1018. In addition, the gaming state at the present time is in a definite change (during a steady transformation support), and a character string of "during a definite change" is displayed below the effect display area 208d. In the latent state, character strings such as "hidden", "hidden" and "suspicious" may be displayed. In addition, a character string representing the current effect mode may be displayed. In addition, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and effects at the time of probability change are executed.

  As described above, in the positive change state, the stop display of the decorative symbol may be emphasized by making the decorative symbol visually recognized through the lens 1018. Note that the gaming state in which the decorative symbol is visually recognized through the lens 1018 may be a latent state (a special figure high probability drawing low definite state) or a short time state (a special drawing low certainty drawing high probability state).

  In FIG. 280 (c), the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the foremost position, and the upper rear movable The body 1102 is shown in the initial position. In addition, special figure fluctuation game is under execution. In addition, the gaming state at the present time is in a definite change (during a steady transformation support), and a character string of "during a definite change" is displayed below the effect display area 208d. In addition, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and effects at the time of probability change are executed.

  Further, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire surface of the image display area, and the character of "Heat" is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the notice effect (the notice of the change or the advance notice) is executed. . The word "Heat" is magnified and viewed through the lens 1018. In some cases, it is possible to make the advance notice noticeable.

  In FIG. 280 (d), the logo movable body 902 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 move slightly downward from the initial position, and the lens movable body 1002a is at the rearmost position. It shows the state of being located in In addition, special figure fluctuation game is under execution. In addition, the gaming state at the present time is in a definite change (during a steady transformation support), and a character string of "during a definite change" is displayed below the effect display area 208d. In addition, the image of the main character is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, the image of the enemy character is displayed on the right side, and effects at the time of probability change are executed. Further, the effect display area 208d is enlarged over the entire surface of the image display area, and the character of "Heat" is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the notice effect (the notice of the change or the advance notice) is executed. .

  In FIG. 280 (d), a part of the rotating decoration portion 1124 is viewed through the lens 1018. As a result, in some cases, the upper back movable body 1102 may be made to notice the player that something is hidden behind the upper front movable body 1002.

  FIG. 280 (e) shows a state in which the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 are located at the initial position. In addition, the special figure variation game is being executed, the effect display area 208d is expanded over the entire surface of the image display area, the image of the main character is displayed on the left of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the enemy character is on the right. It is displayed, the character string of "subjugation reach" is displayed in the center, and reach production is performed.

  As described above, the logo movable body 902, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be stopped at the initial position when the reach effect is performed. Thereby, an animation etc. can be displayed using the image display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 widely, and a reach effect can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can cause the player to visually recognize various displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 through the lens 1018 of the upper front movable body 1002. The display to make the player visually recognize via the lens 1018 includes re-lottery effect display, promotion effect display, probability change notification effect display, icon display such as pending icon or fluctuation icon, notification display of gaming state, various information An alert display etc. are mentioned. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to magnify these displays via the lens 1018 and cause the player to visually recognize these displays.

  Next, characteristic features of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment F described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 252 to 280.

(D1)
A first display means capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A movable body (e.g., a logo movable body 902) capable of at least performing the first movement;
A game console equipped with
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation of moving the movable body upward from a first position (for example, an initial position) (for example, see FIG. 255 (b)).
The movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is positioned higher than the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 275 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to show the player using the display area of the first display means largely while making the movement of the movable body stand out.

(D2)
It is the gaming machine described in (D1),
The movable body is a movable body capable of at least performing the second movement (see, for example, FIG. 255 (c)).
The second operation is an operation of moving downward from the first position (see, for example, FIG. 255 (c)).
After the second operation is performed, at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 275 (i)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the movable body can be moved to a position overlapping the first display means in the front-rear direction, and the variation may be increased in the relationship between the movable body and the first display means.

(D3)
It is the gaming machine described in (D2),
The first operation is an operation of moving from the first position to a second position (for example, the uppermost position) (for example, see FIG. 255 (b)).
The second operation is an operation of moving from the first position to a third position (for example, the lowermost position) (see, for example, FIG. 255C).
The movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation (for example, see FIG. 255).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it may be possible to perform rendering using the display area of the first display means widely while showing the moving operation of the movable body in a large size. Moreover, even when the movable body is located at the second position and separated from the first display means, the movable body may be able to be noticed. In addition, even when the movable body is positioned at the third position and overlaps the first display means in the front-rear direction, the movable body may be noticed by the third operation.

(D4)
It is the gaming machine described in (D3),
A detection unit (for example, a photo sensor 984) capable of at least detecting the position of the movable body;
The detection means is a means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the second position,
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body moves from the third position to the second position and then returns to the first position ( For example, see FIGS. 275 (i) to 276 (a)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above game stand, the movable body is returned to the first position without concealing the display displayed on the first display means by the movable body, and the player who is paying attention to the display is not disturbed. It may be possible to For example, when the movable body is moved to the third position during execution of the symbol variation display and a notice is executed, and when the notice is ended when the symbol variation display is ended, the movable body is moved to the second position Since it returns to the first position, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from disturbing the player who is paying attention to the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.

(D5)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D4), wherein
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotation mechanism (for example, a rotation link mechanism 902b) capable of performing a rotation operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves upward in association with the rotation operation being performed (see, for example, FIG. 256 (b)).
The movable body is a movable body configured by at least a plurality of movable portions (for example, a second character portion 912 to a sixth character portion 920),
At least one of the plurality of movable portions (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable portion” (for example, fourth character portion 916)) is the second movable portion of the plurality of movable portions and Is a movable part provided at a position farther from the rotation center in the rotation operation than at least one other (hereinafter referred to as “first movable part” (for example, the second character part 912)),
The first operation is an operation in which the amount of upward movement of the second movable portion is larger than the amount of upward movement of the first movable portion (see, for example, FIG. 255 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where a plurality of parts of the movable body can be moved regularly. Further, the rotational movement of the motor can be converted into linear movement by the rotation mechanism and transmitted to a plurality of parts of the movable body.

(D6)
It is the gaming machine described in (D5),
The first operation is an operation in which at least one movable portion (for example, a fourth character portion 916) of the plurality of movable portions is moved upward.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be made to pay attention to a particularly moved portion of the movable body.

(D7)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D6), wherein
The first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the movable body overlaps the first display means which the player usually pays attention to, the first motion of the movable body may not be overlooked.

(D8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7), wherein
The movable body is a movable body including a second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of at least displaying a display.
A game stand characterized by

According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the movable body includes the second display means, the movable body after operation may be able to be noticed (D9)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D8), wherein
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion (e.g., a first character portion 910 to a seventh character portion 922) having a character shape,
The movable body is a movable body in which the character portion can emit light by light emitting means (for example, an LED mounted on an LED substrate 910c or the like).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the character part of a movable body may be able to be made conspicuous.

(D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(D11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

  When the movable body is located at the first position, at least a portion may overlap with the first display means in the front-rear direction, or the whole does not overlap with the first display means in the front-rear direction Good.

  The first display means and the second display means include a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, plasma Other display devices can be used, including displays, projectors.

  The movable body may be configured to be capable of moving movement other than parallel movement and rotational movement, and is configured to be able to execute the first movement, the second movement, or the third movement from a plurality of movement modes. It may be

  The second operation may be an operation of moving to a position beyond the lower limit position of the first display means.

  The amount of movement of the movable body in the direction away from the first display means may be smaller than the amount of movement in the direction of overlapping the first display means.

  The initial position of the movable body may not be in front of the first display means.

  The movable body may be an integral movable body having a plurality of movable parts. For example, the movable sub liquid crystal and another movable body movable in the vicinity of the sub liquid crystal may be integrated as a movable body.

  The character represented by the character shape is a character of the title logo including at least a part of the model name of the game stand, or a characteristic character related to the feature of the game stand or the title or motif of the game stand (e.g. In the case of a game table having a game play, such as "hidden" or "suspicious", if it has an historical play as a motif, "war", "fight", etc. may be mentioned. The number of characters may be two or more.

  The movable body may not have the light emitting means. In addition, at least one character portion of the plurality of character portions may emit light.

  The movable body may be configured not to perform the multistage operation, and may be capable of performing only the movement operation.

  In this example, the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the second position. The movable body returns to the initial position once the position is detected by the detection means. In this example, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the second position, the movable body is at the second position which is a position above the first display means. After moving, it returns to the initial value position. Also, for example, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the third position, the movable body is at the third position which is a position in front of the first display means. After moving, it returns to the initial value position. For this reason, when the detection means can detect the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the second position, the detection means detects the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the third position. The movable body can return to the initial position without hiding the display of the first display means than when it is detectable. The detection means may be capable of detecting the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the third position, or detects the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the first position. It may be possible.

(E1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is movable at least from a first area (see, for example, FIG. 255 (a)) to a third area (see, for example, FIG. 255 (b)). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first movable body” (for example, logo movable body 902),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second region (see, for example, FIGS. 260 (a) and 264 (a)) to a fourth region (for example, FIGS. 260 (c) and 264 (a)). c) movable to at least movable (hereinafter referred to as "second movable") (for example, upper front movable body 1002, lens movable body 1002a, upper rear movable body 1102);
The fourth area is an area including at least a part of the first area,
The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body is moved (for example, in a state of being located at an initial position);
The fourth area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body is moved (for example, a state after moved to the lowermost position).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by a movable body. In addition, a plurality of movable bodies may be associated to enable various operations.

(E2)
It is the gaming machine described in (E1),
The second movable body is a movable body positioned at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 252 and 253).
The second movable body is a movable body that is at least movable in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth region (see, for example, FIG. 261).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there is a case where the second movable body moving forward can give an impact to the player.

(E3)
It is a game console according to (E1) or (E2),
The second region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body is moved (for example, in a state of being located at an initial position) (see, for example, FIG. 260 (a)). ),
The second area is an area in which at least a part of the area is the front-rear direction of the first area (see, for example, FIGS. 252 and 253).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to make the player expect the motion of the movable body by making the plurality of movable bodies visible from the player side in normal times.

(E4)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E3), wherein
A first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a display;
The fourth area is an area including an area in which at least a part of the area is in front of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 277 (h)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the second movable body can be operated in relation to the display of the first display means.

(E5)
It is the gaming machine described in (E4),
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first area to the fifth area (see, for example, FIG. 255C).
The fifth area is an area including an area where at least a part of the area is in front of the first display means (see, for example, FIG. 275 (i)).
The fifth area is an area including at least a part of the fourth area (see, for example, FIG. 275 (i)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the first movable body can perform an operation other than the operation that is a precursor to the operation of the second movable body.

(E6)
It is the gaming machine described in (E5),
The third area is an area shifted upward from the first area,
The fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to perform an unexpected operation by moving the first movable body upward away from the display area of the first display means. In addition, the expectation that the second movable body appears in front of the display area of the first display means may be enhanced.

(E7)
(E4) to (E6), wherein the game console is any one of
The first area is an area including at least a part of the area in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the first movable body is positioned in front of the display area in the initial state, it is possible not to miss the operation of the first movable body in the direction away from the display area There is.

(E8)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7), wherein
A second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of at least displaying a display;
The movable body of one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, by focusing attention on the display content of the second display means, it may be possible to focus attention also on the operation itself of the movable body provided with the second display means.

(E9)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7), wherein
A second display means (for example, a sub display device) capable of at least displaying a display;
The third area is an area including an area where at least a part of the area is in front of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since there is the second display means also at the movement destination of the first movable body, the operation of the first movable body may be naturally noticed.

(E10)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(E11)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body when the first movable body is at a first position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body.

  The second movable body is movable to a position including an initial position of the first movable body.

  The first movable body is, for example, a logo movable body 902. The second movable body is the upper front movable body 1002, the lens movable body 1002a, or the upper rear movable body 1102.

  The first area and the second area do not have a common area, and may overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the first region and the fourth region may overlap in the front-rear direction without having a common region.

  The first movable body may be disposed behind the second movable body, and the second movable body may be movable rearward.

The above game console is
The first movable body is a movable body visible to the player in a state of being located at an initial position,
The second movable body is characterized in that the second movable body is a movable body visible to a player in a state of being located at an initial position.

The above game console is
Symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) which can at least execute symbol variation display;
Holding means (eg, RAM 308) capable of at least holding the start of the symbol variation display;
Equipped with
At least a notice (hereinafter referred to as a "first notice") for the symbol variation display being executed is configured to be executable,
At least a notice (hereinafter referred to as a "second notice") for the pending symbol variation display is configured to be executable,
The movable body of at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body usable for performing the first notice,
A movable body of at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body usable for performing the second notice.
It is characterized by

It is the above-mentioned game stand,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first area to the fifth area,
The fifth area is an area not including an area in which at least a part of the area is in front of the first display means.
The fifth area is an area not including at least a part of the fourth area.
It is characterized by

  The fifth area is the area under the first display means.

  One or both of the first movable body and the second movable body may at least include a second display means.

  The second movable body may be disposed at a position deviated from the first movable body in a direction other than the front-rear direction, for example, in the left-right direction. When the second movable body is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body, the storage of the movable body may be compact.

  The fourth area may be an area not including the area in front of the first display means, or may be an area in which all of the fourth areas are in front of the first display means.

  The first movable body may be capable of moving outside of the movement range of the second movable body (e.g., the sixth region).

  The first movable body may be movable in a direction approaching the first display means.

  The second movable body may be movable at a position farther from the first display means than the first movable body.

  When the first movable body is positioned at the initial position, the first movable body may be configured not to overlap the display area of the first display means in the front-rear direction and not to hide the display area.

  In the initial state, the plurality of movable bodies may not overlap in the front-rear direction. For example, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is located above the first display means, and the other movable body is located below the first display device, and one of the movable bodies is movable. In order to move the movement range of the body to the movement range of the other movable body, the other movable body may be retracted.

  The first movable body may include the main display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208).

  The first movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).

  The second movable body may be provided with a main display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  The second movable body may include a sub display device (for example, a sub display device).

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be configured by the main display device and the sub display device.

  The effect display displayed on the main display device and the sub display device is a decoration symbol variation display, a suspension display such as a suspension icon (an example of pre-reading notice), a variation icon (an example of notice), a fourth symbol, a game Although it is information display etc. of a state etc., what may be displayed on any display device, the same information may be displayed on both display devices, and with the main display device by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition etc. The display on the sub display device may be switched.

It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position,
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position above the first position,
The fourth position is a position below the second position,
A game stand characterized by

It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is movable from a first position to a third position,
The second movable body is movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The third position is a position below the first position,
The fourth position is a position above the second position,
A game stand characterized by

(F1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as "first movable body" (for example, upper front movable body 1002, lens movable body 1002a)) has a first position (for example, an initial position, The movable body is at least movable from the uppermost position, see FIG. 260 (a)) to the third position (eg, the lowermost position, see FIG. 260 (c)),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable body” (for example, upper rear movable body 1102)) is at a second position (for example, initial position, uppermost position) It is a movable body that can move at least from the position shown in FIG.
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least a part of which overlaps with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 252, FIG. See 253),
The second movable body positioned at the fourth position is a movable body at least a portion of which overlaps with the first movable body positioned at the third position in the front-rear direction (for example, as shown in FIG. )reference),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where it can be operated while maintaining the positional relationship of a plurality of movable bodies.

(F2)
It is the gaming machine described in (F1),
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body (see, for example, FIGS. 252 and 253).
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a visual recognition area (for example, openings 1012a, 1014d, 1002b5) capable of visualizing the rear of the first movable body,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position (e.g., Figure 276 (j)),
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position (e.g., Fig. 277 (h)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second movable body can be seen from the visible area of the first movable body, even if the second movable body moves to a position where it overlaps with the first movable body in the front-rear direction There are cases where it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

(F3)
It is the gaming machine described in (F2),
The first movable body (e.g., the lens movable body 1002a) has a third position (e.g., the rearmost position; see FIGS. 259 (a) and 260 (c)) to a fifth position (e.g., the second position). A movable body that is at least movable to the frontmost position, see FIGS. 259 (b) and 261);
The fifth position is a position in front of the third position (see, for example, FIG. 261).
The viewing area is an area including a lens (e.g., lens 1018),
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the fifth position (for example, Figure 279 (b)),
A movable body in which the second movable body can be visually recognized to a larger extent by the visual recognition area when the first movable body is positioned at the fifth position than when the first movable body is positioned at the third position. (See, for example, FIG. 279 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body may be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. Also, there are cases where the second movable body can be enlarged and shown to the player.

(F4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3), wherein
Display means capable of displaying at least a display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
A game stand characterized by Note According to the above-mentioned game console, there are cases where the movable body can perform various operations in front of the display means.

(F5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F4), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive means (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive unit (for example, motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above game stand, the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate at the same position in the vertical direction, and the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate independently. In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the movable body.

(F6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F5), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body that can move up and down (see, for example, FIG. 260).
The second movable body is a movable body which can move in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 264), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned.

(F7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F6), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(F8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F6), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

  The first movable body and the second movable body have substantially the same operating range in the up and down direction, but may be configured to be operable in different ranges. It is also possible to replace the rotation operation of the decorative portion 1124 with an operation involving movement to a different range.

  The drive source of the first movable body and the drive source of the second movable body may be the same, and the operation start timing and relative position of the first movable body and the second movable body by the link mechanism etc. The relationship may be varied to make the first movable body and the second movable body appear as if they could be operated independently by separate drive sources.

  The second position and the fourth position may be positions not in front of the display means. In this case, in addition to the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body, it may be possible to perform effects by using a wide display area.

  The first position and the third position may be positions on the front side of the display means or may not be positions on the front side of the display means. Also, it is preferable if at least one of the first position and the third position is in front of the display means, but this is not necessarily required.

  The first movable body does not have to have a visual recognition area in which the second movable body can be visually recognized. If the drive sources of the first movable body and the second movable body are different, the first movable body and the second movable body can be operated separately, so that the position deviated from the third position When the second movable body is operated, the second movable body may be able to be shown to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the fifth position is the front side of the third position, but the fifth position may be the rear side of the third position. The position in the direction in which the first movable body and the second movable body are clogged is the sixth position, and the first movable body may be movable to the sixth position. Thereby, the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body may be changed to change the appearance of the movable body.

  The visual recognition area may adopt a configuration other than the lens. For example, a mere transparent plate which does not have the function of a lens may be sufficient, and an opening part and a notch part etc. which are nothing can be employ | adopted as said visual recognition area.

  The second movable body is at least rotatable when it is visible from the visible area of the first movable body at the second position, but the second movable body is rotated outside the visible area May be Also, the rotational movement of the second movable body may be a drive source different from the drive source for moving the second movable body from the second position to the fourth position, or may be the same drive source. May be

  In addition, as the first display, hold icon, fluctuation icon, cut-in image, character image, conversation image, decoration pattern, fourth pattern, decoration figure of common figure, effect image, tutorial display for explaining effects, explanation of operation Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom plate full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification for preventing the forgetting of a prepaid card), and the like.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second area. The second region may be the same as the first region, may be different, or may at least partially overlap. In addition, as the second display, hold icon, fluctuation icon, cut-in image, character image, conversation image, decoration pattern, fourth pattern, decoration figure of common figure, effect image, tutorial display for explaining effects, explanation of operation Tutorial display, button image, meter image, error display (for example, bottom plate full error), alert notification (for example, alert notification for preventing the forgetting of a prepaid card), and the like. The second indication may be the same as or different from the first indication.

  In addition, the structure described as "at least ... possible" in the above can also be interpreted by replacing the said part with "only possible ...". For example, a movable body described as "at least the first operation can be performed" can be replaced with a movable body "it is only possible to perform the first operation".

  In addition, the configuration described as "... possible" in the above should be interpreted by replacing the portion with "including a configuration that may or may not always be ...". You can also. For example, the configuration described as "at least the first operation can be performed" may include "the first operation may not be executed, or a configuration that necessarily performs the first operation". It can also be interpreted in place of

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix d1)
A first display means capable of at least displaying a display;
A movable body capable of at least performing the first operation;
A game console equipped with
The first operation is an operation including at least an operation of moving the movable body upward from a first position,
The movable body located at the first position is a movable body at least a part of which is positioned higher than the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
The movable body is a movable body capable of at least performing a second operation,
The second operation is an operation of moving downward from the first position,
After the second operation is performed, at least a portion of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d2,
The first operation is an operation of moving from the first position to a second position,
The second operation is an operation of moving from the first position to a third position,
The movable amount in the first operation is larger than the movable amount in the second operation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d3,
It comprises detection means capable of at least detecting the position of the movable body,
The detection means is a means capable of detecting at least the position of the movable body when the movable body is at the second position,
When the movable body returns to the first position after the second operation is performed, the movable body moves from the third position to the second position and then returns to the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a rotation mechanism capable of performing a rotation operation,
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves upward in association with the rotation operation being performed,
The movable body is a movable body configured by at least a plurality of movable portions,
At least one of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter referred to as "second movable part") is at least one other than the second movable part of the plurality of movable parts (hereinafter referred to as "the second movable part"). A movable part provided at a position farther from the rotation center in the rotation operation than the “first movable part”),
The first operation is an operation in which the amount of upward movement of the second movable portion is larger than the amount of upward movement of the first movable portion.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d5,
The first operation is an operation in which at least one movable portion of the plurality of movable portions is moved upward.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The first position is a position where at least a part of the movable body is located on the front side of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d7, wherein
The movable body is a movable body including a second display means capable of at least displaying a display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The movable body is a movable body including at least a character portion having a character shape,
The movable body is a movable body in which the character portion can emit light by light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body that is at least movable from the first area to the third area (hereinafter referred to as "first movable body"),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a movable body that is at least movable from the second area to the fourth area (hereinafter referred to as "the second movable body"),
The fourth area is an area including at least a part of the first area,
The first area is an area occupied by the first movable body in a state before the first movable body is movable,
The fourth area is an area occupied by the second movable body in a state after the second movable body is moved.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
The second movable body is a movable body positioned at least in the front-rear direction with respect to the first movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body that is at least movable in the front-rear direction when moving to the fourth region.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e1 or e2,
The second region is a region occupied by the second movable body in a state before the second movable body is moved,
The second area is an area in which at least a part of the area is in the front-rear direction of the first area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e3, wherein
A first display means capable of displaying at least a display;
The fourth area is an area including an area where at least a part of the area is in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e5)
It is a game console described in Appendix e4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the first area to the fifth area,
The fifth area is an area including at least a part of the area in front of the first display means.
The fifth region is a region including at least a part of the fourth region,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e6)
The game stand described in the appendix e5,
The third area is an area shifted upward from the first area,
The fifth region is a region shifted downward from the first region,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices e4 to e6,
The first area is an area including at least a part of the area in front of the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e7, wherein
A second display means capable of at least displaying a display;
The movable body of one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e7, wherein
A second display means capable of at least displaying a display;
The third area is an area including an area where at least a part of the area is in front of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter referred to as "first movable body") is a movable body that is at least movable from a first position to a third position,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable body”) is a movable body that is at least movable from a second position to a fourth position,
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least a part of which overlaps with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction,
The second movable body located at the fourth position is a movable body at least a part of which overlaps with the first movable body located at the third position in the front-rear direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f1,
The first movable body is a movable body located in front of the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with at least a visual recognition area capable of visualizing the rear of the first movable body,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f2,
The first movable body is a movable body that is at least movable from the third position to the fifth position,
The fifth position is a position in front of the third position,
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the fourth position is visible from the viewing area of the first movable body located at the third position,
A movable body in which the second movable body can be visually recognized to a larger extent by the visual recognition area when the first movable body is positioned at the fifth position than when the first movable body is positioned at the third position. Is
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3, wherein
A display means capable of at least displaying a display;
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the display means.
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f6)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f5,
The first movable body is a movable body that can move up and down,
The second movable body is a movable body that can move up and down.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Next, an example of effects using the movable body of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a movable body 1700 and a movable body 1800. FIG. 281 schematically shows the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800.

  FIG. 281 (a) shows the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 in the initial position. The movable body 1700 has a decorative portion 1702 formed of a transparent resin. The decorative portion 1702 has a thin-plate circular shape as a whole, and a cloud pattern 1704 is drawn at the central portion. On the outer peripheral side of the cloud pattern 1704, visual recognition areas 1706 and 1708 are provided in which the rear of the movable body 1700 can be visually recognized. The initial position of the movable body 1700 is the position on the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the movable body 1700 may be a position on the lower side of the decorative symbol display 208. In addition, when the movable body 1700 is located at the initial position, the movable symbol 1700 may partially overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208, or may not entirely overlap. In addition, the movable body 1700 is driven by a stepping motor, and can move vertically in the plane in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The drive mechanism of the movable body 1700 can adopt the drive mechanism of the upper front movable body 1002 or the upper rear movable body 1102.

  The movable body 1800 has a decorative portion 1802 formed of resin. The decorative portion 1802 has a thin-plate circular shape as a whole, and a pattern of the sun is drawn in the central portion. The initial position of the movable body 1800 is the position on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the movable body 1800 may be the position on the left side of the decorative symbol display indication 208. In addition, when the movable body 1800 is located at the initial position, the movable symbol 1800 may partially overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208, or may not entirely overlap. In addition, the movable body 1800 is driven by a stepping motor, and can move in the left-right direction in a plane in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the movable body 1800 is driven by a stepping motor, is guided by a guide rod extending in the left-right direction, and is movable in the left-right direction.

  Thus, the two movable bodies do not have to overlap in the front-rear direction in the state of being located at the initial position. Similarly, the upper front movable body 1002 and the upper rear movable body 1102 described above may not be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the state where they are positioned at the initial position. The initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 may be the same as the initial position of the movable body 1700, and the initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 may be the same as the initial position of the movable body 1800. Further, the initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 may be the same as the initial position of the movable body 1800, and the initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 may be the same as the initial position of the movable body 1700. Also, movable body 1700 and movable body 1800 can be operated individually.

  Further, the movable body 1700 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1800. Therefore, the moving area of the movable body 1700 is on the front side of the moving area of the movable body 1800. The movable body 1700 may be disposed on the rear side of the movable body 1800.

  FIG. 281 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1700 has moved downward from the initial position and stopped at the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The downward arrow in FIG. 281 (b) indicates the moving direction of the movable body 1700. The movable body 1700 is movable between the initial position shown in FIG. 281 (a) and the position of the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (b). The movable body 1700 may be movable to a position on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 281 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1800 has moved from the initial position to the left and stopped at the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left-pointing arrow in FIG. 281 (c) indicates the moving direction of the movable body 1800. The movable body 1800 is movable between the initial position shown in FIGS. 281 (a) and 281 (b) and the position of the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (c). The movable body 1800 may be movable to a position on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 281C, the movable body 1800 is positioned on the rear side of the movable body 1700, and the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 overlap in the front-rear direction. A part of the movable body 1800 is visible through the visual recognition areas 1706 and 1708 of the movable body 1700. Note that lenses may be disposed in the visible regions 1706 and 1708.

  FIG. 281 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 overlap in the front-rear direction as viewed from right to left. Two left-pointing arrows in FIG. 281 (d) indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1800. As shown in FIG. 281 (d), the movable body 1800 is movable forward. When the movable body 1800 moves to the front side, a deformation operation in which the decorative portion 1802 increases to the circumferential side can be performed. When the decorative portion 1802 is deformed to increase toward the circumferential side, the pattern of the sun becomes larger. Further, the drive mechanism of the operation is the same as the drive mechanism for moving the movable portions 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative portion 1010 of the upper front movable body 1002 to the outer peripheral side.

  FIG. 281E shows a state in which the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 overlap in the front-rear direction as viewed from the front side. The right side of FIG. 281 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1800 is relatively positioned on the rear side, and the left side of FIG. 281 (e) shows the movable body 1800 relatively positioned on the front side Show the condition. As shown in FIG. 281 (e), it is visible through the visible regions 1706 and 1708 of the movable member 1700 that the movable member 1800 has moved forward and the decorative portion 1802 has been deformed to become larger on the circumferential side. .

  In addition, the movable body 1800 may have an initial position relative to the front side, and may be movable from the front side to the rear side. When moving from the front side to the back side, the decorative portion 1802 of the movable body 1800 may perform a deforming operation that increases toward the circumferential side, or the decorative portion 1802 may perform a deforming operation that decreases toward the circumferential side. . Also, the movable body 1700 may be movable in the front-rear direction. Further, the operation of the movable body 1700 may be applied to the upper front movable body 1002 described above, or the operation of the upper front movable body 1002 may be applied to the movable body 1700. Also, the operation of the movable body 1800 may be applied to the upper rear movable body 1102 described above, or the operation of the upper rear movable body 1102 may be applied to the movable body 1800. Moreover, you may combine the operation | movement of these movable bodies suitably.

  In addition, at least one of the movable body 1700, the movable body 1800, the upper front movable body 1002, and the upper rear movable body 1102 may include a sub display smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display devices include liquid crystal display devices, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) display devices, leaf display devices, plasma displays, and other displays including projectors. Devices can be used. Further, the sub display device may be controlled by the first sub control unit 400 or may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500, and the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 Alternatively, a display control unit may be provided and controlled by the display control unit.

  In addition, the movable body 1700 and the upper front movable body 1002, which are disposed relatively on the front side, may be provided with a liquid crystal display device (so-called, transmission liquid crystal) provided with a transmission area in which the rear of the display area is visible. . The transmissive region of the liquid crystal display device may be the above-described visible region.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment F described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 252 to 281.

(G1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, an upper front movable body 1002, a lens movable body 1002a, a movable body 1700),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies other than the first movable body is a second movable body (e.g., an upper rear movable body 1102, a movable body 1800),
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area (for example, openings 1012 a, 1014 d, 1002 b 5, visual recognition areas 1706, 1708) which can visually recognize the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body are in the first state (for example, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. 260 (a) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is shown in FIG. State where the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (b) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (b) The movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (c) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (c), or the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 are shown in FIG. It is possible to take the position shown),
The first movable body and the second movable body are in a second state (for example, a state in which the lens movable body 1002a is moved forward as shown in FIG. 261, a state in which the lens movable body 1002a is moved backward) A state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved forward or backward, a state in which the movable body 1700 has moved forward or backward, a state in which the movable body 1800 has moved forward as shown in FIGS. 281 (d) and (e) It is possible that the movable body 1800 moves backward)),
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 276 (g), FIG. 279 (a), FIG. 281 ( c) see),
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (g), 279 (a), and 281 (c)). ,
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state (for example, FIG. 261, FIG. 279 (b), see FIG. 281 (d), (e)),
The movable body of at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including a display unit (for example, a sub display device).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to perform various effects in which the movable body and the display means are associated with each other and to improve the interest of the effects.

(G2)
(G1), which is the game console described in (G1),
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a third position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 260 or the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 261). ,
In the first state, the second movable body is at a fourth position (for example, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (b) or the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (c) Position), and
The second state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a fifth position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 261 or the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 260) ,
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position (see, for example, FIGS. 260 and 261).
The first movable body is at a first position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a (upper front movable body 1002) shown in FIG. 260 (a), or the lens movable body 1002a (upper A movable body movable from the position of the front movable body 1002) to the third position (see, for example, FIG. 260);
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position (see, for example, FIGS. 259, 260, and 261).
The second movable body is moved from the second position (for example, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (a) or the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (b)) A movable body that can move to the position of (for example, see FIG. 264),
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area (see, for example, FIG. 279 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the second movable body can be shown through the visible area in the first state and the second state, and the second state is the relative state between the first state and the movable bodies. Since the positional relationship changes, it may be possible to have variations in how the second movable body is shown.

(G3)
(G2) the gaming machine,
The second movable body positioned at the second position is a movable body at least a portion of which overlaps with the first movable body positioned at the first position in the front-rear direction (for example, as shown in FIG. )reference),
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible through the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position (for example, FIG. 276 (g )reference),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second movable body can be seen from the visible area of the first movable body, even if the second movable body moves to a position where it overlaps with the first movable body in the front-rear direction There are cases where it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

(G4)
(G2) or (G3).
The viewing area is an area including a lens (e.g., lens 1018),
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that can be viewed (see, for example, FIGS. 279 (a) and (b)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body may be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. Also, the second movable body may be enlarged or reduced to be shown to the player.

(G5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G2) to (G4), wherein
When the first movable body moves from the third position to the fifth position, a part (for example, movable parts 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative part 1010, the decorative part 1702) can be deformed Is the body,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the first movable body moves in the front-rear direction, the shape may be changed to increase the variation of the operation of the movable body.

(G6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G2) to (G5), wherein
A decorative symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the movable body can perform various operations in front of the display means.

(G7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G2) to (G6), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive means (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive means (for example, a motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above game stand, the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate at the same position in the vertical direction, and the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate independently. In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the movable body.

(G8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G7), wherein
The second movable body is a movable body including the display means (for example, a sub display device),
The display means is means capable of displaying different displays in the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, by changing the display seen through the visible area of the first movable body before and after the movement of the first movable body in the back and forth direction, the display seen through the visible area can be enjoyed There is.

(G9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G7), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body including the display means (for example, a sub display device),
The display means is means capable of transmitting light on the rear side (for example, a liquid crystal display device in which the rear of the display area appears to be transmitted).
The display means is a means in which at least a part of a display area is the viewing area.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the display of the display means may be shown to the player along with the second movable body and may be enjoyed.

(G10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G9), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 260).
The second movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 264).
A game stand characterized by

(G11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G10), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(G12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G10), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

(H1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, an upper front movable body 1002, a lens movable body 1002a, a movable body 1700),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies other than the first movable body is a second movable body (e.g., an upper rear movable body 1102, a movable body 1800),
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area (for example, openings 1012 a, 1014 d, 1002 b 5, visual recognition areas 1706, 1708) which can visually recognize the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body are in the first state (for example, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. 260 (a) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is shown in FIG. State where the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (b) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (b) The movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (c) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (c), or the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 are shown in FIG. It is possible to take the position shown),
The first movable body and the second movable body are in a second state (for example, a state in which the lens movable body 1002a is moved forward as shown in FIG. 261, a state in which the lens movable body 1002a is moved backward) A state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 has moved forward or backward, a state in which the movable body 1700 has moved forward or backward, a state in which the movable body 1800 has moved forward as shown in FIGS. 281 (d) and (e) It is possible that the movable body 1800 moves backward)),
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 276 (g), FIG. 279 (a), FIG. 281 ( c) see),
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (g), 279 (a), and 281 (c)). ,
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state (for example, FIG. 261, FIG. 279 (b), see FIG. 281 (d), (e)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, there are cases where the movement of the movable body can be varied.

(H2)
It is the gaming machine described in (H1),
In the first state, the first movable body is at a third position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 260, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 261, or FIG. 281 (b) Position of the movable body 1700 shown in (c)),
In the first state, the second movable body is at a fourth position (for example, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (b), the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (c) Or the position of the movable body 1800 shown in FIG. 281 (c)),
In the second state, the first movable body is located at a fifth position (for example, a position where the lens movable body 1002a has moved forward or backward, a position where the movable body 1700 has moved forward or backward) And
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position (see, for example, FIGS. 260 and 261).
The first movable body is a movable body movable from a first position (for example, the position of the movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 281 (a)) to the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position,
The second movable body is a movable body movable from a second position (for example, the position of the movable body 1800 shown in FIG. 281 (a)) to the fourth position,
The second movable body (for example, the movable body 1800 located at the position shown in FIG. 281A) located at the second position is the first movable body (for example, located at the first position) , And does not overlap in the front-rear direction with the movable body 1700 located at the position shown in FIG. 281 (a) (for example, see FIG. 281 (a))
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the second movable body can be moved to a position where it can be seen and a position where it can not be seen through the visible area of the first movable body, and there are cases where it is possible to have variations in movement and appearance of the movable body. is there.

(H3)
It is the gaming machine described in (H2),
A decorative symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first position is a position on the side (for example, the upper side) of the first side of the decorative symbol display means,
The second position is a position on the side (for example, the right side) of the second side of the decorative symbol display means,
The side of the second side is different from the side of the first side,
The third position is a position at which at least a part of the decorative symbol display means and the first movable body overlap in the front-rear direction (see, for example, FIG. 281 (b)).
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the decorative symbol display means and the second movable body overlap in the front-rear direction (see, for example, FIG. 281 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, it may be possible to perform various effects using the operation of the movable body and the display of the decorative symbol display means on the front side of the decorative symbol display means.

(H4)
It is a game console according to (H2) or (H3),
The viewing area is an area including a lens (e.g., lens 1018),
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that can be viewed (see, for example, FIGS. 279 (a) and (b)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body may be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. Also, the second movable body may be enlarged or reduced to be shown to the player.

(H5)
The game console according to any one of (H2) to (H4), wherein
When the first movable body moves from the third position to the fifth position, a part (for example, movable parts 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative part 1010, the decorative part 1702) can be deformed Is the body,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to give variation to the operation of the movable body.

(H6)
The game console according to any one of (H2) to (H5), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive means (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive means (for example, a motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, since the first movable body and the second movable body are also operable independently, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the operation of the movable body.

(H7)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H6), wherein
The second movable body is a movable body including display means (for example, a sub display device).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to perform various effects in which the movable body and the display means are related and to improve the interest of the effects.

(H8)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H7), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 281),
The second movable body is a movable body movable in the left and right direction (see, for example, FIG. 281).
A game stand characterized by

(H9)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H8), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(H10)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H8), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

(I1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, an upper front movable body 1002, a lens movable body 1002a),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, an upper rear movable body 1102),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body (e.g., movable parts 1010a to 1010j of the front side decorative part 1010, a rotatable movable part 1102b),
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body provided on one of the first movable body and the second movable body.
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area (for example, openings 1012a, 1014d, 1002b5) which can visually recognize the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body are in the first state (for example, the upper front movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position shown in FIG. 260 (a) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is shown in FIG. State where the upper front movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (b) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (b) It is possible that the front movable body 1002 is located at the position shown in FIG. 260 (c) and the upper rear movable body 1102 is located at the position shown in FIG. 264 (c)),
The first movable body and the second movable body are in the second state (for example, the state in which the lens movable body 1002a is moved forward as shown in FIG. 261, the state in which the upper rear movable body 1102 is moved forward) It is possible to take
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction (see, for example, FIG. 276 (g) and FIG. 279 (a)).
In the first state, at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area (see, for example, FIGS. 276 (g) and 279 (a)).
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state (for example, FIG. 261, FIG. 279 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. In some cases, it is possible to make the second movable body visible through the visible area of the first movable body, and to improve the interest of presentation using the movable body.

(I2)
It is the gaming machine described in (I1),
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a third position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 260 or the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 261). ,
In the first state, the second movable body is at a fourth position (for example, the position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (b) or the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (c) Position), and
The second state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a fifth position (for example, the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 261 or the position of the lens movable body 1002a shown in FIG. 260) ,
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position (see, for example, FIGS. 260 and 261).
The first movable body is moved from the first position (for example, the initial position of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. 260 (a) or the position of the upper front movable body 1002 shown in FIG. 260 (b)) It is a movable body that can be moved to three positions (see, for example, FIG. 260),
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position (see, for example, FIG. 260).
The second movable body is moved from the second position (eg, an initial position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (a) or a position of the upper rear movable body 1102 shown in FIG. 264 (b)) It is a movable body that can be moved to four positions (see, for example, FIG. 264),
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area (see, for example, FIG. 279 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the second movable body can be shown through the visible area in the first state and the second state, and the second state is the relative state between the first state and the movable bodies. Since the positional relationship changes, it may be possible to have variations in how the second movable body is shown.

(I3)
It is the gaming machine described in (I2),
The second movable body positioned at the second position is a movable body at least a portion of which overlaps with the first movable body positioned at the first position in the front-rear direction (for example, as shown in FIG. )reference),
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible through the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position (for example, FIG. 276 (g )reference),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second movable body can be seen from the visible area of the first movable body, even if the second movable body moves to a position where it overlaps with the first movable body in the front-rear direction There are cases where it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

(I4)
The gaming machine according to (I2) or (I3), wherein
The viewing area is an area including a lens (e.g., lens 1018),
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that can be viewed (see, for example, FIG. 279 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the relative positional relationship between the first movable body and the second movable body may be changed to change the appearance of the movable body. Also, the second movable body may be enlarged or reduced to be shown to the player.

(I5)
The game console according to any one of (I2) to (I4), wherein
When moving from the third position to the fifth position, the first movable body is a movable body in which a portion (for example, the front decoration portion 1010) is deformable.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, when the first movable body moves in the back and forth direction, the shape may be changed, and the first movable body moving back and forth may be noticed and enjoyed.

(I6)
The game console according to any one of (I2) to (I5), wherein
A decorative symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means (see, for example, FIG. 279 (a)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the movable body can perform various operations in front of the display means.

(I7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I2) to (I6), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive means (for example, a motor 1070),
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive means (for example, a motor 1152),
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above game stand, the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate at the same position in the vertical direction, and the first movable body and the second movable body can also operate independently. In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the movable body.

(I8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I7), wherein
The third movable body (for example, the rotatable movable portion 1102b) is a movable body operable in at least one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

  For example, in the case where the third movable body is the rotatable movable portion 1102b shown in FIG. 263, when the rotatable movable portion 1102b rotates, the spur gear 1130 or spur gear 1134 exposed forward from the opening 1102a1 is at the initial position (rear side Since the lens unit 1018 in the lens movable body 1002a located at the position is in contact with the lens 1018, the rotatable movable portion 1102b is rotatable when the lens movable body 1002a is positioned at the foremost position. Thus, depending on the position of the other first movable body, the third movable body may be operable or inoperable. The third movable body may be operable when the relative distance with the first movable body is short, or may be operable when the relative distance with the first movable body is large. Good. Also, depending on the position of the first movable body or the second movable body where the third movable body is disposed, the third movable body may be operable or inoperable. According to the above-mentioned game stand, the variation may be further increased by the operation of the third movable body in a state where the first movable body and the second movable body overlap.

(I9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8), wherein
The third movable body (for example, the rotatable movable portion 1102b) is a movable body provided to the second movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body visible through the visual recognition area in at least one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where it is possible to show the operation of the movable body through the viewing area.

(I10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I9), wherein
The third movable body (for example, the lens movable body 1102a, the front decoration portion 1010) is a movable body provided to the first movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body operable so as not to overlap with the viewing area in the front-rear direction (see, for example, FIGS. 259 to 261).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while showing the second movable body, the movement of the third movable body may sometimes be noticed.

(I11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I10), wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 260).
The second movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction (see, for example, FIG. 264).
A game stand characterized by

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the movable body 1700 may be provided integrally with the movable body 1800. For example, the movable body 1700 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1800, and the movable body 1700 and the movable body 1800 can operate in a state where they overlap in the front-rear direction. The movable body 1700 is movable in the plane of the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the operation of the movable body 1800. Also, the movable body 1700 may be movable forward or backward. The drive source for moving the movable body 1800 in the vertical direction is different from the drive source for moving the movable body 1700 forward or backward. In the following (I12), the movable body 1700 is applied to a first movable body, the movable body 1800 is applied to a second movable body, and the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Of course, the upper front movable body 1002 may be applied to the first movable body, and the upper rear movable body 1102 may be applied to the second movable body.

(I12)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, movable body 1700),
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, movable body 1800),
The first movable body is a movable body provided integrally with the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area (for example, visual recognition areas 1706 and 1708) capable of visualizing the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a first state,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a second state,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction,
The first state is a state in which at least a portion of the second movable body (for example, a pattern of the sun) is visible through the visual recognition area,
In the first state, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved from the first position (e.g., the position on the end side of the decorative symbol display device 208) by the operation of the second movable body Moved to a second position (e.g., the position of the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208),
The second position is a position where at least a portion of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap in the front-rear direction with the display means,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The second state is a state in which the first movable body moves in the front-rear direction from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, while operating the first movable body and the second movable body integrally, the second movable body disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized, and the effect using the movable body It may be possible to improve the interest of

(I13)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(I14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

  The third movable body provided in the gaming table described in (I1) to (I11) can be applied to the gaming table described in (G1) to (G12) and (H1) to (H10) described above.

  Also, the third movable body may be driven by a drive source different from the drive source of the first movable body and the drive source of the second movable body, or the first movable body drive source or the second movable body It may be driven by the drive source of two movable bodies. For example, when the first movable body is the lens movable body 1002a and the third movable body is the movable portions 1010a to 1010j of the front decorative portion 1010, a drive source for moving the lens movable body 1002a in the front and rear direction The motor 1020 is in common with a drive source for moving the units 1010 a to 1010 j in the outer circumferential direction.

  The first position may or may not be the initial position of the first movable body.

  When shifting from the first state to the second state, the first movable body may move in the front-rear direction, or the second movable body may move in the front-rear direction. Also, both the first movable body and the second movable body may move in the front-rear direction.

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be moved in different directions, and may overlap in the front-rear direction at the delegation location, for example, the front central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, even if the first movable body repeats the reciprocating motion between the first position and the third position, and the second movable body repeats the reciprocating motion between the second position and the fourth position. The first movable body and the second movable body may be in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction.

  The first movable body positioned at the initial position and the second movable body positioned at the initial position may not overlap in the front-rear direction (see, for example, FIG. 281A).

  At least one of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body may not be provided with the driving means, and may be movable by the operation of the player. For example, it is possible to move the movable body having the visible area provided in the frame (for example, the front frame door 106) to the third position or the fifth position and visually recognize the second movable body located rearward through the visible area It is good also as composition.

  The movable body may be provided not only on the game board but also on the frame side (for example, the front door 106 side). For example, a button (so-called glass button) that causes the glass to project forward and become a button function can be included as the movable body. As the glass button, the first movable body, the second movable body, or the third movable body may be the operating means.

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be operable in the front-rear direction without overlapping each other in the front-rear direction, or may be operable in the front-rear direction when overlapping each other in the front-rear direction May be

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be operable in the front-rear direction only when they do not overlap each other in the front-rear direction, or may be operated only in the front-rear direction when they overlap each other. It may be

  When transitioning from the first state to the second state, the second movable body can perform another operation (for example, a deformation operation) other than the movement operation from the initial position.

  The viewable area may not be a complete open area. For example, as shown in FIG. 281, the outer peripheral portion of the movable body 1700 may be a visible area. In the movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 281, the outer shell of the movable body 1700 is a cover body formed of an elliptical transparent resin, and the gap between the outer shell shape and the pattern 1704 of the cloud inside is a visual recognition area Although it is referred to as 1706 and 1708, even if there is no outer shape, it can be included as a visible area. For example, the gap of the cloud pattern 1704 may be set as the visual recognition area. That is, any gap of the movable body may be set as the visible area. The viewing area may be visible if the rear is visible.

  The first movable body and the second movable body may be an integral movable body. For example, when the first movable body is integrally formed with the second movable body and the first movable body moves from the first position to the third position, the drive source of the second movable body , And may be provided with another drive source for moving the first movable body in the front-rear direction after the first state is reached.

  When the first movable body and the second movable body are an integral movable body, the number of driving means for operating the first movable body and the second movable body may be one. For example, the first movable body may operate by being linked to the operation of the second movable body by a drive mechanism (for example, a link mechanism).

  Note that the gaming machines described in (G1) to (G12), the gaming machines described in (H1) to (H10), the gaming machines described in (I1) to (I11), and FIGS. 237 to 281 The pachinko machine 100 shown in can be combined as appropriate.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix g1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies other than the first movable body is a second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area capable of visualizing the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a first state,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a second state,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state,
The movable body of at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is a movable body including display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g1,
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a third position,
The first state is a state in which the second movable body is located at a fourth position,
The second state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a fifth position,
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from a first position to the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position,
The second movable body is a movable body movable from a second position to the fourth position,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g2,
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least a part of which overlaps with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible through the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g4)
It is a game console described in Appendix g2 or g3.
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens,
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that is made visible
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices g2 to g4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is partially deformable when moving from the third position to the fifth position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g2 to g5, wherein
It has decorative symbol display means,
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means.
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g2 to g6, wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g7, wherein
The second movable body is a movable body including the display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying different displays in the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g7, wherein
The first movable body is a movable body including the display means,
The display means is means capable of transmitting through the rear side,
The display means is a means in which at least a part of a display area is the viewing area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g9, wherein
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The second movable body is a movable body that can move in the vertical direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g10,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g10,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies other than the first movable body is a second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area capable of visualizing the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a first state,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a second state,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h2)
It is a game stand described in appendix h1,
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a third position,
The first state is a state in which the second movable body is located at a fourth position,
The second state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a fifth position,
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from a first position to the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position,
The second movable body is a movable body movable from a second position to the fourth position,
The second movable body located at the second position does not overlap in the front-rear direction with the first movable body located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h3)
It is a game stand described in appendix h2,
It has decorative symbol display means,
The first position is a position on the first side of the decorative symbol display means,
The second position is a position on the second side of the decorative symbol display means,
The side of the second side is different from the side of the first side,
The third position is a position at which at least a part of the decorative symbol display means and the first movable body overlap in the front-rear direction,
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the decorative symbol display means and the second movable body overlap in the front-rear direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h4)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note h2 or h3.
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens,
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that is made visible
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h2 to h4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is partially deformable when moving from the third position to the fifth position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h6)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h2 to h5,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
The second movable body is a movable body including display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The second movable body is a movable body movable in the left and right direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body,
The second movable body is a movable body different from the first movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body provided on one of the first movable body and the second movable body.
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area capable of visualizing the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a first state,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a second state,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The second state is a state in which at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved in the front-rear direction from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i2)
It is a game stand described in appendix i1,
The first state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a third position,
The first state is a state in which the second movable body is located at a fourth position,
The second state is a state in which the first movable body is located at a fifth position,
The fifth position is a position that is in front of or behind the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from a first position to the third position,
The first movable body is a movable body movable from the third position to the fifth position,
The second movable body is a movable body movable from a second position to the fourth position,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i3)
It is a game stand described in appendix i2,
The second movable body located at the second position is a movable body at least a part of which overlaps with the first movable body located at the first position in the front-rear direction,
At least a portion of the second movable body located at the second position is visible through the viewing area of the first movable body located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i4)
It is a game console described in the supplementary note i2 or i3,
The visual recognition area is an area including a lens,
The second movable body has different sizes depending on the visual recognition area depending on whether the first movable body is located at the third position and the movable body is located at the fifth position. It is a movable body that is made visible
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i2 to i4,
The first movable body is a movable body that is partially deformable when moving from the third position to the fifth position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i6)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i2 to i5,
It has decorative symbol display means,
The third position is a position where at least a part of the first movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means.
The fourth position is a position where at least a part of the second movable body is in front of the decorative symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i2 to i6,
The first movable body is a movable body movable by a first drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body movable by a second drive unit,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the second position when the first movable body is located at the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body which may not be located at the fourth position when the first movable body is located at the third position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i7, wherein
The third movable body is a movable body operable in at least one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i8,
The third movable body is a movable body provided to the second movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body visible through the visual recognition area in at least one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i9,
The third movable body is a movable body provided to the first movable body,
The third movable body is a movable body operable so as not to overlap with the viewing area in the front-rear direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note i11)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i10,
The first movable body is a movable body movable in the vertical direction,
The second movable body is a movable body that can move in the vertical direction.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i12)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of movable bodies,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body,
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided integrally with the second movable body,
The first movable body is a movable body provided with a visual recognition area capable of visualizing the rear,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a first state,
The first movable body and the second movable body can be in a second state,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body overlaps the first movable body in the front-rear direction,
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The first state is a state in which the first movable body and the second movable body are moved from the first position to the second position by the operation of the second movable body,
The second position is a position where at least a portion of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap in the front-rear direction with the display means,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the second movable body can be viewed through the viewing area,
The second state is a state in which the first movable body moves in the front-rear direction from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix i14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i12, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of the light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  The items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. FIG. 282 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 282 includes a main body 2001, and a front door 2002 attached to the front of the main body 2001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 2001. Three reels (left reel 2010, middle reel 2011, right reel 2012) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored inside the center of the main body 2001, and can be rotated inside the slot machine 2000 It is done. These reels 2010-2012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 2000, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on a strip at regular intervals, and the strip is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to constitute each reel 2010 to 2012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 2010-2012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 2013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. And by rotating each reel 2010-2012, the combination of the symbol which can be seen from a player will be fluctuate | varied. That is, each of the reels 2010-2012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 2000, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 2000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 2010-2012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 2013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 2000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 2010 to 212. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 2020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 2014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 2014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 2014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, upper horizontal pay line, lower horizontal pay line, right Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 2023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 2024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 2022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. In the slot machine 2000, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 2030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 2031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 2032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 2032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal input lamp 2029 lights a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 2021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 2041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 2030 to 2032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 2041. It is. The stored sheet number indicator 2025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. The game information display 2026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 2027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 2025, the game information display 2026, and the number-of-payouts display 2027 are constituted by seven segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 2035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 2010-2012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 2041 or the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are operated to operate the start lever 2035, the reels 2010 to 1210 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 2035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 2036 is provided with stop buttons 2037 to 2039. The stop buttons 2037 to 2039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 2010 to 2012 which have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 2035, and are associated with the respective reels 2010 to 2012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation as a first stop operation, the next stop operation as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 2037 to 2039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 2033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 2034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 2055. The door key hole 2040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 2002 of the slot machine 2000 is inserted. The medal payout port 2055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  A chance button 2100 is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 2032. The chance button 2100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 2010 to 2012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 2057. Further, the chance button 2100 can take a plurality of states (for example, a light emitting state, a rotating state, a vibrating state or a combination thereof) similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment. It may be changeable during the period.

  The information display button unit 2050 is provided with an information display button 2046. The information display button 2046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The configuration and operation of the information display button 2046 will be described later.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 2036, a title panel 2062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 2064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 2062. At the lower part of the title panel 2062, a medal payout port 2055 and a medal receiver 2061 are provided.

  The sound hole 2081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 2000 to the outside. Side lamps 2044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 2002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 2060 is disposed on the top of the front door 2002, and a sound hole 2043 is provided on the top of the rendering device 2060. The effect device 2060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2063 including two right shutters 2063 a and a left shutter 2063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 2063. And the effect image display device), and when the right shutter 2063a and the left shutter 2063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 2057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  FIG. 283 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 2046, and FIG. 283 (b) is a top view of the information display button 2046. As shown in FIG. 283, the information display button 2046 has a plurality of buttons on the substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 2050. That is, the information display button 2046 is a generic name of a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 2050, and more specifically, the determination (call) button 2046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 2050 Recall) An upper selection button 2046U, a lower selection button 2046D, a left selection button 2046L and a right selection button 2046R provided separately on the left side of the button 2046O, and a cancel provided separately on the right of the determination (call) button 2046O And a button 2046C.

  The present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

Claims (4)

The first movable body,
The second movable body,
First detection means,
A game console equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body that can be positioned at a first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of being positioned at a second position,
The first position is an initial position of the first movable body,
The second position is an initial position of the second movable body,
The first detection means is a means to be in a first detection state when the first movable body is positioned at the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation,
The first operation is an operation including an operation of returning the first movable body to the first position,
The first operation is an operation that does not include an operation of moving the first movable body away from the first position,
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation,
The third operation is a series of operations from when the first movable body starts moving away from the first position to when it returns to the first position,
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation,
The second operation is a series of operations from when the second movable body starts moving away from the second position to when it returns to the second position,
At the start of the special symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as. "First timing") if it is different from the detection state to the detection state of the detection state of the first said first detecting means, the second after the according to one of the movable member the first operation is performed, said by the first movable member third operation is not performed, the second operation by the second movable member is performed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
The second timing is the non-start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the timing of the door opening,
A game stand characterized by It is a game board according to claim 1 or claim 2,
When the power is turned on, the second operation by the second movable body is executable,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3 , which is:
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

Images